Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Map 3D 2011
User's Guide
April 2010
2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale,
Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT,
Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya,
Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow
Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open
Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials,
RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 McInnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The AutoCAD Map 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Map Files and Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Map Files and Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 11
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . 12
Create and Edit Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Search and Filter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
View and Edit Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Use Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Organize Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Style Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Theme and Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Manage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Share and Publish Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Customize Your Working Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API . . . . . . . . . 51
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Watching Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
iii
Watching the Welcome Screen Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Navigating the User's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Getting Help with AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Participating in Autodesk Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Printing This Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sample Real-World Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Templates for Maps and Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response . . . . 69
Symbols for General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements . . . . . . . . 71
Geospatial Data Available for Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tutorial Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
AutoCAD Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
User's Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 2 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Overview of Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Customizing Your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Creating New Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting Up Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setting Up for Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Assigning Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Attaching Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting Up a Query Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Setting Up Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Setting Up Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using Data from Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Overview of Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting Task Pane Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Setting Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setting Multi-user Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
iv | Contents
Setting Coordinate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Coordinate Tracker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting Data View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Setting InfoCenter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions . . . . . . . 242
Setting Query Options (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Using Associative Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Saving Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Setting Raster Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Customizing and Automating Import and Export . . . . . . . . 260
Setting Up and Running Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Overview of Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Running Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Editing or Creating Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Changing the Workflow Designer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 3 Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Overview of Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Before You Bring In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Creating a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Organizing Layers in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Bringing in GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map . . . . . . . . 309
Changing Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bringing In Features from Oracle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Bringing In Features from SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Bringing In Features from SQL Server Spatial . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Bringing In Features From SQLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Bringing In Features from MySQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Bringing In Features from SHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Bringing In Features from SDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Bringing in Features from PostgreSQL/PostGIS . . . . . . . . . . 340
Accessing Data from ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Bringing In Features from WFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Repairing Broken Feature Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . 351
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers . . . . . . . 355
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Contents | v
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data . . . . . . 363
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology . . . . . . . . . 367
Combining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Bringing in Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Bringing in LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Bringing in ASCII Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Bringing in LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Bringing in Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects . . . . . . 377
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Supported Import Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Specifying an Area to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Assigning an Object Class During Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import . . . . . . . 423
Importing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Specifying How to Import Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Importing Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating Centroids for Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database . . . . . . 433
Displaying Attribute Data as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Adding 2D Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) . . . . . . . . 445
Making an Image Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Specifying Image Insertion Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Using Other Raster Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Joining Data to GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Overview of Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Creating a Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Modifying or Removing Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Editing Joined Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Using Joins with Calculated Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Sharing Joined Data with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) . . . . . . . 521
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . 522
Creating a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Opening a Linked Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . . . 528
vi | Contents
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . 530
Converting Object Data to Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Editing Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Editing a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Using Open Source FDO Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Chapter 4 Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Overview of Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas . . . . . . 551
Overview of Geospatial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Working with FDO Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Working with Oracle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Working with SQL Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Working with SQLite Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Working with MySQL Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Working with SDF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Working with SHP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Working with PostgreSQL/PostGIS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Working with ODBC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Working with WFS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Overview of Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Setting Up Database Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Creating a Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Creating FDO-Enabled SQL Server Spatial Data Stores . . . . . . 590
Deleting a Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Overview of Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Creating a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema . . . . . . . . . . 603
Importing and Exporting a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Viewing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Editing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Deleting Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Undoing Schema Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Overview of Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types . . . . . . 623
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Migrating DWG Data to GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Contents | vii
Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Overview of Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Controlling the Display of Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Overview of the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Controlling Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Setting Map Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Creating Multiple Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Overview of Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Defining Scale Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Styling Point Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Styling Line Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Styling Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Labeling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Styling a Drawing Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Combining Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Modifying a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Saving a Display Style in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Referencing a Library Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Overview of Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Viewing Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Styling Point Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Overview of Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Overview of Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Creating New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Checking In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Checking Out Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Canceling Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Updating Edits Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Managing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
viii | Contents
Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Editing Data in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Cleaning Up Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Using Map Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Working with Polygon Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Adding and Deleting Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Using Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Working with Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Overview of Working with Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Working with Survey Data Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Working with Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Working with Point Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Working with Survey Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Creating Surfaces From Survey Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Working With Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of Point Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Overview of Point Cloud Files and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
Managing LiDAR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
Using LiDAR Data to Create a Point Cloud Data Store . . . . . 1019
Creating Surfaces From Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Filtering Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Entering Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands . . . . . . . . . 1027
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 1034
Using Bearings from Two Points to Specify a Point . . . . . . . 1036
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . 1037
Using Distances from Two Points to Specify a Point . . . . . . . 1040
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 1042
Using Distance and Offset from a Line to Specify a Point . . . . 1044
Creating an Inverse Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Working with Attribute Data and Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data . . . . 1047
Entering and Editing Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Overview of Digitizing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Overview of Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize . . . . . . . . . 1084
Chapter 7 Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Contents | ix
Overview of Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Adding Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Adding Labels to Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Annotating Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Overview of Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Attaching Annotation to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Refreshing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Updating Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Deleting Annotation from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Working with Text Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Creating Text Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Styling a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Adding Text to a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Editing an Instance on a Text Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Chapter 8 Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Overview of Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Getting Information About Features and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
Getting Information about Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Getting Information About Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . 1143
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Overview of Measuring and Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Measuring Geodetic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152
Measuring Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
Overview of Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Theming Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
Theming Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
Viewing Surfaces in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect . . . . 1202
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
Finding and Selecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Finding and Selecting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Analyzing Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
x | Contents
Buffering Features in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
Overlaying Two Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
Performing a Shortest Path Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Performing a Best Route Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Performing a Flood Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Overlaying Two Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Dissolving a Composite Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Buffering a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Querying a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Saving a Temporary Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Overview of Publishing and Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Overview of Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Adding a Reference Grid to a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Publishing a Map to a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Publishing to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
Publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Publishing to a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Using eTransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Publishing to MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
Publishing Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Overview of Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Supported Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Exporting to ESRI ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Exporting to ESRI SHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) . . . . . . . 1429
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Exporting To MapInfo TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 . . . 1435
Exporting to Multiple Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Exporting To Shape Multiclass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Exporting To SQLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language) . . . . . . . . . . 1449
Exporting Point Cloud Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties . . . . 1452
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
Contents | xi
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology . . . . . . . . . . 1457
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Exporting Maps to DWG Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again . . . 1465
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer . . . . . . . . . . 1469
Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
Exporting from the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
Printing from the Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
Chapter 10 Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Overview of Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Creating and Viewing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Working with Metadata Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
Working with Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
Overview of Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
Using Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
Previewing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
Setting a Default Metadata Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
Deactivating Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
Exporting Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
Removing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Overview of Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
Updating Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
Copying and Pasting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor . . . . . . 1504
Working with Compound Metadata Elements . . . . . . . . . . 1505
Using the Record Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
Auditing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Overview of Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Importing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Exporting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
Publishing and Printing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
Chapter 11 Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
xii | Contents
Mapping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Discontinued Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Improving Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
String-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Equality and Conditional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Symbol-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Conversion Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Dot Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Object Data Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Block Attribute Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
SQL Variables and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Object Classification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
EED Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
Using Color in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . 1553
Chapter 13 Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Using the Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Create Buffer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Buffer Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Generate Contour dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Hillshade Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
Overlay Analysis dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Delete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Refresh dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Annotation Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
Annotation Update dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571
Define Annotation Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
Edit Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Contents | xiii
Insert Annotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
New Annotation Template Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Publish to MapGuide dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
Define New Object Data Field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
Cleanup Methods Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
Error Markers Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
Select Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
Drawing Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Select Objects Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
MAPDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1597
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . 1599
Coordinate Tracker Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Track Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Create Reference System Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Create Data Store dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Edit Spatial Contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Feature Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Feature Source Connection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Manage Layer Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Save Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
Select Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
User Credentials dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
View/Create Query Statement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610
Chapter 20 Data Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
Data Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1613
xiv | Contents
Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
Data to Attach dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
Digitize Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Link Template Data Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) . . . . . . . . . . 1621
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command) . . . . . . . . 1621
Alter Block Insertion dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Alter Line Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
Alter Linetype dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
Alter Lineweight dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Alter Plotstyle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Copy Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624
Define Hatch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
Edit Text Instance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
Import Old Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
New Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
Range of Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
Select Display Element dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
Source Drawing Scope dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Style Band dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
Style Label dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
Style Line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
Style Point dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
Style Polygon dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
Style Text Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Thematic Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
MAPCOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
MAPFEATUREMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1651
MAPFEATURESPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Contents | xv
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
MAPPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MAPPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MAPPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1666
COGO Input dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
Split and Merge Rules dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
Trim Objects At Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Associate Database Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Column dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676
Column Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
Configure Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Connect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1680
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) . . . . . . . . . . . 1682
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) . . . . . . . . . . 1683
Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Disconnect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Header/Footer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
Link Template Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Select Database Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Select Existing Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689
Select Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Select Link Templates dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Select Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Sort dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692
Table Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693
Table Filter History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
Table Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
Zoom Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697
Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Attribute Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Block Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Conflict Resolution dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Coordinate System Translation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
xvi | Contents
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704
Export to LandXML dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
Import ASCII Points dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
LandXML Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
Layer Mapping dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
Link Template to Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . 1720
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . 1721
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . 1722
Map Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1723
Map Export Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
New Property Data Type dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1726
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
Property Value Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
Select Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
Map Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
Object Data Table dialog box (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1732
Point Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
Design File Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
Design File Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744
Create Data Store Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
Manage Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748
Resolve Feature Conflicts dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750
Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
Metadata Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
Metadata Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756
Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756
Import Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Export Metadata dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Create Metadata Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Compound Element Metadata Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Contents | xvii
Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) . . . . 1779
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command) . . . 1780
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1781
Classified Property List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Classify dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782
Classify Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Color Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783
Define Object Classification dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785
Layer Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
Linetype Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
New Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
New Property dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1791
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792
Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Attach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1794
Edit Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795
Rename Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797
Select Link Template Key dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797
Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
MAPUSEMPOLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824
Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1829
Map Book Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1830
Tile Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
Map Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1832
Plot Map Set dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833
xviii | Contents
Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Alternate Font dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Change Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
Data Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
Define New Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838
Define Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838
Define Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1846
Hatch Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847
Load Internal Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848
Location Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849
New Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
Output Report Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
Property Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855
Query Library Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858
Rename Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860
Rename Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860
Run Library Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861
Save Current Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1862
Set Property Alterations dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863
SQL Condition History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866
SQL Link Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866
Type SQL Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870
Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
Image Correlation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
Image Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Image Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875
Image Management Layout dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Image Select dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Insert Image dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
Raster Extension Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879
Transparency Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) . . . . . . 1885
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) . . . . . . . . 1886
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) . . . . . . . . 1887
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887
Who Has It Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889
Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891
New Data Store dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891
Contents | xix
Project Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
Survey Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
Point Group Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Field Note Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Create Surface dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895
Source Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Point Cloud Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898
Filter Point Cloud dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Grid Parameters dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
Point Cloud Style dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902
Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command) . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPEDITSETAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
MAPWSFOCUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
MAPWSREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1917
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918
Drawing Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922
Drawing Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1923
Drawing Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1926
Drive Alias Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928
Feature Editing Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929
Generate Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931
Index Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931
Remove Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933
Select Alias dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1933
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934
User Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1934
User Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1936
User Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937
Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . 1940
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1941
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1942
xx | Contents
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) . . . . 1943
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . 1944
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1945
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1947
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . 1948
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . 1948
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . 1949
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . 1949
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT . . . . . . 1951
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1951
Centroid Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952
Create Closed Polylines dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1953
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . 1955
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1956
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1957
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1959
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box . . . . . 1960
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . 1961
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box . . . . . . . . 1962
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1964
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1965
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box . . . . . . . 1967
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1969
Create Topology Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971
Delete Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972
Edit Direction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973
Edit Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1973
Link Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1975
Load Topology Conflict dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976
Load Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1976
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1978
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box . . . . . . 1978
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1981
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box . . . . . . . . 1983
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) . . . . . 1985
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987
Contents | xxi
Rename Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1988
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . . . 1990
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1992
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . 1994
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box . . . . . . . . 1999
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . 2003
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box . . . . . . . 2004
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box . . . . . . 2006
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box . . . 2007
Topology Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Topology Query Result dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2010
Topology Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011
Topology Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011
Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013
Quick View Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014
Define Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2015
Define Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017
Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019
Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019
Chapter 40 Workflow Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
MAPWORKFLOWRUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021
Workflow Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2022
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2025
Add Feature Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2028
Add Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2029
Add Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
Change Feature Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
Change Feature Layer Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
Change Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033
Connect To Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034
Create Buffer Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2036
Display Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2037
Highlight Features/Remove Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038
xxii | Contents
List Current Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039
List Feature Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039
List Feature Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
Load Layer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
Perform Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041
Remove Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2043
Remove Feature Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044
Remove Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044
Remove Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045
Rename Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045
Run AutoCAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2046
Run Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2047
Save Layer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2048
Select Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049
Switch Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2050
Zoom To Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2050
Chapter 41 Programming Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2081
Contents | xxiii
xxiv
Getting Started Guide
This section provides the following:
An introduction to the main concepts and features of AutoCAD Map 3D
A description of resources for learning more about the program
An overview of the available sample data and templates
For a tutorial that provides a tour of the application and leads you through the basic steps of
creating a map, see Introducing AutoCAD Map 3D 2011.
For a general overview of working with geospatial data, see Best Practices for Managing Geospatial
Data.
Overview of AutoCAD Map 3D Concepts
AutoCAD Map 3D is the leading engineering solution for creating and managing
spatial data. AutoCAD Map 3D bridges the gap between Computer Aided Design
(CAD) and Geographic Information Systems (GIS). AutoCAD Map 3D provides
direct access to the leading data formats used in design and GIS. Use AutoCAD
software and is
enhanced with a suite of geospatial tools. It has all the features and
functionality of AutoCAD, which is automatically installed with AutoCAD
Map 3D.
10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems
Work with more than 4,000 real-world coordinate systems or define your own
custom coordinate system. Use tools such as transform, rubber sheeting, and
track coordinates to georeference your AutoCAD design data accurately.
Coordinate systems determine how your map is projected in two dimensions.
Assign a coordinate system to the drawing to locate it in
real space.
Create and Assign Geographic Coordinate Systems | 11
You can enter or select the appropriate coordinate system
for the map.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to set a map to the coordinate system of
the data.
Procedures
To assign coordinate systems (page ?)
Tutorial
Exercise 1: Create a map
Workflow
Work with Coordinate Systems
GIS Skills
Reproject incoming data to a new coordinate system.
Related topics
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Combine Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects
AutoCAD Map 3D software integrates computer-aided design (CAD) and
geographic information system (GIS) data. After working with the data, you
12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
can maintain it in a DWG
Design
Review software. No experience with AutoCAD Map 3D is required.
Style Data | 35
Style raster surfaces to show
elevation.
Styling Point Cloud Data
Style point cloud (page 2071) data by classification, elevation, LiDAR intensity,
and RGB values.
Style point clouds by classification
36 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Tell me more
Video
Procedure
To apply styles to points (page 646)
To apply styles to areas (page 650)
To apply styles to lines (page 649)
To style point data by classificationIn the Display Manager,
right-click the point cloud layer or gr... (page 677)
Tutorial
Lesson 2: Style Map Features
Workflow
Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skills
Hide and show features as you zoom in and out.
Replace points in the map with symbols.
Set transparency for parcels or other features.
Related topics
Styling Features (page 639)
Styling Drawing Layers (page 652)
Creating Themes (page 1162)
Overview of Styling Raster Images (page 672)
Styling Point Clouds (page 675)
Theme and Analyze Data
Answer questions about your data and make decisions.
Sort, filter, and edit information about map items in a tabular format.
Temporarily join data from external data stores to features in your map
and use that data to theme the features.
Theme and Analyze Data | 37
Locate specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance
between points.
Visually communicate relative values and scale with themed displays.
Create contour maps to help you analyze 3D terrain.
Use raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect, drape
map data over surfaces and view the data in 3D, and more.
Create buffer zones based on feature properties and select objects based
on their proximity to a buffer. Save the buffer as its own feature class, for
future reuse.
Overlay two geospatial layers to compare their data. Save the resulting data
as a separate layer, which you can join to attribute data or theme.
38 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Theme Data
Use color themes to show the elevation of terrain or illustrate the population
density of counties.
The colors give the viewer an immediate
sense of the population distribution in
California
Create themes by varying the style based
on an attribute of the feature; for example,
change the color of parcels based on their
size.
Theme and Analyze Data | 39
Analyze Surfaces
Create contour maps and analyze geospa-
tial data by exaggerating elevations or
looking at maps in different light condi-
tions.
Create Buffers
Use buffers to analyze features by proximity.
40 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The buffer in this map defines an area within 1000 feet of the river.
You can use the buffer to see which parcels lie within the flood zone.
Overlay Two Feature Layers
Use overlays to compare two feature classes or layers.
Theme and Analyze Data | 41
This map overlays two layers (a flood zone and an enterprise zone). You can use the
overlay to see where the two intersect. That area becomes a new layer, which you can
style and save out to a file and use as a separate data store.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation.
Show me how to theme a parcels layer.
Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel.
Show me how to join attribute data to features.
Procedures
To get information about features and objects (page 1125)
To find, filter, and query data (page 1206)
To measure and track coordinates (page 1147)
To create themes (page 1163)
To analyze raster-based surfaces (page 1186)
To create a buffer (page 1308)
To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Analyzing Data
Workflow
Analyze Data
Analyze Data with Overlays
42 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
GIS Skills
Join attribute data to features.
Color a surface by elevation and adjust hill shading.
Change the elevation ranges for a surface.
Analyze the slope and aspect of a site.
Select features by location using a buffer.
Related topics
Getting Information about Features (page 1125)
Getting Information About Drawing Objects (page 1143)
Joining Data to GIS Features (page 507)
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates (page 1147)
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines (page 1189)
Creating Themes (page 1162)
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306)
Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309)
Manage Data
AutoCAD Map 3D acts as a hub for managing large amounts of spatial data.
Use Schema Editor to create new schemas.
Add and delete features and properties in existing schemas.
Use Data Connect to create a data store from within AutoCAD Map 3D.
Export DWG data to Oracle format, ESRI ArcSDE format (page 1461), or
Autodesk SDF (page 44).
Export your entire map to DWG format.
Use Bulk Copy to copy data from one data store to another.
Manage Data | 43
Use Bulk Copy to convert data from
one geospatial format to another.
The Spatial Data File (SDF)
The spatial data file (SDF) format lets you store geometry and attribute
information in a file-based geospatial format.
SDF can hold more information and has faster performance than DWG. SDF
supports rich geometry, multiple tables, and spatial indexing.
44 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The circle represents an SDF file with a single
schema that defines three feature classes: valves,
pipes, and hydrants.
Use Data Connect to connect directly to an SDF file. Any edits you make
are made to the SDF file.
If you import data from SDF, the imported data becomes drawing objects
in your map and the live connection to the SDF file is broken. Importing
is one way to convert the data from SDF to DWG.
You can copy data to SDF format from other geospatial formats, and from
SDF to those formats, using Bulk Copy.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to create an SDF file and import a
schema.
Show me how to copy data from one data store to an-
other.
Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file.
Show me how to limit what can be entered in a field.
Procedure
To create a data store for a file-based data provider
(page 589)
Manage Data | 45
To create a schema (page 598)
Other ways to move data into SDF format (page 1417)
To copy data from one feature source to another
(page 621)
To import data from other formats (page 381)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Managing Data From Different Sources
Workflow
Manage Data
GIS Skill
Create a GIS data store (SDF) to be populated from
various sources
Bulk copy data from a SHP file to an SDF file
Edit a schema (SDF)
Limit what can be entered in a field
Related topics
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and
Schemas (page 551)
Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page
387)
Working with Schemas (page 593)
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page
1461)
Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337)
Migrating Data (page 615)
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects (page 378)
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Share and Publish Data
Distribute your geospatial data, maps, and designs in various ways.
46 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Share Data
AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easy to share data, both within and outside your
organization.
When you edit data in the original source,
your changes are immediately visible to
others in your organization.
Send Maps to the Field
The original map in AutoCAD Map 3D is at the top. On the lower left, the map appears
in Autodesk MapGuide Studio. On the right, the map is displayed in a web browser.
Plot/print single-page or multi-page maps to paper or to a file.
Share and Publish Data | 47
Use map books to divide a large map into tiles, which are rendered on
separate pages. You can include a legend, title, and other information on
each page.
You can produce maps with insets using map books.
Publish maps to the internet using Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise
software.
All layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels, queries, filters, and styles
(including point, line, raster, and other styles) in your map are published.
If you set up styles for different zoom levels, the appearance of the map
changes as the end-user zooms in our out in a web browser. Zooming
changes the appearance based on the styling rules you established in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Publish your map as a single HTML page. The result is a snapshot of the
map that anyone can view in a web browser.
Save maps in Autodesk DWF format to use with Autodesk Design Review
(a free, downloadable viewer). Distribute or post the results on the web or
on an intranet. You can create map books in DWF format.
If you assigned a coordinate system to all the maps in your DWF file, the
publishing operation automatically converts the coordinate information
to latitude/longitude coordinates. Autodesk Design Review 2008 can
automatically navigate to a specific location when you enter coordinates.
It displays coordinates of any location in the map when you move your
mouse over that location.
Export to another format, such as DGN or SHP.
Create comma-separated reports as text files, listing information about
objects in attached drawing files. You can import the report files into a
spreadsheet, database, or document.
Use eTransmit to package all the files your map uses and send them to
another AutoCAD Map 3D user.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to publish a map to a MapGuide server.
Show me how to create a map book.
Show me how to publish a map book with attributes to a
DWF file.
48 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Procedures
To publish your map (page 1361)
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page
1408)
To print and export attribute data (page 1472)
Tutorials
Lesson 7: Publish Your Map
Workflow
Print and Publish Data
GIS Skills
Publish a completed map to a MapGuide server.
Create a map book with appropriate-scale tiling for a city.
Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map book.
Related topics
Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357)
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data (page 1472)
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) (page 1477)
Customize Your Working Environment
Customize AutoCAD Map 3D
The layout of the ribbon, toolbars, and dockable windows is saved in a
workspace.
You can customize an existing workspace or create a new one. You can save
different workspaces for different tasks, use them to help you streamline
common tasks, or set up best practices for mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps. Set up another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Customize Your Working Environment | 49
Within a session, you can switch between
workspaces.
Customize Your Maps
Customize map settings and optionally save the resulting map as a template.
For each map, you can do the following:
Set the coordinate system
Attach drawing files
Save and organize drawing queries in a library
Define annotation templates
Set up object data
Attach external data and link it to drawing objects
Create and Use Automated Workflows
Automate a task that involves multiple activities with workflows. For each
activity, you can specify input parameters and settings.
You can use the properties of one activity as the input parameter for a later
activity in the workflow. For example, set up an overlay workflow that specifies
the feature classes to compare and the type of overlay to perform.
You can also specify that some settings can be changed at run time. For
example, use the same overlay workflow for any pair of feature classes, selecting
the feature classes when you run the workflow.
See also:
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 81)
Customizing Your Work Environment (page 84)
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
50 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Overview of Setting Options (page 217)
Overview of Workflows (page 275)
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API
Extensibility Using Open Source
With the power of FDO Data Access Technology, you can take advantage of
the open source world. FDO extends data access. Third party and open source
FDO providers support data stores not currently supported by Autodesk. (For
example, there are FDO providers for ESRI Personal Geodatabase and PostGIS).
To make it easier for developers to extend capabilities of FDO, Autodesk
released FDO as an open source project. Check the http://fdo.osgeo.org site. The
open source project is under the Open Source Geospatial Foundation (OSGeo)
http://www.osgeo.org. This initiative enables developers all over the world to
tap into powerful geospatial data access technology.
Robust API
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with robust .NET application programming interfaces
(APIs) that organizations can use to create custom tools and automate common
procedures. AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise software
share a unified geospatial API, as well as unified FDO data access technology.
Use these tools to build custom applications that share business logic and
common code.
Finding Information
Watching Videos
The GIS Skills file contains nearly one hundred videos that show how to use
the features of AutoCAD Map 3D. The tutorial Building a Map also contains
videos for each exercise.
This page lists the GIS Skills videos by category.
Extend Functionality Using Open Source and API | 51
Data Preparation
Data Conversion
Data Access
Show me how to bring multiple image files onto a single layer
Show me how to run a query on a feature class
Data Editing
Show me how to draft a new feature for an existing feature class
Show me how to edit features stored in a database or data store
Show me how to edit features using automatic check-out
Show me how to add a point using distance/distance
Show me how to add a point using bearing/bearing
Show me how to split a parcel feature
Show me how to create new features from existing AutoCAD objects
Show me how to check out features for editing in the field
Show me how to check in features after editing in the field
Show me how to make the Data Table transparent
Show me how automatic zoom works
Show me how automatic scroll works
Show me how to export records for selected features
Data Management
Show me how to create a new SDF file and import a schema
Show me how to copy data from one data store to another
Show me how to append a feature class to an SDF file
Show me how to delete properties in the Schema Editor
Show me how to limit what can be entered in a field
Show me how to join attribute data to features
Show me how to manage joins
52 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Show me how to create a calculated field
Styling and Theming Features
Show me how to make a layer visible only at a certain scale range
Show me how to create a second scale range for a road layer
Show me how to replace points with symbols
Show me how to label features
Show me how to label features with automatic resizing
Show me how to set the number of decimal places for labels
Show me how to create a text layer and add text
Show me how to edit text
Show me how to rotate text
Show me how to make the features on a layer semi-transparent
Show me how to theme a parcels layer
Show me how to manually adjust the ranges of a theme
Show me how to exclude zero values and change colors for the ranges
Show me how to theme based on individual values
Analysis
Show me how to color surfaces based on elevation
Show me how to adjust the settings for hillshading
Show me how to delete elevation ranges and change the color of a range
Show me how to add a new elevation range
Show me how to view and navigate in 3D
Show me how to exaggerate the vertical dimension of a surface
Show me how to drape layers on a surface
Show me how to perform a slope analysis of a surface
Show me how to create a contour layer from a surface
Show me how to create a network topology
Show me how to load a topology
Watching Videos | 53
Show me how to find the shortest path between two points
Show me how to do an overlay analysis using two topologies
Show me how to create an overlay analysis for features
Show me how to create a buffer zone around a parcel
Show me how to use a buffer zone to select parcels
Show me how to create overlapping buffer zones
Show me how to use a location query with multiple buffers
Sharing Data with Others
Show me how to export a layer to SDF
Show me how to import a layer from SDF
Show me how to save a layer to a .layer file
Show me how to drag .layer files into an existing map
Map Layout and Cartography
Show me how to manage layers with draw order and folders
Show me how to include an AutoCAD layer in the Display Manager
Show me how to place a legend in the map and specify its contents
Show me how to edit the table style for the legend
Printing, Plotting, and Publishing
Show me how to create a map book.
Show me how to publish a map book with attributes to a DWF file
Show me how to plot to a PDF file
54 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Using InfoCenter
InfoCenter connects you to Help files and online
resources.
To look up information
1 Type a word or phrase in the InfoCenter field.
2 To add a location (file or document) to search, click the arrow next to
Search (the magnifying glass) and select Add Search Location.
For example, search the Help, the New Features Workshop, and specified
files at one time.
You can also search a single file or location.
3 Click Search.
The results are displayed as links on the InfoCenterSearch Results panel.
Click any link to display the topic, article, or document. To find a
command, click the Find A Command On The Ribbon entry.
You can change some settings for InfoCenter. See Setting InfoCenter
Options (page 242).
To hide InfoCenter
Click the arrow to the left of the InfoCenter field. Click it again to redisplay
InfoCenter.
Subscription Center
With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software,
incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk
technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning.
Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in
countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered).
Using InfoCenter | 55
Subscription resources provide interactive product features over the Internet.
Each time you access subscription resources from Subscription Center in an
Autodesk product, product information (such as the serial number, version,
language, and the subscription contract ID) is sent to Autodesk for verification
that your product is on subscription.
Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent to subscription
resources to monitor how they are being used and how they can be improved.
Autodesk maintains the information provided by or collected from you in
accordance with Autodesk's published privacy policy, which is available at
http://www.autodesk.com/privacy.
To enroll as a subscriber or visit the Subscription Center
Click .
Communication Center
The online Autodesk Communication Center gives you access to the AutoCAD
Map 3D knowledge base and other user groups discussing AutoCAD Map 3D.
To check the Autodesk Communication Center
Click .
Favorites
You can define favorite entries in the InfoCenter results list panel, the
Subscription Center panel, or the Communication Center.
To add a topic to the Favorites list
1 Use InfoCenter, Subscription Center, or Communication Center to display
a list of results.
2 Click the Add To Favorites icon next to the entry to add.
Entries that display a yellow star have been added to the Favorites list.
To view a topic in the Favorites list
Click and select the topic.
56 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
See also:
Setting InfoCenter Options (page 242)
Using the Help (page 57)
Getting Help with AutoCAD (page 58)
Using Other Sources of Information (page 59)
Using the Help
AutoCAD Map 3D Help contains the AutoCAD Help, AutoCAD Map 3D Users
Guide, Reference Guide, Getting Started Guide, and additional information.
To display Help
Click .
Click the question mark to display the Users Guide. Click the down arrow
to select a document to view.
Watching the Welcome Screen Videos
The Welcome screen displays when you start AutoCAD Map 3D. It contains
links that launch videos explaining how to get started with AutoCAD Map
3D. It also has links to further information.
If you turn off the display of the Welcome screen, type welcomescreen at the
command prompt to see it again.
Navigating the User's Guide
The Users Guide contains chapters for each major task area of AutoCAD Map
3D.
The Users Guide displays related information on three tabs:
Concept Conceptual information about performing the task and hints
to help you use the feature.
Procedure Step-by-step instructions to perform the task.
Using the Help | 57
Quick Reference The commands you need for this task, and where to
find them on the menus and toolbars.
Use the tabs in the left pane to find information:
The Contents groups topics by subject. Browse by selecting and
expanding topics. If you use the Index or Search tabs to find a
topic, the Contents tab updates to show you where that topic is.
Contents
Both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD Help topics are listed in the
Contents.
In the alphabetical list of keywords, look up the name of a feature,
command, or operation, or an action you want the program to
perform.
Index
You can look up topics for both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD.
Create your own list of favorite topics. To add a topic to the list,
open the Favorites tab and click Add.
Favorites
Find information using a question phrased in everyday language.
The search ranks resulting topics by relevance.
Search
NOTE Search technology varies by language version of the product.
The Search tab provides either the traditional Microsoft
search
that locates keywords and exact phrases, or a natural-language
search that analyzes phrases or questions.
Using the Tutorials
Try the tutorials to get started or to learn advanced functionality in AutoCAD
Map 3D. Click Help Learning Resources Tutorials.
Getting Help with AutoCAD
AutoCAD Map 3D includes the complete functionality of AutoCAD, including
all the AutoCAD commands and system variables. Help for the two programs
is integrated into a single Help file. For help with AutoCAD commands, search
for the command name in the Help.
58 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
New in This Release
The Readme contains updates about this release of AutoCAD Map 3D,
including late-breaking product news and known software issues. View the
Readme.
New Features Workshop View a series of graphical topics designed to help
you learn about the new features in AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD. Click
Help New Features Workshop.
Using Other Sources of Information
To see the resources available to help you learn AutoCAD Map 3D, see Learning
Resources.
Geospatial Guidelines
Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data Learn the key concepts of
working with geospatial data and the best way to use AutoCAD Map 3D
to achieve your goals.
GIS Skills for Engineers See over 90 animations that help you take your
skills to the next level.
Developer Documentation
Developer Documentation (page 2053) Learn how to use the AutoCAD
Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including ObjectARX,
ObjectARX Managed Wrappers, ActiveX, and AutoLISP. Click Help
Developer Resources AutoCAD Map 3D Developer Help.
FDO Developer Help Extend the functionality of the feature source
providers. See FDO Developers Guide, The Essential FDO, and the API
references for each provider:
FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference
FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference
FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference
FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference
FDO Provider for SHP API Reference
FDO Provider for SDF API Reference
New in This Release | 59
FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference
FDO Provider for Raster API Reference
FDO Provider for WMS API Reference
Specialized AutoCAD Manuals
Some AutoCAD manuals, such Build Your World and Getting Started, are
available on the product CD. For information on printing these manuals,
see Printing This Documentation (page 61).
Online Resources
Product Support Resources Get answers quickly and efficiently through
email or get Product Support phone numbers.
AutoCAD Map 3D Discussion Groups Share product information, ideas,
and solutions with other AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk product
users.
Training Resources Learn about the training resources available for
AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk products.
Developer Center Learn about programming and development tools to
help customize AutoCAD Map 3D or build your own applications.
Subscription Center Access your subscription services including support
and training through the InfoCenter Communication Center. For more
information, see Using InfoCenter (page 55).
Communication Center Receive Autodesk company news and product
announcements, breaking news from Autodesk Product Support, new
article notifications, tips, and more. For more information, see Using
InfoCenter (page 55).
Participating in Autodesk Training
Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key
technical features of your Autodesk software and improve your productivity.
For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/autocadarchitecture-training or contact your local
Autodesk office.
60 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
For information on custom training, authorized Autodesk training centers,
how-to tips, and learning tools (such as Autodesk Courseware), go to Training
Resources.
e-Learning
With Autodesk Subscription, you get the latest releases of Autodesk software,
incremental product enhancements, personalized web support from Autodesk
technical experts, and self-paced e-Learning.
Subscription services are available to subscription members only (available in
countries/regions where Autodesk subscriptions are offered).
For more information about subscription, see Subscription Center (page 55).
Printing This Documentation
You can print the Help and other manuals.
Printing PDF Versions of the Help
Most of the Help, including the AutoCAD Map 3D Users Guide (the help system),
are available in PDF format.
NOTE You must have Adobe
Acrobat Reader
IGN - 2007
Institut Geographique National (IGN)
provides a comprehensive set of sample
data for Haute-de-Seine.
NAVTEQ data
NAVTEQ provides data sets for 3-km x 3-km areas of seven sample cities
from around the world. NAVTEQ data is used in a broad range of
location-based applications, navigation products, and mapping sites. The
sets include vector data, street centerline map data, and much more. Use
the sample data to get an idea of what NAVTEQ can provide and how to
use it to enhance your maps in AutoCAD Map 3D.
DigitalGlobe imagery
DigitalGlobe provides imagery for the seven sample cities. DigitalGlobe is
a provider of high resolution aerial and satellite imagery.
Intermap 3D elevation data
Intermap Technologies provides Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) for the
seven sample cities. Intermap provides high-quality, precise, 3D
digital-elevation data and images.
64 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
DigitalGlobe ImageConnect
ImageConnect is a plug-in you can install on top of AutoCAD Map 3D. It
allows you to bring in georeferenced satellite and aerial photos from the
DigitalGlobe online image server. ImageConnect is a quick, cost-effective
way to add high-resolution imagery to your maps.
Map Book Templates
These templates are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
These map book templates are installed with AutoCAD Map
3D.
Sample Real-World Data | 65
More 3D elevation data
AutoCAD Map 3D sample data includes additional DEMs to experiment
with.
Sample maps
These maps use sample data from NAVTEQ, Intermap Technologies, and
DigitalGlobe. There are also real-world maps from Redding, Grand Forks,
Crater Lake, and more.
Symbols
The sample data includes a copy of the symbol sets, north arrows, and
scale bars that are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
When you download these files to the AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 Sample Data
folder, documentation for their use is also downloaded.
Additional sample data and maps, including Crater Lake, US Geology, and
Grand Forks, North Dakota are installed here:
\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Maps
Templates for Maps and Map Books
Templates allow you to reuse or standardize map settings, layouts, layer
definitions and settings, block definitions, data connections, coordinate system
information, and more.
Instead of manually reproducing the settings and common parts of your maps,
you save them in a template file (.dwt). Then you can use the template as you
create new files.
66 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
When you create a series of maps, templates save time and improve
consistency.
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with two types of templates:
Templates for creating new maps
There are four templates available to choose from: map2d.dwt, map2diso.dwt,
map3d.dwt, map3diso.dwt. The templates settings optimize 2D and 3D
display for metric (ISO) and imperial (ANSI) units, respectively. Click
New Drawing. Select a template from the list.
Templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include map2d.dwt and map3d.dwt.
Templates for creating map books and tiled DWFs
These templates help you create attractive printed map books or tiled DWFs
with a minimal amount of layout work. There are three designs available,
each with numerous paper sizes, both metric (ISO) and imperial (ANSI).
Each design has its own navigation arrows, layout settings, title blocks,
and more.
Templates for Maps and Map Books | 67
Map book templates provided with AutoCAD Map 3D include Elegant,
Classic, and original designs.
You can use both types of templates as-is or adapt them to suit your needs.
Templates are available in \Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local
Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\ AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\R17.2\enu\Templates
If you are an AutoCAD Map 3D subscriber, you can download free
industry-specific toolkits. These toolkits include specialized templates. To
enroll in or visit the Subscription Center, click in the InfoCenter area at
the top right of the application window.
See also:
Lesson 2: Customize a Map Book Template
68 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency
Response
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with sample symbol sets customized for water
networks, gas utilities, electric utilities (North America), and emergency
response planning. You can use the sample symbols as-is or as a basis for
developing your own symbols.
Using symbols can promote standardization and consistency in your
organization, and can also improve communication by using familiar
symbology.
Each set of symbols comes in a separate DWG file. For example, there is Map
- Water.dwg, Map - Electric.dwg, and so on. There are several files for Emergency
Response.
These electric symbols are examples from Map -
Electric.dwg.
These gas symbols are examples from Map - Gas.dwg.
These water symbols are examples from Map -
Water.dwg.
These emergency response symbols are examples from
Map - ER Incident Centers.dwg.
The symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
The symbols are in dynamic block format, making them easy to rotate, resize,
and color. They have block color properties, which optimizes them for use in
DWGs. You can also use them in the Style Editor when styling points.
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response | 69
To set up the symbols for easy drag-and-drop into your maps, you can add
them to a Tool Palette.
Symbols for General Use
AutoCAD Map 3D has sample symbols for general-purpose use, such as points
of interest, transportation, and local government.
Like the industry symbols (page 69), general-purpose symbols are usable as-is,
or as a basis for developing new symbols.
Using symbols can help promote standardization and consistency in your
organization, and can improve communication by using familiar symbology.
The symbols come in two formats:
Dynamic block versions (Map - Points of Interest.DWG) are in dynamic block
format so you can scale and rotate them easily. You can control outline
and fill colors separately in the Style Editor. The symbols are black by
default when viewed in the DWG.
These general-use symbols are examples
from Map - Points of Interest.dwg.
Bitmap versions in .png format lend a more graphical representation to
your points.
These bitmap symbols are examples
from Map - Points of Interest.dwg.
70 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The general-use symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements
Sample north arrows and scale bars (both metric and imperial) are available
as dynamic blocks for you to insert into your maps.
These north arrows are examples from the Symbols
folder.
These scale bars are examples from the Symbols folder.
Because they are in dynamic block format, these symbols are easy to scale,
rotate, and color. Use the scale bar attributes to set the correct scale.
The samples are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample\Symbols.
A modern, easy-to-read legend style is automatically available when you add
a legend to a map.
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements | 71
The legend style on the left appears in your onscreen map.
The legend style on the right appears in the published version.
Geospatial Data Available for Purchase
You can add raster elevation data to 3D maps, vector data, such as land plots
or points of interest, or satellite imagery.
Autodesk partners with leading geospatial data providers to provide a geodata
portal with high-resolution, precision, geospatial data. Get data quickly, easily,
and at lower cost.
Visit the geodata portal at http://www.autodesk.com/geodata.
The following types of data are available on the portal:
Aerial and satellite imagery from DigitalGlobe
3D raster elevation data from Intermap Technologies
Vector data, such as roads and land parcels, from NAVTEQ
Weather data from WeatherBug
72 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
This data is from Intermap Technologies, NAVTEQ, and DigitalGlobe.
Tutorial Sample Files
The tutorials are accessible from the Help menu.
After installation, the tutorial sample files are located in Program Files\AutoCAD
Map 3D 2011\Help\Map 3D Tutorials. The tutorials advise you to copy the
sample files to your My Documents folder so you do not modify the original
files.
AutoCAD Samples
AutoCAD provides sample drawings, sheet sets, blocks, VBA examples, and
more.
After installation, the files are located in C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Sample.
Tutorial Sample Files | 73
74
User's Guide
This section explains AutoCAD Map 3Ds features by introducing concepts, providing
step-by-step procedures, and providing quick reference information.
For information on AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
75
76
Setting Up
Overview of Setting Up
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D and set up each map file you create to
make your work easier and more productive.
The following tables summarize your setup options on a product-wide and
map-wide basis.
To get this result... Use this method... On a product-wide
level...
The system administrator assigns
login names and passwords to
Click Map Setup tab Map panel
User Administration.
Set up user access.
users, and specifies what each
user can do within the product.
See Setting Up Users and Assign-
ing Rights (page 82).
Customize the ribbons, menus,
toolbars, and dockable windows.
See Customizing Your Work En-
vironment (page 84).
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Tools tab Customization panel
User Interface.
Set up your workspace.
Create a new coordinate system
or use a predefined coordinate
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate
System panel Define Global Coordin-
ate System.
Create new coordinate
systems.
system as a basis for creating
your own.
See Defining Coordinate Systems
(page 89).
2
77
To get this result... Use this method... On a product-wide
level...
Define a set of standard objects
for your organization so that new
Set up object classifica-
tion.
1 Select a sample object for the
object class.
drawing objects of that type use
the properties you defined.
See Overview of Setting Up Ob-
ject Classification (page 117).
2 Attach an object definition file.
3 On the Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane, right-click Object
Classes. Click Define Object Class.
Convert paper-based graphical
information into a digital format
Set up for digitizing 1 Configure the digitizer in the
AutoCAD Options dialog box.
using drawing commands to
2 Register the map using the TAB-
LET command.
trace data from the paper map
into a DWG file.
See Setting Up for Digitizing
(page 130) and Overview of Digit-
izing Objects (page 1079).
3 Set digitizing specifications in the
Digitize Setup dialog box.
4 Use the MAPDIGITIZE command
to digitize the objects.
Change settings that affect the
work environment, how the
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Map Setup tab Map pan-
el angle-arrow.
Set default values and set-
tings.
program starts up, whether users
must log in, and settings for your
current drawings, data sources,
and more.
See Setting Options (page 216).
Changes settings related to the
Raster Extension, such as where
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Insert tab Image panel angle-
arrow.
Set options related to im-
ages you added with Ras-
ter Extension. image-related files are stored,
how images display in maps, and
memory usage options. These
options do not affect images you
added with Data Connect.
Setting Raster Image Options
(page 249)
78 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To get this result... Use this method... On a product-wide
level...
Modify the .ini files that specify
import and export settings.
See Customizing the Import and
Export .ini Files (page 264).
Edit the mapexport.ini file using a text
editor such as WordPad.
Customize and automate
import and export opera-
tions.
To get this result... Use this method... On a map-wide basis...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab Co-
ordinate System panel As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag a drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
At the Command prompt,
enter adedrawings.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse drawing queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1 To save the current
query, click Home
tab Data pan-
el Define Query.
2 To run a saved query,
click Create
tab Object Query
panel Run.
Overview of Setting Up | 79
To get this result... Use this method... On a map-wide basis...
Define the information to display in a
drawing object annotation and the layout
Click Annotate tab Map
Annotation panel Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
of that information. Then you can attach
instances of the annotation to drawing
objects in your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to drawing objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab At-
tribute Data panel Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
See also:
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
Setting Options (page 216)
To add a new user (page 83)
To create a new workspace (page 85)
To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options (page 85)
To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace (page 86)
To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
(page 86)
To restore the default colors (page 86)
To show the command line interface for a particular workspace (page 87)
To hide the map status bar (page 87)
To enable Update Edits Automatically by default (page 88)
To disable connection pooling by default (page 88)
To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off (page 88)
To turn other dialog boxes on or off (page 88)
80 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D to make your work easier and more
productive. Your changes affect all future sessions of AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File (page 139)
Setting Options (page 216)
The following table summarizes your customization options.
To get this result... Use this method... To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab Co-
ordinate System panel As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
At the Command prompt,
enter adedrawings.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1 To save the current
query, click Home
tab Data pan-
el Define Query.
2 To run a saved query,
click Create
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D | 81
To get this result... Use this method... To do this...
tab Object Query
panel Run.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Annotate tab Map
Annotation panel Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab At-
tribute Data panel Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights
The system administrator controls who has access to AutoCAD Map 3D by
assigning login names and passwords to users. Also, the system administrator
can specify the privileges or operations available to each user.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the settings for several AutoCAD Map 3D options
with your login name, which means that these option settings are in effect
whenever you log in under that name to that copy of AutoCAD Map 3D on
that machine. After you log in, AutoCAD Map 3D sets up your user
environment, including user privileges and user-specific options, such as Task
Pane options and Data Source options.
See also:
Setting Task Pane Options (page 221)
Setting Data Source Options (page 236)
82 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To add a new user
1 Click Map Setup tab Map panel User Administration.
2 In the User Administration dialog box (page 1934), under User Profile, in
the Login Name box, enter a name for the user.
The login name must be unique. It is not case sensitive. Use any characters
except the following: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >
3 In the Password box, enter a password for the user. Passwords are case
sensitive.
4 Under Privileges, specify the operations available to the user by selecting
one or more of the following:
Superuser User can perform user administration tasks, set system
options, and perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and
the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue,
make sure that you change the default superuser login and password.
Alter Drawing Set User can attach and detach drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings,
but cannot attach and detach them.
Alter Object Class User can define and edit object class definitions.
If this option is not selected, users can only assign object classes and
change the current object classification file.
Edit Drawing User can edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but
cannot save them back to source drawings.
Draw Query User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users
can do Preview and Report mode queries only.
5 Click Add.
6 Click OK.
To edit a user profile, select the name in the User List and modify the settings
you want. Click Update.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights | 83
Quick Reference
MAPUSERADMIN
Performs administrative functions
Setup menu User Administration Menu
MAPUSERADMIN Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing User
Admin
Task Pane
User Administration dialog box Dialog Box
Customizing Your Work Environment
Your work environment that is, the way the ribbon, menus, toolbars, and
dockable windows are laid out is saved in a workspace.
You can customize a workspace to look and function just the way you want,
or create a workspace. You can save different workspaces for different tasks,
use them to help you streamline common tasks, or set up best practices for
mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps, and another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Within a session, you can easily switch between workspaces.
AutoCAD Map 3D includes three predefined workspaces:
Tool-based Ribbon Workspace
Task-based Ribbon Workspace
Map Classic Workspace
You can customize any of these workspaces and easily switch between them.
See also:
Workspaces
To create a new workspace (page 85)
84 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options (page 85)
To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace (page 86)
To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
(page 86)
To restore the default colors (page 86)
To show the command line interface for a particular workspace (page 87)
To hide the map status bar (page 87)
To enable Update Edits Automatically by default (page 88)
To disable connection pooling by default (page 88)
To create a new workspace
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab Customization
panel User Interface.
2 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI FILES, right-click the Workspaces node and select New Workspace,
or right-click an existing workspace and select duplicate.
3 Select the new workspace.
4 Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
5 In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
6 Click Done.
7 Click OK.
To add ribbon, menu, and toolbar options
1 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2 Under Customizations In All CUI Files, expand the item you want to
customize so that you can see all the items underneath it.
For example, expand the Topology menu to see the topology options
underneath.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 85
3 Under Command List, click and drag the tool you want to include to the
item in Customizations In All CUI Files.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click OK.
To add entire ribbon tabs, menus, or toolbars to a workspace
1 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2 Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
3 In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
4 Click Done.
5 Click OK.
To switch between Tool-based, Task-based, and Map Classic workspaces
1 Click the Workspace Switching button in the bottom-right corner of the
application window.
A floating toolbar opens with all workspace options available. You can
either dock this toolbar, leave it floating or close it.
2 In the toolbar, use the drop-down list to select the workspace you want.
Unless you specify otherwise, AutoCAD Map 3D opens with the Tool-based
workspace.
For more information, see Workspaces.
To restore the default colors
1 Click Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click Colors.
3 In the Drawing Window Colors dialog box, select the element you want
to change by clicking the images for the Model tab or Layout tabs.
As you click areas of the images, the selection is displayed in the Window
Element list. You can also change an attribute by selecting it from the
86 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Window Element list. For example, for the Map background, select Model
Tab Background.
4 From the Color list, click Select Color.
5 In the Select Color dialog box, click the Color Books tab, and then select
AutoCAD Map 3D Colors from the Color Book list.
The AutoCAD Map 3D color book displays the default colors used in the
application. You can select a color or use the color book as a reference.
It does do not control the defaults in the application; do not attempt to
modify it.
6 Select a color by clicking a color chip.
For example, click the blue Map Background chip to use the new map
background color (model tab).
7 Click OK.
8 In the Color Options dialog box, click Apply and Close to record the
current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box.
9 In the Options dialog box, click OK.
To show the command line interface for a particular workspace
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab Customization
panel User Interface.
2 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, select a workspace.
3 In the Workspace Contents area, expand Palettes, scroll to the bottom
of the list, and then click Command Line.
4 In the Properties area under Appearance, click Show, and then select Yes
from the drop-down list.
5 Under Workspace Contents, click the Customize Workspace button.
6 Click OK.
To hide the map status bar
1 At the Command prompt, enter mapstatusbar.
2 Enter hide.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 87
To enable Update Edits Automatically by default
1 At the Command prompt, enter mapeditsetautodefault
2 Enter active.
To disable connection pooling by default
1 At the Command prompt, enter mapconnectionpooling.
2 Enter deactive.
To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off
NOTE If you use scripts to automate some AutoCAD Map 3D functions, you may
find it useful to turn off dialog boxes .
1 At the Command prompt, enter filedia.
2 To turn on dialog boxes , enter 1. To turn off dialog boxes , enter 0.
To turn other dialog boxes on or off
1 At the Command prompt, enter cmddia.
2 To turn on dialog boxes , enter 1. To turn off dialog boxes , enter 0.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
OPTIONS
88 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT Command Line
MAPSTATUSBAR
Toggles the Map status bar on and off
MAPSTATUSBAR Command Line
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING
Toggles connection pooling on and off
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING Command Line
Creating New Coordinate Systems
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with an extensive library of coordinate systems. If
no suitable coordinate system exists, you can define a customized coordinate
system.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To define coordinate systems (page 90)
To work with grid data files and datum shifts (page 102)
Defining Coordinate Systems
You can define customized coordinate systems in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 89
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147)
To define coordinate systems
To define a coordinate system (page 92)
To define a datum (page 94)
To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To create a coordinate system category (page 97)
To modify or delete a coordinate system (page 98)
To modify or delete a datum (page 99)
To modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 100)
To edit or delete a coordinate system category (page 101)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems
You can create acompletely new global coordinate system (page 2065) or use a
predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own. You can also
modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot delete
any of the predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
When you define a coordinate system you must specify the following
parameters:
map projection (page 2068) Used to convert points from latitude and
longitude to Cartesian coordinates.
and one of the following:
datum (page 2059) Reference point, line, or surface for mapping.
ellipsoid (page 2062) Geometric surface whose plane sections are all circles
or ellipses.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
90 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Define, delete, or modify using this
method...
For this item...
To define a coordinate system (page 92)
To modify or delete a coordinate system
(page 98)
global coordinate system (page 2065)
To define a datum (page 94)
To modify or delete a datum (page 99)
Datum
To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 100)
Ellipsoid
To create a coordinate system category
(page 97)
To edit or delete a coordinate system cat-
egory (page 101)
Coordinate system category
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Defining a Global Coordinate System
You can define a new global coordinate system (page 2065) based on your own
data or use a predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own.
Depending on the projection you use to define a custom coordinate system,
you must provide certain information. For example, if you use the Transverse
Mercator projection, you must specify a longitude value called the central
meridian.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 91
False Origin
When defining a custom coordinate system, you may want to enter a false
origin, with northing and easting values. For example, if you are using the
Transverse Mercator projection, and the central meridian bisects the mapping
region, half of the X coordinates are negative values. Coordinate system
definitions usually include an offset called the false origin that is added to all
coordinates to make them positive. The X coordinate of this offset is called
the false origin easting. The Y coordinate of this offset is called the false origin
northing.
Scale Reduction Factor
To produce the smallest possible distance between the projection surface and
any point in the region you are mapping, you must specify a scale reduction
factor. This is particularly important when you are mapping large regions. For
the Transverse Mercator projection, you enter this value in the Scale Reduction
field in the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To define a coordinate system
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select a category.
3 Do one of the following:
To create a new coordinate system, click Define.
To create a new coordinate system based on an existing, predefined
coordinate system, select the coordinate system from the Coordinate
Systems In Category list. Click Modify.
4 On the General tab of the Define Coordinate System dialog box, enter a
unique code in the Code box.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
92 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you are creating a new coordinate system based on an existing
coordinate system, you must change the code before you can change any
of the other information.
5 Enter a description.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Coordinate Systems In
Category list of the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box.
6 In the Units box, select the units to use for this coordinate system.
7 Under Coordinate System Type, select one of the following:
To base the coordinate system on a datum (page 2059), select Geodetic.
Click Select to specify the datum.
To base the coordinate system on an ellipsoid (page 2062), select
Non-Geodetic. Click Select to specify the ellipsoid.
8 On the Projection tab, select a projection.
The projection you choose determines how many projection parameters
you must enter and the units you can use.
9 Optionally, under False Origin, enter Northing and Easting values.
10 Under Projection Parameters, enter values for the remaining fields in the
dialog box. Click OK.
These fields vary according to the projection you select.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Defining a New Datum
You can define a new datum based on your own data or use a predefined
datum (page 2059) as a basis for creating your own.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 93
When defining a custom datum, select the conversion technique, either
Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe, or Seven Parameter Transformation. After choosing
the conversion technique, specify the appropriate conversion parameters for
the technique you chose.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95)
To define a datum
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
2 On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
3 In the Datum Manager dialog box, click Define.
4 On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box, enter a code and
description for the datum (page 2059).
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Datums list of the
Datum Manager dialog box.
5 Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid (page 2062) to use for the new
datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
95).
6 On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
7 Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Under Conversion Parameters, under Vector Component Deltas To
WGS-84 In Meters, enter the vector component deltas to WGS-84.
94 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you use the Bursa/Wolfe or Seven Parameter Transformation conversion
method, fill in all four edit boxes under Rotation Angle From WGS-84 In
Arc Seconds.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Defining an Ellipsoid
You can define a new ellipsoid (page 2062) based on your own data or use a
predefined ellipsoid as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom ellipsoid, you must specify the calculation method
and values used to determine the dimensions of the ellipsoid. After choosing
the calculation method, you supply two of the required values, and AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the remaining two values for you.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Defining a New Datum (page 93)
To define an ellipsoid
1 Do one of the following:
On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify
Datum dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 95
Under Coordinate System Type on the General tab of the Define
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Non-Geodetic. Click
Define.
2 In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, click Define.
3 In the Define Ellipsoid dialog box, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid (page 2062).
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Available Ellipsoids list.
4 Under Ellipsoid Dimensions, do the following:
5 Select a calculation method.
6 Enter values for the two parameters that correspond to the calculation
method you chose. AutoCAD Map 3D computes the other two values
based on the ones you enter.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Creating a Coordinate System Category
You can organize your coordinate systems by creating categories and moving
coordinate systems into those categories.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
96 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To create a coordinate system category
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, click New.
4 Type a name in the Category Name box.
5 From the Available Categories list, select a category that contains
coordinate systems to include in the new category.
6 In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select the coordinate systems
to include in the new category.
7 Click Add.
You can select any number of coordinate systems from existing categories
to include in the new category.
8 When you have finished adding coordinate systems, click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 97
Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System
You can modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map
3D.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 96)
To modify or delete a coordinate system
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select the category
that contains the global coordinate system to modify or delete.
3 Select the coordinate system from the Coordinate Systems In Category
list.
4 To modify the coordinate system, click Modify.
To delete the coordinate system, click Remove. Click OK.
5 If you are modifying the coordinate system, in the Modify Global
Coordinate System dialog box, change information as necessary.
To modify a predefined coordinate system, you must change the code
on the General tab before you can change the other coordinate system
properties.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
98 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Datum
You can modify or delete any datum (page 2059) that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined datums supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete a datum that you have defined, you must also modify
or delete any coordinate systems that reference that datum.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete a datum
1 On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
2 In the Datum Manager dialog box, select a datum (page 2059).
3 To modify the datum, click Modify.
To remove the datum, click Remove.
4 If you are modifying the datum, on the General tab of the Define Datum
dialog box, change the code and description for the datum.
To modify a predefined datum, you must change the code on the General
tab before you can change the other datum properties.
5 Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid (page 2062) to use for the datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
95).
6 On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 99
7 Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid
You can modify or delete any ellipsoid (page 2062) that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined ellipsoids supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete an ellipsoid (page 2062) that you have defined, you must
also modify or delete any coordinate systems that reference that ellipsoid.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
To define an ellipsoid (page 95)
To modify or delete an ellipsoid
1 On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify Datum
dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
2 In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, select an ellipsoid (page 2062).
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System. Select Define or Modify.
3 To modify the ellipsoid, click Modify.
To delete the ellipsoid, click Remove.
100 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
4 If you are modifying an ellipsoid, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid.
To modify a predefined ellipsoid, you must change the code before you
can change the other ellipsoid properties.
5 Under Calculation Method, select a calculation method.
6 Enter the appropriate ellipsoid dimension parameters for the calculation
method you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Coordinate System Category
You can modify categories by adding or removing coordinate systems, or
moving coordinate systems from one category to another. You can also delete
categories.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 96)
To edit or delete a coordinate system category
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Define Global
Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 101
3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, select a category.
4 To modify the category, click Edit.
To delete the category, click Remove.
5 If you are modifying the category, do one or more of the following:
To remove coordinate systems from the category, click the coordinate
system names in the list under the Category Name box. Click Remove.
To add coordinate systems to the category, click the coordinate system
names in the list under the Available Categories list. Click Add.
To add coordinate systems from different categories, select the category
name in the Available Categories list.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts
AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid data files to specify datum (page 2059) shift
information and Grid Data Catalog files to determine the order for those files
when converting from one datum to another.
See also:
Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To work with grid data files and datum shifts
To set up a new grid data file (page 105)
To set up a new grid data file for the United States (page 108)
102 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set up a new grid data file for France (page 109)
To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand (page 110)
To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum (page 111)
To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 112)
To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation (page 113)
To modify a coordinate system definition file (page 116)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues
When converting between certain coordinate systems in North America,
France, Australia, and New Zealand, AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid-based data
files called grid data files to obtain datum (page 2059) shift information.
For the United States, France, Australia, and New Zealand geography, the grid
data files are in the public domain and are distributed with AutoCAD Map
3D. The grid data files which cover Canadian geography are not in the public
domain and must be obtained from the proper authorities in Canada.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum (page 2059) to another.
See also:
Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
You can do the following with grid data files
See this topic... To do this...
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files (page 104) Set up a new grid data file
Grid Data Files for the United States (page
105)
Specify a new grid data file for the United
States
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 103
See this topic... To do this...
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zeal-
and (page 109)
Specify a new grid data file for Australia or
New Zealand
Australian Datum Transformation and Co-
ordinate System Changes (page 110)
Use the high accuracy GDA94 datum for
Australia
Datum Shift Issues for North American
Users (page 112)
Specify a grid data version to resolve differ-
ences between source and destination co-
ordinate systems for Canada
Coordinate System Files (page 113) Modify a coordinate system file
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum (page 2059) to another in certain parts of the world, such as North
America, France, Australia, and New Zealand.
If there is an overlapping coverage, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data file
with the smallest grid cell in the region of the conversion. If the grid cell sizes
are the same, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data file that appears first in
the GDC file.
Grid Data Catalog files are ASCII text files with a .gdc extension that are stored,
by default, in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems folder. The base name of
a GDC file is based on the transformation with which it is associated. For
example, the GDC file for the NAD27 to NAD83 transformation is
Nad27toNad83.gdc.
Each line in a GDC file points to a grid data file (also known as a datum shift
data file). GDC files also often include comments that are preceded by a pound
sign (#) and a fallback datum definition that is used when none of the grid
data files provide coverage for a point being converted.
See also:
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
104 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To set up a new grid data file
1 When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2 Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3 Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4 Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for the United States
AutoCAD Map 3D uses North American Datum Conversion (NADCON) grid
data files from the National Geodetic Survey to obtain latitude and longitude
shift information for converting between coordinate systems within the United
States. A pair of grid data files is required for each area or state covered: a .las
file is required for latitude shift values (latitude seconds) and a .los file for
longitude shift values (longitude seconds).
The NADCON files include grid data files for transformations between NAD83
and state readjustments to HARN (High Accuracy Resolution Network) projects.
The .las and .los files are in the public domain and are distributed with
AutoCAD Map 3D. The files are stored in the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Usa\Nadcon.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 105
The following is a list of NADCON grid data files.
Area/State NADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
United States (USA) - lower 48 states including
EEZ
NAD27 to NAD83 conus
Alaska Alaska to NAD83 alaska
Hawaii Old Hawaiian to NAD83 hawaii
Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands Puerto Rico to NAD83 prvi
St Lawrence: off the coast of Alaska St. Lawrence Island to NAD83 stlrnc
St Paul: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of Alaska St. Paul Island to NAD83 stpaul
St George: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of
Alaska
St. George Island to NAD83 stgeorge
HARN Readjust-
ments
Alabama NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) alhpgn
Arizona NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) azhpgn
California, south of 38 degrees North NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) cahpgn
California, north of 38 degrees North NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) cnhpgn
Colorado NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) cohpgn
Idaho and Montana, east of 113 degrees West NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) emhpgn
Texas, east of 100 degrees West NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) ethpgn
Florida NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) flhpgn
Georgia NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) gahpgn
Kentucky NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) kyhpgn
106 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Area/State NADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
Louisiana NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) lahpgn
Maryland and Delaware NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) mdhpgn
Maine NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) mehpgn
Michigan NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) mihpgn
Mississippi NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) mshpgn
Nebraska NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) nbhpgn
North Dakota NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) ndhpgn
New England (Connecticut, Massachusetts,
New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont)
NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) nehpgn
New Mexico NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) nmhpgn
New York NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) nyhpgn
Oklahoma NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) okhpgn
Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) pvhpgn
South Dakota NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) sdhpgn
Tennessee NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) tnhpgn
Virginia, excluding West Virginia NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) vahpgn
Wisconsin NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) wihpgn
Idaho and Montana, west of 113 degrees West NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) wmhpgn
Washington and Oregon NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) wohpgn
Texas, west of 100 degrees West NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) wthpgn
Wyoming NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) wyhpgn
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 107
For more information about NADCON grid data files, refer to the National
Geodetic Survey web site.
See also:
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To set up a new grid data file for the United States
1 When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems\Usa\Nadcon.
2 Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3 Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4 Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for France
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with a grid data catalog file (RgfToNtf.gdc) and a
national grid data file (gr3df97a.txt )for France. This file is installed in a folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
Several French municipalities have developed local grid data files that allow
for more precise transformations within their respective regions. You can
obtain municipal grid data files from the local GIS or Survey department. If
108 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
you add references to such municipal grid data files to the French grid data
catalog file, AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically use them as appropriate.
Points within the boundaries of the municipal grids will be transformed using
the local grid data, and points outside those boundaries will be transformed
using national grid data.
To set up a new grid data file for France
1 When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2 Open RgfToNtf.gdc in any text editor or word processor that can produce
an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3 Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4 Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with grid data files for Australia and New Zealand.
These files are installed in folders under the Autodesk shared coordinate system
folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
Following is a table of the grid data files and GDC files used for Australia and
New Zealand.
GDC File Grid Data File (GSB) Transformation Area
Agd84ToGda94.gdc QLD_1299.gsb AGD84 to GDA94 Australia
Agd66ToGda94.gdc vic_0799.gsb AGD66 to GDA94 Victoria
Agd66ToGda94.gdc tas_1098.gsb AGD66 to GDA94 Tasmania
Agd66ToGda94.gdc Nt_0599.gsb AGD66 to GDA94 Northern Territory
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 109
GDC File Grid Data File (GSB) Transformation Area
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb New Zealand New Zealand
For more information about Australia and New Zealand coordinate systems,
go to http://www.ga.gov.au.
See also:
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 112)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand
1 When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Geospatial
Coordinate Systems.
2 Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3 Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4 Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum (page 2059) definition, or adding
comments.
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System
Changes
The Geocentric Datum of Australia (GDA) is the new Australian coordinate
system, replacing the Australian Geodetic Datum (AGD). GDA is part of a
110 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
global coordinate reference frame and is directly compatible with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
Due to differences in the way the two datums were created, the GDA94
coordinates of a point appear to be about 200 meters northeast of the AGD
coordinates of the same point. The precise size and orientation of the difference
varies from place to place. For more technical information on the GDA, go to
http://www.icsm.gov.au/icsm/gda/
The new implementation of GDA94 and the associated datum (page 2059)
transformations are available by using the coordinate system files supplied in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum
1 Reassign one of the following coordinate systems to your drawing:
AMG66-49-Grid through AMG66-57-Grid
AMG-49-Grid through AMG-57-Grid
MGA-48-Grid through MGA-58-Grid
ISG_54-2-Grid through ISG_56-2-Grid
SGC-Grid
VICT-Grid
LL-AGD84-Grid
For example, if you have a drawing that uses AM666-49, reassign it to
AM666-49-Grid before using GDA94.
2 Do one of the following:
To define a new coordinate system using high accuracy datum (page
2059) transformations, use ASTRLA66-Grid and ASTRLA84-Grid.
To define a new coordinate system using the 3-Dimensional Similarity
Transformations, use ASTRLA66-7P, STRLA66-Tasm-7P,
ASTRLA66-VictNSW-7P, ASTRLA66-ACT-7P, and ASTRLA84-7P.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 111
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users
If the source and destination coordinate systems use different datums,
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically performs a datum (page 2059) shift. Within
North America, this is most often a shift between the NAD27 and NAD83
datums.
For United States users, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the freely distributable
NADCON grid data files (page 105) supplied by USGS.
Canadian users can use either version 1 or version 2 of the Canadian National
Transformation supplied by Geomatics Canada. If both versions of the
Canadian National Transformation are present, AutoCAD Map 3D uses version
2.
WARNING Geomatics Canada no longer supports version 1, and many Canadian
provinces do not consider it to produce valid results. If you are in Canada and
doing NAD Shifts, it is recommended that you use version 2.
See also:
Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 89)
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
Coordinate System Files (page 113)
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
110)
To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation
1 Obtain a copy of the data file.
Contact Information Services, Geodetic Survey Division, Geomatics
Canada
615 Booth Street
Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0E9
(613) 995-4410
http://www.geod.nrcan.gc.ca
2 Once you have the file, copy it into the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
112 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Canada, and give it the
name Ntv2_0.gsb.
3 Using a text editor such as Notepad, open Nad27ToNad83.gdc (located
by default in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems folder).
4 Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\Ntv2_0.gsb.
To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation
1 Obtain a copy of the data file.
2 Copy it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems\Canada folder, and give it
the name grid11.dac.
3 Open Nad27ToNad83.gdc.
4 Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\grid11.dac.
For more information on editing GDC files, see Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
(page 104).
Coordinate System Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses certain files for storing coordinate system definitions
and defining datum (page 2059) transformation information.
Following is a list of these files. Files that should not be modified are marked
with an asterisk (*).
Description File
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data files:
Agd66ToGda94.gdc
Vic_0799.gsb, nt_0599.gsb, and
TAS_1098.gsb. Default fallback datum
(page 2059): ASTRLA66.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data file:
Agd84ToGda94.gdc
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 113
Description File
QLD_1299.gsb. Default fallback datum:
ASTRLA84-7P.
Grid Data Catalog file for determining the
geoid height for any position in the United
GeoidHeight.gdc
States. Default data files are
GEO96AN.GEO, GEO96AS.GEO,
GEO96HW.GEO, GEO96NC.GEO,
GEO96NE.GEO, GEO96NW.GEO,
GEO96PR.GEO, GEO96SC.GEO,
GEO96SE.GEO, and GEO96SW.GEO. Fall-
back datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default data files:
Nad27ToNad83.gdc
Conus.l?s, Alaska.l?s, PrVi.l?s, Hawaii.l?s,
STGEORGE.l?s, STLRNC.l?s, and ST-
PAUL.l?s. Default fallback datum: NAD27-
48.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default grid data
Nad83ToHarn.gdc
files: alhpgn.l?s, azhpgn.l?s, cnhpgn.l?s,
cohpgn.l?s, cshpgn.l?s, emhpgn.l?s, ethp-
gn.l?s, flhpgn.l?s, gahpgn.l?s, hihpgn.l?s,
kshpgn.l?s, kyhpgn.l?s, lahpgn.l?s, mdhp-
gn.l?s, mehpgn.l?s, mihpgn.l?s, mshp-
gn.l?s, nbhpgn.l?s, ndhpgn.l?s, nehpgn.l?s,
nmhpgn.l?s, nvhpgn.l?s, nyhpgn.l?s, ohh-
pgn.l?s, okhpgn.l?s, pvhpgn.l?s, sdhp-
gn.l?s, tnhpgn.l?s, uthpgn.l?s, vahpgn.l?s,
wihpgn.l?s, wmhpgn.l?s, wohpgn.l?s,
wthpgn.l?s, wvhpgn.l?s, and wyhpgn.l?s.
Fallback datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within New Zealand. Default grid data file:
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc
nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb. Default fallback
datum: NZGD49-7P.
114 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Description File
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
between the RGF93 and NTF datums used
Rgf93ToNtf.gdc
within France. Default grid data file:
gr3df97a.txt. Default fallback datum: NTF-
G.
Grid Data Catalog file for computing the
modeled difference in orthometric height
Vertcon.gdc
between the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988 (NAVD 88) and the Nation-
al Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD
29) for a given location specified by latit-
ude and longitude. Default grid data files:
VERTCONC.94, VERTCONE.94, and VERT-
CONW.94. Fallback datum definition is not
recommended.
A binary compiled file used for storing co-
ordinate system category definitions. Also
called a dictionary file.
Category.csd *
Coordinate systems dictionary file. Coordsys.csd *
Datums dictionary file. Datums.csd *
Ellipsoids dictionary file. Elipsoid.csd *
Multiple Regression Transformation binary
files that store the coefficients required for
.mrt files *
multiple regression analysis. The base name
of the file is the same as the key name of
the datum with which it is associated.
Grid data files used by Vertcon.gdc. .94 files *
Data files for determining the geoid height
for any position in the United States. These
.geo files *
are in GEOID96 format and are used by
GeoidHeight.gdc.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 115
Description File
Grid data files for Canada, Australia, and
New Zealand. Both latitude and longitude
.gsb files *
shifts (as well as accuracy values) are incor-
porated into a single .gsb file. The file
structure also supports the concept of
multiple grids, and subgrids within a major
grid.
Grid data files for United States geography. .las and .los files *
See also:
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files (page 104)
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 109)
Grid Data Files for the United States (page 105)
To modify a coordinate system definition file
1 Find the file to modify in the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder,
by default C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Geospatial Coordinate Systems.
2 Make a backup copy of the file before modifying it.
NOTE Files that should not be modified are marked with an asterisk (*) in
the table on the Concept tab of this topic.
3 Edit the file in a text editor.
Setting Up Object Classification
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
Defining an Object Class (page 119)
Using Base Object Classes (page 122)
Specifying Ranges and Defaults (page 124)
Modifying an Object Class Definition (page 127)
Creating an Object Classification File (page 128)
116 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
To set up object classification (page 118)
To define an object class (page 120)
To base a new object class on an existing class (page 123)
To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class (page 124)
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
To modify an object class definition (page 127)
To create a new object classification file (page 129)
See also:
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 117)
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification
Object classes define a set of standard objects for your organization. When a
user adds one of these standard objects to a drawing that uses object
classification, the object is created using the properties you have defined and
is a classified object.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
A classified object is created using the appropriate object type. It has the object
data, external data, and topology data that you have defined for the object
class, and all properties included in the object class definition have values
that fall within the range you specified for the property.
When users edit the properties of classified objects, they can enter only values
that fall within the ranges you have specified for the property.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
See also:
Using Object Classification (page 981)
Setting Up Object Classification | 117
Understanding Object Classification (page 983)
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To set up object classification
Determine the standard objects for your organization.
Determine the hierarchy of object classes.
You can create categories of object classes and have all object classes in a
category inherit certain settings from the base object class for that category.
Create a sample object that has all the data and properties that to include
in the object class definition file.
Attach (page 995) an existing object definition file or create (page 129) a new
object class definition file.
Define (page 120) the new object class.
To use this object class as a base class (page 123), set the default value and
the range of allowable values (page 125) for each object that you include.
Store the object class definition file in a location that is accessible to all
the people in your organization who need it.
You can attach the object class definition file to your drawing template so
it is attached to all new drawings.
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Click Setup Classification Tools Attach Definition
File.
Menu
ATTACHDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Attach Definition File
Task Pane
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box Dialog Box
118 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup Classification Tools Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog box Dialog Box
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup Classification Tools New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog box Dialog Box
Defining an Object Class
Define an object class by selecting a sample object in your drawing, choosing
which of its properties to include in the definition, and specifying the allowable
settings.
For example, if you want to define an object class for maintenance hole covers,
select an existing maintenance hole cover in your drawing.
If you do not have a sample object in your drawing, create an object with the
data and property settings that you want to include in the object class
definition.
For each object class, AutoCAD Map 3D stores information on how to create
the object, what properties it should have, what data should be attached, and
what topology information should be associated with it. All objects you create
using this object class definition have the selected properties and values.
Setting Up Object Classification | 119
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
Editing Object Class Definitions
To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class Privileges (page
82).
WARNING Only one person should edit object class definitions at a time. If two
people edit at the same time, one set of edits may be lost.
If someone has recently edited the definition file, quit AutoCAD Map 3D and
restart to get the updated definitions.
Renaming an Object Class
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
class definition file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are
unchanged. Since these objects point to a name that no longer exists in the
object class definition file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
See also:
Using Base Object Classes (page 122)
Modifying an Object Class Definition (page 127)
Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To define an object class
1 Select a sample object for the object class.
The sample object must have the properties, links, and attributes that
you want to include in the definition of the object class.
120 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2 If an object definition file is not attached, enter attachdef at the command
prompt and attach the file.
3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click Define Object Class.
4 When prompted to select a sample object, select the sample object. Press
Enter.
5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), enter a name
and a description.
6 To base this object class on an existing object class (page 123), select the
existing object class from the Based On list.
To use this object class as a base only, select Use As Base Object
Classification Only.
7 On the Applies To tab, select the object type for this object class.
You must select the object type before you can select properties on the
Properties List tab.
For best results, select the most specific object type that applies to all
objects in this class.
NOTE If you plan to use this object class with objects from a drawing source,
do not select more than one object type.
8 On the Properties List tab, select each of the properties you want to
include in the definition. For each property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 125).
To specify a line weight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a line weight of 0.13, enter 13.
To define a new property, click New Property. In the New Property dialog
box (page 1791), specify the category and name for the new property.
9 On the Class Settings tab, select the object to use to create the feature.
For example, if you are defining an object class for roads, select Polyline
as the creation method.
NOTE You can select only objects that match the object type you selected
on the Applies To tab.
You can also specify the icon to display for the object class and whether
you want the object class to appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Setting Up Object Classification | 121
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup Classification Tools Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog box Dialog Box
Using Base Object Classes
You can create hierarchies of object classes. When you base a new object class
on an existing object class, the new object class has all the properties of the
base class.
You cannot change base properties, but you can modify their attributes,
including the default value and the range of allowable values, and you can
include additional properties.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
Sample Use
1 Define an object class called Roads with the basic properties that you
want to assign to all roads.
2 Define object classes called Primary Roads, Local Roads, and Fire Roads,
and base each of them on Roads.
Because the new object classes are based on Roads, they include all the
properties selected for Roads.
122 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based
on that class are also selected.
Using Object Classes as Base Classes Only
Sometimes when you create a base class, you intend to use it only as a base
for other object classes and not to create objects in drawings. For example,
you may not want the to use the Roads object class to create roads. You want
people to create roads using the Primary Roads and Secondary Roads classes
that are based on the Roads class. You can specify that an object class can be
used only as a base class.
Editing Base Classes
To edit a definition for an object class, you must have a sample object in the
drawing. However, if you use an object class as a base class only, you will not
have any example objects. For these object classes, you must edit the .xml
definition file directly.
See also:
Defining an Object Class (page 119)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To base a new object class on an existing class
1 Define the object class (page 120).
2 For Based On, select the object class on which you want to base this new
object class.
The selected properties of the base object class appear in the list.
3 You cannot clear any of the properties of the base object class, but you
can edit the property attributes, including the default and the range of
allowable values.
Setting Up Object Classification | 123
4 Add any additional properties you want, and finish defining the object
class.
To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class
1 Define the object class (page 120).
2 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), select Use As
Base Object Classification Only.
Users can select objects using the base object class, but they cannot create
objects using it.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup Classification Tools Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog box Dialog Box
Specifying Ranges and Defaults
When you define an object class, you can specify a range of allowable values
and a default value for new objects created using the object class.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
When someone creates a new object using this object class, AutoCAD Map
3D creates the object using the current settings for the property. If the current
124 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
settings do not match the range, the object is created using the specified
default value.
When users edit the values for properties associated with the object class, they
can only values that are within the allowable range. (This applies only if you
edit the properties using the Object Class Data tab of the Properties palette.)
When users classify existing objects, they can skip objects whose values are
not within the specified range. If they do not skip these objects, the objects
are assigned the default values.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
See also:
Defining an Object Class (page 119)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To specify a default value and a range for a property
1 Create the object class and select the object type (page 120) on the Applies
To tab of the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785).
2 On the Properties List tab, select a property.
3 Under Property Attributes, for Default, enter the default value for this
property.
4 For Range, specify the range of allowable values.
Click to select from a list of properties if available, otherwise, enter
the values.
To enter a list of values, separate them with commas, for example:
1,5,9
Setting Up Object Classification | 125
To enter a range of numbers, enclose the first and last numbers in
square brackets and separate the numbers with a comma, for example:
[3,7]
You can combine a range with additional values, for example: 1,[3,7],9
To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Range values are case sensitive. For example, if you specify "Road" as an
allowable value in the range, "ROAD" will not match this value and will be
considered outside of the range.
See also:
Color Range Editor dialog box (page 1783)
Layer Range Editor dialog box (page 1789)
Linetype Range Editor dialog box (page 1789)
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box (page 1790)
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box (page 1792)
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup Classification Tools Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog box Dialog Box
126 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Modifying an Object Class Definition
To add properties to an object class definition, you must have a sample object
that includes the properties you want to add.
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
Notes and Warnings
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
classification file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are unchanged.
Since these objects point to an object class name that no longer exists in the
object classification file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
NOTE To modify an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges
(page 82).
See also:
Defining an Object Class (page 119)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE To modify an object class definition, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 82).
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To modify an object class definition
1 Open a drawing that contains an object classified with the object class
you want to modify.
To add properties to the object class definition, the sample object must
have the properties you want to add to the object class definition.
2 If an object classification file is not attached, enter attachdef at the
command prompt and attach the file.
Setting Up Object Classification | 127
3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the object class
whose definition you want to modify. Click Define Object Class.
4 Select the sample object. This object must be classified with the object
class you want to modify.
5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1785), modify
properties.
You cannot change the object type used for the feature.
On the Properties List tab, select or clear properties you want to include
in the definition. For each new property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 125).
To specify a line weight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a line weight of 0.13, enter 13.
On the Class Settings tab, specify the icon to display for the feature
and whether the data appears on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup Classification Tools Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog box Dialog Box
Creating an Object Classification File
The object classification file contains information on object classes you have
defined. You can create a new object classification file.
128 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
As a general rule, you want to use the same object classification file across all
your drawings. This ensures that you have the same object class definitions
for all source drawings attached to a drawing. You may want to attach the
object classification file to the drawing template, and make sure that everyone
has the same alias to the path.
If users in your organization share the object classification file, store it on the
network in a place accessible to all users.
To use object classification, users attach the object classification file to their
drawing. They can then create standard objects using the object class
definitions.
Only the object classes defined in the object classification file attached to a
drawing can be assigned to objects or used to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 83).
See also:
Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 995)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
NOTE Object classification affects drawing objects only. For information about
classification methods for geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial Data
(page 551)
To create a new object classification file
1 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click New Definition File.
2 In the New Object Class Definition File dialog box (page 1790), specify a
name for the new object classification file. Click OK.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 83).
Setting Up Object Classification | 129
Quick Reference
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup Classification Tools New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEF Command Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up for Digitizing
Overview of Digitizing (page 130)
Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
Registering the Map (page 133)
Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
See also:
Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To prepare for digitizing (page 131)
To configure the digitizer (page 132)
To register the map (page 136)
To set digitizing specifications (page 138)
Overview of Digitizing
Digitizing is the process of converting paper-based graphical information into
a digital format. When you digitize a map, you use drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map into a DWG file.
See also:
Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
130 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
Registering the Map (page 133)
Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
To prepare for digitizing
1 Configure the digitizer. (page 132)
2 Register the map. (page 136)
3 Set the digitizing specifications. (page 138)
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLET Command Line
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map Data Entry Digitize Setup. Menu
MAPDIGISETUP Command Line
Digitize Setup dialog box Dialog Box
Configuring the Digitizer
You must configure the digitizer so a movement on the digitizing tablet can
be recorded directly into an existing drawing file as you digitize.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 131
To configure the digitizing tablet, you define screen pointing areas. A screen
pointing area is a rectangular region on the digitizer surface within which the
digitizer acts like a mouse and can access windows, menus, and dialog boxes.
You can configure two screen pointing areas, one fixed and one floating.
When you digitize, the fixed screen pointing area is disabled. To access the
menus from the digitizer, use the floating screen pointing area.
You can toggle between the fixed and floating screen pointing areas with the
F12 key.
See also:
Registering the Map (page 133)
Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To configure the digitizer
1 Click Options. In the Options dialog box, click the System tab.
2 Select your digitizer in the Current Pointing Device list.
3 Start the TABLET command, and use the CFG option to configure the
tablet. Specify the fixed screen pointing area and a floating screen pointing
area in a corner of your tablet area.
4 Mark the floating screen area on your tablet with a marker or piece of
paper.
When you complete the configuration, two new options appear on the
status bar at the bottom of the AutoCAD Map 3D window. Tablet and
FLOAT let you toggle the two modes.
Use the Options dialog box to disable the mouse while you are digitizing.
1 Click Options. In the Options dialog box, click the System tab.
2 Under Accept Input From, select Digitizer Only.
3 Click OK.
132 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you complete digitizing, return to the Options dialog box and select
the Digitizer And Mouse option to use both input devices.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLET Command Line
Registering the Map
Registration is the process of making a map's coordinate system correspond to
the Cartesian coordinate system used by AutoCAD Map 3D.
You select specific calibration and control points for each map that you digitize.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 133
The crosses in this illustration mark the digitizer calibration points.
Choosing the Number of Calibration Points
Selecting a maximum of nine points is a good rule; specifying more only
increases computation time with little increase in precision. If the original is
not badly distorted, four corner points and some intermediate points are
sufficient. It is more important to distribute the points evenly around the
whole map than to concentrate more points in an area.
Calibration Options
To complete the calibration, select one of the following transformation options:
Orthogonal Needs only two digitized and specified calibration points
to create a transformation consisting of arbitrary translation, uniform
scaling, and rotation. This method is not recommended unless only two
control points can be found.
Affine Requires three calibration points. Allows a tablet transformation
combining translation, independent X and Y scaling, rotation, and some
skewing. Provides an arbitrary linear transformation in two-dimensional
space. This is the preferred method for registering paper maps drawn in a
Cartesian coordinate system.
Projective Needs at least four calibration points. Makes a transformation
equivalent to a perspective projection of any plane onto another plane.
Allows for some stretching of an original paper drawing by different
134 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
amounts along a perspective projection. This is the best option for
orthophotos.
The TABLET command calculates the errors associated with the available
transformation options, depending on how many points you digitized. When
the calculations are complete, or when you cancel the calculations, a table
showing the results of your calibration appears.
There are four possible responses from the calibration calculations for each
transformation type:
Exact Number of points specified is correct for this type of
transformation.
Success More points specified than needed. For a Success, the RMS error
and standard deviation are reported.
Impossible Not enough points specified to define a transformation.
Failure Points specified are colinear or coincidental. The transformation
may not have a valid definition.
If you get either Impossible or Failure, do not use that transformation. If all
the results are Impossible or Failure, check the calibration on the digitizer,
recalibrate, and digitize the map again.
RMS error, Standard Deviation, and Residual Values
The RMS error indicates how uniform or extreme the required transformation
is: the lower the value, the better the calibration.
Standard deviation is reported at all calibration points. The residual error is
the difference between the actual calibration point and the computed
transformation point. A large difference indicates a procedural error. You may
have entered the wrong coordinates or digitized a wrong point.
If the RMS and standard deviation values seem high, you might have made
an error when entering location values or the map might have slipped during
calibration. In this case, restart the procedure to calibrate the digitizer.
See also:
Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 136)
Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
Setting Up for Digitizing | 135
Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To register the map
1 Tape the map on the tablet. The map on the tablet should be flat, with
no bumps or wrinkles, and securely fastened.
2 Start the TABLET command and use the CAL option.
3 Digitize the control points of the map, and enter X and Y coordinate
values for the locations.
4 When you complete the control points, press Enter. Wait for the
calculations to complete.
5 At the prompt, enter the calibration option to use. Select the
transformation that gave an Exact outcome. If all the transformations
were a Success, select the option with the lowest RMS and standard
deviation errors.
Quick Reference
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLET Command Line
Setting Digitizing Specifications
To use the options provided by the MAPDIGITIZE command, you must
configure the digitizer and register the map.
Attaching Data
You can link data to objects as you digitize. Although you can store data in
AutoCAD Map 3D as block attributes, you can perform more sophisticated
analysis of the data if you use one of the following methods:
Data linked to an object is stored as object data in the drawing.
Data linked to an object is stored in an external database.
136 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Label Point
A label point is the point used to insert text to describe the digitized object.
You can specify a label point for each object as you digitize.
Layer
Plan the layers you will use in your drawing. A layer is a logical grouping of
data, which simplifies organizing and viewing data. For more information,
look up "layers, creating" in the help index.
Each object that represents a different type of map data should go on a separate
layer. For example, a polyline representing a coastline could go on a layer
named COASTLINE, interstate highways on a layer named INTERSTATE, land
boundaries on a layer named LOTS.
If you have not established a scheme for layer names, you can create one using
the numeric feature-classification code found in some digital source data. For
example, major roads might be on a layer named "170-201". A better naming
convention combines names that suggest their function and a structure that
allows selection with wild cards and groups of layer names. For example, you
might decide that all topographic objects should go on layers beginning with
the letters TP. So you might put rivers on a layer named TP_RIVERS, and
contours on a layer named TP_CONTOURS. To freeze, thaw, lock, or unlock
all layers with topographic data, you use the expression TP*. For more
information on wild-card characters, look up "wild-card characters" in the
help index.
Block Name or Linetype
To represent nodes using blocks available in the current drawing, select a block
name or ACAD_POINT for the block name.
Choosing ACAD_POINT places a point object at each node position. For
information about changing the appearance of this point object, look up
DDPTYPE in the help index.
Wherever possible, use the linetypes supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D to
indicate different types of boundaries, road types, and waterways. Using
standard linetypes ensures consistency across maps and helps you keep track
of what you have digitized. Associate each linetype with a different layer.
Object Snap
Use object snap to tie nodes or segments to linear objects that are already in
place. For example, always use object snap to position junctions of pipes,
roads, or railways.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 137
Width
Linear objects that contain three-dimensional information cannot have a
width.
See also:
Registering the Map (page 133)
Configuring the Digitizer (page 131)
Digitizing Objects (page 1073)
Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 1073)
To set digitizing specifications
1 At the command prompt, enter mapdigisetup.
2 In the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617), select an object type.
Select Nodes to digitize points or blocks. Select Linear to digitize polylines.
3 To attach data to objects as you digitize them, select Attach Data.
Click Data To Attach and select the table to use for the data. As you
digitize the objects, you are prompted for the data to attach to the object.
4 To change the label point for objects as you digitize them, select Prompt
For Label Point.
5 Specify the layer for new objects.
6 Specify the block (for nodes) or the linetype (for linear objects) to use
when creating the new objects.
7 Specify whether to snap to the closest endpoint (for nodes) or insertion
point (for linear objects).
8 For nodes, select whether to specify the rotation and scale of each node
block.
For linear objects, select whether the objects are 2D or 3D. For 2D objects,
specify a width.
9 Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
138 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map Data Entry Digitize Setup. Menu
MAPDIGISETUP Command Line
Digitize Setup dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up Your Map File
See also:
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 80)
Setting Options (page 216)
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D (page 142)
To assign coordinate systems (page 143)
To attach drawings (page 154)
To set up a query library (page 173)
To set up annotation templates (page 186)
To set up object data (page 198)
To set up data sources for drawings (page 205)
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File
You can set up each map file you create to make your work easier and more
productive.
See also:
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D (page 80)
Setting Options (page 216)
Setting Up Your Map File | 139
The following table summarizes your customization options for a map file.
To get this result... Use this method... To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page
142)
Click Map Setup tab Co-
ordinate System panel As-
sign.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings (page
154)
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
(page 163).
In the Tool-based Ribbon
Workspace, click Home tab
Data panel Define
Drawing Set.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
(page 174).
Set up queries. 1 To save the current
query, click Home
tab Data pan-
el Define Query.
2 To run a saved query,
click Create
tab Object Query
panel Run.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Annotate tab Map
Annotation panel Define
Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page
190)
140 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To get this result... Use this method... To do this...
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table (page
200).
Click Map Setup tab At-
tribute Data panel Define
Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 208).
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D
When you log into AutoCAD Map 3D, your work environment is automatically
set up as it was last saved, including user privileges and user-specific options.
Depending on your organization, you may be required to log in. System
Administrators can set this AutoCAD Map 3D multi-user option.
If user login is not required, you can work with AutoCAD Map 3D without
logging in. However, you can log in at anytime to restore settings that you
have saved to your user name or to use privileges associated with your user
name.
User Privileges
To perform some AutoCAD Map 3D commands, you must be logged in as a
user with the appropriate privileges.
Example: To change Multi-user settings in the AutodCAD Map Options dialog
box, you must have Superuser privileges.
The default superuser name is SuperUser (not case sensitive), and the default
superuser password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
TIP You can customize many AutoCAD Map 3D settings. Some of these
customizations are saved to your user name. To customize the settings differently
for each drawing, set up multiple user names and log in with the appropriate
name for each drawing.
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D | 141
See also:
Setting Multi-user Options (page 226)
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82)
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D
1 Click Map Setup tab Map panel User Login.
2 In the User Login dialog box (page 1937), for Login Name, enter the login
name provided to you by your system administrator.
3 In the Password box, enter your password.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and the
password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue, make sure
that you change the default superuser login and password. See To add a
new user (page 83).
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPLOGIN
Allows you to log in as an AutoCAD Map 3D user
Setup menu User Login Menu
MAPLOGIN Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing User
Login
Task Pane
User Login dialog box Dialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps that use different
coordinate systems.
142 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
Defining Coordinate Systems (page 89)
Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts (page 102)
To assign coordinate systems
To use coordinate systems with maps (page 145)
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing (page 146)
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147)
To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic (page 149)
To turn off a global coordinate system (page 150)
To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing (page 151)
To transform the coordinate system of a drawing (page 152)
Overview of Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps using different
coordinate systems. To do this, you specify the coordinate system used for
attached drawings and for the current drawing. When you bring objects from
attached drawings into the current drawing, the objects are transformed to
the coordinate system of the current drawing.
The coordinate system you assign to your drawing specifies the system that
was used when creating the drawing. For example, if you created a map using
Universal Transverse Mercator, Zone 27, US Survey Feet, you assign the code
UTM-27F to the map.
You specify the coordinate system used for the current drawing and for
attached source drawings before querying any items from the source drawings.
When you query objects from source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically converts them to the coordinate system of the current drawing.
This operation is called coordinate transformation. When you save objects back
to source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D reverses the conversion.
The coordinate system code and definition are stored in the drawing file. You
can share the drawing with anyone using Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or
later, and they will have the correct coordinate system.
When the coordinate system you select is assigned to the selected attached
drawings, a backup file, with a .bak extension, is made of each source drawing
before assigning the coordinate system information.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 143
The coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D include the Universal
Transverse Mercator System and the State Plane coordinate systems used in
the USA, as well as many international coordinate systems used around the
world. For a complete listing of supported systems, see the Global Coordinate
System Manager dialog box.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to assign a coordinate
system to my map.
Show me how to set a map to the co-
ordinate system of the data.
Procedure
To assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing (page 147)
To assign a coordinate system to a
source drawing (page 146)
To turn off a global coordinate system
(page 150)
Tutorial
Exercise 1: Create a map
Workflow
Transform a DWG File to a Different
Coordinate System
Combine Data with Different Coordin-
ate Systems
GIS Skill
Reproject incoming data to a new co-
ordinate system
Related topics
Overview of Creating New Coordinate
Systems (page 90)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum
Shift Issues (page 103)
144 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To use coordinate systems with maps
Assign a coordinate system (page 145) to your current drawing and to the
source drawings.
Set Coordinate System Options (page 230)
Define a coordinate system (page 91)
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for each attached source drawing to
take advantage of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map
3D.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 145
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing (page 151)
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Source Drawings, click Select Drawings.
3 In the Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box (page 1599),
select the source drawings. You cannot assign a coordinate system to a
source drawing that currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
4 Under Source Drawings, enter the coordinate system code for the selected
source drawings.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
To remove an assigned coordinate system, in the Code box in the Assign
Global Coordinate System dialog box, type a period.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
146 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for the current drawing to take advantage
of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map 3D.
After you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the coordinate
transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source drawings.
The save-back process uses the original settings to determine whether
adjustments are necessary to restore objects to the correct coordinate system.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 103)
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Current Drawing, enter the coordinate system code for the current
drawing.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 147
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Using a Geodetic Coordinate System
All geographic data is created in some coordinate system, and in the context
of some datum (page 2059). A datum includes ellipsoid (page 2062) information
and a datum definition. For example, the Gauss-Kruger Conformal projection
system used in Germany uses the Bessel ellipsoid and Potsdam datum
definition. Some coordinate systems only specify the ellipsoid; these are
non-geodetic. Coordinate systems that specify the complete datum are
geodetic.
Most of the coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D are geodetic,
but about ten percent are non-geodetic. Therefore, you should determine
whether the coordinate systems you use are geodetic or non-geodetic before
you assign a coordinate system to a drawing. If you have data in a drawing
that uses a non-geodetic coordinate system, but do not know what datum the
data came from, you might introduce errors if you convert the drawing to a
geodetic coordinate system.
148 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems (page 90)
Defining a New Datum (page 93)
Defining an Ellipsoid (page 95)
To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), under
Current Drawing or Source Drawings, click Select Coordinate System.
3 In the Category list, select the category that contains the coordinate
system you want.
4 In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select a coordinate system.
5 Click Properties.
The type of coordinate system is displayed under Coordinate System Type on
the General tab of the Global Coordinate Systems Properties dialog box. If the
coordinate system is geodetic, the datum (page 2059) is displayed in the Datum
box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 149
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
For ADE data, using the AutoCAD Map 3D coordinate systems requires many
complex calculations that can decrease performance when querying objects
from attached drawings and saving back the objects. With FDO data these
calculations are unnecessary, so there is no performance impact.
You can turn off a coordinate system while working in a particular drawing.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To turn off a global coordinate system
1 Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1598), in the Code
box under Current Drawing, enter a period (.). Press Enter.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
150 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing
If the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system, you can view the
code in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing (page 152)
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System (page 150)
To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the global coordinate system code for the active
drawing to the right of the drawing name.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu More DWG Options Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTAT Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings Statistics Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog box Dialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 151
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing
You can transform an existing map from one coordinate system to another
by querying the objects from the attached source drawing into the current
drawing.
The original source drawing is unchanged, but the objects in the current
drawing use the new coordinate system.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing (page 145)
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page 147)
Querying Objects from Attached Drawings (page 1235)
To transform the coordinate system of a drawing
1 Open a new drawing.
2 Attach the drawing whose coordinate system you want to transform. See
Attaching Drawings (page 154).
3 In the new drawing, assign the new coordinate system to the current
drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page
147).
4 If you have not already assigned a coordinate system to the original
drawing, do that now. Assign the coordinate system that was used to
create the original drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing (page 146).
5 Define a query to bring in all objects from the source drawing. The easiest
way to do this is to define a location condition and use the Boundary
Type "All." This retrieves all objects in the source drawing. See Finding
All Objects in a Specified Location (page 1241).
As the objects are retrieved from the source drawing into the current drawing,
they are transformed from the coordinate system of the source drawing to the
coordinate system of the current drawing.
Once the objects are in the new drawing, you can detach the source drawing
and save the new drawing. The objects are unchanged in the source drawing,
but they use the new coordinate system in the new drawing.
152 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu Assign Global Coordinate System Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYS Command Line
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 153
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box Dialog Box
Attaching Drawings
When you attach a drawing to the current drawing, you can work with any
objects and data in that drawing, edit them, and save them back to the attached
drawing.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
To attach drawings
To create a drawing set (page 156)
To attach drawings (page 158)
To activate a drawing (page 160)
To activate a group of drawings (page 160)
To create a drive alias (page 161)
To open an active attached drawing (page 163)
Overview of Attaching Drawings
You can work with objects from other drawings by attaching the other drawings
to the current drawing. The group of drawings attached to the current drawing
is called a drawing set.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You attach
those drawings to the current drawing, and then view all the quadrants
simultaneously.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
154 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Aligning Attached Drawings
If an attached drawing has a global coordinate system assigned to it, objects
from that drawing are automatically converted to their appropriate size and
location in the current drawing.
If an attached drawing does not have a global coordinate system assigned to
it, you can specify how to align objects from that drawing when they are
copied into the current drawing.
Current Drawing Attached Drawings
Tile drawings by specifying the drawing offset for each attached drawing, as
shown above.
For each attached drawing, you can specify a drawing offset. You can also
specify how objects from the attached drawings are scaled or rotated when
they are brought into the current drawing.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
See also:
Setting Transformation Options (page 167)
Attaching Drawings | 155
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To create a drawing set
1 If necessary, create a drive alias (page 161).
2 Attach the drawings (page 157) you plan to use with the project.
3 Activate the drawings (page 160) to query.
If you no longer use an attached drawing with the current drawing, you can
remove the drawing from the drawing set.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
156 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Attaching a Drawing
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Nested Drawings
If you attach a drawing that has other drawings already attached to it, those
other drawings appear in the list as nested drawings.
You can query objects from nested drawings. If a top-level drawing is not
active, you cannot see or activate nested drawings. However, if the top-level
drawing is active, you can deactivate a nested drawing.
Working with Xrefs
To query data in an external reference, delete the external reference from the
attached drawing and attach the reference drawing to the current drawing
The Order of Attached Drawings
The order in which you attach drawings can affect the properties of objects
retrieved by queries.
If two drawings use the same name for a block, layer, group, or text style,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the definition from the first retrieved object that uses
that item.
For example, if you create a query to retrieve objects on LAYER_A, and LAYER_A
does not exist in the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the definition
of LAYER_A in the first active attached drawing that contains objects on
LAYER_A. Objects retrieved from LAYER_A in other drawings acquire the color
and linetype that is defined for LAYER_A in this drawing. This change also
applies when you save changes back to attached drawings.
TIP To maintain consistency between drawings, define blocks, layers, groups,
and text styles in the current drawing. For example, if you define a LAYER_A in
the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D applies the current drawing definition of
LAYER_A to objects retrieved from LAYER_A in all attached drawings, and when
you save back, applies the current drawing layer definition to the saved objects.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
Attaching Drawings | 157
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To attach drawings
Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
- or -
1 Open the drawing to which you want to attach another drawing.
2 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
To specify separate filters for file names and for descriptions, click Filter
and use the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box (page 1922).
To change the drawing description, specify simple transformation settings,
or define save back extents, click Drawing Settings and use the Drawing
Settings dialog box (page 1923).
3 In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1918), click Attach.
4 In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, select the drawings to attach.
Click Add.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163).
For information on viewing the attached drawings, see Viewing All Objects
in Selected Attached Drawings (page 745).
158 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Activating a Drawing
When you run a query to retrieve objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD
Map 3D retrieves objects only from active drawings.
You cannot make a drawing active or inactive when there are locked objects
in the drawing.
NOTE If an attached drawing is active in the current drawing, you cannot open
that drawing directly.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Attaching Drawings | 159
To activate a drawing
In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the drawing name.
Click Activate.
NOTE To activate a nested drawing, you must first activate the drawing to which
it is attached.
To activate a group of drawings
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 Select the drawings to activate.
3 Click Activate.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Creating a Drive Alias
If you plan to share drawings with other users, use drive aliases to specify the
location of attached drawings.
Example: You connect to the drawing server as drive J, but another user
connects as drive K. This makes it difficult to share drawings, since your
drawing specifies J as the location for the attached files. However, if you both
160 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
assign the same drive alias to the server, such as ProjectMaps, you can specify
the location of the attached drawings by this drive alias.
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a default drive alias called C. To store drawings
in a location other than drive C, create a drive alias for the location.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305). Geospatial connections do not require drive aliases.
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305). Geospatial connections do not require drive aliases.
To create a drive alias
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box, click Attach.
3 In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, click .
4 In the Drive Alias Administration dialog box (page 1928), type a name for
the alias.
The name must use only alphanumeric characters (including hyphen
and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a character.
NOTE If you are creating a drive alias for a drawing with an undefined alias,
type that alias name exactly.
5 Specify a path for the new alias.
6 Click Add.
Attaching Drawings | 161
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu Define Global Coordinate System Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYS Command Line
Global Coordinate System Manager Dialog Box Dialog Box
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Opening an Active Attached Drawing
You cannot directly open an attached drawing that is activated in the current
drawing. You must first deactivate it in the current drawing.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 163)
162 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
To open an active attached drawing
1 Do one of the following:
Deactivate (page 160) the attached drawing.
Close the drawing containing the attached drawing.
2 To open the drawing, click Open Drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 164)
Creating a Drawing Description (page 166)
Setting Transformation Options (page 167)
Setting Save Back Extents (page 170)
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings (page 171)
Attaching Drawings | 163
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
To create a drawing description (page 166)
To set transformation options (page 169)
To set save back extents (page 170)
To view information about attached drawings (page 172)
Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
You can specify how attached drawings work with the current drawing. You
can also view information about attached drawings.
NOTE You cannot specify drawing settings for nested drawings.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Use this method... To do this...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab Data panel Define
Create a drawing description
Drawing Set. Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Creating a Drawing Description (page
166).
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab Data panel Define
Specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an
attached drawing. Drawing Set.Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Transformation Options (page
167).
164 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Use this method... To do this...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab Data panel Define
Specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
Drawing Set.Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Save Back Extents (page 170).
In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane,
right-click Drawings. Click Statistics.
See Viewing Information about Attached
Drawings (page 171).
Vew information about attached drawings
such as the number and type of objects,
symbol tables, object data tables, and ob-
ject classes.
NOTE To attach a geospatial feature source to the current drawing and bring in
its features, use Data Connect. See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu More DWG Options Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTAT Command Line
Attaching Drawings | 165
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings Statistics Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog box Dialog Box
Creating a Drawing Description
Providing a description for an attached drawing helps you and other users
identify the drawing more easily.
TIP You can filter a drawing list by the drawing description. For example, when
you are selecting drawings to Quick View, you could display only drawings with
the word 'sewer' in their description.
NOTE Drawing descriptions apply to drawings only. there is no equivalent for
geospatial feature sources.
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
To create a drawing description
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing for which
you want to add a description.
4 In the Drawing Description box, enter a description.
5 Click Apply.
If you later want to modify the description, return to the Drawing Settings
dialog box and enter a new description.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
166 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Transformation Options
Set simple transformation options to specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an attached drawing. Use these settings
to make items from the attached drawings appear at the proper orientation,
size, and placement in the current drawing.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the current drawing. The
attached drawing does not change, which is useful for overlaying drawings
or tiling them.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
Attaching Drawings | 167
You can rotate objects from attached drawings so they
match the rotation of the current drawing.
Example: You have individual maps for each square-mile sector. You create a
drawing that encompasses a 5-square mile area, and you attach each of the
square-mile maps. You set the appropriate offset for each attached map so it
appears correctly in the current drawing.
If you save edited objects back to attached drawings, the objects are restored
to their original rotation, scale, and offset.
NOTE If you have set a global coordinate system code, these simple transformation
options are unavailable.
Use these simple transformation settings to temporarily adjust objects from
attached drawings so they align correctly in the current drawing. You can also
permanently edit the location, rotation, or scale of an object.
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object (page 931)
168 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial feature data.
To set transformation options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing whose
objects you want to transform.
4 Under Simple Transformation, select On/Off.
5 In the Scale box, enter the scale factor to scale the objects.
A value of 2 doubles the size of objects; a value of 0.5, halves the size of
objects.
6 In the Rotation box, enter the angle in degrees to rotate the objects.
7 In the Offset (X,Y) boxes, enter the amount to offset objects using the
drawing units from the attached drawing.
8 To select coordinates manually, click Pick.
When prompted, specify the points on which to base the simple
transformation. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the scale, rotation, and
offset based on the four points you specify; the base point for the rotation
is 0,0.
9 Click Apply.
This procedure transforms objects from the attached drawing as they are
queried into the current drawing. When objects are saved back to the attached
drawing, the transformation is undone. To permanently transform selected
objects, use the ADETRANSFORM (page 931)command.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Attaching Drawings | 169
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Save Back Extents
For an attached drawing, you can specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
This is useful if you save objects back to attached drawings based on their
location. If you do not specify save back extents, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
attached drawing extents as the save back extents.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 752)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial feature data.
To set save back extents
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Data panel
Define Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), select the drawing for which
you want to define save back extents.
4 Under Save Back Extents, click Define <.
170 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
5 Specify the boundary by using your pointing device or by entering
coordinates on the command line. When you finish specifying the
boundary, press Enter.
6 Click Apply.
TIP To view the save back extents, click Show <.
NOTE Simple transformations modify the default save back extents but do not
affect user-defined save back extents.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings
Vew information about attached drawings such as the number and type of
objects, symbol tables, object data tables, and object classes:
Object Counts The number and type of objects in the attached drawing.
Symbol Tables Displays information stored in symbol tables, for example,
block names, layer names, linetypes, and registered applications (regapps).
NOTE Regapps are registered applications that contain extended data (Xdata).
Object Data Displays information stored in object data.
Attaching Drawings | 171
Object Classes Displays object classes used in the selected drawings and
the number of objects in each object class.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To view information for
geospatial feature data, see Getting Information about Features (page 1125).
See also:
Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To view information for
geospatial feature data, see Getting Information about Features (page 1125).
To view information about attached drawings
1 In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Drawings. Click
Statistics.
2 In the Drawing Statistics dialog box (page 1926), select drawings from the
Active Drawings list.
3 Click a button:
Object Counts displays the number of each type of object in the
selected drawings.
Symbol Tables displays all symbol tables in the selected drawings.
Object Data displays all link templates, object data tables, and
attributes.
Object Classes displays objects used in the selected drawings and the
type of data in each object class.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
172 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu More DWG Options Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTAT Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings Statistics Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up a Query Library
You can save and organize your drawing queries in the query library.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Defining Queries (page 1218)
Executing Queries (page 1287)
To set up a query library
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To use the query library (page 174)
To save a query (page 177)
To run a query from the Query Library (page 178)
To run a query from Map Explorer (page 179)
To run an external query (page 179)
To reference an external query in the query library (page 180)
To add a category to the query library (page 182)
To edit a query saved with the current drawing (page 184)
To edit an external query (page 184)
Setting Up a Query Library | 173
Overview of Using the Query Library
If you plan to run a query more than once, you can save it. Once you have
saved a query, you can run it anytime.
Saving a Query (page 176) Save the current query to the query library or
to an external file.
Running a Saved Query (page 178) Run a query saved in the query library.
Each drawing has a query library where you can organize your saved queries
into categories.
Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
Using Query Library Categories (page 181)
Editing a Saved Query (page 183)
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Defining Queries (page 1237)
Executing Queries (page 1287)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To use the query library
1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click Query Library. Click
Administration.
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), under Category,
select the category for the query you want, or click New to create a new
category (page 182).
3 Under Available Queries, select the query.
174 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You can assign the query to a different category, change the name,
description, or location of the query, or add an external query to the
library.
4 If you have modified the settings for an existing query, click Update. If
you have added a new query, click Add.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu More DWG Options Query Library Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog box Dialog Box
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map Query Run Topology Query. Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Execute
As Preview-or- Right-click Current Query Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query Execute As Defined
Run Library Query dialog box Dialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
Setting Up a Query Library | 175
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu More DWG Querying Options Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERY Command Line
Saving a Query
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it.
You can save the query with the current drawing, or you can save it to an
external file. Saving to an external file is useful if you want to share a query
with another user or use it in another drawing.
If you save the query to an external file you can specify several additional
settings:
Save List Of Active Drawings Sets the drawing status to Active for
drawings involved in the saved query.
Save Location Coordinates Stores the coordinates used for location
queries. If you do not save the location query coordinates, AutoCAD Map
3D prompts you for them when you execute the query.
Keep Reference In Library Maintains a list of the external queries in the
Query Library. If you plan to reference the query in the Query Library, you
must provide a name and description for it.
Save Alter Properties Saves the property alteration definition with the
query.
Auto Execute Executes the query in addition to loading it. If you do not
select Auto Execute, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define
Query dialog box and waits for you to click Execute Query. Do not select
this option if you want to modify a query before you run it.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
176 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To save a query
1 Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
2 Make sure the query to save is the current query. If it is not, modify the
current query or click load a different query.
3 Click Save Query.
4 In the Save Current Query dialog box (page 1862), select a category for the
query.
5 Enter a name and description for the query.
6 Select any other query options you want.
7 To save the query to an external file, select Save To External File and
specify a file name.
To display the external query in the Run Library Query dialog box and
the Query Library Administration dialog box, select Keep Reference In
Library.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
Setting Up a Query Library | 177
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
Running a Saved Query
After you save queries, you can load, revise, and execute them.
NOTE If you plan to modify an externally saved query before executing it, do
not set Auto Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you
run the query, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define Query dialog
box but does not execute it.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To run a query from the Query Library (page 178)
To run a query from Map Explorer (page 179)
To run an external query (page 179)
To run a query from the Query Library
1 Click Create tab Object Query panel Run.
2 In the Run Library Query dialog box (page 1861), select the category for
the query.
178 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3 Select the query in the Available Queries list.
4 Click Execute Query.
To run a query from Map Explorer
1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click the query name.
2 Do one of the following:
Click Execute As Preview to execute the query as a preview query,
regardless of whether it was defined as a preview, draw, or report mode
query.
Click Execute As Defined to execute the query using the query mode
with which it was defined.
To run an external query
1 Click Create tab Object Query panel External.
2 In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3 Click OK.
If you turned off the Auto Execute option when you saved the query, the
query loads but does not execute. To execute the query, click Home tab Data
panel Define Query. In the Define Query dialog box, click Execute
Query.
Quick Reference
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map Query Run Topology Query. Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERY Command Line
Setting Up a Query Library | 179
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Execute
As Preview-or- Right-click Current Query Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query Execute As Defined
Run Library Query dialog box Dialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu More DWG Querying Options Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERY Command Line
Adding an External Query to Your Library
You can list an external query in the query library. By adding a reference to
the external query to the library, you can organize the query with your other
queries. In addition, you can give the query a name and a description to help
you identify it.
You can add an external query to the Query Library for more than one drawing.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To reference an external query in the query library
1 Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
180 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), select a
category.
3 Under Selected Query, make sure that the Query Type is set to External.
4 Click Browse. Select the file that contains the external query.
5 Specify a name and description for the query.
6 Click OK.
To execute the query, click Create tab Object Query panel Run.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu More DWG Options Query Library Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog box Dialog Box
Using Query Library Categories
The Query Library lets you organize your queries into categories.
You can move a query to a new category, or change the name or description
of a query. If you move an external query, you can specify the new location
for the query.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
Setting Up a Query Library | 181
See also:
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To add a category to the query library
1 Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1858), do one of the
following:
To add a category, under Category, click New.
Enter a name for the category. Click OK. Do not include spaces in the
name.
To assign a query to a different category, under Category, select the
current category of the query.
From the Available Queries list, select the query. Click Category.
In the Change Category dialog box (page 1835), under New Category,
select the new category for the query. Click OK.
To change the name or description of a query, under Category, select
the category for the query.
Under Available Queries, select the query.
Under Selected Query, edit the name or description of the query . For
external queries, you can specify a new location for the query.
Click Update.
To delete a category, select the category and click Remove.
You cannot remove a category that contains queries. You must first
delete the queries or move the queries to a different category and then
remove the empty category.
To rename a category, select the category and click Rename.
All queries assigned to the previous category name are assigned to the
new name. The old category name no longer exists.
182 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu More DWG Options Query Library Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog box Dialog Box
Editing a Saved Query
Once you have saved a query to the query library, you can reload the query
at any time to review it or revise it.
If you save the query to an external file, it is saved as an AutoLISP script. Using
a text editor, you can modify an external query file and include AutoLISP API
commands. For more information, refer to "Editing Query Files", under "Using
Interface Functions" in the online AutoCAD Map 3D AutoLISP Reference.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
See also:
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
Executing Drawing Queries (page 1287)
Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 180)
Setting Up a Query Library | 183
NOTE This procedure applies to drawing objects only. To filter geospatial feature
data whn you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to
a Map (page 309).
To edit a query saved with the current drawing
1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click a query name. Click
Edit. The Define Query dialog box (page 1838) appears with the selected
query loaded.
2 Modify any conditions (page 1258).
3 Modify any property alterations (page 1286).
4 In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
5 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
To edit an external query
1 Click Create tab Object Query panel External.
2 In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3 Click OK.
The external query runs and becomes the current query.
4 Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
5 Modify any conditions (page 1258).
6 Modify any property alterations (page 1286).
7 Click Save.
NOTE To be able to edit an external query before you execute it, do not set Auto
Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you execute the
query, AutoCAD Map 3D loads the query in the Define Query dialog box but does
not execute it.
184 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up Annotation Templates
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to label features.
Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
To label features (page 1093)
To insert annotation (page 1103)
To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 185
Exercise 3: Add labels
Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
Label features and optimize placement.
Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
Styling Features (page 639)
Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
To set up annotation templates
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To set up annotation (page 189)
To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing (page 189)
To define an annotation template (page 192)
To change an annotation template (page 196)
To delete all references to a selected annotation template (page 197)
To delete an annotation template (page 197)
Overview of Annotation Templates
In an annotation template, you define the information to display in the
annotation and the layout of that information. Annotation templates are
stored as specially named blocks within your drawing.
After you create an annotation template, you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing. Creating annotation templates and inserting
annotation is like creating and inserting blocks.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
186 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Labeling Objects Using Annotation Templates
Use annotation to label drawing objects with data values, such as the following:
Attributes, such as object data (page 2070) or linked external data (page 2062)
Display properties, such as line weight
Geometric values, such as line direction
Graphics, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, added with
standard AutoCAD drawing commands
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
You create one tag for each item in the annotation template. For example,
one tag might contain the static text, Area: followed by a tag containing
the property .AREA. You use the Block Editor to position the tags relative to
each other. When you attach the annotation to an object, the values appear
in the same position as their tags.
Annotation templates are stored in the drawing as blocks. Unlike regular
blocks, annotation templates have the following characteristics:
The block name is prefixed with "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" followed by
the annotation template name as specified in the Define Annotation
Template dialog box (page 1572).
The extension dictionary of the block contains special table objects.
Using Expressions in Annotation Templates
You can insert static text in the annotation template. It will appear on each
object to which you attach annotation.
You can also specify properties or define values using expressions. The values
of the properties or expressions are determined when the annotation is
inserted.
For example, create an annotation template that specifies the text Diameter
followed by an expression that calculates the diameter of a circle. Then insert
instances of the annotation template on several circle objects. Each one will
display Diameter, followed by that circles diameter.
When you change the text, properties, or expressions in an annotation
template, existing annotations based on that template do not change. Use the
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 187
Refresh or Update command to apply your changes to the annotations that
use the template you changed.
Using Annotation Templates from XREFs
To use an annotation template stored in another drawing, use the XBIND
command to attach that drawing as an XREF.
Block names in the XREFed drawing have a prefix that consists of the XREF
drawing file name followed by a vertical bar. Because the annotation
commands identify annotation templates by looking for the
"ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" at the beginning of the block name, you must
rename the templates in the XREFed drawing to make them available in the
current drawing.
For more information, see Bind External References in the AutoCAD help.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to label features.
Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
To label features (page 1093)
To insert annotation (page 1103)
To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
Exercise 3: Add labels
Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
Label features and optimize placement.
188 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
Styling Features (page 639)
Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To set up annotation
1 Define an annotation template. (page 192)
2 Attach annotation to objects. (page 1103)
3 If you BIND an XREFed drawing containing annotation templates, remove
the prefix from the XREFed annotation template block names to make
them available in the current drawing.
To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing
1 Using the RENAME command, select Blocks from the Named Objects list.
2 Select the annotation template from the list of blocks in the Items list.
You will find blocks with names like
xrefdwgname$0$ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_templatename.
3 Remove xrefdwgname$0$ from the name of each template you want.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup Define Annotation Template. Menu
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 189
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATE Command Line
Define Annotation Template dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXT Command Line
Annotation Text dialog box Dialog Box
Defining Annotation Templates
An annotation template can include text and graphics.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
You create one tag for each item in the annotation template. For example,
one tag might contain the static text, Area: followed by a tag containing
the property .AREA. You use the Block Editor to position the tags relative to
each other. When you attach the annotation to an object, the values appear
in the same position as their tags.
You can add graphics by drawing them in the Block Editor. You determine
the text contents using static text, properties, and expressions.
The specific values of the properties and expressions are determined when
you attach an annotation template to drawing objects.
For example, you can define the annotation template to include a static label
(such as Area:), followed by a property (for example, .AREA). You can specify
the label location as .CENTER. When you attach the annotation template to
a drawing object, the annotation appears in the center of that object and
displays the word Area, followed by the area of that object.
When you change the text, properties, or expressions in an annotation
template, the existing annotations based on that template do not change. Use
the Refresh or the Update command to apply the changes.
190 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to label features.
Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
To label features (page 1093)
To insert annotation (page 1103)
To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
Exercise 3: Add labels
Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
Label features and optimize placement.
Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
Styling Features (page 639)
Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 1103)
Refreshing Annotation (page 1105)
Updating Annotation (page 1106)
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 191
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To define an annotation template
1 Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
2 In the Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), click New.
You can change the other settings in this dialog box later in the procedure.
3 In the New Annotation Template Name dialog box (page 1576), type a name
for the template, and click OK.
The ribbon changes to show the Block Editor tab. You use the Block Editor
to define the annotation template, which is a special type of block.
4 Click Block Editor tab Annotation panel Edit Annotation Text
Then press Enter to create a new annotation tag.
A single annotation template can contain multiple tags, as well as graphic
elements.
5 In the Annotation Text dialog box (page 1570), specify the text to include
in this annotation tag.
For Attribute, enter a Tag name and Value for the annotation text.
For the value, enter static text or click to use the Expression
Chooser to specify an expression whose value varies depending on
the object being annotated.
The Expression Chooser lists the properties, object data, block
attributes, and other data associated with the current drawing.
NOTE Each tag name must be unique within the template.
Specify the Object Properties and Text Options for the annotation
text.
For most of the options, you can choose a static value from the
dropdown list or specify an expression that is evaluated against the
object when you insert the annotation.
192 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Click to create an expression. Within the Edit Expression dialog
box, click to select from a list of available properties and attributes.
Click to use a value from within the Block Editor.
If you select ByBlock for Color or Lineweight, the settings in the Define
Annotation Template dialog box will be used.
Click OK to return to the Block Editor.
6 In the Block Editor, click a location for this tag.
Since an annotation template can have multiple tags, you need to specify
their locations relative to each other. Clicking a location here allows you
to position this tag relative to any others in the template. When you
insert an annotation, it appears at the Insertion Point specified in the
Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), with all its tags shown
in their relative locations, as defined in the template.
7 Optionally, to include graphical elements as a part of the annotations,
create them in the Block Editor.
Use AutoCAD drawing commands to create geometry or insert graphical
elements.
8 When you finish adding elements to the template, click Close Block
Editor on the Block Editor toolbar.
You are prompted to save your changes. When you do, the Define
Annotation Template dialog box is redisplayed.
9 In the Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 1572), specify default
properties and insertion options.
These settings control the appearance of the annotation template block.
If you selected ByBlock for Color or Lineweight in the Annotation Text
dialog box, these are the settings that will be used.
10 Click OK.
The Block Editor closes and your drawing is redisplayed. You can now
attach the annotation template to a drawing object or objects (page 1103).
When you do, the annotation (showing the appropriate values and
settings for the selected object) will appear.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 193
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup Define Annotation Template. Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATE Command Line
Define Annotation Template dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXT Command Line
Annotation Text dialog box Dialog Box
Changing Annotation Templates
You can change the contents of an existing template. For example, you can
change the expression that determines the value or location of the text
element. You can add or remove text or graphics.
If you change only the graphic elements in the template, the elements update
automatically. However, if you change text elements, refresh or update the
annotations associated with that template to see the changes in your drawing.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to label features.
Show me how to label features with
automatic resizing.
194 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Show me how to place a legend in the
map and specify its contents.
Show me how to edit the table style for
a legend.
Procedure
To label features (page 1093)
To insert annotation (page 1103)
To create a legend (page 1118)
Tutorial
Tutorial: Annotating Your Map
Exercise 3: Add labels
Lesson 6: Create a Legend
Workflow
Style and Label a Linear Feature
GIS Skill
Label features and optimize placement.
Create and edit a legend.
Related topics
Styling Features (page 639)
Setting Up Annotation Templates
(page 185)
See also:
Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
Refreshing Annotation (page 1105)
Updating Annotation (page 1106)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 195
To change an annotation template
1 Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
2 In the Template Name list, click the template to change.
3 Do one or more of the following:
Click Copy to make a copy of the template.
Click Rename to rename the template.
Click Edit Template Contents to modify the text or graphical elements
of the template.
Change any properties or insertion options.
See Defining Annotation Templates (page 190) for information about
changing the contents, properties, or options for an annotation template.
4 If you changed any text elements, use Refresh (page 1105) or Update (page
1106) to apply your changes to existing annotations that use this template.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup Define Annotation Template. Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATE Command Line
Define Annotation Template dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXT Command Line
196 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Annotation Text dialog box Dialog Box
Deleting Annotation Templates
You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references
to that template from the drawing.
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
See also:
Overview of Annotation (page 1100)
Deleting Annotation from Drawings (page 1108)
NOTE Annotation templates are for drawing objects only. To label geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
To delete all references to a selected annotation template
1 Delete all references to the annotation template you plan to delete.
2 Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Delete Annotation.
3 Select an annotation template. Click OK.
All annotation based on the selected template is deleted.
To delete an annotation template
1 Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
2 Select the annotation template to delete from the Template Name list.
3 Click Delete.
The selected annotation template is deleted.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 197
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup Define Annotation Template. Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATE Command Line
Define Annotation Template dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up Object Data
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
See also:
Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
To set up object data
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
To set up object data (page 199)
To create an object data table (page 201)
To modify an object data table (page 203)
198 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To rename or remove an object data table (page 203)
Overview of Setting Up Object Data
Object data tables store text and numerical information related to an object.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
See also:
Creating an Object Data Table (page 200)
Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
To set up object data
1 Specify a set of fields for the table. (page 200)
2 Assign a name, description, data type, and default value to each field.
3 Use a separate procedure (page 1064) to attach a record from the table to
an object.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu Define Object Data Menu
Setting Up Object Data | 199
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATA Command Line
Define Object Data dialog box Dialog Box
Creating an Object Data Table
You can create multiple object data tables in a single drawing. For example,
you can create one table with pipe flow information and a separate table with
inspection information.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
Using the Same Table Name in Other Drawings
Take care when naming your tables. If you use the same table name in more
than one source drawing, be sure that all tables with same name have the
same fields and field types. If your current drawing has more than one source
drawing with the same object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
object table definition (or structure) for the first drawing that you activate. If
the other source drawings have tables with the same name but with different
fields, you cannot use those tables in the current drawing. If necessary, you
can rename or redefine an object data table.
See also:
Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
200 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To create an object data table
1 Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), select a table to modify,
or click New Table to create a new table.
If you select an existing table, the Object Data Fields list displays fields
already defined for the table.
If you click New Table, enter a name for the new table.
3 To create a new data field, fill in the Field Definition area:
Enter a name and description for the field.
Select the field type. The type specifies what kind of information can
be entered in the field. For example, if you specify a numeric type,
you cannot enter letters in the field.
Specify the default value for the field. This value is attached to the
object unless you change it.
4 Click Add to add the new field to the table.
5 Add any additional fields to the table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu Define Object Data Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATA Command Line
Define Object Data dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up Object Data | 201
Modifying an Object Data Table
You can add, modify, and delete fields in newly defined object data tables
until you perform a save operation (either saving objects back to source
drawings or saving the current drawing). Once you perform a save operation,
only a Superuser can modify the table. Also, if you have already queried any
object from a source drawing, you cannot modify an object data table.
When you modify an object data field, AutoCAD Map 3D updates all instances
of the field attached to objects. If the object data table is large, this process
can take a long time.
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
Renaming and Deleting Tables
If you have Superuser privileges, you can rename or delete object data tables.
if you have already queried any object from a source drawing, you cannot
rename or delete an object data table .
If you rename a table, the new name must not duplicate an existing table
name.
WARNING When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
See also:
Creating an Object Data Table (page 200)
Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 1245)
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 1267)
Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact your system
administrator.
202 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE Object data is for drawing objects only. For information about the attributes
(properties) of geospatial features, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125). To
set up new feature sources for geospatial features, see Overview of Working with
Feature Sources (page 582).
To modify an object data table
1 Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1805), for Table, select the object
data table to modify.
3 Click Modify.
4 In the Define New Object Data Table dialog box (page 1803), delete, add,
or update the fields:
To add a field, under Field Definition, enter a name, type, description,
and default value for the field. Click Add.
To modify a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to modify.
Under Field Definition, change any information. Click Update.
AutoCAD Map 3D updates the object data field and all instances of
it attached to objects. If you change the data type of a field from Real
to Integer, AutoCAD Map 3D drops everything to the right of the
decimal point, leaving only the value to the left of the decimal point.
To delete a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to delete.
Click Delete.
To rename or remove an object data table
1 Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box, under Table, select the object data
table you want to rename or remove.
3 To rename the table, click Rename. In the Rename Table dialog box (page
1797), enter a new table name and click OK.
To delete the table, click Delete. The table and its object data fields and
field values are deleted from every object to which they are attached.
Setting Up Object Data | 203
NOTE When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu Define Object Data Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATA Command Line
Define Object Data dialog box Dialog Box
Using Data from Feature Sources
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source. You can bring feature source
data into your map using Data Connect. For detailed information about using
feature sources, see Working with Feature Sources (page 582).
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
You can attach a database to your drawing and link records from that table
to objects in your drawing.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
204 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set up data sources for drawings
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To use a database in a drawing (page 206)
To display information about a database table (page 206)
To open a table or database query (page 206)
To open a linked table or query (page 206)
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
(page 209)
To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the
Task Pane (page 209)
To configure a data source automatically (page 213)
To configure a data source manually (page 213)
To modify an existing data link file (page 213)
To connect a data source (page 215)
To disconnect a data source (page 215)
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings
A data source is a database table or a set of tables.
When you attach a data source to a drawing, the data source is listed on the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. You can view and edit data in the data
source or link records from the data source to objects in the drawing.
While keeping the data source attached, you can disconnect the data source
to save resources and reconnect when you are ready to work with the data.
TIP You can work with an external database table without using the database
application itself.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
See also:
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 205
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To use a database in a drawing (page 206)
To display information about a database table (page 206)
To open a table or database query (page 206)
To open a linked table or query (page 206)
To use a database in a drawing
Do one of the following:
From Windows Explorer, drag a database file to the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane.
If the Map Explorer tab does not immediately display the data source,
right-click a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab and select
Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the files it needs to communicate
with the database application. However, for some database types, you must
configure these files yourself.
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Attach Data Source.
To display information about a database table
Right-click the table name in the Map Explorer tab. Click Properties.
You can see information such as column names and types.
To open a table or database query
Double-click the item.
To open a linked table or query
Double-click the link template name.
206 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE If you connect your database using the dbConnect command, the
instructions in this section of the Help will not work . For information on using the
dbConnect command and features, look up "dbconnect" in the help index.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu Attach/Detach Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDB Command Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tab Task Pane
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup Create/Edit a Source of Data External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources Configure Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
File menu Connect/Disconnect Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 207
File menu Attach/Detach Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source Detach Task Pane
Source dialog box Dialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu Connect/Disconnect Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-click Data Sources Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
Attaching a Data Source
To use data from an external data source, attach the data source to the drawing.
When you attach a data source, it appears in the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane along with the tables and database queries associated with it.
For the following data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the
files it needs to communicate with the data source:
.dbf
.db
.mdb
.xls (must have at least one named range)
.udl
For other data sources, you must manually create the files (page 210) before
you can attach the data source.
208 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
Tips
You can set an option (page 235) to have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you for
the database version each time you attach a data source or you can specify a
default version.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files in a
specific directory. If it does not find a UDL file in this directory, it creates a
new UDL file. You can change the directory used for UDL files.
See also:
Configuring a Data Source (page 210)
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions (page 242)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
1 Using Explorer or My Computer, select the database file and drag it to
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
You can drag and drop databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db,
.dbf, .mdb, and .xls.
2 If prompted, select a version and click OK.
3 If prompted, enter your user name and password.
To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the Task
Pane
1 Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane and select Attach.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 209
2 In the Attach Data Source dialog box, select the file location and type.
You can attach databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db, .dbf,
.mdb, and .xls.
3 Click Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the necessary configuration files and attaches the
database.
For information on using specific database types with AutoCAD Map 3D, see
the AutoCAD help.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu Attach/Detach Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDB Command Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tab Task Pane
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
File menu Attach/Detach Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source Detach Task Pane
Source dialog box Dialog Box
Configuring a Data Source
Microsoft Windows uses UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files to point to
specific data sources. The UDL file lists the location of the data, the type of
database, the version of the database, and the appropriate database driver.
For each data source that you use with AutoCAD Map 3D, you must have a
UDL file in the AutoCAD Map 3D data source directory. Once the UDL file
210 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
exists in the data source directory, you can attach the data source to any
drawing.
For most data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D creates the UDL file automatically
when you attach a database. However, for some database types, you must
create the UDL file manually.
When you edit or create a UDL file, you use the Microsoft Windows Data Link
Properties dialog box. For more information on using this dialog box, refer to
your Microsoft Windows documentation.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
Drivers
To read external data files, AutoCAD Map 3D uses drivers that translate the
data to a standard format. The first time you use a data source with AutoCAD
Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the appropriate driver for the data
source. It stores this information in the UDL file.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports these drivers:
Jet provider, which works with Microsoft Access database files
SQL Server provider
Oracle provider
ODBC driver, which works with ODBC-compliant databases
These drivers are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Because the ODBC provider works with many different database types, it
requires additional information about each specific database type. It gets this
information from a Data Source Name (DSN) that registers information about
the database type. You need only one DSN for each database type.
For the following ODBC-compliant databases, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
DSN for you when you attach the database:
Microsoft Access
dBase
Microsoft Excel
Paradox
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 211
Microsoft Visual FoxPro
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D connects to Microsoft Access using the Jet
provider, which does not require a DSN. If you want to connect to Microsoft
Access using the ODBC driver, you must create a DSN.
For information on creating a DSN, refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation.
Displaying Configuration Dialog Boxes
When you attach a data source that does not already have a UDL file, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates the UDL file and determines the settings for Windows data
source configuration.
If the Expert variable is set to 3 or more, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the
settings, and displays the data source configuration dialog boxes so you can
review or modify the settings.
NOTE If you are using the ODBC provider, before you manually create the data
link file, you must have a DSN (Data Source Name) for the database software.
Windows may have created this file when you installed your database software.
See also:
Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To configure a data source automatically (page 213)
To configure a data source manually (page 213)
To modify an existing data link file (page 213)
212 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To configure a data source automatically
Drag and drop one of the following database types onto the Map Explorer
tab of the Task Pane:
Microsoft Access
dBASE
Microsoft Excel (must have at least one named range; do not use
DATABASE or other reserved words as a range name)
Paradox
Microsoft Visual FoxPro
To configure a data source manually
1 At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2 Type a name for the data source and click OK. The data link file will have
the same name.
3 On the Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box, select the
database provider. If you are using the ODBC provider, select the name
of the DSN.
4 Enter additional information as needed and click OK. The Data Link
Properties dialog box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
For help on database configuration, see the AutoCAD help. Additional
information is available by clicking Help in the Data Link Properties dialog
box.
To modify an existing data link file
1 At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2 Select the data source and click OK.
3 Make the modifications and click OK. The Data Link Properties dialog
box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
NOTE If you modify a data link file for a data source that is currently attached
and connected, the changes will not take effect until the next time you connect
the data source.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 213
NOTE If you have more than one copy of a UDL file, be sure to edit the copy in
the AutoCAD Map 3D data links directory.
Quick Reference
EXPERT
Controls whether certain prompts are issued (system variable)
EXPERT Command Line
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup Create/Edit a Source of Data External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources Configure Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
Connecting a Data Source
To free up memory or database connections, you can disconnect a data source
but keep it attached to the current drawing. When you want to use the data
source again, reconnecting is a one-step process.
TIP You can set an option to automatically connect (page 235) to all attached data
sources each time you open a drawing.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
See also:
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
214 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. For information about joining
an external database to a geospatial feature class, see Joining Data to GIS Features
(page 507).
To connect a data source
On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, double-click the data source.
To disconnect a data source
Right-click the data source. Click Disconnect.
Quick Reference
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
File menu Connect/Disconnect Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu Connect/Disconnect Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDB Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-click Data Sources Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 215
Setting Options
You can change many settings that affect the work environment, how the
program starts up, whether users must log in, and settings for your current
drawings, data sources, and more.
See also:
Setting Raster Image Options (page 249)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Setting AutoCAD Options (look up interface options, setting in the help
index)
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 218)
To set Task Pane options (page 221)
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup (page 221)
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221)
To refresh Map Explorer (page 221)
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane (page 222)
To set drawing options (page 225)
To set multi-user options (page 227)
To set system options (page 229)
To specify coordinate system options (page 231)
To specify coordinate tracker options (page 232)
To set coordinate geometry options (page 234)
To change the azimuth bearing quickly (page 234)
To set data source options (page 236)
To change the expert setting (page 236)
To change the default data link file directory (page 236)
To set Data View options (page 238)
To specify Feature Edit Options (page 240)
To set metadata options (page 241)
To associate database versions with files extensions (page 243)
To set query options (page 245)
To have hatch created by property alteration be associative (page 247)
To set AutoCAD Map 3D options (page 249)
216 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Setting Options
The following table summarizes the options you can set and where these
settings are located.
Go to... To change settings for...
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Task
Pane (page 1909) tab.
Default display of the Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Current Drawing (page 1909) tab.
The current drawing
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Multi-User (page 1915) tab
Login and object locking
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
System (page 1916) tab
Log files and data sources
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Current Drawing (page 1909) tab
Coordinate systems
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box
(page 1917)
Coordinate geometry
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Data Source (page 1914) tab
Data sources for drawings (and file exten-
sion associations for them) and the Data
View window
Metadata Options dialog box (page 1484) Metadata
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Query (page 1911)tab
NOTE There are also query-related settings
on the following tabs:
Save Back (page 1913)
System (page 1916)
Task Pane (page 1909)
Queries
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Query (page 1911)tab
Associative hatch for drawing objects with
boundaries
Overview of Setting Options | 217
Go to... To change settings for...
Raster Extension Options dialog box (page
1879)
Raster images
mapimport.ini (page 271) and mapforeign-
fileproperties.ini (page 274)
Import defaults
mapexport.ini (page 269) Export defaults
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 Click a tab.
3 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify options.
4 Click OK to save the settings.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
218 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE Command Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu Task Pane Menu
MAPWSPACE Command Line
Right-click a blank area Close Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) Dialog Box
MAPWSREFRESH
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESH Command Line
Right-click a blank area Refresh Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESH Dialog Box
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
MAPCGAZBASE Command Line
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup. Menu
COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUP Command Line
Overview of Setting Options | 219
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options Dialog Box
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Task Pane Options
You can specify what to display in the Task Pane and what displays when you
start the program.
Map Explorer Categories To Display Lets you select which categories
(nodes) you want to display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
The visibility of some nodes is dependent on the visibility of others. For
example, the Tables node is visible in the Map Explorer tab of Task Pane
only when you select both Data Sources and Tables.
NOTE When you attach drawings with the Topologies node visible, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a list of all the topologies to display under Topologies in Map
Explorer. If you attach a large number of drawings containing topologies at
the same time, the creation of the topology list increases the processing time.
To reduce processing time, hide the Topologies node before attaching the
drawings.
Show Task Pane On Startup Specifies whether to display the Task Pane
when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
Show Properties Palette On Startup Specifies whether to display the
Properties palette when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
The Task Pane
Getting Information About Drawing Objects (page 1143)
To set Task Pane options (page 221)
220 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup (page 221)
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221)
To refresh Map Explorer (page 221)
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane (page 222)
To set Task Pane options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Task Pane
tab.
3 Modify the options you want:
Under Map Explorer Categories To Display, select the categories to
display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Select which palettes you want to show at startup.
4 Click OK.
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the Task Pane
(page 1909) tab.
3 Select Show Task Pane On Startup.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click View tab Palettes panel Map
Task Pane
To refresh Map Explorer
Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh; or enter
mapwsrefresh at the Command prompt.
Setting Task Pane Options | 221
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane
1 Right-click the title bar of the Task Pane and choose Transparency.
2 In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the transparency level.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE Command Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu Task Pane Menu
MAPWSPACE Command Line
Right-click a blank area Close Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) Dialog Box
MAPWSREFRESH
222 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESH Command Line
Right-click a blank area Refresh Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESH Dialog Box
Setting Drawing Options
You can specify general settings and coordinate transformation options for
the current drawing. If you are working with drawings that use different global
coordinate systems, AutoCAD Map 3D standardizes the drawings based on
the global coordinate system of the the current drawing.
NOTE Once you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the
coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source
drawings. The save-back process determines whether adjustments are necessary
to restore objects to the correct coordinate system when you save them back to
source drawings.
NOTE These options affect drawing files that you attach to the current map
drawing. They do not affect geospatial feature sources.
Activate Attached Source Drawings
Set any of the following options:
From Last Session At Startup Activates the drawings that were active the
last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D. If you do not select this option, all
drawings are inactive on startup.
After Attaching Sets the status of a drawing to Active when you attach
it. If you do not select this option, all drawings are inactive when you
attach them.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments: Adjust Sizes And Scales area
Set any of the following options:
For Changes In Units Use this option when you are working with text
and block objects from a source drawing that uses different coordinate
system units than the current drawing. For example, if your source drawing
uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale
Setting Drawing Options | 223
text and blocks so that their size or scale measures in feet rather than
meters.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not adjust the size
or scale of text and block objects. For example, if you have a block that is
5 meters long in the source drawing, it will be 5 feet long when you bring
it into the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you might introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
For Map Distortion Use this option to adjust the size and scale of text
and blocks to correct for map distortion introduced when you represent
a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X remain the same length
when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D scales the two objects
to different lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map
distortion (or grid scale factor).
For Map Distortion in the Adjust Sizes And Scales area is available only if
you selected the previous option, For Changes In Units.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments: Adjust Rotations area
Set any of the following options:
For Map Distortion Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for
map distortion due to the convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis
of a Cartesian coordinate system from true north).
For Zero-Rotation Objects Specifies that text and blocks that have a
rotation value of zero in the source drawing are adjusted to correct
distortion due to the convergence angle.
If you select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the convergence
angle for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you do not select
this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero
rotation value, even if there is a convergence angle.
For Zero-Rotation Objects is available only if you selected the previous
option, For Map Distortion, in the Adjust Rotations area.
224 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Select Adjust Elevations to adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you
select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And
Scales.
Data Source Options
Set any of the following options:
Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens to reconnect the
databases that were connected the last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D.
In the Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List box, enter the
number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
Reducing the size of this list saves memory and reduces the number of
conditions you must scroll through when you search for a particular
condition. The first condition added to the list is the first one dropped
when AutoCAD Map 3D reaches the maximum number you specify.
See also:
Activating a Drawing (page 159)
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
To set drawing options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Current
Drawing (page 1909) tab.
3 Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setting Drawing Options | 225
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Multi-user Options
You can specify options that affect how AutoCAD Map 3D operates for all
users, across all drawings. For example, you can set login or object locking
options. The system administrator controls these settings.
These options apply to all AutoCAD Map 3D users in a single installation and
are set by the system administrator. The settings affect all drawings and, in
network installations, are common to all users.
Force User Login
You must have Superuser privilege to set this option.
If Force User Login is enabled, users are required to log in at AutoCAD Map
3D startup. If a user attempts to halt log in by pressing the Escape key,
AutoCAD Map 3D assigns view-only privileges, and the user cannot alter the
drawing set, edit drawings, or perform queries. Once logged in, a user may
log in under a different login name, even while working in a drawing with
active source drawings.
If Force User Login is not enabled and the user does not log in, AutoCAD Map
3D uses the user's operating system login name to identify the user when
locking objects, creating the .DWK file, and restoring options. A user may log
in using his or her login name while working in drawings, including drawings
with attached source drawings.
Enable Object Locking
Protects objects that are being edited from modification by other AutoCAD
Map 3D users.
NOTE Object locking affects drawing files only. For information on using geospatial
feature data in a multi-user environment, see Overview of Working with Features
(page 684).
226 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are
attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach a
drawing.
Object locking is recommended on networked systems to avoid conflicts when
querying and editing. If you are working on a stand-alone system, you do not
need object locking.
See also:
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 141)
Sharing Attached Drawings (page 731)
NOTE Object locking affects drawing files only. For information on using geospatial
feature data in a multi-user environment, see Overview of Working with Features
(page 684).
To set multi-user options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Multi-User
(page 1915) tab.
3 Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
Setting Multi-user Options | 227
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting System Options
You can specify options that affect the operation of a single installation of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE If you have enabled Force User Login (page 226) on the Multi-User Options
tab, you must log in as a Superuser to set System Options. The default superuser
login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and the password is SUPERUSER (case
sensitive).
Log File Options
Select Log File Active to create a log file for AutoCAD Map 3D messages.
In the File Name box, provide the path and name for a log file in which
to record error, warning, and diagnostic messages. The default name is
acadmap.log. Optionally, you can click Browse to search your file system
for an existing file. AutoCAD Map 3D appends messages to the file you
select.
Specify one of the following under Message Level:
Level 0: Error Messages The log file contains error messages that describe
potential problems you may encounter. For example, if you attempt to
attach a drawing that is already attached, AutoCAD Map 3D produces an
error message that is stored in the log file.
Level 1: Error And Warning Messages The log file contains warning
messages in addition to error messages. Warning messages alert you to
potential problems. For example, if you use duplicate link template names,
AutoCAD Map 3D produces a warning message that is stored in the log
file.
Level 2: Error, Warning And Diagnostic Messages The log file contains
status messages as well as error and warning messages.
Number of Drawings Loaded Into Memory At Once
When you attach and activate drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D opens them in
memory. You do not see the open drawings, but AutoCAD Map 3D must open
them to perform operations.
228 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
The number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can open in memory at the
same time depends on several factors. These include the size of the drawings,
amount of memory, and your system setup.
The number you specify here does not limit the number of active drawings.
AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs them. If your
system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to 200) to
make queries go faster.
Default Directories
To specify a default directory for externally saved queries or cache files, enter
the path in the appropriate box. Or click Browse to locate an existing directory.
NOTE These options affect drawing files only. They do not affect geospatial feature
sources.
See also:
Editing Data in Attached Drawings (page 729)
Overview of Using the Query Library (page 174)
To set system options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the System
(page 1916) tab.
3 Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4 To enhance the performance of AutoCAD Map 3D, click Clear Cache.
5 Click OK.
NOTE If you have enabled Force User Login (page 226) on the Multi-User
Options tab, you must log in as a Superuser to set System Options. The default
superuser login name is SuperUser (not case sensitive) and the password is
SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
Setting System Options | 229
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Coordinate System Options
You can set several options to determine how AutoCAD Map 3D performs
coordinate system transformations and responds when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
These options apply only to the current drawing. Each time you open a
drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect other drawings.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Coordinate transformation allows the manipulation of the coordinate
geometry. Use the Coordinate Transformation Adjustment options to specify
how AutoCAD Map 3D performs coordinate transformations through
adjustments for size, scale, rotation, and elevation.
After you query objects into a drawing from source drawings, do not change
the coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to the
source drawings.
NOTE The AutoCAD Map 3D simple transformation options, available in the
Drawing Settings dialog box, cannot be used with coordinate transformations.
Storing Coordinate Systems in the Drawing
When you open a drawing that has a coordinate system that is not in your
dictionary, AutoCAD Map 3D can add that coordinate system definition to
230 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
your dictionary. You can choose to always add the definitions, never add the
definitions, or have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you each time.
Units
Specify the units to use when displaying geodetic distance.
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
Defining Coordinate Systems (page 89)
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files (page 351)
Setting Drawing Options (page 223)
To specify coordinate system options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), click the Current
Drawing (page 1909) tab.
3 Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, specify how you want
AutoCAD Map 3D to perform coordinate transformations.
4 Click the Coordinate Systems tab (page 1916).
Under Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing, specify how
you want AutoCAD Map 3D to respond when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
Under Geodetic Distance, select the units to use when displaying
geodetic distance.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Setting Coordinate System Options | 231
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Coordinate Tracker Options
You can track multiple coordinate systesm in your map using the Track
Coordinates Dialog Box (page 1601). The Track Coordinates dialog box contains
one or more Coordinate Trackers that display the coordinates of the cursor as
you move around your map. You can specify how much information the
tracker coordinates displays, and the precision of the coordinates.
See also:
Tracking Coordinates (page 1149)
To specify coordinate tracker options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Analyze tab Geo Tools
panel Coordinate Track.
2 In the Track Coordinates dialog box, click . The Coordinate Tracker
Options Dialog Box (page 1600) appears.
3 In the Coordinate Tracker Options dialog box, set any of the following
options:
Display coordinate system descriptions: view a description of the
coordinate system in the Track Coordinates dialog box.
Format Lat/Long as D,M,S: display lat/long coordinates in
degrees/minutes/seconds format.
Include Square ID: view the MGRS square ID when tracking MGRS
coordinates.
Precision Level: specify the precision level of MGRS coordinates.
232 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Lettering Scheme: specify the lettering scheme for MGRS coordinates.
Use AA (MGRS-New) for the WSG84 datum. Use AL (MGRS-Old) for
older datums.
Digitization Location: For the digitization location within a given
MGRS square, specify left top, center top, right top, left center, center,
right center, left bottom, center bottom, or right bottom.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Analyze menu Track Coordinate Sytem. Menu
Track Coordinates
Icon
MAPTRACKCS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing Track
Coordinates
Task Pane
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options
You can set the following coordinate geometry options:
If North on your map is not aligned with the Y axis, specify the angle for
North.
If your COGO information sometimes includes elevation information, set
the COGO commands to prompt for 3D data. If you never include 3D data,
you can turn off this prompt.
Specify units of measure for your coordinate geometry input. For Linear
Units, select US Feet, International Feet, Meters, or Chains. For Angle
Format, select Decimal Degrees, Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Grads, Radians,
or Surveyors Units.
If azimuth bearings on your map are measured relative to South, set the
azimuth base to South. Otherwise, leave it set to North.
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options | 233
Create a text log for coordinate geometry entered through the COGO Input
dialog box (page 1668).
See also:
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands (page 1027)
To set coordinate geometry options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Home tab Draw
panel COGO drop-down COGO Options.
2 In the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box (page 1917), set any of the
following options.
To change the setting for North, under Set North Direction, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number
that represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y
axis.
To have AutoCAD Map 3D always prompt for elevation, grade, or
slope, select Prompt For 3D Data Input.
Specify units of measure for Linear Units and Angle Format.
Specify whether bearings in your map are relative to North or South.
To have AutoCAD Map 3D write a text log for coordinate geometry
entered through the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668) to the AutoCAD
Text Window, check Create Text Log.
3 Click OK to save your settings.
To change the azimuth bearing quickly
1 At the command prompt, enter mapcgazbase.
2 Enter n for North or s for South and press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
234 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
MAPCGAZBASE Command Line
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup. Menu
COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUP Command Line
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options Dialog Box
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings
You can specify several options for attaching data sources for drawing objects.
NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature
data sources.
Specify whether data sources, tables, database queries, and link templates
appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D automatically reconnects the data
sources that were connected the last time you closed this drawing.
Specify the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
Specify the default database version for files with a .db, .dbf, or .xls file
extension that you drop on the Map Explorer tab.
Change the Expert setting to display or hide the data source configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 3 or above displays the configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 2 or less hides the dialog boxes.
Change the default location for UDL (Universal Data Link) (page 2078) files.
See also:
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page 205)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
To set Data View options (page 238)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings | 235
NOTE These options affect drawing data only. They do not affect geospatial feature
data sources.
To set data source options (page 236)
To change the expert setting (page 236)
To change the default data link file directory (page 236)
To set data source options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908):
On the Task Pane (page 1909) tab, select the items to display on the
Map Explorer tab.
On the Current Drawing (page 1909) tab, specify whether to
automatically connect to attached data sources when you open a
drawing and how many filters or conditions should be stored in the
History List.
On the Data Source (page 1914) tab, specify the default driver to use
when you drop an MDB file on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Click Associate to specify the default database version
To change the expert setting
1 At the command prompt, enter expert.
2 Enter an expert setting.
For information on the Expert system variable, look up "system variables" in
the help index.
To change the default data link file directory
1 Click Options.
2 On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, specify the Data Sources
Location.
236 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Data View Options
Data View options apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map 3D environment.
All drawings opened by a particular user display these settings, but they do
not affect others who open the same drawings.
NOTE Data View is for drawing data only. For options related to the Data Table,
which displays the properties of geospatial feature data, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1127).
Display Of Multiple Tables
You can specify the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
Show Each Table In A Separate Data View: Opens a new Data View window
for each open table. Move between tables by clicking the window you
want.
Setting Data View Options | 237
Show All Tables In One Data View: Opens only one Data View window.
When you open a new table, the previous table is automatically closed.
Data Views
You can specify the behavior of the Data View.
Open In Read-Only Mode: Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When
this option is selected, you cannot edit data in the Data View.
Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing: Saves all formatting
changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders, that you make in
the Data View.
Keep On Top: Specifies whether the Data View window remains on top of
all other windows, even when it is not the active window.
See also:
Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects (page 1048)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
NOTE Data View is for drawing data only. For options related to the Data Table,
which displays the properties of geospatial feature data, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1127).
To set Data View options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Data Source
(page 1914) tab.
3 Modify the options you want.
4 To change the number of filters that AutoCAD Map 3D displays in the
Table Filter History dialog box, select the Current Drawing (page 1909) tab.
Enter a new number.
5 Click OK.
238 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options
You can specify options for editing geospatial features.
NOTE These options affect geospatial feature data only. For options related to
editing drawing objects, see Setting Multi-user Options (page 226).
Automatic Checkout: You must check out geospatial features before editing
them. This option allows you check out features automatically when you
edit them.
Automatic Edit Update: When you edit geospatial features in AutoCAD
Map 3D you can also update the original data resources. This option allows
you to automate updating your feature source.
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options | 239
Feature Checkout Options: You can check out geospatial features with as
drawing objects or geospatial features.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652)
and MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB, or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubber sheeting [ADER-
SHEET (page 1648)]).
Allows you to use feature styling. Allows you to use feature styling.
Split Prompt Options: Specify defaults for the prompts displayed when
you split a polygonal feature. Specify whether to display the prompts during
a split operation.
Checkin Prompt Timer: This option allows you to set a recurring check-in
prompt.
See also:
Editing Features (page 701)
Splitting Features (page 705)
NOTE These options affect geospatial feature data only. For options related to
editing drawing objects, see Setting Multi-user Options (page 226).
To specify Feature Edit Options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Feature
Data panel angle-arrow.
240 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2 In the Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929), select the options
you want. If you select the checkin prompt, specify the prompt interval
in minutes.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS
Specifies options for editing features
Feature Edit Options
Icon
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS Command Line
Feature Editing Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Metadata Options
AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 supports FGDC metadata down to the feature source
and object class levels. You can set options for your metadata on the Metadata
Options dialog box. Options for metadata include metadata template import
and export, latitude/longitude precision, and automatic updating.
See also:
Setting Metadata Options (page 1484)
To set metadata options
1 Launch the Metadata Viewer (page 1487).
2 On the Metadata Viewer toolbar, click Options.
3 In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), do any of the following:
To use a metadata template, click the Template tab and select Use
Template and select the template you want from the list. If no
templates appear, click Import and import an FGDC-compliant
template.
Setting Metadata Options | 241
To set Latitude/longitude precision, click the Preference tab and set
the number of digits that display after the decimal point for your
reported latitude and longitude values from 0 to 10. Both values are
6 by default.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Setting InfoCenter Options
The InfoCenter, located at the top of the application window, helps you find
information about AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 quickly. When you type a question
into its text-entry box, the InfoCenter searches the AutoCAD Map 3D
documentation as well as any documents you add to the search settings.
Using the InfoCenter, you can:
Search a custom set of the documents, such as all the User Guides and
Tutorials. If you are a developer, you can set InfoCenter to search your
favorite developer Help.
Search a specific document.
Add your own documents to the search.
Keep up-to-date on your favorite RSS feeds, such as the Knowledge Base
and the Discussion Boards.
For details about the InfoCenter, see the AutoCAD help.
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions
This information applies only to drawing objects.
242 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you drag and drop a database onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane, you can select the version of the database used to create the database.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you each time to specify the version
that was used. If you created all your databases with a specific version of the
software, you can set an option to select that version automatically.
See also:
Attaching a Data Source (page 208)
Configuring a Data Source (page 210)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146)
To associate database versions with files extensions
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), select the Data Source
(page 1914) tab.
3 Under Associate Database Versions With File Extensions, select Associate.
4 In the Associate Database Versions dialog box (page 1675), under each
database name, do one of the following:
To be prompted each time you drag and drop a database file onto the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, select Always Prompt.
To associate a database file extension with a specific version of the
database software, select Always Use. Select the correct version.
When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks the file extension and uses the specified version of
the database software.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions | 243
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Query Options (DWG)
You can set several options that determine how queries run, how they appear
onscreen, and how they are saved.
NOTE These options affect drawing queries only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data when you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When
You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
On the Task Pane Tab
You can hide or display the query node on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
NOTE The Queries option that appears under the Data Sources category is for
database queries.
Options you set on the Task Pane tab apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map
3D environment. All drawings opened by a particular user display these
settings, but they do not affect others who open the same drawings.
On the Query Tab
You can set specific query options, including the default joining operator,
display parameters for preview queries, and options for location conditions.
Options you set on the Query tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the Save Back Tab
You can set options that determine if queried objects are added to the save
set.
244 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Options you set on the Save Back tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the System Tab
You can specify a default directory for externally saved queries.
See also:
The Task Pane
Overview of Queries (page 1235)
NOTE These options affect drawing queries only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data when you add it to your map, see Filtering Features When
You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
To set query options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 Click the Task Pane (page 1909) tab to hide or display the query node on
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
3 Click the Query (page 1911) tab to set specific query options.
4 Click the Save Back (page 1913) tab set options that determine if queried
objects are added to the save set.
5 Click the System (page 1916) tab to specify a default directory for externally
saved queries.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
Setting Query Options (DWG) | 245
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Using Associative Hatch
You can set an option to specify whether hatch objects created by property
alteration queries and thematic mapping are associative.
NOTE This option affects drawing objects only.
Hatch patterns used in thematic maps.
Associative hatch maintains a link between a hatch object and its boundary:
if the boundary is modified, the hatch updates automatically. However, if the
boundary if modified so that it no longer encloses the hatch or if any of the
boundary objects are deleted, the association between the hatch and the
boundary is lost.
When querying multiple files, it is easy to lose the association between a hatch
object and its boundary. If you want associative hatch, the easiest solution
may be to delete the old hatch object and recreate the associative hatch after
you finish modifying the attached drawings.
To maintain an existing association, keep in mind these points:
If you modify an object that is part of a hatch boundary, be sure that your
changes do not break the boundary. That is, you can enlarge a circle, but
do not trim it. You can extend the corner of a square, but do not open it
up.
To save a new associative hatch object to an attached drawing, all the
boundary objects must be in the same attached drawing. In addition, all
objects must be saved to the attached drawing at the same time. If any of
the boundary objects are saved to a different file or are saved at a different
time, the association is lost.
246 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
When you add an associative hatch object to the save set, all its boundary
objects are added automatically. If any of the boundary objects are locked,
the hatch is not added to the save set.
When you remove an associative hatch object from the save set, boundary
objects are removed from the save set automatically.
When you add a boundary object to the save set, hatch objects associated
with that boundary are not added to the save set automatically. To maintain
the association, add the hatch object to the save set.
When combining solid hatch with text, use the DRAWORDER command
to make the text visible on top of the hatch.
See also:
Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects (page 1259)
Setting Polygon Options (page 977)
NOTE This option affects drawing objects only.
To have hatch created by property alteration be associative
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 Select the Query (page 1911) tab.
3 Under Query Options, select Create Associative Hatch Objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
Using Associative Hatch | 247
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Saving Option Settings
AutoCAD Map 3D saves your options in one of three places, depending on
the option type.
Drawing options are saved in the drawing.
User and installation options are saved in the acadmap.ini file. On startup,
AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the acadmap.ini file first in the current
directory, then in all the directories listed in the AutoCAD Map 3D path,
and finally in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. If it does not
find the acadmap.ini file, the program creates the file in the current working
directory.
Multi-user options are saved in the binary acadmap.sys file. The acadmap.sys
file is located in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. After setting
the multi-user options, the system administrator should make the file read
only to prevent users from modifying or deleting it.
NOTE When you uninstall AutoCAD Map 3D, acadmap.ini is also uninstalled. If
you have modified the settings in this file, you should save acadmap.ini prior to
uninstalling. If you uninstall and then reinstall AutoCAD Map 3D, you can simply
replace the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved one. Note that Map release
4 and earlier saved option settings in the ade.ini file. If you uninstall release 4 or
earlier and then install a newer release of AutoCAD Map 3D, you cannot replace
the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved ade.ini. Instead, you will need to
reset your options in the AutoCAD Map 3D Options dialog box.
See also:
Setting Drawing Options (page 223)
Setting Task Pane Options (page 220)
Setting System Options (page 228)
Setting Multi-user Options (page 226)
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 235)
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 82)
248 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set AutoCAD Map 3D options
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908), modify the options
you want.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu AutoCAD Options Menu
OPTIONS Command Line
Right-click in the drawing area Options Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu Autodesk Map Options Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Raster Image Options
or raster images inserted with Raster Extension, set options in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension (page 250)
To set the resource file directory (page 251)
To change how image frames are displayed (page 253)
Setting Raster Image Options | 249
To change the image display quality (page 254)
To choose an image detach method (page 255)
To turn on Shift + left-click (page 256)
To set the correlation defaults (page 257)
To configure memory for images (page 259)
Overview of Setting Raster Image Options
Raster image options are available for images you insert using the Raster
Extension. You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect,
but you may still use the Raster Extension to insert and correlate raster images
with formats that Data Connect does not support, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension
Set the resource file directory. (page 251)
Change how frames are displayed. (page 253)
Change image display quality. (page 254)
Choose a method for detaching images. (page 255)
Use Shift + Left-click to select raster images. (page 256)
Set correlation defaults. (page 257)
Configure image-related memory options. (page 259)
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
250 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting the Resource Files Directory
Resource files store information about the insertion point, scale, rotation, and
density of an image. The Resource File Directory indicates where AutoCAD
Map 3D searches for resource files for images you insert with Raster Extension
(not those you add with Data Connect). Resource files have the same base
name as the raster image with a .res extension.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D looks for associated correlation
sources, such as world files, resource files, and tab files. By default, AutoCAD
Map 3D looks in the directory containing the image. However, for resource
files, you can specify an additional location. The additional location applies
only to resource files (.res). It does not apply to other correlation sources.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
Viewing Image Information (page 474)
Creating a Search Path for Raster Images (page 479)
To set the resource file directory
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Paths
tab.
3 Under Resource File Directory, type the directory path for the resource
files or click Browse to select a directory.
4 If you want AutoCAD Map 3D to search the Resource File Directory before
searching the image directory, select Use Resource File Directory Before
Using Image Directory.
Setting Raster Image Options | 251
5 Click OK to save your changes.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose to display the
image frame in front of an image, behind an image, or you can hide the frame.
When the frame is behind the image, you can still select the image by selecting
the frame. However, if you hide the frame, you cannot select the image by
selecting the frame.
These options do not apply to images you add with Data Connect.
NOTE If you use the Toggle Frames command to hide frames, and then redisplay
them, the frames appear in front of the images.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion (page 465)
Selecting an Image (page 493)
Displaying Image Frames (page 494)
Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images (page 256)
252 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To change how image frames are displayed
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3 Under Display Preferences, select an option from the Image Frame list.
Frame Drawn Above Image displays the frame above the image.
Frame Drawn Below Image hides the frame behind the image. You
can still select the image by selecting the frame.
Frames Off hides the frame. If frames are hidden, you select images
by pressing Shift + left-click select method (page 493).
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Changing Image Display Quality
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose high quality or
draft quality display. High quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between
shading appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the performance of
your system, but may reduce the quality of how some color and grayscale
images appear onscreen. These options do not affect images you add with
Data Connect.
NOTE The display quality setting affects only how AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
image onscreen. It does not alter the contents of the image file.
Setting Raster Image Options | 253
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 498)
Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade (page 496)
To change the image display quality
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3 Under Display Preferences, select a Display Quality option:
High dithers the pixels, making differences in shading more gradual.
If you are using a 256 color palette to display images, dithering helps
make an image that has more than 256 shades appear more realistic.
Draft does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
254 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Choosing an Image Detach Method
When you delete images you added with Raster Extension, from a map,
information about that image is still stored in the map file. To delete this
information, detach the image. You can choose whether images are detached
automatically when you remove the last instance of the image from the map.
This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images (page 482)
To choose an image detach method
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3 Under Image Detach Preferences, select one of the following methods:
Ask Before Detach prompts you to detach an image when you erase
all image frames that reference that image.
Always Detach automatically detaches an image when you erase all
image frames that reference that image.
Never Detach does not detach an image when you erase all image
frames that reference that image.
4 Click OK.
NOTE You can manually detach an image by using the IMAGE command.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Setting Raster Image Options | 255
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can change your selection
method. This is useful when you are zoomed in on the image and you cannot
see the image frame. This option does not affect images you add with Data
Connect.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Selecting an Image (page 493)
Modifying Raster Images (page 489)
To turn on Shift + left-click
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the General
tab.
3 Select Shift + Left-click Image Select to be able to select images (page 493)
by pressing Shift and clicking the left mouse button.
Clear if you do not want to use this feature.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
256 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Correlation Defaults
Most images have correlation data that is stored in the image file header or
in a correlation source file. However, some images may not have any
correlation data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In
addition, if the correlation source does not contain information on scale or
density, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default settings for those items.
NOTE If you have multiple images that require the same insertion point, scale,
rotation, and density, setting default correlation data can save you time .
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion (page 462)
Setting Image Density (page 467)
Viewing Image Information (page 474)
Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 501)
To set the correlation defaults
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Image
Defaults tab.
3 Under Insertion Point, type default insertion point coordinates in the X
and Y boxes. The precision of these points depends on the precision value
in the Drawing Units dialog box. For more information about the
AutoCAD UNITS command, see the AutoCAD help.
Setting Raster Image Options | 257
4 To set an elevation for image frames, type the elevation in the Z insertion
point box.
This value is useful to establish the elevation of a floor plan image, for
example.
5 In the Rotation box, type a default rotation angle for images. The unit
of measurement depends on the selected value in the Drawing Units
dialog box.
6 In the Scale box, type a default scale for images. Image scale does not
change the scale of the vector drawing.
7 In the Density box, type a default density for images. Usually this is the
scanned resolution. For example, if the majority of your images were
scanned at 300 dots per inch, then type 300 in this box.
8 In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the default.
9 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Configuring Memory Use
AutoCAD Map 3D reserves 25% of the total physical memory (RAM) on your
system for inserting images with the Raster Extension. If you increase the
default amount, more of the physical memory is used for images and less is
available for other operations in AutoCAD Map 3D and for other applications
you might be running.
258 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
If you require additional memory for your images, the Raster Extension uses
a temporary swap file. For example, if you insert a 100 MB file, and the Memory
Limit is 8 MB, AutoCAD Map 3D stores the remaining 92 MB in a temporary
file. You can specify where the swap file is created.
You can change the following Raster Extension memory settings:
Temporary File Location The default directory for the temporary swap
files is the Windows temp directory.
TIP For best performance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file. It is
recommended that you do not use the drive where the operating system is
installed as the drive for the swap file unless this is your only local drive.
Memory Limit Specify the maximum amount of computer memory that
AutoCAD Map 3D can use to store image files.
NOTE The more physical RAM you have, the higher you can make your Memory
Limit. The higher the Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. However, do not allocate all available
physical RAM because doing so slows overall performance.
NOTE Close and restart AutoCAD Map 3D after adjusting these settings.
See also:
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Unloading an Image (page 486)
To configure memory for images
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Insert tab Image
panel angle-arrow.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1879), select the Memory
tab.
3 To locate a drive for your temporary swap file location, click Browse under
Temporary File Location, and locate a drive.
Setting Raster Image Options | 259
4 To change the amount of memory reserved for inserting images, type a
new value in the Memory Limit box. Be careful that you do not use all
of your system resources.
NOTE You can click Default to return this setting to the recommended value.
5 Click OK to accept the changes.
You must quit and restart AutoCAD Map 3D for these settings to take effect.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu Raster Options Menu
MAPIOPTIONS Command Line
Raster Extension Options dialog box Dialog Box
Customizing and Automating Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
To create a profile (page 263)
To use a profile (page 263)
To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based (page 269)
To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based (page 269)
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses (page 270)
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files (page 270)
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric (page 270)
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based (page 271)
To specify DGN cell import options (page 272)
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors (page 272)
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages (page
273)
To specify object properties (page 274)
260 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Customizing Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
Use this method... To customize or automate this...
Save a profile in the Export dialog box.
See Using Profiles (page 262)
Export settings
Save a profile in the Import dialog box.
See Using Profiles (page 262)
Import settings
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files (page 264)
Export defaults
Edit the mapimport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files (page 264)
Import defaults
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Export dialog box Dialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 261
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Using Profiles
To reuse or share your settings, save them as a profile.
Export Profiles
When you save an export profile, it does not store the current file name or
the current selection set.
When you load an export profile, if the specified data source doesn't exist,
Include Table Data is set to No.
Import Profiles
When you save an import profile, it does not store the current file name.
When you load an import profile, the table settings are reset for any input
layers that match an input layer name in the saved profile. Layers that do not
match an input layer in the saved profile are not reset.
If the specified coordinate system code is not in the dictionary, the
coordinate system is set to <None>.
If the data field name for a layer does not exist, the drawing layer is set to
Layer 0. If the specified drawing layer does not exist, it will be created.
If the data field name to use for the block name does not exist, or if the
specified block does not exist, the block is set to ACAD_POINT.
When you load an import profile containing object class settings, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks for potential problems and handles them as follows:
If the appropriate object classification file is not attached to the drawing,
the object class settings are ignored.
If the object class settings for a layer contradict the import file, the object
class settings are not applied.
If the specified object class does not exist, the object class assignment is
set to <None>.
If the object class attribute settings conflict with the import file, AutoCAD
Map 3D displays the Conflict Resolution dialog box (page 1701).
262 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Compatibility with Previous Releases
Profiles saved with AutoCAD Map 3D 2004-2007 and versions 4.5, 5, and
6 are compatible with this release.
Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or earlier cannot be used
with this release.
Profiles created in this release may contain additional information that
cannot be used with previous releases. Such incompatible profile
information is ignored when a profile is used in a previous release.
See also:
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
To create a profile
1 In the Import dialog box (page 1711) or Map Export dialog box (page 1723),
specify the settings to save.
2 Click Save.
3 Enter a name for the profile.
To use a profile
1 In the Import dialog box (page 1711) or Map Export dialog box (page 1723),
click Load.
2 Select the profile.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 263
Export dialog box Dialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
Some of the defaults for import and export settings are stored in .ini
(initialization) files. When you use a new format with AutoCAD Map 3D, the
information about that format is added automatically to the .ini files. However,
in some instances, you may want to modify these files yourself. In addition,
you can set some formatting options in these files.
You can modify the following .ini files:
mapexport.ini Set options to export a file-based format as a folder based
format (which is especially useful for Shapefiles); to specify how to segment
arcs and circles; to define the default seed file for exporting DGN files
(which determines defaults such as units of measure and 2D vs. 3D); and
to specify language encoding settings for exporting GML data in Asian
languages.
mapimport.ini Set options to use for file or folder selection; to set default
import options for DGN; to import object colors to their RGB (True Color)
equivalent; and to specify language encoding settings for importing GML
data in Asian languages.
mapforeignfileproperties.ini Set options to specify linetype, line weight,
font, and justification.
264 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Exporting to ArcView Shape Files
If you are exporting to ArcView Shape files, you can treat it as a folder-based
format. To do this, you must modify the following items in the MapExport.ini
file:
Specify that it requires a folder rather than a file.
Specify that it requires a prefix name.
Specify that it no longer requires a type (point/line/polyline/text).
If you modify these items, be sure to modify them only for a driver that
supports this change.
Segmenting Certain Entity Types When Exporting
When you export Splines and polylines with bulges, they are broken into
polyline segments. The SegmentationDegrees option determines the number
of degrees used for segmentation. By default, SegmentationDegrees is 2 degrees.
In addition, when you exporting to a file format that does not support arcs
or ellipses, such as Shape or Coverage, or does not support ellipses that have
axes at an angle, such as MIF/MID, you can further modify the segmentation
by changing the value for FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE. By default,
FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE is 5 degrees.
You can change SegmentationDegrees and FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE
to be larger or smaller.
Exporting to MicroStation DGN Files
When exporting to DGN files, AutoCAD Map 3D reads a seed file to determine
default information, such as whether the destination DGN file is be in imperial
units or metric and whether the file is 2D or 3D. There are separate seed files
for DGn version 7 and version 8. For more information about seed files, see
MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 (page 405).
To change the default units of measure (or other defaults), you must change
the default seed files specified in the MapExport.ini file.
Specifying the File and Folder Selection Options to Use for Import
By default, when you import ArcView Shape files, MapInfo MIF/MID, MapInfo
TAB, or VPF files, you can select one or more files in a folder to import. This
is called multi-select.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 265
If you want, you can change the settings in the mapimport.ini file so that these
formats are considered folder-based formats (you select a folder and all the
files in the folder are imported) or single-select formats (only one file can be
selected for import). Note that VPF can be folder-based or multi-select only.
Importing DGN Cells
When you import data from a DGN file, you can specify many of the DGN
import options available in Driver Options.
Importing Object Colors as RGB (True Color) Colors
By default, objects are imported using the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
When you import from DGN or MIF/MID, you can specify that objects
maintain their RGB color values.
Even if you import using RGB colors, white objects are always imported to
the ACI White, which displays white on a black background and black on a
white background. Black objects are assigned the ByLayer color. If you want
to export objects to MIF/MID as black, change the layer color to black before
exporting.
Note that if your Model Tab Background color is something other than Black
or White and you import using RGB colors, you may not be able to see objects
whose color is close to the background color.
Language Encoding Settings for Importing and Exporting GML Data
When exporting GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that
mapexport.ini contains the language encoding settings needed to export valid
GML data for the language you want.
Using Fixed schema mode when exporting is recommended, as it can recognize
certain multi-byte characters that can be problematic in Create mode.
When importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that the
language encoding settings specified in AutoCAD Map 3Ds mapimport.ini
file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings must match for the
import to be successful.
Adding Custom Tags
If you are familiar with the options for a driver, you can add custom tags. Use
the format:
Driver:XXX
266 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Where XXX is the code you want to send to the driver. Add the line to the
appropriate section of the MapExport.ini file. Incorrect tags will have
unpredictable results.
Location of the .ini File
When exporting, AutoCAD Map 3D looks first for the .ini file in the current
directory. If no .ini file is there, it uses the .ini file in the C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1
folder. To always use the same settings, do not create additional .ini files.
Changing Font, Line Style, Line Weight, or Justification
You can set several formatting options in the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [DGN_V7_FieldMappping] or [DGN_V8_FieldMapping] section to
enable a particular formatting option:
igds_font=MapFont
igds_justification=MapJustification
igds_weight=MapLineWeight
igds_style=MapLineStyle
DGN Fonts
Use the [DGN_V7_Font] section or [DGN_V8_Font] section to map DGN font
numbers to textstyles that you've defined.
DGN Line Styles
Use the [DGN_V7_LineStyle] or [DGN_V8_LineStyle] section to map DGN line
styles to line styles loaded in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
DGN Line Weight
Use the [DGN_V7_LineWeight] or [DGN_V8_LineWeight] section to map
DGN lineweights to allowable AutoCAD Map 3D lineweight values.
The DGN line weight range is 0-31. AutoCAD Map 3D line weights are in
100ths of a millimeter and only the following values are supported: 0, 5, 9,
13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158,
200, 211, -1, -2 and -3. The AutoCAD Map 3D values -1, -2, and -3 indicate
ByLayer, ByBlock, and by line weight default respectively.
DGN Justification
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 267
Use the [DGN_V7_Justification] or [DGN_V8_Justification] section to map the
DGN justification to AutoCAD vertical and horizontal modes or AutoCAD
attachment.
DGN justification values range from 0-14:
0 is Left/Top, 8 is Center/Bottom, 1 is Left/Center, 9 is Right Margin/Top, 2
is Left/Bottom, 10 is Right Margin/Center, 3 is Left Margin/Top, 11 is Right
Margin/Bottom, 4 is Left Margin/Center, 12 is Right/Top, 5 is Center/Bottom,
13 is Right/Center, 6 is Center/Top, 14 is Right/Bottom, 7 is Center/Center,
Default is 5
The following values are supported for AutoCAD Map 3D justifications:
TopLeft, TopCenter, TopRight, MiddleLeft, MiddleCenter, MiddleRight,
BottomLeft, BottomCenter, BottomRight, BaseLeft, BaseCenter, BaseRight,
BaseAlign, BottomAlign, MiddleAlign, TopAlign, BaseFit, BottomFit, MiddleFit,
TopFit, BaseMid, BottomMid, MiddleMid, TopMid
MIF Justification
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right.
When importing from MIF to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping in the table
is used.
Arc/INFO and E00 Justification
Use the [ARCINFO_Justification] and [E00_Justification] sections to set
justification for Arc/INFO and E00.
When importing from Arc/INFO or E00 to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping
in the table is used.
See also:
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Supported Formats (page 1412)
To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based (page 269)
To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based (page 269)
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses (page 270)
268 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files (page 270)
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric (page 270)
To specify DGN cell import options (page 272)
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based (page 271)
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors (page 272)
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages (page
273)
To specify object properties (page 274)
To export to SHP as folder-based rather than file-based
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder
2 Find the [SHP] section.
3 Specify File=False.
4 Specify Rootname=True.
5 Specify EntTypes=All.
6 Save and close the ..ini file.
To export to SHP as file-based rather than folder-based
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 Find the [SHP] section.
3 Specify File=True.
4 Specify Rootname=False.
5 Specify EntTypes=Types.
6 Save and close the .ini file.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 269
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs, and
ellipses
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 Find the [Options] section.
3 To change the segmentation of splines and polylines with bulges, edit
the SegmentionDegrees value to the number you want.
By default, the value is two degrees.
4 To change the segmentation of arcs and ellipses, find the File section
pertaining to one of the following file formats: Arc/INFO, E00, MIF,
MapInfo, or Shape.
5 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the following line:
Driver:FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE=5
6 Change the FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE value to the number you
want.
7 Save and close the .ini file.
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 Find the [DGCN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section . This is where the default seed
file is specified.
3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
270 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2 Find the [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section.
3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
For example, change the default seed file to one that specifies imperial
units rather than metric:
Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn"
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select, or
file-based
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder
2 Find the File section pertaining to one of the following file formats:
ShapeFile, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF.
The File section is preceded by a comment such as, "This section
determines how you want to Import MIF/MID files" and has several lines
containing the word File.
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
File=MultiSelect
The format will be considered a multi-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one or more individual files in
the Import Location dialog box to include in the import process.
File=SingleSelect
The format will be considered a single-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one file only in the Import
Location dialog box. Note that this is not a valid option for VPF.
File=False
The format will be considered a folder-based format and all files in
the selected folder will be included in the import process.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 271
4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To specify DGN cell import options
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 Find the [DGN_V7_V8] section.
NOTE You can also use the Cell Expansion options in the Import dialog box
(page 405) to expand cells as blocks or points, or to explode them.
3 Find Driver:DGN_XPAND_CELL.
4 Change this to CELLS2BLOCKS, EXPLODECELLS, or CELLS2POINTS.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 Find the Color section for either DGN_V7-V8 or MIF (MapInfo).
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
Color=Closest ACI only
The RGB values from the file will be converted to the closest ACI
value.
Color=RGB only
The RGB values from the file will be preserved. Objects whose color
is black (0,0,0) will be assigned the color ByLayer. Objects whose color
is white (255,255,255) will be assigned the color ACI White.
Color=Equivalent ACI and RGB
272 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
For any RGB value that exactly matches an ACI, the objects will be
imported using the ACI color value. All other objects will use their
RGB values.
4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages
1 Open the mapimport.ini or mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
2 Find the [GML2] section.
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the lines for the language
encoding settings you want to use. For example, for mapimport.ini, here
are the settings you can use for Japanese.
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
For mapexport.ini you can use:
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_OUTPUT_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Below, is a summary of some of the specific settings you can use.
Possible Settings Language
Big5 Chinese
GB2312
GB18030
GBK
EUC-JP Japanese
Shift-JIS
EUC-KR
KSC5601
Korean
4 Save and close the .ini file.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 273
To specify object properties
1 Open the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\R18.1 folder.
2 For information on each of the settings, refer to the instructions in the
file.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Export dialog box Dialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Setting Up and Running Workflows
Use workflows to automate a set of activities.
To use workflows (page 276)
To run a workflow (page 278)
To edit a workflow (page 284)
274 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To create a workflow (page 287)
To change the display of the Workflow Designer window (page 289)
Overview of Workflows
Use workflows to automate a set of activities, such as the steps involved in an
overlay analysis (page 1309).
A workflow specifies the activities to perform and the parameters for those
activities. For example, in an overlay, the workflow specifies the feature classes
or layers to compare. You can specify that workflows prompt at run time for
the values of the parameters. If you prefer, you can specify the parameters in
the workflow itself and turn off the prompts. You can edit an existing workflow
or create one.
You can run built-in or custom workflows. The built-in workflows include:
Overlay: Connect to (and create layers for) two data stores. Perform an
intersection overlay. Use the result of that overlay operation to erase the
portions of the layers that were within the intersection.
Connect and Edit: Connect to SDF, SHP, and WMS data stores and add
the connected data to AutoCAD Map 3D. Execute the AutoCAD command
Pedit (pausing for user input), and then check in all features.
Batch-save .Layer Files: Connect to each SDF file in a specified directory
and add it to AutoCAD Map 3D. Save each resulting Display Manager layer
as a .layer file.
Connect, Analyze, and Print: Connect to a data store, add its data to
AutoCAD Map 3D as a Display Manager layer, and change the symbol for
that layer. Select a set of features for buffer analysis, create the buffer, and
change the symbol for the resulting buffer layer. Select the features on the
buffer layer and display their attributes. Plot the map.
Select, Zoom, and Display Features: Load two .layer files. Prompt the person
running the workflow to select some features manually. Zoom to the
extents of the selected features and highlight them. Display the attributes
for the highlighted features. Select a different set of features by location.
Zoom to the extents of the selected features and highlight them. Display
the attributes for the highlighted features.
Overview of Workflows | 275
NOTE If you do not see the built-in workflows in the drop-down list of workflows,
click Open Workflow From File in that list and navigate to the Program
Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\Sample\Workflow folder. Select the .xoml
file for the workflow to open.
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow. If
you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The workflow
must be saved before it is run.
Use the Workflow Designer to create or edit the sequence and parameters for the
activities in the workflow.
To use workflows
To run a workflow (page 278)
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
To change the display of the Workflow Designer window (page 289)
276 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN
Allows you to use a saved workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
Open Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN Command Line
MAPWORKFLOWRUN
Runs a workflow
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Workflow Designer.
Menu
Run Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWRUN Command Line
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE
Creates a workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE Command Line
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT
Edits a workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
Edit Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT Command Line
Overview of Workflows | 277
Running Workflows
A workflow automates a set of activities. A workflow can include activities
such as the following:
Connecting to data
Creating a Display Manager layer for a geospatial data store
Performing an overlay analysis (page 1309)
Chaining to another workflow
You can run any workflow, even if you did not create it. Recently used
workflows are listed on the Workflow drop-down list, which also contains an
option for opening any saved workflow. If the workflow requires information
from you (for example, the location of a file or data store), it prompts you
during run-time. For a list of the sample workflows provided with AutoCAD
Map 3D, see Overview of Workflows (page 275).
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow. If
you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The workflow
must be saved before it is run.
To run a workflow
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, on the Tools tab Workflow
panel, select a workflow from the list.
If the workflow you want is not in the list, click Open Workflow From
File at the bottom of the list.
2 Click .
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow.
If you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The
workflow must be saved before it is run.
278 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
3 If prompted, specify the values for the parameters of the workflow.
For example, the Overlay workflow requires you to specify the data store
to connect to.
If the workflow requires parameters for any of its activities,
it displays a prompt.
To connect to database, specify login credentials.
To connect to a file, select the appropriate provider and click and
navigate to the file.
To connect to a SHP folder instead of a file, select the SHP provider
and click the folder icon to specify the folder.
Running Workflows | 279
The workflow performs the activities in its definition and displays the
result.
For example, the built-in Overlay workflow connects to the specified data
stores, performs the overlay, and displays the resulting layers in your
map. The overlay itself is saved to the specified SDF file. AutoCAD Map
3D Connects to that SDF file and adds a Display Manager layer for it. The
connections appear in Map Explorer and in the Data Connect window.
NOTE If the workflow fails, an error message displays. Open the Workflow
Designer to find the error. The activity that failed displays a red X or an
exclamation mark.
4 If you changed any parameters in response to a prompt, you can save or
discard the changes when the workflow is complete.
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN
Allows you to use a saved workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
Open Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN Command Line
MAPWORKFLOWRUN
Runs a workflow
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Workflow Designer.
Menu
Run Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWRUN Command Line
280 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Editing or Creating Workflows
A workflow automates a set of activities. You can change any existing workflow
or create one from scratch. For example, change the predefined Overlay
workflow to perform a Union, rather than an Intersect. Create a workflow to
connect to a set of data stores and add Display Manager layers for them.
Use the Workflow Designer to edit or create workflows.
Activities in the workflow appear as a diagram in the Workflow Designer.
Utility and AutoCAD Map 3D Activities
The Activity panel on the right side of the Workflow Designer contains two
categories of activities. AutoCAD Map 3D activities are specific to AutoCAD
Map 3D (including an activity that runs AutoCAD commands).
Utility activities are generic, and are based on C# syntax. They include the
following types of activities:
Directory commands (such as listing the contents of a folder)
Editing or Creating Workflows | 281
Logical commands (such as If/Else and For Each)
Workflow structure commands (such as Parallel, Sequence, and Prompt
User).
For information about the available activities, see Workflow Activity Input
dialog boxes (page 2025).
Parallel and Sequence Activities
In a workflow, parallel activities are independent of one another. For example,
when connecting to two data stores, parallel connections ensure that the
second connection executes even if the first one fails.
A sequence activity depends on previous activities. For example, within the
parallel activity at the top of the overlay workflow are two sets of sequence
activities. Each one connects to a particular data store and then creates a layer
for that data store. If the connection fails, the layer cannot be created.
Setting Activity Parameters
Each workflow activity has a set of parameters. Optionally, you can set default
parameters and specify that the workflow display a prompt at run-time. The
person running the workflow can then substitute other values. For example,
you can set default data stores for an overlay, but allow others to substitute
different data stores when they run the workflow.
Some parameters are required. For example, a Connect To Data Store activity
requires the name of the provider and the location of the data store to connect
to. Some parameters are optional, for example, the Display Name for the
activity. All optional parameters have default values you can change.
NOTE Although Display Name is optional, it is a good idea to name all activities.
If activities are not named, you can confuse them when you bind a parameter of
one activity to the output of a previous one. See the following section.
Binding Parameters
Often, a sequence activity is bound to a preceding activity. When you bind an
activity, you set its parameter to be the result of a previous activity. For
example, you can use the output of an activity that creates a layer as the source
layer for a subsequent overlay operation.
282 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Bind the parameter for an activity to a property from a
previous activity.
Adding Activities to Workflows
If you can write simple code in a .NET-compliant language, you can add
activities to the Workflow Designer. Workflow activities perform predetermined
functions based on predetermined sets of inputs.
Use the sample activity set (Automation) as a model. Automation contains
activities for running AutoCAD Map 3D in an automated fashion, without
using the actual application. The files for this sample activity are installed
with the ObjectARX SDK.
Editing or Creating Workflows | 283
Build your activities in a .NET class library (a .dll file). Place this .dll file in the
\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\PlugIns\Workflow\Activities folder and
restart AutoCAD Map 3D. The activities then appear in the Workflow Designer.
For more information on creating custom workflow activities, see the
sdk.doc.main.chm.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
To edit a workflow
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab Workflow panel.
Select a workflow from the drop-down list.
If the workflow you want is not in the list, click Open Workflow From
File at the bottom of the list. After you open a workflow, select it from
the list.
NOTE If you use Windows 7, you must have write access to run a workflow.
If you have limited access, AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save the workflow. The
workflow must be saved before it is run.
2 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab Workflow
panel Edit.
3 In the Workflow Designer (page 2022), pan or zoom (page 289) as needed.
4 If necessary, expand the activity to edit.
For example, to change the settings for activities inside the Parallel
Activity at the top of the workflow, click its plus sign. The Parallel Activity
contains activities for the feature classes that are compared in the Overlay
workflow and creates the Display Manager layers for these feature classes.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and
While), click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette
that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button
that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
5 To set the parameters for an activity (page 2025), do any of the following:
Double-click the activity box.
Click .
284 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Right-click the activity and click Set Up Parameters.
For information about the available activities and their parameters, see
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). For a tutorial on
workflows, see Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow.
6 To bind an activity to the output of a previous activity from the input
editor, do the following:
In the activity input dialog box for the activity, click the down arrow
next to the parameter to bind.
Under Results Of Previous Actions, click the property to bind to.
To use a layer created by a previous activity, select it from the
list under Results Of Previous Actions.
Editing or Creating Workflows | 285
NOTE There is a shortcut for adding an activity and automatically binding
it to the previous activity. Right-click an activity and click the activity to add.
For example, right-click an Overlay activity and click Add Feature Layer to
create a new Display Manager layer that stores the output of the Overlay
operation.
7 Optionally, do any of the following:
To add another activity, drag it from the Activities panel to the desired
position in the workflow diagram, or right-click the activity that
precedes the new one.
When you right-click, the list contains activities that would logically
follow the current one. When you add an activity in this way, you
can automatically bind it to the one you right-clicked. For example,
right-click an Overlay activity and click Add Feature Layer to create a
new Display Manager layer that stores the output of the Overlay
operation.
To delete an activity, click on its box.
To turn the run-time prompt for an activity on or off, click on its
box.
When the run-time prompt is on, anyone running this workflow must
provide the input for this activity. For example, the person running
the workflow must provide data store connection information for a
Connect To Data Store activity.
To disable or enable the activity, click on its box.
Disable an activity temporarily to resolve problems with a workflow.
If you are not sure which activity is causing the problem, disable them
one at a time when you run the workflow. This can isolate the issue.
Undo or redo any changes during this editing session using
8 Save any changes to the workflow by clicking at the top of the
Workflow Designer window.
To save your changes as a new workflow, click instead.
Workflows saved in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 format cannot be opened
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2010. To use your workflow with AutoCAD Map
3D 2010, make sure that the workflow contains only activities that were
286 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
supported in that version. Then use Save As and change Save As Type to
Map 3D 2010 Workflow File. To maintain the version formatting, you
must continue to use the 2010 Save As option each time you save the
workflow
9 Click to run the workflow from within the Workflow Designer,
which validates the activities.
As each activity executes successfully, a green check mark appears at the
top right corner of the activity box. If an exclamation mark appears
instead of the check mark, the activity is missing parameter values. Click
the exclamation point to see what is missing and correct the problem. If
a red X appears instead of the check mark, the activity failed.
Click the status link in the Workflow Status area (at the bottom of the
Workflow Designer window) to see the log.
In the log window, find the row for the activity that failed. The description
column explains the error.
10 Optionally, click to print the workflow.
To create a workflow
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Tools tab Workflow
panel New.
2 To create a workflow that uses multiple data connections, add a Parallel
activity.
In the Workflow Designer (page 2022), click the System panel header
on the right side of the window.
Drag the Parallel activity to the diagram area in the Workflow Designer
(where you see Drag And Drop Map Activities Here).
Use a separate Sequence activity for each connection. By default, the
Parallel activity has two Sequence activities. If you need more, drag
them into the Parallel activity.
For each connection, drag a Connect To Data Store activity into a
Sequence activity.
To create a layer for these connections, use an Add Feature Layer
activity. Drag this activity just below each Connect To Data Store
activity (within the Sequence activity for that connection).
Editing or Creating Workflows | 287
3 To create a workflow that uses a single data store, do the following:
Drag the Connect To Data Store activity to the diagram area in the
Workflow Designer (where you see Drag And Drop Map Activities
Here).
Optionally, create a layer for the connection by dragging a Create
Feature Layer activity just below it.
4 Add any other desired activities.
For information about the available activities and their parameters, see
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025). For a tutorial on
workflows, see Lesson 5: Edit a Predefined Workflow.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and
While), click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette
that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button
that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
5 Save the workflow by clicking at the top of the Workflow Designer
window.
Workflows saved in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 format cannot be opened
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2010. To use your workflow with AutoCAD Map
3D 2010, make sure that the workflow contains only activities that were
supported in that version. Then use Save As and change Save As Type to
Map 3D 2010 Workflow File. To maintain the version formatting, you
must continue to use the 2010 Save As option each time you save the
workflow
6 Click to run the workflow from within the Workflow Designer,
which validates the activities.
As each activity executes successfully, a green check mark appears at the
top right corner of the activity box. If an exclamation mark appears
instead of the check mark, the activity is missing a parameter. If a red X
appears, the activity failed. Click the link in the Workflow Status area (at
the bottom of the Workflow Designer window) to see the log.
7 Optionally, click to print the workflow.
288 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE
Creates a workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
MAPWORKFLOWCREATE Command Line
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT
Edits a workflow
Click Setup menu Workflow Designer. Menu
Edit Workflow
Icon
MAPWORKFLOWEDIT Command Line
Changing the Workflow Designer Display
As you work in the Workflow Designer, you can do the following:
Adjust the magnification and focus of the design area
Refresh the display
Hide or show the Settings and Activities panels
The Settings panel displays the parameters for the selected activity in an
editable table. The Activities panel displays the list of activities you can add
to a workflow.
To change the display of the Workflow Designer window
To pan or zoom, use these techniques:
To move to a different part of the workflow, use the scroll bars or click
Pan.
To zoom in or out, adjust the magnification slider.
To zoom to the extents of the workflow, click Show The Entire
Workflow.
Changing the Workflow Designer Display | 289
Pan, zoom, or show
the entire workflow.
To show or hide the activities panel, click
To show or hide the Settings panel for the selected activity, click .
In the Settings panel, you can view and edit values for the parameters of
the current activity. Click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse
button that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
NOTE To set parameters for some utility activities (For Each, If/Else, and While),
you must use the Properties palette (instead of the input editor).
To refresh the display, click .
290 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Bringing In Data
Overview of Bringing In Data
A map file in AutoCAD Map 3D is a specialized drawing (DWG) file in which
you can combine data from many sources. A map file holds all the information
required to create, edit, view, and publish your map, including the following:
AutoCAD drawing objects and information about attached drawing files
Attribute or point data stored in a spreadsheet or database that can be linked
to drawing objects
Information required to connect to databases like Oracle and ArcSDE
Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in a relational
database, such as Microsoft
Spatial,
PostgreSQL/PostGIS, and MySQL
Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in a geospatial
data file format, such as an ESRI
SHP, Microsoft
SQLite, or Autodesk
SDF
file
Information required to connect to geospatial features stored in middleware,
such as ESRI
ArcSDE
Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the OpenGIS
Consortium web site.
You can import GML into and export it out of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Importing
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import GML version 2 or version 3. There
is a separate drop-down option that also allows you to import Ordnance Survey
of Great Britain MasterMap GML version 2 files.
Because the GML format is flexible and allows you to specify your own
schemas, semantics, and options, there are many variations of the format.
AutoCAD Map 3D reads many of these, but some may not be compatible with
the AutoCAD Map 3D GML driver.
In addition, before importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify
that the language encoding settings specified in the AutoCAD Map 3D
mapimport.ini file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings must
match for the import to be successful. For more information, see Customizing
the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264).
Driver Options
GML has no import driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) (page 1429)
412 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To verify language encoding settings for import from GML (page 413)
To import GML files (page 413)
To verify language encoding settings for import from GML
Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapimport.ini file match
the settings in your incoming file.
For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
(page 264).
To import GML files
Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard). SDTS is an
import-only format. You cannot export to this format.
Supported Import Formats | 413
Importing
When you select an SDTS catalogue file, AutoCAD Map 3D imports objects
and attributes from the dataset specified in the catalogue file. Typically, a
dataset is a group of .ddf files with the same filename prefix.
AutoCAD Map 3D imports only one record per object. If an object has multiple
records attached, only one of the records will be imported.
Driver Options
SDTS has no import driver options.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To import SDTS files
Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Importing SQLite Files
SQLite is a file-based geospatial format. You can connect to SQLite files (page
331) to edit the original data in its source, or import it to convert the data into
AutoCAD drawing objects. Once you import data, the connection to the
original source is lost. If you update the source, your changes do not appear
in the imported copy.
414 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
SQLite is like SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
Advantages
SQLite has the following advantages over DWG:
It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG
It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full
relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or
Oracle.
A SQLite file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature
classes.
It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
Importing
When importing SQLite, you can import each feature class in the file to a
separate layer. You can specify how you want to bring in attribute data and
points. You can also set an option to import polygons as closed polylines.
Driver Options
SQLite has no import driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
To import a SQLite file
Import a SQLite file (page 381) Converts the current contents of the file
to drawing objects and inserts them in your map.
Supported Import Formats | 415
To access and work with SQLite
Connect to SQLite (page 331) Allows you to view and edit the SQLite data
live in its native format.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files
You can import Vector Product Format (VPF) files into AutoCAD Map 3D. You
cannot export to this format.
VPF is a standard format, structure, and organization for large geographic
databases that are based on a georelational data model. It is commonly used
by military departments and defense agencies.
The VPF specification is available on the National Imaging and Mapping Agency
(NIMA) web site
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers Vector Product Format (VPF) a
multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual files
during a single import process. You can edit the mapimport.ini file to specify
that all files in the folder are included in the import or that only one file can
be selected for import.
NOTE VPF data sets can be very large. You can use a spatial filter to limit the size
of the DWG you create from VPF data. See Specifying an Area to Import (page
417).
416 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Driver Options
VPF has no import driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D considers VPF a folder-based
format
Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as
folder-based, multi-select, or file-based (page 271).
To import from VPF
Use the Import instructions. (page 381)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Specifying an Area to Import
When importing data from another file format, you can specify (or limit) the
area into which incoming objects will be imported.
Specifying an Area to Import | 417
You can import objects into the current drawing area, into an area you define
in the map, or import the entire file.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To filter the data to specify the area to add to your map, see Filtering
Features When You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
To specify an area to import
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), under Spatial Filter, specify whether
to limit the area into which data will be imported:
None Place no area limits on the incoming file.
Current Display Limit the import to the current drawing area.
Define Window Limit the import to a rectangular area you define.
To use this option, click Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to
define the area. Objects within the rectangular window are imported.
AutoCAD Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, AutoCAD
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
418 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. By default,
AutoCAD Map 3D imports data to an AutoCAD layer with the same name as
the layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the input file. If an
AutoCAD layer with this name already exists, objects are copied to that layer.
Otherwise, a new AutoCAD layer is created and objects are copied to the new
layer.
If you assign the input layer to an object class with a layer property, the default
will instead be the default AutoCAD layer defined by the object class, and the
Drawing Layer field displays <By Class>.
You can specify one of the following layer options:
Put objects on an existing AutoCAD layer.
Put objects on a new AutoCAD layer.
Put objects on an AutoCAD layer based on data attached to the objects.
Put objects on the AutoCAD layer specified by the assigned object class
(available only if you assigned the input layer to an object class with a
layer property).
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers (page 355)
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import | 419
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the target drawing layer for
each input layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming
file.
3 To change the AutoCAD layer, click in the Drawing Layer field for the
input layer to change. In the Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) (page
1719), do one of the following:
To import objects to an existing AutoCAD layer, click Create on
Existing Layer. Click the down arrow and select the layer.
To import objects to a new AutoCAD layer, click Create On New Layer.
Click in the cell and enter a layer name.
To import objects to an AutoCAD layer whose name is specified in
data stored on the imported object, click Use Data Field For Layer
Name. Select the data field to use. Click OK to close the Layer Mapping
dialog box.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value specifies a layer that already exists, the
object is imported to that layer. If the data value specifies a layer that
does not exist, the layer is created. If an object does not have a data
value attached, the object is imported to Layer 0.
To import objects to a layer with the same name as the input layer,
right-click the Drawing Layer column heading in the table. Click Use
Input Layer Names.
To import objects to the layer specified by the assigned object class,
verify that <By Class>; is displayed in the Drawing Layer field. If it is
not, type <By Class>; into the field.
NOTE If the layer specified in the Drawing Layer column is different from the one
specified in Object Class, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the Drawing Layer setting unless
it violates the range specified by the Object Class.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
420 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Assigning an Object Class During Import
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
objects, you can assign them to an existing object class in the AutoCAD Map
3D drawing and map the incoming attribute data to the object class definition.
For example, objects being imported from a SHP input layer can be classified
and included in the "LAND USE" object class, and data values from the SHP
file can be mapped to the "LAND USE" object class definition.
Because some of the incoming data values may conflict with data ranges
defined in the object class, AutoCAD Map 3D gives you the option of using
the object class default values instead of the incoming data values for values
that are not within the acceptable range. This ensures that incoming data is
accurately classified but may require changing incoming data values.
To assign an object class, you must first define object classes in your AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing. For more information, see Setting Up Object Classification
(page 116).
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
To assign an object class to an input layer
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Object Class
column.
Assigning an Object Class During Import | 421
NOTE To make selections in the Object Class column, first define object
classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. If there are no object classes defined,
the fields in the Object Class column are grayed-out. For more information,
see Setting Up Object Classification (page 116).
3 For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Object Class field.
4 Select an object class.
5 Click to map incoming attribute data to the AutoCAD Map 3D object
class definition.
6 In the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box (page 1710), verify that
the object class you just selected is highlighted in the Select An Object
Class list.
7 On the right, review the Input Fields list, which displays the incoming
attribute data fields that are available to be mapped to Target Fields in
the object class definition.
8 For each Input Field to map, click the down-arrow under Target Fields,
and select a target field in the object class definition. The syntax used for
the target field is:
CATEGORY:TABLE:FIELD
CATEGORY Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT"
for link template (linked external database).
TABLE Object data table name or database table name.
FIELD Data field name.
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list.
This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming data
field.
9 Map as many of the Target Fields as needed. If there are no more target
fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped them all. If you do not map
a target field, the default object class value is used.
10 Click OK to close the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box.
11 To use object class default values for incoming data values that are not
within the specified object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out
Of Range Values. Properties such as Layer and Color are also enforced.
422 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
This ensures that incoming data will be accurately classified but may
require AutoCAD Map 3D to change some of the incoming data values.
If you are importing points and have assigned them to an object class with
a creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points
to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification does
not convert points to blocks for you. For more information, see To specify
how to import points (page 428).
To copy the object class names and attribute mapping settings from one
layer to another, right-click in the Object Class field to copy. Click Copy.
Then right-click in the field in the target layer and choose whether to paste
the object class name or attribute mapping. To copy to all other layers,
right-click and choose whether to paste the name or the attribute mapping
to all layers. If attribute mapping conflicts are detected, the paste attribute
mappings options is not available.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import
As you import objects, you can convert them from the coordinate system of
the input file to the coordinate system of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
To perform this conversion, you must first assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing (page 147). Then, for each layer that you import, you must
specify the appropriate coordinate system.
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import | 423
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To change the coordinate system when you connect to the data, see
Changing Coordinate Systems (page 311).
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Overview of Coordinate Systems (page 143)
To perform a coordinate conversion
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), note the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing.
NOTE If the current drawing does not have a coordinate system assigned,
click Assign Global Coordinate System and select the coordinate system for
the current drawing.
3 For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Input Coordinate System
field.
4 Enter a new global coordinate system code, or click to select from a
list of global coordinate systems.
5 In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select the category
and coordinate system for the incoming layer.
6 Click OK to close the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box.
You can copy the settings from one layer to another. Right-click in the field
to copy. Click Copy. Then right-click in the field in the target layer. Click
Paste. To copy the setting to all other layers, click Paste To All Layers.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
424 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Importing Attribute Data
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
objects, you can import the attribute data attached to the objects.
You can import the data to one of the following:
Existing object data table By default, incoming fields are imported into
object data fields with the same name. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. If you don't want to
do this, use Object Data Mapping to map incoming fields manually to
object data fields with other names or to create new fields.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the existing object data
field. If this conversion fails (for example, if you import characters to an
integer field), AutoCAD Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for real numbers,
and "" for text.
New object data table By default, the fields in the new object data table
match the fields you've chosen to import. If you do not want to do this,
use Object Data Mapping to select the fields to import or to change the
names of the object data fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object
data types:
Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the
Integer data type. For Boolean data, False is converted to 0 and True is
converted to 1.
Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Data is imported only if it is attached to an incoming object. If no objects
are found for an input layer, then the object data table will not be created.
Importing Attribute Data | 425
External database Imported data is added to the external database table
as new records.
External database, link only If you do not need to add the data to the
external database, you can import just the links to the data. When you
import links only, the link from the object to the external data are
maintained, but the external database is not modified. This is much faster
than importing the entire record. This is a good option when importing
SHP data.
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
To import objects with links to an external database (page 434)
Setting Up Object Data (page 198)
To specify the data to import
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Data
column.
3 To change the setting for a layer, click in the Data field for the layer to
change. Click .
4 In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1699), select an option:
If you do not want to import data, click Do Not Import Attribute Data
and close the dialog box.
To import data as object data, click Create Object Data and enter a
name for the object data table or select an existing object data table.
Select Add Unique Key Field to create a unique key for each incoming
record automatically.
Click Select Fields. In the Object Data/External Database Mapping
dialog box (page 1732), map incoming fields to object data fields.
To import data to an external database, click Add To Database Table
and select a link template.
To import only the link data, select Create Link Only.
426 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to fields in the external
database table.
5 Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
To import data to object data tables with the same name as the input layer
names, right-click the Data column header in the table. Click Use Input
Layer Name For Table Name.
To import data to an external database, attach the data source and define
the link template before you start the import process.
If conflicts are found between the settings made in the Data column and
an assigned object class definition, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the Conflict
Resolution dialog box (page 1701), where you can resolve the conflicts before
proceeding with the import.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Specifying How to Import Points
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. As you import
point data, you can choose how the points are treated.
NOTE If you are importing survey points, see Bringing in Survey Data (page 370).
Import points as points, using ACAD_POINT.
Import points as text, using text specified in data attached to the objects.
Specifying How to Import Points | 427
Import points as blocks, using a specified block definition.
Import points as blocks, using a block name specified in data attached to
the objects.
If you import points as blocks, you can choose to import the attribute data
with the objects. If an attribute name on the block that is being created
matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will
be imported with the point.
NOTE If the attribute data includes the values used to link the object to an external
database, you can recreate these links (page 530) in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing
using the ADEGENLINK command.
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Accessing Data from ODBC (page 342)
To specify how to import points
NOTE If you are importing survey points, see Bringing in Survey Data (page 370).
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), review the settings in the Points
column.
3 To change the setting for a layer, click in the Points field for that layer.
Do one of the following:
To import points as points, click the down arrow and select
ACAD_POINT.
To import points as mtext, click in the Import dialog box (page
1711), click Create As Text From Data, and select the data field to use.
If an object does not have a value in the selected data field, the point
is imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text uses the text style for the current drawing. To change the text
style for the current drawing, click Text Style and select a style.
To import points to a specific block, click the down arrow and select
the block name.
428 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To import points to a block whose name is specified in data stored
on the imported objects, click in the Point Mapping dialog box,
click Get Block Name From Data, and select the data field to use.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value stored on the object specifies a valid
block name, the object is imported to that block. If the data value
stored on the object specifies a block name that does not exist or if
the object does not have a data value attached, the point is imported
using ACAD_POINT.
4 To fill attributes with values from fields in the input file, select Get
Attribute Values From Fields. This works with either the Create As Blocks
or the Get Block Name From Data option.
NOTE This option works only if incoming field names match the block
attribute tags. If they do not match, you can map specific incoming fields to
specific block attributes using the Object class column.
5 Click OK to close the Point Mapping dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Importing Polygons
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. By default,
polygons are imported as polygon objects. However, to use the polygons in a
topology, you must import them as polylines and create centroids for them.
Importing Polygons | 429
If a polygon has attribute data attached, the data is initially attached to the
polyline. You must move the attribute data from the polyline to the centroid.
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Creating Centroids for Polygons (page 431)
To import polygons
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import . Then import the
attribute data as object data (page 426).
2 If you plan to use the polygons in a polygon topology, in the Import
dialog box (page 1711), select the option to Import Polygons As Closed
Polylines.
NOTE To set the default state of this option, use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON
command.
3 Run To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887) to
create centroids in the polygons and move the data from each closed
polyline or polygon to its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu Centroids Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDS Command Line
Create Centroids dialog box Dialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
430 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
After you import or digitize objects.
Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
When working with topology.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to
features from a feature source.
Creating Centroids for Polygons | 431
Object data attached to closed polylines (top) and object data moved to
centroids (bottom).
AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
Importing Polygons (page 429)
432 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1 Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Create Centroids.
2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1801), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3 Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4 Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu Centroids Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDS Command Line
Create Centroids dialog box Dialog Box
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. If objects in a
file you are importing have links to attribute data in a separate database, you
can maintain those links.
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database | 433
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Importing Attribute Data (page 425)
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522)
To import objects with links to an external database
1 Make sure you have created a link template (page 526) for the external
database, and that the database is attached (page 209) and connected.
2 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import .
3 In the Import dialog box (page 1711), click in a field in the Data column.
Click .
4 In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1699), select Add To Database Table.
5 Select the link template to use.
6 Select Create Link Only.
7 Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
When you import objects, the attribute data on the objects will be converted
to link data for the selected link template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
MAPOD2ASE
434 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup Convert Object Data to Database Links. Menu
MAPOD2ASE Command Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box Dialog Box
Displaying Attribute Data as Text
When you import data (as opposed to using Data Connect (page 303)), the
imported material is converted to AutoCAD drawing objects. If you have
attribute data attached to the objects you import, you can display that data
as text next to the object. This works whether you import the data as object
data, external data linked to the object, or block attributes.
TIP If you are importing points, you can import the points directly as attribute
data. See Specifying How to Import Points (page 427).
See also:
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects (page 377)
Adding Annotation (page 1103)
To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text
1 Click Insert tab Import panel Map Import . Then import the
attribute data as object data (page 426). Save and close the file.
2 Open a drawing and attach the drawing file (page 154) containing the
imported objects.
3 Define a query that includes the objects you want. If you have only one
file attached, define a Location condition (page 1241) to find all objects in
the source drawing.
4 As part of the query, define a property alteration that displays the object
data as text (page 1278). When specifying the text, click Expression and
choose the object data table that contains the imported attribute data.
5 Optionally, save the changes (page 754) back to the attached (source) file.
Displaying Attribute Data as Text | 435
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGS Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box Dialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJS Command Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box Dialog Box
436 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File Create DWG From Map 3D Import. Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORT Command Line
Import dialog box Dialog Box
Adding Rasters and Surfaces
To add a raster image to the map (page 440)
To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442)
To add 2D rasters to your map (page 444)
To add a WMS-based image to your map (page 447)
To make a raster image transparent (page 450)
To specify an image insertion point (page 451)
To insert the image manually (page 452)
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point (page 452)
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces
When creating a map, you can add raster images and surfaces to the display.
Adding Rasters and Surfaces | 437
Adding one or more images in the background of your map adds context and gives
the map visual appeal.
Use the following raster image and surface types in your map.
Formats Raster Type
DEM (Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain El-
evation Data (DTED)
Raster-based surfaces
(page 441)
JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group), PNG
(Portable Network Graphic), MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless
2D raster (page 443)
Image Database), TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), ECW (En-
hanced Compressed Wavelet)
Maps on a server WMS raster (page
445)
BMP, CALS-I, ECW, FLIC, GeoSPOT, IG4, IGS, IKONOS, JFIF,
LANDSAT FAST, L7A, NITF, PCX, PICT, Quickbird TIFF, RLC 1
and 2 , TARGA
Other raster formats
(page 453)
NOTE Layers in the map are rendered based on the draw order of the layers in
Display Manager. To display drawing objects in front of the raster image, put the
raster image layer at the bottom of the list.
438 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to bring multiple images
onto a single layer.
Show me how to insert an image using
a guide.
Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS.
Procedure
To add raster images using Data Con-
nect (page 442)
To add raster images that use formats
unsupported by Data Connect (page
459)
Tutorial
Exercise 5: Add a raster image
Workflow
Style Surfaces
GIS Skills
Bring in data from multiple image files
to a single layer
Transform an image so that it is correctly
aligned
Access data published on a public web
server
Related topics
Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300)
Specifying Image Insertion Point (page
451)
Using Other Raster Image Formats
(page 453)
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) (page 445)
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces | 439
To add a raster image to the map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
If you are adding a WMS image, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) (page 445). If you are adding an image whose format does
not appear in the Data Connect window, see Using Other Raster Image
Formats (page 453).
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
7 For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer; for example, you can combine GeoTIFs of each county to create a
state map.
9 Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation (page 451) for each
image.
440 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
11 In Display Manager, make sure that the image layer is in the correct
display order.
You can move the raster layer below objects and features.
In Display Manager, click Groups Draw Order. (If this button is
already labeled Draw Order, you can omit this step.)
Drag the raster layer down in the list. Layers at the bottom of the list
appear behind the ones above them.
NOTE You must use a different process (page 453) to insert an image whose format
is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for an image
whose file does not specify it.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map
You can add 3D raster-based surfaces to your map. For example, add DEM
(Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED)
surfaces.
After you add raster-based surfaces to your map, you can create contour maps
to help you analyze 3D terrain. You can use raster-based theming to analyze
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map | 441
elevation, slope, and aspect, and drape map data over surfaces. You can view
the data in 3D with walkthrough and flythrough options.
See also:
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 1186)
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To add a raster-based surface to your map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the folder that contains your surface. Click the folder icon to
browse to the folder.
5 Click Connect.
6 Hold your cursor over the name of the surface file to see a pop-up window
that displays its coordinate system, for example, UTM27-10.
When you add data to your map, you must specify its original coordinate
system. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically converts the data from that
coordinate system to the one specified for your map.
7 Click Edit Coordinate Systems and, in the Edit Spatial Contexts (page 1605)
dialog box, click the entry and click Edit.
Select the entry and click Edit to specify the coordinate system for the surface
442 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8 Select the coordinate system you saw in the pop-up window. Click OK
twice to return to the Data Connect window.
9 In the Add Data To Map area, select the surfaces to include.
If this source contains only a single surface, that surface is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple surfaces, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The surface is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
Adding 2D Rasters
You can add a two-dimensional image to your map. For example, add an aerial
photograph, an artists sketch, or your company logo.
Use the steps on the Procedure tab to add images in these formats:
JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
PNG (Portable Network Graphic)
MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database)
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
Adding 2D Rasters | 443
ECW (Enhanced Compressed Wavelet)
You can also add surface-based rasters (page 441)such as DEM and ESRI Grid
files.
NOTE You must use a different process (page 453) to insert an image whose format
is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for an image
whose file does not specify it.
See also:
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map (page 441)
Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 453)
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To add 2D rasters to your map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
7 For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
444 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
9 Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation (page 451) for each
image.
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service)
You can incorporate web-based raster image data (such as satellite photographs)
that have been published to a public web server using the WMS (Web Map
Service) open standard developed by the Open GIS Consortium (OGC).
AutoCAD Map 3D supports WMS versions 1.1.0, 1.1.1, and 1.3.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 445
Data from WMS web services can be used to provide background layers for
your map. With WMS data, you take the data as it is; you cannot reproject it.
The number of Web Map Services (WMS) that implement OpenGIS interfaces
on the Internet is increasing all the time, as more organizations adopt the
open standards.
Once you have located some WMS data, determine the URL of the page that
serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that you
can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a scripting
language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. A typical web server address looks like
this:
http://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi
Paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE Websites that host web services appear and disappear or are under
construction. Not all sites that you find will work perfectly (or at all).
You can also bring in web-based feature data (page 346).
Example WMS Image Sources
Description WMS Image Source
Weather data http://maps.customweather.com/image
Global SRTM and DTED data http://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi?
All types of data for the globe - soils, tem-
perature, land cover, boundaries, etc.
http://globe.digitalearth.gov/viz-
bin/wmt.cgi
USGS orthographic and topographic maps http://terraservice.net/ogccapabilities.ashx
Source of different types of data layers,
such as boundaries, terrains, physiography,
utilities, SRTM, etc.
http://demo.cubewerx.com/demo/cube-
serv/cubeserv.cgi?
Various orthographic images for USA cities,
for example, San Francisco, Reno, and
Chattanooga.
http://edcw2ks51.cr.usgs.gov/ser-
vlet/com.esri.wms.Es-
rimap?WMTVER=1.1.0&Service-
Name=133urban&
Various Canadian features - provincial
boundaries, lakes, railroads, and more.
http://www2.dmsolutions.ca/cgi-
bin/mswms_gmap
446 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Description WMS Image Source
Geospatial data from NGA (U.S.), Inteva-
tion (Germany) and OGC (U.S.)
http://demo.deegree.org:8080/dee-
gree/wms?
Geoscience Australia national geoscience
datasets
http://www.ga.gov.au/bin/getmap.pl?data-
set=national&
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to bring in data from a
web server using WMS
Procedure
To add a WMS-based image to your
map (page 447)
GIS Skill
Access data published on a public web
server
Related topics
Creating and Viewing Metadata (page
1486)
Bringing In Features from WFS (page
346)
Styling Features (page 639)
To add a WMS-based image to your map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Add WMS Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the URL for the WMS server. Click the down arrow to choose
from a list of recently-used URLs.
5 Specify the WMS version of the data you want.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 447
The Open GIS Consortium updates the WMS format periodically, so there
are multiple versions. AutoCAD Map 3D requests the highest version
(currently 1.3.0) by default. If you do not change this setting, the server
will provide the highest version it supports. Some servers support multiple
WMS versions, each corresponding to a different set of capabilities and
resulting layers. If you must use a specific version of the image, select it
from the list. The server may or may not support the version you request.
6 Click Connect.
7 If necessary, enter your user name and password.
8 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
If this source contains only a single image, that image is selected
automatically. If it contains multiple images, you can right-click any of
them and select Select All or Select None.
9 For each image you select, do the following:
Click the Image Format entry to the right of the image name to choose
the format for the image you add to your map.
The available format types include PNG, TIF, JPG, and BMP.
Click the Server CS Code entry for the image and choose from the
available coordinate systems for the server (the EPSG codes).
A WMS layer can support multiple coordinate systems. AutoCAD Map
3D may not recognize all the EPSG codes the WMS server provides.
If this occurs, you can choose the EPSG code that best serves your
purposes.
WMS layers inherit supported EPSG values from their parent objects,
so a child layer (one indented below a parent layer in the list) may
have both its own EPSG setting and the setting of its parent.
Click the Layer CS Code entry to choose the coordinate system for
the layer.
Unless you know the coordinate system of the source image, do not
change the default. AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically convert the
image to the coordinate system for your map when it adds the image.
Click the Style entry to choose one of the available styles.
Click the Background entry to specify a transparent background for
the layer or choose a background color from the list.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
448 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
layer; for example, you can combine images of each county to create a
state map.
If you combine the images, you must specify a single Image Format, Server
CS Code, and Background for the resulting layer.
When you select Combine Into One Layer, an Order entry appears next
to each selected layer. Click the entry to change the order of the selected
images within the combined layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
Making an Image Transparent
When you add a raster image to a map using Data Connect, it appears in a
Display Manager layer. You can edit the properties of this layer to add an
opacity property, and then set that opacity property to a value below 1 to
change the transparency of the layer.
To do this, you must save the layer to a file and edit the file in a text editor,
such as Notepad.
NOTE The transparency will not appear in printed versions of the map.
See also:
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map (page 441)
Making an Image Transparent | 449
Adding 2D Rasters (page 443)
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
To make a raster image transparent
1 Add the raster (page 437) to AutoCAD Map 3D.
You can use any type of raster, including a WMS image. The image does
not need to be transparent or have an opacity setting already.
2 Right-click the layer containing the image and choose Save Layer.
Save the layer to a .layer file.
3 Open the resulting .layer file in a text editor, such as Notepad, and find
the <FeatureName> entry.
4 Just under the <FeatureName> entry, add the opacity setting, using the
following syntax:
<Opacity>0.6</Opacity>
An opacity setting of 1 makes the layer completely opaque. A setting of
.1 makes it virtually transparent.
5 Save the .layer file.
6 In AutoCAD Map 3D, switch the Task Pane to Display Manager (page 2060)
and remove the original raster layer.
7 Add any other entities to your map that will appear on layers beneath
the translucent image, and theme or style those layers.
8 Click Data Load Layer and select the .layer file you edited.
The translucent raster image overlays the opaque layers, and they appear
beneath it.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
450 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
Specifying Image Insertion Point
If an image does not contain location information, you can specify its insertion
point and rotation so the image is inserted correctly in relation to other data.
You can also adjust the scale so it matches the scale of the other data.
AutoCAD Map 3D saves the insertion-point setting with the drawing. The
changes are not saved back to the image file or to the correlation source file.
To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing application
such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in the
image, reinsert the image to see the changes in your map.
See also:
Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
To specify an image insertion point (page 451)
To insert the image manually (page 452)
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point (page 452)
To specify an image insertion point
1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Source File Or Folder, click the folder icon and browse to the folder
than contains your image. Click Connect.
5 Select the image to insert and click Add To Map.
Specifying Image Insertion Point | 451
6 In the Image Insertion dialog box specify where to insert the image. You
can enter X,Y coordinates for the image, or manually specify the insertion
point in the drawing. Each option is described below.
To insert the image manually
1 In the Image Insertion dialog box, on the Insertion tab, click Pick.
2 Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the command prompt.
3 Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable. The
image is rotated around the insertion point.
4 Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
The Image Insertion dialog box displays the new coordinates, rotation,
and scale.
5 Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point
1 Specify the insertion point for the lower-left corner of the image frame.
The insertion point values on the Source tab use the unit specified at the
bottom of the Source tab. The insertion point values on the Insertion tab
are translated to the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing unit.
2 Specify the rotation.
Use current drawing angle units. This value uses the lower-left corner as
the base point.
3 Specify the scale.
If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image is
inserted at the scale specified by that information. Otherwise, the image
is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of measurement to 1 AutoCAD
Map 3D unit of measurement.
A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the image, while a scale factor less
than 1 makes the image smaller. For example, to make the image twice
as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
You can change the scale to align the image with the vector geometry in
the drawing. For example, if your raster image has a scale of 1 inch equals
452 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a scale of 1
unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale.
4 Specify the units for insertion point and density.
For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots per inch.
For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also used
for the insertion point.
For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as
the unit.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu Insert An Image Menu
MAPIINSERT Command Line
Insert Image dialog box Dialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats
Use this feature to connect to raster image formats that are not supported by
Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for images that do not
contain this information within their files. Images attached using the following
methods support a limited set of styles.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 453
NOTE To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW
and SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
To insert raster images (page 455)
To manage raster images (page 473)
To manage the appearance of raster images (page 482)
To modify raster images (page 490)
Inserting Raster Images
Use the Raster Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with
formats that are not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW and
SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from autodesk.com.
Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data Connect (page 455)
Inserting a Raster Image (page 459)
Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion (page 462)
Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion (page 465)
Setting Image Density (page 467)
Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display Manager Layer (page 470)
Inserting an Image from the Command Line (page 470)
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect (page 437). This gives you more control over styling and
other options.
See also:
Configuring Memory Use (page 258)
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
454 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To insert raster images
To insert a raster image (overview) (page 459)
To insert a raster image (page 460)
To correlate an image during insertion (page 464)
To adjust the image frame manually during insertion (page 465)
To change the density unit when inserting an image (page 469)
To set the default density value and density unit (page 469)
To add an image to a new Display Manager layer (page 470)
To insert an image from the Command prompt (page 471)
Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data Connect
You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect. Use the Raster
Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with formats that are
not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for
images that do not contain this information within their files.
Some image-editing applications, such as Autodesk
(OSGeo
).
This has enabled developers from all over the world to tap into powerful web
mapping and geospatial data access technology and develop additional FDO
data providers that work with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Often, developers make the providers they develop available for free. They
can be integrated into AutoCAD Map 3D and then used to access additional
data formats not included in the box.
Description Examples of Third Party and Open
Source Providers Available
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
OGR Provider (supports vector formats
such as ESRI Personal Database, GRASS,
and SDTS).
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
GDAL Provider (supports raster formats
such as NITF, Imagine, PCIDSK, and HDF).
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
SL-King Oracle Provider.
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
Safe Software FME Provider for FDO.
540 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Check http://fdo.osgeo.org and
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908 periodically
for additional providers.
If you are a developer, you can also create your own data providers. The open
source version of FDO Data Access Technology and developer documentation
is available on http://fdo.osgeo.org .
NOTE FDO Providers from sources other than Autodesk are not supported or
warrantied by Autodesk.
To download a third party or open source FDO Provider (page 541)
To integrate a new FDO Provider into AutoCAD Map 3D (page 541)
To develop a new FDO Provider (page 542)
To download a third party or open source FDO Provider
Go to http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
or http://fdo.osgeo.org to see the providers available for download.
To integrate a new FDO Provider into AutoCAD Map 3D
1 Close AutoCAD Map 3D if it is running.
2 In Windows Explorer, navigate to \AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin.
3 Make a backup copy of providers.xml. Give the back up a new name such
as providers_backup.xml.
4 In WordPad, open \AutoCAD Map 3D 2011\FDO\bin\providers.xml.
NOTE Do not use Notepad.
5 Copy a section for an existing provider, for example the section OSGEO
WMS, and paste it to a new location in the XML file.
Be sure that you copy the entire section, from <Feature Provider> to
</FeatureProvider>.
6 Modify the following elements in the new section as needed:
Name Name of your new provider.
Display Name Name that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window in AutoCAD Map 3D
Using Open Source FDO Providers | 541
Description Description that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window
IsManaged False if the provider was developed using unmanaged
code like C++; True if uses managed code.
Version The DLL version number. The version number must match
the version number of the DLLs.
FeatureDataObjectsVersion FDO version number
LibraryPath - Path to the DLLs for the new provider
7 Save and close providers.xml.
8 Start AutoCAD Map 3D.
9 In Display Manager, click Data Connect to Data.
The provider you added should appear under Data Connections By
Provider.
10 In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
the new provider. For example, select Add OGR Connection.
11 Enter the connection information.
NOTE For the OGR provider, you need to enter the complete path to the
geodatabase for Data Source.
12 The ReadOnly field indicates whether you can edit the data. TRUE means
the data is read-only. FALSE means it will be read / write.
13 Click Login.
14 Click Connect to bring the data into your map.
To develop a new FDO Provider
Go to http://fdo.osgeo.org to download the API and access the
documentation needed to develop a provider.
542 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data
You can bring in the following types of data from AutoCAD Civil 3D projects:
Features (Alignments, points, parcels, and pipe networks)
Surfaces
To bring in Civil 3D data, you must first export it from Civil 3D to formats
that can be read by AutoCAD Map 3D.
The following table lists the AutoCAD Civil 3D features and attributes that
are exported to the SDF file.
Exported Attributes AutoCAD Civil 3D Feature
Alignment Alignment Name
Length
Design Speed
Starting Station
Ending Station
Point Point Number
Point Name
Elevation
Description
Raw Description
Latitude
Longitude
Parcel Parcel Name
Parcel Number
Area
Perimeter
Pipe Network Name
Length
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 543
Slope
Inside Diameter
Outside Diameter
Shape
Elevation at Start
Elevation at End
Structure Start
Structure End
Structure Network Name
Rim Elevation
Structure Name
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to bring in data from
AutoCAD Civil 3D.
Procedure
To export features from AutoCAD Civil
3D to SDF (page 545)
To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil
3D to DEM (page 545)
To access the DEM from a map (page
545)
GIS Skill
Bring in parcel data from AutoCAD Civil
3D
Related topics
Bringing In Features from SDF (page
337)
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your
Map (page 441)
544 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF (page 545)
To access the SDF file from a map (page 545)
To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM (page 545)
To access the DEM from a map (page 545)
To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF
1 Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the
project to SDF.
2 In the Export To SDF dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file.
3 Specify the coordinate system.
NOTE If the drawing already has a coordinate system specified, it is used
automatically and the Select Coordinate System controls in the Export To
SDF dialog box are grayed.
4 Click OK to export the file.
To access the SDF file from a map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add SDF Connection.
3 Specify information to connect to the SDF file. For more information,
see To bring in features from SDF (page 338).
To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM
1 Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
2 In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the surface as a DEM file.
To access the DEM from a map
1 In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add Raster Image Or Surface Connection.
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 545
3 Specify information to connect to the DEM file. For more information,
see To add a raster-based surface to your map (page 442).
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File Connect To Data. Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECT Command Line
In Display Manager click Data Connect to Data. Task Pane
546 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Managing Data
Overview of Managing Data
Different geospatial data formats have different capabilities. Use the following
table to determine the options available for your data stores.
NOTE WMS and raster data providers are not covered here. For information about
those providers, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) (page 445)
and Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437).
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your Map
File (page 140).
WFS ESRI
ArcSDE
SHP SDF ODBC MySQL SQLite SQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Set up
users
(page 584)
Create
data
Create
data
Set up
data
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 590)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586)
Create
data stores
(page 586) stores stores stores
(page
586)
(page
586)
(page
576)
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
your your your your map map
(page 332)
map
(page 330)
map
(page 326)
map (page
323)
map (page
340)
map (page
312) map map map map
4
547
WFS ESRI
ArcSDE
SHP SDF ODBC MySQL SQLite SQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
(page
337)
(page
342)
(page
346)
(page
316)
(page
335)
Style
data
Style
data
Style
data
Style
data
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
Style data
(page 639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
(page
639)
Examine
or edit
Exam-
ine or
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
attribute edit at- attribute attribute tribute tribute tribute tribute tribute tribute
data tribute data data data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711)
data (page
711) (page
711)
data
(page
711)
(page
711)
(page
711)
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
a WFS a differ- a differ- ferent ferent ent fea- ent fea- ent fea- ent fea- ent fea- ent fea-
feature. ent fea- ent fea- feature. feature. ture.
(page 509)
ture.
(page 509)
ture.
(page 509)
ture. (page
509)
ture. (page
509)
ture. (page
509) (page
509)
ture.
(page
509)
ture.
(page
509)
(page
509)
(page
509)
Create
a
Create a
schema
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596)
Create a
schema
(page 596) schema (page
596) (page
596)
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608)
View a
schema
(page 608) (page
608)
(page
608)
(page
608)
(page
608)
Edit a
schema
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610)
Edit a
schema
(page 610) (page
610)
548 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
WFS ESRI
ArcSDE
SHP SDF ODBC MySQL SQLite SQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
Delete a
schema
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613)
Delete a
schema
(page 613) (page
613)
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
to/from to/from to/from to/from different different different different different different
a differ- a differ- a differ- a differ- data data data data data data
ent data ent ent data ent data format
(page 615)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 618)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 615)
format
(page 615) format data format format
(page
615)
NOTE You
can
copy
data in-
to an
ArcSDE
schema
if the
data
store
and
schema
are
already
defined
in the
target.
format
(page
615)
(page
615)
(page
615)
Overview of Managing Data | 549
WFS ESRI
ArcSDE
SHP SDF ODBC MySQL SQLite SQL Serv-
er Spatial
SQL Serv-
er
Postgr-
eSQL
Oracle
NOTE You
can use
Bulk
Copy to
copy
ODBC
data to a
different
provider,
such as
Oracle,
MySQL,
SQL Serv-
er, SDF,
and SHP.
You can
copy
data to
an
ODBC
data
store,
but you
must
define
the tar-
get
schema
properly,
and have
write per-
missions.
550 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and
Schemas
Overview of Geospatial Data
Geospatial data is organized as follows:
Feature: The spatial representation of a real-world entity, such as a specific
road or an individual utility pole, that specifies the geometry and other
properties of the feature.
Feature class: A category of features with rules that define the allowable
data types, default values, and constraints for its member features. For
example, you might have feature classes for a set of roads, utility poles,
and so on.
Schema: A collection of related feature classes.
Data store: A collection of feature data in a single storage location.
SDF data stores allow only one schema per file, but database stores such
as Oracle or SQL Server can have multiple schemas. (SHP files can include
only one geometry type per file, but you can be store and copy multiple
SHP files in a folder. You can use a configuration file to support multiple
schemas when you establish your connection to a SHP file.)
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
The data hierarchy
Geospatial data is stored in a hierarchical fashion, like a set of tables: each
row within a table is an individual feature, and each column is a property
(page 2071) of that feature. The entire table (including its name, column names,
data types, default values, and constraints) represents a feature class. The set
of related tables is called a schema, and the entire collection of data resides
in a data store.
For example, you might use a data store such as Oracle, which can encompass
multiple schemas. The database might define the utilities for a town, with
schemas for different types of utilities, such as electrical and water. The
electrical schema would include feature classes for utility poles and boxes,
while the water schema would include feature classes for pipes and hydrants.
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas | 551
Properties
Each feature class has properties that define it. The Pole feature class would
have properties such as identification number, name, model, material, height,
installation date, and so on. The properties that define a feature class can have
data types, default values, and constraints. These can help ensure that a feature
meets certain criteria in order to be included in a particular feature class. For
example, the Large Roads feature class can include a field called Lanes.
The constraint for Lanes can specify that its value must be six or higher in
order for a road to be included in the Large Roads feature class.
Data stores
Features can be stored in a spatial database (such as Oracle, MySQL,
PostgreSQL/PostGIS, or SQLServer), or in the ESRI ArcSDE data store, which
can use either an Oracle- or SQL Server-based spatial database. Features can
be stored in a file (such as SQLite, SHP, or SDF). Related SHP files might be
stored in a folder.
Features can be accessed from a web-based service (such as WFS or WMS).
AutoCAD Map 3D also supports ODBC (Open Database Connectivity), a
standardized interface for accessing a database from a program.
A data store usually contains a spatial context, which describes the spatial
metadata or parameters within which geometry for a collection of features
resides. The spatial context can specify the coordinate system, extents, and
tolerance. A data store can include multiple spatial contexts, for example, one
context for ground-based data and another context for schematic data.
For more information about features, feature classes, and schemas (including
diagrams that illustrate these concepts), see What Are Features? and What
is a Schema? in Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data, available from the
Help menu in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Working with features in your map
To add a feature to your map, you connect to its data store and select the
feature classes to include. After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map
3D, that data store is a feature source (page 2063) for the current map. Feature
sources are listed by provider (for example, all SDF feature sources are listed
together in Data Connect). Each feature class you add becomes a feature layer
(page 2063) in your map. You can apply filters and spatial queries to the layers
to show only some of the features within that layer. Filters are based on
attributes, and queries are based on spatial location.
552 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305)
Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
Styling Features (page 639)
Viewing a Schema (page 608)
Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with geospatial data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
Set up users for database data stores (page 585)
Create data stores (page 588), if your data source supports that option.
Add data to your map (page 308)
Style the data (page 641)
Examine or edit attribute data for any feature (page 712)
View the schema (page 609) for any data source.
Create a schema (page 598), if your data source supports that option.
Edit a schema (page 612), if your data source supports that option.
Delete a schema (page 614), if your data source supports that option.
Copy data to/from a different data format (page 621), if your data source
supports that option.
Working with FDO Schemas
You can view a schema (page 2073), feature class (page 2063), or property (page 2071)
from any FDO provider (page 2063), but the ability to change them depends on
the provider and your access rights. You cannot edit or delete any schema,
feature class, or property if there are existing features that use it.
Working with FDO Schemas | 553
You can create schemas within AutoCAD Map 3D, or import existing FDO
schemas into your maps.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
See also:
Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
Viewing a Schema (page 608)
Creating a Schema (page 596)
Editing a Schema (page 610)
Deleting Schemas (page 613)
To work with FDO schemas
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
managing drawing objects and drawing files, see Overview of Setting Up Your
Map File (page 140)
View the schema (page 609) for any data source.
Create a schema (page 598), if your data source supports that option.
Import (page 608) existing FDO schemas into a map.
Edit a schema (page 612), if your data source supports that option.
Delete a schema (page 614), if your data source supports that option.
Working with Oracle Data
AutoCAD Map 3D, supports Oracle versions 10gr2, 11g, and XE. You can
create and edit an Oracle data store (page 2059) and schema (page 2073), and you
can access existing spatial schemas in Oracle that were created by other
applications. Oracle has comprehensive support for all the data types and
operations that AutoCAD Map 3D supports, including spatial index (page 2075),
long transaction (page 2067), and persistent locking (page 2070).
554 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
NOTE Functionality for OSE (the Oracle Spatial OO40, which is similar to OLE DB)
is not available in a 64-bit environment. The Oracle library that OSE is built on
(Oracle Object for OLE) is 32-bit only. There is no 64-bit version.
Before you add features to an Oracle data store, make sure your user privileges
for that Oracle data store are adequate and appropriate, and that the data in
that data store is accurate and current.
You can add a user for an Oracle data store using a utility (page 584) provided
with AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and Oracle, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
What Oracle Schemas Support
An Oracle schema can support the following:
Inheritance
Multiple schemas
Object properties (with limitations)
Association properties (with limitations)
Schema overrides
Auto ID generation
Data store scope unique ID generation
Default values
Inclusive value range constraints
Exclusive value range constraints
Value constraints list
Null value constraints
Unique value constraints
Composite unique value constraints
Spatial contexts
Working with Oracle Data | 555
These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line
string, multi-polygon, curve string, curve polygon, multi-curve string,
multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment, circular arc segment,
and ring
Multi-geometry
Restrictions of Oracle Schemas
When you create an Oracle schema, the following restrictions apply:
A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
You cannot add a non-nullable data property to a class that already has
data.
Identity properties cannot be nullable.
Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
The length for string properties must be between 1 byte and 4000 bytes,
inclusive.
For decimal properties, precision must be between 1 and 38, inclusive, and
scale must be between -84 and 127, inclusive.
A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
Version Enabling
The Autodesk FDO Provider for Oracle included with AutoCAD Map 3D 2011
creates tables in the FDO data store (page 2059) that are not automatically
version-enabled. Therefore, when you create a new Oracle data store using
the default options, the resulting table is not version-enabled, so persistent
locking (page 2070) and long transaction (page 2067) are not supported. (This differs
from previous releases.)
Oracle Workspace Manager (OWM) is used for versioning and persistent
locking support.
NOTE Versioning and persistent locking are not available with the Oracle XE
version.
556 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
Creating a Data Store (page 586)
Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312)
Creating a Join (page 509)
Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
Creating a Schema (page 596)
Viewing a Schema (page 608)
Editing a Schema (page 610)
Migrating Data (page 615)
To enable versioning for an Oracle data store
1 You enable versioning with the Oracle SQL*Plus tool, which you use to
execute the scripts. Before executing the scripts, make sure that the
following conditions are true:
You connect directly to the Oracle user (or FDO data store) to be
processed.
The Oracle user executing the script has sufficient privileges (has been
granted the Workspace Manager role WM_ADMIN_ROLE).
The Oracle user executing the script is the only user processing or
accessing the current Oracle user (or FDO data store) during the
execution of the script. Otherwise, a script failure may result from a
session conflict.
2 To create a script log file, execute the spool <log file name>; command
before invoking the scripts and the spool off; command after the
invoked script finishes. The log file can help you resolve any issues
encountered by the scripts.
3 Read the documentation contained within the script files themselves to
determine what privileges are required for each script, how to run the
scripts, and what errors may occur.
Working with Oracle Data | 557
Problems can occur if you respond incorrectly to errors you encounter
while running a script.
4 Execute the EnableVersioning.sql script in the /FDO/bin/com folder in your
AutoCAD Map 3D folder.
This will enable the tables for OWM.
NOTE The DisableVersioning.sql script in the same folder provides the opposite
functionality.
5 If you create a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D 2011 that you want to use
with the 2007 version of AutoCAD Map 3D, you must set the value of
the lock and long transaction options in the table F_Options in the
generated data store to 2. You can do this with the supplied SQL script
EnableVersioning.sql, which also enables versioning for all tables and allows
the creation of conditional data. Do not make this change to F_Options
in the database if you do not plan to use it with the previous version of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
To work with Oracle data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522). For information about moving
data between DWG and SDF format, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628).
Set up users (page 584)
Create data stores (page 586)
Add Oracle features to your map (page 312)
Style Oracle features (page 639)
Join Oracle data to a different feature (page 509)
Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
Create an Oracle schema (page 596)
View an Oracle schema (page 608)
Edit an Oracle schema (page 610)
Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
558 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Working with SQL Server Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server version 2005 and SQL Server Spatial
(page 561). Both provide comprehensive data support, along with spatial
indexing, optimistic concurrency, and read-committed transaction isolation.
It uses a revision number for optimistic concurrency.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication for SQL Server data
stores. The FDO (page 2062) User is mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant access
to the databases whose data you want to use.
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
What SQL Server Schemas Support
A SQL Server schema (page 2073) can support the following:
Inheritance
Multiple schemas
Object properties (with limitations)
Association properties (with limitations)
Schema overrides
Auto ID generation
Default values
Inclusive value range constraints
Exclusive value range constraints
Value constraints list
Null value constraints
Unique value constraints
Composite unique value constraints
Spatial contexts
Working with SQL Server Data | 559
The following geometry types:
Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
Points: point, multi-point
Rings: ring, linear ring
Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
Multi-geometry
Restrictions of SQL Server Schemas
When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply:
A feature class (page 2063) must define or inherit at least one identity property
(page 2071).
Identity properties cannot be nullable.
Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
The maximum length of a string is 8000 characters.
For decimal properties, the precision must be between 1 and 38, inclusive,
and the scale must be between 0 and 38, inclusive.
See also:
Overview of Geospatial Data (page 551)
Setting Up Database Users (page 584)
Creating a Data Store (page 586)
Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323)
Styling Features (page 639)
Creating a Join (page 509)
560 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Editing Features using the Data Table (page 711)
Creating a Schema (page 596)
Viewing a Schema (page 608)
Editing a Schema (page 610)
Deleting Schemas (page 613)
Migrating Data (page 615)
To work with SQL Server data
NOTE This functionality affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
linking records in an external database to objects in a drawing, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 522).
Set up users (page 584)
Create data stores (page 586)
Add SQL Server features to your map (page 323)
Style SQL Server features (page 639)
Join SQL Server data to a different feature (page 509)
Examine or edit attribute data (page 711)
Create a SQL Server schema (page 596)
View a SQL Server schema (page 608)
Edit a SQL Server schema (page 610)
Delete a SQL Server schema (page 613)
Copy data to/from a different data format (page 615)
Working with SQL Server Spatial Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server Spatial through version 2008 SP1. Use
SQL Server Spatial for the following:
To connect to Microsoft
SQL Server
Intersect: line/line
Intersect: line/polygon
Intersect: point/polygon
Intersect: polygon/polygon
Union
Union determines the geometry that exists in either the Source or Overlay
geometry. Where the geometry intersects, additional features are created. The
resulting layer is the sum of the two comparison layers. Use Union to combine
two related polygon features. For example, create a new feature source that
combines the business district and the theater district when these two areas
overlap.
The resulting layer has the attributes of both the Source and Overlay features.
Union supports polygon/polygon comparisons only.
Union: polygon/polygon
1312 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Erase
Erase determines the geometry from the Source that does not intersect with
the Overlay. The intersecting pieces are discarded. Use Erase to subtract a
geometric section from a feature class. For example, find all roads that lie
outside the enterprise district, or all hospitals that are outside the flood zone.
The resulting layer has the attributes of the Source feature only.
Erase supports the following geometry types:
Erase: line/polygon
Erase: point/polygon
Erase: polygon/polygon
Identity
Identity creates new features where the Source and Overlay features intersect.
Use Identity to split features at the point where they intersect with another
feature class, and to create new features at that point. For example, divide
roads or parcels where they cross county borders.
Feature attributes from both the source and overlay are included in the
resulting features, but only the intersecting features will have the values from
both. If AutoCAD Map 3D splits an original feature to produce an output
feature, it uses the Split/Merge rules to determine how to assign the attributes.
When that occurs, attributes of the Overlay feature are appended to the
resulting features. Non-intersecting Source features retain their original
properties.
Overlaying Two Feature Sources | 1313
Identity supports the following geometry types:
Identity: line/polygon
Identity: point/polygon
Identity: polygon/polygon
Clip
Like Intersect, Clip creates features from the areas of the Source that overlap
with the Overlay.
Use Clip to find features that lie within a geometric area. For example, find
hydrants within a development, or road segments within a particular
neighborhood.
If AutoCAD Map 3D splits an original feature to produce an output feature,
it uses the Split/Merge rules to determine how to assign the attributes.
when you use Clip, only feature attributes from the Source are included in
the resulting layer.
Clip supports the following geometry types:
Clip: line/polygon
1314 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Clip: point/polygon
Clip: polygon/polygon
Paste
Paste creates new features by pasting the Overlay features onto the Source
features. All Overlay features become new features in the resulting layer. In
addition, areas of the Source that do not fall within the geometry of the
Overlay become features in the resulting layer. Use Paste to combine two
overlapping features. For example, add the attributes of city districts to the
developments they overlap.
The output layer has attributes from both the Source and Overlay. Features
resulting from the Source geometry have values for Source attributes, but their
Overlay attribute values are NULL. Features resulting from the Overlay
geometry have values for Overlay attributes, but their Source attribute values
are NULL.
Paste supports polygon/polygon comparisons only.
Paste: polygon/polygon
Symmetric Difference
Symmetric Difference determines geometry in the Source and Overlay that
does not overlap. Overlapping areas of the features are discarded in the output.
The non-overlapping areas become new features. Use Symmetric Difference
to find areas that are mutually exclusive in two feature classes. For example,
find new housing developments that are outside existing school districts.
Overlaying Two Feature Sources | 1315
The output layer has attributes from both the Source and Overlay. Features
resulting from the Source geometry have values for Source attributes, but their
Overlay attribute values are NULL. Features resulting from the Overlay
geometry have values for Overlay attributes, but their Source attribute values
are NULL.
Symmetric Difference supports polygon/polygon comparisons only.
Symmetric difference: polygon/polygon
To perform an Overlay operation
NOTE This procedure applies only to geospatial feature data. For information
about using overlays for drawing objects, see To overlay two topologies (page
1339).
1 Connect (page 308) to the features sources to compare.
To use a feature layer, you must add it to your map. To use a feature class,
you must connect to its data store, but you need not add it to the map.
2 Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Overlay
3 On the Overlay Analysis dialog box - Source and Overlay Type page (page
1563), specify the following:
Source: Specify the feature layer or feature class to use as the source.
For information about considerations in selecting Source and Overlay
entries, see the Concept tab for this topic (page 1309).
Overlay: Specify the feature layer or feature class to use as the overlay.
Type: Select the type of overlay comparison to perform. For more
information on the available types, see the Concept tab for this topic
(page 1311).
4 Click Next.
5 On the Overlay Analysis dialog box - Set Output and Settings page (page
1565), specify the following:
Output: Specify the name and location of the SDF file that will contain
the result of the Overlay operation.
1316 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Layer Name: Specify the name of the Display Manager layer that will
contain the result of the Overlay operation.
Sliver Tolerance: Specify which slivers become separate features and
which are joined with a neighboring polygon. Set the units for the
tolerance setting, then set the maximum and minimum values.
To see recommended values, click Suggest. The default suggested
values for sliver tolerances are 1/10 of the smallest input area for the
Maximum and 1/100 of the smallest input area for the Minimum.
When the Overlay operation splits features to produce the output
layer, it eliminates polygons that are smaller than the specified
tolerance settings. Some such polygons were present in the sources,
and some are produced by the Overlay operation itself. The
elimination of slivers affects the output layers only.
Polygons whose areas are larger than the Maximum value become
separate features in the output layer.
Polygons whose areas are smaller than the Minimum (and have at
least one neighboring polygon) are considered slivers, and are merged
with the neighboring polygon that has the longest shared edge.
The Overlay operation checks polygons that fall between the two
values to see how wide they are. If they are very narrow, they are
merged with a neighboring polygon.
NOTE If the resulting polygons are not as desired, try adjusting the
tolerance values and repeating the Overlay operation.
To ignore slivers altogether, click Dont Remove Slivers.
Ordinate Tolerance: Specify how far apart two nodes or vertices of a
line or polygon must be to be treated as separate points in the output
layer. Set the units for the tolerance setting, then set the Length.
Any two points that are closer together than the Length value are
treated as a single point in the output layer.
Output Properties: Specify which properties from the Source and (if
applicable) Overlay are included in the resulting layer.
All adds all properties to the resulting layer. Identifiers adds only
the primary identifiers (primary keys or unique fields, such as
Feature_ID). Non-Identifiers adds only the non-key attributes (such
as Land_Value or Speed_Limit, for example). If you add only
non-identifiers, the overlay operation generates primary identifiers
for the features in the resulting layer.
Overlaying Two Feature Sources | 1317
6 Click Finish to perform the Overlay.
The Overlay operation creates a new layer representing the result of the
comparison. The new layer is displayed in the map and in Display
Manager. The same data is written to the SDF file you specified.
To see just the Overlay output, deselect the check boxes for the other
layers in Display Manager.
Quick Reference
MAPGISOVERLAY
Performs overlay analysis of feature classes
Click Analyze menu GIS Overlay. Menu
Icon
MAPGISOVERLAY Command Line
Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Topologies are defined by a set of drawing objects and their relationships.
(Features are not included in topologies.)
After you create a topology in a drawing, you can analyze it to get useful
information about the spatial relationships between drawing objects.
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies (page 1319)
Performing a Shortest Path Trace (page 1324)
Performing a Best Route Analysis (page 1328)
Performing a Flood Trace (page 1333)
Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336)
Dissolving a Composite Topology (page 1342)
Buffering a Topology (page 1345)
Querying a Topology (page 1348)
Saving a Temporary Topology (page 1354)
Before you can use the topology analysis tools, you must create a topology
and make sure it is loaded.
1318 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information about
analyzing geospatial feature data, see Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes (page
1302).
See also:
Creating Topologies (page 821)
Loading or Unloading Topologies (page 906)
NOTE The following procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information
about analyzing geospatial feature data, see To analyze feature classes (page 1305).
To analyze drawing topologies
To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326)
To perform a best route analysis (page 1330)
To perform a flood trace (page 1334)
To overlay two topologies (page 1339)
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
To buffer a topology (page 1347)
To query a topology (page 1353)
To convert a temporary topology to a permanent topology (page 1354)
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies
After you have created a drawing topology, you can use it to analyze spatial
relationships between the drawing objects. You can:
Extract or create new information about a set of objects
Determine the distribution of an object, or objects, over a network or area
Manage relationships between objects
Analyze the location, proximity, and orientation of objects
Evaluate suitability and capability, estimate, predict, and interpret
Identify conditions at a geographic location, in a spatial area, or along a
linear network, and predict effects of future events on these items
Different topologies can contain information on different aspects of a map.
For example, a political map shows county lines or cities and towns. A
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1319
geological map shows soil types or contour lines. A social map might show
the locations of crimes or high-income areas.
Before you can analyze a topology, you must create the topology and make
sure it is loaded.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information about
analyzing geospatial feature data, see Overview of Analyzing Feature Classes (page
1302).
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to create a network topo-
logy.
Show me how to load a topology.
Show me how to find the shortest path
between two points.
Show me how to do an overlay analysis
using two topologies.
Procedures
To analyze drawing topologies (page
1319)
GIS Skills
Create a network topology to show how
lines are connected.
Find the shortest path through a net-
work.
Find which lines are within a particular
polygon (overlay analysis).
Related topics
Creating Topologies (page 821)
Loading or Unloading Topologies
(page 906)
NOTE The following procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information
about analyzing geospatial feature data, see To analyze feature classes (page 1305).
1320 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
You can analyze drawing topologies in the following ways:
Use this method... To do this...
Perform a shortest path trace (page 1326) Calculate the shortest path between two
points in a drawing or determine the op-
timal route based on values of resistance
and direction.
Perform a best route analysis (page 1330) Calculate the best route from a starting
point in the drawing to one or more visit
points, and back to the starting point.
Perform a flood trace (page 1334) Determine how many links and nodes can
be traveled before the accumulated resist-
ance exceeds the specified maximum res-
istance.
Overlay two topologies (page 843) Compare two existing topologies and keep
only common geometry, remove common
geometry, or combine geometry in a spe-
cified way.
Dissolve a topology (page 1343) Create a new topology by combining
polygons that share the same data value
in a specified field.
Buffer a topology (page 1347) Identify objects within a specified offset of
elements in node, network, and polygon
topologies.
Query a topology (page 1353) Retrieve a loaded topology and its associ-
ated data from the current drawing or an
attached drawing, or query part of a topo-
logy in a source drawing and work on that
part of a topology without having to re-
trieve all its objects.
Save a temporary topology (page 1354) Save back the temporary information re-
trieved by a topology query to the draw-
ings from which it was queried.
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1321
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Click Analyze Buffer. Menu
Buffer Topology
Icon
MAPANBUFFER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Buffer
Task Pane
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANDISSOLVE
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Click Analyze Dissolve. Menu
Dissolve Topology
Icon
MAPANDISSOLVE Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology Analysis Dissolve
Task Pane
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map Topology Overlay. Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Overlay
Task Pane
1322 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box Dialog Box
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map Topology Network Analysis. Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONET Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Click Analyze More Topology Options Load
Topology.
Menu
Load Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOLOAD Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Administration Load Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog box Dialog Box
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Click Setup More DWG Options Define Topology
Query.
Menu
Query Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOQUERY Command Line
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1323
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Topology Query
Task Pane
Topology Query dialog box Dialog Box
Performing a Shortest Path Trace
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the shortest path between two points in
a drawing or determine the optimal route based on values of resistance and
direction. This process is known as a shortest path trace analysis.
In a drawing of a street network, for example, you might find the shortest
path between a fire station and a school.
Shortest path trace based on resistance (time taken to traverse a segment).
You can specify a resistance for any link in the network. This resistance specifies
the difficulty in traversing the link. The default resistance is the length of the
link.
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
1324 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network path trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link using an object
data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct
Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for
example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the shortest route, in terms of time, not distance,
to get from the first point to the second.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to find the shortest path
between two points.
Procedures
To perform a shortest path trace (page
1326)
GIS Skills
Find the shortest path through a net-
work.
Related topics
Creating Topologies (page 821)
Specifying the Direction for a Link
(page 845)
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or
Node (page 849)
Performing a Shortest Path Trace | 1325
Expression Evaluator (page 1541)
Expression dialog box (page 1807)
To perform a shortest path trace
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 821) and To load a topology (page 907).
2 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis.
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1983),
click Shortest Path. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point, and then click (Select Point) to select the starting point
in the map. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Click End Point. To select the ending point, click (Select Point). Press
Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the end point.
6 Review the start and end points you have specified. The coordinates of
the points are shown in the list.
To double-check the location of a point in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
7 Click Next.
8 In the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For resistance and direction, you can
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
1326 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
Link Direction Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
Reverse Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
Link Direct Resistance Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
Link Reverse Resistance Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
Node Resistance Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
9 Click Next.
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
To view your shortest path trace onscreen, select Highlight. Choose
a highlight color from the Color list.
You should use a highlight color that is different from the color of
the objects in your map.
To save the shortest path trace as a new topology, select Create
Topology. Enter a name and description for the new topology. The
new topology will be created on the existing objects.
11 Click Finish to perform the shortest path trace.
Performing a Shortest Path Trace | 1327
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map Topology Network Analysis. Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONET Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Performing a Best Route Analysis
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the best route from a starting point in the
drawing, to one or more visit points, and back to the starting point. AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the optimal route based on values of resistance and
direction. For example, in a street network, you can find the best route to
travel when visiting several customer sites from your hotel.
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates defined in the drawing where the topology is loaded
in the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings; in
the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current drawing.
Also, be sure that the appropriate data source is attached and connected in
the current drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out a best route analysis on a road network based on time rather than
distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link (page 849) using an object
1328 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct
Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for
example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the best route, in terms of time, not distance.
Object Data Stored for a Best Route Topology
If you save the results of a best route analysis to a new topology, AutoCAD
Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data, on each element
that makes up the best route topology. The object data table contains
information about the order of the links visited and the resistance used to
calculate the best route. The object data table added is like the one shown in
the following table.
Object Data Field Object Data Table Topology Name
Path Link Visit Order BR_SAMPLE SAMPLE
Evaluated Link Forward Resistance
Evaluated Link Reverse Resistance
Evaluated Start Node Resistance
Evaluated End Node Resistance
Evaluated Link Direction
Displaying Visit Order Using Annotation
To display the order in which to visit points, you use AutoCAD Map 3D's
annotation feature to label the best route with the object data described above.
Editing a Best Route Topology
If you change the direction or resistance of an object in a best route topology,
the best route shown may no longer be the optimal route, and you should
recalculate the best route. For example, if you change the direction of a link
from bi-directional to forward or reverse, it may change the best route.
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 1329
NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use expressions
that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values equal zero, every
possible route is as good as any other route, and there is no "best" route to travel.
See also:
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 849)
Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 1103)
Expression Evaluator (page 1541)
Expression dialog box (page 1807)
Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions (page 924)
Deleting Topologies (page 925)
To perform a best route analysis
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 821) and To load a topology (page 907).
2 In Map Explorer (page 2068) under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis.
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1983),
click Best Route. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the
drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Click Visit Point. Click (Select Point).
6 In the drawing, click a point to visit during the best route analysis. It
does not matter which point you pick first, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates
the order in which to visit the sites as part of the calculation.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the visit point.
7 Do one of the following:
To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter.
1330 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press Esc.
To accept the point and specify another point, right-click in the
drawing. Click Next Point.
8 In the dialog box, review the start points and visit points you have
specified.
To double-check the location of a point in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
To add another visit point, return to Step 5.
9 Click Next.
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box,
select limits to put on the analysis. For resistance and direction, enter a
constant or an expression that references an object data field or linked
external database column. The expression will be evaluated for each link.
Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
Link Direction Specifies a direction for the trace. If the box is blank,
bi-directional (0) is used.
Reverse Uses the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link
Direction box.
Link Direct Resistance Specifies the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If the box is blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
Link Reverse Resistance Specifies the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If the box is blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
Node Resistance Specifies the resistance to cross the node (for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network or a junction in a
road network). If the box is blank, zero (0) is used.
Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 1331
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use
expressions that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values
are all zero, every possible route is as good as any other route, and there is
no "best" route to travel.
11 Click Next.
12 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
To view the best route analysis onscreen, select Highlight and choose
a highlight color.
Use a highlight color that is different from the color of the objects in
your map.
To save the results of the best route analysis as a new topology, select
Create Topology and enter a name and description for the new
topology.
AutoCAD Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data,
on each element that makes up the best route topology.
13 Click Finish to perform the best route analysis.
To display the order in which to visit points, use annotation to label the
best route with the object data stored on the best route topology objects.
For more information, see To insert annotation (page 1103).
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map Topology Network Analysis. Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONET Command Line
1332 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Performing a Flood Trace
An analysis that looks out from a point in all directions is called a network
flood trace. You can perform a flood trace on a network topology, which is
made up of drawing objects and their relationship data.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
You specify the point where the network starts and the maximum distance
the network can traverse. The analysis determines how many links and nodes
can be traveled before the accumulated resistance exceeds the specified
maximum resistance. For example, you might want to find all restaurants
within a 10-minute walk of a hotel.
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Using Flood Trace to Test Network Integrity
You can use flood trace analysis to check the integrity of a network topology.
If some links are not flooded, the topology is incomplete; you can use the
map editing tools to correct the geometry, and then recreate the topology.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network flood trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link (page 849) using
an object data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the
Link Direct Resistance parameter to an AutoLISP expression that uses this
speed limit data.
For example, to determine a flood trace analysis based on a maximum travel
time, start a flood trace, select the start point for the analysis, enter the
Performing a Flood Trace | 1333
AutoLISP expression for the Link Direct Resistance, and specify the travel time
for Maximum Value. This analysis will show the streets that can be reached
from a start node within the specified period of time.
See also:
Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 845)
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 849)
Expression Evaluator (page 1541)
Expression dialog box (page 1807)
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
To perform a flood trace
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 821) and To load a topology (page 907).
2 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis.
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1983),
click Flood Trace. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the map.
Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Review the start point you have specified. The coordinates of the point
are shown in the list.
To double-check the location of a point in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
To delete the point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For resistance and direction, you can
1334 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
Link Direction Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
Reverse Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
Link Direct Resistance Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
Link Reverse Resistance Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
Node Resistance Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
Specify a maximum resistance for the trace. The analysis determines
how many links and nodes can be traveled before the accumulated
resistance exceeds the specified maximum resistance.
For example, to trace out to a maximum length of 5000, set the Link
Direct Resistance to .LENGTH and set the Maximum Resistance to 5000.
To trace out to the first node on each link, set the Link Direct Resistance
to 0, set the Node Resistance to 50 and set a Maximum Resistance of 45.
8 Click Next.
9 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether save the flood trace
results as a new topology.
To view your flood trace onscreen, select Highlight. Select the highlight
color.
To save the flood path trace as a new topology, select Create Topology.
Enter a name and description for the new topology. The new topology
is created on the existing objects.
10 Click Finish to perform the flood trace.
Performing a Flood Trace | 1335
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map Topology Network Analysis. Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONET Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology Analysis Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Overlaying Two Topologies
A powerful form of analysis is possible when you overlay two or more
topologies. Topologies can be created only from drawing objects.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To use overlay analysis
on geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
There are three types of overlay analysis:
Nodes with polygons
Networks with polygons
Polygons with polygons
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing.
Options for Overlaying Topologies
When you overlay two topologies, you choose the method in which the two
selected topologies interact. In some cases, the result varies according to which
topology is the source and which is the overlay.
1336 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE All the overlay analysis operators change arcs into a series of line segments;
for example, a complete circle consists of 32 segments. In the examples shown
above, the result topology is a tessellated (or jagged) circle after overlay analysis.
This may affect properties of the result topology, and gives different values, such
as area and perimeter.
Intersect
Intersect operations combine topologies and keep only the common geometry.
Intersect acts like the Boolean AND operation. The results are the same
whichever topology is chosen as the first or second. Object data is combined
for the two operations.
Here are some examples of using Intersect:
Which parcels (polygons) fall within 100-year flood zones (polygons)?
Intersect shows only the flooded properties, not the whole property.
Which crimes (nodes) fall within drug-free zones (polygons)?
Which stream sections (networks) fall within the building area (polygons)
and need to be examined for potential negative environmental impact?
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1337
Union
Union operations combine polygons with polygons and keep all geometry.
Union acts like the Boolean OR operation and can be used only with polygons.
For example, you can combine parcels with soils information for property
assessment. Use Union to maintain both sets of geometry together and pull
them apart as needed.
Identity
Identity operations work like Union on the source topology and like Intersect
on the overlay topology. Use Identity to combine nodes, links, or polygons
with polygons and keep all the input geometry. Identity creates one topology
with one link where the link is crossed by the overlay topology.
When Identity is used with the question, Which parcels (polygons) fall within
100-year flood zones (polygons)?, all the properties in the flood zones are
shown intact.
Erase
Erase operations use the overlay polygon topology like a mask and erase
everything in the source polygon topology that is covered by the overlay
topology.
Clip
Clip operations use the overlay polygon topology as a boundary. The parts of
the source polygons outside the overlay polygons are clipped and discarded.
You can use this option to show polygons within a boundary polygon, such
as a city or state boundary.
Paste
Paste operations paste the overlay polygon topology on top of the source
polygons. The source polygons not covered by the overlay remain. The Paste
option can be used only with polygons.
Object Data in Overlay Analysis
You can copy selected object data and external database data from the source
and overlay topologies to a new object data table in the resulting topology.
You specify the name of the new object data table that will store the data in
the resulting topology. The object data table name should be a new name.
Data fields in the resulting topology look like this:
TOPONAME_FIELD
1338 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In addition to any fields you select, overlay analysis creates these object data
fields in the resulting topology.
Data Field Name
Polygon Identification Number TOPOID
Object ID in source topology (TOPO-
NAME1 is name of Source)
TOPONAME1_ID
Object ID in overlay topology (TOPO-
NAME2 is name of Overlay)
TOPONAME2_ID
Percentage area of parent polygon in
source topology
TOPONAME1_PERCENTAREA
Percentage area of parent polygon in
overlay topology
TOPONAME2_PERCENTAREA
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to do an overlay analysis
using two topologies.
Procedures
To overlay two topologies (page 1339)
GIS Skills
Find which lines are within a particular
polygon (overlay analysis).
Related topics
Creating Topologies (page 821)
Loading or Unloading Topologies
(page 906)
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topo-
logies (page 1319)
To overlay two topologies
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click the source
topology Analysis Overlay.
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1339
2 NOTE Most of the overlay analysis types work only with polygon topologies.
For more information about those that work with node or network topologies,
see the Concept tab for this topic (page 1336).
3 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box (page 1999),
do the following:
Select the type of overlay analysis to perform:
Intersect Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
Union Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
Identity The result topology includes areas that appear in the
source topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within
the source topology boundary.
Erase The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The
area covered by the overlay polygons is erased from the source
polygon area.
Clip The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay
topology. The source polygons are clipped to the outer boundary
of the overlay polygons.
Paste The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology.
The result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas
of the source topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the
overlay topology.
Click Next.
4 In the Select Overlay Topology dialog box, do the following:
Select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology.
Click Next.
5 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box, do the
following:
Select Highlight to highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Select
the highlight color.
1340 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Enter a name and description for the new topology, and specify the
layer to place it on.
Click Next.
6 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box, do the
following to copy data to the result topology:
For Source Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression
Evaluator) to select the data from the source topology that you want
to include in the resulting topology. You can include fields in an
object data table or columns in an external database.
For Overlay Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression
Evaluator) to select the data from the overlay topology that you want
to include in the resulting topology.
Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
Object data and external database records are attached to the centroids
of the result topology.
Click Next.
7 In the final dialog box, choose whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
8 For certain overlay operations, you also specify the block to use for
centroids.
9 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1341
Click Map Topology Overlay. Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box Dialog Box
Dissolving a Composite Topology
If a topology contains many smaller polygons, you can create a new topology
by combining polygons that share the same data value in a specified field.
This field is called the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data
field or a column in a linked external database.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
Dissolving Polygons
When you dissolve a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks each boundary
between polygons to see if the dissolve field value is the same for both. If so,
the boundary and one of the centroids are removed. All object fields except
for the dissolve and any new topology fields are removed.
If adjacent polygons do not contain the dissolve field, the boundary is not
dissolved and the resulting polygon has a blank value for that field.
1342 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Dissolving Network Links
When you dissolve a network topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks nodes
between lines to see whether two lines intersect at a specified node and whether
the dissolve field is the same. If so, the node is removed, and the two links
are joined to form one link. All object fields except for the dissolve and any
new topology fields are removed as shown in the following illustration.
If adjacent lines do not contain the dissolve field, the node is not dissolved
and the resulting polyline has a blank value for that field.
See also:
Overview of Creating Topologies (page 822)
To load a topology (page 907)
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies (page 1319)
To dissolve a composite topology
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), right-click the topology to dissolve Analysis
Dissolve.
2 Note that topologies must be loaded before you can work with them. See
To load a topology (page 907).
3 In the Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box (page 1998), for Dissolve
By, specify the data element to use for the new topology. To select a field
from an object data table or a column from an external database, click
(Expression Evaluator).
Dissolving a Composite Topology | 1343
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value
for the specified field or column are combined into a single polygon or
line.
NOTE When dissolving a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D uses only data that
is attached or linked to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data
attached to a polygon border.
4 In the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Specify the highlight color.
5 Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer.
Click Next.
6 In the Topology Dissolve - Output Attributes dialog box, do the following:
Click (Expression Evaluator) to select the data to include in the
resulting topology. You can include fields in an object data table or
columns in an external database.
Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
NOTE If you do not want to populate an Object Data Table with the
dissolve information, select the last (empty) item in the list. Selecting this
empty item will not copy data from the dissolve topology.
Click Next.
7 In the final dialog box, indicate whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
If you are dissolving a polygon topology, you can also specify the block
to use for centroids.
8 Click Finish to dissolve the topology.
1344 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
MAPANDISSOLVE
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Click Analyze Dissolve. Menu
Dissolve Topology
Icon
MAPANDISSOLVE Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology Analysis Dissolve
Task Pane
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box Dialog Box
Buffering a Topology
A buffer analysis identifies objects within a specified offset of elements in
node, network, and polygon topologies. A buffer is a zone that is drawn around
a topology. For example, you might specify a buffer on either side of a river
to show the extent of a flood plain.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To perform buffer analysis
on geospatial feature data, see Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306).
Buffering a Topology | 1345
Use Buffer Analysis to show an area around an existing topology. In this case, the
buffer analysis of the power line network topology creates a new polygon topology.
For buffering, you create a new polygon topology from an existing node,
network, or polygon topology and specify a buffer offset.
The buffer offset can be:
A positive or negative numeric value
An expression
A value specified by object data
A value linked to an external database record
You can use negative offset values (page 1541) for polygon topologies only.
TIP You can improve the performance of buffering operations by increasing the
RAM to more than the recommended amount, or by increasing the virtual memory
on your system. This is recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
See also:
Expression Evaluator (page 1541)
Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306)
1346 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. To perform buffer analysis
on geospatial feature data, see To create a buffer (page 1308).
To buffer a topology
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a topology
Analysis Buffer.
2 In the Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box (page 1992), enter
the buffer distance. Click Next. The buffer extends the specified distance
from the objects.
The buffer offset can be any of the following:
Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a
negative value.
An expression that evaluates to a numeric value.
A value in an object data table or a linked external database. Click
(Expression Evaluator) to select the table and field or the link
template and column from a list.
NOTE If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a
value in an object data table or an external database, the data must be
attached to the centroid of the polygon.
3 In the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting buffer topology onscreen. Specify a highlight color
that is different from the color of the objects.
4 Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer
to place it on. Click Next.
NOTE If you specify a locked layer, AutoCAD Map 3D can create the buffer
geometry but not the buffer topology.
5 In the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box,
specify the blocks to use for centroids and node in the resulting buffer
topology.
To use a point, select ACAD_POINT.
To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file.
Buffering a Topology | 1347
6 Click Finish to create the buffer topology.
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Click Analyze Buffer. Menu
Buffer Topology
Icon
MAPANBUFFER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Buffer
Task Pane
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box Dialog Box
Querying a Topology
Use a topology query to retrieve a loaded topology and its associated data
from the current drawing or an attached drawing. You can also query part of
a topology in a source drawing and work on that part of a topology without
having to retrieve all the objects that make up a topology.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
There are three differences between using standard queries and topology
queries:
Topology queries work with only one topology; standard queries work
with all objects in the attached drawings.
Because topology information is stored in object data, a Data condition
can be based on Area, Length, Perimeter, Direction, Direct Resistance, and
Reverse Resistance.
Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
1348 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Creating a Result Topology
When you use a topology query, you can hold the retrieved information in
the current drawing in three types of topology:
None No information is added to the geometry in the current drawing.
Temporary Information is retrieved and stored in memory as a topology
with a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
You cannot save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings.
However, you can save the temporary topology to make it permanent (page
1354), or you can retain the topology in the current drawing.
Permanent The query retrieves data and creates a topology in the current
drawing. You can save back this topology to the source drawings. The
topology name must not be preceded by an asterisk (*).
Location Queries
Location queries on network topology work in the same way as queries on
any other linear or point object.
Data Retrieved by Location Query Topology
Nodes Node
Links; also nodes if part of topology Network
Polygons if links or centroid selected; also
links or nodes if part of polygon topology
Polygon
Polygons are handled as true areas, not just as boundaries. In the example
following, the polygon area crosses through the query boundary so the whole
polygon is retrieved, although none of the objects that make up the polygon
intersect any part of the query boundary.
Querying a Topology | 1349
Point location queries also retrieve the polygon that includes the point.
Object Data Queries
Any topology object can be queried using object data, such as node, link, and
polygon identifiers; the "from" and "to" node information on links; the left
and right side information on links; polygons; and so on.
Topology queries can retrieve data such as areas, perimeters, numbers of links,
and more. For example, a query to retrieve objects with an area greater than
a specified value gives different results with the two query types:
A query defined with a standard Define Query Of Attached Drawings
retrieves closed polylines with areas of the specified value.
A Define Topology Query retrieves all polygons with areas of the specified
value, whatever the objects making up the polygon (lines, arcs, or open
polylines) are.
1350 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Property Alteration with Topology Queries
When you define a property alteration for topology objects, only specific
elements of the topology are altered, as shown in the following table.
Modified Objects Property Alteration
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Block Name
Nodes, links, and centroids Color
Nodes, links, and centroids Elevation
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Height
Nodes, links, and centroids Layer
Nodes, links, and centroids Linetype
Nodes in node and network topologies. Centroids in
polygon topology
Rotation
Nodes, links, and centroids Scale
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Text Style
Links Width
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology (text appears at the centroid label
point)
Text Value
Links Thickness
Hatched polygons Hatch
Querying a Topology | 1351
Saving and Using Queries
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it with the current
drawing in the Query Library or to an external file, and edit the query or reuse
it. The following table shows the options available with topology queries.
Command Procedure Description
ADEQUERY In the Define Query Of Attached Drawings
dialog box, click Save. See Saving Queries
(page 177).
Save a query
ADERUNQUERY Create tab Object Query panel Run
See Running a Saved Query (page
178).
Run Query (internal)
ADERUNXQUERY Create tab Object Query panel Extern-
al
Run External Query
ADEQUERYLIB Create tab Object Query panel Library
See Setting Up a Query Library
(page 173).
Use the Query Lib-
rary
Report Mode
In addition to the dot variables available using the standard Define Query Of
Attached Drawings command, Define Topology Query has two extra dot
variables.
.TOPONAME Contains the topology name.
.TOPOTYPE Contains the topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or
POLYGON.
Three of the dot variables give different results in topology queries.
.DRAWING The drawing name that is the source of the geometry object
in the topology.
.AREA The value of the AREA object data field for each polygon.
1352 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
.PERIMETER The value of the PERIMETER object data field for each
polygon.
The Process Sub-Objects option in the Output Report Options dialog box
specifies the objects in a report.
Reported Data
Do not Process Sub-Objects Process Sub-Objects Topology Type
Nodes Nodes, objects, and object data Node
Links Links, start and end node data Network
Centroids Centroids, links, and nodes Polygon
To query a topology
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click a topology
Analysis Topology Query.
2 In the Topology Query dialog box (page 2008), select the topology to query.
If the topology is not on the list, click Load and select the topology to
use.
3 Under Result Topology, specify how to save the results of the query:
None Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no
topology data is created.
Temporary Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the
topology data is loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the
objects.
Permanent Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a
new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
4 To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query.
To define a new query, click Define Query Of Attached Drawings and
define the conditions for the query.
To close the dialog box, but have AutoCAD Map 3D remember your
selections, click OK.
Querying a Topology | 1353
5 When you click Define Query, the Define Query Of Attached Drawings
dialog box opens. Its operation and options are the same for topology
and AutoCAD Map 3D queries, except for some options you have in the
Property option in the Query Type area. For more information, see
Overview of Queries (page 1235).
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Click Setup More DWG Options Define Topology
Query.
Menu
Query Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Analysis Topology Query
Task Pane
Topology Query dialog box Dialog Box
Saving a Temporary Topology
When you use a topology query, you can store the retrieved information in
a temporary topology. The topology name is preceded by an asterisk (*). To
save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings, first convert the
temporary topology to a permanent topology.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. There is no equivalent
for geospatial feature data.
See also:
Querying a Topology (page 1348)
To convert a temporary topology to a permanent topology
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), under Current Drawing, right-click the
temporary topology you want to convert Administration Rename.
1354 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
A temporary topology has a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
2 In the Rename Topology dialog box (page 1988), enter a new name for the
topology.
To create a permanent topology, do not start the topology name with an
asterisk (*). Also note that topology names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Names cannot include
spaces.
3 Optionally, enter a new description for the topology.
4 Click OK to rename the topology, making it a permanent topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOREN
Changes the name and description of a topology
Click Map Topology Administration Rename. Menu
MAPTOPOREN Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology Administration Rename
Task Pane
Rename Topology dialog box Dialog Box
Saving a Temporary Topology | 1355
1356
Publishing and Sharing
Maps
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
There are many ways to output and share map data. Use the following table to
determine which option to use for moving your data from one format to another:
Use this option... To this format... To move this
data...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Plot panel Plot.
See Publishing a Map to a Plotter (page
1363) and Publishing Maps (page 1360)
Printer, plotter, or file Entire map
See Publishing Map Books (page 1381) Map book (divides your map into a grid
of tiles and renders each tile on a separ-
Entire map
ate page, which can be published to a
plotter or a file)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Current Map As DWG.
See Exporting Maps to DWG Format
(page 1459)
DWG format Entire map
Click Publish.
DWF (Design Web Format) to display in
Autodesk Design Review
Entire map
9
1357
Use this option... To this format... To move this
data...
See Publishing to DWF (page 1364)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Export To DWF/PDF
panel Export PDF.
PDF file Entire map
See Publishing to PDF (page 1373)
At the Command prompt, enter pub-
lishtoweb. See Publishing to a Web Page
(page 1373)
Web page Entire map
Click Publish Publish To
MapGuide.
Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise Entire map
See Publishing to MapGuide (page 1376)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel As SDF2.
Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or
earlier
Entire map
Click Send eTransmit.
A transmittal package Entire map and all its
dependent files (for
example, Xrefs)
See Using eTransmit (page 1376)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
See Overview of Converting and Export-
ing (page 1405)
Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File)
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages
ESRI Shapefile
GML (Geographic Markup Language)
MapInfo MIF/MID
MapInfo TAB
MicroStation DGN
Drawing data
Shape Multiclass
VML (Vector Markup Language)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel To FDO Connection.
Oracle
ESRI ArcSDE
Drawing data
See Exporting DWG Data to an FDO
Data Store (page 1461)
1358 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Use this option... To this format... To move this
data...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace,
click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel As Image.
Image formats Drawing data
See Exporting DWG Data to an Image
Format (page 1465)
Click Save As Other
Formats
See Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF
File (page 1458)
DXF Drawing data
In Display Manager, right-click the layer
and choose Export Layer Data to SDF or
Save Layer.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Man-
ager Layer (page 1469)
Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) Geospatial data
In Map Explorer, click Tools Bulk
Copy
See Migrating Data (page 615)
Another geospatial format Geospatial data
In the Data Table, choose Options
Export.
See Exporting from the Data Table (page
1473)
A printer or a comma-separated file Data attached to
geospatial objects
At the Command prompt, enter ad-
equery.
See Creating a Drawing Object Report
(DWG) (page 1477)
A printer or a comma-separated file Data attached to
drawing objects
In the Data View, click File menu
Print.
See (page 1474)
A printer or a comma-separated file External data linked
to objects
See Publishing and Printing Metadata
(page 1514) and Sharing Metadata (page
1510)
A printer or a comma-separated file Metadata
Overview of Publishing and Sharing | 1359
You can also use the following options to share map data:
Export data to a GIS format and back into DWG format (page 1465).
Convert Display Manager styles to object properties (page 1459). This allows
you to share styled maps with users who do not have Display Manager (for
example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version of AutoCAD Map 3D).
Publishing Maps
When you publish a map or map book (page 2067), AutoCAD Map 3D plots it
and sends it to an output format. For example, if you publish your map to a
plotter, you print a copy of the map. If you publish it to DWF, you create a
file containing the plotted map or map book.
Overview of Publishing Maps
You can publish a map to the following output formats:
Plotters
DWF (Design Web Format)
PDF
A web page
A packaged format that includes all dependent files (eTransmit)
MapGuide
Map books
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to publish a map to a
MapGuide server.
Show me how to create a map book.
Show me how to publish a map book
with attributes to a DWF file.
1360 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Procedures
To publish your map (page 1361)
Tutorials
Lesson 7: Publish Your Map
Workflow
Print and Publish Data
GIS Skills
Publish a completed map to a MapGuide
server.
Create a map book with appropriate-
scale tiling for a city.
Produce a multi-sheet DWF file for a map
book.
Related topics
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
(page 1357)
Overview of Converting and Exporting
(page 1405)
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data
(page 1472)
Use the following methods to publish your map.
Use this method To publish to this format...
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Output tab Plot panel Plot
See Publishing a Map to a Plotter (page
1363).
Plotter
Click Publish.
DWF (Design Web Format)
See Publishing to DWF (page 1364).
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Output tab Export To DWF/PDF panel
Export PDF.
PDF
Overview of Publishing Maps | 1361
Use this method To publish to this format...
See Publish a Sheet Set in the AutoCAD
Help.
At the Command prompt, enter pub-
lishtoweb.
A Web page
See Publishing to a Web Page (page 1373).
Click Send eTransmit.
See Package a Set of Files for Internet
Transmission in the online Help.
eTransmit
Click Publish Publish To
MapGuide.
See Publishing to MapGuide (page 1376).
Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Output tab Map Data Transfer panel
As SDF2.
Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or
earlier
See Publishing Map Books (page 1381). Map Books
Adding a Reference Grid to a Map
You can add a reference system to your map in paper space. Reference systems
include reference grids and graticules. A reference grid is a grid that overlays
a map. A graticule (page 2065) is a network of geographic lines, such as latitude
and longitude lines.
In AutoCAD Map 3D 2011, you can create a Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) (page 2069) grid. You can define the lettering scheme, scale, and precision
of the grid. When you plot your map, the reference grid will be printed over
it.
When creating a reference grid, AutoCAD Map 3D will draw grid lines at the
precision level, and tick marks at the next level. For example, a 1000 meter
grid will have tick marks at every 100 meters.
1362 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To add a reference system to a map
1 Switch to the layout tab.
2 On the Layout Tools tab, click .
3 Select the viewport for the reference system. The Create Reference System
Dialog Box (page 1602) appears.
NOTE You must select a non-rotated, rectangular viewport.
4 In the Create Reference System dialog box, specify the following:
Reference System: select a lettering scheme for your reference grid.
Use MGRS-AA (MGRS-New) with the WSG84 datum. Use MGRS-AL
(MGRS-Old) with older datums.
Scale: select the view scale for the reference grid.
Precision: select the precision of the grid lines. AutoCAD Map 3D will
draw grid lines at the precision level, and tick marks at the next level.
For example, a 1000 meter grid will have tick marks at every 100
meters.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPLAYOUTREFERENCESYSTEM
Creates a reference system for a selected viewport on the layout tab of your
map.
MAPLAYOUTREFERENCESYSTEM Command Line
Create Reference System Dialog Box Dialog Box
Publishing a Map to a Plotter
You can publish to a plotter for a printed copy. The steps for publishing to a
plotter are slightly different for a map and for a map book (page 1401), but you
set plotting options the same way for both.
Publishing a Map to a Plotter | 1363
See also:
Overview of Map Books (page 1381)
To publish to a plotter
1 Save the map.
2 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Plot panel Plot
3 Choose a printer or plotter and set any options needed.
For information, type To plot a drawing in the Search tab of the help.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
Click File menu Plot. Menu
Plot a drawing.
Icon
PLOT Command Line
Plot Dialog Box Dialog Box
Publishing to DWF
DWF (Design Web Format
Reader versions
5 or later. You can publish a single PDF file or multiple PDF files containing
separate layouts.
See also:
Overview of Publishing Maps (page 1360)
To publish to PDF
1 Save the map.
2 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Export To
DWF/PDF panel Export PDF.
Publishing to a Web Page
You can save your map in HTML format for display as a static web page. The
result is a snapshot of the map that cannot be edited in AutoCAD Map 3D,
but can be viewed by any web browser.
You use a wizard to guide you through the publishing process. Once you have
created a web page with this wizard, you can update the information for the
web page if the map file changes.
For more information, see Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages
in the AutoCAD Help.
Publishing to PDF | 1373
NOTE You can also use the MapGuide technology to publish map-related data
on the web or on an intranet.
See also:
Overview of Publishing Maps (page 1360)
Publishing to MapGuide (page 1376)
To publish a map as a web page
1 Save your map.
2 At the Command prompt, enter publishtoweb.
3 Click Create New Web Page and click Next.
NOTE Once you create a web page with this wizard, you can choose Edit
Existing Web Page. You select the web page to edit, and then you can change
any of the settings for that web page and republish it.
4 Specify a name and location for the web page files.
Type a name for the web page (without any file name extension).
Specify the parent directory for the web page files by clicking the
button labeled ... next to the default path. Choose or create a folder
for the files and click Open.
Type a description for the web page in the space provided.
Click Next.
5 Choose an image type.
As you select an image type from the drop-down list, the description
provides information for that option. The last one you select will be used.
For JPEG and PNG, you can specify an image size.
Review the image types and select the one you want.
Select an image size (if appropriate).
Click Next.
6 Choose a page template.
1374 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
As you select a template from the list, the preview and description update
for that option.
Review the templates and select the one you want.
Click Next.
7 Choose a formatting theme for the web page.
As you select a theme from the drop-down list, the preview illustrates it.
Review the themes and select the one you want.
Click Next.
8 Choose whether to use i-drop
Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the Open GIS
Consortium web site.
You can import and export GML in and out of AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting
You can export GML version 3.1.1 files.
If you are exporting GML data in Asian languages, verify that mapexport.ini
contains the language encoding settings you need to export valid GML data
in the desired language.
Driver Options
GML has no export driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To verify language encoding settings for export to GML (page 1429)
To export drawing objects to GML (page 1430)
To verify language encoding settings for export to GML
Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapexport.ini file export
valid GML data in the desired language.
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) | 1429
For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
(page 264).
To export drawing objects to GML
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the GML (Geography Markup
Language) file format and a location for the exported files.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
1430 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID
MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
About MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for
features, and is a set of two physical files that work together:
.mif Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different
types of geometry.
.mid Attributes for the geometric data.
Exporting
The MIF/MID format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box
(for example, ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when
you export such ellipses from AutoCAD Map 3D to MIF/MID, they are
segmented. To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation,
edit the mapexport.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no export driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to MapInfo (page 1432)
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID | 1431
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file (page 269).
To export drawing objects to MapInfo
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the MapInfo MIF/MID file format
and a location for the exported files.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
1432 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
Exporting To MapInfo TAB
MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a
two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data)
in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions:
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
About MapInfo TAB Files
.tab The main file for a MapInfo table. It is associated with the appropriate
.dat, .id, .map, and .ind files.
.dat Tabular data for a table in the MapInfo native format.
.id An index to a MapInfo graphical objects (.map) file.
.map Contains geographic information describing map objects.
.ind An index to a MapInfo tabular (.dat) file.
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import and export MapInfo TAB up to version
7.
Exporting
The TAB format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box (for
example, ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when
you export ellipses from AutoCAD Map 3D to TAB, they are segmented. You
can change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation in the
mapexport.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no export driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
Exporting To MapInfo TAB | 1433
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB (page 404)
To export drawing objects to MapInfo TAB (page 1434)
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file (page 269).
To export drawing objects to MapInfo TAB
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the MapInfo TAB file format
and a location for the exported files.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
1434 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8
You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems,
Inc., and MicroStation programs use the DGN format, which is like a DWG
file; points, lines, areas, text, and other object types can all be present in the
same file.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting
There are two separate choices for Microstation DGN (version 7 and version
8) in the Export dialog box. You can map layers in the map to DGN levels
when you export. The default is to map layers to level names using the same
name as the layer.
Geometry in DGN 7 files is stored in fixed-point integers. When you export
map data with large coordinate values, you can overflow these values with
unpredictable results. The seed file you use for export has a dramatic effect
on the resulting DGN data.
Every DGN file requires a seed file to give it default information (like the
acad.dwg prototype or template file). The seed file controls working units,
global origin, the version to export, and so on. Several seed files ship with
AutoCAD Map 3D.
The default for a version 7 DGN file is lrgseed.dgn. The default for a version
8 DGN file is lrgseed3d_v8.dgn. Both of these are three-dimensional seed files.
To export to a two-dimensional DGN file, or to set a specific global origin or
specific working units, reference the file name of the desired seed file. The
global origin and units of resolution should be set in a seed file that is
appropriate to your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing coordinates.
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 | 1435
The seed file you use significantly affects the outcome of the export process.
If the design plane coordinate bounds in the seed file do not fully contain the
extents of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D repeats the export
operation automatically using the Compute Optimal Seed File option. If the
second export operation fails, manually choose a seed file that works for your
region and coordinate system.
Export Restrictions
Closed objects are not filled, even if they were filled originally.
Hatch patterns are not exported. If you export polygon data that is hatched
in AutoCAD Map 3D, the resulting data is not filled in MicroStation.
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 7 files:
Description Option
Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your Auto-
Coordinate Units
CAD Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit in
your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are
using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
Seed File
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, and so on. You
must use a version 7 DGN seed file.
Select this option to override all seed file settings and have
AutoCAD Map 3D calculate the settings for you. AutoCAD
Compute Parameters
Map 3D determines the largest dimension for the set of
exported objects and sets the appropriate range and pre-
cision. It sets the UOR per Sub to 10, and sets the Global
Origin to the center of the bounding rectangle of the ex-
ported objects.
Select this option to override the global origin setting in
the seed file. Specify the global origin to use.
Override Global Origin
1436 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 8 files:
Description Option
Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your Auto-
Coordinate Units
CAD Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit in
your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are
using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, and so on.
Seed File
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database (page 433)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To change the seed file for a single file (page 1437)
To change the default seed file (page 1438)
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To change the seed file for a single file
1 In the Export dialog box, click the Options tab.
2 Click Driver Options.
3 In the Design File Output Settings (page 1736), under Seed File, click .
NOTE If you are a limited rights user, be sure that the seed file is in a location
where you have access to it.
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 | 1437
4 In the Select Seed File dialog box, navigate to the location of the seed file
to use and select the file.
NOTE Be sure to specify a seed file designed for the version of DGN you
specified in the Export Location dialog box. You cannot use a DGN version
8 seed file when exporting to DGN version 7.
5 Click Open.
To change the default seed file
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D\R17.2 folder.
2 Find the section labeled [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]. This is where the default
seed file is specified.
3 Specify the new default seed file.
For example: Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn".
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN)
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the MicroStation File V7 or V8
file format and a location for the exported files.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
1438 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data or Feature Class tab, click Select Attributes and select the
data to export with the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
Select Map Layers To DGN Levels to map each layer in the current
map to a level in the DGN drawing. Specify the layers and the
corresponding names for the DGN levels. DGN version 7 names can
be numbers or strings. For DGN version 8, names must be strings.
Closed polylines are always exported as polygons; they will be shapes
in the DGN v8 file. You cannot clear the Treat Closed Polylines as
Polygons check box.
Click Driver Options to set the options described on the Concept tab
of this dialog box.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
Exporting to Multiple Classes
You can export selected data to multiple feature classes during one export
operation for the following formats:
Autodesk SDF (page 1413)
Oracle (page 1461)
ESRI ArcSDE (page 1422)
Exporting to Multiple Classes | 1439
SQLite (page 1447)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Using the Feature Class Tab on the Export Dialog Box
Use the Feature Class tab for attributes that should be associated with all output
feature classes. For example, suppose you have created three sets of objects:
each set contains water lines, electrical lines, and sewer lines, but you have
color-coded them to represent different maintenance dates. You can select
objects based on color, and export them to multiple feature classes (water,
electrical, and sewer). You can select an attribute on the Feature Class tab
(maintenance date, for example), and apply it to all three feature classes when
you export them.
However, if the objects you are exporting already have associated attributes,
it may be best if you do not select any attributes on the Feature Class tab.
See also:
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To export multiple feature classes (page 1440)
To combine multiple layers into one feature class (page 1442)
To change the class names that are assigned automatically (page 1442)
To export multiple feature classes
1 Click Create multiple classes based on a drawing property on the Feature
Class tab of the Export dialog box (page 1405).
2 Specify the basis for the target feature classes by selecting an item from
the Drawing Object To Use list.
For example, select Layers or Object Data.
1440 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Only the methods relevant to your map are listed. For example, if you
did not classify objects in the map, you will not see the Object
Classification option.
The classification method you choose determines the resulting feature
class attributes, as shown in the following table:
End result Select Attributes
Dialog Box set-
tings
Output Multiple class
export
classification
method
No attributes in the output
feature classes
Nothing selected A feature class
for each expor-
ted layer
Layers
All feature classes contain all
attributes that were selected in
Attributes selected A feature class
for each expor-
ted layer
Layers
the Select Attributes dialog
box.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Nothing selected A feature class
for each object
Object Data
(page 198) or Link
Data table or Link Template
definitions.
associated
with an object
Templates (page
522)
data table or
link template.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Attributes selected A feature class
for each object
Object data or
link templates
Data table or Link Template associated
definitions AND all attributes with an object
selected in the Select Attributes data table or
link template. dialog box are also assigned to
all output feature classes.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the object
class.
Nothing selected A feature class
for each expor-
ted object
class.
Object class
(page 116)
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Attributes selected A feature class
for each expor-
Object class
Class AND all attributes selec- ted object
class. ted in the Select Attributes
Exporting to Multiple Classes | 1441
End result Select Attributes
Dialog Box set-
tings
Output Multiple class
export
classification
method
dialog box are also assigned to
all output feature classes.
The grid automatically fills with the drawing objects and the names of
the feature classes to which they will be mapped. To remove any object
from the list, deselect its check box.
3 To change the name of the target feature class for an object, click in its
Feature Class cell. Select the existing name and enter a new one.
4 To change the properties for the feature class, click in its Feature Class
cell and then click within the cell. In the Feature Class Property
Mapping dialog box (page 1727), click Select Attributes to display the Select
Attributes dialog box (page 1729), where you can select the attributes to
map to the feature class.
5 If you select .COLOR, .LINEWEIGHT, or .LINETYPE, specify the data type
for the target feature class property by clicking in the Drawing Attributes
cell. In the New Property Data Type dialog box (page 1726), select a data
type.
To combine multiple layers into one feature class
1 On the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box (page 1405), select Create
a single class from all selected objects.
2 In the Feature Class column, give the new feature class an appropriate
name.
For example, if your DWG file has three layers called text_City,
text_County, and text_Region, you can name the combined feature class
Text in the Feature Class column.
To change the class names that are assigned automatically
1 Click the Feature Class field.
2 Edit the proposed class names as needed.
3 Click OK.
1442 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting To Shape Multiclass
Drawing (DWG) objects can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files
contain only one. However, the Shape Multiclass option lets you export
multiple drawing objects to a set of SHP files in a folder you specify. Each
resulting SHP will contain the geometry and attributes for a single geometry
type. For example, if pipes, roads, and streams are all represented by lines,
you will export three sets of SHP files, each one containing the geometry and
attributes for one of those object types. For information about the set of files
produced for SHP and their naming conventions, see Importing ESRI Shape
Files (page 397).
NOTE There is also an MapExport.ini folder (page 397) export option.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting
You can specify that the resulting files use a single feature class or multiple
feature classes based on layer, object classification, object data, or link
templates.
All new SHP classes that contain text entities will have a property called
TEXTSTRING. To bring this information back into AutoCAD Map 3D, select
the import option to import points as text.
To create polygons when you use this export option, select the Treat Closed
Polylines As Polygons option. When you create a multi-polygon in AutoCAD
Map 3D and then save or export it to SHP format, it will appear in its native
SHP file as a multi-polygon (a polygon with multiple exterior rings).
You can export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified
on the Data tab. To do this, click One class and type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time (page 1439) and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Data tab
to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Export Restrictions
SHP files do not support color; in ArcView, each theme is assigned a color that
is used when an item is drawn.
Exporting To Shape Multiclass | 1443
SHP files do not support circular arcs. During export, arcs, splines, and ellipses
are converted to segmented polylines. You can change the settings used for
segmentation in the mapexport.ini file.
You cannot map fields when you export to Shape Multiclass. If you need to
map fields, export your DWG data to SDF first, and then use Migrating Data
(page 615) Bulk Copy to export the data to SHP.
Overwriting and Appending
If you export to an existing folder containing files with the same names as
those that will be generated by the export, you can choose to overwrite the
existing data or append the new data to it. Overwriting can destroy the existing
files when it creates new ones. Appending adds the data in the current export
operation to the existing data without deleting any existing data. If you append
and you are transforming the coordinate system for the data, the old data and
the new data must both use the same source and target coordinate systems.
You cannot use the append option to update existing data, but only to add
new data.
NOTE If your data meets these criteria but the export operation fails, try deleting
the relevant .prj files in the target folder and then retry the export operation.
Driver Options
When exporting to SHP files, you can select 2 Dimension Shape Files or 3
Dimension Shape Files from the driver options.
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To change the settings used for segmentation (page 1445)
To export drawing objects to Shape Multiclass (page 1445)
To map fields when exporting to Shape Multiclass (page 1446)
To create polygons when exporting to SHP Multiclass (page 1446)
1444 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on
the Data tab. (page 1446)
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file (page 269).
To export drawing objects to Shape Multiclass
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the Shape Multiclass file format
and a location for the exported files. Click OK.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Exporting To Shape Multiclass | 1445
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
To create multiple classes, select Multiple Classes and specify what
the feature classes will be based on (for example, layer).
Your choices on the Options tab and on the Data tab work together
to determine how attributes are assigned to the exported feature
classes. See the Concept tab in this topic for more information.
Click Driver Options to select Two Dimension Shape Files or Three
Dimension Shape Files.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
To map fields when exporting to Shape Multiclass
1 Export your DWG data to SDF first. See Exporting To Autodesk SDF
(Spatial Data File) (page 1413).
2 Use Bulk Copy (page 615) to export the data to SHP.
Bulk Copy allows you to map fields.
To create polygons when exporting to SHP Multiclass
1 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), on the Options tab, select the
Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons option.
2 Do one of the following:
To export closed polylines as lines, select the Line object type.
To export closed polylines as polygons, select the Polygon object type
and select Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons on the Options tab
To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on the
Data tab.
1 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), Options tab, select One class.
2 Type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time (page 1439) and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Data
tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
1446 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting To SQLite
SQLite is a file-based geospatial format.
SQLite is like SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting
You can specify that the resulting files use a single feature class or multiple
feature classes based on layer, object classification, object data, or link
templates. SQLite files can have a single schema only, but can contain multiple
feature classes.
To create polygons when you use this export option, select the Treat Closed
Polylines As Polygons option.
To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on the
Data tab, click One class and type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time. (page 1439) Combine the
data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Data tab to
determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Driver Options
There are no export driver options for SQLite
See also:
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files (page 264)
Importing ESRI Shape Files (page 397)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Before moving drawing data to SQLite
Clean up any geometry errors. (page 1591)
Exporting To SQLite | 1447
Use the AutoCAD Map 3D cleanup tools to correct any geometry errors
introduced during drafting, digitizing, or converting the data before you
export it.
Add attribute data to objects (page 1047) or classify (page 981) the drawing
(DWG) objects you are exporting. You can export information with drawing
data in the following circumstances:
If you create object data tables and add attribute information
If you link objects to data in an external data source, such as a database
If you classify objects, you can use those classes as the basis for your
export
Decide how to export the data to SQLite.
You can export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified
on the Feature Class tab. To do this, click Create a single class from all
selected objects and type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time (page 1439). Combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Feature
Class tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
To export drawing objects to SQLite
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the SQLite Spatial (sqlite) file
format and a location for the exported files. Click OK.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
1448 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Feature Class tab, do the following:
To create multiple classes, select Create Multiple Classes Based On A
Drawing Object.
See Exporting to Multiple Classes (page 1439).
Click Select Attributes and select the data to export with the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export
the entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key
field values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under
Link Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
To move data into SQLite format
Bulk Copy (page 615) Moves data to and from SQLite and other geospatial
data stores.
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language)
AutoCAD Map 3D supports VML (Vector Markup Language). VML, which is
written using the XML syntax, is a text-based markup language used for
describing vector graphics. VML is an export-only format.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language) | 1449
Exporting
When you export to VML format, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a single HyperText
Markup Language (HTML) file with the VML data contained in the <body>
region of the HTML.
When you export objects, be sure that the objects have a color that will be
visible on the target page. For example, if you are exporting to a page with a
white background, be sure that the objects themselves are not white.
You can specify the following attributes for VML objects:
Description VML Attribute
The title of the feature that may be displayed by the VML
viewer. (The title appears as a ToolTip when the user places
their mouse over the feature. Range: string Default: none
vml_title
The URL to jump to if this feature is clicked. Range: string De-
fault: none
vml_url
The target frame in the URL. Range: string Default: none vml_target
The z-index of the feature in the output VML file. Positive
numbers are in front of the screen; negative numbers are be-
vml_z_index
hind the screen. Features having a higher z-index obscure
features with a lower z-index. Range: integer Default: 0 for
vml_polygon features 10 for vml_polyline features 11 for
vml_point features 12 for vml_text features
Driver Options
VML has no export driver options.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To export drawing objects to Vector Markup Language (VML)
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
1450 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the Vector Markup Language
(VML) file format and a location for the exported files.
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1704), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview Filtered
Selection.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 147).
Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
Exporting Point Cloud Data
You can export point cloud data to LiDAR (LAS version 1.2) or space-delimited
ASCII (.xyz) formats. These formats can be shared with other applications that
read LiDAR data. To use this data in AutoCAD Map 3D, you must import and
index the data again. See Bringing in LiDAR Data (page 374).
Exporting Point Cloud Data | 1451
You can also export point cloud data to the Autodesk SDF format. You can
connect to a point cloud SDF file as you would to any SDF data store. Exporting
your point cloud data to SDF format is useful for creating geospatial features
from LiDAR data.
NOTE Because point clouds can contain millions or billions of points, SDF files
created from point clouds can be very large. Before you export your point cloud
to SDF format, filter the point cloud down to the smallest usable size. For best
performance, filter the point cloud down to one million points or fewer.
NOTE You cannot export point cloud data from an index file created using
AutoCAD commands (.PCG file).
To export point cloud data to LAS or ASCII formats
1 Right click the point cloud or point cloud layer you want to export, then
select Export Point Cloud. The Export Point Cloud dialog box appears.
2 Select the file type to which you want to export your point cloud data
in the File of Type field.
3 Specify a file name and save location.
4 Click Save.
To export point cloud data to Autodesk SDF format
Before you export point cloud data to SDF format, use the Point Cloud Manager
(page 1897) to create a filtered point cloud containing only the necessary points.
For best performance, filter your point cloud down to one million points or
fewer.
1 Right click the point cloud or point cloud layer you want to export, then
select Export as SDF. The Export Point Cloud as SDF dialog box appears.
2 Specify a file name and save location.
3 Click Save.
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties
You can map drawing attribute properties to feature class properties when
you export DWG data to the SDF format. You can also map specific values of
the AutoCAD drawing properties .COLOR, .LINETYPE, and .LINEWEIGHT to
specific feature class property values. For example, you could specify that all
1452 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
pipes drawn with green lines are eight-inch pipes, or that all roads drawn with
.25 mm lines are two-lane roads.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to export styled DWG ob-
jects.
Show me how to view the contents of
the SDF file.
Procedures
To map drawing attributes to feature
class properties (page 1454)
To map AutoCAD drawing attribute
values to feature class property values
(page 1454)
Tutorials
Lesson 1: Convert Drawing Layers to
Feature Classes
Batch Exporting
Workflow
Move CAD Data to GIS
GIS Skills
Convert styled DWG objects to features.
Related topics
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
(page 1357)
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial
Data File) (page 1413)
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data
(page 1472)
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties | 1453
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To map drawing attributes to feature class properties
1 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), click the Feature Class tab.
2 Select the drawing objects you want to map to feature class properties.
3 In the Feature Class column, click the [...] button.
4 In the Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box, select or enter the
feature class property to which the drawing attributes should be mapped.
5 You can select additional drawing objects and attributes to export by
clicking the Select Attributes button.
6 Click OK.
To map AutoCAD drawing attribute values to feature class property values
1 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), click the Feature Class tab.
2 Select the drawing attributes you want to map to feature class properties.
3 In the Feature Class column, click the [...] button.
4 In the Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box, select the feature class
property to which the drawing attribute values should be mapped.
5 You can select additional drawing properties and attributes to export by
clicking the Select Attributes button.
6 In the Drawing Attributes column, click the [...] button in the field of the
attribute to be mapped to the feature class property.
7 In the New Property Data Type dialog box, select the appropriate data
type from the drop-down list.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Property Value Mapping dialog box, map the drawing attribute
values to the specific feature class values.
10 Click OK.
1454 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Export dialog box Dialog Box
MAPEXPORTFDO
Export to an FDO data store
Click File Convert DWG To FDO Connection. Menu
MAPEXPORTFDO Command Line
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline
If your map includes text that is enclosed in a polyline, you can turn that text
into object data and export it as attribute data attached to the polyline.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
See also:
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Setting Up Object Data (page 198)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To export text enclosed in a polyline as attribute data
1 Create an object data table (page 201) with one field.
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline | 1455
2 Use the Generate Links (page 1067) command to automatically attach data
to objects.
In the Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1807), select the Enclosed Text
option. This option links the text data to the polyline enclosing the text.
Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records and select the name
of the table you created in step 1.
Click OK and select the objects you want. For each selected object,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new record in the selected object data table
and fills the record with the enclosed text.
3 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
4 On the Data or Feature Class tab of the Map Export dialog box (page 1723),
select the table you created in step 1. Select any other export options you
want and export the objects.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu Define Object Data Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATA Command Line
Define Object Data dialog box Dialog Box
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
Link Template Options Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINK Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template Generate Links
Task Pane
1456 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Generate Data Links dialog box Dialog Box
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Export dialog box Dialog Box
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology
Exporting polygons from a polygon topology is useful when you export data
to an external file format that supports polygons.
During this operation, you can create a group containing all the elements of
complex areas, such as islands. If the islands themselves have nested islands
or other polygons, these nested polygons will form a separate grouping
automatically, creating different levels of grouping. If two or more inner
polygons are not nested but share the same outer boundary, they are treated
as one group.
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
See also:
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon Topology (page 897)
Converting Polylines to Polygons (page 970)
Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons (page 972)
NOTE When you export from a map, only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial
features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format, use
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology | 1457
To export polygons from a polygon topology
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Map 3D Export.
2 In the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), select the topology to export.
All complete polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected.
3 Select Group Complex Polygons to group nested polygons into a single,
balanced polygon.
If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, AutoCAD Map
3D creates a separate polygon for each centroid.
To create a single polygon from nested polygons, each nested polygon
must have a centroid. For example, if three polygons are nested one
within another, and the middle polygon does not have a centroid,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates separate polygons for the inner polygon and
the outer polygon.
4 Set any other export options.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File Convert DWG To Map 3D Export. Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORT Command Line
Export dialog box Dialog Box
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File
You can create DXF files for use with previous versions of AutoCAD or with
any other application that supports the DXF format.
1458 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil
objects are lost when you use this command. Only drawing objects are exported.
Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format,
use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
See also:
Importing DXF Files (page 391)
NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil
objects are lost when you use this command. Only drawing objects are exported.
Geospatial features are ignored. To move geospatial feature data to another format,
use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
To create a DXF file
1 Click Save As AutoCAD Drawing.
2 Select a type of DXF from the Files of Type list.
3 Specify a name and location for the file and click Save.
Quick Reference
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
File menu Save As Menu
SAVEAS Command Line
Exporting Maps to DWG Format
You can save both geospatial features and DWG objects to DWG format from
the Display Manager. This allows you to share styled maps with users who do
not have Display Manager(for example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version
of AutoCAD Map 3D).
In the output drawing, styling is preserved, but object attributes, labels, and
any joined data (page 507) are not. You can view the output drawing with
Exporting Maps to DWG Format | 1459
previous versions of AutoCAD Map 3D and with AutoCAD, and the output
drawing can be used by the Sheet Set Manager.
Each display layer in your map is saved to a corresponding layer in the target
drawing.
To output multiple maps based on different zoom scales, you must save
individual maps for each desired zoom scale.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to export the current map
to DWG format.
Show me how the map looks after con-
version to DWG format
Procedures
To save a styled map to DWG format
(page 1460)
Workflow
Send GIS Data to AutoCAD
GIS Skills
Save the current map in DWG format
with visual fidelity.
Related topics
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data
Store and Back Again (page 1465)
Migrating DWG Data to GIS (page 628)
Geospatial Features and Drawing Ob-
jects (page 9)
Converting Data From Other Formats
to Drawing Objects (page 377)
To save a styled map to DWG format
1 Build your map, styling your feature, and drawing layers as desired.
2 Display the map at the scale you want recipients to share.
1460 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
3 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel Current Map As DWG.
4 In the Save Current Map To DWG dialog box, specify a location and file
name for the exported map and click Save.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store
You can move DWG (drawing object) data into any Oracle database to which
you have connected in AutoCAD Map 3D. You can also move DWG data into
existing ESRI ArcSDE data stores to which you have connected in AutoCAD
Map 3D.
NOTE Only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To
move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk
Copy) (page 617).
Exporting DWG Data to Oracle
When you export to an existing Oracle table, you can use the data to populate
both new and existing classes.
You can export a single class at a time and use the Feature Class tab to match
your output fields to the existing fields. The left-hand column on the Feature
Class tab (on the Export dialog box) is an expression, which allows you to
concatenate fields or do calculations on them.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time (page 1439) and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Feature
Class tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Object class property values are written to the feature class in Oracle if their
data types match. Otherwise, AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to convert to a
supported data type.
You can also use scripting to perform export operations. For single-class export,
the parameters for each export operation can be saved in a profile and you
can export multiple classes with a single script. This is helpful for the cases
where the same complex set of operations must be done frequently.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store | 1461
Exporting DWG Data to ESRI ArcSDE
When you export data to ArcSDE format, you can export only to an existing
ArcSDE data store with a complete schema. You cannot create or modify
ArcSDE schemas using AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Exporting to Multiple Classes (page 1439)
Bringing In Features from Oracle (page 312)
Importing From ESRI ArcSDE (page 391)
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617)
NOTE Only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. To
move geospatial feature data to another format, use Migrating GIS Data (Bulk
Copy) (page 617).
To export DWG data to Oracle:
1 Connect to the Oracle data store (page 312) to which you want to move
the data.
2 Before moving drawing data to Oracle, do the following to your DWG
drawing objects:
Assign a coordinate system (page 142). This lets you position your data
accurately in a real-world geographic location and align imported
survey or GPS point data. Once you assign a coordinate system, you
can convert to a different system when you export.
Clean up any geometry errors (page 765). Use the AutoCAD Map 3D
cleanup tools to correct any errors introduced during drafting,
digitizing, or converting the data.
3 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel To FDO Connection.
4 In the dialog box that appears, choose the Oracle connection for the
export and click OK.
5 On the Selection tab of the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), specify
which objects to export.
1462 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
This tab determines how items are selected for export, and not how they
are organized in their exported form. You specify how to organize the
exported material on the Feature Class tab.
6 On the Feature Class tab, specify which object properties and attributes
to export to feature class attributes.
All attributes you specify here will be included in all the resulting features
you create in Oracle. For information on how the choices on this tab
determine the properties of the exported feature class, see Exporting to
Multiple Classes (page 1439).
7 On the Options tab (page 1704) specify whether to convert the coordinate
system during the export process and choose the coordinate system.
Specify whether to treat closed polylines as polygons when you export.
8 Specify how to create classes in the Oracle data store.
To create a single feature class containing all the items you selected
on the Selection tab, click Create a single class from all exported
objects and type a name for that class.
To create multiple feature classes for the items you selected on the
Selection tab, click Create multiple classes based on a drawing object
and specify an auto-classification method
For information about these methods, see Exporting to Multiple
Classes (page 1439).
9 To change the automatically assigned class names, click the Feature Class
field and edit the names as needed, then click OK.
10 Click Save.
To export DWG data to ESRI ArcSDE:
1 Query the data you want from the DWG drawing into your map.
2 Connect to the ESRI ArcSDE data store (page 316) to which you want to
move the data.
3 Before moving drawing data to ESRI ArcSDE, do the following to your
DWG drawing objects:
Assign a coordinate system (page 142). This lets you position your data
accurately in a real-world geographic location and align imported
survey or GPS point data. Once you assign a coordinate system, you
can convert to a different system when you export.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store | 1463
Clean up any geometry errors (page 765). Use the AutoCAD Map 3D
cleanup tools to correct any errors introduced during drafting,
digitizing, or converting the data.
4 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer panel To FDO Connection.
5 In the dialog box that appears, choose the data source for the export and
click OK.
6 On the Selection tab of the Map Export dialog box (page 1723), specify
which objects to export.
This tab determines how items are selected for export, and not how they
are organized in their exported form. You specify how to organize the
exported material on the Feature Class tab.
7 On the Feature Class tab, specify which object properties and attributes
to export to feature class attributes. Note that you cannot create or modify
ArcSDE schemas. You can only map object properties and attributes to
existing feature class attributes.
All attributes you specify here are included in all the resulting features
you export to ESRI ArcSDE. For information on how the choices on this
tab determine the properties of the exported feature class, see Exporting
to Multiple Classes (page 1439).
8 On the Options tab (page 1704), specify whether to convert the coordinate
system during the export process and choose the coordinate system.
Specify whether to treat closed polylines as polygons when you export.
9 Click Save.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORTFDO
Export to an FDO data store
Click File Convert DWG To FDO Connection. Menu
MAPEXPORTFDO Command Line
1464 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format
You can save the drawing objects in the current map to an image format, such
as BMP, JPEG, or PNG. The resulting image file will not contain geospatial
features.
NOTE Only drawing objects are exported. Geospatial features are ignored. If your
map includes geospatial features, convert it to DWG format (page 378) before you
use this feature.
When you export to an image format, you use the Render Output File Dialog
Box.
See also:
Exporting Maps to DWG Format (page 1459)
To save drawing objects in an image format
1 In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data
Transfer As Image.
2 In the dialog box that appears, choose the image format for the new file
from the Files of Type list.
3 Specify a name and location for the image file and click Save.
4 If the format you chose has any further options, specify them in the
dialog box that appears and click OK.
For information about these options, see the corresponding topic in the
AutoCAD Help. For example, for information about the JPEG options,
see the JPEG Image Options Dialog Box topic.
All drawing objects in your map are rendered and saved to the image file.
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again
You can move AutoCAD drawing data from AutoCAD Map 3D to SDF or Oracle
and back into AutoCAD Map 3D. For example, you can export drawing objects
to an SDF file to give to someone who must change those objects. Once the
changes are made, you can incorporate them into your original drawing file.
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format | 1465
Attributes
If you connect to the data, rather than import it, and extract the geometry
from the feature data, the attributes are lost.
Bringing the Data Back Into AutoCAD Map 3D
After changes have been made to the data, you can bring it back into AutoCAD
Map 3D in one of the following ways:
Import the data in DWG format. If anyone changes the data after that,
those changes will not appear in your map unless you reimport. Import
gives you a "snapshot" of the data at the moment that you import. This
method is best for changes to many objects in one area of the map. It works
best if you classify the objects before you export them, and then map to
those object classes when you reimport.
Connect to the data (using Data Connect) and then extract the geometry
from the changed features. You can then update your original DWG files
with the new information. The data remains in its original format, and
any further changes in its data store appear in your map. This method is
best for small changes.
If you plan to reimport SDF data using either method, you will get the best
results if you export only the properties you want edit to a multi-class SDF
file. You can then map the properties to separate layers when you import the
SDF file.
Preserving Visual Styles
When you export styled drawing data, the visual styling is lost. You can use
two alternative methods to preserve styling information:
Set up a drawing template file (.dwt) that includes styling information for
the drawing objects you wish to include (layers, linetypes, blocks, and so
on). For more information on using drawing templates, see the AutoCAD
2009 Users Guide.
Publish your map to the DWF format., which preserves all styling. Use
Autodesk Design Review to examine and mark up the resulting map. You
can then update the original DWG data from those markups.
See also:
Publishing to DWF (page 1364)
1466 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Overview of Converting and Exporting (page 1405)
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461)
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) (page 387)
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page 378)
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import
method (page 1467)
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data
Connect method (page 1467)
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import
method
1 Export the drawing data to an SDF file or to Oracle. See Overview of
Converting and Exporting (page 1405), Exporting DWG Data to an FDO
Data Store (page 1461), and Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files)
(page 387).
If your drawing data has been styled, be sure to check the appropriate
properties on the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box when you
export the data. Although the visual styling will not appear in the
resulting feature data, you can reconstruct the styling when you reimport
the data later.
2 Once the feature data has been changed, open the original DWG file in
AutoCAD Map 3D to update it with those changes.
3 Remove any objects that will be replaced with the imported data.
4 Connect to the data store with the new data and import the data to add
it to your original drawing.
See Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects (page
378). If your original drawing contains layers that specify visual styling,
import the data into the appropriate layer to restore its styling
information.
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data Connect
method
1 Export the drawing data to SDF or Oracle.
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again | 1467
See Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store (page 1461), Overview of
Converting and Exporting (page 1405), and Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial
Data Files) (page 387).
If your drawing data has been styled, be sure to check the appropriate
properties on the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box when you
export the data. Although the visual styling will not appear in the
resulting feature data, you can reconstruct the styling when you reimport
the data later.
Alternately, you can use a drawing template that includes all the styling
information you wish to include. For more information on using a
drawing template to preserve drawing data stylization, see Preserving
Visual Styles (page 1466)
2 Once the feature data has been updated, open your original DWG file in
AutoCAD Map 3D to update it with those changes.
3 Connect to the spatial data source containing the changed data.
See Bringing in GIS Features (page 303).
4 Check out any new or changed features and use Extract Geometry From
Feature to convert them to drawing objects.
See Checking Out Features (page 695) and Extracting Feature Geometry
(page 715)
NOTE The resulting drawing objects will lose any attribute data that was
connected to them.
5 Check the features back in and remove the display layers that use the
feature source data.
6 Disconnect from the feature source.
7 Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Attach/Detach Object Data.
8 Attach any existing object data to the new geometry.
See Specifying Object Data for a Drawing Object (page 1063).
1468 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer
You can save or export information about geospatial layers in Display Manager
(including annotation layers) to separate files. Only geospatial features are
saved or exported. You can export to SDF or SQLite format.
This allows you to package data that is ordinarily stored in a central data store,
such as an Oracle database, into a geospatial data file. However, all connection
to the original data store is lost and changes you make to the SDF or SQLite
file will not update the central data store.
Saving vs. Exporting
If you use the export option, you can export a single layer to an Autodesk SDF
(version 3) or a SQLite file. The resulting file contains geometry and attribute
data, but no styling data.
If you have joined data (page 507) to the layers you are exporting, the joined
data is also exported. However, metadata is not exported with the layer. For
information about exporting metadata, see Sharing Metadata (page 1510).
If you use the save option, you can save one layer at a time. When you save
a layer, you save its styling information and pointers to the data source that
defines its geometry and attributes. You can drag and drop saved layers into
any map to reuse them.
You cannot use a saved layer and an exported layer together because saved
layers point to the current data for the layer while exported layers contain a
snapshot of the data at the time they were exported, and these data
definitions may differ.
Using Exported Layers
You can use exported layers for any of the following:
As a map layer in Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise or MapGuide Open
Source.
NOTE This format is not readable by Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier.
Instead, see Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format (page 1417).
To package the layer contents as a personal geospatial data store. The
resulting SDF or SQLite file can be opened and edited in any application
that supports the format. However, once you export the layers, they lose
their connection to their original data store, and any changes you make
will not be updated in that data store.
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer | 1469
NOTE You can also export all DWG objects to SDF3 or SQLite format, and
you can copy features from one geospatial format to another using Bulk Copy.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to export a layer to SDF.
Show me how to save a layer to a .layer
file.
Procedures
To export layers in SDF or SQLite
format (page 1470)
To save a layers styles and pointers to
its data (page 1471)
GIS Skills
Exchange data with other users by ex-
porting to SDF format.
Share styles with other users of AutoCAD
Map 3D using .layer files.
Related topics
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
(page 1357)
Overview of the Display Manager
(page 634)
Overview of Converting and Exporting
(page 1405)
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data
Files) (page 387)
Migrating Data (page 615)
To export layers in SDF or SQLite format
1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a layer Export Layer Data
to SDF or Export Layer Data to SQLite.
2 Specify a name and location for the file.
The resulting file will have the extension .sdf or .sqlite.
1470 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
3 Click Save.
To save a layers styles and pointers to its data
1 In the Display Manager (page 2060), right-click the layer Save Layer.
2 Specify a name and location for the file.
The resulting file will have the extension .layer .
3 Click Save.
Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File
You can export survey points from a survey data store to a LandXML file.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports LandXML versions 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2.
To export survey points to a LandXML file
1 On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data Export LandXML.
The Export to LandXML dialog box (page 1709) appears.
2 Select the items to export in the left-hand selection window.
3 In the File section, click FileName, then click . The
Export to LandXML dialog box (page 1709) appears.
4 Enter a name and save location for the LandXML file, then click Save.
5 Select the LandXML version in the Version field of the File section.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports LandXML version 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2.
6 Confirm the information in the Project and Units section, and edit if
necessary.
7 Confirm the coordinate system in the Coordinate System Assignment
section, and edit if necessary.
8 Click OK.
Exporting Survey Points to a LandXML File | 1471
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
To print and export attribute data
To export from the Data Table (page 1474)
To print a database table (page 1475)
To set print options (page 1476)
To specify the header and footer (page 1476)
To apply a filter (page 1476)
To create a drawing object report (page 1477)
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data
You can export attribute data in the following ways:
From the Data Table: Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the
Data Table. You can export all or some of this data to a comma-separated
file, which you can then print from a supporting application.
From the Data View: Data you linked to drawing objects from an external
source appears in the Data View. You can print some or all of this data, or
you can copy and paste it into another application.
From the Metadata Viewer: Metadata is is structured information that
describes the content, quality, condition, and other characteristics of data.
In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can examine this data in the Metadata Viewer.
You can share metadata by exporting it from the Metadata Viewer.
As a report: You can query objects in attached drawings to retrieve object
data and properties that match your criteria. You define a template to
specify which of that information to include in the resulting report, which
is written out to a comma-separated file.
See also:
Exporting from the Data Table (page 1473)
Overview of the Data Table (page 1125)
Printing from the Data View (page 1474)
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data (page 1047)
Sharing Metadata (page 1510)
1472 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) (page 1477)
Use the following methods to export or print attribute data.
Use this method To export this type of data...
In the Data Table, select the desired data
and click Options Export.
See Exporting from the Data Table (page
1473).
Geospatial attribute data
In the Data View, specify print options and
click File menu Print.
See Printing from the Data View (page 1474).
External data linked to drawing objects
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click
Home tab Data panel Define
Drawing object data and properties (as a
report)
Query. Define and execute the query. Then
click Report in the same dialog box to cre-
ate a report template and specify a file
name for the report.
See Creating a Drawing Object Report
(DWG) (page 1477).
In the Metadata Viewer, click Export or
Publish. Select the source data type and
specify the location for the exported data.
See Sharing Metadata (page 1510).
Metadata
Exporting from the Data Table
Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the Data Table. You can export
all or some of this data to a comma-separated file. Exported data is stored in
a comma-separated file for use in other applications, such as Microsoft
Access
or Excel
.
If your data includes decimal values, the exported data uses the format for
your current user locale (the current setting in the Windows Regional Settings
control panel on your computer.) For this reason, the data may not actually
be separated by commas. For example, in a German locale, items are separated
by semicolons.
Exporting from the Data Table | 1473
If you have joined data (page 507) to geospatial features whose data you are
exporting, the exported data will include the joined properties.
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data Table and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
See also:
Overview of the Data Table (page 1125)
To export from the Data Table
1 In Map Explorer (page 2068), click the feature layer whose data you want
to export.
2 Click Table.
3 Filter the display to see the data you want.
4 Select the data to export. To select all the data currently displayed, click
Select in the upper right corner.
5 Click Options Export (at the bottom of the Data Table window).
6 Specify a name and location for the comma-separated file, and click Save.
Printing from the Data View
Data you linked to drawing objects from an external source appears in the
Data View. You can print all or part of the active table. If you have filters in
effect, only the records that match the filter are printed. You can set print
options for margins, titles, grid lines, header, and footer.
1474 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
You can print from a Data View table.
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data View and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
See also:
Opening a Database Table (page 1052)
Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 1230)
Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 1233)
Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns (page 1059)
To print a database table (page 1475)
To set print options (page 1476)
To specify the header and footer (page 1476)
To apply a filter (page 1476)
To print a database table
1 Open a database table in the Data View (page 1146).
2 Specify print options, header, footer, or filters.
3 In the Data View, click File menu Print.
4 Click OK.
Printing from the Data View | 1475
To set print options
1 In the Data View, click File menu Page Setup.
2 In the Page Setup dialog box (page 1686), select the print options you want.
Click OK.
To specify the header and footer
1 In the Data View, click File menu Header And Footer.
2 In the Header/Footer dialog box (page 1685), set options for headers and
footers. Click OK.
If you have applied a filter to the table, only the filtered records print.
To apply a filter
See Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 1230).
See Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 1233).
Quick Reference
(Data View) Header and Footer
Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View
In the Data View: File Header and Footer Menu
Header/Footer dialog box Dialog Box
(Data View) Page Setup
Sets the print options for Data View
In the Data View: File Page Setup Menu
Page Setup dialog box Dialog Box
(Data View) Print
Prints the current view of the database table
In the Data View: File Print Menu
1476 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Print
Icon
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG)
To create a drawing object report
To run a query in Report mode (page 1477)
To create a report template (page 1479)
Running a Query in Report Mode
You can run a special query on objects in attached drawings to retrieve
information about the object properties and object data. You can use Report
mode to save the results of the query to a comma-separated file, which you
can use in a spreadsheet program or database.
For example, you can create a list of pipes and their diameters (when the
diameters are stored in object data).
You use a report template to control the information that is included in the
report. Depending on your use of blocks, layers, object data, links to external
databases, block attributes, color, and other data, you can create various printed
reports.
NOTE Queries in Report mode retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
See also:
Defining Queries (page 1219)
Altering Properties of Defined Queries (page 1259)
Saving Queries (page 177)
Creating a Report Template (page 1478)
To run a query in Report mode
1 Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
2 Define or load a query.
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 1477
3 Under Query Mode, select Report.
4 Click Options.
5 In the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1852), To create a report
template (page 1479). Click OK.
6 Click Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
Creating a Report Template
Control the information that is included in a report query by defining a report
template.
For example, you can create a report that displays pipe lengths and diameters
by querying the feature class PIPES, and defining a report template that
includes the property LENGTH and an object data field that contains pipe
diameter information.
A template can include variables that represent:
object properties
feature classification
object data
1478 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
topology information
SQL data in an external database table
block attributes
For a complete listing of variables you can use in a template, see Variables
(page 1546).
TIP Objects that include several elements have multiple entries in the output file.
Use the .TYPE dot variable to identify such objects, and edit the output file to
remove duplicate references to the object.
The report template is saved when you save the query.
NOTE Report mode queries retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
See also:
Running a Query in Report Mode (page 1477)
Altering Properties of Defined Queries (page 1259)
Saving Queries (page 177)
If you run a Report query, the report template specifies the information to
write to an external file.
To create a report template
1 Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, under Query Mode, click Report.
3 Click Options.
4 In the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1852), specify the
information to include in the report.
Click Expression and select the item to include.
You can edit the expression box to add a calculation to the variable. For
example, you can edit an area dot variable to reflect the scale of a map.
5 To associate a range with the expression, select the range table name
from the Range list. To define a range table (page 1272), click Ranges.
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 1479
6 Click Add to add each expression to the Report Template list.
7 Select Process Sub-Objects to create a line in the report for each
component of an object, for example, polyline vertices or centroids, links,
and nodes in a polygon topology.
8 Select Apply Transformation to apply a transformation to the values
displayed report.
If you have used either a coordinate system transformation or a simple
transformation in the current map, you must select this option to apply
the transformation to the values in the report.
9 Specify a name and location for the output report file.
10 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu More
DWG Options Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERY Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query Define
-or- Right-click a query Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog box Dialog Box
1480 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Working with Metadata
Overview of Working with Metadata
Metadata is data about data. Geospatial metadata describes your GIS data
according to an established standard to help others who use your maps to
understand them. Organizing your data according to standards helps you manage
it more efficiently, enforces data quality, and facilitates data sharing. In AutoCAD
Map 3D, you can automatically generate metadata for DWGs; their resources
(page 2072), such as object or feature classes; and non-DWG files.
AutoCAD Map 3D currently supports two standards for geospatial metadata:
the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063) and ISO 19139 (page 1483).
The FGDC Standard (United States)
In 1998, the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) released the Content
Standard for Digital Geospatial Metadata (the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063)).
Its goal is to promote electronic, geospatial information-sharing between various
agencies and regions around the world. Some agencies in the United States may
be required to create geospatial metadata that complies with this standard.
The FGDC standard specifies seven major sections of GIS metadata. Each section
has several data elements, and compound elements (page 2057). Each element
must meet one of the following conditions:
Mandatory
Optional
Conditional
Conditional elements are mandatory if applicable. For example, if a particular
data set does not have or need distribution information as defined by the FGDC,
10
1481
you need not complete any of the fields in the Distribution Information
section, even if some fields in that section are mandatory.
Related Editor Requirement Description Information Type
Contact Inform-
ation Editor
Mandatory Basic information about the data Identification Information
(FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1762)
Citation Inform-
ation Editor
Conditional Overall quality of the data Data Quality Information
(FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1758)
Spatial Data
Organization
Conditional How spatial information is repres-
ented in the data
Spatial Data Organization Inform-
ation
Information Ed-
itor (FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1764)
Horizontal Co-
ordinate Sys-
Conditional Details about the spatial refer-
ence of the data, such as coordin-
ates
Spatial Reference Information
tem Definition
Editor (FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1768)
Attribute Do-
main Values Ed-
Conditional The features and constraints of
the data
Entity and Attribute Information
itor (FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1773)
Standard Order
Process Editor
Conditional Who provides the data, and how
it can be obtained
Distribution Information
(FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1774)
1482 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Related Editor Requirement Description Information Type
Time Period In-
formation Edit-
Mandatory How current the metadata is, and
who maintains it
Metadata Reference Information
or (FGDC
Metadata)
(page 1761)
Because GIS data is so general, it remains usable outside the United States
when formatted with this standard. For example, the FGDC standard shares
many common fields with ISO 19139. To learn more about the FGDC and its
GIS metadata standard, visit http://www.fgdc.gov/metadata.
ISO 19139
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ISO 19139. If your version of AutoCAD Map 3D
is for any country except the United States, it is configured with ISO as the
default. If you need to switch to a different standard, you can do so in the
Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756).
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to view and interpret
metadata.
Show me how to create and edit
metadata.
Procedure
To set metadata options (page 1485)
To work with metadata (page 1487)
To enter or edit metadata manually
(page 1499)
Tutorial
Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a
Classified Drawing
Workflow
Create a Feature Map
Create a CAD Map
Overview of Working with Metadata | 1483
GIS Skill
View and interpret metadata.
Create metadata for your map.
Related topics
Creating and Viewing Metadata (page
1486)
Editing Metadata (page 1498)
Sharing Metadata (page 1510)
Setting Metadata Options (page 1484)
Working with Metadata Templates
(page 1490)
Setting Metadata Options
You can select the metadata (page 2069) standard you want to work with, set
template options, specify the precision to which the metadata measures your
maps latitude/longitude values, and indicate whether or not you want the
metadata for a data source to be updated as soon as you select it in the
Metadata Viewer (page 1751).
Setting your metadata standard
The default standard is FGDC (page 2063) for AutoCAD Map 3D in the United
States, and ISO 19139 for all other countries. You can change the standard in
the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756).
Keeping your metadata current
When Auto Update is selected, metadata for a data source is updated as soon
as you select it in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751). If you import (page 1511)
metadata from another AutoCAD Map 3D user, and remain connected to the
data source, the metadata is updated when the data is updated. For example,
if your organization keeps classified DWGs (page 2057) on a shared network, and
someone updates an object in a DWG, the metadata you have imported from
that object updates automatically.
If you do not always want to update your metadata automatically (for example,
if you want to check it for accuracy first), do not select the Auto Update check
box. Instead, click Update All each time you want to refresh your metadata.
1484 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Saving time with metadata templates
Using metadata templates (page 1491) prevents repetitive data entry, saving time
do perform your other job functions. You can save frequently used metadata
in a template to reuse as often as necessary.
See also:
Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756)
Updating Metadata (page 1503)
To set metadata options
1 Open the Metadata Viewer (page 1751).
2 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options.
3 In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), on the Template tab, do
any of the following:
Under Metadata Standard, select a standard.
Import a template. (page 1492)
Set a default template. (page 1494)
Preview a template. (page 1494)
Deactivate a template. (page 1495)
Export a template. (page 1496)
Rename a template. (page 1493)
Remove a template. (page 1497)
4 Click the Preference tab. Set the latitude and longitude precision.
Enter the number of digits (0 - 10) that display after the decimal point
for your reported latitude and longitude values. Both values are 6 by
default.
5 If desired, select the Auto Update check box.
When Auto Update is selected, metadata is updated as soon as you select
it in the Metadata Viewer.
6 Click OK.
Setting Metadata Options | 1485
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Creating and Viewing Metadata
When you open the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) for the first time, metadata
(page 2069) is automatically generated and displayed for the current drawing.
When you select a resource (page 2072) from the Current Drawing tree view, or
a file from the Folder Shortcut tree view, the available metadata for that
resource is displayed in the Metadata Viewer.
Some metadata information can be generated for the following resources:
Web Services FDO RDBMS-based
data
FDO file-based data DWG files
WFS Oracle Spatial SDF files DWGs that contain
classified drawing
objects
WMS MySQL with spatial SHP files DWGs that do not
contain classified
drawing objects
SDE Raster files
SQL Server with spatial
Metadata for resources in the Current Drawing tree view are stored in the
drawing file. Metadata for resources in the Folder Shortcut tree view are stored
in an automatically generated MTD file. The MTD file is saved in the same
directory as the resource.
1486 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to view and interpret
metadata.
Show me how to create and edit
metadata.
Procedure
To work with metadata (page 1487)
Tutorial
Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a
Classified Drawing
Workflow
Create a Feature Map
Create a CAD Map
GIS Skill
View and interpret metadata.
Create metadata for your map.
Related topics
Overview of Object Classification (page
981)
Updating Metadata (page 1503)
Editing Metadata (page 1498)
Sharing Metadata (page 1510)
Setting Metadata Options (page 1484)
Working with Metadata Templates
(page 1490)
Use this method... To do this...
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click
Tools View Metadata.
Display the Metadata Viewer (page 1751)
In the Display Manager, right-click a layer
View Metadata.
Create metadata for a drawing
Creating and Viewing Metadata | 1487
Use this method... To do this...
In the Metadata Viewer, select the DWG
or data source from the Current Drawing
tree view.
Create metadata for a resource (page
2072)
To create metadata for a non-DWG file 1 In the Metadata Viewer, in the Folder
Shortcut area, click Add.
2 Select the file.
To add your own style sheet 1 Import the stylesheet. (page 1489)
2 At the top of the Metadata tab (page
1753) click the Style sheet menu.
To display metadata in XML format 1 At the top of the Metadata tab, click
the Stylesheet menu.
2 Select XML.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Working with Metadata Style Sheets
The style of the metadata (page 2069) in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) is
controlled by a style sheet. You can use the default style sheet (FGDC Classic
for FGDC (page 2063) metadata or ISO Classic for ISO metadata), one that you
import from elsewhere, or no style sheet (unformatted XML).
1488 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
To import a style sheet into the Metadata Viewer
1 Obtain a style sheet in valid XML format.
NOTE The use of stylesheets supplied by parties other than Autodesk is subject
to the terms and conditions published by the provider of those stylesheets.
2 Save it to the following location:
For FGDC
C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Support\Metadata\FGDC\Configuration\Style\
For ISO
C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Support\Metadata\ISO\Configuration\Style\
3 Open the following file in any text or XML editor:
C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2011\Support\Metadata\MetadataConfiguration.xml.
4 Inside the <MetadataStylesheetSet> tags, add a <MetadataStylesheet>
element. Use the following FGDC example as your guide:
<MetadataStandard>
<Name>FGDC</Name>
<MetadataProfile>
<MetadataStyleSheetSet>
<MetadataStylesheet>
<Name>Stylesheet1</Name>
<Path>Support\Metadata\FGDC\Configura
tion\Style\Stylesheet1.xsl</Path>
</MetadataStylesheet>
</MetadataStyleSheetSet>
</MetadataStandard>
5 Open the Metadata Viewer (page 1751). (In the Display Manager, select a
layer. Click Tools View Metadata.)
6 Select the new style sheet from the Stylesheet menu at the top of the
Metadata tab (page 1753).
Working with Metadata Style Sheets | 1489
NOTE If your style sheet does not appear in the Stylesheet menu after you perform
these steps, restart AutoCAD Map 3D, relaunch the Metadata Viewer, and click
Stylesheet again.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Working with Metadata Templates
Overview of Metadata Templates
Metadata templates allow you to reuse metadata (page 2069) such as the contact
information for your organization, or other common values that rarely change.
Templates can be especially useful if your organization must create metadata
for large numbers of legacy drawings. You can create new templates from
existing metadata, or import (page 1492) them from other sources to increase
your productivity.
See also:
Overview of Editing Metadata (page 1498)
Updating Metadata (page 1503)
To use metadata templates
1 Create (page 1492) or import (page 1492) the template you want.
2 Apply the template (page 1492).
3 If desired, set a default template:
Preview (page 1494) the templates to see which one you want.
1490 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Set a default template (page 1494) for all metadata you generate from
this point on.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Using Metadata Templates
You can create or import (upload) an existing metadata (page 2069) template.
Metadata templates must be in an XML file, and must comply with the
structure of the standard with which you are working.
You can apply imported templates to your metadata. Applying a template
overwrites any existing values. However, if they overwrite any values in
forced-update fields (page 2064), those values will revert to the values from their
data sources once the metadata is refreshed.
Once you have created or imported templates, you can set the one you use
most often as a default.
See also:
Setting Metadata Options (page 1484)
To create a new template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To set a default template (page 1494)
To export a template (page 1496)
To deactivate a template (page 1495)
To remove a template (page 1497)
To create a template (page 1492)
Using Metadata Templates | 1491
To import a template (page 1492)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To rename a template (page 1493)
To create a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), select the data source from which you
want to create a template.
2 Click Create Template.
3 In the Create Metadata Template dialog box (page 1758), enter a name for
your template.
4 Click OK.
Your template is saved as an XML file. If you open the Metadata Options
dialog box (page 1756), your new template will be listed in the Use Template
window.
To import a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer, click Options.
2 In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), click Import.
3 Browse to and select a template (an XML file).
4 Click Open.
The template is displayed in the Use Template window.
To apply a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer, select the data source to which you want to apply
the template.
2 Right-click the data source.
3 Click Regenerate Metadata from Template.
An additional menu is displayed, listing all your saved metadata templates.
If you have a default template already set, it is checked with an orange
checkmark.
4 Select the template you want to apply.
1492 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
The template is applied, and the Metadata tab refreshes with the updated
metadata.
To rename a template
1 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options.
2 Select a template from the Use Template window.
3 Do one of the following:
Click Rename. Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Right-click a template in the Use Template window and rename it.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Previewing Metadata Templates
You can preview a template to make sure it displays the intended metadata
before you select it as a default. The Metadata Preview window behaves
similarly to the Metadata tab in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751). The links are
live, and you can collapse and expand levels of metadata to focus on specific
areas.
See also:
To create a template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To set a default template (page 1494)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To deactivate a template (page 1495)
Previewing Metadata Templates | 1493
To export a template (page 1496)
To rename a template (page 1493)
To remove a template (page 1497)
To preview a template
1 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options.
2 Select the template to preview from the Use Template window.
3 Click Preview.
Setting a Default Metadata Template
Once you have created or imported templates, you can set the one you use
most often as a default.
See also:
To create a template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To preview a template (page 1494)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To deactivate a template (page 1495)
To export a template (page 1496)
To rename a template (page 1493)
To remove a template (page 1497)
To set a default template
1 On the Metadata Viewer (page 1751) toolbar, click Options.
2 From the Use Template window, select the template to set as the default.
3 Select the Use Template check box.
4 Click OK.
The template you selected is set to be the default.
1494 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Deactivating Metadata Templates
If you have applied a template to your metadata (page 2069), but decide you do
not want to use it, you can deactivate it. When you deactivate a metadata
template, values that had come from the template are overwritten by values
from the data source. Fields that are populated by values from the template,
but that do not have corresponding values in the data source are cleared.
See also:
To create a template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To set a default template (page 1494)
To export a template (page 1496)
To remove a template (page 1497)
To deactivate a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Options.
2 If the Use Template check box is selected, clear it.
3 Click OK.
4 Select the data source.
5 Click Update All.
6 Click Yes in the warning message that is displayed.
The metadata is updated with values from the data source you selected.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Deactivating Metadata Templates | 1495
Exporting Metadata Templates
Once you create a metadata (page 2069) template, you can export it as an XML
file to share with others in your organization.
See also:
To create a template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To set a default template (page 1494)
To deactivate a template (page 1495)
To remove a template (page 1497)
To export a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Options.
2 In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), select a template from the
Use Template window.
3 Click Export.
4 Browse to, and select the location to save the template.
5 Optionally, rename the template in the File Name field.
NOTE If a file name is already displayed, rename it unless you are sure that
you want to overwrite the existing file with the one you are saving.
6 Click Save.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
1496 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Removing Metadata Templates
If you no longer want a metadata (page 2069) template to be available for use,
you can remove it. If you have applied the template to metadata, removing
the template does not cause any of the values in that metadata to change. To
remove metadata that came from a template, see Deactivating Metadata
Templates (page 1495).
See also:
Editing Metadata (page 1498)
To create a template (page 1492)
To import a template (page 1492)
To apply a template (page 1492)
To set a default template (page 1494)
To deactivate a template (page 1495)
To export a template (page 1496)
To remove a template
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Options.
2 In the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756), select the template to
remove in the Use Template window.
3 Click Remove.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS Command Line
Metadata Options Dialog Box
Removing Metadata Templates | 1497
Editing Metadata
Overview of Editing Metadata
Although the best practices for creating most metadata (page 2069) are
auto-generation (page 2056), updating from the data source, using templates
(page 1492), copying and pasting, or importing (page 1510) from similar sources,
some data must be entered manually. Metadata Editor (page 1754) provides an
interface in which to enter and manage your metadata.
Tell me more
Video
Show me how to view and interpret
metadata.
Show me how to create and edit
metadata.
Procedure
To enter or edit metadata manually
(page 1499)
Tutorial
Lesson 6: Generate Metadata for a
Classified Drawing
Workflow
Create a Feature Map
Create a CAD Map
GIS Skill
View and interpret metadata.
Create metadata for your map.
Related topics
Creating and Viewing Metadata (page
1486)
Metadata Fields (page 1755)
To enter or edit metadata manually (page 1499)
1498 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
To add a new item to a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1500)
To select an item from a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page
1501)
To edit an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1501)
To delete an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor (page 1501)
To enter text into a free-form field in the Metadata Editor (page 1501)
To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor (page 1502)
To delete text in a free-form field (page 1502)
To enter or edit metadata manually
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), select the file or resource to edit.
2 Click Edit.
3 On the left side of the Metadata Editor (page 1754), click the tab for the
section you want to edit. If all the tabs do not display on your screen, do
one of the following:
Stretch the Metadata Editor vertically to make it longer.
Click the edges of the lowest tab, and select the tab you want from
the menu that is displayed.
Overview of Editing Metadata | 1499
4 Click
to the left of a field group to reveal additional fields within that group.
Click to contract a field group.
5 Enter the required changes in the appropriate fields.
6 Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing.
7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Metadata Editor.
To add a new item to a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the drop-down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3 Click New. A compound element metadata editor (page 1758) is displayed
with empty fields.
4 Enter the new item.
1500 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
5 Click OK. The item is saved, and will appear in the drop-down menu the
next time you click the arrow.
To select an item from a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor
Double-click the item.
To edit an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the drop-down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3 Select the item to edit.
4 Click Edit. A compound element metadata editor (page 1758) is displayed,
showing the metadata from your selection.
5 Edit the metadata.
6 Click OK to save the edits.
To delete an item in a drop-down menu in the Metadata Editor
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the drop-down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3 Select the item to delete.
4 Click Delete.
To enter text into a free-form field in the Metadata Editor
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the arrow. The field expands.
3 Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4 Enter text into the field, or paste it in from another source.
5 When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6 Click OK to save the text.
Overview of Editing Metadata | 1501
To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the arrow. The field expands.
3 Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4 Edit the text like you would in a simple text editor.
5 When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6 Click OK to save your edits.
To delete text in a free-form field
1 Click the field. A drop-down arrow is displayed.
2 Click the arrow. The field expands.
3 Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4 Delete text like you would in a simple text editor.
5 When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6 Click OK to save the deletion.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
1502 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Updating Metadata
You can specify that your metadata (page 2069) is updated automatically, or you
can update it manually.
Update Automatically
If you select the Auto Update check box in the Metadata Options dialog box
(page 1756), your metadata will be updated as soon as its data source is updated
if the drawing is connected to the data source. If the drawing is not connected,
the metadata will update the next time you connect to the source.
Update Manually
To update metadata manually, you can use Update Auto in the Metadata
Viewer (page 1751) or in the Metadata Editor (page 1754). This will update the
values for forced-update fields (page 2064). Forced-update fields are derived
directly from their data source. Any manual overrides to values in the fields
are updated to those from the data source when you click Update Auto.
The labels for forced-update fields are highlighted in turquoise if you click
Highlight in the Metadata Editor (page 1754).
Fields that are not forced-update fields maintain your manual overrides.
Use Update All to update all fields. This overrides any temporary fields or
values you entered manually.
To update metadata for all fields
In the Metadata Viewer or Metadata Editor, click Update All.
To update metadata for forced-update fields only
In the Metadata Viewer, click Update Auto.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
Updating Metadata | 1503
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Copying and Pasting Metadata
You can copy metadata (page 2069) from one source and paste it into another.
You can copy and paste all the metadata from a data source, but not select
parts. Because metadata standards require the metadata for forced-update fields
(page 1503) to come directly from their data sources, any pasted metadata that
differs from the values in these fields will not be saved.
To copy and paste metadata
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), right-click the data source from which
you want to copy metadata.
2 Click Copy Metadata to Clipboard.
3 Right-click the data source to which you want to paste the metadata.
4 Click Paste Metadata from Clipboard.
The pasted metadata is displayed in the Metadata Tab (page 1753).
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor
Some metadata elements can have multiple records. You can add or delete
these records within the Metadata Editor.
1504 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
See also:
Creating and Viewing Metadata (page 1486)
Compound Element Metadata Editors (page 1758)
To add a new record to a metadata element
Click .
To delete a record from a metadata element
Click .
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Working with Compound Metadata Elements
Some metadata elements consist of multiple elements. These are called
compound elements. Some compound elements (page 2057) have their own editors
within the Metadata Editor (page 1754). These compound element editors (page
1758) have more detailed field labels, as well as explanations of those fields.
A compound element that has its own editor displays an ellipsis on the
right side of the field when you click it.
See also:
Using the Record Navigator (page 1506)
Working with Compound Metadata Elements | 1505
To edit a compound metadata element
1 In the Metadata Editor (page 1754) click a field that displays an ellipsis
on the right side of the field.
2 Click the ellipsis .
3 In the compound element editor (page 1758), make the required edits.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Using the Record Navigator
Some of the compound element editors (page 1505) have fields or field groups
that can save more than one entry. These fields have a small button with four
arrows on the right side of the field. If you hover over this button, the Record
Navigator is displayed. The Record Navigator is inactive until you enter values
into the field or fields for which it stores records. Once a value is saved, you
can keep entering values in the same field.
1506 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
When you hover over the Record Navigator button, the Record Navigator is displayed.
Here, the Record Navigator is transparent because it is not yet storing any records.
See also:
Creating and Viewing Metadata (page 1486)
Editing Metadata (page 1498)
To add records using the Record Navigator (page 1507)
To locate a record in the Record Navigator (page 1508)
To delete a record in the Record Navigator (page 1508)
To add records using the Record Navigator
1 If the fields in the compound element editor (page 1758) are blank, enter
values into them as you normally would.
Using the Record Navigator | 1507
2 If the fields are populated, and you want to add more values, hover over
the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is displayed.
3 Click in the Record Navigator. The related fields in the editor are
cleared to accept new entries.
4 Enter values into the fields.
5 Click anywhere on the screen to hide the Record Navigator.
6 Click OK to save the new records.
To locate a record in the Record Navigator
1 Hover over the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is
displayed.
2 Hover over the Record Navigator. It is no longer transparent.
Click to go to the first record.
Click to go to the last record.
Click to move one record toward the first.
Click to move one record toward the last.
To delete a record in the Record Navigator
1 Locate the record you want to delete.
2 Click .
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
1508 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Auditing Metadata
The Metadata Editor (page 1754) has an auditor to help you comply with the
metadata (page 2069) standard you are using. The auditor marks empty required
fields with auditing symbols that look like caution signs .
These symbols also appear on the tabs along the left side of the Metadata
Editor to indicate errors in that section. If no auditing symbol is displayed on
a tab, the auditor found no errors in that section.
Once an acceptable value is entered into the field, or other fields in the same
field group, the auditing symbol will not be displayed the next time you click
Audit.
To audit metadata
In the Metadata Editor (page 1754), click .
To view auditing descriptions
Hover over an auditing symbol .
To clear an auditing symbol
Enter a valid value into the field.
Click .
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Auditing Metadata | 1509
Sharing Metadata
Overview of Sharing Metadata
The best practice for sharing metadata (page 2069) within an organization is to
store the source data on a server. This ensures that any metadata that you
work with on your local machine remains current. If you save a file-based data
source to your local machine, the file that keeps the metadata linked to the
source data looks for that data on your machine. This can be problematic if
you want to share the metadata file. The linking mechanism attempts to locate
the data in the same place that you stored it. To work around this, send the
data source to the new user. They must either save everything in the exact
same locations as you did, or edit the FSD file to point to the new location of
the data source.
See also:
Importing Metadata (page 1510)
Exporting Metadata (page 1512)
Use this method... To do this...
Print metadata 1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751),
select a style sheet.
2 Click Print.
Export (page 1513) metadata In the Metadata Viewer, click Export.
Import (page 1511) metadata In the Metadata Viewer, click Import.
Publish (page 1515) metadata In the Metadata Viewer, click Publish.
Importing Metadata
One way to share metadata (page 2069) is by to import metadata created in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
1510 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
For Object Classes
When you import metadata for an object class (one type of resource (page
2072)), you can either open the DWG (page 2061) file containing that class (and
its metadata), or append the metadata for the object class to the metadata for
an existing object class in your current drawing. To do so, the metadata of
the object class you are importing must have the exact same name as the
existing object class.
For feature classes
When importing metadata for a feature class (another type of resource (page
2072)), AutoCAD Map 3D tries to connect to the feature source by launching
the Data Connect dialog box with its connection parameter fields filled.
In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), you can import a metadata storage (MTD)
file.
Import metadata values
In the Metadata Editor (page 1754), you can import an XML file. As long as the
file is structured according to the standard, the metadata values in it overwrite
the current ones, except for the values in forced-update fields.
See also:
Import Metadata Options dialog box (page 1757)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
Editing Metadata (page 1498)
Exporting Metadata (page 1513)
Publishing Metadata (page 1515)
To import metadata for DWGs or their resources
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Import.
2 Browse to, and select the MTD file you want to import.
3 Click Open.
4 In the Import Metadata Options dialog box (page 1757)elect one of the
following:
Open the original project DWG file
Importing Metadata | 1511
Append the source metadata to the current metadata
5 Click OK.
To import metadata for Non-DWG files
1 In the Metadata Editor (page 1754), click Import.
2 Browse to, and select the XML file you want to import.
3 Click Open.
To import ESRI metadata
1 In ESRI, use ArcCatalog to export metadata in an ESRI profile to the FGDC
or ISO standard in XML format.
2 In the AutoCAD Map 3D Metadata Editor (page 1754), click Import Metadata
Values.
3 In the Open dialog box, select the XML file you exported from ESRI, and
click Open.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Exporting Metadata
You can share your metadata (page 2069) with other AutoCAD Map 3D users by
exporting it. If you wish to share metadata with users of other products, see
Publishing and Printing Metadata (page 1514).
1512 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
For current drawing classified DWGs
For a classified DWG (page 2057) used as the current drawing, the metadata is
stored inside the DWG. Because the DWG file stores the location of the data
source, the metadata will be updated (page ?) with each data update, or each
time it connects to updated data.
When you export metadata from a current classified DWG, it is transferred to
an MTD file. Although the file has an .mtd extension, its format is XML. A
linking file is also created and placed in the same location as the MTD file. If
the following conditions are met, the linking file retains the location of the
data, and the exported metadata are kept current.
The MTD file and the linking file are kept together
The data source remains in the same location
Auto update is selected in the Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756)
For non-DWG files and feature classes
An MTD file is also generated when you create metadata for a non-DWG file
or a feature class (which is one type of resource (page 2072)).
When you export metadata for a feature class, a feature source definition (FSD)
file is created in addition to the MTD. In this case, it is the FSD file that keeps
the metadata linked to its source data.
See also:
Updating Metadata (page ?)
Importing Metadata (page 1511)
Publishing Metadata (page 1515)
Setting Up Object Classification (page 116)
To export metadata
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Export.
2 In the Export Metadata dialog box (page 1757), do one of the following:
For the current DWG file, click Selected Item.
For resources, click All Items In, and select the applicable resources.
3 Click Browse to select a location to save the files.
Exporting Metadata | 1513
4 Click Export.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Publishing and Printing Metadata
Publishing metadata
You can publish metadata (page 2069) to the following file formats: XML, HTML,
and TXT.
If you publish metadata for an object class or feature source, AutoCAD Map
3D creates an XML file for each object or each feature. If you publish a DWG
containing feature sources and object classes, the XML file describes each
object and feature in the DWG, but not as thoroughly as it does if you publish
them separately.
NOTE It is possible to publish metadata that does not comply with the standard
with which you are working. Audit your metadata to check for errors (see Auditing
Metadata (page 1509)).
Printing metadata
When you print metadata (page 2069), the printout is formatted using the style
sheet that is currently selected in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751).
See also:
Importing Metadata (page 1510)
Exporting Metadata (page 1512)
1514 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
To publish metadata
1 In the Metadata Viewer (page 1751), click Publish.
2 Optionally, rename the file.
3 Select a location to save the file.
4 Under Save As Type, select a file type.
5 Click OK.
To print metadata
1 In the Metadata Viewer, select a style sheet.
2 Click Print.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWER Command Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata Viewer Dialog Box
Publishing and Printing Metadata | 1515
1516
Reference Guide
This section provides comprehensive information about AutoCAD Map 3D commands,
expressions and variables, and the dialog boxes where many of the AutoCAD Map 3D settings
can be specified.
1517
1518
Command Reference
AutoCAD Map 3D adds its own unique mapping and spatial data management commands
to the AutoCAD command set. You get all the power and design capabilities of AutoCAD plus
the spatial context needed for mapping.
Commands can be accessed using a variety of methods:
Enter a command in the drawing area or on the command line.
Select the command from the menu.
Click the toolbar icon for the command.
Right-click an object in the drawing or an item in the Task Pane and select the command
from the shortcut menu
This section provides information about the mapping commands in AutoCAD Map 3D.
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
To learn more about the various ways you can use a command, click the Quick Reference tab
of a help topic.
Mapping Commands (page 1519)
Discontinued Commands (page 1533)
MAPWSACTION (page 1536)
REFEDIT (page 1536)
Wildcard Characters (page 1537)
Improving Performance (page 1538)
Mapping Commands
Following is a list of mapping commands. Click a command name for
information about how to use it.
11
1519
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
Description Command
Specifies a point based on angle and dis-
tance from a given point
AD (page 1033)
Attaches object data to objects ADEATTACHDATA (page 1065)
Defines a global coordinate system ADEDEFCRDSYS (page 93)
Defines object data ADEDEFDATA (page 201)
Manages the drawing set ADEDRAWINGS (page 156)
Removes locks from objects ADEDWGMAINT (page 1920)
Displays drawing statistics ADEDWGSTAT (page 1926)
Edits attached object data ADEEDITDATA (page 1070)
Fills a selected polygon ADEFILLPOLYG (page 939)
Automatically links objects to object data
or external database records
ADEGENLINK (page 523)
Controls defining, modifying, saving,
loading, and executing a query
ADEQUERY (page 1237)
Maintains the library of queries ADEQUERYLIB (page 183)
Performs a quick display of active drawings ADEQVIEWDWGS (page 747)
Removes objects from the save set so they
aren't saved to source drawings
ADEREMOBJS (page 1885)
Performs rubber sheeting on selected ob-
jects
ADERSHEET (page 935)
Runs queries in the Query Library ADERUNQUERY (page 179)
Runs externally saved queries ADERUNXQUERY (page 181)
1520 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
Saves objects in the save set back to source
drawings
ADESAVEOBJS (page 1887)
Creates a set of objects to be saved to
source drawings
ADESELOBJS (page 1886)
Assigns a global coordinate system code
for the current drawing
ADESETCRDSYS (page 148)
Displays the objects in the save set ADESHOWOBJS (page 1887)
Redefines the default label point of an ob-
ject for text
ADETEXTLOC (page 937)
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects ADETRANSFORM (page 932)
Displays the current owner of a selected
locked object
ADEWHOHASIT (page 1889)
Performs a ZOOM command to display
the extents of selected active drawings
ADEZEXTENTS (page 745)
Changes the current object class definition
file
ATTACHDEF (page 995)
Specifies a point using bearings from two
given points.
BB (page 1037)
Specifies a point based on bearing and
distance from a given point
BD (page 1035)
Classifies existing objects CLASSIFY (page 990)
Specifies a point based on deflection and
distance from a given point
DD (page 1039)
Specifies a point based on distances from
two other points.
DDIST (page 1041)
Defines a new object class based on an
example in the current drawing
FEATUREDEF (page 122)
Mapping Commands | 1521
Description Command
Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
MapGuide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPEX-
PORTMAPGUIDE.
MAP2SDF (page 1419)
Adds a point cloud from an indexed point
cloud data store
NO LABEL (page 377)
Gives information about AutoCAD Map 3D MAPABOUT
Adds a link to a network topology MAPAL (page 881)
Adds a node to a topology MAPAN (page 879)
Creates a buffer around an existing topo-
logy
MAPANBUFFER (page 1348)
Dissolves a topology into constituent topo-
logies
MAPANDISSOLVE (page 1345)
Deletes all annotation based on selected
template
MAPANNDELETE (page 1109)
Adds annotation to objects based on selec-
ted annotation template
MAPANNINSERT (page 1574)
Refreshes existing annotation MAPANNREFRESH (page 1106)
Defines and modifies annotation templates MAPANNTEMPLATE (page 194)
Creates and edits annotation text MAPANNTEXT (page 194)
Updates existing annotation MAPANNUPDATE (page 1108)
Overlays one topology with another, and
creates a new topology
MAPANOVERLAY (page 1341)
Traces through a network topology
(shortest path trace, best route analysis, or
flood trace)
MAPANTOPONET (page 1322)
Adds a polygon to a polygon topology MAPAP (page 884)
1522 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
Attaches a data source to a drawing MAPATTACHDB (page 210)
Automatically checks-out features that are
edited
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT (page 696)
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified
point
MAPBL (page 864)
Creates a map book to publish your data MAPBOOKCREATE (page 1389)
Breaks objects along a selected or defined
boundary
MAPBREAK (page 942)
Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to edit in the Data
View
MAPBROWSELINK (page 1053)
Opens a database table to edit in the Data
View
MAPBROWSETBL (page 1053)
Discards edits and unlocks the features in
the feature source. Edits are not discarded
if Update Edits Automatically is enabled
MAPCANCELCHECKOUT (page 698)
Adds the distances between points MAPCGADIST (page 1158)
Displays the angle between lines or points MAPCGANG (page 1160)
Sets the azimuth base MAPCGAZBASE (page 234)
Displays the distance between points MAPCGCDIST (page 1159)
Displays coordinate geometry information
for lines and arcs
MAPCGLIST (page 1161)
Specifies coordinate geometry settings MAPCGSETUP (page 234)
Displays the slope between points MAPCGSLIST (page 1162)
Mapping Commands | 1523
Description Command
Saves modified features back to their fea-
ture source and unlocks the features in the
feature source
MAPCHECKIN (page 694)
Makes feature available for editing and if
locking is available, sets locks on the source
MAPCHECKOUT (page 696)
Performs drawing cleanup operations MAPCLEAN (page 768)
Creates polylines from a polygon topology MAPCLPLINE (page 898)
Opens the COGO Input dialog box, which
allows you to enter coordinate geometry
data.
MAPCOGO (page 1029)
Configures the connection to an external
data source
MAPCONFIGDB (page 214)
Connects to a feature source MAPCONNECT (page 309)
Connects to an attached data source MAPCONNECTDB (page 215)
Toggles default connection pooling setting. MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING (page 89)
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves
data to the centroid
MAPCREATECENTROIDS (page 887)
Converts drawing objects to features to
create new features.
MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRY
(page 693)
Opens the Data Table, which allows you
to view, edit and filter feature data
MAPDATATABLE (page 1129)
Defines a link template for a database table MAPDEFINELT (page 526)
Deletes database links from objects MAPDELETELINKS (page 537)
Deletes a link template MAPDELETELT (page 539)
Detaches a data source from a drawing MAPDETACHDB (page 215)
1524 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes
and linear objects
MAPDIGISETUP (page 133)
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with
settings from mapdigisetup
MAPDIGITIZE (page 1082)
Disconnects an attached, connected data-
base
MAPDISCONNECTDB (page 215)
Turns on and off the Display Library
palette.
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (page 1621)
Measures the geodetic distance between
points
MAPDIST (page 1153)
Deletes a link in a network topology. MAPDL (page 890)
Deletes a node in a topology. MAPDN (page 890)
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topo-
logy.
MAPDP (page 890)
Docks and undocks the Task Pane MAPDOCKWSPACE (page 1908)
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology
by allowing you to add a link
MAPDVP (page 868)
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options for publish-
ing to DWF.
MAPDWFOPTIONS (page 1366)
Exports an SDF MAPDWGTOSDF
Edits direction of a link in a network topo-
logy
MAPEDITDIR (page 848)
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in
a network topology
MAPEDITRES1 (page 850)
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPEDITRES2 (page 850)
Mapping Commands | 1525
Description Command
Updates feature edits automatically MAPEDITSETAUTO (page 698)
Toggles default setting for Update Edits
Automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT (page 88)
Specifies options for editing features MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS (page 241)
Exports data from AutoCAD Map 3D to an
external file format
MAPEXPORT (page 1410)
Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
MapGuide 6.5 and earlier. Same as
MAP2SDF
MAPEXPORTMAPGUIDE (page 1419) (Same
as MAP2SDF)
Extracts the geometry from a feature to
use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features
MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRY (page
716)
Creates a buffer zone around features in
your map
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE (page 1309)
Edits a feature. MAPFEATUREEDIT (page 701)
Specifies options for editing features MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS (page 241)
Merges features and assigns feature prop-
erty values for the resulting feature
MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 711)
Splits features and assigns feature property
values for resulting features
MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 709)
Performs overlay analysis on feature classes MAPGISOVERLAY (page 1318)
Specifies the settings to use for shading 3D
raster-based surfaces
MAPHILLSHADE (page 1201)
Makes frames enclosing raster images, vis-
ible or invisible
MAPIFRAME (page 495)
Determines whether or not the rules for
split and merge are used
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES (page 1653)
1526 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
View file, image, object property, and cor-
relation information about selected images
MAPIINFO (page 475)
Inserts a raster image MAPIINSERT (page 462)
Inserts a link in a topology MAPIL (page 881)
View list of images in current drawing,
change drawing order, erase or zoom to
selected images
MAPIMANAGE (page 475)
Imports an external file format into Auto-
CAD Map 3D
MAPIMPORT (page 384)
Imports an SDF 2 file from Autodesk Map-
Guide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPSDFIN.
MAPIMPORTMAPGUIDE (page 390) (Same
as MAPSDFIN)
Inserts a node in a topology. MAPIN (page 879)
Specify default image correlation settings,
display options, detach options, paths, and
memory settings
MAPIOPTIONS (page 249)
Joins two links in a topology MAPJL (page 864)
Creates a new LineString feature MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1654)
Edits a LineString feature MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1655)
Edits a link in a network topology MAPLINKEDIT (page 864)
Edits the link data attached to an object MAPLINKMANAGER (page 537)
Updates links in a network topology MAPLINKUPD (page 892)
Log in as an AutoCAD Map 3D user MAPLOGIN (page 142)
Repositions an end point of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPMEL (page 864)
Moves a link in a network topology MAPML (page 864)
Mapping Commands | 1527
Description Command
Moves a node in a node topology or moves
a node at the end of a link in network or
polygon topologies
MAPMN (page 861)
Merges polygons in a polygon topology MAPMP (page 868)
Creates a new MultiLineString feature MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE (page 1656)
Edits a MultiLineString feature MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT (page 1658)
Creates a new MultiPoint feature MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE (page 1659)
Edits a MultiPoint feature MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT (page 1659)
Creates a new MultiPolygon feature MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1660)
Edits a MultiPolygon feature MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT (page 1662)
Edits a node in a topology MAPNODEDIT (page 861)
Updates nodes in a topology MAPNODUPD (page 892)
Converts object data tables to linked extern-
al database tables.
MAPOD2ASE (page 535)
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options MAPOPTIONS (page 218)
Creates a new Point feature MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1663)
Creates a new Polygon feature MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1663)
Edits a polygon feature MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1665)
Converts closed polylines to polygons MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (page 972)
Updates a polygon topology MAPPOLYUPD (page 892)
Edits the database table name or location
in a link template
MAPPROPSLT (page 539)
1528 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
Publishes to the new MapGuide techno-
logy (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007
or MapGuide Open Source)
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE (page 1378)
Reverses a link in a network topology. MAPRL (page 848)
Runs a database query and opens a data-
base table displaying the results of the
query in the Data View
MAPRUNDBQUERY (page 1049)
Imports an SDF format file from Autodesk
MapGuide
MAPSDFIN (page 390)
Searches for and selects features in your
map, based on the location and attribute
criteria you specify
MAPSEARCH (page 1215)
Highlights features in the drawing that are
from the selected feature source
MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT (page 696)
Selects all classified objects MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (page 994)
Selects all objects that have no classifica-
tion assigned to them
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (page 994)
Selects all objects whose classification is
not defined in the object class definition
file
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (page 994)
Highlights objects in the selected topology MAPSHOWGEOM (page 912)
Highlights and identifies topologies for the
selected object
MAPSHOWTOPO (page 912)
Shows or hides the Map status bar. MAPSTATUSBAR (page 89)
Adds text features to an annotation layer MAPTEXTCREATE (page 1115)
Allows you to edit text features on an an-
notation layer
MAPTEXTEDIT (page 1116)
Mapping Commands | 1529
Description Command
Creates an annotation layer for freestand-
ing text features
MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE (page 1111)
Checks that a topology is complete and
contains no errors
MAPTOPOAUDIT (page 921)
Completes a network or polygon topology MAPTOPOCOMP (page 921)
Creates a new topology. MAPTOPOCREATE (page 825)
Removes topology data from objects, and
optionally deletes the objects
MAPTOPODEL (page 926)
Loads a topology MAPTOPOLOAD (page 908)
Converts an existing polygon topology to
polygons
MAPTOPOLOGY (page 975)
Queries topologies MAPTOPOQUERY (page 1354)
Reestablishes a topology that was edited
with nontopology editing commands such
as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
MAPTOPORECR (page 921)
Changes the name, description, or both
of a topology
MAPTOPOREN (page 925)
Displays detailed information about a topo-
logy
MAPTOPOSTATS (page 916)
Unloads a topology MAPTOPOUNLOAD (page 908)
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any
coordinate system
MAPTRACKCS (page 1151)
Trims objects to a set of edges MAPTRIM (page 946)
Merges new or existing drawing object
geometry with a feature.
MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRY (page
718)
Enables/disables use of mapping polygons MAPUSEMPOLYGON (page 980)
1530 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Description Command
Performs administrative functions MAPUSERADMIN (page 84)
Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to view in the Data
View
MAPVIEWLINK (page 528)
Opens a database table to view in the Data
View
MAPVIEWTBL (page 1053)
Disconnects you from feature sources and
caches all your feature data connections,
MAPWORKOFFLINE (page 721)
allowing you to work with a local copy of
your feature data.
Reestablishes connections with your feature
sources so you are working live again and
can check in any changes.
MAPWORKONLINE (page 721)
Runs the specified workflow from the
command line. Use this in a script fileto
execute automated workflows.
MAPWORKFLOWBATCHRUN
Creates a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWCREATE (page 289)
Edits a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWEDIT (page 289)
Opens a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWOPEN (page 280)
Runs a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWRUN (page 280)
Saves a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWSAVE (page 277)
Saves a workflow. MAPWORKFLOWSAVEAS (page 277)
Indicates that a shortcut menu command
in the Task Pane has no link to an AutoCAD
Map 3D command
MAPWSACTION (page 1536)
Shows or hides the Task Pane MAPWSPACE (page 1908)
Redisplays the Task Pane MAPWSREFRESH (page 1908)
Mapping Commands | 1531
Description Command
Edits polygons MAPMPEDIT (page 967)
Sets the default fill for polygons MPFILL (page 980)
Creates polygons MPOLYGON (page 962)
Splits an existing polygon object into two
new polygon objects
MPSPLIT (page 969)
Creates a new object class definition file NEWDEF (page 130)
Changes the display of polygon edges and
fill
POLYDISPLAY (page 980)
Removes classification from an object UNCLASSIFY (page 990)
Specifies a point based on azimuth and
distance from a given point
ZD (page 1043)
Changed or Replaced Commands
Some commands have been replaced or discontinued in this release. Some of
the commands still function, but they may not be available in future releases.
You should update any scripts you have to use new commands. For more
information, see Discontinued Commands (page 1533).
Using Wildcard Characters with Commands
Most AutoCAD Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. For more
information, see Wildcard Characters (page 1537).
See also:
REFEDIT (page 1536)
1532 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Discontinued Commands
The following commands have been discontinued or replaced. Some may still
function in this release. However, you should update your scripts to use new
commands.
Notes Discontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOATTACH Feature Data Objects
(FDO)
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOCONFIGURE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCONNECT.
FDOCONNECT
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODETACH
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISASSOCIATE
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISCONNECT
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCANCELCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETREMOVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKIN.
FDOEDITSETSAVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT.
FDOEDITSETSHOW
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOLOCKS
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOQUERY
Discontinued Commands | 1533
Notes Discontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued FDOREFRESH
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSCHEMA
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSHOWOWNER
Discontinued FDOSYSADMIN / SYSAD-
MIN
Discontinued MAPSKINMAP General
Discontinued MAPPLOTTRANSPARENCY
Discontinued MAPDISPLAYMANAGER
Discontinued MAPIMPORT4 Import Export (Release
4)
Discontinued MAPEXPORT4
Discontinued in Autodesk Map
6. New command is MAP-
CLEAN.
ADEDWGCLEAN Drawing Cleanup
Discontinued. For information
about the new way, see Bring-
ORACONNECT Oracle Spatial (Older
Method)
ing In Features from Oracle
(page 312).
Discontinued ORADISCONNECT
Discontinued ORAERUPDATE
Discontinued ORAEXPORT
Discontinued ORAIMPORT
Discontinued ORAINDEX
1534 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Notes Discontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued ORAUPDATE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANBUFFER
MAPBUFFER Topology
Discontinued. New command
is MAPTOPOCREATE
MAPCREATE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANDISSOLVE
MAPDISSOLVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPFLOOD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAL
MAPLINKADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDL
MAPLINKDEL
Discontinued. New command
is MAPRL
MAPLINKREV
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAN
MAPNODADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDN
MAPNODDEL
Discontinued. New command
is MAPIN
MAPNODINS
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANOVERLAY
MAPOVERLAY
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAP
MAPPOLYADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDP
MAPPOLYDEL
Discontinued Commands | 1535
Notes Discontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued. There are several
new commands,for example,
MAPTOPOADMIN
MAPTOPOLOAD and MAPTO-
PODEL. For a complete list, see
Managing Topologies (page
898).
Discontinued. There are several
new commands, for example,
MAPTOPOEDIT
MAPAN, MAPDL, and MAPMP.
For a complete list, see Editing
Topologies (page 851).
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPTRACE
MAPWSACTION
This text represents a shortcut menu command in the Task Pane that has no
link to an AutoCAD Map 3D command. For example, some topology
commands that you choose from the shortcut menu in the Task Pane do not
have corresponding AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
If you right-click in the drawing after completing such an action, you see
"Repeat MAPWSACTION" in the menu. If you click this item, nothing will
happen, by design. Likewise, if you right-click the command line, you see
MAPWSACTION as one of the Recent Commands, but clicking on it will do
nothing. The action that MAPWSACTION represents is not repeatable by
typing MAPWSACTION on the command line. You must repeat the action
from the Task Pane.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation using the UNDO command.
REFEDIT
Use the reference editing command to make modifications to Xrefs and blocks.
While in REFEDIT mode, the Task Pane and Data View are grayed-out and
some commands are unavailable. If you attempt to use one of these commands,
1536 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
AutoCAD Map 3D displays a message that the command is not allowed during
reference editing
Wildcard Characters
Most dialog boxes and command line entries support the following wildcard
characters.
These wildcard characters can be used in object data queries and property
queries. To use wildcard characters in SQL queries, refer to your database
software for a list of supported characters.
Description Wildcard
Matches any numeric digit. # (pound)
Matches any alphabetic character. @ (at)
Matches any nonalphanumeric character. . (period)
Matches any string, including the null string. It can be used
at the beginning, middle, or end of a string.
* (asterisk) or% (per-
cent)
Matches any single character. ? (question mark)
Matches anything but the next pattern. ~ (tilde)
Matches any one of the characters enclosed. [ ] (brackets)
Matches any character not enclosed. [~ ] (tilde and brack-
ets)
Specifies a range for a single character when inside brackets. - (hyphen)
Escape character; reads the next character literally. ' (reverse quote)
Enters a set when used between items. , (comma)
Wildcard Characters | 1537
NOTE Most AutoCAD Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. To
use a wildcard character as a literal character, precede the wildcard character with
a back quote (`). For example, if you have a layer named "Floor Plan #1," from
which you want to query some objects, type Floor Plan `#1 when you create the
query. If you select the name from a list box, the back quote is added automatically
to the text that appears in any corresponding edit box. The wildcard characters
for which this is valid include #, @, .(period), ~.
Improving Performance
You can improve performance in many areas by taking a few steps in advance.
For example, creating indexes can greatly speed up queries and save back.
The following table lists some of the steps you can take to improve
performance. For more information on an item, click the link.
Feature Layers
You can filter a feature layer to reduce the number of features
in the layer and improve performace. You can filter data as
Filtering Feature Layers
(page 1216)
you bring it into your map (in Data Connect, click Add To
Map With Query), or after you bring it in (right-click the layer
and choose Query To Filter Data).
Query Attached
Drawings
Using the AutoCAD Map 3D global coordinate systems re-
quires many complex calculations and can decrease perform-
To turn off a global co-
ordinate system (page
150) ance for operations such as querying objects from attached
drawings and saving back objects.
To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a query,
create an index. Instead of searching all locations, properties,
To create a drawing in-
dex (page 1294)
object data, or database links to find matching data, AutoCAD
Map 3D searches only the relevant index. If you created in-
dexes in a previous release of AutoCAD Map 3D, it may help
1538 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Query Attached
Drawings
to recreate the indexes in this release to ensure that they in-
clude any new features, such as color book names.
Raster Images
When you hide an image, the image does not display on-
screen, nor does it plot. Only the image boundary displays
To hide an image (page
485)
onscreen. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed re-
generation time. You can easily redisplay the image when
you are ready to plot.
To conserve memory use and enhance performance, you
can unload images that you do not currently need to view
and/or plot.
To unload an image
(page 486)
Because memory management can be an issue when
working with large images, you can configure the Raster
To configure memory for
images (page 259)
Extension for best performance. Specify the amount of
memory reserved for the image swap file. The higher the
Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. For best perform-
ance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file.
Display your images in high quality or draft quality. High
quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between shading
To change the image
display quality (page 254)
appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the per-
formance of your system, but may reduce the quality of how
some color and gray scale images appear onscreen.
Topology
Improve the performance of buffering operations by increas-
ing the RAM to more than the recommended amount, or
Buffering a Topology
by increasing the virtual memory on your system. This is
recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
DataView
Filter, or limit, the data displayed in the Data View. Filters
let you view only the records you want. This can improve
To use a SQL filter in the
Data View (page 1231)
Improving Performance | 1539
DataView
performance in scrolling through many records or in high-
lighting records.
Other
Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate
any objects shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them.
To erase short linear
objects (page 796)
This action reduces the number of unnecessary linear objects
and nodes in a map.
Simplifying linear objects reduces file size and improves perform-
ance but also reduces the resolution of the data.
To simplify objects
(page 814)
When modifying or working with a large number of objects, you
can enhance performance by adding the objects to the EditSet
(locking them) prior to working with them.
To add objects to
the save set and lock
the objects (page
751)
1540 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Expression Evaluator
Use expressions and variables to define data based on other information in your drawings or
in external databases.
Most places where you can enter an expression, you can use the Expression dialog box to
select from a list of available variables. You can combine expressions and variables to create
complex expressions.
Functions (page 1541)
Variables (page 1546)
Using Color in Expressions (page 1552)
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator (page 1553)
Functions
Expressions can include many types of functions.
See also:
Variables (page 1546)
Arithmetic Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following arithmetic functions. The words
in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Returns the sum of all numbers. (+ number number [number] ...)
12
1541
Description Expression
Subtracts the second and following numbers from
the first and returns the difference.
(- number number [number] ...)
Returns the product of all numbers. (* number number [number] ...)
Divides the first number by the product of the remain-
ing numbers and returns the quotient.
(/ number number [number] ...)
Returns the absolute value of the number. (abs number)
Returns the arctangent of the number expressed in
radians.
(atan num1 [num2] )
Returns the cosine of the angle expressed in radians. (cos angle)
Returns the constant e (a real number) raised to a
specified power (the natural antilog).
(exp number)
Returns a number raised to a specified power. (expt basepower)
Returns the conversion of a real number into the
nearest smaller integer.
(fix number)
Returns the natural log of a number as a real number. (log number)
Returns the base 10 logarithm for a number. (log10 number)
Returns the sine of an angle as a real number ex-
pressed in radians.
(sin angle)
Returns the square root of a number as a real num-
ber.
(sqrt number)
Returns the tangent of an angle, measured in radians. (tan angle)
1542 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
String-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following string-handling functions.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Returns a string where all alphabetic characters have
been converted to uppercase or lowercase.
(strcase string [which] )
Returns a string that is the concatenation of multiple
strings.
(strcat string1 [string2] ...)
Returns an integer that is the number of characters
in a string.
(strlen [string] ...)
Returns a substring of a string. (substr stringstart [length] )
Returns the conversion of an integer representing an
ASCII character code into a single-character string.
(chr integer)
ads the beginning of a string with spaces until the
string reaches the length specified.
(LPAD stringlength)
ads the end of a string with spaces until the string
reaches the length specified.
(RPAD stringlength)
Trims strings from the beginning, middle, or end of
a string based on the mode. Mode can be B (begin-
(trim string [mode] )
ning), M (middle), or E (end), or any combination.
If no mode is specified, BE is used.
Equality and Conditional Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following equality and conditional
functions. The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Returns T if all arguments are numerically equal, and
returns nil otherwise.
(= numstr [numstr] ...)
String-Handling Functions | 1543
Description Expression
Returns T if the arguments are not numerically equal,
and nil if the arguments are numerically equal.
(/= numstr [numstr] ...) or (<>
numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
the argument to the right, and returns nil otherwise.
(< numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
or equal to the argument to the right, and returns
nil otherwise.
(<= numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than the argument to the right, and returns nil oth-
erwise.
(> numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than or equal to the argument to the right, and re-
turns nil otherwise.
(>= numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns the logical AND of a list of expressions. (and expr ...)
Returns the logical OR of a list of expressions. (or expr ...)
Symbol-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following symbol-handling function.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Verifies that the item evaluates to nil. (not item)
Conversion Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following conversion functions. The
words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Converts an angular value in radians into a string. (angtos angle [mode [precision] ]
)
1544 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Description Expression
Returns the conversion of the first character of a
string into its ASCII character code (an integer).
(ascii string)
Converts the lineweight (first argument) to a real.
If the optional second argument is non-nil, returns
(lwtof lineweight [metric] )
the lineweight as millimeters, otherwise returns it
as inches.
Converts a number into a string. (rtos number [mode [precision] ] )
Other Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following other functions. The words
in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Description Expression
Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stored in the drawing. If the object was queried from
entity .dotvariable
a source drawing, returns the value for the object in the
source drawing, before any transformations are applied.
Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stylized in the Display Manager.
style .dotvariable
Returns pi (approx. 3.1415926). PI
Returns the value of the expression after it has been
processed by the specified range table. The range table
must be defined in the current drawing.
(Range expression
range_table)
Returns the current viewport scale, expressed as the
apparent size of a screen pixel in drawing units.
(viewscale)
Returns the current twist angle for the current viewport.
This is equivalent to the viewtwist system variable.
(viewtwist)
Other Functions | 1545
Variables
Expressions can include many types of variables and expressions.
See also:
Object Data Variables (page 1549)
Dot Variables
Use dot variables to represent object properties. For example, use the .LENGTH
variable in a property alteration to have AutoCAD Map 3D add text to all lines
specifying their length. In an output report, use the .TYPE variable to list the
type of objects in your report.
Description Expression
For most objects, returns the angle in the XY plane.
For ellipse objects, returns the angle of the major axis; for point
objects, returns the ECS rotation; for trace objects, returns the
.ANGLE
angle between the middle points of the start and end edges;
for circle objects, returns the angle of the circle normal projec-
ted plus PI/2 onto the WCSmdash;if no ECS, returns 0; for ob-
jects with 1 or 0 grip points, returns 0; for attdef, text, mtext,
insert, shape, and raster images objects, returns rotation.
Area of a closed polyline or circle.
Topology queries only: Value of AREA object data field for each
polygon.
.AREA
Name of a block. .BLOCKNAME
Bulge factor for a polyline segment. .BULGE
Center point of an object's extents.
If the object is a polygon (a closed polyline), this coordinate is
always inside the closed area regardless of the area's dimension.
.CENTER
Center point of an object's extents; that is, the intersection of
the diagonals of its bounding rectangle.
.CENTROID
Object class name. .CLASSNAME
1546 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Description Expression
ACI color of an AutoCAD Map 3D object.Color BYLAYER evalu-
ates as 256.Color BYBLOCK evaluates as 0.
.COLOR
Name of the object's source drawing.
Topology queries only: Name of the geometry object's source
drawing.
.DWGNAME
Ending angle of an arc object, using radians, interpreted from
the coordinate space where the object exists.
.EANGLE
Handle of the queried object. .EHANDLE
Value for the Z coordinate. .ELEVATION
Ending width of a polyline. Does not adjust to the ending width
of individual polyline segments.
.EWIDTH
Height of a text object. .HEIGHT
Location for text associated with an object. .LABELPT
Layer of an object. .LAYER
Length of a line, arc, polyline, or circle. Circle length is given
as the circle circumference.
.LENGTH
Linetype of an object. .LINETYPE
Lineweight of an object. .LINEWEIGHT
User responsible for the lock. .LOCKSTAT
Topology queries only: Value of PERIMETER object data field
for each polygon.
.PERIMETER
Plotstyle of an object. .PLOTSTYLE
Radius of a circle. .RADIUS
Rotation angle of a block or text, using radians. .ROTATION
Dot Variables | 1547
Description Expression
Starting angle of an arc, using radians, interpreted from the
coordinate space where the object exists.
.SANGLE
Name of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape. .SHAPENAME
Size of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape. .SIZE
Value of a string (can be the value of an attribute or text). .STRING
Style of a text string or attribute. .STYLE
Starting width of a polyline. .SWIDTH
All AutoCAD Map 3D attribute tags for an object. Usually used
with .STRING to return an attribute tag and its string value
(that is, .TAG, .STRING).
.TAG
AutoCAD Map 3D thickness of an object. .THICKNESS
Topology name (Topology queries only). .TOPONAME
Topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or POLYGON (Topology
queries only).
.TOPOTYPE
True color or color book value of an AutoCAD Map 3D object. .TRUECOLOR
AutoCAD Map 3D object type. .TYPE
URL information linked to an object.
An object with no URL link returns nil.
.URL
NOTE An object can take only one URL. URL data can be
entered in the following formats:
http://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
ftp://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
file://drive/pathname/filename.dwg
Components of a line's starting point--X, Y, or Z. .X1, .Y1, .Z1
Components of a line's ending point--X, Y, or Z. .X2, .Y2, .Z2
1548 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Description Expression
Third definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.X3, .Y3, .Z3
Fourth definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.X4, .Y4, .Z4
Scale factor along the X axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.XSCALE
Scale factor along the Y axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.YSCALE
Scale factor along the Z axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.ZSCALE
All numeric return values are in decimals.
Object Data Variables
The syntax for using an object data variable in an expression is
:ObjectDataFieldName@ObjectDataTableName
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table,
enter :diameter@pipes.
Block Attribute Variables
The syntax for using a block attribute variable in an expression is
@BlockTagName
For example, the retrieve the values for the block attribute tag VALVETYPE,
enter @VALVETYPE.
SQL Variables and Expressions
The syntax for using a SQL variable in an expression is
&ColumnName@LinkTemplate
Object Data Variables | 1549
For example, to retrieve the values in the PRICE column in the table referenced
by the link template HOUSES, enter &PRICE@HOUSES.
To relate a second table to the table specified in the link template and return
a value from one of its fields, use this syntax
&[ [ [catalog. ] schema. ] colname@LT [.lnka1, lnka2, ..., lnkaN [.lnkb1, lnkb2, ...,
lnkbN ] ]
The expression must be entered on one line.
The parameters preceding the @ symbol identify the related table. The LT
parameter identifies the primary table. If no schema or catalog is defined,
it is assumed the related table exists in the same schema as the primary
table.
The lnk parameter (or lnk1,lnk2,...,lnkN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to reference for the relation if you are not using
the key or keys identified in the link template. If no lnk column is defined
it is assumed that the columns identified in the link template exist in both
tables and are referenced for the relation.
The lnka parameter (or lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the primary table.
The lnkb parameter (or lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the related table if the column name
(or names) to reference for the relation are not the same in both tables.
The number of lnka parameters and lnkb parameters must be the same.
SQL Expressions and SQL Statements
The expression:
&catalog.schema.table.colname
@linktemplate.lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN.lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN
is equivalent to the following SQL statement:
SELECT catalog.schema.table.colname FROM catalog.schema.table WHERE
lnka1 = lnkb1 AND lnka2 = lnkb2 AND ... AND lnkaN = lnkbN AND
linktemplatekey1 = linktemplatevalue1 AND linktemplatekey2 =
linktemplatevalue2 AND ... AND linktemplatekeyN = linktemplatevalueN
where lnka1,...,lnkaN are columns from the primary table, lnkb1,...,lnkbN are
columns from the secondary table, linktemplatekey1,...,linktemplatekeyN are
link template key columns from the primary table, and
1550 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
linktemplatevalue1,...,linktemplatevalueN are the key column values obtained
from the object.
Object Classification Variables
The syntax for using an object class property variable in an expression is
#ObjectClassName.Category.Property
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table in
the PipeRun object class, enter #Piperun.OD:Pipes.Diameter. To retrieve the
values in the layer property, which is in the General category, enter
#Piperun.General.Layer. To retrieve the values of the end node of the
LocalRoads topology in the Roads object class, enter
#Road.Topo:LocalRoads."end node". Use quotation marks so the space in the
name "end node" is interpreted correctly as part of the property name.
AutoLISP Variables
The syntax for using an AutoLISP variable is
!AutoLISPVariable
For example, to retrieve the values assigned to a variable defined as DIAMETER,
enter !DIAMETER.
EED Expressions
The syntax for using an EED expression is
$EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for string fields)
$#EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for numeric fields)
$&EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for SQL fields)
For example, to retrieve the values for the AGE field registed under the
application ADE, enter $#AGE@ADE.
Object Classification Variables | 1551
Using Color in Expressions
When specifying color in an expresssion, you can use any of the following:
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number
RGB triplet
color book color
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
You can specify the color using an ACI color name (red, yellow, green, cyan,
blue, magenta and white), the ACI index number (0-256), BYLAYER (256), or
BYBLOCK (0).
Examples:
(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "blue")""))
(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "5")""))
(ade_altpdefine "color" "red")
(ade_altpdefine "color" "1")
RGB Triplet
An RGB triplet specifies the amount of red, green, and blue used to create the
color. The values represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue
components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create
a wide range of colors. For each component, enter a value between 0 and 255.
To enter an RGB color, enter the value for each of the components separated
by commas. Enclose the three numbers in single quotation marks. For example,
enter the color Red as '255,0,0' and enter cyan as '0,255,255'.
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"255,0,0\"" )""))
(ade_altpdefine "color" "255,0,0")
1552 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Color Book and Color Name
You can specify colors using third-party color books (such as Pantone) or
user-defined color books.
To specify a color book color, enter the name of the color book and the name
of the color separated by a comma. Enclose the entire string in single quotation
marks. For example, to specify the Pantone process coated cyan, enter
'Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'. When you enter the
color book and color name, be sure to type them exactly.
If you are unsure of the color name or color book name, display the Select
Color dialog box. On the Color Books tab, look at the name of the color book
and the color name.
For information on adding color books, click Help in the Color Books tab of
the Select Color dialog box.
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"Pantone,Pantone 647
CVC\"")""))
(ade_altpdefine "color" "Pantone,Pantone 647 CVC")
Combining Colors
When you specify the range of valid colors, you can combine any of the color
specifications. Separate each color with a comma. In addition, for ACI colors,
you can specify a continuous range. For example:
1,5,[7,11],'255,128,64','Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator
Not all operators are valid with all types of comparisons. When comparing
strings, If, =, /=, >=, <= are valid, but not <. No error results, but the accuracy
of the results can be affected.
For strings, the standard wild-card characters listed in Wildcard Characters
(page 1537) are valid. For example, if the expression (IF (= .LAYER ELEC*)
EDISON) is placed in the condition, all objects in the query on layers
beginning with ELEC are displayed on the layer EDISON. In addition, the
operators = and /= are valid with wild cards.
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator | 1553
For real numbers less than one, enter all decimal values with a leading
zero; that is, enter .001 as 0.001.
When nil is a possible parameter, AutoCAD Map 3D uses zero.
The expression evaluator deals only in strings; it does not distinguish
between strings and numerics. The expression evaluator converts strings
to their numeric values for math operations and converts the results back
to strings.
If you use variables set using AutoLISP, you must precede the variable with
an exclamation point (!).
To keep a space within a string, enclose the string in quotation marks. For
example, "this string" evaluates as one string, with a space between the
two words. Without the quotation marks, this string evaluates as two
separate strings. The expression evaluator ignores quotation marks.
You must enclose named objects with spaces in the name in parentheses
when used in evaluator functions. These objects include layers, blocks,
hatches, and linetypes.
The following expressions handle a maximum of three arguments: +, , *,
/, AND, OR, STRCAT, =, and /=. All other expressions handle one or two
arguments. If you use +, , *, or /, you must supply more than one
argument. For example, (+ 5 6) evaluates to 11; (+ 5 3 2) evaluates to 10.
An expression evaluates numbers with scientific notation in compound
simple expressions. For example, (+ 1e+001 1) evaluates to 11.0000; 1e+001
evaluates to 10.0.
AutoCAD Map 3D evaluates pi only in compound expressions; the program
treats pi as a string in simple expressions. For example, (STRCAT pi "_%")
evaluates to 3.14%; pi by itself evaluates to "pi."
You can specify color (page 1552) using ACI, True Color, or Color Book color
values.
1554 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Expression Builder
Use expressions to filter the geospatial information displayed in your map, to create calculated
fields, and to change the styles used for a feature layer based on certain conditions.
Using the Expression Builder
The Expression Builder is displayed when you are doing the following:
Filtering the Layers You Add to a Map
Filtering Feature Layers
Filtering by Location
Searching to Select Feature Layers
Creating a Calculation
Using Expressions to Label Features
Using Expressions In Split/Merge Rules
Expressions you build with the Expression Builder affect geospatial data only
and cannot be used for drawing objects. For help with expressions that affect
drawing data, see the Expression Evaluator (page 1541) section.
13
1555
1556
Dialog Boxes
1557
1558
Analyzing Data Dialog
Boxes
Create Buffer dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the buffer distance and merging options for
buffering features in AutoCAD Map 3D.
To create a buffer (page 1308)
Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Buffer
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To create a buffer for drawing
objects, see Buffering a Topology (page 1345).
The Create Buffer dialog box has the following options:
Select Features
If you have not already selected features to buffer, click to select the features
interactively on your map.
Buffer Distance
Enter a value, or click to enter a distance interactively on your map. If
you later change the Units setting, the Distance will update to reflect the new
units.
14
1559
Units
Use the measurement units specified by the coordinate system assigned to
your map, or choose a different unit from the list.
(Specify buffer distance)
Click to pick the buffer distance interactively on your map.
Output To Layer
Specify the Display Manager layer to contain the buffer. If you created other
buffers in this map, you can choose one of their layers from the list. By
default, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new layer for your buffer.
Save To SDF
Specify the name of the SDF file to store the buffered features. By default,
the buffer file is saved in the current drawings saved location.
Merge Results
Select No Merging and overlapping buffers are not merged. Select Merge
All Buffers and all overlapping buffers are merged into a single buffer, then
combined into a single multi-polygon. Select Merge Overlapping Buffers
and only overlapping buffers are merged.
Buffer Warning dialog box
You may have selected too many features to buffer in a reasonable amount
of time. Use this dialog box to change your feature selection or merge options
to improve performance of the buffer task.
To change your selection or merge options after receiving a buffer warning
(page 1309)
Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Buffer
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To create a buffer for
drawing objects, see Buffering a Topology (page 1345).
Proceed
Click to use the current options and execute the buffer task. Proceeding
after receiving a buffer warning may take a very long time.
1560 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Change
Click to change your feature selection or merge options.
Generate Contour dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the settings for new contour lines for a
raster-based surface.
To create contour lines (page 1190)
In Display Manager (page 2060), right-click a surface layer, and select Create
Contour Layer
NOTE This functionality applies only to raster-based surface data brought into
AutoCAD Map 3D using Data Connect. You cannot create a surface from other
raster data.
The Contour dialog box has the following options:
New Contour Layer Name
Enter the name for the new Display Manager layer that will contain the
contour lines.
Contour Elevation Interval
Select the difference in elevation between contour lines, for example, 10,
20, or 50.
Units
Select the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation in your surface.
AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to get this data from the surface itself, but you
can change it.
Major Contour Every
Select the difference in elevation between major (bold) contour lines. For
example, if you select 5, every fifth contour line will be bolded.
Label the Elevation
Label the contour lines with the elevations they represent.
Generate Contour dialog box | 1561
Create Contours As
Select the type of feature to use when creating contour lines (polyline or
polygon).
Save Contours Into Filename
Enter a name for the new SDF file that will store your contour line features.
Hillshade Settings dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the settings for shading applied to raster-based
surfaces in AutoCAD Map 3D.
To specify hillshading settings (page 1200)
Click Analyze tab Feature panel Surface Hillshade.
NOTE This functionality applies only to raster-based surface data brought into
AutoCAD Map 3D using Data Connect. You cannot create a surface from other
raster data.
The Hillshade Settings dialog box includes the following options:
Direction
Specify the direction from which the light should come, for example, East
or West. Enter a direction value into the edit box, drag the yellow disk in
the compass to the position you want, or use Settings.
Angle
Specify how high in the sky the light is located, such as near the horizon,
directly overhead, or somewhere in between. Enter an angle into the edit
box, drag the yellow disk to specify an angle, or use Settings.
Date, Time, Location Settings
Click to specify sun settings in the Sun Properties palette using date, time
and location. Then, redisplay the Hillshade Settings dialog box and click
Import.
Import
Click to import changes you made using Settings.
1562 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Overlay Analysis dialog box
Use this dialog to perform spatial and data analysis by overlaying one set of
geospatial features with another set of geospatial features. Overlay results use
the split rules set in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669).
To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316)
Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Overlay
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To overlay drawing
topologies, see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336).
Overlay Analysis dialog box - Source and Overlay Type page
Use this page of the Overlay Analysis dialog box to specify the Source and
Overlay features, as well as the type of overlay analysis to perform. Overlay
results use the split rules set in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669).
To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316)
Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Overlay
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To overlay drawing
topologies, see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336).
The Source and Overlay Type page of the Overlay Analysis dialog box includes
the following options:
Source
Specify the feature layer or feature class to use as the source.
Overlay
Specify the feature layer or feature class to use as the overlay.
Overlay Analysis dialog box | 1563
To use a feature layer, you must add it to your map. To use a feature class,
you must connect to its data store, but you need not add it to the map.
The geometry in the feature classes or layers you select determines the other
choices in the dialog box. You can combine only certain types of geometries.
For example, Union, Paste, and Symmetric Difference support
polygon/polygon comparisons only. Also, you cannot choose point
geometries for both Source and Overlay. If you select point geometry for
Source, you can select only polygon geometry for Overlay.
The available choices for Type depend on the geometry in the Source and
Overlay.
If either the Source or the Overlay contains multiple geometries, you can
select any feature class or layer in Overlay and any overlay operation in
Type. However, the output may be empty if there are no valid geometry
combinations.
Type
Select the type of overlay comparison to perform. For more information on
the available types, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Intersect: Determines the geometry that overlaps in the Source and
Overlay features. Anything that does not overlap is discarded from the
output.
Union: Determines the geometry that exists in either the Source or
Overlay geometry. Where the geometry intersects, additional features
are created. The resulting layer is the sum of the two comparison layers.
Erase: Determines the geometry from the Source that does not intersect
with the Overlay. The intersecting pieces are discarded.
Identity: Creates new features where the Source and Overlay features
intersect.
Clip: Like Intersect, Clip creates features from the areas of the Source
that overlap with the Overlay. However, with Clip, only feature attributes
from the Source are included in the resulting layer.
Paste: Creates new features by pasting the Overlay features onto the
Source features. All Overlay features become new features in the resulting
layer. In addition, areas of the Source that do not fall within the geometry
of the Overlay become features in the resulting layer.
Symmetric Difference: Determines geometry of the Source and Overlay
that do not overlap. Overlapping areas of the features are discarded in
the output, so the resulting layer represents the areas that are mutually
exclusive.
1564 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Overlay Analysis dialog box - Set Output and Settings page
Use this page of the Overlay Analysis dialog box to specify the information
about the output layer, and to set tolerance levels for sliver polygons and the
evaluation of points. Overlay results use the split rules set in the Split and
Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669).
To perform an Overlay operation (page 1316)
Analyze tab Feature panel Feature Overlay
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To overlay drawing
topologies, see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 1336).
The Set Output And Settings page of the Overlay Analysis dialog box includes
the following options:
Output
Specify the name and location of the SDF file that will contain the result
of the Overlay operation.
Layer Name
Specify the name of the Display Manager layer that contains the result of
the Overlay operation.
Sliver Tolerance
When the Overlay operation splits features to produce the output layer, it
eliminates polygons that are smaller than the specified tolerance settings.
Some such polygons were present in the sources, and some are produced by
the Overlay operation itself. The elimination of slivers affects the output layers
only.
Polygons whose areas are larger than the Maximum value become separate
features in the output layer.
Polygons whose areas are smaller than the Minimum (and have at least one
neighboring polygon) are considered slivers, and are merged with the
neighboring polygon that has the longest shared edge.
Overlay Analysis dialog box - Set Output and Settings page | 1565
The Overlay operation checks polygons that fall between the two values to
see how wide they are. If they are very narrow, they are merged with a
neighboring polygon.
NOTE If the resulting polygons are not as desired, try adjusting the tolerance
values and repeating the Overlay operation.
Minimum
Specify a value in the current units. If a polygon is smaller than this value,
it merges with a neighboring polygon.
Maximum
Specify a value in the current units. If a polygon is larger than this value,
it becomes its own feature.
Suggest
Click to see recommendations for the Sliver Minimum and Sliver Maximum
values (if they are not already displayed).
To see recommended values, click Suggest. The default suggested values for
sliver tolerances are 1/10 of the smallest input area for the Maximum and
1/100 of the smallest input area for the Minimum. However, the sliver
tolerance values will round down to the next power of 10. So, if the smallest
polygon has an area of 50, the expected sliver tolerances should be 1 and
0.1 respectively, and not 0.5 and 5.
Units
Specify the units to use for the sliver Minimum and Maximum settings.
The available units depend on the Source coordinate system.
Dont Remove Slivers
Select this check box to have the Overlay operation ignore sliver polygons.
Ordinate Tolerance
Specify how far apart two nodes or vertices of a line or polygon must be to be
treated as separate points.
Length
Enter a distance in the current units. Any two points that are closer together
than this value are treated as a single point in the output layer.
Units
Specify the units to use for the Ordinate Tolerance Lengthsetting. The
available units depend on the Source coordinate system.
1566 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Output Properties
Specify which properties from the Source and (if applicable) Overlay are
included in the resulting layer. All adds all properties to the resulting
layer. Identifiers adds only the primary identifiers (primary keys or unique
fields, such as Feature_ID). Non-Identifiers adds only the non-key attributes
(such as Land_Value or Speed_limit, for example). If you add only
non-identifiers, the overlay operation generates primary identifiers for the
features in the resulting layer.
Overlay Analysis dialog box - Set Output and Settings page | 1567
1568
Annotation Dialog Boxes
Annotation Delete dialog box
Use this dialog box to delete one or more annotation templates from the list of
available templates.
To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template (page 1108)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Delete Annotation.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Annotation Refresh dialog box
Use this dialog box to select an annotation template to refresh.
To refresh annotation based on a specific template (page 1105)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Refresh Annotation.
15
1569
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
The Annotation Refresh operation has two options:
Strings Only
Re-evaluate any expression-based text in the annotation, but change nothing
else.
Full Annotation
Re-evaluate any expression-based text in the annotation, as well as other
properties of the annotation, such as the insertion point or the layer on
which the annotation resides.
Annotation Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify each text element in an annotation template,
and set its entity properties and text options.
To define an annotation template (page 192)
To change an annotation template (page 196)
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Attribute
Tag
Enter a name for the annotation text object.
Value
Enter the content of the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
Object Properties
Layer
Select the layer for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
1570 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Color
Select the color for the annotation text. If you select ByBlock, the settings
in the Define Annotation Template dialog box will be used. Click to
specify an expression.
Lineweight
Select the lineweight. If you select ByBlock, the settings in the Define
Annotation Template dialog box will be used. Click to specify an
expression.
Text Options
Style
Select the style for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
Height
Specify the default height of the annotation text. Click to pick points
in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
Rotation
Specify the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click to
pick points in the drawing. These use the AUNITS system variable. Click
to specify an expression. The resulting values use radians. Your
expression can include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Justification
Specify the justification for the annotation text. Click to specify an
expression.
Annotation Update dialog box
Use this dialog box to update an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
To update annotation based on a specific template (page 1107)
Annotation Update dialog box | 1571
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Update Annotation.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
The Annotation Update operation has two options:
Retain
Regenerates all annotation that uses the selected template, maintaining any
advanced settings from the original annotation. Text you added or removed
in the annotation template is changed in the existing annotations, and any
modifications you made to specific annotations remain.
Discard
Regenerates all annotation that uses the selected template, using the default
values in the template. Text you added or removed in the annotation
template is changed in the existing annotations, but any overrides are lost.
Define Annotation Template dialog box
Use this dialog to define or change the text and graphic elements, default
properties, and insertion options of annotation templates.
To define an annotation template (page 192)
To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template (page 1108)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Annotation Template
Template Name
Select an annotation template.
New
Create a new annotation template.
1572 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Copy
Copy the selected annotation template with a new name.
Rename
Rename the selected annotation template.
Delete
Delete the selected annotation template. You can delete an annotation
template only if you first delete all references to that template from the
drawing.
Default Properties
Layer
Select a layer for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Linetype
Select a linetype. Click to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Select a lineweight for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Color
Select a color for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Default Insertion Options
Insertion Point
Specify the annotation insertion location based on the selected template.
Click to pick a point in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
Scale
Specify the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click to pick points in the drawing, or click to specify an
expression.
Rotation
Specify the rotation angle to use. Click to pick points in the drawing.
These use the AUNITS system variable. Click to specify an expression.
Define Annotation Template dialog box | 1573
The resulting values use radians. Your expression can include a conversion
from degrees to radians (divide the degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Edit Template Contents
Display the Block Editor, where you can specify the contents of the selected
annotation template.
Edit Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to edit an expression. For information about the Expression
Evaluator, see Expression Evaluator (page 1541).
To define an annotation template (page 192)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Insert.
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Enter an expression or click to select from a list of variables in your
drawing.
Insert Annotation dialog box
Use this dialog box to select an annotation template and specify insert
properties.
To insert annotation (page 1103)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Insert.
1574 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Annotation Template
Select one or more annotation templates to use when inserting annotation
into your drawing.
Basic/Advanced
Click Advanced to override the insertion information specified in the
annotation template.
Insert Options
Insertion Point
Specify the annotation insertion location. Click to pick a point in the
drawing, or click to specify an expression.
Scale
Specify the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click to pick points in the drawing, or click to specify an
expression.
Rotation
Specify the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click to
pick points in the drawing. These use the AUNITS system variable. Click
to specify an expression. The resulting values use radians. Your
expression can include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Insert Properties
Layer
Select a layer for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Linetype
Select a linetype for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Select a lineweight for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Insert Annotation dialog box | 1575
Color
Select a color for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Match
Click to copy the insertion options and properties from an annotation
already in the drawing.
New Annotation Template Name dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a name for an annotation template.
To define an annotation template (page 192)
Click Annotate tab Map Annotation panel Define Template.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To add annotation to
geospatial features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
1576 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Autodesk MapGuide Dialog
Boxes
Publish to MapGuide dialog box
Use this dialog box to publish the current display map to Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007, a platform that lets you publish map-related data on the web
or on an intranet.
To publish a map for use with MapGuide (page 1378)
Click Publish Publish To MapGuide.
Connect To Site
Enter the URL for the target website. If the site requires a password, enter
your user name and password in the Connect To MapGuide Site dialog box.
Overwrite Existing Resources Of The Same Name
Select this option to overwrite old files of the same name that already exist
in the target folder. Clear this option to cancel the operation when such files
are encountered.
Show Map In Web Browser After Publishing
Select this option to review the published map immediately.
Select Destination Folder
Select a folder for the published files.
16
1577
Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box
Use this dialog box to resolve any errors that result from a Publish To
MapGuide operation.
To resolve MapGuide publishing errors (page 1379)
Click Publish Publish To MapGuide.
View Log
Examine the log file to see which layers failed and why.
Define New Object Data Field dialog box
Use this dialog box to create new fields in existing object data tables when
you are importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import SDF 2 files (page 389)
Click Insert tab Import panel SDF 2.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
Field Name
Enter a name for the new field. The name cannot contain any spaces. It
must start with an alphanumeric character.
Type
Specify the valid data type of the new field.
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
1578 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Character
Any characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description
Enter a description for the new field. This description appears in the Object
Data Fields list.
Default
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to
an object. The value must match the data type you selected above.
New Layer dialog box
Use this dialog box to create layers from imported SDF data.
To import SDF 2 files (page 389)
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887)
Click Insert tab Import panel SDF 2.
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Create Centroids.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
Enter a layer name. It cannot contain any of the following characters: < > / \
: ? * | , = " ` "
New Layer dialog box | 1579
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings for exporting DWG data to Autodesk
MapGuide SDF 2 files for use with Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 and earlier.
To export DWG data to SDF2 format (page 1418)
Click Output tab Map Data Transfer panel As SDF2.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
If you previously saved your settings in this dialog box, click Load to reload
them. To save the current settings to use later or to use in a script, click Save.
Selection Tab
SDF Type
Select the type of data to export. Objects of other entity types will be filtered
out of the export. To export the other entity types, run this operation again.
Some objects in an AutoCAD Map 3D drawing may be exported as more
than one entity type.
Select Objects Automatically
Select all objects of the specified type. If Filter Selection By Layer is selected,
only objects on the specified layers are selected.
Select Objects Manually
Individually select the objects to export. To modify the selection set, click
or . Selected objects that do not match the filter will not be
exported.
Filter Selection
Filter the selected objects based on layer. Select Filter Selection By Layer,
click the button, and select from a list of all layers in the drawing. Objects
that are not on the selected layers are filtered out of the export. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out.
1580 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Preview Filtered Objects
Preview the objects that will be exported. In the preview, objects that will
be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview and return to this dialog,
press Esc.
Options Tab
SDF Description
Enter a description for the SDF 2 file.
Data Expression
Key
Enter an expression for the Key field, or click to open the Expression
Chooser dialog box and select an attribute for the Key field.
Name
Enter an expression for the Name field, or click to open the Expression
Chooser dialog box and select an attribute for the Name field.
URL
Enter an expression for the URL field, or click to open the Expression
Chooser dialog box and select an attribute for the URL field.
Coordinate Conversion
To convert the exported objects to a different coordinate system, select
Convert To and enter the coordinate system code for the export file, or click
to select one.
If this option is greyed, your current map does not have an assigned
coordinate system. You can cancel this dialog box, assign a coordinate
system, and then retry this operation.
Create Key Index File
Create a corresponding Key Index File (KIF) for the SDF 2 file.
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box | 1581
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings for importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF
2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import SDF 2 files (page 389)
Click Insert tab Import panel SDF 2.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
Import Layer
Import To Layer
Import SDF 2 data to a specified layer. Click the button to create a new layer
for the imported SDF 2 data.
Data Elements
Assign To Object Data Table
Assign data from the SDF 2 file to an object data table in the current drawing.
Table
Select the object data table for the imported SDF 2 data. Click the button
to define a new object data table for the SDF 2 data.
Key
Select the field in the object data table for the imported SDF 2 Key data.
Click the button to define a new field in the object data table for the SDF
2 data.
Name
Select the field in the object data table for the imported SDF 2 Name data.
Click the button to define a new field in the object data table for the SDF
2 data.
1582 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
URL
Select the field in the object data table for the imported SDF 2 URL data.
Click the button to define a new field in the object data table for the SDF
2 data.
Create Hyperlinks From URL Field
Create hyperlinks from the URL expressions in the SDF 2 file.
Coordinate Conversion
Convert From
Enter the coordinate system of the SDF 2 file. This function is available only
if the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system. AutoCAD Map
3D converts the data from the SDF 2 coordinate system to the active drawing
coordinate system. Click to select the coordinate system of the SDF 2
file.
Import by Location
Define an Area to Import From The SDF File
Import a specific area of the SDF 2 file.
X Min
Enter the X coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
Y Min
Enter the Y coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
X Max
Enter the X coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Y Max
Enter the Y coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Import Profile
Load
Load previously saved SDF Import Profile (SIP) file containing import
settings.
Save
Save the current import settings as an SDF Import Profile (SIP) file.
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box | 1583
1584
Cleaning Up Maps Dialog
Boxes
Cleanup Methods Page
Use this dialog box to specify what to do with the original objects after the
cleanup process is complete.
To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup (page 776)
To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
Cleanup Method
Modify Original Objects
In the processed drawing, use the original layer and as much of the original
data as possible.
Retain Original Objects And Create New Objects
Keep the original objects and put the new objects on a layer you specify.
Delete Original Objects And Create New Objects
Copy existing object data and database links to the new objects.
17
1585
Use Original Layer
Place new objects on the same layer as the source objects.
Create On Layer
Enter the name of a layer. If the layer does not exist, it will be created. Click
Select Layers to select from existing layers.
Convert Selected Objects
Line To Polyline
Convert lines to 2D polylines so you can assign line width to them, use
them in thematic maps, or use them in programs that accept only polylines.
Arc To Polyline
Convert arcs to 2D polylines so you can assign line width to them, use them
in thematic maps, or use them in programs that accept only polylines. The
resulting polyline uses a true arc, not straight line segments.
3D Polyline To Polyline
Convert 3D polylines to 2D polylines so you can assign line width to them,
use them in thematic maps, or use them in programs that accept only
polylines.
Circle To Polyline
Convert circles to 2D polylines so you can assign line width to them, use
them in thematic maps, or use them in programs that accept only polylines.
The resulting polyline uses two true arcs, not straight line segments.
Circle To Arcs
Convert circles to arcs.
NOTE Converting objects changes them to different entity types. If classified
objects are modified so they no longer meet the object class definition, they will
be unclassified. You must re-classify them manually.
Other
Load
Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved
previously.
Save
Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Move to the next drawing cleanup page.
1586 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Displays the Error Markers Page (page 1587) if you selected Interactive on the
previous Select Actions page.
Finish
Perform the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
Error Markers Page
Use this dialog box to specify the marker shape and color for each cleanup
action. Specify the marker size, and set options for erasing or maintaining
markers before and after cleanup.
To set up markers for interactive mode (page 779)
To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
This page is available only when you select Interactive on the Select Actions
page (page 1588).
In Interactive mode, AutoCAD Map 3D displays each error for you to accept
or reject the correction. You can place a markers at error locations to help you
find them more easily.
Parameters
Set options for removing markers before and after the drawing cleanup, and
specify the size of the markers, relative to the screen size.
Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts
Delete markers from an earlier operation before placing new markers. Clear
this check box to display both sets of markers.
Deleting old markers prevents confusion.
Maintain Markers When Command Ends
Keep markers in the drawing after the drawing cleanup operation.
Error Markers Page | 1587
Marker Size
Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size, usually between 3%
and 7%.
Blocks And Colors
For each operation listed, select a marker shape and color.
Other
Load
Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved
previously.
Save
Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Finish
Perform the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings. You can
place markers, review errors, and make correction decisions.
This operation displays the list of detected errors in the Drawing Cleanup
Errors dialog box (page 1593).
Select Actions Page
Use this dialog box to select the cleanup actions to perform and the parameters
to use. Specify whether to review errors in Interactive mode or have AutoCAD
Map 3D automatically correct errors.
To select cleanup actions and set options (page 773)
To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
You can perform multiple cleanup actions simultaneously, but it is better to
perform only a few at a time so you can track changes. Run the Simplify
Objects and Weed Polylines actions by themselvesnot with other actions.
1588 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Cleanup Actions list
Select a cleanup action and click Add to add it to the Selected Actions list.
For more information about each cleanup action, click one of the following
links:
Delete Duplicates (page 793)
Erase Short Objects (page 795)
Break Crossing Objects (page 797)
Extend Undershoots (page 799)
Apparent Intersection (page 802)
Snap Clustered Nodes (page 804)
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 807)
Erase Dangling Objects (page 809)
Simplify Objects (page 811)
Zero-Length Objects (page 815)
Weed Polylines (page 816)
NOTE Some cleanup actions create a new object or break an object into multiple
segments (for example, when you break crossing objects or extend undershoots
with the break target option). If the original object was classified, the
classification information remains with only the segment that contains the start
point of the original object. You must classify the other segments manually.
Add
Add selected actions to the Selected Actions list.
Remove
Remove selected actions from the Selected Actions list.
Selected Actions list
Actions are performed in the order they appear in the list. If you include
Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines with other cleanup actions, AutoCAD
Map 3D automatically performs Simplify and Weed first, regardless of their
position.
Up arrow
Move the selected action up one position in the list.
Down arrow
Move the selected action down one position in the list.
Cleanup Parameters
Select an action in the Selected Actions list to set its parameters. Each action
has its own set of parameters. Some cleanup actions have none.
Select Actions Page | 1589
Tolerance
Specify the radial search distance for locating geometric errors. Enter a value
or click Pick to specify a distance in the drawing area.
For example, if you set the tolerance to 5 units, two nodes within 10 units
of each other are within the tolerance and will be corrected.
Rotation
Include rotation in the Delete Duplicates calculation for Blocks, Text, or
Mtext.
Z-Values
Include z-values (elevation) in the Delete Duplicates calculation.
Break Target
Break target linear objects at the intersections during the Extend Undershoots
operation.
Snap To Node
For Snap Clustered Nodes, snap to an existing node.
Snap To Link
For Snap Clustered Nodes, snap to an existing link endpoint.
Create Arcs
Allow the introduction of arcs during the Simplify Objects operation.
Weeding Distance
For Weed Polylines, enter a value or click Pick to select two locations in the
drawing. Weeding Factors reduce the number of points generated along 3D
polylines. A larger distance and deflection angle weeds a greater number of
points. The distance is measured in linear units and must be smaller than
the Supplemental Distance.
Weeding Angle
For Weed Polylines, enter the deflection angle, or click Pick to select a
starting point, a vertex, and an ending point in the drawing. A larger
distance and deflection angle weeds a greater number of points. The angle
factor is measured in angular units.
Supplemental Distance
For Weed Polylines, enter the maximum distance between vertices. If the
distance between vertices on a contour is greater, points are added along
the contour at equal intervals that are less than or equal to the Supplemental
Distance. The smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented
points.
1590 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Bulge
For Weed Polylines, enter a value, or click Pick to specify it in the drawing.
Bulge adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an approximation of the
curve using straight line segments. Bulge is a ratio of the distance from the
arc to the chord divided by half the length of the chord.
Options
Interactive
Review errors and decide how to handle them. For example, you can correct
the errors, place marker blocks on them, or ignore them.
Automatic
Have AutoCAD Map 3D correct errors automatically. AutoCAD Map 3D
corrects Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines errors automatically, no matter
what you specify.
Other
Load
Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved
previously.
Save
Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Move to the next drawing cleanup page.
Displays the Cleanup Methods page (page 1585).
Finish
Perform the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
Drawing Cleanup
Drawing cleanup helps you improve the accuracy of your maps, correct
common map errors (resulting from surveying, digitizing, scanning errors, for
example), and remove unnecessary detail from complex maps. This is essential
when you need accurate and complete maps suitable for defining topologies,
performing map analyses, or plotting and presentations.
To clean up objects in a map (page 767)
To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781)
Drawing Cleanup | 1591
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
Drawing Cleanup is a sequence of pages that guide you through specifying
the set of objects to include in a drawing cleanup operation, the objects to
anchor, the cleanup actions to perform and the settings to use, how to treat
the objects after cleanup, and the error marker settings (for interactive mode
only).
Drawing Cleanup includes the following pages:
Select Objects Page (page 1595)
Select Actions Page (page 1588)
Cleanup Methods Page (page 1585)
Error Markers Page (page 1587)
Other
Load
Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved
previously.
Save
Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Move to the next drawing cleanup page.
Displays the Select Actions Page (page 1588).
NOTE Do not use Drawing Cleanup to correct topologies; you might make a
topology invalid and not be able to recreate it. To edit topologies, use the topology
editing commands (page 851).
1592 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box
Use this dialog box to step through the errors, review them in the map, decide
whether to correct the errors, and place markers on errors that you want to
review later.
To set up markers for interactive mode (page 779)
To review errors before correcting them (page 785)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
This dialog box displays the cleanup actions performed on the drawing and
the errors detected for each action. This dialog box is displayed only if you
select Interactive on the Drawing Cleanup - Cleanup Actions dialog box. If
you select Automatic, all errors are corrected automatically.
Cleanup Action
List of cleanup actions
Initially, the first cleanup action with detected errors is selected. The icons
next to the cleanup action show you what the error marker for that action
will look like (marker shape and color) if you mark errors in the map. Expand
a cleanup action to display the list of detected errors (Error 1 of...).
All cleanup actions performed, except Simplify Objects, are listed in the
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically
performs Simplify Objects, even when you select Interactive.
For Erase Short Objects, AutoCAD Map 3D divides the detected errors into
three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and Short
Polyline Objects. For Zero-Length Objects, AutoCAD Map 3D divides the
errors into two groups: Zero Length Line Objects and Zero Length Polyline
Objects.
To display the list of errors detected (Error 1 of...) for a cleanup action, click
the plus sign (+) next to the cleanup action's name.
Cleanup Action Options
To work with all errors for a cleanup action at once, select the action and click
any of the following:
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box | 1593
Fix All
Correct all errors for the selected action.
Mark All
Mark all errors for the selected action with error markers, making them
easily visible in the map.
Remove All
Skip all errors for the selected action without correcting them, remove any
error markers, and go to the next cleanup action in the list.
Next Action
Go to the next cleanup action in which errors are detected, without
correcting errors.
Individual Error Options
To step through the errors for a cleanup action one at a time, select its list of
errors (Error 1 of...), and then use any of the following:
Fix
Correct the selected error and go to the next error on the list.
Mark
Place an error marker on the selected error.
Remove
Skip the current error without correcting it, remove any error marker, and
go to the next error in the list.
Next
Go to the next error on the list without correcting the selected error.
Zoom Settings
Zoom %
Specify the percentage of the drawing that highlighted objects occupy. 100
zooms the display to the extents of the highlighted objects. Less than 100
displays more of the drawing outside the highlighted objects. 0 maintains
the current zoom level.
Auto Zoom
Automatically adjust the zoom so the selected error fills the percentage of
the screen specified for Zoom %.
Zoom
Zoom to the selected error. Clear Auto Zoom to use this option.
1594 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Select Objects Page
Use this dialog box to select the objects to include in the cleanup process and
the objects to anchor.
To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup (page 770)
To save Drawing Cleanup settings as a profile (page 781)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. There is no equivalent for
geospatial features.
If you have previously saved your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file,
click Load to reload those settings.
Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup
Select objects to clean up. In general, you can clean up linear objects only
(lines, arcs, circles, and polylines), although a few cleanup actions also support
points, blocks, text, and mtext. Unsupported object types are ignored.
Select All
Select all objects.
Select Manually
Specify any layer or feature class filters, select this option, then click to
select objects in the drawing.
Layers
Select the layers used for object selection. Enter the layer names, or click
the button to select from a list. You can use wild-card characters. To use all
layers, enter an asterisk (*).
Objects that are not on the selected layers are filtered out during objection
selection. The status line shows how many objects are selected and how
many were filtered out.
Object Classes
Select the object classes used for object selection. Enter the class names, or
click the button to select from a list. You can use wild-card characters. To
use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*).
Select Objects Page | 1595
Objects that are not in the selected object classes are filtered out. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out. If your map does not contain object classes, these options are not
available.
Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup
Select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are used as reference points
during cleanup and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned will be
moved towards anchored objects. You can anchor linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
Select Manually
Temporarily close the Select Objects page so you can select the objects to
anchor. Press Enter when you are finished.
Layers
Select the layers used for anchor selection. Enter the layer names, or click
the button to select from a list. You can use wild-card characters. To use all
layers, enter an asterisk (*).
Objects that are not on the selected layers are filtered out during objection
selection. The status line shows how many objects are selected and how
many were filtered out.
Object classes
Select the object classes used for anchor object selection. Enter the class
names, or click the button to select from a list. You can use wild-card
characters. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*).
Objects that are not in the selected object classes are filtered out. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out. If your map does not contain object classes, these options are not
available.
Other
Load
Load a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings you saved
previously.
Save
Save your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Move to the next drawing cleanup page.
Displays the Select Actions page (page 1588).
1596 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Coordinate Systems Dialog
Boxes
MAPDIST
Use this command to measure the geodetic distance between points in your
map.
To measure geodetic distance (page 1153)
Click Analyze tab Geo Tools panel Geo Distance.
The geodetic distance is the actual distance along the ground, taking into account
the curvature of the Earth. For example, if you have a Mercator map of the
world, use this command to measure how many miles wide Greenland is.
This command is different from the DIST command, which measures the simple
Pythagorean distance between two points, not the underlying physical distance.
Map distortion (due to the coordinate system), makes the actual distance on
the ground considerably different from the distance on the surface of the map.
When prompted, specify the first point and the second point, either by entering
the coordinates or by clicking the mouse. AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
following information on the command line:
Distance
The geodetic distance from the first point to the second point, expressed in
units of the coordinate system assigned to the current drawing.
18
1597
Azimuth
The angle of the line from the first point to the second point, measured at
the first point, and expressed in degrees east of north.
Delta X, Delta Y
These are the same as the DIST command.
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box
Use this dialog box to assign a coordinate system before you bring objects or
features into the current drawing.
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147)
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
When you bring objects and features into the current drawing, AutoCAD Map
3D checks whether the coordinate system assigned to the object or feature
matches that of the current drawing. If it does not, AutoCAD Map 3D
transforms the object or feature to the current drawings coordinate system.
If you edit and save the object or feature back to its source, AutoCAD Map 3D
transforms it back to its original coordinate system.
Current Drawing
You cannot assign a coordinate system to the current drawing if it contains
any objects that have been queried from source drawings. If you are using the
Canadian National Transformation, you must copy the data files to the
Autodesk shared coordinate system directory.
Code
Enter the code for the current drawing, or click Select Coordinate System
to select from a list.
Select Coordinate System
Click to select from a list of available coordinate systems.
1598 | Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
Source Drawings
Select the attached drawings, then enter the code for these drawings. Click
Select Coordinate System to select from a list of available coordinate systems.
To assign a different code to other source drawings, use this command again.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing if that drawing
currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
NOTE For information on using custom coordinate systems you defined in a
previous release of AutoCAD Map 3D, look up coordinate systems, updating in
the help index.
Coordinate system transformations may not work as expected on raster objects.
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the file names of drawings to which you want to
attach the coordinate system.
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing (page 146)
Click Map Setup tab Coordinate System panel Assign.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing files only. To assign a coordinate system
to geospatial feature sources to which you are connecting, see Changing
Coordinate Systems (page 311).
Look In
Select a drive alias from the list. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for
drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
Create/Edit Aliases
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click to define a new drive alias.
Preview
Click to display a preview of the selected drawing. If a drawing is locked,
the Preview window is blank.
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box | 1599
File List
Select a drawing in the current directory.
Filter
Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add
Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list. You can
change the drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings
list.
Remove
Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings
When you have added all the drawings you want, click OK.
Coordinate Tracker Options Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to set options for the coordinate tracker.
To specify coordinate tracker options (page 232)
Click Analyze tab Geo Tools panel Coordinate Track.
General Options
Display Coordinate System Descriptions
View a description of the coordinate system in the Track Coordinates Dialog
Box (page 1601).
Format Lat/Long as D,M,S
Display lat/long coordinates in degrees/minutes/seconds format.
MGRS Options
Set options for Military Grid Reference Systems (MGRS).
Include Square ID
View the square ID when tracking coordinates.
1600 | Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
Precision Level
Specify the level of precision to display.
Lettering Scheme
Specify the lettering scheme. AA (MGRS-New) is for use with the WGS84
datum. AL (MGRS-Old) is for use with older datums.
Digitization Location
Specify the digitization location within a given square: left top, center top,
right top, left center, center, right center, left bottom, center bottom, or
right bottom.
Track Coordinates Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to track coordinates in your map. You can add multiple
coordinate trackers to the Track Coordinates dialog box.
To track coordinates (page 1150)
Click Analyze tab Geo Tools panel Coordinate Track.
Coordinate Tracker toolbar
You can change the coordinate system of a coordinate tracker in the
drop-down list of the coordinate tracker toolbar.
Digitize: create a feature at the coordinates specified in the coordinate
tracker.
Options: specify coordinate tracker options.
Add Tracker: add another coordinate tracker to the Track Coordinates dialog
box.
Track Coordinates Dialog Box | 1601
Delete Tracker: remove a coordinate tracker form the Track Coordinates
dialog box.
Create Reference System Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create a reference system for a viewport in paper space.
To track coordinates (page 1150)
Click Layout Tools tab Reference System panel Create.
Reference System
Select the reference system you want to create: MGRS-AA or MGRS-AL.
Current Map Coordinate System
The coordinate system of the current map.
Current Scale
The view scale of the current map.
Scale
Select or enter the view scale at which the reference system displays.
Precision
Select the precision for the reference system. AutoCAD Map 3D will draw
grid lines at the precision level, and tick marks at the next level. For example,
a 1000 meter grid will have tick marks at every 100 meters.
1602 | Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box
Use this dialog box to join a table of attribute data to features in your map so
they have more properties. You can also edit an existing join.
To create a join (page 512)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Create A Join.
If a join exists, right-click a feature layer Manage Joins.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To connect drawing objects
to an external data source, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
(page 522).
Select the primary table (the feature layer) and the secondary table (the data to
join to the primary table, for example, an Access database). Select the columns
of data to use to link the tables (often referred to as join keys). Specify the type
of join, and the relationship between the primary and secondary records.
Primary Table Initiating The Join
The table to which you are joining secondary data, for example, the layer of
features.
Table (Or Feature Class) To Join To
Select the secondary table of attributes to join to the primary table. You must
connect to the secondary table before you can join to it.
See Bringing in GIS Features (page 303)
19
1603
This Column From The Left Table
Select the column(s) from the primary table that will link the primary table
to the secondary table.
Matches This Column From The Right Table
Select the column(s) from the secondary table that will link the tables. This
column does not have to have the same name as the column on the left
side, but it must have the same data type. Only columns with matching
data types are listed.
Type of Join
Select one of the following join types:
Keep All Records On The Left
Display features from the primary table in the map, even if there is no
matching value in the secondary table (a left outer join).
Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match
Do not display features from the primary table in the map if there is no
matching value in the secondary table (an inner join).
Relationship With Secondary Records (Cardinality)
Select one of the following:
One-To-One
Join one feature to one record in the secondary table, even if multiple records
in the secondary table exist.
One-To-Many
Allow one feature to have multiple secondary records associated with it.
Create Data Store dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new data store, which is a collection of feature
classes in a single storage location.
To create a data store for a database provider (page 588)
In Display Manager, click Data Connect To Data.
1604 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To set up new data sources
for drawing objects, see Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings (page
205).
Click OK to create the new data store with a default schema. You can edit the
resulting schema.
Data Store Name
Enter a name for the new data store.
Password
Enter a password.
Confirm Password
Enter your password again to confirm it.
Description
Enter a description for the new data store.
Data Store Coordinate System
Click [...] to select the coordinate system.
Data Store Extents
Enter the extents.
Storage Resolution
Enter the resolution.
Data Store Tablespace
Enter the tablespace.
Edit Spatial Contexts
Use this dialog box to change the spatial context for a data store, or to remove
any changes you made.
To change the coordinate system assigned to the data you are adding to a map
(page 311)
In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
Edit Spatial Contexts | 1605
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To change the
coordinate system for attached drawings, see Assigning a Coordinate System to
a Source Drawing (page 146).
Spatial Contexts
Select the entry to change.
Edit
Display the Select Coordinate System dialog box (page 1609), where you can
select a different coordinate system for your map.
Remove
Removes any overrides you applied to the selected entry.
Feature Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to view feature information for the selected object,
including feature source, schema, key value, and the current lock status.
Feature Source Scope
Use this dialog box to select the feature sources and classes to include in this
query or search.
For example, to limit the query or search to one class, select only that class.
Feature Source Administration dialog box
Use this dialog box to view and release feature source locks.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To lock or unlock
drawings, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730).
Feature Source
Select the feature source whose locks you want to review.
Feature Locks
Lists locked objects in the selected feature source.
To release a lock, select the object in the list and click Release Selected.
You can release locks only if you have appropriate rights in the feature
source.
1606 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
NOTE This dialog does not display objects in the edit set for the current drawing.
To remove locks for these objects, remove the objects from the edit set.
Feature Source Connection dialog box
Use this dialog box to connect to an attached feature source.
To bring in features from Oracle (page 314)
In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To attach drawings to
the current drawing, see Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 154).
Feature Source
Select a feature source to connect. The lists displays feature sources attached
to the current drawing.
TIP If the feature source you want is not listed, click Define and attach it to the
current drawing.
Properties
In the Value column, enter any connection information required to connect
to the selected feature source. Press Enter.
If you do not know the values to enter, contact your database administrator.
Manage Layer Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to modify, edit, and delete joins and calculations for a
selected primary table (layer of features).
To modify a join (page 515)
Feature Source Connection dialog box | 1607
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify
Manage Joins or Manage Calculations.
In the Data Table, click Options Manage Joins or Manage Calculations .
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial features only. To connect drawing objects
to an external data source, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
(page 522).
New
To create a new join, click New Join.
To create a new calculation, first select the layer whose properties will be
used for the calculation. Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple layers. Then
click New Calculation.
Edit
Select the item to modify and click Edit. You can edit only one item at a
time.
Delete
Select the items to delete and click Delete. Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple
layers.
Save Features dialog box
Use this dialog box to save modified features back to their feature source.
Objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature source.
If you right-clicked a single feature source and clicked Save, only objects in
the edit set for the selected feature source are saved. If you right-clicked the
Feature Sources node, all objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature
source.
Status
The number of objects that will be saved to the feature source. Click Show
to highlight the objects in the drawing.
Save Queried Features
Save edited objects back to the feature source.
Clear this check box to save only newly created objects to the feature source.
Save Newly Created Features
Save new objects to the feature source.
1608 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
TIP If the status does not list your newly created objects, be sure you have
added the objects to the edit set for this feature source.
Clear this check box to save only objects that were queried in from the
feature source.
Select Coordinate System dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the coordinate system of data you add to your
map. You must specify the original coordinate system for the data. AutoCAD
Map 3D automatically converts the data from that coordinate system to the
one specified for your map.
To change the coordinate system assigned to the data you are adding to a map
(page 311)
In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To change the
coordinate system for attached drawings, see Assigning a Coordinate System to
a Source Drawing (page 146).
Category
Select the set of coordinate systems in which the specific coordinate system
is stored.
Search
Search within the category for the coordinate system, using either its code
(for example, CA-I) or its description (for example, NAD27 California State
Planes, Zone I).
Coordinate Systems In Category
Scroll through the list or use Search to find and select a coordinate system
in the current category.
Properties
Display the datum, ellipsoid, projection, false origin, latitude and longitude
settings for the selected coordinate system.
Select Coordinate System dialog box | 1609
User Credentials dialog box
Use this dialog box to log in to data sources that require user credentials. If
you do not know your user name and password, check with your System
Administrator.
To access data through FDO (page 308)
In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. For information about
a multi-user environment for drawings, see Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
(page 730).
User Name
Enter your user name for this data source.
Password
Enter your password for this data source.
For SQL Server Spatial data stores, you can use either Windows or SQL Server
authentication. If you use Windows authentication, you do not need to
enter a user name or password. AutoCAD Map 3D uses your Windows
credentials.
Remember Password
Optionally, have AutoCAD Map 3D remember this user name and password
and log in whenever you open this map file.
View/Create Query Statement dialog box
Use this dialog box to view the current feature source filter statement.
To filter feature data when you add it to a map (page 310)
In Display Manager (page 2060), click Data Connect To Data.
1610 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. For information about
queries for drawings, see Overview of Finding and Querying Drawing Objects
(page 1218).
Query Statement
Enter the expression to use for filtering the data to add to the map.
For information on queries, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555)
View/Create Query Statement dialog box | 1611
1612
Data Table Dialog Box
Data Table dialog box
Use the Data Table (page 2059) much as you would a database spreadsheet.
To find and select features (page 1206)
In Display Manager or Map Explorer, click Table.
NOTE You can also access a specialized version of the Data Table from the
Survey tab on the Task Pane. For Survey data, the Data Table displays survey
point data, and is called the Points Table.
NOTE The Data Table displays geospatial feature data only. To view data connected
to drawing objects, see Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects (page 1146).
Columns Resize columns by dragging left or right.
Sort columns by clicking the column header. Arrow pointing up or down
indicates sort order.
Rows Resize rows by dragging up or down.
Data
Select a feature source or data table to view or edit.
Auto-Zoom
Automatically zoom to the map to the selected rows.
20
1613
Auto-Scroll
Automatically scroll the Data Table to the current selection in your map.
Filter by
Select a property to use to filter the Data Table, then type a value to use for
the filter and click Apply Filter .
Clear Filter
Double-click to remove the active filter and show all data for this feature
layer.
Row
Enter a row number to scroll the Data Table to that row. Currently selected
row numbers appear in this field.
Search to Select
Select features using a query.
Options
ExportExport the data from the selected row(s) to a text file (.csv).
Select AllSelect all rows in the Data Table.
Select NoneDeselect all rows in the Data Table.
Zoom ToZoom the map to the selected row.
Create A Join/Manage JoinsAdd, edit, or delete joins to external data
for the current feature layer.
NOTE You cannot create or manage joins for survey point data.
Create A Calculation/Manage CalculationsAdd, edit, or delete
calculated properties for this feature layer. A calculated property is based
on the current properties. The new property is not added to the original
data store, but is available in this map only.
NOTE You cannot create or manage calculations for survey point data.
Set Split and Merge RulesSpecify how properties will be assigned when
you split or merge features.
HelpOpen the Data Table help topic.
1614 | Chapter 20 Data Table Dialog Box
Digitizing Dialog Boxes
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)
Use this command to digitize nodes and linear objects with settings from
MAPDIGISETUP.
To digitize links and nodes (page 1081)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Digitize drop-down Digitize.
NOTE This command creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into
geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
Digitizing Nodes
Respond to the prompts:
Specify Insertion Point
Specify the location of the first node. Continue to specify nodes. When you
finish, press Enter.
Digitizing Linear Objects
Respond to the prompts:
From Point
Specify the starting point of the linear object.
21
1615
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint Of Line>
For information on this prompt, look up PLINE command in the help index.
Continue to specify linear objects. When you finish, press Enter twice.
Digitizing Setup
The specified nodes or linear objects are digitized using the settings specified
in the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1617).
Do this... If you selected this in the Digitize
Setup dialog box...
Enter the data values for each digitized
object.
Attach Data
Specify a label point for each digitized ob-
ject.
Prompt For Label Point
Enter a rotation in degrees. (Use the UNITS
command to view or change the current
direction.)
Prompt For Rotation
Enter a real number. For example, enter 2
to double the size of the block, or enter .5
to halve the size of the block.
Prompt For Scale
Data to Attach dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the type of data and the source for the data when
you attach data to node or linear objects as they are digitized.
To attach object data as you digitize (page 1083)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Digitize drop-down Digitize.
NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into
geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
1616 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Object Data Type
Select Object Datato use data in an object data table in the current drawing.
Select Database Link to use data in an external database.
Object Data Tables Name
If you are using data from an object data table, select the table.
Link Template
If you are using data from an external database, select the link template
associated with that database.
To associate databases to link templates, use the Define Link Template dialog
box (MAPDEFINELT) (page 1683).
Record Validation
As AutoCAD Map 3D digitizes your drawing, it prompts you for the key value
to associate with each object. Select the validation option to use.
NOTE To attach data to node or linear objects, make sure the Attach Data option
is selected on the Digitize Setup dialog box.
Validate
Check the database for the key value you specify. If AutoCAD Map 3D does
not find a match, it prompts you for a new key value.
Validate And Create
Check the database for the key value you specify. If AutoCAD Map 3D does
not find a match, it creates a new row in the database. You will be prompted
to enter information for all the columns in the new row.
No Validation
Associate the specified key value with the object whether or not the key
value matches a row in the database.
Digitize Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to set options for digitizing nodes and linear objects.
To set digitizing specifications (page 138)
Digitize Setup dialog box | 1617
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Digitize drop-down Digitize
Setup.
NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into
geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
Object Type
Select whether to digitize nodes (points or blocks) or linear objects
(polylines).
Attach Data
Attach object data to the digitized objects. Click Data To Attach to select
the data source and location.
When you digitize objects, you are prompted for the data for each object.
Prompt For Label Point
Change the default location of the label point for digitized objects. The
label point determines the location of text associated with the object during
queries.
As the objects are digitized, you are prompted for the new label point.
Node Object Settings
Specify settings for the node objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create On Layer
Specify the layer for new node objects. To select from a list of layers in the
drawing set, click Layers. To create a new layer, enter the layer name.
Block Name
Specify the block to reference when creating node objects. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. To use point
objects, use ACAD_POINT.
Prompt For Rotation
Specify the rotation for each block as it is digitized. If this option is not
selected, objects are not rotated. ACAD_POINT objects cannot be rotated.
Prompt For Scale
Specify the scale for each block as it is digitized. If this option is not selected,
the scale is set to 1. ACAD_POINT objects cannot be scaled.
1618 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Object Snap To End
Snap the location of the node object to the closest endpoint of an arc,
elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment or ray, or the closest corner of
a trace, solid, or 3D face.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
Linear Object Settings
Specify settings for the linear objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for new linear objects. To select from a list of layers in the
drawing set, click Layers. To create a new layer, enter the layer name.
Linetype
Specify the linetype for the linear objects. To select from a list of linetypes
in the drawing set, click Linetypes.
Elevation
Select 3D to have the linear objects support three dimensions.
Width
Enter the width of the polyline for 2D linear objects. You cannot specify a
width for 3D linear objects.
Object Snap To Insert
Snap the location of the new linear object to the insertion point of an
attribute, block, shape, or text.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
Link Template Data Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to add information to your external database as you attach
external database information to digitized objects. This dialog box appears
only if you selected the Validate And Create validation method. The Link
Template area lists the full path and table associated with the link template.
To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534)
At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
Link Template Data Entry dialog box | 1619
NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into
geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
Link Template
To edit an entry, highlight it, enter new value in the Column Value box,
and press Enter. When you finish updating values for an object, click OK.
To attach no additional data to the current object, click Cancel.
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to review or modify the external data that is attached to
digitized objects. The Link Template area lists the full path and table associated
with the link template, as well as the current validation method.
To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534)
At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
NOTE This process creates drawing objects. To convert the drawing objects into
geospatial feature data, see Overview of Publishing and Sharing (page 1357).
Link Template
To edit an entry, highlight it, enter new value in the Key Value box, and
press Enter. When you finish updating values for an entry, click OK. To
cancel the digitize operation, click Cancel.
1620 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Display Manager Dialog
Boxes
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command)
Use this command to turn on and off the display of the Display Library palette.
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command)
Use this command to load a display map, update the display, or turn on and
off the stylization of maps.
Respond to the prompts:
Display Manager [?/Load/Update/Stylization/eXit]
Do one of the following:
Enter ? to display the current settings for the Display Manager.
Enter l to load a display map.
Enter u to update the display of the current map.
Enter s to turn stylization on/off.
Enter x to exit the command.
22
1621
Alter Block Insertion dialog box
Use this dialog box to control how blocks are inserted for a specific range of
entities or for a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Name
Select a block from those already defined in the current drawing or click
to go to the Select Drawing File dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the block, or click to go to the Layer Properties
Manager dialog box.
Scale
Specify the scale for the block. Use positive numbers. For example, 2 doubles
the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate the blocks.
Alter Line Format dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the line formatting for a specific range of entities
or for a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
1622 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Linetype
Select a line type to represent the data values or click to go to the Select
Linetype dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the new lines, or click to go to the Layer Properties Manager
dialog box.
Width
Specify the width of the polylines in the thematic map.
To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines
with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765).
Alter Linetype dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a linetype for a specific range of entities or for a
specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Alter Linetype dialog box | 1623
Alter Lineweight dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a lineweight for a specific range of entities or for
a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Alter Plotstyle dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a plotstyle for a specific range of entities or for a
specific value in a theme from those already defined in the current drawing.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Copy Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy all the styles from an existing scale.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
1624 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Define Hatch dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the addition of hatching for a specific range of
entities or for a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Pattern
Select a hatch pattern from those already defined in the current drawing
or click to go to the Select Pattern dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the new hatch, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog
box.
Color
Specify the color of the hatch or click to go to the Select Color dialog box.
Scale
Specify the scale for the hatch pattern. Use positive numbers. For example,
2 doubles the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate hatch created for the thematic map.
Define Hatch dialog box | 1625
For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the
density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you
use, as shown in the following table and figure
Result Hatch Scale Plot Scale
Solid 1 to 500 1:2000
Lines clearly visible 2000
Sparse, occasional lines 15000
No hatch or one line only 20000
Solid 1 to 2500 1:10000
Lines clearly visible 10000
Sparse, occasional lines 75000
No hatch or one line only 100000
You can use solid fills at any scale to fill an enclosed area.
Define Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the addition of text for a specific range of entities
or for a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Style
Select a style for the text from those already defined in the current drawing
or click to go to the Text Style dialog box.
1626 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Layer
Select a layer for the new text, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog
box.
Insert Point
Select the point on objects to create new text. The default is labelpt.
Justification
Select the justification (left, right, center, middle) for text created for the
thematic map. The default is center.
Color
Specify the color of the text or click to go to the Select Color dialog box.
Height
Specify the height of the text.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate text created for the theme.
Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary
according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows
suitable text heights for different plot scales.
(Text Height) Required Text Height on Plot Plot Scale
2000 1 1:2000
1000 0.5
10000 1 1:10000
5000 0.5
Edit Text Instance dialog box
Specifies the text and style for individual text feature instances on annotation
layers.
To edit a text instance (page 1116)
Edit Text Instance dialog box | 1627
In the map, select the text feature, right-click it, and click Edit Text Instance.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To annotate geospatial
features, see Adding Labels to Features (page 1091).
Style changes made in this dialog box supersede the base style of the
annotation layer. To revert to the base style, you must remove the style
overrides. For more information about styling annotation layers, see Style
Text Layer dialog box (page 1640)
Specifies the text and the following text styles: font, bold, italic, underline,
overline, font size, and color.
Import Old Theme dialog box
Use this dialog box to import a theme or an entire thematic map definition
from the old thematic wizard into the Display Manager.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Map
Select the map definition.
Themes
If you are importing a single theme, select the theme. The theme is imported
as an element in the current Display Manager map.
After you import a theme into the Display Manager, you can edit it:
To edit the query used to select objects for the element, select the element
in the Display Manager. In the Properties palette, under Element Source,
select the Query field and click
To edit the theme style, right-click an element in the Display Manager.
Click Edit Theme.
1628 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
New Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new scale.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To define scale ranges
for geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
Range of Values dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the source of thematic data and partition it into
ranges.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To define scale ranges
for geospatial features, see Defining Scale Ranges (page 643).
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the data source
from the lists under Properties, Link Templates, Blocks, or Object Data.
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
New Scale dialog box | 1629
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Data Ranges area
Group Value By
Select a method for partitioning data values.
Optimal The optimal method groups data values based upon a determination
of the natural breaks in the data. Because the calculations are iterative, this
method quite literally finds the optimal sets of values in a group based upon
the position of values upon a number line. It is most useful for complex
non-uniform distributions where calculation time is less important than
the accuracy of grouping. This is the default method.
Quantile Divides the data so that each range contains an equal number of
values. Also known as equal count, this method is most appropriate where
the data values are linear (equally distributed).
Equal Interval Divides the data into a specified number of groups from the
minimum value to the maximum. Also known as equal step, this method
has the disadvantage that it may over generalize the data and place too
many values in one range and too few in another.
Standard Deviation This method calculates how far data values differ from
the arithmetic mean. It is most effective when the data approximates a
normal distribution (bell-shaped curve). This is rarely the case with
geographical data, but is fairly common when considering demographic
data. Because of this curve preference, standard deviations are best used
with an even number of groups. Standard deviations are often used to
emphasize how far a specific value is above or below the mean value.
Number
Select the number of ranges to create.
Precision
Specify the numeric precision. This option rounds the values up or down
to the decimal point you specify. Rounding only affects the range value
calculations and resulting range divisions. It does not affect the actual data
values stored in the data source. For more information, see Notes About
Precision below.
1630 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Use Thousands Separator
Adds a punctuation mark to separate the thousands in values such as
population data.
Find Ranges
Divides the data into ranges according to the parameters you entered.
Ranges Area
This area displays the data divided into ranges according to the parameters
you entered.
Notes About Precision
When numeric data is read into the AutoCAD Map 3D as part of thematic
mapping, it is stored as an eight byte floating point number. You may fine-tune
the formatting of these numbers by selecting a decimal precision or integer
rounding up.
For instance, suppose you have a number that was originally entered into a
database or into an object data field with the value 12.34. This number could
be displayed in several ways depending upon the format specified. Formats
that contain a decimal point will generate the specified number of digits to
the right of the decimal point. Formats without a decimal point will round
up. The following table will make this more clear.
Ouput Explanation Format
12.34 use two decimal points .01
12.4 use one decimal point .1
13 nearest whole number 1
20 nearest ten 10
100 nearest hundred 100
Select Display Element dialog box
Use this dialog box to select drawing elements on the Display Manager.
To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
(page 357)
Select Display Element dialog box | 1631
To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing (page
356)
To bring in drawing objects based on topology (page 367)
To add a raster image to the map (page 440)
To add a point cloud to your mapIn the Display Manager, click Data Add Point
Cloud Data From Index F... (page 376)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To work with geospatial
feature layers in the Display Manager, see Overview of the Display Manager (page
634).
When you select an item, such as a layer or a object class, a new layer is added
to the Display Manager and all objects in that item are added to the new layer.
If you select multiple items, for example two layers, then multiple layers are
added to the Display Manager.
List of Items
Select the items whose objects you will include in this element.
Feature Class
Lists all feature classes in the active Feature Definition file.
Layer
Lists all the layers in the current drawing. To select from layers in attached
drawings, create a property query (page 362).
Topology
Lists all topologies in the current drawing. If the selected topology is
unloaded when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Image
Lists all images in the current drawing. If the selected image is unloaded
when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Point Cloud
Lists all point cloud objects in the current drawing.
Group Selection
If you choose more than one item, you can select this option to group all
the new elements under one heading in the Display Manager. When
elements are grouped, you can easily turn off all the elements by turning
off the group.
1632 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Source Drawing Scope dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which drawings to include in the query.
To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page
364)
To bring in drawing objects based on location (page 359)
To bring in drawing objects based on object properties (page 362)
To create a drive alias (page 161)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Attach.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To filter geospatial feature
layers when you add them to your map, see Filtering Features When You Add
Them to a Map (page 309).
Click a drawing to select it. The icon is grayed out for unselected drawings.
If you select a nested drawing, its parent drawing is automatically selected.
If you deselect a parent drawing, all nested drawings are automatically
deselected.
You can select a parent drawing and deselect a child, but you cannot
deselect a parent and select a child.
If the drawing is attached using a drive alias, the drive alias name appears
in the file path.
Style Band dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the first and last color of the color ramp for
styling or theming your feature data. The color ramp will smoothly transition
from the first to last color.
To set styling options for polygon features (page 1172)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
Source Drawing Scope dialog box | 1633
NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see
Creating a Style (page 658).
Style Label dialog box
Use this dialog box to add and style labels for features.
To label features (page 1093)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To add labels to drawing objects,
see Overview of Annotation (page 1100).
Create A Label
Select the check box to turn on the labels.
NOTE If you are creating a theme, this check box does not appear. Instead,
check the Create Feature Labels check box in the Theme dialog box.
Multiline
Specifies that the label can have multiple lines of text, but no advanced
placement functionality. For all geometry types but lines, this is the only
option available.
Advanced Placement
For line features, specifies a single-line label which follows a path and shrinks
to fit. A single label is used for feature segments that have the same property
value.
Property To Display
Select a property or select Expression to define an expression for the label
text. For more information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
Font
Select a font from the list.
1634 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Size Context
Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units.
Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Select the type of units to use.
Size
Enter the text size or specify the size using an expression.
For more information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
Format
To apply bold, italic, or underlining, click one or more of the Format options.
Text Color
Select a text color.
Background Style
Select one of the following background styles:
Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use
Background Color to specify a color for the outline.
Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed as
rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color for
the rectangles.
Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are displayed
only as text on the map.
Background Color
For Ghosted and Opaque background styles, click a color in the Background
Color list.
Horizontal Alignment
Horizontal alignment is available for point layers with fixed labels instead
of symbols.
Vertical Alignment
Vertical alignment is available for labels on polyline layers.
Select one of the available positions or select a layer property that contains
alignment information for each feature.
Style Label dialog box | 1635
Rotation
Do one of the following:
Enter the amount to rotate the text.
Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in
the box. Click OK.
Click Expression. Specify the rotation using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area layers.
Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers. Horizontal and vertical
alignment settings are available for point layers that display fixed labels instead of
symbols. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations
(page 1098).
Style Line dialog box
Use this dialog box to create styles for line geometry.
To apply styles to lines (page 649)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see
Creating a Style (page 658).
Apply Styles To The Line
Select to apply styles to lines.
NOTE If you are creating a theme, this check box does not appear. Instead,
check the Theme The Lines check box in the Theme Lines dialog box.
Create Composite Lines/Reset To Single Line
Click to build up a composite line style. Style the first line in the composite.
Click New to add a new component to the line. Style the new component
as desired. Control the position of the selected component in the overall
1636 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
composite line by clicking the up and down arrows. Click Reset To Single
Line to style a single line.
Units (Device Space)
Select the type of units to measure line thickness. Lines are specified in
Device Space units.
Thickness
Specify polyline thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as
possible.
Color
Select a color.
Pattern
Select a pattern.
Style Point dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify symbols to represent and display point features.
To apply styles to points (page 646)
To place fixed labels at points (page 1099)
To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer (page 1097)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see
Creating a Style (page 658).
Style A Point Symbol
Select the check box to apply styles to points.
NOTE If you are creating a theme, this check box does not appear. Instead,
check the Create Feature Labels check box in the Theme Points dialog box.
Symbol
Symbols are AutoCAD blocks stored in dra wings. Click and navigate
to the drawing that contains the symbol to use.
Style Point dialog box | 1637
Size Context
Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units.
Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Select the type of units to use.
Width
Enter the symbol width or specify the width using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
Height
Enter the symbol height or specify the height using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox
To maintain width-to-height proportions when you change the width or
height of the symbol, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox.
Fill Color
To override the fill color of the symbol, select a color. If you do not specify
an override, the default fill color from the symbol is used.
Edge Color
To override the edge color of the symbol, select a color. If you do not specify
an override, the default edge color from the symbol is used.
Rotation
Do one of the following:
Enter the amount to rotate the text.
Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in
the box. Click OK.
Click Expression. Specify the rotation using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder (page 1555).
1638 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Style Polygon dialog box
Use this dialog box to create styles for polygon geometry.
To apply styles to areas (page 650)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
NOTE This functionality applies only to features. To style drawing objects, see
Creating a Style (page 658).
Apply Fill To The Area
Apply Fill To The Area
Select this check box to fill polygons.
NOTE If you are creating a theme, this check box does not appear. Instead,
check the Theme The Polygons check box in the Theme Polygons dialog box.
Fill Pattern
Select Solid or a pattern.
Foreground Transparency
For solid fills, specify Foreground Transparency if desired.
Foreground Color
For a non-thematic style, specify the Foreground Color for solid or pattern
fills.
Foreground Color Range
For themes, instead of a single foreground color, select one of the following:
Generated Between Two Colors: Select the first and last color for the
foreground. Intermediate colors are interpolated automatically.
Color Palette: Select a set of predefined color ranges.
Background Color
For non-thematic pattern fills, specify Background Color. If you do not
want a background color for the pattern, click Transparent.
Style Polygon dialog box | 1639
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on the
map may differ from the colors displayed in the Preview frame because the
Preview frame uses a white background, which may differ from the color beneath
the transparent objects in your map.
Background Color Range
For themes, instead of a single background color, select the first and last
color for the background. Intermediate colors are interpolated automatically.
Apply A Border To The Polygons
Apply A Border To The Area
Select to apply a border to polygons.
Line Pattern
Specify the pattern for the area border
Units (Device Space)
Select the type of units to use to measure border thickness.
Line Thickness
Specify border thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the border as thinly as
possible.
Line Color
Specify border color.
Style Text Layer dialog box
Specifies how text on the selected annotation is displayed.
To style a text layer (page 1112)
In Display Manager, right-click an annotation layer. Click Edit Style Style
field.
Size context
Select one of the following:
Device Space. Symbol widths and heights are in screen units. Available
units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
1640 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Map Space. Symbol widths and heights are in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Specify the units for the annotation layer.
Text Type
Select one of the following:
PlainFormats annotation text uniformly using the settings specified
for the layer in this dialog box. The text has no formatting information
itself.
MtextFormats annotation text as multiline. The settings specified for
the layer in this dialog box define the base formatting style. You can
override this formatting when you insert individual annotative text
features.
Click Edit Expression to specify an expression for this setting. Do not use
expressions for Text Type.
Text
Displays the name of a property in the feature source. Text for the
annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog box (page
1627) when you create the annotation. Click Edit Expression to specify an
expression for this setting.
For more information on inserting annotations, see Adding Text to a Text
Layer (page 1113).
Font Name
Specify the font for the annotation layer.
Font Size
Specify the font size for the annotation layer. Leave the
"NullValue(SIZE,number)" expression. The initial setting for font height is
in mapping units and is based on the existing view. Try the suggested height
and adjust the number as needed. If individual instances need a different
height, adjust the value in the SIZE column in the Data Table after you
insert the annotation instances.
Horizontal Alignment
Specify the horizontal alignment of the text. Click the expression to edit
it. Click Delete Expression to choose a value from a drop-down list.
Style Text Layer dialog box | 1641
Vertical Alignment
Specify the vertical alignment of the text. Click the expression to edit it.
Click Delete Expression to choose a value from a drop-down list.
Rotation
Specify the rotation of the text. Click the expression to edit it. Click Delete
Expression to choose a value from a drop-down list.
Preview
Displays a preview of the text with the specified styles applied.
Thematic Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the data you will use for the theme and the ways
in which you want to stylize the objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Data Values
Specify whether the data for this theme is a set of distinct, specific values, or
whether it is a set of values that can be broken into ranges. Then specify the
data to use.
Theme Type
Select one of the following:
A Set of Specific Values: Choose this option if each item in this element
has a distinct value, for example, different types of pipe material or land
use designations. This option is appropriate for string and integer data.
A Range of Numeric Values: Choose this option if the values can be
grouped into ranges, for example, property values, temperature, or
population. This is appropriate for numeric data only.
1642 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Values
Displays either the Thematic Values dialog box (page 1644) or the Range of
Values dialog box (page 1629), where you specify the data source to use for
the values and the specific values to use.
Thematic Details
Specify the properties to style and the styles for each range or value in this
theme.
Table
Select ways to style the objects.
In the column heading, select the check boxes for the properties to style.
Click a cell in a style column to edit the style for a specific value.
Click a cell in the Legend column to edit the text for each value in the
map legend.
To reverse the order of rows in the selected column, right-click a column
heading and click Flip. Flip is available for all columns except Values
and Legend.
To change the value of a particular range, click a cell in the Values
column and edit the number. To redefine all of the values, click the
Values button.
Hide Unused Columns
Hide any columns that are not selected.
Ramps
Select from a list of pre-built style sequences, for example a set of color
gradations, hatch patterns, or linestyles.
Scale Ramp to Fit
Divides the selected ramp sequence into equal intervals according to the
number of values. If you do not select this option, the ramp styles are applied
in sequence, up to the number of values that you have.
Thematic Mapping dialog box | 1643
Thematic Values dialog box
Use this dialog box (from the Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1642)) to
specify the source of thematic data and then select one or more discrete values
from that data.
To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 1181)
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style Theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To theme geospatial
features, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the source of
the data to use.
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Select Specific Values area
Shows the values read from the data source, together with the number of
occurrences (Count). Select the value(s) to appear in the thematic map. To
quickly select all the values, right-click and choose Select All.
1644 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Theme dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a theme for a feature source layer, based on a
range of conditions. The title of the dialog box changes, depending on the
type of geometry in the feature you are theming.
To create a theme for a feature layer (page 1168)
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer Edit Style.
NOTE This functionality applies only to geospatial features. To theme drawing
objects, see Overview of Theming Drawing Data (page 1176).
A theme is a collection of rules. Each rule specifies a style and feature label
for the features that meet the specified condition. You can add a legend label
to provide a description of a rules condition.
Create Thematic Rules Based On A Property
Property
Select the property on which to base the theme.
Minimum Value
Specify the minimum value for the range.
Maximum Value
Specify the maximum value for the range.
The first rule includes the Minimum Value and the last rule includes the
Maximum Value. Styles are interpolated across the range.
Distribution
Select a method. For more information, see Theming Features (page 1165).
Number of Rules
Specify the number of ranges to create if Distribution Method is Equal,
Quantile, or Jenks (Natural Breaks). Properties containing strings use an
Individual Values distribution that does not allow the number of rules to
be edited. Adjust the number of rules to control the coarseness of the theme.
For more information about distribution methods, see Theming Features
(page 1165).
Theme dialog box | 1645
Replace Existing Rules
Specify whether new ranges replace existing rules (ranges) or are added
before or after existing rules.
Theme The Polygons/Lines/Points
Select the Theme The Polygons/Lines/Pointscheck box to use a different style
for each rule of the theme. The first rule uses the From style and the last rule
uses the To style. Styles are interpolated across the range.
Style Range
Click . The Style Point dialog box (page 1637), Style Line dialog box (page
1636), or Style Polygon dialog box (page 1639) is displayed, depending on the
type of data associated with the layer.
Create Legend Labels
Select the Create Legend Labels check box to label the theme in the legend.
Legend Text
Enter the text to appear next to each rule in the legend
Legend Format
Specify how to display the legend label.
If you theme a layer on a property that contained area information and you
used the label text Area:, the label formats might look like the following
examples:
<Label Text> <Min> to <Max>
Area: 100 to 200
<Label Text> <Min> - <Max>
Area: 100 - 200
<Min> <= <Label Text> <<Max>
100 <= Area < 200
Create Feature Labels
Select the Create Feature Labels check box to add labels to the features in your
theme. The label is placed near the line, point symbol, or polygon.
Label Ramp
Click to specify the property to display, font, size, format, color,
background style and color, alignment, and rotation of the labels. For more
information, see the Style Label dialog box (page 1634).
1646 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command)
Use this command to fill a closed polyline with a color.
To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch (page 939)
NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To style polygonal geospatial
features, see Styling Area Features (page 650).
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>:
Enter s to select individual objects, or l to fill all objects on a layer.
Select objects/Layer to fill:
Select the individual objects you want to fill, or enter the name of a layer.
Color to fill <Bylayer>:
Enter the name of a color, such as RED.
The selected closed polylines are filled with a solid hatch. To display text or
other objects on top of the hatch, use the DRAWORDER command.
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative.
23
1647
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command)
Use this command to get two or more data sets from different sources to align
geographically: for example, when stretching a new subdivision map into a
preexisting parcel map.
To rubber sheet two maps (page 935)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Rubber Sheet.
WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when it is absolutely necessary because it
can severely compromise the accuracy of your data.
NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To edit geospatial features, see
Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715).
Respond to the prompts:
Base point 1:
Specify a point.
Reference point 1:
Specify the new location for the first point.
Base point 2:
Specify another point. When you finish specifying points, press Enter. Keep
in mind that the more points you enter, the more accurate the results will
be.
Select objects by <Area>/Select:
Enter a to select all objects in the polygon, or enter s to select objects
individually.
Objects wholly within the original polygon are modified to fit the new shape
and location of the polygon.
1648 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
When selecting points for rubber sheeting, select points in order around the
perimeter of the object or region to be rubber sheeted.
incorrect correct
The selected points are treated as the vertices of a polygon, so you will get
better results if you select the points sequentially around the perimeter.
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command)
Use this command to move, rotate, and scale a single object or a group of
objects. (To transform an entire source drawing while it is active, use the
transformation options in the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923).
To move, rotate, or scale an object (page 931)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Transform.
NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To edit geospatial features, see
Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715).
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>:
Enter S to select objects or enter L to choose all objects on a layer.
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) | 1649
Select objects:
Use any AutoCAD selection method to select the objects you want to
transform. If you chose Layer, enter the names of the layers you want to
transform. You can use wild-card characters such as * and ? to select a set
of layers.
First source point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
First destination point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point. Objects
are translated the relative distance between the first source point and this
new point.
Second source point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
Second destination point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
Source and Destination Points
The difference between the first source point and the first destination point
is the offset for the selected objects.
The difference in angle between the two source points and the two destination
points is the rotation.
The ratio of the length between the two destination points to the length
between the two source points is the change in scale.
1650 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
MAPCOGO
The MAPCOGO command calls the COGO Input dialog box (page 1668), which
allows you to create points using coordinate geometry data.
To create a point using the COGO Input dialog box (page 1028)
MAPFEATUREMERGE
NOTE This command must be used with at least one feature.
Use this command to merge features and assign feature property values for
resulting features.
When you merge features, the resulting feature property values are determined
by rules you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669).
To merge features (page 710)
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Merge Feature.
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit polygonal drawing
objects, see Working with Polygon Objects (page 954).
Respond to the prompts:
Select features to merge:
Select at least two objects to merge, one of which must be a feature. Press
ENTER when you are done selecting the feature or features you want to
merge.
Specify Feature ID for use [Select/New] <Select>:
Specify whether you want to select the feature that has the feature ID you
want to use or you want to create a new feature ID.
Select
Select the feature that has the ID to use for the merged feature.
MAPCOGO | 1651
New
Create a new feature ID for the merged feature.
MAPFEATURESPLIT
Use this command to split geospatial features and assign feature property
values for resulting features.
When you split a feature, the resulting feature property values are determined
by rules you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669).
You can set defaults for the split prompts in the Feature Editing Options dialog
box (page 1929). You can also turn off two of the prompts, so that split operations
use the values set in that dialog box instead.
To split a feature (page 708)
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Split Feature.
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To split polygonal drawing
objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968).
Respond to the prompts:
Select one or more linear or polygonal features to split:
Select one or more linear or polygonal features in your map to split. Press
ENTER when you are done selecting the feature or features you want to
split.
Create a new or multi-part [New/Multipart] feature:
Specify whether you want the feature or features split into two or more
than two features.
New
Creates two new features.
Multipart
Creates multiple features.
1652 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Generate new feature ID or use existing [New/Existing] <New>:
Specify whether you want the new feature to use the existing feature ID or
a new one.
Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Select/Draw]:
Select or draw a split line. If you use a polyline as your split line, make sure
it intersects with feature geometry you are splitting. You can also used a
closed polyline.
If you use a polygon (or mpolygon) to split a feature, the part that falls
outside of the polygon becomes one feature, and the part that falls inside
the polygon becomes another feature.
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Use this command to specify whether or not feature property values are
calculated based on the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box
(page 1669).
To turn Ignore Split And Merge Rules on or off (page 708)
In the Data Table, click Options Set Split and Merge Rules.
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Split Feature.
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Merge Feature.
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To split polygonal drawing
objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968).
The rules affect the following commands:
Split (MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652))
Merge (MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Overlay (page 1563)
JOIN
Join option of PEDIT
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES | 1653
BREAK
TRIM
Even when MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES is set to Yes, the following default
rules are applied when splitting or merging features. For more information
about these rules, see Split and Merge Rules dialog box (page 1669)
Default Merge Rule Default Split Rule Property Type
First Selected Copy String
Sum Copy Integer (Int)
Sum Copy Double
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
Use this command to create a new LineString geospatial feature on a layer
that contains LineString feature data.
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature (page 691)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create linear drawing
objects, see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
The MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
1654 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT
Use this command to edit a LineString geospatial feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit linear drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
The MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the LineString, connecting the last segment
with the first. The LineString is considered open unless you close it using the
Close option. If the LineString is closed the first option is Open.
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT | 1655
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed
unless you open it using the Open option. If the LineString is open the first
option is Closed.
Join
Joins two open LineStrings into one. The ends must be touching.
Select objects:
Select the two LineStrings to be joined.
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the LineString by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction.
Next/Previous/Insert/Move/eXit] <Next>:
Enter an option. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT.
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the edit session.
Exit
Ends the MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
Use this command to create a new MultiLineString feature on a layer that
contains line feature data. A MultiLineString is a set of LineStrings that behave
as one feature. When you complete the first LineString you are prompted to
begin another one until you have created the set.
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature (page 691)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create linear drawing
objects, see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE
command. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE.
Respond to the prompts:
1656 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Specify start point
Specify a starting point for the first LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]
Specify the next point or enter an option.
LineString/eXit <eXit>:
Create another LineString or exit the command.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
LineString
Begins the MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command so you can create another
LineString.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE | 1657
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
Use this command to edit a MultiLineString geospatial feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit linear drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds a new LineString to the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1654).
Delete
Deletes a LineString from the MultiLineString.
Move
Moves a LineString in the MultiLineString.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected LineStrings are to be
moved and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a LineString in the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1655).
1658 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
Use this command to create a new MultiPoint geospatial feature on a layer
that contains point feature data. A MultiPoint feature is a set of points that
behave as one feature. When you complete the first point you are prompted
to begin another one until you have created the set.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature (page 688)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
Respond to the prompts.
Specify a point:
Specify the location of the new MultiPoint feature.
Specify a point or [Undo]:
Specify the location of the next point or undo the last point.
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT
Use this command to edit a MultiPoint geospatial feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit drawing objects, see
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
Respond to the prompts:
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE | 1659
Add
Adds a new point to the MultiPoint feature. For more information, see
MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1663).
Delete
Deletes a point from the MultiPoint feature.
Move
Moves a point in the MultiPoint feature.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected points are to be moved
and in what direction.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
Use this command to create a new MultiPolygon geospatial feature on a layer
that contains polygon feature data. A MultiPolygon is a set of polygons that
behave as one feature. When you complete the first polygon you are prompted
to begin another one until you have created the set.
NOTE You cannot create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must be
planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature (page 689)
1660 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with
Polygon Objects (page 954).
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the MultiPolygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Polygon
Begins the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command so you can create another
polygon.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE | 1661
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
Use this command to edit a MultiPolygon feature.
NOTE You cannot perform edits that would create a non-planar polygon. Every
ring of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same
plane.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit drawing objects, see
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with Polygon
Objects (page 954).
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/addRing/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds a new polygon to the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1663).
Addring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Specify the polygon to which you will add the ring. Repeats the
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Delete
Deletes a polygon from the MultiPolygon.
Move
Moves a polygon in the MultiPolygon.
1662 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a polygon in the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1665).
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
MAPPOINTCREATE
Use this command to create a new point feature on a layer that contains point
feature data.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature (page 688)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727).
Respond to the prompt.
Specify a point:
Specify the location of the new point feature.
MAPPOLYGONCREATE
Use this command to create a new polygon feature on a layer that contains
polygon feature data.
MAPPOINTCREATE | 1663
NOTE You cannot create a non-planar polygon. Every ring of a polygon must be
planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same plane.
The MAPPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command. For
more information about the prompts, see PLINE.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature (page 689)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To create drawing objects,
see Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with
Polygon Objects (page 954).
Respond to the prompts.
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the polygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
1664 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT
Use this command to edit a polygon geospatial feature.
NOTE You cannot perform edits that would create a non-planar polygon. Every
ring of a polygon must be planar and all parts and all rings must be in the same
plane.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 705)
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To edit drawing objects, see
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects (page 727) and Working with Polygon
Objects (page 954).
The MAPPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds an outer polygon or a ring or island to the selected polygon. For more
information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1663).
Delete
Deletes the outermost polygon or rings or islands from the selected polygon.
Move
Moves the outermost polygon or rings or islands in the selected polygon.
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT | 1665
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a vertex on the outer ring or an island or hole. For more information,
see MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1655).
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a clean map edge by cutting lines, 2D polylines,
arcs, and circles that cross a specified edge.
To break objects at a boundary (page 941)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Boundary Break.
NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To split geospatial features, see
Splitting Features (page 705).
Before
1666 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
After
Boundaries
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings
Use the save back extents specified by the drawing settings for the current
drawing. To change the save back extents, use the Drawing Settings dialog
box.
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings Define/Modify Drawing Set. In
the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1918), click Drawing Settings.
Select Boundaries
Use existing objects as the boundary. Click Select to select the objects to
use.
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. Click Define to select points
to delineate the boundary.
Objects to Break
Select the objects to break.
Select Automatically
Use all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Use only selected objects. Click Select to select the objects to break.
Filter Selected Objects
Select only objects that are on the specified layers or blocks. These filters
are used for both automatic and manual selection of objects.
Filter On Layers
Break only objects on the selected layers. Click Layers to select from a list
of all available layers in the current drawing.
Break Method
Select the objects to skip or object data to retain during a break operation.
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box | 1667
Skip Topology Objects
Protect topology data. Objects with topology data are not broken.
Retain Object Data
Save object data from the original object. The data is duplicated on each
new piece.
COGO Input dialog box
The COGO Input dialog box allows you to create points using coordinate
geometry data. It also allows you to run an inverse report to determine the
relationship between two points.
To create a point using the COGO Input dialog box (page 1028)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel COGO Input.
Routines
Select the COGO routine to use:
Angle/Distance: specify a point by specifying an angle and a distance
from another point.
Azimuth/Distance: specify a point by specifying azimuth and distance
from another point. Azimuth is the clockwise angle from the North(or
South) meridian.
Bearing/Bearing: specify a point using the projections from two existing
lines or points and two bearings.
Bearing/Distance: specify a point by specifying a bearing and a distance
from another point.
Deflection/Distance: specify a point by specifying a deflection angle and
a distance from another point.
Distance/Distance: calculated a new point using two points and two
distances to the new point. You must select one of the two calculated
points.
1668 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Inverse Report: An inverse report gives you information about the
relationship between two points.
Orthogonal/Offset: specify a point using distance and offset from an
existing line.
Input
Enter the required input for your chosen routine.
Calculate
Calculates the point based on the selected coordinate geometry routine and
input.
Result
Displays the coordinates of the new point.
Zoom to the created point in the drawing window.
Report
For Inverse Report only: view the results of the inverse report.
Create Point
Create the point and close the COGO Input dialog box.
OK
For Inverse Report only: close the COGO Input dialog box.
Cancel
Close the COGO Input dialog box without creating a point.
Split and Merge Rules dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how class property values are calculated when
you use the following commands on features.
Split (MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652))
Merge (MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Overlay (page 1563)
JOIN
Split and Merge Rules dialog box | 1669
Join option of PEDIT
BREAK
TRIM
To create split/merge rules using expressions
In the Data Table, click Options Set Split And Merge Rules.
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Merge Feature.
Click Feature Edit tab Split/Merge panel Split Feature.
NOTE This command is for geospatial features only. To split polygonal drawing
objects, see Splitting Polygon Objects (page 968).
Feature Properties
Click a property to see its attributes and set its rules. Right-click a property
to select multiple properties or property types. You cannot set rules for
properties that are read-only.
Property Attributes
Attribute information for the selected property or properties.
Split and Merge Rules
Specifies how class property values will be calculated when features are split
or merged.
Split Rule
Specify the rule for calculating class property values when you split features.
Calculation. For numeric properties, set the property value based on a
custom calculation specified in the Expression field.
Copy. Copy the property values to each new feature. (Default)
Divide. Divide the property values equally into each new feature.
(Numeric properties only)
Empty. Set the property values to empty or a default for new features.
The original feature retains the original property values.
1670 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Expression. Specify an expression.
Proportional. Distribute the property values proportionally into each
new feature based on the numeric value in the Based On field.
Expression
Specify a custom calculation. Enter the expression for the calculation, or
click to use the Split Rule Expression dialog box.
This option is displayed when the Split Rule is set to Calculation or when
the selected property is a string. For more information, see Overview of
Expressions for Geospatial Features.
Based On
Specify the value the Proportional rule uses to distribute the property values.
This option is displayed when Split Rule is set to Proportional.
Merge Rule
Specify the rule for calculating class property values when you merge
features.
Average. Average the property values from the merged features. (Numeric
properties only)
Calculation. Set the property value based on a custom calculation
specified in the Expression field.
Concatenation. Join the values to form a single string separated by the
text in the Separator Text field.
Count. Gives the property the value of the total number of features
merged to produce it. This option is for numeric values only.
Empty. Set the property value to empty or a default for the merged
feature.
Expression. Specify an expression.
First Selected. Use the value of the first selected feature.
Last Selected. Use the value of the last selected feature.
Maximum.Use the maximum property value of the merged features.
Median. Use the median value of the merged features.
Minimum. Use the minimum value of the merged features
Split and Merge Rules dialog box | 1671
Standard Deviation. Use the standard deviation of the merged features.
Sum. Use the sum of the values of the merged features.
Expression
Specify a custom expression. Enter the expression, or click to use the
Split Rule Expression dialog box.
This option is displayed when the Merge Rule is set to Calculation or when
the selected property is a string. For more information, see Overview of
Expressions for Geospatial Features.
Separator Text
Specify the text that separates the property values when you select the
Concatenation merge rule.
Trim Objects At Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to trim objects at a specified boundary, excluding either
what is inside the boundary (Trim Inside Boundary), or what is outside (Trim
Outside Boundary). The trimmed objects are created new in the current drawing
and do not retain links to their source drawings.
To trim objects inside a boundary (page 945)
Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Boundary Trim.
NOTE This command is for drawing objects only. To edit geospatial features, see
Extracting Feature Geometry (page 715).
Trim Inside / Trim Outside
Given some drawing data...
1672 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Trim Inside / Trim Outside
And a trim boundary...
Trim Inside looks like this...
And Trim Outside looks like this...
Boundary
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Reference Last Query Boundary
Use the last spatial boundary that was referenced in a query.
Select Boundary
Use an existing object as the boundary. Click Select to select a closed polyline
or circle for the boundary.
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. Click Define to select at least
three points for the boundary. The boundary cannot cross itself.
Objects to Trim
Select the objects to trim.
Select Automatically
Trim all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Trim only selected objects. Click Select to select the objects to trim.
Filter Selected Objects
Select only objects that are on the specified layers or blocks. These filters
are used for both automatic and manual selection.
Trim Objects At Boundary dialog box | 1673
Filter On Layers
Trim only objects on selected layers. Click Layers to select from the layers
in the current drawing. If circle objects cross the selected boundary, they
are converted to arcs before they are trimmed.
Trim Method
Set rules for the trim operation.
Trim Inside/Outside Boundary
Specify whether to trim all objects inside the specified boundary and cut a
hole in the drawing, or whether to trim all objects outside the boundary
and create a neat border.
Skip Topology Objects
Protect topology data. Objects with topology data are not trimmed.
Retain Object Data
Duplicate object data and external database links on each piece of the
trimmed object. If you clear this option, the data remains attached only to
the original location.
Objects That Cannot Be Trimmed
Specify what to do with objects that cannot be trimmed, such as text.
Ignore
Do not delete the objects.
Delete
Delete the objects.
Reference Insertion Point
Delete an object only if its insertion point is inside the area to trim.
1674 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
External Databases Dialog
Boxes
Associate Database Versions dialog box
Use this dialog box to set options related to database versions and file extensions.
To associate database versions with files extensions (page 243)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel angle-arrow.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
You can associate a database file extension with the version of the database
software that you use to edit the file. When you drop a database file on the Map
Explorer tab of the Task Pane, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the file extension and
uses the specified version of the database software.
Always Prompt
Select this option if you use more than one type of database. Each time you
drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD Map 3D will prompt
for the version of the database software to use with the file.
24
1675
Always Use
Select this option if you akways use one type of database. When you drop
a database file onto the Map Explorer, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the specified
version of the database software.
For example, if all your dBASE files are in dBASE III format, select Always
Use, and then select dBASE III from the list. If you have files in both dBASE
III and dBASE IV format, select Always Prompt under dBASE/FoxPro.
For files created with Excel 95, select the Excel 7.0 driver.
Column dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify column display options for Data View.
To change the formatting of cells in a column in Data View (page 1058)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel angle-arrow.
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
By default, your formatting changes are saved with the current drawing.
Whenever you open this table from this drawing, the table uses the saved
formatting. If you do not want to save the formatting, clear the Save Format
And Style Changes With Drawing option on the Data Source tab of the
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908). If this option is cleared, AutoCAD
Map 3D erases formatting information when you close a table. When you
detach a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D erases formatting information for all
tables in that data source.
If you modify table column order outside of the Data View, the Data View
formatting may no longer be correct. To clear the formatting for a single table,
close the table when the Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing option
is cleared. To clear the formatting for all tables in a data source, detach the
data source.
Use the Font tab to specify text options for the selected column.
Use the Interior Pattern tab to specify the background of cells in the selected
column.
1676 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Use the Borders tab to specify borders for the selected column.
Use the Align tab to specify text alignment for the selected column.
Font tab
Font
Select a font from the list of fonts installed on your system. Row height
adjusts automatically for the font size.
Outline
Select a font style. Available styles are determined by the selected font.
Size
Select a font size. Available sizes are determined by the selected font.
Effects
Select Strikeout to print hyphens through the text. Select Underline to
underline the text.
Text Color
Select a color for the text.
Preview
Preview your font options.
Color tab
Interior Pattern
Select a pattern. For no pattern, select the asterisks.
Foreground
Specify the color for the foreground of the pattern. Select a color that doesn't
hide the text.
Background
Specify the color for the background of the pattern. Select a color that
doesn't hide the text.
3D-Effect
Select a 3D effect for the cell.
Preview
Preview your pattern and 3D effects options.
Column dialog box | 1677
Borders tab
Border
Click in a box to select a border for the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of each
cell in the column. The border uses the currently selected line type.
Type
Click a line type to select it.
Color
Select a color for the border.
Align tab
Horizontal
Align text on the left of the cell, the right of the cell, or in the horizontal
center of the cell. Select Standard to right-align numeric fields and left-align
all other fields.
Vertical
Align text with the top of the cell, the bottom of the cell, or in the vertical
center of the cell.
Wrap Text
Allow text to wrap in the cell. If this option is not selected, text that is too
long is not displayed or printed.
Allow Enter
Specify that pressing Enter clears the cell. If this option is not selected,
pressing Enter moves to the next cell.
Auto Size
Automatically adjust the column width to the longest value in the column.
Column Values dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify values for a SQL filter in the Data View.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 1231)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
1678 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
Scroll through the list, select the value you want, and click OK. The new value
is inserted into the Value field.
Configure Data Source dialog box
Use this dialog box to enter a name for a new data source or select an existing
data source from the list.
To configure a data source automatically (page 213)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Configure Data Source.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Click OK to define or modify a data link file for the data source in the Microsoft
Windows Data Link Properties dialog box. If the data source you want is not
listed, it may not be in the data sources folder.
For more information on configuring a data source, refer to your Microsoft
Windows documentation.
NOTE If you modify a data source that is currently connected, the changes will
not take effect until you reconnect the data source.
Connect Data Source dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a data source to connect.
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane (page
209)
Configure Data Source dialog box | 1679
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Connect To External
Records.
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Disconnect From Ex-
ternal Records.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
These data sources are attached to the current drawing but are currently
disconnected. Select data sources from the list. Click Connect. If the data
source you want is not listed, it may not be attached to this drawing.
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
Use this dialog box to convert object data in your drawing to external data.
To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534)
To link records to objects using object data automatically (page 531)
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane (page
209)
At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
NOTE Before you run this command, you must attach the data source to the
current drawing. In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources Attach.
Do either of the following:
Create a database table from an existing object data table, using the same
structure.
1680 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
AutoCAD Map 3D reads each selected object and creates a new record in
the external database table. If an object has multiple records from the
object data table, AutoCAD Map 3D creates multiple records in the external
database table. AutoCAD Map 3D also generates a database link to connect
the object to the record in the new database table.
Use object data in your drawing that matches information in an external
database table and automatically create links based on the matched
information.
You can leave the object data in the drawing or remove the object data from
the objects as each record is created.
When you are finished with this dialog box, click Proceed.
Source Object Data Table
Select the object data table to convert or link. Select an object data table defined
in the current drawing. To work with object data tables in attached drawings,
open those drawings directly.
Name
Select the object data table from the list.
Remove Data From Objects Processed
Delete the object data currently associated with the object.
Target Link Template
Select an option and click Define to specify the link template.
Convert Object Data To Database
Convert object data to records in a database and link objects to the new
data.
Link Object Data To Database
Link objects with attached object data to records in a database table using
key fields.
Define
Specify the link template to identify the database table.
Object Selection
Specify how to select objects, and whether to select all objects or only objects
on specific AutoCAD layers.
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box | 1681
Select Automatically
Use all objects, unless Filter On Layers is selected.
Select Manually
Select individual objects. Click Select to pick them in the map.
Filter On Layers
Search all layers, or click Layers to select from a list of AutoCAD layers in
the current drawing.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE)
Use this dialog box to specify the table name for the new database table and
to define the link template that identifies the database table.
To create a link template (page 526)
At the Command prompt, enter mapod2ase.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Data Source
Select a data source from the list. If it is checked, you are connected to the
data source. If you are not connected, click Connect.
Catalog/Schema
Select a catalog and schema from the list, if required by this data source.
Table Name
Specify a unique name for the link template.
Key Columns
Specify the columns to use as key columns. Separate multiple names with
commas. To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to
rename the fields, click Select.
Clicking Select displays the Select Link Template Key dialog box (page 1797).
1682 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Link Template
Specify a unique link template name.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
Use this dialog box to define the location of a table and the columns to use
as key columns for a link template.
To convert object data to a linked database table (page 534)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Define Link Template.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
If you use the same table and key columns for multiple drawings, specify a
consistent naming scheme for link templates.
Data Source list
Select one of the attached and connected data sources in the current
drawing. If you open the dialog box from an existing table, you can select
the data source for the table.
Table Name list
Select a table for the selected data source. If you open the dialog from an
existing table, you can select the table name.
Link Template box
Enter a new name. Link templates defined for the selected table are listed.
Key Selection area
To select a column as a key column, click a box in the Key column. The
values in the key column identify records in the table, so select a column
or set of columns that has a unique value for each record.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) | 1683
Source dialog box
Use this dialog box to view all data sources attached to the current drawing.
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane (page
209)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Attach Data Source.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Select the data sources. Click Detach. The selected data sources are disconnected
and removed from the current drawing.
Disconnect Data Source dialog box
Use this dialog box to view data sources that are attached to the current
drawing and are currently connected.
To disconnect a data source (page 215)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Disconnect From Ex-
ternal Records.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Select the data sources. Click Disconnect. Disconnected data sources remain
attached to the current drawing. If the data source you want is not listed, it
may not be attached to this drawing or it may not be currently connected.
1684 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Header/Footer dialog box
Use this dialog box to define the header and footer for a Data View report.
To specify the header and footer (page 1476)
In the Data View: File Header and Footer
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
Select the Header or Footer tab and enter the text. To change the font, select
a cell and click Font. In the Font dialog box, select formatting options for all
text in the cell.
You can also enter certain variables.
Replaced with at print time Variable
Application name $A
Current page number $P
Total number of pages $N
Current date $D
Distance to Frame
Dimensions are in centimeters if your Windows system-wide measurement
system is set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the
measurement system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional
Settings Number tab Measurement System.
Header
Specify the distance from the top margin to the bottom of the header text.
Footer
Specify the distance from the bottom margin to the top of the footer text.
Header/Footer dialog box | 1685
First Page No.
Enter the starting page number. Additional pages are numbered
consecutively.
Link Template Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the width of the Column Name or Data Type
columns.
To edit the database path in a link template (page 539)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Edit Link Template
Properties.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Drag the column divider to the desired width.
Page Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify margins, headers, grid, print order, and centering
options for printing from Data View.
To set print options (page 1476)
In the Data View: File Page Setup
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
1686 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Margins
Margin dimensions are in centimeters if your Windows system-wide
measurement system is set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or
set the measurement system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional
Settings Number tab Measurement System.
Left
Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the beginning of each
line.
Right
Enter the distance from the right edge of the paper to the end of the
printable area.
Top
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the top of the first line.
Bottom
Enter the distance from the bottom of the paper to the bottom of the last
line.
Titles and Grid Lines
Row Headers
Print row headers.
Column Headers
Print column headers.
Print Frame
Print a frame around the table.
Vertical Lines
Print vertical lines between each column.
Horizontal Lines
Print horizontal lines between each row.
Only Black And White
Print using only black and white. Text that has a color assigned to it will
be printed using a pattern.
Page Order
If a table extends beyond the limits of a single page, it is divided into page-size
tiles. This setting governs the order of printing the tiles.
Page Setup dialog box | 1687
First Rows, Then Columns
Print tiles from left to right by rows, top row first.
First Columns, Then Rows
Print tiles from top to bottom by columns, left column first.
Center on Page
Vertical
Center the table between the specified top and bottom margins.
Horizontal
Center the table between the specified left and right margins.
Select Database Version dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the database to use with this file from the list of
available databases.
To set data source options (page 236)
Click Options.
Click Map Setup tab Map panel angle-arrow.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Always Use This Database For Files Of This Type
Use the selected database version for all databases with this extension. You
will not be prompted again. To turn prompting back on, change the setting
on the Data Source tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
To specify default database versions for other extensions, use the Data Source
tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
1688 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Select Existing Link Template dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the appropriate link template, specify the key
fields in the object data to use, and then select a database validation option.
To open a linked database table (page 527)
At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
The list of link templates include those available for the current drawing.
Link Template
Select a link template for the database table containing the data matching
your object data table. In the OD Column, specify the fields in the object data
table to use for key fields.
Database Validation
Select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Record Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. If you choose
this option, you can use the grid below to map data from fields in the object
data table to non-key fields in the database.
Select Existing Link Template dialog box | 1689
Select Link Template dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the appropriate data source and then select the
link template.
To open a linked database table (page 527)
At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Select from the data sources and link templates available for the current
drawing
Select Link Templates dialog box
Use this dialog box to select link templates to delete.
To delete links for a group of objects (page 537)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Link Manager.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
If you are deleting links or link templates for selected objects, the list includes
link templates for records linked to the selected objects. Once you select the
link templates and click OK, link data associated with the selected link
templates is removed from the selected objects.
1690 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Select Query dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the query whose records you want to view.
To open a table using the Task Pane (page 1053)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Execute Query.
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Select the appropriate data source and then select the query. A Data View
window displays the records that match the query.
NOTE You cannot edit the data resulting from a database query.
Data Source
Select from the data sources currently attached and connected to the current
drawing.
Query
Select from the queries associated with the selected data source. These
queries were defined in the external database program.
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)
Use this dialog box to select a data table to view or edit.
To open a table using the Task Pane (page 1053)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Edit Table.
Select Query dialog box | 1691
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. For information about attribute data for geospatial features, see
Overview of Joins (page 507).
Select the appropriate data source and then select the table.
Data Source
Select from data sources currently attached and connected to the current
drawing.
Table
Select from tables in the selected data source.
Sort dialog box
Use this dialog box to sort the Data View.
To use the Data View (page 1047)
In the Data View: View Sort Multiple Columns
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
Before you begin sorting, note the following:
Records are sorted based on the value in the column selected in the Sort
By box.
If multiple records have the same value in this column, those records are
further sorted by the column specified in the first Then By box.
If you do not specify a sort column, records are sorted in database order.
To sort the table by additional columns, use the remaining Then By lists.
You can sort up to five columns simultaneously.
You cannot sort columns that have binary or user-defined data types, and
these columns do not appear in the sort lists.
To clear all the lists, click Reset.
1692 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Sort By
Click the down arrow and select the column in the table to sort by. Columns
with binary or user-defined data types are not listed.
Ascending
Sort from the beginning of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest
date.
Descending
Sort from the end of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.
Table Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to select records from the database table.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 1231)
In the Data View: Records SQL Filter
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
When you apply the filter, the Data View searches the current database table
and displays only records that match the specified conditions.
To edit an existing condition, select the line in the SQL Filter list. Edit the
information in the Where Condition area. When you finish editing, click
Update.
To add a new line, select a joining operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column
and an operator and specify a value. When you finish, click Add.
SQL Filter area
View the current filter. If lines in the filter were grouped, the group is
indented.
Group
Group the selected conditions. Conditions in the group are evaluated before
other conditions.
Table Filter dialog box | 1693
Ungroup
Delete the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending
or beginning line of the group.
Delete
Delete the selected condition.
Clear All
Delete all conditions.
Where Condition area
Use the Where Condition area to edit an existing condition in the filter or
to add a new condition.
And
Specify that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Or
Specify that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Not
Specify And Not if the first condition must be met and the second condition
must not be met for the object to be included in the query. Specify Or Not
if either the first condition can be met or the second condition cannot be
met for the object to be included in the query.
For the very first condition in the list, do not specify And or Or. You can
select Not.
Column
View columns from the current table.
Operator
Specify how to test the values in the column.
Description Operator
The value of the selected column is equal to the value you enter in
the Value box.
=
The value of the selected column is greater than the value you enter
in the Value box.
>
The value of the selected column is greater than or equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
>=
1694 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Description Operator
The value of the selected column is less than the value you enter
in the Value box.
<
The value of the selected column is less than or equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected column is not equal to the value you enter
in the Value box.
<>
The selected column is linked to the object and contains the spe-
cified value. If you specify multiple values, separate each value with
a comma. Enclose values in single quotes, for example, '1','2','3'.
IN
The selected column is linked to the object and is empty. Do not
enter a value in the Value box.
IS NULL
The selected column is linked to the object and contains part of
the value specified. Applies to string (character) data types only.
Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character in the Value box.
LIKE
For information on the wild-card characters supported by your database
system, refer to the documentation for your database system software.
Value
Specify the value to search for. To select from a list of existing values in the
column, click . To use wild-card characters for string values, select
LIKE.
For example, type B% to find all values that begin with the letter B.
Add
Add the condition line to the SQL Filter list.
Update
Replace the selected condition in the SQL Filter list with the new condition.
To use a filter you previously defined for this table, click History at the bottom
of the screen. Select the filter from the list.
Table Filter dialog box | 1695
Table Filter History dialog box
Use this dialog box to manage the filters you previously defined for this table.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 1231)
In the Data View: Records SQL Filter
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
To use a filter, select it in the list and click OK, or double-click the filter. To
erase a filter, select it in the list and click Delete. To erase all filters, click Delete
All.
The maximum number of filters stored on this list is determined by the value
for Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List on the Current Drawing
tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
Table Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about the selected table or query in
Data View.
To view external data linked to drawing objects (page 1147)
Click the Highlight Linked Objects icon.
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
To change the width of the Column Name or Column Type columns, drag
the column divider to the desired width.
1696 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Name
View the name of the selected table or query.
Structure
View the column name and column type for each column.
Zoom Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the percentage of the display area that
highlighted objects will fill.
To set other Data View highlighting options (page 1227)
In the Data View: Highlight Zoom Scale
NOTE Data View displays attribute data linked to drawing objects. For information
about viewing attribute data for geospatial features, see Overview of the Data
Table (page 1125).
Specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of the selected objects. Specify
a smaller number to display more of the drawing outside the highlighted
objects.
Specify 0% to maintain the current zoom level.
Zoom Scale dialog box | 1697
1698
Import Export Dialog Boxes
Attribute Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the attribute data to import for the selected input
layer. This is sometimes called a theme, level, or file.
To specify the data to import (page 426)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To connect
to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page
305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of
Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Do Not Import Attribute Data
Do not add data attached to the objects in the source drawing.
Create Object Data
Import data attached to the objects in the source drawing into an object data
table.
Object Data Table To Use
Select an object data table or enter a name for a new one. A table name can
include the characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, $ and _. It cannot include spaces. It must
start with an alphanumeric character.
25
1699
For a new object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new object
data table with fields that match the fields you're importing. To change
these defaults, click Select Fields.
For an existing object data table, incoming fields are imported into object
data fields with the same name by default. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. To change these defaults,
click Select Fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object data
types:
Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the Integer
data type. For Boolean data, false is converted to 0 and true is converted
to 1.
Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the matching object data
field. If this conversion fails, AutoCAD Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for
real numbers, and "" for characters.
Select Fields
Select the fields to import and specify names for the object data fields.
Add Unique Key Field
Automatically create a field with a unique entry for each imported object.
You can edit the field name.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single AutoCAD Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart AutoCAD Map 3D. To extend the unique key
across multiple imported files, import them all during the same AutoCAD
Map 3D session.
Add To Database Table
Append data attached to the objects in the source to an external database
table. The links to the data are imported with the objects. Select the link
template to use. Optionally, import only the link data.
If no link templates are defined in the current drawing, the option is not
available.
Link Template
Select a link template from the list.
1700 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Select Fields
Select fields to import from the source drawing. If you select only key fields,
they are imported as link data, and the database table is not updated.
Create Link Only
Import link data only. Links are maintained from the imported objects to
their appropriate row in the table, but no changes are made to the database
table.
If you import only the key field, this option is automatically selected.
Block Mapping dialog box
This dialog box was used to list all values in the import file for the specified
Control Data Element and the block name to which they were mapped. It has
been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
Conflict Resolution dialog box
Use this dialog box to resolve conflicts during import.
To specify the data to import (page 426)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Block Mapping dialog box | 1701
You can map incoming attribute data to target data fields in the AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing using both the Data and Object Class columns. This may
result in mapping two different incoming data fields to the same target data
field. Before proceeding with the import, you must resolve such conflicts.
For example, the Object Class field can specify that a AutoCAD Map 3D object
data field called Wire_Data stores an imported attribute Voltage, while
the Data column specifies that the same Wire_Data object data field stores
another imported attribute, EMF. You cannot store two data values in one
target field. The Conflict Resolution dialog box lets you specify which incoming
data values to use.
Conflicts Detected For Input Layer <Layer Name>
Conflicts between the attribute mapping specified in the Data and Object
Class columns have been found for the specified layer.
Conflict List
Specify which of the incoming attributes (the one defined in the Object Class
or the one specified in the Data column) should be stored in the AutoCAD
Map 3D data field.
Class Input Field
Click in this column to use the value specified by the Object Class.
Data Input Field
Click in this column to use the value specified by the Data column.
Target
View the target attribute data field in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. The
syntax used for the Target field is
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
Type of data, for example "OD" for object
data, or "LT" for link template (linked ex-
ternal database).
CATEGORY
Object data table name or database table
name.
TABLE
Data field name. FIELD
Use Class
Resolve all conflicts using the Class Input Field definitions.
1702 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Use Data
Resolve all conflicts using the Data Input Field definitions.
OK
Accept the current settings and return to the Import dialog box.
Coordinate System Translation dialog box
This dialog box was used to convert the file from one coordinate system to
another. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures
or commands.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428)
To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
If the coordinate system you want is not listed in any category, you can create
a new coordinate system (page 90).
Input Settings area
From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate system code for the
existing file. This list displays all codes in the selected category. To display
the codes for a different category, select the new category from the Category
list.
Output Settings area
From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate system code you
want for the new file. This list displays all codes in the selected category.
To display the codes for a different category, select the new category from
the Category list.
Coordinate System Translation dialog box | 1703
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to define a new link template when importing an
external map file into AutoCAD Map 3D format. It has been discontinued.
Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
OK
When you click OK, a link template is created for the table using the key
columns in the Key Selection area that have been set to On.
Table Specification Area
Select a data source, catalog, and schema. Enter the name of a table. To
select from a list of table names, click List.
Link Template Area
Enter a name for the link template. Link template names can be up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Key Selection Area
Specify a key column by selecting the column and clicking On.
Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the drawing objects to export, and specify export
options. You cannot export feature data.
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
1704 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, click Load to
reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to use in a
script, click Save.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
Selection Tab (page 1705)
Data Tab (page 1707)
Options Tab (page 1708)
If you export to SDF, Oracle, or ArcSDE, the Export dialog box substitutes
Feature Class Tab (page 1706) for the Data Tab.
Selection Tab
Specify the objects to export.
Object Type
For some formats, select the object type to export. Objects of other types
are filtered out of the export. To export the other object types, run Export
again. Some objects may be exported as more than one type.
Select Objects To Export
Select the objects to export.
Select All
Select all objects.
Select Manually
Individually select the objects to export. To modify the selection set, click
Select Objects or Quick Select .
Filter Selection area
Filter the selected objects based on layer or object class. Enter the names of
the layers or object classes to include, or click the button to select from a
list. Objects that are not on the selected layers and in the selected object
classes are filtered out of the export. The status line shows how many objects
are selected and how many have been filtered out.
Export dialog box | 1705
Select Polygon Topology To Export
Name
Select the polygon topology to convert to polygon objects and export. These
objects are in addition to any objects selected above.
Group Complex Polygons
Group nested polygons into a single balanced polygon. Each nested polygon
must have a centroid.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D will create separate
polygons, one for each centroid.
Preview Filtered Selection
See which objects will be exported. Objects that will be exported are
highlighted. To leave the preview and return to this dialog, press ESC.
Feature Class Tab
Choose a method for organizing the selected drawing objects into logical
feature classes.
DWG to Feature Class Mapping
Specify how DWG objects map to FDO feature classes.
Create A Single Class From All Selected Objects
Create a single FDO feature class for all selected DWG objects. This is the
default selection.
Create Multiple Classes Based On A Drawing Object
Create multiple feature classes based on a drawing object. Select the drawing
object on which to base the feature classes from the Drawing Object To Use
list.
Select Attributes
Select specific attributes to export. You can select attributes for both
single-class and multiclass export operations. For multiclass export
operations, these attributes will be added to every feature class.
Drawing Object
Select the drawing objects to export.
Feature Class
The feature class to which you are exporting your data. If you are exporting
to an existing FDO data store, use the drop-down list to map your data to
existing fields. Existing feature classes are in blue text. You can map more
than one drawing object to a single feature class.
1706 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
To map drawing properties to feature class properties, click in the Feature
Class field.
Geometry
Select the geometry data to export for each drawing property. Click in the
appropriate field, then click the down arrow. For pre-existing classes, this
field displays the geometry type already associated with that class.
Show Schema Names
Display the schemas of the feature class to which you are mapping your
data.
Data Tab
Data
To include data with the exported objects, select the data fields to export. The
selected fields appear in the table. You can also enter an expression.
NOTE If you are exporting to SHP format using object classification to create
feature classes, you may not want to specify attributes here, as all feature classes
will then receive all attributes you check on this tab. If you dont select attributes
here, properties for those feature classes are defined by the original object classes.
Select Attributes
Select properties, object properties, topology information, object class
information, or fields from link template data, object data, or block
attributes.
TIP To export only key values, select the fields in the Link Templates section.
Since the key values are stored in the drawing as link data, selecting only key
fields improves performance.
In the list of attributes, Object Data is map-specific and includes the
attributes of any objects in the map that have object data tables associated
with them. Object Properties are the properties of each entity type. These
are the same attributes that appear in the Properties palette. Properties are
attributes that apply to every DWG object in the map.
Source Field
Lists the data you selected to export. Click Select Attributes to select
additional data, or enter an expression.
Export dialog box | 1707
Output Field
Enter a name for the field in the output file for the associated field. Output
field names can use any alpha-numeric character and the underscore symbol
("_").
Create Unique Key Field
Create a unique value for each exported object. You can specify a name for
this field.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single AutoCAD Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart AutoCAD Map 3D. To extend the unique key
across multiple files you are exporting, export all the files in the same
AutoCAD Map 3D session.
Options Tab
Coordinate Conversion
To convert the exported objects to a different coordinate system, check
Convert Coordinates To. Enter the coordinate system code for the export
file or click to select one from a list.
If the conversion controls are not available, there is no coordinate system
assigned to your current drawing. Click Cancel, assign a coordinate system
to the current drawing, and re-run Export.
Other
The options that appear in this section depend on your choice of export
format.
Treat Closed Polylines as Polygons
Export closed polylines as polygons. If this check box is not selected, only
polygon objects will be exported as polygons.
NOTE If you export a polygon topology that includes closed polylines and
those closed polylines are part of the selection set, selecting this check box may
create duplicate polygons in the exported file.
Additional Settings
The Options tab may include more settings for the format you chose. For
some formats, the Driver Options button is also available.
For information about the options for a particular format, see Supported
Formats (page 1412).
1708 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Additional Notes
AutoCAD Map 3D exports original object properties regardless of any map
stylizations, except for some text. Text entities created by text stylizations
are exported. To avoid exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization
before exporting your data. To export stylized drawing objects, first save
the stylizations to a linked output drawing, and then export the linked
objects. You can export stylized feature layers using Display Manager. For
more information, see Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page
1469).
Settings saved with the MAPEXPORT command from version 4.0 or earlier
of AutoCAD Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
Export to LandXML dialog box
The Export to LandXML dialog box specifies settings for exporting a Survey
Data Store Project to LandXML. To select a specific element within the project,
check the appropriate checkbooks for that element.
To export survey points to a LandXML file (page 1471)
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data Export LandXML.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
File
Displays the file name and LandXML version. Click in a field to edit the
file information. Constrained fields will displayed valid options in a
drop-down list.
Project
Displays information about the Project, such as Name, File Name, LandXML
version, and so on. Click in a field to edit the Project information.
Constrained fields will displayed valid options in a drop-down list.
Export to LandXML dialog box | 1709
Units
Displays information about a Projects units of measure. Click in a field to
edit the measurement unit information. Constrained fields will displayed
valid options in a drop-down list.
Coordinate System Assignment
Enter the coordinate system code for your new Survey Data Store. Click
to select the coordinate system from a list.
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to map attribute data from the incoming
file to object classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
To assign an object class to an input layer (page 421)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Select An Object Class
Click an object class defined in the current drawing.
Input Fields
Click an incoming attribute data field to map to a Target Field in the object
class.
Target Fields
Click the attribute in the selected object class that the selected Input Field
wll map to. Map as many Target Fields as possible.
Once you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list.
This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming data
field.
If you don't map a target field, the default object class value will be used.
The syntax for the Target Field is
1710 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT"
for link template (linked external database).
CATEGORY
Object data table name or database table name. TABLE
Data field name. FIELD
Import dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify options and settings for imported files.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To specify an area to import (page 418)
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 419)
To assign an object class to an input layer (page 421)
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 147)
To specify the data to import (page 426)
To specify how to import points (page 428)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
In the table, you can specify properties for each input layer (sometimes called
a schema, level, or file).
To import an input layer, select its check box. To change other settings for an
input layer, click in the field to change. Click the down arrow to choose from
a list of choices, or click for additional choices.
To sort on a specific column, right-click the column heading. Click Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending.
To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field. Click Copy. Right-click
in the target field. Click one of the Paste options. To copy the contents of a
Import dialog box | 1711
field to all other layers, right-click in the field. Click one of the Paste To All
Layers options. When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name
and data mappings are pasted separately, and if data mapping conflicts are
detected, the pasted data mappings options will not be available.
Current Drawing Coordinate System
Displays the global coordinate system for the current drawing. To change
this coordinate system, or to assign a coordinate system, click .
Driver Options
If Driver Options is available, click it to specify additional options. Some
formats do not have driver options. For more information about the options
for a format, see Supported Import Formats (page 387).
NOTE If you import from DGN Version 8, there may be more than one model
in the drawing. If so, you will see input layers reflecting each one. Each model
corresponds roughly to a model space in AutoCAD Map 3D (for example, Layout
1 or Layout 2). The input layers are named using the syntax
ModelName_LevelNumber, ModelName_LevelName, or
ModelName_GeometryType, depending on the settings you choose in Driver
Options.
Set driver options before you modify the table. Changing driver options
may reset settings in the table.
Spatial Filter
Specify the area to import data into.
None
Place no area limit on the incoming file and import the entire incoming
file.
Current Display
Limit the import to the area shown in the current drawing window.
Define Window
Limit the import to a rectangular area you define in the drawing. Click
. Drag your cursor from right to left to define the area. Objects that cross
or are enclosed by the rectangular window are imported.
Notes:
AutoCAD Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
1712 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
If the coordinate system assigned to the current drawing differs from
the coordinate system specified in the Input Coordinate System column,
AutoCAD Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine
the correct coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Import Properties Table
Input Layer
Select the check box for an input layer name to import objects from that
layer. All layers for the selected file or folder are listed.
Drawing Layer
Specify the target layer in the current drawing for the incoming objects.
Click the down arrow to select an existing layer. Click to select an existing
layer, create a new one, or use a layer stored in a data field.
Object Class
Specify the name of the object class to use for the incoming data. For
example, objects on an incoming Shapefile input layer can be classified and
included in the "LAND USE" object class in Map.
Click the down-arrow to select from a valid object class. Click to map
the incoming data attributes to the object class definition. If you don't map
the attributes, AutoCAD Map 3D populates the object class with the default
object class values.
NOTE This column is available only if you have object classes defined in your
map. For more information about setting up object classes, see Setting Up
Object Classification (page 116).
Input Coordinate System
Click to specify the coordinate system of the incoming layer. Objects
will be converted from the input coordinate system to the coordinate system
assigned to the current drawing.
NOTE This column is available only if the current drawing has an assigned
coordinate system. To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing, click
under Current Drawing Coordinate System.
Import dialog box | 1713
Data
Click to specify a name for the object data table or link template to
use for incoming data. Select the incoming fields to include in the object
data table.
Data is imported only if it is associated with an imported object. If no
imported objects are associated with the incoming data, the table is not
created.
Points
Select ACAD_POINT or a block name from the list to use for point objects.
To create text or get block names from incoming data, click and select
the data field.
Saved Profiles
To save your settings as a profile, click Save. To use settings that you've
previously saved, click Load. You can use your saved setting to help automate
scripts.
NOTE Settings saved with the MAPIMPORT command in version 4.0 or earlier
of AutoCAD Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines
If this option is not selected, polygons are imported as polygon objects.
Importing polygons as closed polylines is useful if you plan to use the
polygons in a polygon topology. To change the default state of this option,
use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON command.
Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values
Use object class default values for incoming data values that are not within
the specified object class range. This ensures that the incoming data will be
accurately classified, but may require AutoCAD Map 3D to modify some of
the incoming data values.
1714 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the import file
are imported into AutoCAD Map 3D. It has been discontinued. Instead, use
one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
Proceed
Convert the selected file.
OK
Close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Import Graphics Area
Perform Coordinate Conversion
Convert the file from one coordinate system to another. Click Define to
display the Coordinate System Translation dialog box.
Map Data Element To Layers
Use the attribute data in the import file to determine the target layer for
the AutoCAD Map 3D objects that are created.
Click Layers to display the Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box, where
you can map the values for a selected data element to specific layers in the
output file.
Map Data Element To Block Name
Use the attribute data in the import file to determine the target block name
for point and polygon centroid objects that are created.
Click Blocks to display the Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box,
where you can map the values for a selected data element to specific block
names in the output file.
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1715
Import Data Elements Area
Ignore Data Elements
Ignore attribute data in the import file (other than data that is used in layer
and block name mapping).
Select this option if you do not want to convert the attribute data to object
data or create links to SQL tables. Only the graphical objects in the file will
be converted.
Map Data Elements To Object Data
Convert the attribute data in the import file to object data.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box, where you can select
the name of an existing object data table or create a new one.
Map Data Elements To SQL Table
Use the attribute data in the import file to create links to existing SQL tables
or to create new tables.
Click SQL to display the Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box, where you
can map specific data elements to specific columns in an external database.
Options Area
Load
Use import settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Import ASCII Points dialog box
The Import ASCII Points dialog box allows you to specify settings for bringing
in ASCII survey point data.
To bring ASCII point data into a Survey Data Store (page 373)
Right-click any node in the Survey Tree on the Survey tab of the Task Pane, then
click Import ASCII Points.
File Location
Click to select an ASCII file to import.
1716 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Select Formatting
Select the format of the source data using the Format drop-down list. Formats
describe the layout of the data in your source files using the following
convention:
P is point ID
E is Easting, or longitudinal values
N is Northing or latitudinal values
Z is elevation values
D is description
Make sure that you select the correct format plus delimiter type (comma or
space) for your data source.
The Autodesk Uploadable File format is as follows: User-Defined (point ID,
description, or any other type of data), X, Y, Z. It is a comma-separated
format, and uses the # character for comment text.
Z-Unit
Select the unit of measure for elevation (US Feet, International Feet, Meters,
or Chains)
Preview
The Preview window shows you a sample of the ASCII data. You can use
the Preview to verify that you have selected the desired file.
Coordinate System Assignment
Enter the coordinate system code for your new Survey Data Store. Click
to select the coordinate system from a list.
LandXML Coordinate System dialog box
The LandXML Coordinate System dialog box allows you to view and assign
a coordinate system to LandXML data you are importing.
To bring LandXML data into a Survey Data Store (page 371)
LandXML Coordinate System dialog box | 1717
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data Import LandXML.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
LandXML Reports for Coordinate System
Displays any coordinate system information associated with the LandXML
file you are importing.
LandXML Coordinate System Assignment
Enter the coordinate system code for your new Survey Data Store. Click
to select the coordinate system from a list.
Layer Mapping dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify all values in the import file for the specified
Control Data Element and the layer they are mapped to. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
1718 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import)
Use this dialog box to specify a target layer in the current drawing for the
selected layer in the incoming file. This is sometimes called a schema, level,
or file.
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 419)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Create on Existing Layer
Put incoming objects on an existing layer in the drawing. Click the down
arrow to select the layer.
If you assigned the incoming layer to an object class with a layer property,
the default is the layer specified in the object class.
Create on New Layer
Put incoming objects on a new layer. Enter a name for the new layer.
Use Data Field For Layer Name
Put incoming objects on a layer based on data attached to the objects. Click
the down arrow and select the field to use for layer names. For each object,
AutoCAD Map 3D will read the value in the specified field and put the
object on a layer with the same name. If the layer does not exist, it will be
created. If an object does not have a value in the specified field, it will go
on Layer 0.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses only the first 255 characters of the value in the field.
If the incoming file has longer field values, change the values before you
import the file.
NOTE If a conflict between the layer specified by the Drawing Layer setting
and an Object Class with a layer property is found, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
Drawing Layer setting, except when Drawing Layer is set to <None>. In that
case, the Object Class setting is used. When Use Class Defaults is checked,
AutoCAD Map 3D forces the data to the correct Drawing Layer.
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) | 1719
Link Template to Export dialog box
This dialog box was used to select the link template to use in the export
operation. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428)
To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
If you select the Map SQL Data To Data Element option, the data from the
referenced table will be exported.
If you select the Map Database Link To Data Element option, the key column
value that links the object to the table will be exported.
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify which data element to use for determining
the block for points or polygon centroids. It has been discontinued. Instead,
use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object determines the block to use.
To map a value to a block name, select the value in the Values Available list
and select a block from the Target Block Name list. Click >>.
1720 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Control Data Element area
Select the data element to use to determine the target block.
Values Available list
Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element.
Target Block Name area
Select a block name. To load a block, click Load.
>>
Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected block name.
<<
Remove the selected values from the selected block name and return them
to the Values Available list.
Values Assigned list
Displays the values assigned to the current block name.
Auto Block
Assign each value to a block name of the same name.
List
Display the Block Mapping dialog box, which lists the block name
assignment for each value in the selected data element.
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify the data element to use when determining
the target layer for objects. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the
following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object will determine its layer.
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1721
To map a value to a layer, select the value in the Values Available list and
select a layer from the Target Layer list. Click >>.
Control Data Element area
Select the data element to use to determine the target layer.
Values Available list
Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element.
Target Layer area
Select a layer. To create a new layer, click New.
>>
Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected layer.
<<
Remove the selected values from the selected layer and return them to the
Values Available list.
Values Assigned list
Displays the values assigned to the current layer.
Auto Layer
Assign each value to a layer of the same name. If a layer does not exist, one
will be created.
List
Display the Layer Mapping dialog box, which lists the layer assignment for
each value in the selected data element.
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to map data elements in the import file to specific
columns in external database tables. It has been discontinued. Instead, use
one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
1722 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
Database Link Method area
Specify whether to link objects to an existing database table or to create a
new database table and link objects to the new table.
When the file is imported, each object in the import file is linked to the
record in the external database table with the matching key column value.
Or a new table is created using the values from the data elements, and links
are created to the new table.
To link a data element to a key value, select the data element in the Import
Data Elements list and select the key value in the Link Template list. Click
>>.
Import Data Elements area
Displays all data elements in the import file.
Link Template area
Select a link template from the list.
To create a new link template, click Define to display the Define Link
Template dialog box.
>>
Link the selected import data element to the selected key in the link
template.
<<
Remove the selected link from the Link Template list and return the data
element to the Import Data Elements list.
Map Export dialog box
This dialog box was used to export data from AutoCAD Map 3D to an external
file format. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428)
To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421)
Map Export dialog box | 1723
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
Proceed
When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Map Export Options
dialog box, where you can specify how to export graphics and data.
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Export File area
Format
Select the format to export to.
Name
Enter a name and location for the new file or directory.
If you are not sure of the location, click Browse to view existing files and
directories. If you are creating a coverage, the parent directory for the new
directory must be a "workspace" directory, containing only other coverage
directories, and the new directory must be empty of all files. The default
coverage format is UNIX ArcInfo. If the workspace directory contains an
existing PC ArcInfo coverage, the new coverage will be in PC ArcInfo format.
File Type area
Select the file type for the information you are exporting. This option is
not necessary for all file formats.
Object Selection area
Select Automatically
Use all objects on the specified layers and of the specified file type.
Select Manually
Select individual objects. Click Select to select objects.
Objects will be filtered for the specified layers and file type.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
1724 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Filter On Layers
Specify the layers to search. The default is all layers. To select from a list of
layers in the current drawing, click Layers.
Map Export Options dialog box
This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the current drawing
are exported. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428)
To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
Proceed
Click Proceed to export to the selected file format.
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current export options.
Export Geometry area
Select Perform Coordinate Conversion to convert the objects from one
coordinate system to another. Click Define to display the Coordinate System
Translation dialog box.
Export Object Properties area
Map Layer Name To Data Element
Transfer the layer name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Block Name To Data Element
Transfer the block name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Linetype To Data Element
Transfer the linetype name for each object to the specified data element in
the export file.
Map Export Options dialog box | 1725
Export Data Elements area
No Data Mapping
Export only graphical objects. No data is exported.
Map Object Data To Data Element
Export object data for each object.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box where you can select
the object data table to export.
Map SQL Data To Data Element
Export data from an external database that is linked to the objects.
Click SQL to display the Link Template To Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Map Database Link To Data Element
Export information about the database link. This option exports the key
column value that links the object to the table.
Click Link to display the Link Template To Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Options area
Load
Use export settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save your current export settings so you can use them again.
New Property Data Type dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a property type for a new property when you
export data to a geospatial format.
For example, if you export the .COLOR property to a new feature class in the
target data store, you can specify the data type for that feature class as STRING.
Once the property type has been selected, it cannot be edited. To change the
property type, you must create a new property.
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408)
1726 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
New Property Data Type is available for only three AutoCAD properties:
.COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT.
Data Type
Select the data type for the new class property from the drop-down list.
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to map data to existing feature classes in the target data
store when you export to a geospatial format.
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Drawing Attributes
Select the drawing attributes to map to FDO feature classes. This field is not
editable.
For .COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT attributes, click to display
the Property Value Mapping dialog box.
Feature Class Properties
Enter or select the feature class property to which to map your drawing
attributes. If you are exporting to an existing FDO feature class, you can
select feature class properties from a drop-down list. Existing properties are
displayed in bold blue text.
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box | 1727
Select Attributes
Select attributes to map to this feature class only.
Entries in this dialog box include both the global attributes selected from
the Export dialog box and the attributes that apply to this feature class only.
Property Value Mapping
Use this dialog box to map specific drawing attribute properties to specific
feature class properties when you export to a geospatial format. for example,
you could map the color RED to the string CLAY.
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Property value mapping is available for three AutoCAD properties only:
.COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT.
... Value
The AutoCAD drawing attribute property value (left column) displays as
COLOR Value, LINETYPE Value, or LINEWEIGHT Value, as appropriate.
Select the check box next to each property value to map.
... Value
The target feature class property value (right column) displays the feature
class property name you entered in the Feature Class Property Mapping
dialog box.
1728 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Select Attributes dialog box
Use this dialog box to select attributes for Map Export.
To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 1408)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Expression
Check the attributes you wish to export in the tree view.
Map Import dialog box
This dialog box was used to translate an external map file into AutoCAD Map
3D format. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
You can import coverages in both UNIX ArcInfo and PC ArcInfo format. If
you are importing a coverage, you must have the coverage subdirectory and
the associated INFO subdirectory before using the MAPIMPORT4 command.
To set a text size for coverages, set the TEXTSIZE variable before using the
MAPIMPORT4 command.
Select Attributes dialog box | 1729
NOTE If a SHP file is located on a read-only drive or directory, you cannot import
the file if the name contains any of the following characters: pound sign (#),
exclamation point (!), comma (,), or accent grave (`). To import the file, either
rename the file or move it to a directory to which you have write access.
When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Import Data Options
dialog box, where you can specify how to import graphics and data.
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Format
Select the format of the file to import.
Name
Enter the name of the existing file or coverage.
If you are not sure of the name or location, click Browse to view existing
file names and directories.
New Layer dialog box
This dialog box was used to specify a name for a new imported layer. It has
been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
New layers are created with color number 7 and the CONTINUOUS linetype.
Object Data Table dialog box (Export)
This dialog box was used to select the object data table to export. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID (page 1432)
To export drawing objects to SHP (page 1428)
To export drawing objects to ESRI Arc/INFO (page 1421)
1730 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
Click the down arrow to select from a list of object data tables in the current
drawing.
You can select only one object data table. To export data from multiple tables,
repeat the export command for each table.
Object Data Table dialog box (Import)
This dialog box was used to select the object data table to import data into.
It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or
commands.
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
To create a table, exit the import operation and use the ADEDEFDATA
command.
During the import operation, data elements in the import file are transferred
to a matching field name.
Table box
Displays the target object data table name. If you enter a value in this box
that does not reference an existing object data table, AutoCAD Map 3D
creates a new table that includes all data elements in the import file.
Tables
Display a list of all defined object data tables in the current drawing.
Selecting an existing table populates only fields whose names exactly match
the name of a data element.
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) | 1731
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box
Use these dialog boxes to specify which fields from the incoming file should
be mapped to fields in an object data table or external database when you
import.
To specify the data to import (page 426)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Input Fields
Select the fields to import from the incoming file.
Target Fields
Specify the fields in the object data table or external database to import the
input fields to.
If you are importing to an external database:
To select a Target Field, click in its box. Click the down arrow to select
from a list of existing fields.
If you selected Create Link Only in the Attribute Data dialog box, or if
you select only the key field in this dialog box, AutoCAD Map 3D will
import the key field as link data and will not modify the external
database.
If you are importing to an object data table:
To import into an existing field in the table, click in its box. Click the
down arrow to select from a list of existing fields.
To import into a new field, type the name of the new field in the box.
To change a target field, click in the box and select or type a field name.
1732 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Point Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to import points for the selected layer. This
is sometimes called a schema, level, or file.
To specify how to import points (page 428)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
connect to the data in its original format, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
(page 305). To convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview
of Converting and Exporting (page 1405).
Create As Points
Convert points using ACAD_POINT.
Create As Text From Data
Convert points as text. Select the data field in the incoming file that contains
the value to use for the text. If an object does not have a value in the selected
data field, the point will be imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text will use the text style for the current drawing. To change the text style
for the current drawing, click Text Style.
Create As Blocks
Convert points as blocks. Select the block to use.
Get Block Name From Data
Convert points as blocks and uses a block name stored in attribute data.
Select the data field in the incoming file that contains the value to use for
the block name. If the block does not exist, the point will be imported using
ACAD_POINT.
Get Attribute Values From Fields
Import attribute values attached to the incoming points. If an attribute
name on the block that is being created matches a field name on the
incoming point, the data for that attribute will be imported with the point.
This option is available only if you select either Create As Blocks or Get
Block Name From Data.
Point Mapping dialog box | 1733
Design File Input Settings
Use this dialog box to set options when you import data from Microstation
Design. Options differ for importing DGN7 or DGN 8, and the order of the
items in the dialog may also change by version.
To import DGN files (page 409)
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
NOTE Data you import becomes AutoCAD drawing objects in your map. To
convert the drawing objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting
and Exporting (page 1405).
Group Elements By
Level
Group incoming objects by their DGN level. Only levels that contain
elements are imported.
Level Names
Group incoming objects by their DGN level name. Only levels that contain
elements are imported. This option is available for DGN 8 only.
Geometry
Group incoming objects by entity type.
Linkage Extraction
Extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage values from the DGN 7 file.
MSLink
Import up to three links per object for DGN 7. For each link, two fields are
added to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies the key value,
and entity_num_n, which specifies the table.
FRAMME
Add the following fields to the object data table: comp_count, comp_num,
dgnfile, feat_num, state_num, and ufid.
1734 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Coordinate Units
Master/Sub
Select Master or Sub to specify which of these units in the DGN 7 file
matches the default unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map.
Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition, it can define
Sub units and Master units. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD
Map 3D map is meters, and meters are the Sub unit in the imported file,
select Sub. If you select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file are
converted to Sub or Master units according to the conversion factor in the
DGN file header.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever you choose)
will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map.
Unit Ratio
View the ratio between the Master and Sub units. For example, if the ratio
is 1:12 (as it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates will be
scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
Element Expansion
Explode Multi Text
Explode multi-text objects into their component parts.
Create Text From Tags
Convert the contents of tags to text.
Explode Complex Chains
Return each component of a complex chain as its own feature (no feature
is returned for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements of
the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any arcs in the complex
chain become linestrings, and any linkages on the component elements
themselves are lost.
Cell Expansion
Create blocks From Cells
Expand cells into blocks, maintaining the cell grouping structure. This is
the default.
Explode Cells
Expand the contents of the DGN cells into their component parts. The
expansion is a single level deep. It does not expand all sublevels.
Design File Input Settings | 1735
Create As Points
Expand the contents of the DGN cells into points instead of blocks,
maintaining the cell grouping structure.
Reference Files
Ignore
Ignore all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set.
Create DWG
Read all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set. If the
reference file has nested references, they are also imported, but circular
references are not.
If you select this option, specify a location for the folder for these files. If
the folder already exists, you can replace it (overwrite its contents) or cancel
and specify a different location. The default folder location is the same as
the selected DGN file location.
Design File Output Settings
Use this dialog box to set options when you export data to Microstation Design
(DGN7).
To export drawing objects to MicroStation Design (DGN) (page 1438)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Map Data Transfer
panel Map 3D Export.
NOTE Export affects drawing objects only. To convert geospatial data to a different
format, see Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) (page 617).
Coordinate Units
Master/Sub Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing
is meters, and you are using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master (the default).
1736 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Seed File
Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the output DGN file is
two-dimensional or three-dimensional, sets the coordinate units, sets global
origin, and more. For DGN version 7, you must use a version 7 DGN seed
file.
Override Global Origin (DGN 7 only)
Override the global origin setting in the seed file. Specify the global origin
to use.
Compute Parameters (DGN 7 only)
Override all seed file settings and have AutoCAD Map 3D calculate the
settings for you. AutoCAD Map 3D determines the largest dimension for
the set of exported objects and sets the appropriate range and precision. It
sets the UOR per Sub to 10, and sets the Global Origin to the center of the
bounding rectangle of the exported objects.
Design File Output Settings | 1737
1738
Managing Data Dialog
Boxes
Schema Editor
Use the Schema Editor to view or change settings for an entire schema hierarchy:
schemas, feature classes, and properties.
To create a schema (page 598)
To edit a schema (page 612)
In Map Explorer, select the feature source (page 2063) in the connection tree
(at the top of the pane) and click Schema Edit Schema.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To structure data linked
to drawing objects, see Overview of Object Classification (page 981) and Overview
of Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061).
You cannot control every aspect of a schema from the Schema Editor. For
example, you cannot create object or association properties, or specify that the
system auto-generate a value for a property. However, if you have set up these
attributes for a schema, the Schema Editor will display the current settings.
The settings you see depend on what the provider supports. For example, Long
Transactions will not appear if the provider doesnt support versioning.
26
1739
Import Schema
Import an XML schema that you exported, and use it to define a new schema
for another data store. This is useful for creating multiple data stores based
on the same schema
Export Schema
Export the selected schema as an XML file to share a schema you created
in the Schema Editor with other AutoCAD Map 3D or GIS-software users;
to back up a schema you created in the Schema Editor as an XML file; or
to save your work in progress if the original data source or directory becomes
unavailable.
New Schema
Define a new schema in a new or existing feature source for a database FDO
provider (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle) or for an SDF data store.
You cannot create a schema for an existing SHP feature source, but you can
create a new file-based data store and create a new schema for it during the
creation process. You must use ESRI tools to create an ArcSDE schemayou
cannot use AutoCAD Map 3D to create a schema for ArcSDE.
New Feature Class
Select a schema entry on the right and click New Feature Class, and specify
the information for the new feature class on the left side of the window.
New Property
Select the feature class entry for the property on the right and click New
Property. Specify the information for the property on the left side of the
window.
Schema Settings
Enter A Schema Name
Enter the name that will appear in the Schema tree. It must follow the
naming rules of the provider.
NOTE You cannot change the schema name for a SQLite data store. The schema
name must be Default. Also, for SQLite schemas, you cannot add comments
in the Schema or Feature Class Description fields.
Description
Enter an optional description of the schema.
1740 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
Feature Class Settings
Name
Enter the feature class name that will appear in the Schema tree. It must
follow the naming rules of the provider.
Description
Enter an optional description of the feature class.
Type
Select Feature Class for a class with associated geometry. Select Non-feature
Class for non-spatial data that can be used as a standalone or contained
class.
For most providers, a feature class requires a unique identifier to distinguish
it from other features (unless the feature class has a base class from which
it inherits an identifier).
A non-feature class has no association with another class and requires a
unique identifier. As a contained class, it defines a property of another
non-feature or feature class. For example, Sidewalk could be a property of
a Road feature class; the Sidewalk class defines the Road.Sidewalk property.
In this case, the Sidewalk class does not need an identity property, although
it could have one.
Base Feature Class
If this feature class inherits from another feature class, select that superclass;
otherwise select None. This setting applies only to feature classes (not
non-feature classes) and is available only if the provider supports inheritance.
Abstract
Click Yes if this feature class is an abstract class. You cant create features
for an abstract class, but you can use it as a base class. This setting applies
only to features classes (not non-feature classes) and is available only if the
provider supports inheritance.
Specify Identifier Propert(ies) And The Order
Select the properties that comprise the unique identifier (for non-null
primary-key values) for this feature class. Select one property for a simple
identifier or multiple properties for a compound identifier. (Some providers
support only simple identifiers). Create these properties before you create
any others. Use the arrow buttons to reorder the properties.
You must specify a value for any non-null property of a feature before you
check that feature into the data store. If you do not, you will not be able
to check the feature in.
Ordinarily, identifier properties use an auto-generated integer. This means
that when you add new features to this feature class, they automatically
Schema Editor | 1741
receive an auto-generated, unique identifier. If you do not specify an
auto-generated integer for this property, you must manually enter a unique
identifier for each new feature that uses it.
Specify Unique Constraint(s) And The Order
Specify the criteria features must meet in order to be added to this feature
class. Enter a constraint for this feature class in the Constraints box and
click New to apply it. Create additional constraints if necessary. Use the
arrow buttons to reorder the constraints. To remove a constraint, select it
and click Delete. This setting is available only if the provider supports
constraints. Constraint syntax is provider-specific.
Locking
Specify whether the user who checks out a feature controls that feature to
the exclusion of other users, until it is checked back in. This setting applies
only to providers that support locking.
Long Transaction
Specify whether to enable long transactions. A long transaction groups
conditional changes to one or many features. Long transactions create
different versions of a feature or set of features. This setting applies only to
providers that support versioning.
Property settings
Name
Enter the name of the property that will appear in the Schema tree. It must
follow the naming rules of the provider.
Each property is a single attribute of a feature class. For example, a Road
feature class may have properties called Name, DateConstructed, and
Location.
Type
Select Data for non-spatial data. Select Geometry for a property that defines
an objects shape.
A Data property data type is either boolean, byte, date/time, decimal, single,
double, Int16, Int32, Int64, or string. For example, a Road feature can have
a data property called DateConstructed whose data type is date/time.
The default Geometry property specifies one of four shapes: point (0
dimensions), curve/line (1 dimension), surface/polygon (2 dimensions),
and solid (3 dimensions). A feature class has one main geometry property,
but can have additional geometry properties. A geometry property is
associated with a spatial context. All instances of a geometric property must
have the same ordinate dimension. Not all providers support all geometry
types or all dimensionalities; SHP supports only XY points, for example,
1742 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
whereas Oracle supports XY, XYZ, XYZM, and XYM points. The default is
XY. Additionally, it can have attributes that describe elevation and measure:
HasElevation for Z and HasMeasure for M.
A feature class has one main geometry property, but can have additional
geometry properties. A geometry property is associated with a spatial context.
All instances of a geometric property must have the same ordinate
dimension. Not all providers support all geometry types or all
dimensionalities; SHP supports only XY points, for example, whereas Oracle
supports XY, XYZ, XYZM, and XYM points. The default is XY. Additionally,
it can have attributes that describe elevation and measure: HasElevation for
Z and HasMeasure for M.
The association property may appear in the list, but it is not supported by
AutoCAD Map 3D. Choose this property type only if existing data uses it
and you want to maintain that data after it is moved to a different data
store.
Description
Enter an optional description of the property.
System Generated
You cannot set this option, which indicates the current setting for this
property in an existing schema. Yes indicates that the system will
auto-generate values for this property. Generally, identifier properties whose
values identify each feature uniquely are auto-generated.
Data Attributes
Click an attribute name in the schema tree to display its description. If you
can change or specify the value for a property, a down-arrow or a blinking
cursor appears in its field and you can select or enter a value.
The list changes dynamically to show the different attributes that are
available for the selected property type.
NOTE The following caveats apply to certain providers:
You can constrain the default length of a string property in a SQLite
schema. However, AutoCAD Map 3D will not generate an error if the
constraints are violated. Such validation slows down the performance
of the data store. For example, you can constrain a string field to 2
characters and enter 3 characters without producing an error message.
AutoCAD Map 3D maintains the constraint information so that, for
example, bulk copying to another data provider will product the desired
constraint.
You cannot make SQLite properties read-only.
Schema Editor | 1743
The Decimal data type actually uses a Double data type. For this reason,
many providers will not check the number of decimal places when the
data is checked in.
Bulk Copy
Use Bulk Copy to copy a Display Manager layer or a feature source. Bulk Copy
uses the current definition of the layer (including any filters you applied, any
joins you created, and any calculated properties). For feature sources, you can
specify a subset based on specified schemas, feature classes, or properties.
To copy data from one feature source to another (page 621)
In Map Explorer, click Tools Bulk Copy.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To convert drawing
objects to a geospatial format, see Overview of Converting and Exporting (page
1405).
From
Connection Name
Select a Display Manager layer or connected feature source in the Connection
Name list as feature source from which the data will be copied. Filtered
layers display a filter icon in the list.
If you select a survey data store, you can select only a survey point group
as the source. To copy multiple point groups, copy them one by one.
Version
If the selected feature source supports versioning, select a version from the
list to use for copying.
Select Items To Copy
Select the individual schemas, features classes, and properties to copy to
the destination feature source.
Selecting any schema element automatically selects all its child elements
(selecting a feature class also selects all its properties, for example). A square
1744 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
(instead of a check) in a check box means that only some of that elements
children are selected.
Calculated fields are appended after the native properties. If there are joined
fields, they are grouped under a node representing the join. If there are
multiple joins, they appear as they do in the Manage Layer Data dialog box
(page 1607).
To
Connection Name
Select a feature source in the top list as the destination feature source.
Version
If the destination feature source supports versioning, select a version from
the list as the version to use for copying.
Click On An Item To Select A Different Input Name
Click the arrow for each item whose counterpart you selected in the
left-hand tree to map the source item to its destination item.
Info
The Info area displays information about the selected connection or feature
class.
Connection (or Class)
If you select the schema node, this area is blank.
Source Coordinate System
If there are multiple coordinate systems for the classes under the selected
connection, this field displays VARIES.
Filter Info
If the selected item is a filtered layer, this area will display Filter, Spatial
Filter, Property Filter, or Spatial And Property Filter.
Target Coordinate System
If there are multiple coordinate systems for the classes under the selected
connection, this field displays VARIES.
Ignore The Following Errors During The Copy Process
Select the error types to ignore during processing. If you leave error types
unselected, Bulk Copy stops processing and reports these errors when they
occur.
Bulk Copy | 1745
Insert Errors
Select this option to continue Bulk Copy if there is an error inserting an
object. Objects that fail are skipped. Errors can occur if there are any
anomalies in the object data being copied.
Anomalies can include an unmatched feature ID, a value that is outside the
range allowed for a property, a constraint violation (for example, each item
must be unique and the source is trying to copy over an object that already
exists in the target), or an inappropriate value (for example, a string value
that is too long).
Unmatched Data Or Geometric Type Errors
Select this option to skip association and object properties that the target
data store does not support.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not support either association or object properties,
but they may be present in existing schemas created outside AutoCAD Map
3D.
Some dimension properties are also skipped. For example, if you copy 3D
data to a 2D target, the z-coordinate is silently removed. Some fields can
be converted, for example, from int32 to int64, from int32 to double, or
from int32 to string. However, if a target does not support a data type (for
example, blob or polygon geometry), the data cannot be converted and the
object is skipped.For information about how fields are converted, see
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types (page 623).
When the geometry coordinate system is Lat/Long, SQL Server Spatial
considers the inside of a polygon to be to the left of the outer boundary. If
a polygon with a clockwise boundary is inserted, the polygon actually covers
the rest of the world, excluding what appears to be inside the polygon from
an onscreen perspective. If you check Unmatched Data Or Geometric Type
Errors as an error type to ignore, the geometry and orientation are adjusted
when the target is SQL Server Spatial. If you do not check this option and
you copy a polygon with the wrong orientation to SQL Server Spatial, that
object will fail to copy.
Coordinate System
Select this option to copy the geometry without performing a coordinate
system transformation, for example, if information for the source or target
coordinate systems is missing, but you are sure that the geometry coordinate
systems are the same. If you are not sure of one of the coordinate systems,
this option can produce undesired results.
For example, if you are missing the .PRJ file for the .SHP file you are copying,
but you know that the coordinate system is the same as the target, use this
option.
1746 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
Schema Mapping
Load/Save
To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save. Click Load
to open a saved mapping file.
NOTE Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination
feature sources.
Copy Now
Copy the data for the specified schema elements. Bulk Copy reports warnings
and errors depending on the data formats of the two feature sources, and
the copying options you selected.
Click View Log to see details (page 626).
Create Data Store Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create a new data store in a database data source. The
available settings in the dialog box vary by provider.
To create a data store for a database provider (page 588)
To create a data store for a file-based data provider (page 589)
For a database data store, connect to and log into the data store in the Data
Connect window. In the Data Store list, select Add New Data Store (or type
a name that does not appear in the list already) and press Enter
For an SDF or SHP data store, in Map Explorer, click Schema Create SDF
or Create SHP.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To link external attribute
data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
(page 522).
Data Store Name Enter the name of the new data store or accept the default
name. This name will appear in the Data Connections by Provider list in Data
Connect.
Password Enter the user password (Oracle only).
Confirm password Re-enter the user password (Oracle only).
Description Optionally enter a description of the new feature source.
Create Data Store Dialog Box | 1747
Data store coordinate system Enter the coordinate system code for the new
data store. If you dont know the code, click to select a coordinate system.
In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select
from a list of available coordinate systems. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system. Click OK. Choose a coordinate
system that both the provider and AutoCAD Map 3D support.
Data store extents Enter the new data stores minimum and maximum X
and Y spatial extents or accept the default values. You cant add objects that
are outside these extents.
For SQL Server, you must specify the extents of the data store or Bulk Copy
will fail when copying data from any other provider source to SQL Server.
MySQL and Oracle support expanding the extents automatically if incoming
data are beyond the scope of the extents.
Storage resolution Enter the new data stores X and Y tolerance or accept the
default value. If the distance between two points is smaller than the resolution,
the points are considered to be equivalent for most spatial tests.
Data store tablespace Enter the new data stores tablespace name (Oracle
only).
Use FDO Enabled Schema Specify whether the new data store will be
FDO-enabled or not. FDO-enabled data stores include additional FDO metadata,
but otherwise use native SQL Server schema capabilities.
Manage Versions dialog box
Use this dialog box to add, activate, merge, or drop versions for a data store
to which you are currently connected. When you save or discard a version,
all features in the drawing that were queried from that version are removed
from the drawing. You cannot undo saving or discarding a version.
If an error occurs during a version-management operation, the affected item
in the dialog box displays an error indicator. To see the cause of the error,
hold your cursor over this indicator. If you create a version and the operation
fails, you will see a new version with an error indicator. The version has not
really been created. It is a placeholder to display the error. Errors remain visible
until you close the dialog box, fix the errors, and redisplay the dialog box.
1748 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
For more information about versions, see Managing Versions (page 723).
To create a new version (page 725)
To activate a version (page 725)
To commit changes back to the data store (page 726)
To discard a version (page 726)
In Map Explorer, right-click a connection that supports versioning and click
Manage Versions.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To link external attribute
data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
(page 522).
Add
Create a new child version under the selected version in the Version tree.
Activate
Make the selected version the active one. Switching versions can take some
time to execute, because the data store may need to flush and reload the
feature cache.
Merge
Commit your edits to the selected version. This option is available for child
versions only. If you merge the active version, its parent version is activated
and then the selected version is merged and removed from the Version tree.
You cannot merge a version if it has children or if it has checked-out features.
Unlock any checked-out features by checking them in or cancelling check
out.
Drop
Discard the selected version. When you drop a version, all edits saved to
that version are discarded. This option is available for child versions only.
If you drop the active version, its parent version is activated and then the
selected version is dropped and removed from the Version tree.
You cannot drop a version if it has children or if it has checked-out features.
Unlock any checked-out features by checking them in or cancelling check
out.
Version Tree
View and select versions in the current data store. Each entry displays the
date and time it was created, its creator, and any comments entered at
Manage Versions dialog box | 1749
creation time. Right-click any version entry to add, activate, merge, or drop
it.
Resolve Feature Conflicts dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to handle changed objects when the object
has been changed in both the parent and the child version.
To commit changes back to the data store (page 726)
In Map Explorer, right-click the feature source and click Manage Versions.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial feature data only. To link external attribute
data to drawing objects, see Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
(page 522).
Choose The Parent Version
Keep the object in the parent version and discard changes in the child
version.
Choose The Child Version
Overwrite the object in the parent version with the changes from the child
version.
Cancel
Stop the Save operation. Determine which version of the objects to keep
and modify the child version accordingly.
1750 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
Metadata Dialog Boxes
Metadata Viewer
Use the Metadata Viewer to view metadata for the current drawing or for other
resources.
To view metadata (page 1487)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
From the Metadata Viewer you can also perform the following actions:
Import metadata
Export metadata
Print metadata
Publish metadata to an XML, HTML, or TXT file
Update forced-update fields
Update all fields
Edit metadata (through the Metadata Editor (page 1754))
Create a template from the current metadata
Specify metadata options (page 1756)
27
1751
Specify the metadata stylesheet
Display additional metadata that is not part of the standard (FGDC or ISO)
specified in the Metadata Options dialog box
Metadata Viewer Toolbar
Use the Metadata Viewer toolbar to perform the following actions.
Action Toolbar Button
Imports metadata from another program Import
Exports metadata to be read by another
program
Export
Prints metadata Print
Publishes metadata to an XML, HTML, or
TXT file
Publish
Updates forced-update fields Update Auto
Updates all fields (assumes that the auto-
matic update option is turned off)
Update All
Opens the Metadata Editor Edit
Creates a template from the currently-dis-
played metadata
Create Template
Opens the Metadata Options dialog box Options
Opens the New Features Workshop Learn More
Displays help for the Metadata Viewer Help
Current Drawing
The Current Drawing tree view lists the current drawing DWG (page 2061), and
any feature classes or object classes (resources (page 2072)) associated with it.
Show All Feature Classes
View metadata for all feature classes from connected feature sources.
1752 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Folder Shortcut
Use the Folder Shortcut tree view to display metadata for other files on your
local machine or on a server.
If you add or remove files from a folder that you uploaded to the Folder
Shortcut tree view, right-click in the tree view, and click Refresh.
Add
Create and view metadata for additional files.
Remove
Remove files you added to the Folder Shortcut tree view.
Metadata Tab
Display all the metadata related to the selected data source.
When you select a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically identifies all
the relevant metadata that it can, categorizes it according to the selected
standard, and displays it in the Metadata Viewer. This tab is like a web browser,
with links and levels you can expand or contract.
The Summary tab
If the selected data source is a file, use this tab to view basic information such
as file type, size, and location.
Stylesheet
Control the display of the metadata.
FGDC Classic/ISO Classic
Specify a standard for displaying the metadata.
XML
Display the metadata in freeform XML format.
Text
Display the metadata as text.
More Metadata
View metadata that is not part of the standard (FGDC or ISO) specified in the
Metadata Options dialog box (page 1756).
Metadata Viewer | 1753
Metadata Editor
Edit and update metadata.
To edit metadata (page 1499)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Metadata Editor Toolbar
Use the Metadata Editor toolbar to perform the following actions:
Action Toolbar Button
Apply a template (page 1492) to your
metadata.
Update (page ?) fields with values from
the current data source.
Audit (page ?) metadata for compliance
with the selected metadata standard.
Import (page 1511) metadata values from an
XML file that complies with the selected
metadata standard.
Highlight the field labels of forced-update
fields (page 2064).
Create a template (page 1492) from the
metadata you are working with.
1754 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Expand fields and field groups.
Collapse fields and field groups.
Metadata Fields
Enter metadata in the fields. A description and additional information are
displayed in the bottom area of the Metadata Editor when a field name or
field is selected.
Required fields are marked with a <Required> placeholder. Some fields accept
only certain types of data. For example, on the Identification tab, under Spatial
Domain, you cannot enter a text string in the North Bounding Coordinate
field because the domain (page 2060) of that field is a number.
Some fields store past entries. If a list of past entries is displayed, you can do
one of the following:
Select (page ?) the entry
Add (page 1500) a new entry
Edit (page 1501) a past entry
Delete (page 1501) an entry
For fields with predefined values, you can choose a value from the list or enter
a new one. However, your entries will not display the next time you click the
drop-down arrow.
NOTE For ISO date fields, use one of the following formats: YYYY-MM-DD,
YYYY-MM, or YYYY. For ISO date and time fields, use the following format:
YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.
Apply
Saves changes to the metadata without closing the Metadata Editor.
Metadata Editor | 1755
Attribute Editor
Edit ISO element attributes. The title and fields of the Attribute Editor change,
depending on the attribute.
To enter or edit metadata manually (page 1499)
In the Metadata Editor, right-click an element field name and select Edit Attribute.
Metadata Options dialog box
To set metadata options (page 241)
To import a template (page 1492)
To export a template (page 1496)
To remove a template (page 1497)
(page 1503)
Using Metadata Templates (page 1491)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Template Tab
Metadata standard
Specify the metadata standard.
The default metadata standard depends on your version of AutoCAD Map
3D.
Use template
Use the selected metadata template in the window below as the default.
Import
Import a metadata template.
Export
Export a metadata template.
1756 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Rename
Rename the selected metadata template.
Remove
Remove the selected metadata template.
Preference Tab
Latitude/Longitude Precision
For latitude and longitude, set the number of digits to display after the
decimal point. The default is 6.
Auto Update
Update metadata as soon as the data source is updated (or as soon as the
metadata is reconnected to its updated data source).
Import Metadata Options dialog box
To import metadata for DWGs or their resources (page 1511)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Open the original project DWG File
Open the original DWG as the current project. Any resources (page 2072) for
the imported DWG are displayed in the Current Drawing (page 1752) tree
view. Edit the metadata for those resources, or save the metadata as a
template.
Append the source metadata to the current metadata
Overwrite the current metadata with the source metadata.
Export Metadata dialog box
To export metadata (page 1513)
Import Metadata Options dialog box | 1757
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Select The Source Data Type For The Exported Metadata
Selected items
Export metadata only for the items selected in the Metadata Viewer (page
1751) .
All items in
Select Feature Source to export metadata for all features in the selected
source. Select Object Class to export metadata for all objects in the selected
class. Select both to include all features and objects.
Create Metadata Template dialog box
Create a template from the current metadata.
To create a template (page 1492)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Template
The name of the template.
Compound Element Metadata Editors
Citation Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
1758 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Use the Citation Information Editor to enter information about published
geospatial data using the United States FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063) field
definitions.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
The Citation Information Editor has the following sections:
General Information
Title
Enter a title. The NOAA Coastal Services Center suggests including a topic,
time period, and place. You can also include the file name, data source, and
data resolution (if applicable). AutoCAD Map 3D populates the field with
the name of the selected resource in the Metadata Viewer (page 1751).
Originator
Enter the originator, generally the organization that created the resource.
For example, specify a county planning department. You can include more
than one originator. Put ed. after the name of an editor, and comp.
after the name of a compiler. Use the Record Navigator (page 1506) to locate
a previous entry, delete an entry, or add a new one.
Publication date
Enter a date in one of the following formats:
YYYYMMDD
bcYYYYMMDD
ccYYYYY
cdYYYYY
If you do not know the date, select an option in the drop-down list.
Publication time
Enter a time in one of the following formats:
HHMMSSSS
HHMMSSSSshhmm
Citation Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1759
HHMMSSSSZ
Edition
Enter the version of the publication.
Geospatial data presentation form
Specify the format or media used to present the data. Select an option from
the drop-down list or enter an FGDC-approved alternative. If you enter an
alternative, it is saved in the current field but is not added to the list.
Other citation details
Enter additional information to help users access and use your data.
Online linkage
Specify the URL of the online resource where the data is published. Use
the Record Navigator (page 1506) to locate, add, or delete URLs.
Series Information
Series name
If the data is part of a series, enter the name of the series.
Issue identification
If the data is part of a series, enter the issue number.
Publication Information
Publication place
Enter the city in which the data was published. If the name is not unique,
include the state or province and country.
Publisher
Specify the person or organization that published the data.
Large Work Citation
Larger work citation
If the data is part of a larger work with several data sets that require their
own citation information, click Detail to launch an empty Citation
Information Editor. Do this for as many data sets as needed.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
String title Title 8.4
String origin Originator 8.1
1760 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Date/time pubdate Publication date 8.2
Date/time pubtime Publication time 8.3
String edition Edition 8.5
String geoform Geospatial data
presentation
form
8.6
String othercit Other citation
details
8.9
URL onlink Online linkage 8.10
String sername Series name 8.71
String issue Issue ID 8.72
String pubplace Publication place 8.81
String publish Publisher 8.82
Various lworkcit Larger work cita-
tion
8.11
Time Period Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
Time Period Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1761
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Compound sngdate Single date/time 9.1
Date caldate Calendar date 9.1.1
Time time Time of day 9.1.2
Compound mdattim Multiple
dates/times
9.2
Compound rngdates Range of
dates/times
9.3
Date begdate Beginning date 9.3.1
Time begtime Beginning time 9.3.2
Date enddate Ending date 9.3.3
Time endtime Ending time 9.3.4
Contact Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Contact information is part of the Distribution section of the FGDC
specification. The Distribution section is conditional (mandatory if applicable).
1762 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
The requirements for individual elements and compound elements (page 2057)
assume you will include contact information in your metadata. It is mandatory
if you include contact information.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Select one of two
choices
cntperp Primary contact 10.1
String cntper Person name 10.1.1
String cntorg Organization 10.1.2
String cntpos Contact position 10.3
Menu choice addrtype Address type 10.4.1
String address Address 10.4.2
String city City 10.4.3
String state State or province 10.4.4
String postal Postal code 10.4.5
String country Country 10.4.6
String cntvoice Contact voice
phone
10.5
String cnttdd TDD/TTY tele-
phone
10.6
String cntfax Facsimile tele-
phone
10.7
String cntemail E-mail address 10.8
String hours Hours of Service 10.9
String cntinst Contact instruc-
tions
10.10
Contact Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1763
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
Access the Spatial Data Organization Information Editor from the Metadata
Editor (page 1754). Describe the methods you used to represent spatial
information in the data set, and how the data is organized, including direct
and indirect spatial references. The fields in the Spatial Data Organization
Information Editor accept metadata about the number and type of objects in
your data set, the terminology set you use to describe the data, and other
information about the nature of the data.
To add records using the Record Navigator (page 1507)
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Spatial Data Organization
Describe the methods you use for your data. Indirect data describes the location
of the spatial data, while direct data tells users how you visually represented
the data in your resource.
Indirect spatial reference
Specify the methods you used to identify geographic locations, for example,
formal methods (such as the Geographic Names Index system place names,
Public Land Survey System locations, or Federal Information Processing
System location codes); or less formal methods such as the name of a county,
or a street address. These references do not include coordinates.
Direct spatial reference method
Select the direct method you used to represent objects:
Point
Vector
Raster
1764 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Point and vector object information
Specify the type of vector or non-gridded point objects used in the data set,
and how many there are. If the direct spatial reference method is either
Point or Vector, select whether you use SDTS terms or VPF terms.
If you select either Point or Vector, the following fields are displayed:
SDTS Terms
VPF Terms
VPF Topology Level
Point And vector Object Type
Point And Vector Object Count
SDTS Terms/VPF Terms
This field name changes depending on the terminology set you select.
SDTS terms description
Select the appropriate point or vector information that uses terminology
and concepts from Spatial Data Concepts, Part 1, Chapter 2, in Department
of Commerce, 1992, Spatial Data Transfer Standard (SDTS) (Federal
Information Processing Standard 173): Washington, Department of
Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology. The reference
to the SDTS is used only as a name for the method used to describe the
point and vector objects. This method is selected by default in the dialog
box.
NOTE If you select one of the options, but later decide to select the other, close
the Spatial Data Organization Information Editor and re-open it to reset the
fields.
If you select SDTS terms, complete the following fields:
SDTS point and vector object type
Select the type of point or vector objects you use to identify zero-, one-,
and two-dimensional locations in the data set.
Point and vector object count
Specify the number of point or vector objects in your data set.
VPF terms description
If you select VPF terms, complete the following fields as many times as
necessary. Use the Record Navigator to add new fields.
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1765
VPF topology level
Indicate how completely the topology is represented in the data set. This
field becomes available if you select VPF terms. These levels are defined in
the following publication: Department of Defense, 1992, Vector Product
Format (MIL-STD-600006): Philadelphia, Department of Defense, Defense
Printing Service Detachment Office. The reference to the VPF is used only
as a name for the method used to describe the point and vector objects.
VPF point and vector object type
Select one of the following:
Node
Edge
Face
Text
This is point or vector information that uses the terminology and concepts
defined in: Department of Defense, 1992, Vector Product Format
(MIL-STD-600006): Philadelphia, Department of Defense, Defense Printing
Service Detachment Office.
VPF point and vector object count
Specify the number of point or vector objects in your data set.
Raster object information
If you select Raster as the direct spatial reference method, the following
fields are displayed:
Raster object type
Row count
Column count
Vertical count
This describes the types of raster objects in the data set, and how many
rows and columns they have for flat, rectangular objects; or the number of
objects along the Z-axis (verticals) for three-dimensional, rectangular objects.
Raster object type
Select the type of raster objects you use to identify zero-, one-, and
two-dimensional locations in the data set.
If you selected Point, Pixel, or Grid Cell, complete the following fields:
1766 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Row count
Enter the number of object rows along the Y-axis of the raster.
Column count
Enter the number of object rows along the X-axis of the raster.
If you selected Point, Pixel, or Grid Cell and the data is three-dimensional,
complete the Vertical Count field.
Vertical count
Enter the number of objects along the vertical Z-axis.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
String indspref Indirect spatial
reference
3.1
Menu choice direct Direct spatial ref-
erence method
3.2
Compound ptvctinf Point and vector
object informa-
tion
3.3
Menu choice sdtstype SDTS point and
vector object
type
3.3.1.1
Integer ptvctcnt Point and vector
object count
3.3.1.2
Compound vpfterm VPF terms descrip-
tion
3.3.2
Integer vpflevel VPF topology
level
3.3.2.1
Compound vpfinfo VPF point and
vector object in-
formation
3.3.2.2
Integer vpftype VPF point and
vector object
type
3.3.2.2.1
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1767
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Compound rastinfo Raster object in-
formation
3.4
String rasttype Raster object
type
3.4.1
Integer rowcount Row count 3.4.2
Integer colcount Column count 3.4.3
Integer vrtcount Vertical count 3.4.4
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
The Horizontal Coordinate System Definition section is conditional overall.
The requirements for elements and compound elements (page 2057) within the
definition assume you will include it.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Compound horizsys Horizontal co-
ordinate system
4.1
Compound geograph Geographic 4.1.1
Real number latres Latitude resolu-
tion
4.1.1.1
1768 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Real number longres Longitude resolu-
tion
4.1.1.2
Menu choice geogunit Geographic co-
ordinate units
4.1.1.3
Compound planar Planar 4.1.2
Menu choice mapprojn Map projection
name
4.1.2.1.1
Real number stdparll Standard parallel 4.1.2.1.23.1
Real number longcm Longitude of
central meridian
4.1.2.1.23.2
Real number latprjo Latitude of projec-
tion origin
4.1.2.1.23.3
Real number feast False easting 4.1.2.1.23.4
Real number fnorth False northing 4.1.2.1.23.5
Real number sfequat Scale factor at
equator
4.1.2.1.23.6
Real number heightpt Height of per-
spective point
above surface
4.1.2.1.23.7
Real number longpc Longitude of pro-
jection center
4.1.2.1.23.8
Real number latprjc Latitude of projec-
tion center
4.1.2.1.23.9
Real number sfctrlin Scale factor at
center line
4.1.2.1.23.10
Compound obqlazim Oblique line azi-
muth
4.1.2.1.23.11
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1769
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Real number azimangl Azimuthal angle 4.1.2.1.23.11.1
Real number azimptl Azimuth measure
point longitude
4.1.2.1.23.11.2
Compound obqlpt Oblique line
point
4.1.2.1.23.12
Real number obqllat Oblique line latit-
ude
4.1.2.1.23.12.1
Real number obqllong Oblique line lon-
gitude
4.1.2.1.23.12.2
Real number svlong Straight vertical
longitude from
pole
4.1.2.1.23.13
Real number sfprjorg Scale factor at
projection origin
4.1.2.1.23.14
Integer landsat Landsat number 4.1.2.1.23.15
Integer pathnum Path number 4.1.2.1.23.16
Real number sfctrmer Scale factor at
central meridian
4.1.2.1.23.17
Compound gridsys Grid coordinate
system
4.1.2.2
Menu choice gridsysn Grid coordinate
system name
4.1.2.2.1
Compound utm Universal trans-
verse mercator
(UTM)
4.1.2.2.2
Integer utmzone UTM zone num-
ber
4.1.2.2.2.1
1770 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Compound ups Universal polar
stereographic
(UPS)
4.1.2.2.2.3
Menu choice upszone UPS zone identifi-
er
4.1.2.2.2.3.1
Compound spcs State plane co-
ordinate system
(SPCS)
4.1.2.2.4
String spcszone SPCS zone identi-
fier
4.1.2.2.4.1
Compound arcsys ARC coordinate
system
4.1.2.2.5
Integer arczone ARC system zone
identifier
4.1.2.2.5.1
String othergrd Other grid sys-
tems definition
4.1.2.2.6
Compound localp Local planar 4.1.2.3
String localpd Local planar de-
scription
4.1.2.3.1
String localpgi Local planar
georeference in-
formation
4.1.2.3.2
Compound planci Planar coordinate
information
4.1.2.4
Choose one of
three
plance Planar coordinate
encoding meth-
od
4.1.2.4.1
Compound coordrep Coordinate pair 4.1.2.4.2
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1771
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Real number absres Abscissa resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.2.1
Real number ordres Ordinate resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.2.2
Real number distbrep Distance and
bearing
4.1.2.4.3
Real number distres Distance resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.3.1
Real number bearres Bearing resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.3.2
Menu choice bearunit Bearing units 4.1.2.4.3.3
Menu choice bearrefd Bearing reference
direction
4.1.2.4.3.4
Menu choice bearrefm Bearing reference
meridian
4.1.2.4.3.5
Menu choice plandu Planar distance
units
4.1.2.4.4.
Compound local Local 4.1.3
String localdes Local description 4.1.3.1
String localgeo Local georefer-
ence information
4.1.3.2
Compound geodetic Geodetic model 4.1.4
Menu choice horizdn Horizontal datum
name
4.1.4.1
Menu choice ellips Ellipsoid name 4.1.4.2
Real number semiaxis Semi-major axis 4.1.4.3
1772 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Real number denflat Denominator of
flattening ratio
4.1.4.4
Attribute Domain Values Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Choose one of
four
attrdomv Attribute domain
values
5.1.2.4
Compound edom Enumerated do-
main
5.1.2.4.1
String edomv Enumerated do-
main value
5.1.2.4.1.1
String edomvd Enumerated do-
main value defini-
tion
5.1.2.4.1.2
String edomvds Enumerated do-
main value defini-
tion source
5.1.2.4.1.3
Compound rdom Range domain 5.1.2.4.2
String rdommin Range domain
minimum
5.1.2.4.2.1
Attribute Domain Values Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1773
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
String rdommax Range domain
maximum
5.1.2.4.2.2
String attrunit Attribute units of
measure
5.1.2.4.2.3
Real attrmres Attribute meas-
urement resolu-
tion
5.1.2.4.2.4
Compound codesetd Codeset domain 5.1.2.4.3
String codestn Codeset name 5.1.2.4.3.1
String codesets Codeset resource 5.1.2.4.3.2
String udom Unrepresentable
domain
5.1.2.4.4
Standard Order Process Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field.
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
String fees Fees 6.4.3
String ordering Ordering instruc-
tions
6.4.4
1774 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
String turnaround Turnaround 6.4.5
Choose one of
two
stdorder Standard order
process
6.4
String nondig Non-digital form
option
6.4.1
Menu choice formname Format name 6.4.2.1.1
String formspec Specification 6.4.2.1.4
String formvern Format version
number
6.4.2.1.2
Date formverd Format version
date
6.4.2.1.3
Real number transize Transfer size 6.4.2.1.7
Compound onlinopt Online option
collection
6.4.2.2.1
Choose one of
two
computer Computer con-
tact information
6.4.2.2.1.1
Compound networka Network address 6.4.2.2.1.1.1
String networkr Network resource
name
6.4.2.2.1.1.1.1
Compound dialinst Dialup instruc-
tions
6.4.2.2.1.2
Integer lowbps Lowest bps 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.1
Integer highbps Highest bps 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.2
Integer numdata Number databits 6.4.2.2.1.2.3
Integer numstop Number stopbits 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.4
Standard Order Process Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1775
Data Type Short Name Field Title FGDC Field ID
Menu choice parity Parity 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.5
Menu choice compress Compression
support
6.4.2.2.1.1.2.6
String dialtel Dialup telephone 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.7
String dialfile Dialup file name 6.4.2.2.1.1.2.8
String accinstr Access instruc-
tions
6.4.2.2.1.2
String oncomp Online computer
and operating
system
6.4.2.2.1.3
Compound offoptn Offline option
collection
6.4.2.2.2
Menu choice offmedia Offline media 6.4.2.2.2.1
Real number recden Recording dens-
ity
6.4.2.2.2.2.1
String recdenu Recording dens-
ity units
6.4.2.2.2.2.2
String recfmt Recording format 6.4.2.2.2.3
String compat Compatibility in-
formation
6.4.2.2.2.4
Responsible Party Editor (ISO Metadata)
Enter metadata for the Responsible Party compound element.
Related procedures:
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
1776 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
The Citation Editor (ISO Metadata)
Enter metadata for the Citation compound element
To edit a compound metadata element (page 1506)
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools View Metadata.
The Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) | 1777
1778
Object Classification
Dialog Boxes
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command)
Use this command to select all drawing objects that were classified with specific
object classes.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class (page 993)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Select Classified.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects
Do one of the following:
Press Enter to select all classified objects.
Enter the name of the object class whose objects you want to select. You
can use wildcards to select multiple object classes. For example, enter r*
to specify all object classes whose name begins with "r". For more
information on using wildcards, see Wildcard Characters (page 1537).
28
1779
Objects classified with the specified object classes are selected.
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command)
Use this command to select all drawing objects that have not been classified.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class (page 993)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Select Unclassified.
Unclassified objects are selected.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command)
Use this command to select all drawing objects that have been classified, but
whose object class definition is not included in the object class definition file
attached to the drawing.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class (page 993)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Select Undefined.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
An object can be classified but not included in the object class definition file
attached to the drawing if you classify the objects using one object class
1780 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
definition file, and then attach a different object class definition file that does
not include a definition for this object class.
Undefined objects are selected.
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box
The object class definition file includes the set of object classes you will use
with this drawing.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the file that you want to insert on the command line.
For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
To attach an object class definition file (page 995)
To use object classification (page 981)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Attach Definition.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Look In
Select the drive and folder that contains the object class definition file.
File Name
Type or select the name of the object class definition file.
Files Of Type
Leave this set to Object Definition File.
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box | 1781
Classified Property List dialog box
Use this dialog box to review the properties included in this object class
definition and the settings for those properties.
To define an object class (page 120)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
To change any settings, return to the Define Object Classification dialog box
(page 1785) and select the property you want to edit.
Classify dialog box
Assign an object class to selected objects.
To assign an object class to an existing object (page 989)
To create a classified drawing object (page 988)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Classify.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Classification Name
Lists the object classes and the object types to which they can be assigned.
Select the object class you want to assign to the objects.
Include Objects...
Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet the classification
rules for this object. Property values that are out of range will be reset to
1782 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
the default value for the property. If you clear this option, objects with
out-of-range values are not classified.
Exclude Objects...
Does not classify objects that have another object class already assigned. If
you clear this option, the existing object class is removed and the new one
is assigned.
Classify Objects dialog box
Apply the specified object class to the selected drawing objects.
To assign an object class to an existing object (page 989)
To create a classified drawing object (page 988)
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click an object class Create
Classified Object.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Include Objects...
Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet the classification
rules for this object class. If you clear this option, objects with out-of-range
values are not classified.
Exclude Objects...
Does not classify objects that have another object class already assigned. If
you clear this option, the existing object class is removed and the new one
is assigned.
Color Range Editor dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which colors to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
Classify Objects dialog box | 1783
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Click Add below the List Of Colors following your selection. All colors listed
in the List Of Colors are valid colors for this object class.
Color Range
Allow Any Color
Accepts any color as valid for this object class.
Add A Specific Color
Adds a specific color to the List Of Colors.
In the Color list, select the color to include, or choose Select Color to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an index color, a true
color, or a color book color.
Add A Range Of Colors
Adds a range of colors to the List Of Colors.
In the First Color list, select the color at the beginning of the range. In the
Last Color list, select the color at the end of the range.
All colors whose index color number falls between the two selected colors
are considered valid for this object class.
List Of Colors
Lists the colors currently included in the object class.
To delete a color from the list, select the color and click Remove.
To add a color to the list, choose Add A Specific Color or Add A Range
Of Colors, and select the colors you want to add.
To modify a color in the list, select the color in the list, choose Add A
Specific Color or Add A Range Of Colors, and select the colors you want
to add. Click Update.
1784 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Define Object Classification dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new object class definition or edit an existing
definition.
To define an object class (page 120)
To set up object classification (page ?)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
The new object class definition is added to the current object class definition
file. Users can use these object class definitions to create objects that
automatically have the properties you define in this dialog box.
Class Name
Specifies the name for the object class. The name can include spaces, and
is not case sensitive.
Description
Specifies the description for the object class.
Based On
Specifies that this object class will be based on an existing object class
definition. All of the settings for the base object class are automatically
included in this object class definition, and if you modify the base class,
the modifications are included in this object class definition. You can add
additional settings to this object class definition.
To select a base class, the base class must have the same create method as
the class you are defining.
Use As Base Object Classification Only
Specifies that the current class can be used only as a base class. You will not
be able to create an object using this object class.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
Applies To (page 1786)
Properties List (page 1786)
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1785
Class Settings (page 1788)
Feature Source Settings (page 1788)
Applies To
Object Types
Specifies the object types that may be tagged with this definition. Available
object types are determined by the base class, if there is one, and the selected
example objects.
TIP Select the most specific object type that applies to all objects in this object
class. For example, if all the objects will be circles, select AcDbCircle.
Properties List
Available Properties
Specifies the properties that will apply to all objects created with this object
class. Available properties are based on the objects selected in the drawing,
the base class, if one is selected, and the object types selected on the Applies
To tab.
If no properties appear, select an object type on the Applies To tab.
Select a check box to include the property in the object class. Highlight a
property to view or change its attribute values.
If this object class is based on another object class, you cannot clear a check
box for a property that is assigned in the "based on" class.
Property Attributes
Specifies the settings for each property.
To change the value for Type, Range, Default, Visible, or Read Only, click on
the value.
Type
For properties that you've created, set the data type. Specify Integer, Real,
Text String, 3D Point, or Yes/No. For other properties, the type is set
automatically and cannot be changed. (For information on creating a new
property, see New Property (page ?) below.)
Range
Specify the allowable values for this property. This allowable range is used
in the following situations:
When users classify an existing object with this object class definition.
When users use the Object Class tab of the Properties palette to edit
property values for an object classified with this object class definition.
1786 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
In each case, the value for the property must fall within this range.
For many properties, such as color, lineweight, line type, plot style, and
layer, you can select from a list of available values. To display the list, click
on the value you want to change. Click [...] to display a dialog where you
can specify the range.
When specifying the range values, keep these points in mind:
To enter a list of values for the range, separate each value with a comma,
for example, 15,25,35, or Paved,Gravel,Dirt. To enter a continuous range,
use square brackets around the first and last value, for example, [2,8].
When specifying integers, you can specify values between -2147483628
and +2147483627 (32-bit signed integer).
To specify a lineweight, enter the decimals as integers. For example, to
specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Default
The default is used when an object has a value assigned that is out of the
range. This can happen if the value is assigned before the object is classified
or if the object is edited outside the Object Class tab. As soon as the object
is selected when the Object Class tab is active, the value will be reset to the
default.
When specifying the default for properties such as color, lineweight, line
type, plot style, and layer, you can select from a list of available values. To
display the list, click on the value you want to change. Click the down
arrow to display a list of available value, or click [...] to see additional choices.
Visible
Specify whether the property should appear on the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette. You may want to turn visibility off if you want a property
set to a single value that users can't edit. In this case, set both the range and
the default to the same value.
Read Only
Controls whether the property of a classified object is editable on the Object
Class tab. If this is set to Yes, the value is displayed in gray.
To view attribute settings for all selected properties, click Show List.
New Property
Displays the New Property dialog box (page 1791), where you can add a new
property to the Available Properties list.
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1787
The new property appears in the Properties palette and can be edited in the
same way as other properties.
Show List
Displays the Classified Property List dialog box (page 1782), which lists all the
selected properties and their attribute settings. This is a convenient way to
check your properties before you save the definition.
Class Settings
Show Object Class In Map Explorer
Displays the object class name in Map Explorer. When this option is cleared,
this object class name is hidden in Map Explorer.
Class Icon
Selects the bitmap to use for this object class in Map Explorer.
Be sure the location you specify is available to everyone who will use this
object class definition file. If you store the object class definition file on the
network, store the bitmaps in the same location.
Use Standard Icon
Displays the standard icon for the object class in Map Explorer. When this
option is cleared, choose the icon to display.
Create Method
Specifies the object to create when creating a new object in this object class.
You can select only objects that are appropriate for the object type you
selected on the Applies To tab.
Select None if you do not want to specify a create method for this object
class. This is useful for base classes, where each subclass may specify a
different create method.
In the Geometric Settings table, specify any additional parameters to set
when creating objects in this object class.
Feature Source Settings
Specify how to treat linked data when you add an object to a feature source.
Move my linked data to Feature Source
When you add an object with linked data to a feature source, the data from
the linked data source is copied to the feature source.
Keep my data linked in Feature Source
When you add an object with linked data to a feature source, the link is
copied to the feature source.
1788 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Layer Range Editor dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which AutoCAD layers to allow for this object
class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
You can choose from a list of all AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
Layer Range
Allow Any Layer
Accepts any AutoCAD layer as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Layers
Accepts only specific AutoCAD layers for this object class. In the Layer list,
select the AutoCAD layers to include.
Linetype Range Editor dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which linetypes to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Layer Range Editor dialog box | 1789
You can choose from a list of all linetypes in the current drawing.
Linetype Range
Allow Any Linetype
Accepts any linetype as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Linetypes
Accepts only specific linetypes for this object class. In the Linetype list,
select the linetypes to include.
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which lineweights to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Lineweight Range
Allow Any Lineweight
Accepts any lineweight as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Lineweights
Accepts only specific lineweights for this object class. In the Lineweight
list, select the lineweights to include.
New Object Class Definition File dialog box
Use this dialog box to create an object definition file.
To create a new object classification file (page 129)
To set up object classification (page 118)
1790 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel New Definition.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
The object class definition file includes information on how to create each of
the object classes you defined. Only definitions in the object class definition
file attached to a drawing can be assigned to objects in the drawing or used
to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object class definition file, you must have Alter Object
Class privileges (page 83).
Look In
Select the drive and folder where you want to store the object class definition
file.
File Name
Type a name for the new object class definition file.
Files Of Type
Leave this set to Object Definition File.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the object class definition file that you want to create
on the command line. For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
New Property dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new property for the object class.
To define an object class (page 120)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
New Property dialog box | 1791
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
Property Heading Category
Specify a category for the new property.
Property Name
Specify a name for the new property.
When you close this dialog box, the new property will appear in the Properties
List of the Define Object Classification dialog box. If you add this new property
to the current object class definition file, the property will appear on the
Object Class tab of the Properties palette.
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which plotstyles to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 125)
Click Map Setup tab Object Class panel Define.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information on the
classification systems used by geospatial feature data, see Overview of Geospatial
Data (page 551).
You can choose from a list of all plotstyles in the current drawing.
Plotstyle Range
Allow Any Plotstyle
Specify any plotstyle that is valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Plotstyles
Specify a specific plotstyle for this object class. In the plotstyle list, select
the plotstyles to include.
1792 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Object Data Dialog Boxes
Attach Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to view the fields in the table and to view or edit the values
for those fields.
To attach data to an object (page 1064)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Attach/Detach Object Data.
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with a
feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins
(page 507).
The Object Data Field area lists the fields in the table and the values for those
fields. To change any value, highlight it in the Value box, type the new value,
and press Enter. When you finish updating values, click OK.
29
1793
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to add data to an object data table and attach that data to
an object, or to detach existing data from an object.
To attach data to an object (page 1064)
Click Create tab Drawing Object panel Attach/Detach Object Data.
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with
a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins
(page 507).
Table
View all the tables in the current drawing. Select the table containing the
data fields to attach.
Object Data Field
View all the data fields in the selected table and the current value for each
field.
If two attached drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map
3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To change the value to attach, highlight the field and type a new value in
the Value box.
Value
View the default value for the selected field.
To specify a different value, type a new one.
Attach to Objects <
Return to your map, where you can select the objects to attach the data to.
Detach from Objects
Return to your map, where you can select the objects to detach.
All data from the selected table is removed from the objects.
Overwrite
Overwrite any existing values for this table with the new values.
1794 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
If the box is not selected, the object will have two values assigned for the
data fields in the table.
Select the box when you want only one set of values attached to the object,
as when specifying a pipe diameter or a desk height. Clear the box when
the object can have multiple sets of values assigned to it, as when specifying
software installed on a computer or types of plants in a landscape section.
Define
Display the Define Object Data dialog box, where you can create new tables
or modify existing tables.
To attach data to an object, select a table and review or change the default
values. Click Attach To Objects. When you finish selecting objects in your
drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a record for each object and attaches the
records to the objects.
If you selected Overwrite, the new record replaces any existing record from
this table. If you don't select Overwrite, the object can have more than one
record from the table.
To detach data, select a table. Click Detach From Objects. When you return
to your map, select all the objects you want to detach the data from.
Edit Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to view and edit object data.
To modify an object data table (page 203)
Click Modify menu Edit Object Data.
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with
a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins
(page 507).
To view data from a different table, select the table from the list.
To view data for a different object, click Select Object.
Edit Object Data dialog box | 1795
To change a value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter. You must
have Edit Drawing privileges to edit object data. See User Administration
dialog box (page 1934)
Table
View all tables with data attached to the selected object.
Select a table to view or edit.
Object Data Field/Value
View the field values for the selected object.
If the object has more than one record from the selected table, use Next,
Prior, First, and Last to view the other records.
Nested Data
Determine whether the values displayed are for the nested object, or only
for its parent object.
If the box is selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows information
for just the selected object.
If the box is not selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows
information for the parent object. If the object has more than one parent
object, select one from the list.
Value
View the current value for the selected field.
To change the value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter.
Select Object
To view and edit data for another object, click Select Object and select a
new object.
Insert Record
Attach a new record from this table to the object. The record contains the
current values for each field.
Delete Record
Remove the record from the object.
1796 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Rename Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to rename the selected table.
To modify an object data table (page 203)
Click Map Setup tab Attribute Data panel Define Object Data.
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with
a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins
(page 507).
The table name cannot include spaces.
Before you rename a table:
All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table will not be renamed for
that drawing.
Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings
or close the current drawing and reopen it.
If you change a table name, be sure to update any queries that reference the
table.
Select Link Template Key dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the fields from the current object data table to
use as key fields in the database table.
To open a linked database table (page 527)
Rename Table dialog box | 1797
At the Command prompt, enter mapviewlink.
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. To see information about a feature source or attribute data you use with
a feature source, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125) and Overview of Joins
(page 507).
Method area
Select the method for setting key fields.
Reference Existing Fields
Use existing fields as key fields.
If you select this option, select the fields to use in the Existing Fields area.
Generate Key Field
Create a new field to use as the key field.
If you select this option, specify a name for the field in the Generate Key
area. When the database table is created, this field will contain a unique
number for each record.
Existing Fields area
If you select Reference Existing Fields, select the fields to use as key fields.
To specify a key field, select the field and click On.
To deselect a key field, select the field and click Off.
To change the name of a field, select the field, type a new name in the
Rename box. Click Rename.
Generate Key area
If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the new field. The name
must be different from other fields in the table.
1798 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Other Dialog Boxes
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
Use this command to specify a new label point for an object.
An object's label point is used as the reference point when you add text to an
object during property alteration. By default, the label point is the centroid of
the object. Use this command to specify a different label point.
Respond to the prompts:
Select object:
Use any object selection method.
Pick new text location <X,Y>:
Enter new X and Y coordinates, separated by a comma.
To use this label point when inserting text during a property alteration, choose
LABELPT from the Insert Point list in the Define Text dialog box.
AutoCAD Map Messages dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information and error messages. To view additional
information about a message, select the message and click Show Log File.
The dialog box has the following windows:
Messages
View brief explanations of the error.
Message details
View additional details about the error, and the code associated with it.
30
1799
Browse/Search dialog box
Use this dialog box to display preview images of drawings, open drawings,
and search for files. Use the browser to search for files across multiple
directories on a single drive or on multiple drives.
The Browse tab displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified
directory. You can sort the preview images by file type.
Browse tab
File Name
The name of the currently selected drawing.
Directories
The names of the directories on the current drive.
Drives
The names of the available drives.
List Files of Type
Select file types to browse for, including drawing files (DWG), drawing
interchange format files (DXF), and drawing template files (DWT).
Size
Change the size of the preview images. The options are Small, Medium,
and Large.
Network
Use the Map Network Drive dialog box (a Windows system window) to
connect to networked drives.
Search tab
Files
View a list of files that meet the search criteria.
Search Pattern
Enter a pattern to search for in file name, based on file type. For example,
enter floor* to search for all files that begin with "floor" and are of the file
type specified.
If you use wild-card characters, and if the search string does not contain
path separators, the search attempts to match either the full path or just
the file name portion of the path.
1800 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
File Types
Select the types of files to search for.
Date Filter
Search forward or backward from the specified time or date.
Time
Enter the time from which the system searches forward or backward.
Date
Enter the date from which the system searches. The specified date must be
1/1/80 or later.
Search Location
Specify which drives and paths the system searches.
Drive
View all currently attached drives.
All Drives
View all local hard drives, including removable and network drives.
Path
View directories.
Open
Open the selected file.
Search
Begin searching for the named file according to the search location
information. This option changes to Stop Search once the search begins.
Create Centroids dialog box
Use the Create Centroids dialog box to create centroids in the middle of
selected closed polylines or polygons, and move any object data or SQL link
data from the closed object to the centroid.
When you use this feature, AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the selected polygons
and closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each
other, and that the closed object has an area greater than 0. Centroids are
created with a Z value of 0.
Create Centroids dialog box | 1801
If the closed object has holes, the centroid will be placed in the center of the
enclosed area, regardless of whether it falls within a hole or not. For a 'figure
eight' polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D will create one centroid.
Create Centroids In
Select the polylines or polygons for which you want to create centroids.
All Closed Objects
Create centroids for all polygons and closed polylines.
Selected Only
Create centroids only for selected polygons and polylines. Click Select
Objects or Quick Select to select the polylines and polygons.
Creation Options
Specify where to create the centroids and what point or block to use for
centroids.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for the new centroids. Click the down arrow to select from
a list of layers in the drawing. If the layer you want is not listed, it may be
frozen or locked. To create the centroids on a new layer, click Create On
Layer.
Create Using
To create centriods as points, select ACAD_POINT. To create centroids using
an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the block.
Related procedures:
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887)
Data Expression dialog box
Select a data location.
Attribute
To use data in an attribute, select Attribute. Select the attribute from the
Attributes list. To view attributes in a different block, select the block from
the Blocks list.
1802 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Object Data
To use data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select the field from
the Object Data Fields list. To view fields in a different table, select the table
from the Tables list.
Database Link
To use data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link. Select the
column from the Key Columns list. To view columns in a different link
template, select the link template from the list.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new object data table or to modify an existing
table.
To add a data field, enter a new Field Name in the Field Definition section.
Enter the information for the new data field. When you finish, click Add.
To edit an existing field, select it from the Object Data Fields list. Edit the
information in the Field Definition section. When you finish, click Update.
Table Name
If you are modifying an existing table, the name of the table appears in the
box.
If you are creating a new table, enter a name for the table. A table name
cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric character.
NOTE Do not use a table name that is already used in another drawing, unless
this table will have the same field definitions as that table. If two source drawings
have tables with the same name but different definitions, AutoCAD Map 3D
uses the table definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the
second table is not available.
Object Data Fields
Select a data field to update or to delete a field.
The Object Data Fields list displays all data fields in the selected table.
If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map
3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To edit a data field, select its name in the list. Information about the
field appears in the Field Definition section. Change any information.
Click Update.
To delete a field, select its name in the list. Click Delete.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box | 1803
To delete all the fields in the list, click Delete All.
Field Definition
Change information about an existing field or specify information for a new
field.
To change information about an existing field, select its name in the Object
Data Fields list. Information about the field appears in the Field Definition
area. Change any information. Click Update.
To add a new field, enter a new name in the Field Name box. Enter information
about the field. Click Add.
NOTE Before you add a field to an existing object data table, be sure all drawings
that use this table are attached and active. Objects in active drawings are
automatically updated to include the new field and are assigned the default value
for the field. If an object that uses this table is not in an active drawing when the
table is modified, the data attached to the object is not modified.
Field Name
Enter a name for the data field.
The name cannot contain any spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character.
Type
Select a data type.
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Character
Any characters, up to 132 characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description
Enter a description for the data field.
This description appears in the Object Data Fields list.
1804 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Default
Specify a default value for the data field.
The value must match the data type you selected above.
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to
an object.
Before you modify a table
All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table definition will not be
updated for that drawing. If two source drawings have tables with the
same name but different definitions, this operation affects the table
definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the second
table is not available.
Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened
the current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source
drawings or close the current drawing and reopen it.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Superuser. Use the User Login dialog box (page 1937) command to log in as a
Superuser, or contact your system administrator.
Related procedures:
To create an object data table (page 201)
Define Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to create object data tables and data fields. Object data
tables store information about the objects in your drawings.
Create an object data table by entering a name for the table and defining the
fields in the table.
Table list
View all tables in the current drawing.
To view the object data fields in a table, select the table name from the list.
Object Data Fields
View the fields in the selected table.
Define Object Data dialog box | 1805
If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map
3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To view Field Definition information for a field, select the field.
Field Definition
Displays the values for the selected field.
Field Name
The name of the field.
Data Type
The type of information that can be entered in the field.
Description
The description assigned to the field.
Default
The default value assigned to the field.
To change any values, click Modify.
New Table
Display the Define Object Data Table dialog box, where you can create a
new table and define new object data fields.
Modify
Display the Modify Object Data Table dialog box, where you can modify
the selected table and define or delete object data fields.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Superuser. Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact
your system administrator.
Rename
Display the Rename Table dialog box, where you can enter a new name for
the selected table.
NOTE If you rename a table, be sure to update any queries that call that table.
Delete
Delete the selected table.
NOTE If any data from this table is attached to objects, the data is deleted
from those objects when you remove the table.
1806 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Before you delete a table
All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the object data from the table
is not removed from that drawing.
Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings
or close the current drawing and reopen it.
This dialog box displays information about the tables in your drawing.
Some of the tables on this list contain information that AutoCAD Map 3D
needs. If you select one of these needed tables, you cannot change the
information or remove or rename the table. You can view the information.
Related procedures:
To create an object data table (page 201)
Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to add attributes to an expression.
To define an expression (page 1275)
Select an item from the list and click OK to add the item to your expression.
For example, expand Object Data Tables to see the list of tables in the current
drawing. Expand again to see the list of fields in the table. For more
information about expressions for drawing objects, see Expression Evaluator
(page 1541).
Generate Data Links dialog box
If you have text in your drawing that matches information in a table, use this
dialog to automatically create links based on the matched information. You
can create links to an external database table or to an object data table stored
with the current drawing.
Expression dialog box | 1807
Select a linkage type. Set options for that type. After you click OK, you are
prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks, or enclosed text.
NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or
turned off.
Block
If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of the
block.
Keys and Tags
For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block attribute.
You can assign a tag to only one key field. (If you are creating links to
enclosed text, skip this step.)
Use Insertion Point as Label Point
Use the insertion point of the text or block as the default label point for
the object.
Table/Link Template
Select the table or the link template for the database table containing the
matching data. The complete record is linked to the object.
If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an object data table,
the attribute data is linked only if attribute tags match field names in
the table.
If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an external table, use
the Data Links area to specify which attribute tags correspond to the
key fields.
If you link data to text or enclosed text, you must select a table with
only one field or a link template with only one key field. The remaining
controls are grouped in the following areas:
Data Links
Specify whether you are linking to object data or an external database.
Create Object Data Records
Create records in an object data table stored with the current drawing. These
new records are attached to the objects.
1808 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Create Database Links
Create links to an external database table. Select a Database Validation
option to specify whether to link only to existing records or to create new
records.
Linkage Type
Select a linkage type.
After you click OK, you are prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks,
or enclosed text.
Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the blocks
themselves.
Text
Create links from text. The link data is stored on the text object.
Enclosed Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the polyline
that encloses the block. Blocks that are not enclosed by a polyline are not
linked.
Enclosed Text
Create links from text that lies within a closed polyline. The links are created
on the closed polyline that encloses the text. Text that is not enclosed by
a polyline is not linked.
Database Validation
If you are creating links to an external table, select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Link Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value. If you are creating links to an Excel spreadsheet,
the selected link template must point to a named range and not to a
worksheet.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. The new
record will have the key field values filled in, but other fields will be blank.
Generate Data Links dialog box | 1809
Related procedures:
To attach data to objects automatically (page 1067)
To link records to objects using text or block attribute data automatically
(page 532)
New Layer dialog box
The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters.
< > / \ : ? * | , = " ` "
Related procedures:
To import SDF 2 files (page 389)
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 887)
Select dialog box
To select an item, click the item.
To select a group of items, click the first one. Hold down the Shift key
while you click the last one.
To select additional items, hold down the Ctrl key while you click each
item.
When you finish selecting items, click OK.
Select Block dialog box
Click the block to select it.
Click OK.
Select Blocks dialog box
Select the blocks you want by clicking them.
When you finish selecting blocks, click OK.
1810 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Select Data dialog box - Query
This dialog box lists data in the current drawing. Select the type of data to
include:
Attribute
The Attribute Tags list displays the attributes for the current block. To see
the attribute tags for a different block, select the block from the Block list.
Object Data
The Object Data Fields list displays the data fields for the current table. To
see the fields for a different table, select the table from the Table list.
If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map
3D uses only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
Database Link
The Key Columns list displays the key columns for the current link template.
To see the key columns for a different link template, select the link template
from the link template list.
Select the data value and click OK.
Related procedures:
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Select dialog box
Select from the list of available values.
Some types of values are available only if they are in an active drawing.
Related procedures:
To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 1244)
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click (page 493)
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Select Drawings to Attach dialog box
Use this dialog box to add source drawings to your current drawing set.
Select Data dialog box - Query | 1811
Select the file names of drawings to attach. Click Add. You can change the
drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. When
you finish, click OK.
Look In
Select a drive alias from the list. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for
drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases
to display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a
new drive alias.
To open a preview window that displays a preview of the selected
drawing, click Preview. In some instances, such as if a drawing is locked,
the Preview window is blank.
File List
View all drawings in the current directory.
Filter
Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add
Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list.
Remove
Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings
To use these drawings, click OK.
You must have Alter Drawing Set privileges to attach and detach drawings.
Change privileges using the User Administration dialog box (page 1934).
Related procedures:
Attaching Drawings (page 154)
Select Object Classes dialog box
Select the classes you want by clicking them.
1812 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
When you finish selecting classes, click OK.
Select Classified Objects dialog box
Select the objects you want by clicking them.
When you finish selecting, click OK.
Select Layer dialog box
Select the layer you want by clicking it
Click OK.
Select Layers dialog box
Select the layers you want by clicking them.
Select Property dialog box
Select the property and click OK.
Related procedures:
To alter retrieved objects based on their properties (page 1265)
Select SQL Column dialog box
To see the columns for a different link template, select the link template from
the list.
Select the column you want and click OK.
Select Classified Objects dialog box | 1813
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT: Object Data)
This dialog box was used to select an object data table from the list of all object
data tables in the current drawing during an import procedure. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
Related procedure:
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Related command:
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT: Database Table)
This dialog box was used to select a database table from the list of all tables
in the current drawing during an import procedure. It has been discontinued.
Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
Related procedure:
To import data from other formats (page 381)
To import from Arc/INFO (page 396)
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID (page 401)
To import SHP data (page 399)
Related command:
Click Home tab Data panel Import From Files.
SQL Expression dialog box
Select a column in an external database.
To see columns from a different database table, select the link template for
the table from the Link Templates list.
1814 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
In most cases, the Link Templates list includes only link templates for active
source drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined
in the source drawing, and the appropriate data source is attached and
connected.
If you are using a command that involves topology, the Link Templates list
includes only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded. If
you loaded the topology from source drawings, the list displays link templates
defined in the source drawing; if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing, the list displays link templates in the current drawing.
SQL Expression dialog box | 1815
1816
Polygon Object Dialog
Boxes
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons
command)
Use this command to convert an existing closed polyline to a polygon.
To convert polylines to polygons (page 971)
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects:
Select the polylines to convert. Press Enter.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted into a polygon. If the
polyline belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline in the group is
converted. Other polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as additional
boundaries. The polygon is automatically rebalanced.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the default color or hatch
set by the To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 978).
31
1817
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Use this command to change the default setting for how polygon are imported.
To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 978)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to
features from a feature source.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter new value for MAPUSEMPOLYGON:
Do one of the following:
Enter ON to turn on the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
AutoCAD Map 3D are created using the polygon object.
Enter OFF to turn off the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
AutoCAD Map 3D are creating using the polyline object.
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)
Use this command to modify a polygon object.
To add boundaries (page 963)
To edit nodes on a boundary (page 965)
To edit the fill property for the polygon object (page 966)
To edit nodes on a boundary (page 965)
At the Command prompt, enter mapmpedit.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to
features from a feature source.
You can add, delete, and move polygon boundaries, edit nodes, convert a
boundary to an object, change a boundary type, change the fill color or pattern,
and rebalance the polygon.
Respond to the prompts:
1818 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Select polygon:
Use any object selection method.
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/disConnect/Boundary
type/Fill/Rebalance/eXit]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
Add
Enter a to add a boundary to the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select new boundary:
Select the object to use as the new boundary. The object can be a polygon,
rectangle, circle, or another mpolygon.
The new boundary is added to the polygon.
Delete
Enter d to delete a boundary from the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to delete from the current polygon. If it is a complex
polygon, you can select additional boundaries. When you finish, press
Enter.
The selected boundaries are deleted from the polygon. Enter r to rebalance
the polygon.
Move
Enter m to move a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to move. If it is a complex polygon, you can select
additional boundaries. When you finish selecting boundaries, press Enter.
Select Basepoint or displacement:
Select the starting point for the move.
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Select the ending point for the move.
The selected boundaries are moved according to the distance and direction
between the basepoint and the second point of displacement.
Edit
Enter e to edit a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to edit.
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) | 1819
Enter a node editing option [Next/Previous/Remove/Insert/Move/eXit]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
Enter n to move to the next node.
Enter p to move to the previous node.
Enter r to remove the current node. You cannot remove a node if the
resulting new line would cross another boundary in the current polygon.
Enter i to insert a node before the current node. Note that you cannot
insert a node if the resulting new line would cross another boundary in
the current polygon.
Enter m to move the current node. You cannot move a node so that the
current boundary crosses another boundary in the current polygon.
Enter x to exit node-editing mode.
disConnect
Enter c to disconnect a boundary from the polygon, but preserve the boundary
object. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to disconnect.
The boundary is deleted from the polygon, but remains in the drawing as
a polyline or circle object.
If you disconnect a boundary that has nested boundaries, all the nested
boundaries are also disconnected.
Boundary type
Enter b to change the boundary type for a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary whose type you want to change.
Enter boundary type [Outer/Inner/Annotation] <Outer>:
Enter o to make the selected boundary an outer boundary, enter i to the
make it an inner boundary, or enter a to make it an annotation boundary.
Annotation boundaries behave the same as inner boundaries, but have no
effect on area calculations.
Fill
Enter f to change the fill for the polygon. This displays the Polygon Fill
Properties dialog box (page 1824), where you can select a hatch pattern or a
gradient fill.
1820 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Rebalance
Enter r to rebalance the polygon. The polygon is rebalanced so the nesting
order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order.
Undo
Enter u to undo the last action.
eXit
Enter x to exit the mapmpedit command.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)
Use this command to split an existing polygon object into two new polygon
objects. The original polygon object is deleted.
To split a polygon object (page 969)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To split a polygonal
geospatial feature, see Splitting Features (page 705).
You can draw a new line to split the polygon, or you can selecting an existing
line.
The existing polygon is split into two new polygons.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) | 1821
If the polygon has internal boundaries, your split line must not cross one of
the internal boundaries, nor can it touch one of the vertices of an internal
boundary.
This split is not allowed because
it touches one of the vertices of
the internal boundary.
This split is not allowed because it
crosses an internal boundary.
This split is allowed.
You can choose to copy data from the original mpolygon to the two new
mpolygons, or you can delete the data.
Respond to the prompts:
Select the mpolygon to split:
Use any object selection method.
Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Draw/Select]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
Draw
Enter d to draw the line. Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point or [eXit] <eXit>:
Select the starting point for the divider line.
Specify next point or [Arc/Undo]:
Do one of the following:
Select the next point for the divider line.
Enter a to draw an arc. For more information on drawing arcs, see the
AutoCAD help.
Enter u to undo the last action.
When you finish drawing the line, press Enter.
1822 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Select
Enter s to select an existing polyline to use as the dividing line. Respond to
the prompts:
Select objects:
Select the polyline you want. When you finish selecting polylines, press
Enter.
Would you like to copy data from the original mpolygon to the split mpolygons?
[Yes/No]:
Do one of the following:
Enter y to copy object data or external database links from the original
mpolygon to both of the new mpolygons.
Enter n to delete the data.
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box
Use this dialog box to create polygons directly from a polygon topology.
To convert a polygon topology to polygons (page 974)
At the Command prompt, enter maptopologytopolygons.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to
features from a feature source.
Name
Select the topology to convert. Click Load Topology to select and load the
topology if you need to.
Layer
Select the layer on which you want to place the converted polygon(s). Click
Layer Settings to create a new layer and set its properties.
Group Complex Polygons
Create a single polygon from nested polygons in the topology.
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box | 1823
Copy Object Data From Centroid
Copy object data from the topology polygons to the new polygon objects.
Copy Database Links From Centroid
Copy database links from the polygons to the new mpolygon objects.
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the fill color and pattern to use for polygon
objects. You can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and
colors from imported color books. You can also define the pattern type, pattern
properties, and attributes for hatch, solid, and gradient fill.
To edit the fill property for the polygon object (page 966)
At the Command prompt, enter mapmpedit.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To style polygonal
geospatial features, see Styling Area Features (page 650).
The dialog box has the following tabs:
The Hatch tab defines the appearance of the hatch pattern (or solid color) to
be used to fill polygons.
The Gradient tab defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be used to fill
polygons.
Hatch tab
Pattern Type
Select a pattern type from the following:
Predefined Specifies a predefined pattern.
User Defined Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype
in your drawing.
Custom Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that
you have added to the search path.
1824 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Pattern Name
Select from the available predefined patterns. AutoCAD Map 3D stores the
selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern Name option
is available only if you set Pattern Type to Predefined. Click to display
preview images for all predefined patterns at once.
Angle
Specify an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS.
Scale
Expand or contract a predefined or custom pattern.
Relative To Paper Space
Scale the hatch pattern relative to paper space units to display hatch patterns
at an appropriate scale for your layout. This option is available only from
a layout.
Fill Color
Click the down arrow to select from a list of colors. To choose from a greater
variety of colors, including true colors and colors from imported color books,
click Select Color.
Gradient tab
One Color
Specify a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and lighter
tints of one color.
Two Color
Specify a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
Color Swatch
Specify the color for the gradient fill. Click to display the Select Color
dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color, true color, or
color book color.
Shade and Tint Slider
Specify the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box | 1825
Centered
Specify a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not
selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion
of a light source to the left of the object.
Angle
Specify the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS.
Gradient Patterns
Select one of the nine fixed patterns for gradient fills.
For more information on setting hatch options, see the AutoCAD help.
1826 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Printing and Publishing
Dialog Boxes
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the data to use to create or edit a map book (page
2067).
To create a map book (page 1390)
To edit map book settings (page 1396)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New Map Book.
Expand a node in the left pane of the dialog box to specify the necessary
information on the right
Source node
Create a map book from a display or model space. If your map contains
drawing objects, select Model Space to include all the objects, or Map Display
to include only objects you added in Display Manager.
If you select Map Display, enter a name for the map book, select the display
map to use, and select a defined scale.
If you select Model Space, enter a name for the map book.
32
1827
Sheet Template node
Click Settings to select a template file and layout to use. Indicate whether
to include a title block and adjacent sheet links. (You can include these
only if you defined placeholders for them.) By default, the scale factor is 1,
meaning a scale ratio of 1:1.
If you include a title block, specify its name. If it isnt in the list, click
to find it. If you include adjacent sheet links, specify the name of the file
that represents the adjacent sheet.
Tiling Scheme node
Select how to specify the area to publish.
Click By Area to calculate the number of tiles based on the map scale
and the size of the main viewport in the layout template. Select a layer
for the grid that forms the tile in your map book. If you defined a grid
layer, choose it in the list. Otherwise, enter a name for a new layer to
contain the grid. Click Select Area To Tile and draw a rectangle for the
area to include in the map book. Enter the percentage to overlap between
tiles, and specify whether to skip tiles with no contents.
Click By Number to calculate the number of tiles based on the map scale,
the size of the main viewport in the layout template, and the specified
number of rows and columns. Specify the upper left corner and how
many columns and rows to create. Enter the percentage to overlap
between tiles, and specify whether to skip tiles with no contents. Preview
the map book to see how much of the map is included when you use
this tiling scheme.
Click Custom to generate the tiles from the closed polylines you select.
Click Select Tiles and define the tiles. If you have already defined the
tiles in a separate layer, you can use the layer manager to turn off other
layers and window-select the tiles on your grid layer. Enter the percentage
to overlap between tiles, and specify whether to skip tiles with no
contents.
Naming Scheme node
Select how to name the tiles.
Click Columns And Rows to name each tile with a column indicator
and a row indicator, for example, A1.
Click Grid Sequential to number the first tile with a digit and augment
each subsequent tile number by the increment you enter. Specify the
order to go in and the increment between tile numbers.
1828 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
Click Sequential for custom tiling schemes. This option numbers only
the tiles you specified in your custom tiling scheme. Specify the order
to go in and the increment between tile numbers.
Click Data Driven to choose an expression for your naming scheme
based on data in the map.
Key node
If you defined a keyview viewport, optionally specify what to display in it.
If you select Linked Drawing or External Reference, specify the drawing or
file to display in this viewport. If you select Layers, specify which layers will
appear in the keyview thumbnail. To use a new grid layer you created under
Tiling Scheme, click the layer icon at the top of the dialog box and type
that name in the list.
If you specify Layers, choose a small subset of layers that help the viewer
identify a specific area of the map. Too many layers will result in a crowded
and hard-to-read thumbnail.
Legend node
Optionally specify the source for a legend. If you created a display legend
in Display Manager, select Map Display. To use an area of your map as a
legend, select User Defined and click Select Modelspace Bounds to select
that area.
Sheet Set node
Create a new sheet set for this map book or make it a subset of an existing
sheet set.
Map book sheet sets are based on AutoCAD sheet sets. For more information
about AutoCAD sheet sets, type create and manage a sheet set on the
Search tab of the help.
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the viewport and element placeholders in the
sheet template layout for a map book (page 2067).
To identify layout placeholders (page 1388)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click Tools Identify Template
Placeholders.
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box | 1829
Layout Placeholders
Select the viewport or element to identify.
Select Placeholders
In your layout, select the viewport or element that corresponds to the item
you selected in the Layout Placeholders list.
Map Book Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book (page 2067).
To view map book or tile properties (page 1399)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click the map book name. Click
Properties.
NOTE Except for the name, these properties are strings used as field values in
sheets. They do not change the actual properties of the map book. For example,
if you change a property in this dialog box, the corresponding map book property
does not change. However, if your layout template contains a text element with
a field that references the property you changed, that text element will change.
Name
Enter a map book name.
Scale
Enter the scale used for the selected map book.
Orientation
Enter the rotation orientation of the selected map book.
Coordinate System
Enter the coordinate system, if one was specified.
Tile Count
The number of tiles in the selected map book.
1830 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
Tile Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book (page 2067) tile.
To view map book or tile properties (page 1399)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Properties.
NOTE These properties are strings used as field values in sheets. They do not
change the actual properties of the tile. For example, if you change a property in
this dialog box, the corresponding tile property does not change. However, if your
layout template contains a text element with a field that references the property
you changed, that text element will change.
Name
Enter the tile name.
Adjacent Tiles
All tiles that are immediately adjacent to the selected tile.
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a plot map set to convert to a map book (page
2067).
To import a plot map set (page 1392)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New Map Book From Plot Set.
Tile Properties dialog box | 1831
Map Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the types of information to include when
publishing to DWF (page 2061)
.
To publish attribute data to DWF (page 1367)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Output tab Export To DWF/PDF
panel DWF/PDF Options (MAPDWFOPTIONS).
Publish Map Information
Select this option to include checked items in the list in the publish
operation. If you clear the Publish Map Information box, the options remain
checked, but they are not included in the publish operation.Check Publish
Map Information again to include them.
Properties tree
Select items to include in the publish operation. Expand a category to see
its layers, and expand a layer to see its objects. If you select an item with
sub-items, all the sub-items are automatically checked. Categories listed
here vary, depending on the contents of your map.
File icon
Specify the file for the properties.
Folder icon
Find a saved properties file to load.
NOTE If you assigned a coordinate system to your map, it is always included for
each sheet in your published DWF file, unless you clear the Export Map Properties
check box.
1832 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
Plot Map Set dialog boxes
The Plot Map Set functionality has been replaced with the Map Books feature.
While you can continue to use your existing map plot sets, we recommend
that you import your plot sets into map books.
To import a plot map set (page 1392)
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New Map Book From Plot Set.
Plot Map Set dialog boxes | 1833
1834
Query Dialog Boxes
NOTE Query functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Alternate Font dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a different font for the queried drawing object.
Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map (page 354)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
The font specified for a queried drawing object cannot be found. Select an
alternate font to use.
Change Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to assign queries to categories.
To add a category to the query library (page 182)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
33
1835
Current Category displays the name of the category the query is currently
assigned to. (If you are changing the category for multiple queries, this area
may be blank.) Select a category from the New Category list, and click OK.
The query is reassigned to the new category.
You can assign a query to only one category.
Data Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a data condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data (page 1248)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
A data condition searches data that you have attached to drawing objects.
Object Class / Object Properties / Database Link / Object Data / Attribute options
Select the data to query.
To search data associated with a object class, select Object Class. Select
an object class from the Class list. Select the property.
To search all subclasses of the selected object class, select Include
Subclasses. If this option is not selected, only data in objects tagged with
the selected object class is searched.
To search data stored in custom objects, select Object Properties. When
selected, you can choose from a list of all object types and properties
defined either in all source drawings or in the current drawing,
depending on whether the source or current drawing is queried.
To search all subclasses of the selected object type and/or property, select
Include Subclasses. If this checkbox is cleared, the query will be limited.
Select Include Subclasses when running an Object Properties query.
To search data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link.
Select the link template from the Link Templates list. Select the key
column. This option searches only the link data stored on objects. To
search the database table, use a SQL condition.
1836 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
To search data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select a table
from the Tables list. Select the object data field.
If two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD Map
3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To search data in a block attribute, select Attribute. Select a block from
the Blocks list. Select the attribute tag.
NOTE The lists you select from (for example the Link Templates list and the
Object Data list) display only the information available in the sources you are
querying. For example, if you are querying database links in your source
(attached) drawings, the Link Templates list displays only the link templates in
your source drawings.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
Description Operator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the
value you enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than
the value you enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than
or equal to the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the
value you enter the Value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or
equal to the value you enter the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
<>
NOTE If you are querying database link data, only the = (equals) operator is
available.
Value box
Specify the value to search for. You can use Wildcard Characters (page 1537).
Data Condition dialog box | 1837
To enter a value that includes a comma, such as an RGB color or a Colorbook
color, enclose the value in double quotes, for example, "255,255,255" or
"PANTONE(R) process coated,PANTONE Process Cyan C".
Define New Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new category in the Query Library.
To add a category to the query library (page 182)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
Enter a new name in the New Category Name box. Click OK. Category names
cannot contain any spaces.
Define Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to define, modify, save, load, or execute queries.
To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings (page 1237)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
The dialog box settings reflect the properties of the current query. If you
change a setting, you modify the current query. If you load a query from the
query library or from a file, you replace the current query.
Press either Execute Query or OK:
Execute Query
Save dialog box settings and execute the current query.
1838 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
OK
Save dialog box settings without executing. Click OK to create an element
for the Display Manager.
NOTE You can set several query options. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
Current Query
This area shows the conditions in your current query. You can edit, group, or
delete the conditions.
Current Query List
View all conditions in the current query. If conditions have been grouped,
the group is indented and enclosed within parentheses. (Conditions in a
group are evaluated before conditions outside the group.)
To edit a condition, select it. Click Edit.
To group conditions, select the first and last condition that you want
in the group. Click Group.
To delete a condition, select it. Click Delete.
Edit
Edit the selected condition.
If you select more than one condition, Edit is unavailable.
You can also edit a condition by double-clicking it in the list.
Group
Group the selected conditions.
When you run the query, conditions inside the group are evaluated before
conditions outside the group.
The easiest way to specify a group is to select the first and last conditions
in the group and click Group. All conditions between the first and the last
selected conditions are included in the group and enclosed within
parentheses.
You can nest groups.
Ungroup
Ungroup the selected group.
To ungroup conditions, select the first or last condition in the group. Click
Ungroup.
Delete
Deletes the selected query condition.
Define Query dialog box | 1839
Clear Query
Delete all conditions in the list.
Clearing the query does not remove settings from the Set Property
Alterations dialog box or from the Output Report Options dialog box.
Query type
Use this area to create conditions for your query.
And/Or/Not options
Determine how the condition is combined with other conditions.
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Location
Display the Location Condition dialog box (page 1849), where you can define
a condition based on the location of the object in relation to points you
specify.
For example, search for all objects that fall inside a circle or that cross a
line.
Property
Display the Property Condition dialog box (page 1855), where you can define
a condition based on the object's properties.
For example, search for all objects on a specified layer, all objects of a certain
color, or all text in a certain text style.
Data
Display the Data Condition dialog box (page 1836), where you can define a
condition based on object data attached to an object.
For example, if you attach a field named Pipe Diameter to several objects,
you can search for all objects where that field has a value of 10" or more.
For more information on defining and attaching data, see Creating an Object
Data Table (page 200) and Entering and Editing Object Data (page 1061).
SQL
Display the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1866), where you can define
a condition based on the external data linked to an object.
1840 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
For example, if you are trying to determine the best location for a new park
and you have linked data from a table containing information about the
households, you can search for all parcels where the household has young
children.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
Query mode
Specify the type of query to run. If you are creating an element for the Display
Manager, Draw is the only available option.
Preview
Preview the objects that match the query conditions, but don't actually pull
the objects into the current drawing.
When you redraw the screen, the objects will be gone. Property alterations
do not appear in a Preview mode query.
Draw
Get the objects that match the query and bring them into the current
drawing. If you are creating an element for the Display Manager, this option
gets the objects and adds them to the element.
If a property alteration has been defined, objects are modified as they are
copied into the current drawing.
You must have Draw Query privileges to perform a draw query. See To add
a new user (page 83).
Report
Execute the query and save the results in a report file.
To specify a template for the report, click Options to display the Output
Report Options dialog box (page 1852).
Property alterations are not reflected in the report.
Options
Display the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1852), where you specify
a template for the report. The Options button is available only if Report
query mode is selected.
NOTE For topology queries, the Options button is available with both Draw
and Report query modes.
Options
Set property alterations, save the query to execute later, load a query you
previously saved, redraw the screen, or set options.
Define Query dialog box | 1841
If you are creating a element for a display map, not all of the options are
available.
Alter Properties check box
Determines whether the query executes the property alteration. If this is
not selected, property alterations are ignored when you execute the query.
Alter Properties button
Display the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1863), where you specify
how to modify objects that are found by the query.
Save
Display the Save Current Query dialog box (page 1862), where you save the
current query so you can run it later.
Load
Display the Load Internal Query dialog box (page 1848), where you load a
query that you previously saved.
Redraw <
Redraw the screen to clear any previews.
Zoom Ext <
Display the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box (page 2014), where you select
any active drawings in your drawing set. AutoCAD Map 3D then zooms the
screen to the extents of the selected drawings.
Drawings
Display the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1918), where you
can change which drawings are attached to the current drawing, and which
drawings are active for queries.
More
Display the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908),
where you change query options such as whether searches are case sensitive
and whether to preview text as an insertion point.
Define Range Table dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1842 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to create, rename, or delete range tables.
To create a range table (page 1272)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the actual value
of object data or properties associated with drawing objects.
For property alteration, specify different alterations for a property
depending on the value of the property. For example, you could specify
that all buildings under two stories be colored blue, all buildings two stories
to ten stories be colored green, and all buildings above ten stories be colored
red.
For an output report, specify different actions to take depending on the
value of the data. For example, you could specify that if a lot is valued at
less than $10,000, report the value in the Land Value A column of your
database; if the lot is valued at over $10,000, report the value in the Land
Value B column.
Create range tables and save them with the current drawing to use again.
Range Table area
Select an existing table, rename a table, create a new table, or delete a table.
Range Table list
View all tables in the current drawing.
To view tables, click the down arrow. Select a table.
Rename
Display the Rename Range Table dialog box (page 1860), where you can specify
a new name for the current range table.
New
Display the New Range Table dialog box, where you can save the current
table definitions to a new range table.
Remove
Remove the current range table.
Do not delete a range table used by your queries.
Define Range Table dialog box | 1843
Current Range Table Definition area
Use this area to view, edit, or delete rows in the range table.
Current Range Table Definition list
View all rows in the current range table.
To edit or delete a row, select the row and click Edit or Delete.
Edit
Copy the selected row to the Condition section of the dialog box, where
you can modify it.
When you finish modifying the condition, click Add To List to update the
row in the Current Range Table Definition list.
Delete
Delete the selected row.
Clear List
Delete all rows from the current range table.
Expressions in the Current Range Table Definition list are evaluated from
top to bottom, that is, in the order you enter them. As soon as one condition
is evaluated as TRUE, AutoCAD Map 3D stops evaluating, ignores the
remaining expressions, and returns the value associated with the TRUE
condition in the range table.
For example, assume you enter the following expressions:
If < 0 Return: Low
If < 15 Return: Medium
If < 30 Return: High
If < 45 Return: Very High
With a value of 20, the first condition evaluates to FALSE because 20 is not
less than 0. The second condition also evaluates to FALSE since 20 is not
less than 15. However, the third condition evaluates to TRUE since 20 is
less than 30, and the value returned by the range table is High. The last
condition, although TRUE, is ignored.
Condition area
Edit an existing row, or create a new one.
To edit an existing row, select the row in the Current Range Table
Definition list and click Edit. When you finish, click Update.
To create a new condition, select an operator, specify an expression and
a return value, and click Add.
1844 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
Description Operator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter the Value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the value
you enter the Value box.
/=
Specify the action to take none of the preceding conditions are
met.If you include an OTHERWISE condition, it must be at the
end of the list.
OTHERWISE
Expression Value box
Enter a simple expression.
If an object matches the value of this expression, the object is affected by
the return value.
Return Value box
Specify a return value for this condition.
The return value specifies what happens if the object matches the expression.
Enter a value or a simple expression. Do not enter a compound expression.
Add
Add the current condition to the Current Range Table Definition list.
Update
Update the selected condition in the Current Range Table Definition list
with the current condition.
Define Range Table dialog box | 1845
Define Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify text to add to all drawing objects found by the
query.
To add text to retrieved drawing objects (page 1278)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
Text Value
Specify the text to add.
Enter the text, or choose a variable by clicking Expression.
If you enter text in the box, that text is added to each object.
If you choose a variable, the text for each object is based on the value
of the variable.
For example, if you choose the property Elevation, the elevation is added
as text to each retrieved object.
If select a field from an object data table, the value in that field is added to
each object. If an object does not have a record attached from the selected
table, no text is added to the object.
Text Height
Specify a text height.
If none is specified, text uses the AutoCAD Map 3D default text height.
Insert Point
Specify an insertion point for the text.
Centroid
Insert text at the centroid of the object.
Labelpt
Insert text at the label point of the object.
The default location for the label point is the centroid of the object. To
change the location of the label point, use the ADETEXTLOC command.
1846 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Justification
Specify the justification for the text. The list displays options for center,
middle, and right, or combinations of these with top (T), middle (M), and
bottom (B).
Text Style
Enter a text style, or click Styles to select from a list of styles in the active
drawings.
Layer
Enter a layer for the text, or click Layers to select from a list of layers in the
active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created. To easily
hide or delete text, insert it on its own layer.
Color
Specify a color for the text.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette to select a color.
Rotation
Enter a rotation value. Enter 0 for no rotation.
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
For each option, enter a value in the box, enter an expression or variable, or
select a value. For information on expressions and variables, see Expression
Evaluator (page 1541).
Hatch Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a hatch pattern to drawing objects found by the
query.
To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern (page 1283)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
Pattern
Enter a hatch pattern, click Patterns to select from a list of hatch patterns
defined in the active drawings, or click Expression to use an expression to
Hatch Options dialog box | 1847
specify the hatch pattern. If you leave the box empty, AutoCAD Map 3D
uses a solid fill.
The box displays the selected hatch option. ISO hatch patterns are not
displayed.
Scale
Specify a scale for the pattern. A small scale creates a smaller pattern and
takes longer to display and print.
Rotation
Enter the rotation. Enter 0 for no rotation.
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
Layer
Enter a layer for the hatch, or click Layers to select from a list of layers in
the active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created.
To easily hide or delete the hatch, insert it on its own layer.
Color
Specify a color for the hatch.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette and select a color.
For each option, enter a value in the box or enter an expression or variable.
For example, to use a hatch pattern specified in the Hatch field of the Design
object data table, enter :hatch@design. For information on expressions and
variables, see Expression Evaluator (page 1541).
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options
dialog box (page 1908) and To have hatch created by property alteration be
associative (page 247).
NOTE Use the DRAWORDER command to display objects on top of the hatch.
Load Internal Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a previously saved query.
To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings (page 1237)
1848 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
The definition of the loaded query appears in the Define Query dialog box.
Depending on the options you specified when you saved the query, it may
change the active drawings or load property alteration settings. You can modify
the query or click Execute Query to execute the query.
Category list
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Queries list
View all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display
View the name and description of the selected query.
Location Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a location condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their location (page 1241)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
A location condition finds drawing objects based on location relative to a
specified boundary. You can specify whether objects must be completely inside
the boundary or have any part inside the boundary.
For blocks or text objects, you can specify if their location is determined by
their insertion point or their bounding box. For hatch, solid, and raster objects,
Location Condition dialog box | 1849
you can specify if their location is determined by their area or their boundary.
See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
Location Coordinates
View the coordinates for the current location condition.
Define <
View your current drawing, where you can specify the points to define the
boundary.
Show <
View the boundary of the condition you are editing.
To change the colors used to display the boundaries, use the Query tab on
the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box.
Boundary Type
Select a boundary type.
All
Retrieve all objects in the active drawings.
Buffer Fence
Retrieve all objects within a specified distance from a fence.
Select a selection type. Click Define to define the fence and the distance.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the buffer fence,
or select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the buffer fence,
or select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
Circle
Retrieve all objects in a defined circle.
Select a selection type. Click Define to define the circle.
Center point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the center of the circle, or select
the point.
Radius Enter a number in the current unit.
Fence
Retrieve all objects that cross a defined line.
Select a selection type. Click Define to define the fence.
A fence does not need to be closed and can cross itself.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the fence, or select
the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the fence, or select
the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
1850 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Point
Retrieve all areas that surround a selected point.
Click Define to select the point.
Coordinates of Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the point, or select the
point.
Polygon
Retrieve all objects in a defined polygon.
The polygon can be any shape, but cannot cross or touch itself. If you do
not close the polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D connects the final point to the
first point to create a closed polygon.
Select a selection type. Click Define to define the polygon.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the polygon, or
select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the polygon, or
select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Polyline
Retrieve all objects that cross an existing polyline.
Select a selection type, select a polyline mode. Click Define to select the
polyline.
Select Polyline Select a polyline, line, or arc. If you selected the Polygon
polyline mode, you can select only a polyline.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
(This prompt appears only if you select the Buffer Fence polyline mode.)
Window
Retrieve all objects in a specified window.
Select a selection type. Click Define to define the window.
First Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first corner of the window, or
select the point.
Other Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the opposite corner of the
window, or select the point.
Selection Type
Inside
Find only objects that are completely within the boundary.
Crossing
Find objects that are completely within or crossing the boundary.
NOTE When you perform location queries close to blocks or text objects, be
aware that the bounding box for these objects can extend significantly beyond
the extents of the objects. You can set an option to retrieve objects based on
Location Condition dialog box | 1851
their bounding box or their insertion point. See AutoCAD Map Options dialog
box (page 1908).
Polyline Mode
If you select a polyline boundary, select the mode to define the polyline border.
Polygon
Close the polyline to create a polygon. If the polyline contains arcs,
AutoCAD Map 3D connects the ends of the arcs with a straight line.
Fence
Retrieve all objects that cross the polyline.
Buffer Fence
Retrieve all objects within a specified distance from the polyline.
New Range Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to name a new range table.
To create a range table (page 1272)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
Enter a name for the new range table.
Output Report Options dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Reports will include
information about drawing objects only.
Use this dialog box to specify the name for your report file, and to define a
template for the file.
To create a report template (page 1479)
1852 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
An output report lists information about drawing objects that were found by
a query of an attached drawing file. This information can include properties
(such as layer, color, or object type), data attached to the object, or data linked
to the object from an external database. You set up expressions to limit the
objects found to those that match specific criteria. For example, you can create
a query that finds all structures larger than a certain size, and then prints a
report listing the object type and size. You can also include information from
sub-objects.
To specify which information you want in the report, create a template.
Report Template area
Report Template list
View all expressions in the current template. New expressions are added to
the bottom of the list, unless an expression in the list is selected, and then
the new expression is added above that expression.
Edit
Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Edit to copy it to
the Expression box, where you can modify it. When you finish modifying
the expression, click Update.
Delete
Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Delete to remove
it.
Clear List
Erase the entire report template.
Expression area
Create a new expression or modify an existing one.
Expression box
Enter an expression to add to the template or edit an existing expression.
To create an expression, specify the variable that represents the information
to include in the report and click Add.
To select from a list of available variables, click Expression.
Output Report Options dialog box | 1853
Expression
Display the Expression dialog box (page 1807), which lists all drawing object
properties, object classes, object data, and external data in the drawing you
are querying.
Range list
View the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the drawing you are querying,
click the down arrow.
Ranges
Display the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1842), where you can create
a new range table.
Add
Add the current expression to the Report Template list.
Update
Update the edited expression in the Report Template list.
Output File Name area
Enter the path and file name for the report or click Browse to choose one.
Unless you specify otherwise, the file name extension is .txt. The output
file is in text format regardless of the file name extension you use.
Process Sub-Objects
If you do not select this option, the output report contains information
about the selected object, but not its component parts.
For example, select this option to print information for all points in a
polygon. If the option is not selected, the output report will contain
information for only the first point.
The following table shows the information included in a topology query,
depending on whether you select Process Sub-Objects or not.
Selected Not selected Topology type
Nodes, objects, and object data Nodes Node topology
Links, start and end node data Links Network topology
Centroids, links, and nodes Centroids Polygon topology
Apply Transformation
If objects from the drawing you are querying have been transformed using
a coordinate system transformation or a simple offset, scale, or rotate
1854 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
transformation, check this option to have the report query evaluate the
transformed objects.
If you do not select this option, the report query evaluates only the
untransformed objects in the drawing.
Property Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a property condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 1244)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
A property condition finds drawing objects based on a property, such as color,
layer, length, or text style.
Select Property Area
Specify the property to search for.
Area
Retrieve objects based on their area.
Area only works on circles, ellipses, polylines, splines, regions, and solids.
It does not work on objects created from line segments. For example, Area
will not work on a rectangle created of four separate lines.
Block Name
Retrieve objects based on their block name.
To select from a list of block names in the active drawings, click Values.
Color
Retrieve objects based on their color.
To select a color, click Values.
Elevation
Retrieve objects based on their elevation.
Elevation is the Z value from the XY plane where the object is defined.
Property Condition dialog box | 1855
Object Type
Retrieve objects based on their type.
To select from a list of types in the active drawings, click Values.
If an object type, does not appear on the list, it may be a custom object. To
add a custom object to the list, run a command that will load the object's
dbx.
NOTE To specify a polyline object type, enter 2Dpolyline or 3Dpolyline.
Group
Retrieve objects based on the groups they are members of.
To select from a list of groups in the active drawings, click Values.
The group is not maintained in the current drawing.
Layer
Retrieve objects based on their layer.
To select from a list of layers in the active drawings, click Values.
Length
Retrieve objects based on their length.
Linetype
Retrieve objects based on their linetype.
To select from a list of linetypes, click Values.
If the linetype is not loaded in the current drawing, the objects will appear
with a CONTINUOUS linetype.
Text Style
Retrieve objects based on their text style.
To select from a list of text styles, click Values.
Text Value
Retrieve objects based on their text value.
To set an option for case-sensitive match for text values, use the Query tab
of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
Thickness
Retrieve objects based on their thickness.
Thickness is the distance an object is extruded above or below its elevation.
Object Class
Retrieve objects based on their object classification.
To select from a list of object classes, click Values.
Select Include Subclasses to return all objects tagged with the selected object
class and all objects tagged with any subclasses of the selected object class.
1856 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
If the option is not selected, the query returns only objects tagged with the
selected object class.
Lineweight
Retrieve objects based on their lineweight.
To select from a list of lineweights, click Values.
Plotstyle
Retrieve objects based on their plot style.
To select from a list of plot styles, click Values.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value you
enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the value you
enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value you
enter the Value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to the
value you enter the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the value you
enter the Value box.
<>
If you selected Layer, Object Classname, or Plotstyle as the property, =
(equal) is the only available operator.
Value box
Specify the value to find.
To specify more than one value, separate each value with a comma. The
query will find objects that match any of the values.
You can use wild-card characters for: Block Name, Object Type, Group,
Layer, Linetype, and Text Style.
To select values from a list, click Values.
Property Condition dialog box | 1857
Values
Display a list of values defined for the property in any of the active drawings
attached to this drawing.
Select values from the list.
NOTE For topology queries, some of the options are different. For more
information on querying a topology, see To query a topology (page 1353).
Query Library Administration dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to rename, create, or delete query categories, to move a
query from one category to another, to change a query description, to attach
queries from external files, or to delete queries you no longer use.
To add a category to the query library (page 182)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
Category
Use this area to select, rename, create, or delete a category.
Category list
View all query categories in the current drawing.
Select a category. The Available Queries list updates to show all queries in
the selected category.
Rename
Display the Rename Category dialog box (page 1860), where you rename the
current category.
New
Display the Define New Category dialog box (page 1838), where you create a
new category.
Remove
Delete the current category.
1858 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
You can remove a category only if it has no queries assigned to it. To delete
a category that still has queries in it, you must first delete the queries or
assign them to new categories (by clicking Category).
Available Queries
Delete queries or assign them to new categories.
Available Queries list
View all queries in the current category.
To view additional queries, select a different category from the Category
list.
Delete
Delete the selected queries.
Select All
Highlight all queries in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all queries in the list.
Category
Display the Change Category dialog box, where you move the query to a
different category.
A query can be assigned to only one category.
Selected Query
Use this area to add an external query to the current drawing, or to view
information about the selected query in the Available Queries list.
To add an external query, select External from the Query Type list. (You may
need to erase the query Name first.) Specify the path and file name for the
external query in the File Name box. Once the external query is found, you
can modify its name or description. Click Add to add the query to the current
category.
To modify information about an existing query, select it in the Available
Queries list and change any information you want. When you finish, click
Update. To assign a query to more than one category, copy the query by
selecting it in the Available Queries list. Enter a new name for the query, click
Add and assign the new query to a different category.
Name box
Specify a name for the query.
A query name must be unique in the current drawing.
Query Library Administration dialog box | 1859
Description box
Specify a query description.
File Name box
If the query is external, specify the path and file name for the file where
the query is stored.
Query Type list
Specify internal (the query is stored with the current drawing) or external
(the query is saved in a separate file).
Add
Add the query to the Available Queries list for the current category.
Update
Update the existing query in the Available Queries list.
Rename Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to rename a category in a Query Library.
To add a category to the query library (page 182)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
The Current Category Name area displays the current name of the category.
Enter a new name and click OK. Category names cannot contain any spaces.
All queries assigned to the previous category name are assigned to the new
name. The old category name no longer exists.
Rename Range Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to rename a range table.
To create a range table (page 1272)
1860 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
The Current Range Table Name area shows the current name for the range
table. Enter a new name in the New Range Table Name box.
NOTE If you have any queries that use the current table name, edit those queries
to use the new table name.
Run Library Query dialog box
Use this dialog box to run a query you saved to the Query Library.
To run a query from the Query Library (page 178)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Run.
Select a query from the query library. Click Run Query. To view queries from
a different category, select the category from the Category list. You can run
queries that have been saved with the current drawing or external queries that
have been added to the library.
Category list
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Queries list
Lists all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display
View the name and description of the selected query.
Run Library Query dialog box | 1861
Save Current Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to save your current query. Once a query is saved, you can
run it again later.
To save a query (page 177)
Click Create tab Object Query panel Library.
Category List
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
New Category
Display the Define New Category dialog box where you can create a new
query category.
Name
Enter a name for the query. Query names cannot contain any spaces. Each
query name must be unique.
Description
Enter a description for the query. Use a description that will help you
remember the query when you look for it later.
Save to External File
Save the query to an external file instead of in the current drawing.
Specify a name for the file.
If you want the query description to appear in the current drawing query
library, select Keep Reference In Library.
File name
Specify a name for the external file where you want to save the query. To
select a different directory, click .
Each external query must be saved in a separate file.
1862 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Keep Reference In Library
If you save the query to an external file, select this check box to list the
query description along with other queries in this drawing's query library.
Save List of Active Drawings
If this box is selected, the saved query specifies which drawings in the
drawing set will be active when the query is executed.
If the box is not selected, the query searches whatever drawings are active
when you execute the query.
Save Location Coordinates
If this box is selected, the coordinates for any location conditions are saved
with the query.
If the box is not selected, you will need to specify the coordinates when
you execute the query.
Save Alter Properties
If this box is selected, property alteration specified in the Set Property
Alterations dialog box are saved with the query.
If the box is not selected, the property alterations are not saved with the
query.
Auto Execute
If this box is selected, when you run the saved query, it is automatically
executed.
If the box is not selected, the query is loaded as the active query, but is not
executed until you click Execute Query in the Define Query dialog box.
If you save the query to an external file and do not keep a reference in the
current drawing library, you do not need to provide a name or description for
the query.
Set Property Alterations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how drawing objects found in a query will be
modified as they are brought into the current drawing.
To modify objects as they are retrieved by a query (page 1259)
Set Property Alterations dialog box | 1863
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
You can alter object properties such as color, layer, block name, or thickness,
or you can add text to objects. In addition, you can create a range table that
modifies objects in different ways based on where they fall in a range of values.
Property alteration is a fast way to modify a group of objects. For example,
make objects stand out in their source drawings by adding color or hatch,
move a group of objects to a new layer, or add informational text.
NOTE To have a property alteration take effect, execute a Draw mode query.
Property alterations do not work in Preview or Report mode queries.
To save property alterations back to source drawings, add the objects to the
save set.
Current Property Alterations list
View all expressions in the property alteration list.
Edit
Copy the selected expression to the expression section of the dialog box,
where you can modify it.
Delete
Delete the selected expression.
Clear List
Remove all expressions from the Current Property Alterations list.
Select Property area
Select the property to alter.
To change the color of retrieved blocks, the color of the components of the
source drawing block must be BYBLOCK. Otherwise, the block retains its
original colors.
Color alterations on a bitonal raster image affect both the image and the
boundary. On multiple color raster images, the alteration affects only the
boundary.
Properties
Select the property to alter.
1864 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Text
Display the Define Text dialog box, where you specify text to add, and its
height, insertion point, justification, text style, layer, color, and rotation.
Hatch
Display the Hatch Options dialog box, where you specify the hatch to add.
Expression area
Use this area to create or modify an expression that defines how you want
to alter a property on objects that are found by the query.
To modify an existing expression, select it in the Current Property Alterations
list. Click Edit. When you finish modifying the expression, click Update.
To create a new expression, enter the expression in the Expression box. Use
Values, Property, Data, and SQL to help you create the expression. When
you are done, click Add.
Each expression must list the property to modify, and how to modify it. To
modify objects based on where they fall in a range of values, select an
existing range table from the Range list, or create a new table using the
Ranges.
Expression box
Enter the expression to add to the Current Property Alterations list.
Range list
Display the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the current drawing, click the
down arrow.
Ranges
Display the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1842), where you can create
a new range table.
Add
Add the current expression to the Current Property Alterations list.
Update
Update the edited expression in the Current Property Alterations list.
Values
For the property selected in the Select Property area, display all values in
the active drawings.
Expression
Display the Expression dialog box (page 1807), which lists all properties, object
data fields, and SQL link template fields in the active source drawings.
Set Property Alterations dialog box | 1865
SQL Condition History dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy a condition to your current SQL query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 1253)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
This dialog box lists the SQL conditions specified in this drawing. Each line
includes the link template and the condition.
To copy a condition from this list to your current SQL query, select the
condition. Click OK.
Clear History
Remove all SQL conditions from the list.
To specify a maximum length for this list, use the Data Source tab of the
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
SQL Link Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a SQL condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 1253)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
A SQL condition searches for objects based on data in an external database.
(Use the Map Database commands to link external data to objects.)
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
1866 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
To create a SQL condition, specify the link template. Specify the column to
check and the value for the column.
Build a SQL condition using this dialog box, or type a condition by choosing
Type It.
Current SQL Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
This area displays the current SQL condition. You can add, delete, or edit any
line in the condition.
Current SQL Condition list
View the current SQL condition.
If lines in the condition have been grouped, the group is indented. (Lines
in a group are evaluated before lines outside the group.)
Edit
Copy the selected line to the Condition section so you can edit it.
Group
Group the selected lines.
Select the first and last lines that you want in the group. Click Group.
When you run the query, lines inside the group are evaluated before the
rest of the condition.
Ungroup
Delete the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending
or beginning line of the group.
Delete
Remove the selected line from the condition.
Clear All
Remove all lines from the current SQL condition.
Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
Edit an existing line in the condition or add new lines.
To edit an existing line, select the line in the Current SQL Condition list. Edit
the information in the Condition area. Click Update.
To add a new line, select the operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column and an
operator and specify a value. Click Add Condition.
And/Or/Not options
Determine how the condition is combined with other conditions.
SQL Link Condition dialog box | 1867
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Column list
Select a column from the list.
The list displays columns from the current table.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
Description Operator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter in the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter in the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter in the Value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter in the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
<>
The value of the selected property or data matches any of the
values you enter in the Value box. When you use the IN operator,
IN
you must enclose each value in single quotation marks, separate
the values with commas, and enclose the entire list in parentheses,
for example, ('1','2','3').
The value of the selected property or data is empty. Do not enter
a value in the Value box.
IS NULL
1868 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Description Operator
The value of the selected property or data contains the value you
enter in the Value box. Applies to string (character) data types
LIKE
only. Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character. For ex-
ample, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B,
choose the LIKE operator and enter B% in the Value box. For in-
formation on the wild-card characters supported by your database
system, refer to the documentation for your database system
software.
Value box
Specify the value to search for.
The value must match the data type of the column.
If the string contains a single quotation mark, precede the single quotation
mark with another single quotation mark.
For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00', for example,
TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'.
To use wild-card characters with string values, use the LIKE operator. For
example, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B, choose the
LIKE operator and enter B%. Refer to the documentation for your database
software to see which wild-card characters are supported.
Add Condition
Add the condition line to the Current SQL Condition list.
The new line is added to the bottom of the list. If any line in the list is
selected, the new line is added above it.
Update
Update the selected condition in the Current SQL Condition list.
Other Controls
Link template list
Select the link template that specifies the table containing the data to use
for this query condition.
This list displays only the link templates available in the source(s) you are
querying. For example, if you are querying source (attached) drawings, the
list will display only the link templates in your source drawings. If you are
querying the current drawing, the list will display only the link templates
in the current drawing.
You can query only one link template in a SQL condition. To query a
different link template, create a new SQL condition.
SQL Link Condition dialog box | 1869
History
Display the SQL Condition History dialog box (page 1866), where you select
from a list of SQL conditions you previously added.
Type It
Display the Type SQL Condition dialog box (page 1870), where you enter your
SQL condition.
Type SQL Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a SQL condition, if you are familiar
with SQL.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 1253)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Query.
History
To modify a condition you used previously, select it from the list. The
condition is copied to the Enter SQL Condition area, where you can modify
it.
Link Template
Select the link template that specifies the table to use with this condition.
The SQL condition tests information linked from this table to the queried
objects. Because queries apply only to objects in active source drawing, this
list displays only link templates in your source drawings.
Enter SQL Condition
To create a new condition, enter it in the box.
1870 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
SQL Condition Syntax
SQL has a strict grammatical structure and syntax. Here are some rules to
follow when you define SQL statements.
Character values (data type CHAR) must be enclosed in single quotation
marks ('XXX').
If the column has a data type of string or data, enclose the column name
in double quotes. If the column has a numeric data type, do not enclose
the column name in double quotes.
Database values are case sensitive, but field (column) names are not.
Do not end each statement with a semicolon (;) as in standard SQL syntax.
For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00'. For example:
"DATE">TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'
Do not use AutoCAD Map 3D or DOS wild cards such as * or ? as part of
column values or names.
Do not use SQL keywords as identifiers. Examples of keywords are SQL
commands and data types such as CHAR, GROUP, SQL, TABLE, USER,
SECTION, BY, and CURRENT. Examples of identifiers are table and column
names. For example, if you try to create a table with a column name of
CURRENT, AutoCAD Map 3D displays an error message.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports standard SQL syntax as formally defined in the
ANSI X3.135-1989 SQL standard.
Type SQL Condition dialog box | 1871
1872
Raster Image Dialog Boxes
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)
Use this command to turn on or off the display of frames.
To display image frames (page 495)
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Image Correlation dialog box
Use this dialog box to correlate an image within the drawing when you insert
it.
To insert a raster image (page 460)
To correlate an image during insertion (page 464)
Click Home tab Data panel Insert An Image.
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
The Source tab displays correlation information from the selected correlation
source. The Insertion tab shows how these settings apply to the current drawing.
34
1873
Correlation Source list
Select a correlation source for the image. If a resource or world file exists
for the image, it is in this list.
Insertion Point area
View the insertion point (X, Y, and Z coordinates) for the lower-left corner
of the image frame. On the Source tab, this information is in the units
specified in the Units area at the bottom of the tab. On the Insertion tab,
this information is in current drawing units.
Rotation box
Enter the amount of rotation in current drawing angle units for the image.
This value uses the lower-left corner as the base point.
Scale box
Enter a scale factor for the image. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the
image. For example, to make the image twice as large, enter 2.
Density box
Enter the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image.
Units list
Select the units for the insertion point and density. For example, if your
image was scanned at 300 dpi, select Inches.
Apply
Apply your changes.
Pick
Click Pick (on the Insertion tab) to draw a frame for the image. For more
information, see To adjust the image frame manually during insertion (page
465).
Frame Color box
View the current color for the image frame and for the foreground of a
bitonal image. Usually, this is the current AutoCAD Map 3D color. However,
when you insert a bitonal image, AutoCAD Map 3D first looks for the
foreground color in the image header file or in a resource file. If it cannot
find the color information, then the foreground color defaults to the current
AutoCAD Map 3D color. To change the color, click Select (on the Insertion
tab).
1874 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Image Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to view data about the selected images in your drawing.
To display the Image Information dialog box (page 475)
Click Insert tab Image panel Information.
File area
View the image name, location, file type, size, and date it was created and
modified.
Image area
View the image density, depth, width, height, and color type.
Object area
View the linetype and layer of the image frame.
Correlation area
View the insertion point, scale, and rotation of the selected image.
NOTE If you select more than one image, and the information varies for different
images, then Varies is displayed.
Image Management dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about images in your drawing.
To display the Image Management dialog box (page 474)
Click Insert tab Image panel Image Management.
View the names of the images that were inserted into the drawing, the current
display order, and other image information. Each image in your drawing, even
Image Information dialog box | 1875
if it is unnamed or a copy, is listed. To indicate copies, the dialog box numbers
them in the following format: imagename:1, imagename:2.
The images are listed in display order. The image at the top of the list is
displayed on top and drawn last. To modify the image display order, click an
image name and drag it up or down in the list.
Image
The name of the image file.
File
The full path name for the image file.
Layer
The layer on which the image is located.
Created
The date that the file was created.
Density
Dots per inch that the image was scanned at. Synonymous with resolution.
Depth
Every pixel of an image has information associated with it that defines its
color. The amount of information stored with each pixel is referred to as
depth. The more information that is stored with each bit, the greater the
number of colors that can be represented.
Type
The format type of the image.
Visible
The display status of the image.
Last Modified
The date that the image was last modified.
File Size
The file size of the image in bytes.
Layout
Click Layout to display the Image Management Layout dialog box (page
1877), where you can determine which topic columns are displayed and their
order.
To view additional information about an image, select the image and
right-click. Click Information to display the Image Information dialog box.
1876 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
NOTE You can change the size and position of this dialog box. Any changes you
make will be retained in future sessions.
Image Management Layout dialog box
Use this dialog box to control which topic columns are displayed and the
order in which they are displayed in the Image Management dialog box.
To display the Image Management dialog box (page 474)
Click Insert tab Image panel Image Management.
Image Topics list
Select or clear the check box next to a topic to display or remove that topic
column. You can drag a selected topic up or down.
Description area
Provide a brief description of the selected topic in the Image Topics list.
Image Select dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the selection of multiple images in your drawing.
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click (page 493)
Click Home tab Data panel Insert An Image.
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
You can select images by placing your cursor over them and pressing Shift +
left-click. If you select more than one image, the Image Select dialog box is
displayed.
Image Management Layout dialog box | 1877
List of images
View each image you inserted into the drawing. Selected images are
highlighted. Click an image name to select or deselect it.
Select All
Click to select all the images in your drawing.
Select None
Click to remove all selected images from the selection set.
Insert Image dialog box
Use this dialog box to insert raster images whose formats are not supported
by Data Connect (page 437)
To insert a raster image (page 460)
Click Home tab Data panel Insert An Image.
Select one or more images to insert into a drawing. You can view information
about an image and preview the image before you insert it.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the image to insert on the command line.
Look In
Select the drive and folder that contains the image.
File Name
Type or select the name of the image or images to insert.
Files Of Type
From the list of available image formats, select the type of file to display in
the list.
Show Frame(s) Only
Select this option to insert only a frame placeholder for the image. The
image is not loaded into memory and not displayed. This is useful if you
are inserting a group of images and don't want to wait for each image to
1878 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
display. (To display the image later, select the image frame. Right-click the
image frame Image Show Image.)
If this option is not selected, the image is loaded into memory and displayed
as it is inserted.
Modify Correlation
Display the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1873) when you click Open.
The Image Correlation dialog box lets you review and modify the correlation
settings for the image. This option is not available if multiple images are
selected. If you do not select this option, the image is inserted using its
default correlation settings. Default settings are determined by searching
for correlation data in the following order.
1 World file
2 Resource file (.res extension)
3 Tab files (.tab extension)
4 Image file
5 Defaults set in the Raster Extension Options dialog box
Information >>
Display information about the image file and preview the image.
Raster Extension Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to configure options for raster images you insert with the
Insert An Image dialog box.
Setting Raster Image Options (page 249)
Click Insert tab Image panel angle-arrow.
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Configure raster image options using the following tabs:
Raster Extension Options dialog box | 1879
Paths
Use the Paths tab to set the directory for resource files. Resource files store
information about an image insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Resource files have the same base name as the raster image with an .res
extension.
Resource File Directory
Specify the directory where AutoCAD Map 3D searches for resource files.
Click to locate a directory. This directory applies only to resource (.res)
files and not to other correlation sources.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D looks for a resource file
associated with the image in the Resource File Directory path. If it locates
a resource file, you can select it as the source of correlation information. If
you leave the resource file path blank, AutoCAD Map 3D searches the
directory or directories the images were inserted from.
Use Resource File Directory Before Using Image Directory
Informs AutoCAD Map 3D to search for resource files in the resource file
directory before searching the image path stored in the drawing.
General
Use the General tab to set how frames are displayed, the display quality of
images, image detach options, and the Shift + left-click setting.
Display Preferences
Image Frame list
Specify how AutoCAD Map 3D displays the image frames in your drawing.
Hide the frames by selecting Frames Off, display frames in front of the
images by selecting Frame Drawn Above Image, or display frames behind
the images by selecting Frame Drawn Below Image.
Display Quality High
Dither the pixels onscreen so that the changes between shades and colors
are more gradual. This setting is recommended for color and grayscale
images.
Display Quality Draft option
Do not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for bitonal images.
1880 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Image Detach Preferences
Ask Before Detach
Have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you to detach an image if there are no
more frames in the drawing that reference the image.
Always Detach
Automatically detach an image when you erase the image frames.
Never Detach
Keep the image attached, even if you erase the frames.
Shift + Left Click
Shift + Left Click Image Select
Enable selection of images by placing your cursor over them and clicking
the left mouse button while pressing Shift. This feature is useful when you
are zoomed in to the image and cannot see the image frame.
Image Defaults
Use the Image Defaults tab to set correlation defaults. Most images have
correlation data that is stored in the image file header, or in a resource file,
World file, or tab file. However, some images may not have any correlation
data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In addition, if
the correlation source does not include information on the scale or the density,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default values on this tab when inserting the image.
TIP Setting the correlation defaults can save you time if you have multiple images
that require the same insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Insertion Values
X
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D X coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Y
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D Y coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Z
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D Z coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Rotation
Enter a default rotation for images.
Raster Extension Options dialog box | 1881
Scale
Enter a default numeric scaling factor for images. For example, to make the
image twice as large, enter 2 in the Scale box.
Density
Density
Type a default density (or resolution) for images. You should set the this
value to the most common density value at which your images are scanned.
Insertion Point and Density Units list
Select the default insertion point and density units for the images. For
example, a common North American scanning resolution is 300 dpi (300
dots per inch). To set this value as your default density, type 300 in the
Density edit box and select inches as the Units. If you insert images that
have density value and density unit information stored in the correlation
source, then these defaults are not used.
For an illustration of how to set the density value and units for an image,
see Setting Image Density (page 467).
Memory
Use the Memory tab to specify the amount of memory (RAM) that AutoCAD
Map 3D can use for images before using a temporary swap file. You can also
define the location of the temporary swap file.
Temporary File Location
Temporary File Location
The location to use for your temporary swap file. Click to locate a drive
and directory. AutoCAD Map 3D uses this temporary swap file when the
memory limit has been exceeded.
NOTE Close and restart AutoCAD Map 3D to put these settings into effect.
RAM Settings
Physical RAM
View the amount of physical RAM in your system.
Memory Limit
View the amount of RAM that AutoCAD Map 3D will use before creating a
swap file.
NOTE Increasing the default amount may degrade your systems performance.
Be sure to leave enough RAM for your operating system and other applications.
1882 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Default
Restore the memory setting to the default RAM amount, 25% of the total
physical memory.
MB, KB, and Bytes
Specify the units (megabytes, kilobytes, or bytes) for defining the Memory
Limit.
Transparency Color dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the color that should appear transparent in the
image.
To change the color that is transparent (page 500)
Click Insert tab Image panel angle-arrow.
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect. See
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces (page 437)
Click Select and pick a color on the image. When transparency is turned on,
the selected color is transparent.
Setting transparency color is available only if the image is loaded and the
Raster Extension is loaded. To load the image, select the image, then right-click
the image frame Image Show Image. To load the Raster Extension,
choose a Raster Extension command.
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an AutoCAD Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in AutoCAD Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
Transparency Color dialog box | 1883
1884
Saving Objects Dialog
Boxes
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command)
Use this command to unlock selected locked objects in the current drawing and
remove them from the save set.
To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects (page 759)
Click Home tab Data panel Remove Objects From Save Set.
NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about saving
changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
Respond to the prompts:
Erased/<Select>:
Enter e to remove all objects that have been erased from the current drawing.
Enter s or press Enter to select individual objects.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select the objects to unlock and remove
from the save set. Press Enter when you finish.
Press Enter to confirm.
35
1885
Objects that are locked in their source drawings are unlocked so that other
users can edit them. They are removed from the list to be saved back to source
drawings.
Any changes made to the objects in the current drawing still exist in the
drawing. To save these changes to a new file, click Save As
AutoCAD Drawing.
Objects that were erased from the current drawing remain erased from the
drawing, but they will not be erased from source drawings.
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
Use this command to add objects the save set and lock the objects.
To add objects to the save set and lock the objects (page 751)
Click Home tab Data panel Add To Save Set.
NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about saving
changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
If object locking is on, adding an object to the save set locks the object to
prevent anyone else from editing it while you are using it. When an object is
locked, other users can view it, but they cannot edit it.
Respond to the prompts:
Add objects to save set: Select/<allNew>:
Enter s to individually select objects, or press Enter to add all objects created
since opening the current drawing.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method.
If you plan to edit more than one object, lock them all at the start of your
editing session. That way, no other users can modify or lock them before you
get to them.
1886 | Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
If an object is on a locked layer in the source drawing, you cannot add it to
the save set. If you are working in paper space, you cannot add objects to the
save set.
Objects in the save set are saved to source drawings when you use the Save
Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1887) command.
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)
Use this command to highlight all objects in the current drawing that are
marked to be saved to source drawings.
To view objects in the save set (page 752)
Click Home tab Data panel Show Objects In Save Set.
NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about saving
changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
To remove the highlighting, press Enter.
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box
Use this dialog box to save the objects that are currently in the save set back
to source drawings.
To save queried objects back to attached source drawings (page 754)
Click Home tab Data panel Save To Source.
NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about saving
changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) | 1887
If you are saving new objects, specify the source drawings to save objects to
and the method used to save objects. Queried objects are saved back to their
original layer in their original source drawing.
You must have Edit Drawing privileges to save objects to source drawings. See
the User Administration dialog box (page 1934).
Status area
View the number of queried objects and the number of newly created objects
that are in the save set.
Save Queried Objects
Save queried objects to source drawings. Queried objects are saved back to
their original layer in their original source drawing.
If you have redefined a block, layer, or text style definition and you want
to save the new definition, be sure the option to save the definition is
selected on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page
1908).
Save Newly Created Objects
Save objects created in the current drawing to source drawings.
Under Save Order For Newly Created Objects, specify the source drawings
to save objects to and the method used to save objects.
Save Order for Newly Created Objects
Specify the method to use when saving objects created in the current drawing.
Objects are saved by the first method that applies to them.
Area
Save objects to the first source drawing in the list within whose boundary
they lie. This is useful for tiled drawings. This method does not save objects
outside the boundary of the source drawings.
You can specify the drawing boundary by setting save back extents in the
Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923). If no save back extents are set, the
drawing extents are used as the boundary. If an object lies partially outside
the save back extents, the drawing extents are modified to include the
object, but the save back extents are not changed.
Layer
Save objects to the first source drawing in the list that includes a layer of
the same name as the layer the object is on in the current drawing. This is
useful for stacked drawings. This method does not save objects on layers in
the current drawing that have no corresponding layer in the source drawings.
1888 | Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
Selective
Specify which objects to save and which drawings to save them in. Objects
are saved to the same layer as they are on in the current drawing. If the
source drawing does not have a layer of the same name, one is created. This
method applies to all objects, so you cannot specify other save back methods
after this one.
Drawings to Save New Objects to list
Specify which drawings to save objects to. If you use the Selective method,
AutoCAD Map 3D prompts for the objects to save to each selected drawing.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Who Has It Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to find out who has an object locked, what source drawing
and current drawing it comes from, and the date and time it was locked.
To find out who locked an object (page 735)
Click Home tab Data panel Show Who Has It.
NOTE This command affects drawing objects only. For information about locking
geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
Who Has It Information dialog box | 1889
1890
Survey Dialog Boxes
New Data Store dialog box
Use the New Data Store dialog box to create a specialized data store for survey
data.
To create a survey data store (page 1000)
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, click Data New Survey Data Store.
NOTE This dialog box creates a specialized survey data store only. To create other
types of geospatial data stores, see Creating a Data Store (page 586). To create a
data store for external data that you will attach to drawing objects, see Setting Up
Data Sources for Drawings (page 204).
File Location
Click to enter a file name and save location for your new Survey Data
Store. Survey Data Stores are always in SDF format.
Coordinate System Assignment
Enter the coordinate system code for your new Survey Data Store. Click
to select the coordinate system from a list.
36
1891
Project Properties dialog box
Use the Project Properties dialog box to view and edit properties for a project
in the Survey Data Store.
To view or edit project properties (page 1002)
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a project Properties.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only.
Click the Categorized View button to view project properties by category.
Click the Alphabetized View button to view project properties in alphabetical
order.
Project
Display information about the Project, such as Name, File Name, LandXML
version, and so on. Click in a field to edit the Project information.
Constrained fields display valid options in a drop-down list.
Application
Display information about the application that created the data. Click in a
field to edit the Application information. Constrained fields display valid
options in a drop-down list.
CoordinateSystem
Display information about the coordinate system of the Project. Click in a
field to edit the coordinate system information. Constrained fields display
valid options in a drop-down list.
Units
Display information about a Projects units of measure. Click in a field to
edit the measurement unit information. Constrained fields display valid
options in a drop-down list.
1892 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
Survey Properties dialog box
Use the Survey Properties dialog box to view information about a specific
survey in a Survey Data Store.
To view or edit survey properties (page 1004)
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a survey Properties.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only.
Click the Categorized View button to view survey properties by category.
Click the Alphabetized View button to view survey properties in alphabetical
order.
Survey
Display properties for a given survey, such as Name, Description, Start Time,
End Time, Surveyor, and so on. Click in a field to edit the survey
information. Constrained fields display valid options in a drop-down list.
Equipment
Display information about the equipment used to collect the survey data.
Click in a field to edit the equipment information. Constrained fields display
valid options in a drop-down list.
FieldNotes
Display any field notes entered by the surveyor, such as coordinate geometry
data. Click the FieldNotes field to display the Field Note Editor.
Units
Display information about a surveys units of measure. Click in a field to
edit the measurement unit information. Constrained fields display valid
options in a drop-down list.
Survey Properties dialog box | 1893
Point Group Properties dialog box
Use the Point Group Properties dialog box to view information about a point
group in a Survey Data Store.
To view or edit point group properties (page 1005)
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a point group Properties.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only.
Click the Categorized View button to view point group properties by
category.
Click the Alphabetized View button to view point group properties in
alphabetical order.
Point Group
Display information about the point group, such as Name, State, Zone
Number, and so on. Click in a field to edit the point group information.
Constrained fields display valid options in a drop-down list.
Field Note Editor
Use the Field Note Editor to view and edit field notes entered by a surveyor
at the time of a survey. Field notes may contain measurements for calculating
unreachable points using coordinate geometry, for example.
To view or edit survey properties (page 1003)
1894 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
On the Survey tab of the Task Pane, right-click a survey Properties. In the
Survey Properties palette, click the Field Notes entry.
NOTE This functionality is for geospatial survey data only.
Field Notes
View and edit the field notes for a survey.
Create Surface dialog box
Use this dialog box to create raster surfaces from survey data.
To create a surface from a source filesurface:create surface from fileIn the Tool-
based Ribbon Works... (page 1009)
Click Create tab 3D Surface panel Create From Points.
Source
Click to add source data. To add data from a source file, click File. To add
data from a data connection, click Connection. To add point data from
AcDb points already in your map, click Points in Drawing.
Click to remove source data.
Click to move source data down the order list. If you have not specified a
coordinate system for your map, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the first valid
coordinate system in the source data list.
Create Surface dialog box | 1895
Click to move source data up the order list. If you have not specified a
coordinate system for your map, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the first valid
coordinate system in the source data list.
Formatting
Select Format
Select the format of the source data. Formats describe the layout of the data
in your source files using the following convention:
P is point ID
E is Easting, or longitudinal values
N is Northing or latitudinal values
Z is elevation values
D is description
Make sure that you select the correct format plus delimiter type (comma or
space) for your data source.
The Autodesk Uploadable File format is as follows: User-Defined (point ID,
description, or any other type of data), X, Y, Z. It is a comma-separated
format, and uses the # character for comment text.
Z-Unit
Select the vertical (Z) unit of your data: meters, US feet, or international
feet.
Preview
An excerpt from your data source. Check the Preview pane to confirm that
you are adding or connecting to the proper data file or source.
Coordinate System Assignment
Enter Code
Specify the coordinate system of the source data. Click to choose the
coordinate system from a list. You must specify a coordinate system for
each data source individually.
1896 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
Destination
Output File Name
Enter the save name and location of the GeoTIFF file. Click to browse
to a save location.
Layer Name
Enter a name for the new Display Manager raster layer.
Source Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the data connection source for creating a surface.
You must first connect to your data using Data Connect. For FDO data, only
point and line data are supported. Surface features such as parcels are not
supported, and will not appear in this dialog box. If you are connecting to an
SDF file that contains point data and line data, both points and lines will be
added as source data.
To create a surface from a data connection (page 1010)
Click Create tab 3D Surface panel Create From Points.
Point Cloud Manager
Use the Point Cloud Manager to manage LiDAR data and create indexed point
cloud data store (.isd) files.
To specify a coordinate system for your point cloud data storeIn the , click the
Coordinate System f... (page 1016)
Click Create tab Point Cloud panel Create Index
Add File Add a LAS, ASCII, or ISD file to the Point Cloud Manager for
processing.
Source Data dialog box | 1897
Create Group Create a merge group to assign multiple source files to a single
output file.
Remove From Group Remove a file from a merge group. The file remains in
the Point Cloud Manager.
Remove Group Remove a merge group from the Point Cloud Manager. Files
that are in the merge group remain in the Point Cloud Manager.
Remove File Remove a file from the Point Cloud Manager.
Cancel Processing Cancel the current conversion process.
Source Display the name of the source file or merge group. Click to select
a new source file. Click the merge group Source field to rename a merge group.
Output The file name and save location for the indexed point cloud data store
to be generated. Click the Output field to change the output file name and
save location.
Coordinate System Set the coordinate system for the point cloud data store.
By default, this field displays the coordinate code for the source file. To select
another coordinate system for your point cloud data store, click and select
the appropriate code from the list.
Filter The filter type applied to the source data. To filter your source data,
click the Filter field to display the Filter Point Cloud dialog box (page 1900).
Date Created The date and time that the point cloud data store was created.
This field is not editable.
Generate Index Generate an indexed point cloud data store file for the selected
source files or merge group.
Add to Map Add a point cloud to the map, and a point cloud layer to the
Display Manager, for an indexed point cloud data store.
Surface Manager
Use the Surface Manager to create raster-based surfaces from point cloud data.
To create a surface from a point cloudIn the Display Manager, right-click a point
cloud layer and se... (page 1022)
1898 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
Click Create tab 3D Surface panel Create From Point Cloud.
Add File Add a point cloud data store (.isd) file to the Surface Manager for
processing.
Create Group Create a merge group to assign multiple source files to a single
surface.
Remove From Group Remove a file from a merge group. The file remains in
the Surface Manager.
Remove Group Remove a merge group from the Surface Manager. Files that
are in the merge group remain in the Surface Manager.
Remove File Remove a file from the Surface Manager.
Cancel Processing The current surface creation process.
Source Display the name of the source file or merge group. Click to select
a new source file. Click the merge group Source field to rename a merge group.
Filter The filter type applied to the source data. To filter your source data,
click the Filter field to display the Filter Point Cloud dialog box (page 1900).
Parameters Specify the type of surface that AutoCAD Map 3D will create
(GeoTIFF or ESRI ASC). To specify parameters for your surface, click the
Parameters field to display the Grid Parameters dialog box (page 1901).
Output The file name and save location for the generated surface file. Click
the Output field to change the output file name and save location.
Date Created The date and time that the surface was created. This field is not
editable.
Generate Grid Generate a surface file for the selected source files or merge
group.
Add to Map Add a surface to the map and a raster layer to the Display
Manager.
Surface Manager | 1899
Filter Point Cloud dialog box
Use the Filter Point Cloud dialog box to filter your LiDAR or point cloud data
by classification, elevation, intensity, or location on your map.
To filter point cloud dataIn the Display Manager, right-click a point cloud layer
and select Filter ... (page 1025)
Click Create tab Point Cloud panel Create Index
Filter By Select a filter type from the drop-down list. You can filter by
classification, elevation, intensity, or location on your map.
Define Filter Define the filter to apply to your data:
Classification: select the classified values you want to include in your data.
Shift-click or control-click to select multiple values.
Elevation: type the elevation ranges you want to display in your map. Use
hyphens to define ranges and commas to separate them; for example,
150-200, 350-400, 1200-2000.
Intensity: filter data based on LiDAR intensity values. Use hyphens to
define ranges and commas to separate them; for example, 0.25-2.00,
3.50-4.00, 120.00-200.00.
Spatial: Click the Locate on Map button to create a spatial filter. You can
create a spatial filter based on a circle, rectangle, polygon, or proximity to
an object on your map.
Clear Filter Clear the values for the filter that you have applied.
Apply Filter Apply the filter you have defined to your data.
Cancel Cancel the filter operation and closes the Filter Point Cloud dialog
box.
1900 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
Grid Parameters dialog box
Use the Grid Parameters dialog box to specify the surface type, name, save
location, resolution, and gap filling parameters for a surface.
To create a surface from a point cloudIn the Display Manager, right-click a point
cloud layer and se... (page 1022)
Click Create tab 3D Surface panel Create From Point Cloud.
Surface Type Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D creates a GeoTIFF or ESRI
ASC surface.
File Name The name and save location of your surface file. To change the file
name and save location, click .
Parameters
Cell Size Specify the number of point cloud units per output cell (raster pixel).
This parameter determines the output size of the raster surface. For a 300 x
500 meter point cloud, setting the cell size to 0.5 results in a 600 x 1000 pixel
raster image.
Cell Units The unit of measurement for your point cloud cell size. Cell units
can be measured in meters, feet, US survey feet, and international feet. By
default, cell units are measured in meters.
Search Radius Specify the input point weight. The vertical (Z) value for each
cell is calculated from the Z-values of all points in the cell. Those closest to
the center are weighted highest, while those at the search radius limit are
weighted half as much as the center points. Increase the search radius to give
more weight to Z-values for remote points. Decrease the search radius to give
less weight to Z-values for remote points.
Fill Gaps Fills gaps in your surface. Check the Fill Gaps box, and select the
appropriate method: Nearest Neighbor, Normal Distribution, Normal
Distribution Smooth, Square Distance, or Square Distance Smooth.
Grid Parameters dialog box | 1901
Point Cloud Style dialog box
Use the Point Cloud Style dialog box to style your point cloud data based on
classification, elevation, or LiDAR intensity value.
To style point data by classificationIn the Display Manager, right-click the point
cloud layer to st... (page 677)
Click Point Cloud tab Style panel Set Style.
Classification Tab
Classification AutoCAD Map 3D assigns a default color to each point class.
To change the color for a point class, select a new color from the drop-down
list. If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click More
Colors. The Select Color dialog box appears. You can select an Index Color,
True Color, or Color Book.
Elevation Tab
Minimum Value The minimum elevation value of your point cloud data.
This field is not editable.
Maximum Value The maximum elevation value of your point cloud data.
This field is not editable.
Number of Rules Enter the number of rules for the elevation scale range. The
default number of rules is five. Rules are distributed evenly over the range of
elevation data in your point cloud.
Style Range The From and To values for the colors in your style range. To
change a color for your style range, select a new color from the drop-down
list. If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click More
Colors. The Select Color dialog box appears. You can select an Index Color,
True Color, or Color Book.
Intensity Tab
Minimum Value The minimum intensity value of your point cloud data.
This field is not editable.
Maximum Value The maximum intensity value of your point cloud data.
This field is not editable.
1902 | Chapter 36 Survey Dialog Boxes
Number of Rules Enter the number of rules for the intensity scale range. The
default number of rules is five. Rules are distributed evenly over the range of
intensity data in your point cloud.
Style Range The From and To values for the colors in your style range. To
change a color for your style range, select a new color from the drop-down
list. If you do not see the color that you want in the drop-down list, click More
Colors. The Select Color dialog box appears. You can select an Index Color,
True Color, or Color Book.
Point Cloud Style dialog box | 1903
1904
Setting Map Options
Dialog Boxes
MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command)
Use this command to display the About AutoCAD Map 3D screen, which shows
the version number and date of AutoCAD Map 3D.
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT
Use this command to specify whether or not geospatial features are automatically
checked out when edited.
To check out features automatically (page 696)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab Edit Set panel
Auto Checkout.
NOTE This command affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
locking drawing objects in a multi-user environment, see Turning On Object Locking
(page 733).
37
1905
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)
Use this command to dock or undock the Task Pane.
Use these techniques for the Task pane
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar at the top of the pane
(docked).
MAPEDITSETAUTO
Use this command to specify whether or not edits to features are automatically
reflected in the feature source.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation.
To update edits automatically (page 700)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Feature Edit tab Edit Set panel
Automatic Update.
NOTE This command affects geospatial feature data only. For information about
updating attached drawing objects , see Setting Save Back Options (page 763).
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS
Use this command to specify whether geospatial features are checked out as
AutoCAD drawing objects or as features.
To specify Feature Edit Options (page 240)
1906 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Feature Editing Options dialog box (page 1929)
These settings determine how you work with your data.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652)
and MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubbersheeting [ADER-
SHEET (page 1648)]).
Allows you to use feature styling. Allows you to use feature styling.
MAPWSFOCUS
Use this command to set the keyboard or mouse focus to the Task Pane. You
can also set the focus by clicking in the Task Pane.
To return the focus to the command line, press ESC or click in the command
line area. Whenever you return to AutoCAD Map 3D after using another
application, the focus is reset to the command line.
MAPWSFOCUS | 1907
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)
Use this command to hide or show the Task Pane.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session (page 221)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click View tab Palettes panel Map
Task Pane.
MAPWSREFRESH
Use this command to refresh the Task Pane. This is sometimes necessary if
Map Explorer does not reflect your recent changes to the drawing or if the
icons in the Display Manager need to be refreshed.
To refresh Map Explorer (page 221)
Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to define options for the Task Pane, drawings, drawing
queries, save options for drawing objects, drawing data sources, coordinate
systems, and the system.
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 218)
In the Tool-based Ribbon Workspace, click Map Setup tab Map panel angle-
arrow.
Task Pane (page 1909)
1908 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Current Drawing (page 1909)
Query (page 1911)
Save Back (page 1913)
Data Source (page 1914)
Multi-User (page 1915)
System (page 1916)
Coordinate Systems tab (page 1916)
Task Pane
Specify Task Pane options.
Map Explorer Categories To Display
Select the categories to display in Map Explorer. When you turn off the
display of the category, all functionality associated with the category is still
available.
TIP To reduce screen clutter, turn off the display of categories you dont use.
These settings are user-specific and will affect any drawing that you open.
These settings will take effect the next time you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
Show Task Pane on startup
Show or hide the Task Pane at startup.
Show Properties Palette on startup
Show or hide the Properties palette at startup.
Current Drawing
Specify options for attached drawings, coordinate transformations, and
drawing-specific data sources.
Activate Attached Drawings
Specify the default active/inactive status for drawings you attach to the
current drawing and whether the active status is saved with the current
drawing.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Specify how AutoCAD Map 3D performs coordinate transformations.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1909
NOTE These options affect attached drawings only. For information about
changing the coordinate system for geospatial data, see Changing Coordinate
Systems (page 311).
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Changes In Units
Specify whether the units used in the coordinate system of an attached
drawing are scaled to the units used in the coordinate system of the current
drawing.
For example, if an attached drawing uses meters and the current drawing
uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale text and blocks so that their size or scale
measures in feet rather than meters.
If you do not set the For Changes In Units option, AutoCAD Map 3D doesn't
size or scale text and block objects. In that case, a block that is five meters
long in an attached drawing will be five feet long when you bring it into
the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you may introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Map Distortion
Adjust the size and scale of text and blocks to correct for map distortion
introduced when you represent a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian
coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X will remain the same
length when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you don't select this option, the two objects will be scaled to different
lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map distortion (or
grid scale factor).
This option is not available if For Changes In Units under Adjust Sizes And
Scales is not selected.
Adjust Rotations - For Map Distortion
Adjust the angle of text and blocks to correct for map distortion due to the
convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate
system from true north).
Adjust Rotations - For Zero-Rotation Objects
Specify that text and blocks that have a rotation value of zero in the source
drawing are adjusted to correct distortion due to the convergence angle
(the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate system from true
north).
If you set this option, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the convergence angle
for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you don't set this option,
1910 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero rotation value
even if there is a convergence angle.
This option is not available if For Map Distortion under Adjust Rotations
is not selected.
Adjust Elevations
Adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you select For Changes In
Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And Scales.
Data Source Options
Specify drawing-specific data source options.
NOTE These options affect data stores linked to drawing objects only. For
information about filtering geospatial feature data, see Filtering Features When
You Add Them to a Map (page 309).
Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List
Specify the maximum number of SQL conditions that are stored in the SQL
Condition History dialog box and in the Table Filter History dialog box.
Once the history list is full, the oldest, or first added, condition is removed
from the list to make room for a new condition. If memory is limited on
your system, keep this number low.
Query
Query Options
Use the Query tab to specify query options and default settings for queries.
NOTE These options affect queries for drawing objects only. For information about
filtering geospatial feature data, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a
Map (page 309).
Save Current Query With Drawing
Save the current query definition with the current drawing, even if you
have not saved the query. When you next open this drawing, the query
loads as the current query definition.
Use Case Sensitivity When Matching Text Values
Specify whether text values in Property Condition queries must match the
case used in the query definition.
Create Selection Set From Queried Objects
Specify whether the selection set contains the items retrieved by the query.
To use this selection set when editing, enter p (to use the previous selection
set) when prompted to select objects. (As soon as you select other objects,
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1911
AutoCAD Map 3D clears this selection set and replaces it with your new
selection.)
If your query finds a large number of objects, this feature can take time. If
you do not need to put the objects into a selection set, clear this check box
to save time during queries.
Create Associative Hatch Objects
Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative hatch objects for
hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG, ADEQUERY (using alter
properties), MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC (using fill) commands.
If this box is not selected, hatch objects created by these commands are
non-associative hatch objects.
Preview Queries
Set options to use when displaying blocks and raster images in Preview Query
mode.
Show Insertion Point Only
Specify whether to show only the insertion point of inserted blocks in a
Preview query and not the objects. An insertion point is represented as an
X.
Show Image Clipping Boundary Only
Specify whether a Preview query displays only the clipping boundary of
raster images.
Preview Definitions From
Specify the location to use for definitions of layers, linetypes, blocks, etc.
when running a query in Preview mode.
Select Current to speed up the preview, though some items may not display
exactly as they will when the query is executed in Draw mode.
Location Queries
Set options to use when creating Location queries.
Boundary Color For And/Or Conditions
Specify the boundary color for And and Or conditions when you edit a
Location query and click Show.
Boundary Color For Not Conditions
Specify the boundary color for Not conditions when you edit a Location
query and click Show.
1912 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects
Specify whether Location queries reference the entire bounding area of
hatch, solid, and raster objects or only the bounding edge. (The bounding
edge for raster objects is the clipping boundary.)
When you select this option, a hatch boundary is treated as an area. If the
query location is on any part of the hatch object, even if it touches only a
hatch boundary, the whole hatch object (the hatch and the hatch boundary)
is included in the selection.
When you clear this option, the hatch boundary is treated as an edge. The
query location must intersect or enclose the boundary edge of the hatch
object to include the object in the selection. If the query selects only the
space inside the hatch area, but not the hatch boundary, the hatch object
(the hatch and the hatch boundary) is not selected.
This setting affects the ADEQUERY, MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC
commands.
Determine Block Locations Using
Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D uses the block's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether a block meets a Location
condition.
Determine Text Locations Using
Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D uses the text's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether text meets a Location
condition.
Default Joining Operator
Specify the default joining operator to use in the Define Query dialog box.
And
Specify that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Or
Specify that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Save Back
Use the Save Back tab to specify options for saving queried objects back to
attached drawings.
NOTE These options affect save back options for drawing objects only. For
information about saving changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits
Automatically (page 698).
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1913
Save Set
Set options for adding objects to the save set.
Save Back To Source Drawings
Specify the behavior of objects when you save them back to their source
drawings.
Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back
Save changes to block definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Layer Definitions On Save Back
Save changes to layer definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Text Style Definitions On Save Back
Save changes to text style definitions back to attached drawings.
Create History File Of Changes
Create a file of all changes made to each source drawing. The history file
has the same name as the source drawing file, but has the extension .hst.
Create Backup File Of Source Drawing
Create a back up file of attached drawings before saving changes. Backup
drawing files have the extension .bak.
Data Source
Display Of Multiple Tables
Use the Data Source tab to set options for Data View behavior, data source
path name display, and database file associations.
NOTE These options affect Data View, which is available for drawing objects only.
For information about the Data Table, which displays geospatial feature properties,
see Overview of the Data Table (page 1127).
Specify the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
Show Each Table In A Separate Data View
Open a new Data View window for each open table. Move between tables
by clicking on the window you want.
Show All Tables In One Data View
Open only one Data View window. When you open a new table, the previous
table is automatically closed.
Data Views
Specify the behavior of the Data View.
1914 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Open In Read-Only Mode
Open the Data View in read-only mode. When this option is selected, you
cannot edit data in the Data View.
Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing
Save all formatting changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders,
that you make in the Data View.
Keep On Top
Specify whether the Data View window remains on top of all other windows,
even when it is not the active window.
Associate Database Versions With File Extensions
Click Associate to display the Associate Database Versions dialog box where
you specify the database version to use for each database file extension.
When you drop a database file on the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD Map 3D
checks the file extension and uses the specified version of the database
software.
Default Provider For Microsoft Access Databases
Select the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
Multi-User
Multi-User Options
Use the Multi-User tab to specify options for user login and object locking.
You must have Superuser privileges to modify multi-user options.
NOTE These options affect multi-user options for drawing objects only. For
information about locking and sharing geospatial feature data, see Checking Out
Features (page 695).
Set options that apply to all users in a multi-user environment.
Force User Login
Require users to log in before using AutoCAD Map 3D.
Enable Object Locking
Lock objects that are selected for the save set. If an object is locked, other
AutoCAD Map 3D users can view it, but cannot edit it.
AutoCAD users who do not have AutoCAD Map 3D cannot open a drawing
that an AutoCAD Map 3D user has open.
You cannot disable object locking while drawings are active.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1915
System
If you enabled Force User Login on the Multi User tab, you must log in as a
Superuser to edit System options.
Log File Options
Use the System tab to specify system settings.
Log files keep track of error messages and other AutoCAD Map 3D system
messages. If the log file is active, it is updated each time you use AutoCAD
Map 3D. To save space on your disk, you can delete or archive the log file and
start a new one.
Log File Active
Store error messages and other AutoCAD Map 3D system messages in the
log file.
Log File Name
Specify a name for the log file. Click Browse to search through existing
names or to change the drive or directory. If you do not specify a name,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the acadmap.log file in the current directory.
Message Level
Specify which kind of error messages to store in the log file.
Number Of Drawings Loaded In Memory At Once
Specify the number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can have open in
memory at the same time. This number does not limit the number of active
drawings. AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs
them.
If your system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to
200) to make queries faster.
Default Query File Directory
Specify the default directory for queries saved to external files.
Default Cache File Directory
Specify the default directory where your cache files are stored. Click Clear
Cache to enhance performance of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Coordinate Systems tab
Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing
Specify the program behavior when opening drawings that contain coordinate
system definitions. For more information about coordinate systems, see
Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 149).
1916 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Ignore Definitions
Have the program ignore coordinate system definitions when opening
drawing files.
Prompt User To Add Definitions to Dictionaries
Have the program prompt you for action when opening drawing files that
contain coordinate system definitions.
Automatically Add Definitions To Dictionary
Specify that, when opening drawing files that contain coordinate system
definitions, the program will automatically add the coordinate system
definitions from the drawing file to your coordinate system dictionary.
Geodetic Distance
Units For Display
Specify the units to use to display geodetic distances.
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings to use with the Coordinate Geometry
functions.
To set coordinate geometry options (page 234)
Click Home tab Draw panel COGO drop-down COGO Options.
Set North Direction
Direction From Y Axis If North on your map is not on the Y axis, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number that
represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y axis.
This option sets the ANGBASE system variable.
Elevation Settings
Prompt For 3D Data Input Select this option to have AutoCAD Map
3D prompt for 3D data, such as elevation, grade, or slope. If this option is
not selected, all elevations are assumed to be 0.
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box | 1917
Input Units Settings
Set the units for coordinate geometry input. Linear Units are US Feet,
International Feet, Meters, or Chains. Angle Formats are Decimal Degrees,
Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Grads, Radians, and Surveyors Units.
Azimuth Measurements
Define Bearings Relative To North Select this option if bearings in
your map are relative to North.
Define Bearings Relative to South Select this option if bearings in your
map are relative to South. This is most often the case for maps of the
southern hemisphere.
Create Text Log
When you select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D writes the content of the
COGO Input dialog box (page 1668) to the AutoCAD Text Window when you
create a point using that dialog box.
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box
Use this dialog to define or modify the drawing set for the current drawing.
Attach drawings that you will use with the current drawing. Activate only
those drawings you want to search for the current query.
To attach drawings (page 158)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
NOTE These options affect drawing objects only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data, see Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map (page
309).
In addition, you can change drawing settings such as description, simple
transformation, or save back extents.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the changes you make to the drawing set with the
current drawing. The next time you open this drawing, your new settings will
be in effect.
Attached Drawings list
View all drawings attached to the current drawing.
1918 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
The first column specifies if the drawing is active. Only active drawings are
searched during queries.
Yes indicates the drawing is active.
Locked indicates the drawing is inactive, and you have locks on objects
in the drawing.
No indicates the drawing is inactive.
If the drawing has a description assigned to it, that description appears in
the list instead of the file name. For information on how to assign a
description to a drawing, see Drawing Settings dialog box.
Activate
Activate all selected drawings.
Queries search only active drawings; they do not search inactive drawings.
Deactivate
Deactivate all selected drawings.
Queries do not search deactivated drawings. Queries search only active
drawings.
If you deactivate a drawing that contains objects you've locked, the status
of the drawing changes to Locked.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Drawing Settings
Display the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1923), where you can change
the drawing description, simple transformation settings, or save back extents.
Show Nested
When selected, the Attached Drawings list displays nested drawings attached
to active drawings. Nested drawings attached to inactive drawings are not
displayed.
If a drawing has nested drawings, a plus sign (+) appears before the drawing
name.
A nested drawing is a drawing that is not attached directly to the current
drawing, but is attached to a drawing in the drawing set.
When not selected, only top-level drawings appear in the Attached Drawings
list.
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box | 1919
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Attach
Display the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box (page 1811), where you can
attach additional source drawings to the current drawing.
To attach drawings to a source drawing, open the source drawing directly,
and then attach the drawings.
To open the source drawing, click Open AutoCAD Drawing.
Detach
Detach the selected drawings from the current drawing.
If you detach a parent drawing, all nested drawings attached to that drawing
are also detached.
Drawing Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to remove locks from drawings and create drawing indexes.
To create a drawing index (page 1294)
To release all locked objects (page 736)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Drawing Maintenance.
NOTE These options affect drawing objects only. For information about locking
and sharing geospatial feature data, see Checking Out Features (page 695).
Use the options in the Active Drawings area to see which drawings currently
have locks.
Use the options in the Locks area to see which users have objects locked, and
to remove those locks. This feature is useful if a system goes down while objects
are locked.
1920 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
To display information in the Locks area, click User List.
Active Drawings
Use this area to see which drawings currently have locks.
Active Drawings list
View all attached active drawings for the current drawing.
To display information about locked objects in a drawing, select the
drawing in the list. Click User List. The area at the bottom of the screen
updates to show the names of users who have locks on objects in the
drawing, and the number of objects they have locked.
To update indexes for a drawing, select the drawing in the list, click
Drawing Index.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawings Index
Display the Index Maintenance dialog box (page 1931), where you can specify
which types of indexes to create for the selected drawings.
User List
Update the display of users that have locks on objects in source drawings.
Locks
Use this area to see which users have objects locked, and to remove those
locks. This feature is useful if a system goes down while objects are locked.
To display information in this area, click User List.
Drawing Maintenance dialog box | 1921
User Name list
View all users who have locks on objects in the selected drawings. The
Number Of Objects Locked column shows how many locked objects each
user has.
To update this list, select an active drawing. Click User List.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Remove Locks
Unlock objects locked by the selected users. Be careful not to unlock objects
that other users are currently editing, as this may cause work to be lost.
Only Superusers can remove locks for other users.
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify separate filters for file names and for descriptions.
To attach drawings (page 158)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
Filters can include wild-card characters:
Asterisk (*) represents any set of letters.
Question mark (?) represents any single letter.
For example, if you enter *\ch* in the file name filter field, the drawing list
displays all file names that start with the letters ch in all directories.
To display drawings in a specific directory, enter the path to that directory.
For example, enter c:\office1\* to view all drawings in the office1 directory.
When specifying drives, use the drive aliases assigned in the Drive Alias
Administration dialog box (page 1928)
Nested drawings are also filtered. If the parent drawing is filtered out, none
of its nested drawings appear in the list. If the parent drawing appears in the
list, the filter applies to the nested drawings.
1922 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
To display all drawings, enter *\*.dwg in the File Name box. To display all
descriptions, enter * in the Description box.
Drawing Settings dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the drawing description, specify simple
transformation settings, or define save back extents.
To create a drawing description (page 166)
To set transformation options (page 169)
To set save back extents (page 170)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
NOTE These options affect drawing objects only. For information about saving
changes to geospatial feature data, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 698).
To change settings for a drawing, select the drawing in the list. Enter the new
information in the fields in the dialog box. When you finish, click Apply. You
can then select a new drawing.
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
Active Drawings list
Select the drawing to change.
This list displays all the active drawings in the drawing set. If a coordinate
system code is assigned to the drawing, that code is displayed in the left
column.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1923
Drawing Description box
Enter a new description for the selected drawing.
Descriptions make it easy for you to remember what is in a drawing. If a
description is assigned to the drawing, it appears in the drawing list instead
of the file name.
Simple Transformation area
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
If the document has a coordinate system code assigned to it, you cannot use
the simple transformation section.
When objects are saved back to their source drawings, their original scale,
offset, and rotation are restored. To permanently transform an object, use the
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) (page 1649) command.
Simple Transformation
Turn the simple transformation settings on and off.
When cleared, the settings are not used.
If the document has a global coordinate system code assigned to it, you
cannot use the simple transformation option.
Simple transformations let you tile, scale, or overlay drawings.
Scale box
Specify the change in scale of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
1924 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Enter a real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of objects, or
enter .5 to halve the size of objects.
Rotation box
Specify the rotation of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
Enter an angle. For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the
current direction. (To view or change the current direction, open the source
drawing and use the DDUNITS command.)
Offset (X,Y) box
Specify the offset of objects from the source drawing to the current drawing.
Enter two real numbers (one for X and one for Y), separated by a comma.
For example, enter 5,-4 to offset objects 5 units to the right and 4 units
down. (To view or change the current unit, open the source drawing and
use the DDUNITS command.)
If you specify save back extents for the drawing, those extents are also offset.
Pick <
Display the drawing, where you can specify points to determine the scale,
rotation, and offset.
The difference between the old base point and the new base point is the
offset for objects in the source drawing.
The difference in angle between the two old points and the two new
points is the rotation. 0,0 is the base point for the rotation.
The ratio of the length between the two new points to the length
between the two old points is the change in scale.
Save Back Extents area
Specify the area that is saved back to the source drawing. By specifying save
back extents, you can prevent boundaries from expanding and intruding on
the boundaries of adjacent drawings. These save back extents are stored with
the source drawing.
Save Back Extents list
View the coordinates of the current save back extents.
Define <
Display your drawing, where you can select points to specify the save back
extents.
NOTE This displays the current window. To view or change the extents for the
entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this command. To
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1925
zoom drawing extents, click View tab Navigate panel Zoom
drop-down Extents.
Show <
Display the current save back extents in the current drawing. Save back
extents are indicated by a dotted line.
NOTE This shows only the extents displayed in the current window. To view
the extents for the entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this
command. To zoom drawing extents, click View tab Navigate panel Zoom
drop-down Extents.
Reset
Reset the values to the original drawing extents adjusted for simple
transformations.
The default save back extents are the extents of the source drawing adjusted
for simple transformation.
Drawing Statistics dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about the active source drawings in
the current drawing.
To view information about attached drawings (page 172)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Drawing Statistics.
NOTE This option is for drawings only. To view information about geospatial
feature data, see Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class,
or Non-Spatial Data Table (page 1134). To see the currently connected feature
sources, use Map Explorer.
Select the drawings you want information about. Click an information button.
AutoCAD Map 3D searches the selected source drawings and displays the
information in the box at the bottom of the screen.
1926 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Active Drawings list
View all the active attached drawings in the current drawing.
Use Select All to select all drawings.
Use Clear All to remove the highlighting from all items.
Use Filter to filter the list of drawings.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Object Counts
View the number and type of objects in the source drawing.
Symbol Tables
View symbol tables and their values for each of the selected drawings.
Symbol tables include Blocks, Layers, Linetypes, Text Styles, and Regapps,
which are registered applications that contain xdata (extended data) within
the drawing.
Object Data
For the selected drawings, view
Link Templates
Object Data tables
Attributes
Object Classes
View object classes used in the selected drawings and the number of features
in each feature class.
Drawing Statistics dialog box | 1927
Drive Alias Administration dialog box
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases
for all other drives that you use.
To create a drive alias (page 161)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
NOTE This option is for attached drawings only. For information about connecting
to geospatial feature data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
Drive aliases are useful as typing shortcuts or as a reminder of what drawings
are contained in the directory. In addition, they make it easy for multiple
users to share drawings.
The alias you assign appears in the Drive list whenever you select drawings.
To modify an existing drive alias, select it in the list, enter a new Actual Path,
and click Update.
To create a new drive alias, enter a new Drive Alias, enter an Actual Path, and
click Add.
Drive List
View aliases you created.
Drive Alias box
Enter the alias to use.
The name must be unique, use only alphanumeric characters (including
hyphen and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a
character.
Actual Path box
Enter the path, including drive or server name and directories.
If you are not sure of the drive or directory, click Browse.
Xrefs and raster objects use their assigned paths and are not affected by drive
aliases.
1928 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Feature Editing Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to set options for automatically checking out features and
updating feature sources, whether features are checked out as drawing objects
or geospatial features, how to split polygonal features, and how often you are
prompted to check in features.
To specify Feature Edit Options (page 240)
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS (page 1906)
NOTE These options are for geospatial feature data only. For information on
working with attached drawings in a multi-user environment, see Overview of
Sharing Attached Drawings (page 730).
Check Out And Update Features
Specify options for automatically checking out features and updating feature
source.
Automatically Check Out Features When Edited.
Specify that features are automatically checked out when you edit them.
Automatically Update Feature Source With Edits
Specify that edits to features are automatically reflected in the feature source
Feature Checkout Options
Specify whether features are checked out as drawing objects or geospatial
features.
AutoCAD Drawing Objects
Specify that features are checked out as AutoCAD drawing objects.
NOTE Features checked out as AutoCAD drawing objects will be listed as custom
features when you use the LIST command. In addition, custom LISP applications
may not work with custom features.
Geospatial Features
Specify that features are checked out as geospatial features.
Feature Editing Options dialog box | 1929
This setting determines the way you work with your data.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT (page 1652)
and MAPFEATUREMERGE (page 1651))
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures, for example, rubbersheeting (ADER-
SHEET (page 1648)).
Allows you to use feature styling. Allows you to use feature styling.
Split Prompt Options
Specify how features are created after a split and whether these prompts display
during the split operation.
Feature Geometry
Select Create New to split features into two parts. Select Create Multi-Part
to split features into more than two parts.
Feature ID
Select Generate New Feature ID to create a new unique ID for each feature
that results from the split. Select Use Existing to use the ID of the original
feature for all resulting features.
Do Not Show These Prompts When Executing Split
Select this option to use the settings in this dialog box for all split operations.
When you split a feature, you will see only the prompt for drawing a new
1930 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
line for the split or selecting an existing line or polygon within the feature
to define the split.
If you do not select this option, all prompts will appear, but the default
values for the prompts will be what you specify in this dialog box.
Other Options
Specify whether or not you are prompted to check in features and how often.
Prompt To Check In Every
Specify that you will be prompted to check in features at intervals of the
specified value.
Generate Object Data Index dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the tables and fields to include in the index.
To create a drawing index (page 1294)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Drawing Maintenance.
NOTE This option is for drawing object data only. For information about geospatial
feature properties, see Overview of the Data Table (page 1125).
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to include in the index. If a table has fields selected for the index,
the table is checked in the list.
Index Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which types of indexes to create for the selected
source drawings.
To create a drawing index (page 1294)
Generate Object Data Index dialog box | 1931
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Drawing Maintenance.
NOTE This option is for drawing object data only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
Indexes speed up queries, but they add to the size of your source drawings. If
size is an issue, create indexes for just the types of queries you perform most
often. For example, if you mostly perform queries based on location, create
just a location index.
To create an index, select the check box for the type of index you want.
To create an object data index, click Object Data. At the Generate Object
Data Index dialog box (page 1931) select the tables and fields to index.
To improve the performance of object data and SQL queries, create object
data and SQL indexes for all drawings in the data set, even if they do not
contain object data or SQL link information.
To remove an existing index, select the check box for that type of index.
To remove an object data index, click Object Data. At the Remove Object
Data Index dialog box (page 1933) select the tables and fields to remove from
the index.
Removing an index reduces the size of the drawing, and reduces the time
it takes to save the drawing.
Because indexes are saved in the source drawing, you can create indexes only
if the drawing is not in a read-only directory and you have Edit Drawing
privileges. See User Administration dialog box (page 1934).
Once you create an index, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically updates the index
each time you change the drawing and save the changes back. However, you
will need to recreate the index in the following circumstances:
If you notice that queries are taking longer. Over time, automatic updates
can cause degeneration of an index. It is a good idea to periodically use
this command to recreate the indexes.
If you modify a drawing with AutoCAD or with AutoCAD Map 3D when
the drawing is not attached, you need to use this command to recreate the
indexes.
1932 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
NOTE To check if a source drawing has an index created, select the drawing in
the Drawing Maintenance dialog box. Click Drawing Index to display the Index
Maintenance dialog box. If the source drawing contains a usable index, the check
box for that index is not selected. If the drawing does not contain an index, or if
the index is out of date, the check box for the index is selected.
Remove Object Data Index dialog box
Use this dialog box to remove object data fields from an index.
To remove a drawing index (page 1294)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Drawing Maintenance.
NOTE This option is for drawing object data only. For information about filtering
geospatial feature data, see Filtering Feature Layers (page 1216).
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to remove. If a table has fields selected to be removed from the
index, the table is checked in the list.
Select Alias dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the alias to use with this drawing.
To create a drive alias (page 161)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
NOTE This option is for attached drawings only. For information about connecting
to geospatial feature data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
More than one alias is associated with the path to the file you selected. Select
the alias to use with this drawing
Remove Object Data Index dialog box | 1933
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box
Use this dialog box to resolve problems with undefined drive aliases.
To attach drawings (page 154)
Click Home tab Data panel Define Drawing Set.
NOTE This option is for attached drawings only. For information about connecting
to geospatial feature data, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
The drawing you are activating or attaching has an alias assigned to it that is
not defined.
To attach this drawing without defining an alias, click Skip. You cannot
activate the drawing until you define a path for the alias. To define the
alias later, see To create a drive alias (page 161).
To define a path for the alias now, click Define. In the Drive Alias
Administration dialog box (page 1928), define a drive alias.
User Administration dialog box
Use this dialog box to add or delete users or modify user settings
To add a new user (page 83)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel User Administration.
Do any of the following:
To add a user, enter information in the User Profile section. Click Add.
To delete a user, select the name and click Delete.
1934 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
To modify a user, select the name and change information in the User
Profile section. Click Update.
User List
View all users set up for AutoCAD Map 3D.
Login Name box
Specify the login name for the user.
Each login name must be unique.
Login names are not case-sensitive.
The login name cannot contain spaces or any of the following characters.
" / \ [ ] ; : | = , + ? < >
Password box
Specify the password for the user.
Passwords are case-sensitive.
Passwords cannot contain spaces.
For a new user, you can set the password to PASSWORD and have the user
change it.
To be effective, passwords should have a combination of numbers and
uppercase and lowercase letters.
Privileges
Select privileges for the user.
Superuser
Let the user perform user administration tasks, set system options, and
perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
Let the user attach and detach drawings. If this option is not selected, the
user can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot attach and detach
them.
Alter Object Class
Let the user define and edit object class definitions. If this option is not
selected, users can only assign object classes and change the current feature
definition file.
User Administration dialog box | 1935
Edit Drawing
Let the user edit objects and save them back to source drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot save them back
to source drawings.
Draw Query
Let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current
drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report
mode queries only.
User Information dialog box
This dialog box displays information about the current AutoCAD Map 3D
user.
To change your privileges, see your system administrator.
Login Name
View the name used to log in to AutoCAD Map 3D.
Privileges
View the privileges of the current user.
Superuser
Let the user perform user administration tasks, set system options, and
perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
Let the user attach and detach drawings. If this option is not selected, the
user can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot attach and detach
them.
Alter Feature Class
Let the user define and edit feature class definitions. If this option is not
selected, users can only assign feature classes and change the current feature
definition file.
Edit Drawing
Let the user edit objects and save them back to source drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot save them back
to source drawings.
1936 | Chapter 37 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Draw Query
Let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current
drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report
mode queries only.
User Login dialog box
Log in to AutoCAD Map 3D on this computer. If you do not know your login
name or password, check with your system administrator
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D (page 142)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel User Login.
Some actions, such as modifying object data tables and removing locks for
other users, require Superuser access. To log in as a Superuser, enter the login
name Superuser. Enter the password SUPERUSER. In offices where the system
administrator reserves the Superuser login name, contact your system
administrator to gain access to object data tables, object locks, or system
options.
If user login is not required, you can log in at any time, even if you did not
log in at the beginning of your current AutoCAD Map 3D session. For example,
you can log in under your own name, or as a different user, while working in
a drawing with active source drawings.
User Login dialog box | 1937
1938
Topology Dialog Boxes
NOTE Topology functionality applies only to drawing objects.
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the direction of a link (page 873)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify direction. To
display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new value (Bi-directional/From->To/To->From)<B>:
Enter B for bi-directional, F for From->To, or T for To->From.
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
38
1939
Use this command to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in
an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology
information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 875)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify resistance.
To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Edit resistance of (Links/Nodes) <L>:
Enter L for Links or N for Nodes.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new direct resistance <1.000>:
Enter a new value.
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the reverse resistance of a selected link an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 875)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify resistance.
To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
1940 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Enter new reverse resistance <1.000>:
Enter a new value.
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a link to a topology. The new command is MAPAL.
Use this command to add a link to an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To create a link and add it to a topology (page 880)
MAPAL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to add the link to. To display a list of all
loaded topologies, enter ?.
Enter first point:
Enter the coordinates for the first point of the line, or select the point.
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line>:
For information about this prompt, see the PLINE command in the AutoCAD
help.
You can use MAPLINKADD to add a link in three ways:
In space (connecting no existing nodes). Two new nodes are created at the
link endpoints in space.
From one existing node to a point in space. A new node is created at the
end point in space.
From one existing node to another existing node.
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) | 1941
A topology must have a node at the end points of all link objects. This node
is part of the topology data structure and is assigned a topology ID. However,
a node can be implicit (referenced in the topology data structure) or explicit
(a physical object in the drawing). Use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node
command) (page 1944) or MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) (page
1947) command to create a new node.
When you add a link to a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a node when
necessary. If the link joins two existing nodes, no new nodes are created.
Remember these features of nodes and links:
A node can reference many links.
A link can reference only two nodes.
Only one node can exist at a specific point.
If the new link splits an existing area in a polygon topology into two areas,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new centroid and updates the existing centroid.
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPDL.
Use this command to delete a link from an existing network or polygon
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889)
MAPDL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to delete the link from. To display a list of
all loaded topologies, enter ?.
1942 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Select object:
Use any selection method to select the object to delete.
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit a link in an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To reposition a node at the end point of a link (page 863)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit:
Select the object using any selection method.
For information about the prompts, see the PEDIT command in the AutoCAD
help.
You cannot delete the first or last vertex of a polyline.
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for reversing a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPRL.
Use this command to reverse the direction of a link in an existing network
topology while maintaining the topology information.
To edit the direction of a link (page 873)
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) | 1943
MAPRL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit:
Use any selection method to select the object whose direction you want to
reverse.
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you modify a link using standard editing commands, the topology
information associated with the link is not updated. Use this command to
have the topology relationship information on the link updated. (If you
modified the link using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as
MAPLINKEDIT, the topology information was automatically updated and you
do not need to use this command.)
To update a topology (page 892)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to update.
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1944 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a node to a topology. The new command is MAPAN.
Use this command to add a an existing block or point to a topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To create a node on an existing link (page 878)
MAPAN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to add the node to. To display a list of all
loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select block or point to add:
Select an existing block or point.
You can use this operation to create a new block object at the location of an
existing implicit node. MAPNODADD prompts you to select the new block
or point object.
You cannot add a new node to a topology with this command. To insert a
node on an existing link, use the MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node
command) (page 1947) command.
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPDN.
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) | 1945
Use this command to delete a node from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889)
MAPDN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to delete the node from. To display a list
of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select node to delete:
Use any selection method to select the node to delete.
If the node has only one link, choose whether to delete the dangling link.
If the node has two links, the two links are combined. Choose which set of
object data to preserve.
You cannot delete a node that has more than two links.
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to move a node in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
To edit a node (page 860)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
1946 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Select node to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to edit.
Specify new insertion point:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point onscreen. If a node already
exists in the new location, you are prompted to delete one of the nodes.
The node is moved to the new location, and all associated links move their
endpoints.
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for inserting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPIN.
Use this command to insert a node on an existing link while maintaining the
integrity of the topology information.
To create a node on an existing link (page 878)
MAPIN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Specify insertion point:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on the screen. If any block
definitions exist in the drawing, you are prompted for a block to reference.
The default block name is the last block name referenced in the drawing.
To add a node at the end of a dangling link, or to add a node not on a link,
use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) (page 1944) command.
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) | 1947
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to have the topology relationship data on the node updated.
To update a topology (page 892)
When you modify a node using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the node is not updated. (If you modified the node using
an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPNODEDIT, the topology
data was updated automatically and you do not need to use this command.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select node to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to update.
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a polygon to a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPAP.
Use this command to add a centroid in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework (page 884)
MAPAP
1948 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on screen. The point must
be in a defined area that does not currently contain a centroid.
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a polygon from a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPDP.
Use this command to delete a polygon from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889)
MAPDP
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon to delete.
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) | 1949
Use this command to have the topology data on the polygon updated.
To update a topology (page 892)
When you modify a polygon using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the polygon is not updated. (If you modified the polygon
using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPPOLYADD,
AutoCAD Map 3D updated the topology for you.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select object:
Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon to update.
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Delete
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to confirm the deletion of topology objects.
To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 889)
MAPDL
MAPDN
MAPDP
If you select Delete Topology Objects, the referenced objects are deleted from
the current drawing, if either of the following conditions exist:
It was loaded from the source and all objects were created when loaded.
It was loaded from the current drawing.
1950 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to confirm the change to an object shared by multiple
topologies.
To edit a topology (page 854)
MAPTOPOEDIT
The object you are modifying is referenced by more than one topology. If you
modify the object in the selected topology, the other topologies may be invalid.
You must To update a topology (page 892) the other topologies.
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Rename
Use this dialog box to confirm the renaming of a topology.
To change the name, description, or both of a topology (page 925)
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Rename.
Before you rename a topology:
Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
Load the topology. The topology needs to be completely represented, either
in source files or in the current drawing.
You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT | 1951
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
Centroid Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the centroids to include when you create a
topology.
To create a topology (page 825)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each
centroid is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed
whenever you use a topology command.
Object Selection
Select Automatically / Manually options
Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects. If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
1952 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology. Enter
an asterisk (*) to search all layers. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Object Creation
Create on Layer box
If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which layer they should
be placed. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Create Using box
If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create
them.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
Create Closed Polylines dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create polylines from a polygon topology.
To create closed polylines from a polygon topology (page 898)
Click Create tab Topology panel Create Closed Polylines.
Create Closed Polylines dialog box | 1953
Topology Name
Name box
Select the topology you want.
The list displays topologies loaded from the current drawing. If the topology
you want is not listed, click Load and load it.
Type
Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description
Displays the description of the selected topology.
Number of Polygons Referenced
Displays the number of polygons referenced by the selected topology. If
the topology is loaded as partial, this is the number of polygons in the
partial subset.
How to Close
Create on Layer box
Specify a layer for the new plines.
Click Layers to select from a list of layers in the current drawing or enter a
new layer name.
Group Complex Polygons
Select this option to group all closed plines that make up the original
complex topology polygon. A complex polygon is one that includes islands.
If the islands themselves have nested islands or other polygons, these nested
polygons will form a separate grouping automatically, creating different
levels of grouping. If two or more inner polygons are not nested but share
the same outer boundary, they will be treated as one group.
Copy Object Data from Centroid to Pline
Select this option to copy object data from the centroid to the closed pline
that is created.
Object data on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
Copy Database Links from Centroid to Pline check box
Select this option to copy database links from the centroid to the closed
pline that is created.
Database links on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
1954 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create node objects at the endpoint of links when you
create a network topology.
To create a network topology (page 831)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Create New Nodes
Specify whether or not to create nodes in the current object to complete
the topology. (Nodes are optional.)
Layer
If new nodes are created, you can specify a new layer or click the down
arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation
If new nodes are created, specify what block to use to create them.
To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and
select the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire
DWG as a single block.
To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box | 1955
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the links for a network topology.
To create a network topology (page 831)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Select the links to include in the topology. You can select all links in the map
or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are on specified layers and
in specified object classes.
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the links that you manually select in the map. Click Select
Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of links,
in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
1956 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified object
classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object
Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
(page 1957).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in a network topology.
To create a network topology (page 831)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis. You can select all
nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node
selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are
on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1957
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box (page 1955).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
1958 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in a node topology.
To create a node topology (page 827)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also
filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only
the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in
specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1959
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create centroids for any areas that are missing centroids
and to specify the layer and block to use for the new centroids.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
If you do not select the Create Missing Centroids option, and an area is missing
a centroid, you are notified that the topology has not been created. The areas
that are missing centroids are marked or highlighted using the error markers
you specify in the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
(page 1967).
Create Missing Centroids
Creates centroids where needed.
1960 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Layer
Specify the layer on which to place the new centroids. Enter a layer name
or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set. If
a layer you want is not listed, it may be frozen or locked.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block to use to represent the new centroids. To create centroids
using an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the
block from the list. To use a point instead of a block, select ACAD_POINT.
To use a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and select the file.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
(page 1967).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether to create explicit node objects at the
endpoints of links when creating a polygon topology. If so, specify the layer
on which to place the new nodes and the block to use to create the nodes.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box | 1961
Create New Nodes
Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current object selection
should be created to complete the topology. (Explicit nodes are optional.)
Layer
If new nodes are created, specify on which layer they should be placed. You
can specify a new layer or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers
in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation
If new nodes are created, specify what block to use to create them.
To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and
select the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire
DWG as a single block.
To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box
(page 1962).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1962 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to select the point and block objects to use as centroids
for the polygons.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Each polygon in a polygon topology has a centroid, which is a point or block
element within the polygon, and contains information about the area it
encloses. Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each centroid is given a unique ID number, which is automatically
processed whenever you use a topology command.
You can select all point or block elements in the map or select them manually.
You can also filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of objects, in which
you include only the objects that are on specified layers, are of specified block
types, or in specified object classes.
Select All
Use all point or block objects that meet the filter criteria as centroids.
Select Manually
Include only the point or block objects that you manually select in the map.
Click Select Objects to select the objects. Only objects that meet the filter
criteria will be selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of
objects, in which you include only the objects that are on the specified
layers. This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects.
To select from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers,
enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify the point or block objects to use to filter object selection. To use all
points and blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select
from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To
select point objects, select ACAD_POINT.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box | 1963
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset
of objects, in which you include only the objects that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog
box (page 1960).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Every area forms a polygon; and each polygon in a polygon topology consists
of a set of links. When you create polygon topology, use this dialog box to
select the links to include in the topology.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
You can select all links in the map or select them manually. You can also filter
(restrict) link selection to a subset of links, in which you include only the links
that are on specified layers and in specified object classes.
1964 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the links that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of links,
in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified object
classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object
Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
(page 1965).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1965
When you create a polygon topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes
you want to be part of the topology.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis. You can select all
nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node
selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are
on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
1966 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box (page 1961).
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how to mark errors in your polygon topology.
If you mark errors with blocks, specify the size, shape, and color of the marker
blocks.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically checks for missing centroids and intersections.
These are considered serious errors and if detected, prevent topology creation.
You can choose whether you want Map to check for other potential problems,
including duplicate objects, incomplete areas, and sliver polygons.
Marker Parameters
Specify whether or not to highlight errors and/or mark them with blocks. Also
specify the marker size.
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box | 1967
Highlight Errors
Highlight errors in red (nodes or centroids are highlighted with a red X).
To remove the highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
Mark Errors With Blocks
Mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify below. To remove
a marker block, select it and then press Delete.
Marker Size
Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between 3%
and 7% is usually suitable.
Missing Centroids
Mark each area with a missing centroid with a block of the shape and color
you specify. This option is disabled if you selected the Create Missing
Centroids option on the previous dialog box.
Intersections
Mark each duplicate object with a block of the shape and color you specify.
Duplicate Centroids
Select the check box to mark each area in the drawing with more than one
centroid. If you don't select the check box, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
topology even if an area contains more than one point object which qualifies
to be a centroid. The topology data is added to only one of the centroid
objects.
Incomplete Areas
Select the check box to detect links that are not part of a closed area. If you
don't select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D ignores links that are not part
of a closed area and they do not receive any topology data.
Highlight Sliver Polygons
Select the check box to check for sliver polygons and mark their centroids
with red Xs. Sliver polygons are long, thin polygons, which can occur if
data is digitized or drawn inaccurately. Map will create your topology
regardless of the sliver polygons, but you should check that your data is
accurate.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
1968 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings.
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the type of topology to create and to specify the
topology name and description.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Before you create network or polygon topologies, you should clean up your
map to make sure it doesn't have certain types of errors. Node topologies do
not usually require cleanup. Click Tools tab Map Edit panel Clean Up.
For more information, see Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 765).
Topology Type
Select the type of topology to create: node, network, or polygon.
Node topologies involve independent points. Some examples of node
topologies are street lights, city-maintained trees, or drill holes for core
samples.Cleaning Up Maps (page 767)
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box | 1969
Network topologies involve linear objects, and can have nodes where
linear objects connect. In addition, linear objects can have direction or
resistance. Some examples of network topologies are a water distribution
network, a river network, or a street network.
Polygon topologies involve polygons that define areas. Some examples
of polygon topologies are city blocks, land parcels, and political
boundaries.
Topology Name
Enter a unique name for the topology. Names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Always use unique
names for a topology; topologies with the same name may become corrupt
if you insert one drawing with a topology into another.
Topology Description
Enter a description for the topology. Providing a description can help you
and other users identify the topology more easily.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Display the next dialog box. This varies, depending on the type of topology
you are creating.
1970 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Topology Warning dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you want to continue creating the
topology.
To create a polygon topology (page 836)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
You selected 25,000 links for your topology. Creating a topology of this size
may take longer to create.
To continue creating the topology, click OK.
To return to the previous dialog box without creating a topology, click
Cancel.
If you don't want to see this warning again, select Do Not Warn Me Before
Creating A Large Topology.
Delete Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to delete an entire topology.
To delete a topology (page 926)
Create Topology Warning dialog box | 1971
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Delete.
When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data is automatically
deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology.
Select Delete Geometry to delete the referenced objects from the current
drawing.
You can delete a topology under the following conditions:
It was loaded from source and all objects were created at load.
It was loaded from the current drawing and completed.
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in
an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology
information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 850)
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) (page 1939)
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) (page 1940)
Value box
Displays the direct resistance for the object. Enter a new value and click
OK.
The value must be numeric.
Edit Direction dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1972 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To specify the direction for a link (page 847)
MAPEDITDIR
MAPRL
Direction box
Select the direction for the link from the list and click OK. You can choose
Bi-Directional, From -> To , or To -> From.
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to edit the reverse resistance of the selected link in an
existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 850)
MAPEDITRES1
MAPEDITRES2
Value box
Displays the reverse resistance for the object. Enter a new value and click
OK.
The value must be numeric.
Edit Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box | 1973
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for editing geometry, direction, and resistance in a topology. There
are several new commands for editing topologies, such as MAPAN, MAPDL,
MAPMP. For a complete list, see Editing Topologies (page 851).
Use this dialog box to modify objects in a topology without damaging the
topology relationship data. If you modified objects using standard editing
commands, use the Update option to correct the topology relationship data
for that object.
To edit a topology (page 854)
Topology Name area
Select a topology from the list of loaded topologies. When you modify the
selected object, the topology data for that object will be updated in the
selected topology.
NOTE If the object is referenced by more than one topology, you will need to
use the update option to modify the other topologies.
If the topology you want is not loaded, click Load.
Object Type
Select the object type to edit. Object options are unavailable if they do not
match the topology type you are choosing.
Edit Operation
Specify the edit operation to perform on the selected object type.
Click OK to perform the specified operation and make your selections.
To cancel the topology edit operation, click Close.
Node Objects Polygon Objects Link Objects
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology
Node command) (page 1946)
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology
Polygon command) (page 1949)
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link
command) (page 1943)
MAPNODADD (Add Topology
Node command) (page 1944)
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology
Polygon command) (page 1948)
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link
command) (page 1941)
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology
Node command) (page 1947)
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topo-
logy Polygon command) (page
1949)
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology
Link command) (page 1942)
1974 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Node Objects Polygon Objects Link Objects
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology
Node command) (page 1945)
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction
of Topology Link command) (page
1943)
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology
Node command) (page 1948)
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology
Link command) (page 1944)
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resist-
ance command) (page 1939)
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction com-
mand) (page 1939)
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resist-
ance command) (page 1939)
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resist-
ance command) (page 1940)
Link Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the links to include
in the topology.
To create a topology (page 825)
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Link Objects dialog box | 1975
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Load Topology Conflict dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load the topology from either the source drawing or
the current drawing.
To load a topology (page 907)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Load Topology.
This dialog box is displayed when AutoCAD Map 3D detects duplicate topology
names in a source drawing and the current drawing.
Click OK.
Load Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a topology.
To load a topology (page 907)
1976 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Load Topology.
Topology Location options
Select whether to load a topology that is in a source drawing or in the
current drawing.
Name
Select the topology to load. If the list does not display the topology you
want, be sure you have selected the correct in the Topology Location area.
The list of topology names comes from the object data tables. These tables
may exist in the current drawing but the topology objects may only exist
in the source drawings.
Type
Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description
Displays the description of the selected topology.
Create Topology Objects When Loaded
If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are not copied into
the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back
Select this option to add objects in the current drawing to the save back set
if they are referenced by the selected topology.
Audit Geometry Of Topology Objects
Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are
geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Complete Existing Topology Objects
If the selected topology is from the current drawing, select this option to
complete any incomplete objects in the topology.
Use this option to ensure that the objects in the current drawing are available
for topology editing. Map queries all the objects from the source drawings
that are required to create a self-contained subset of the topology objects.
Load Topology dialog box | 1977
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog to set options when loading a topology from a source drawing.
To load a topology (page 907)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Load Topology.
Topology Objects
Create Topology Objects When Loaded
If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are not copied into
the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back
Select this option to add objects in the current drawing to the save back set
if they are referenced by the selected topology. This means that the objects
will be saved back to their source drawings and replace the original objects.
Topology Verification
Audit Geometry of Topology Objects
Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are
geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the locations to use for your network analysis.
To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326)
To perform a best route analysis (page 1330)
To perform a flood trace (page 1334)
1978 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Network Analysis.
When you choose points, AutoCAD Map 3D locates the closest node to the
point you select.
Shortest path Specify a starting point and ending point.
Best route Specify a starting point and one or more visit points.
Flood trace Specify a start point only.
Start Point
Select a start point. Click Select Point to select a point in the map. Press
Enter to return to this dialog box. All three forms of network analysis require
a start point.
Visit Point
Select one or more visit points for best route analysis. Click Select Point to
select points in the map. While in the map, click a point to select it. Accept
the point, cancel the selected point, or select additional points:
To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter, or
right-click and click Enter.
To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press ESC, or right-click
and click Cancel.
To accept the point and specify another point, right-click. Click Next
Point.
End Point
Selects an end point for a shortest path analysis. Click Select Point to select
a point in the map. Press Enter to return to this dialog box.
List of Locations
The points you specify are displayed in the list.
To see the location of a point in the map, select the coordinates in the
list. Click Preview.
To remove a point from the list, select the coordinates. Click Delete.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box | 1979
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Display the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box (page 1981).
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For a flood trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point.
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to view the results of the network analysis onscreen.
To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326)
To perform a best route analysis (page 1330)
To perform a flood trace (page 1334)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Network Analysis.
You can specify a name and description for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
at the Command prompt, enter redrawall.
1980 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Topology
Create a new topology using the results of the analysis.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start point
and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box | 1981
Use this dialog box to specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes
and to specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the network
analysis.
To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326)
To perform a best route analysis (page 1330)
To perform a flood trace (page 1334)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Network Analysis.
Direction
Specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the analysis.
Link Direction
Enter a value or enter the location of the data to use to determine the
direction of the links. To select the location of the data from a list, click
Expression Builder. Select the data to use. You can also enter any valid
expression. See Expression Evaluator (page 1541). If you leave the box blank,
bi-directional (0) is used.
Link Direction is... If the expression evaluates to...
Bi-directional> 0 or a character
The physical direction A positive number
The reverse of the physical direction A negative number
Reverse
Select this option to use the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link
Direction field.
Resistance
Specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes. Enter the location
of the data to use to determine the direct resistance and reverse resistance
of link objects and the resistance of nodes. To use values in an object data
table or external database, click Expression Builder. Select the data to use.
You can also enter any valid expression.
Link Direct Resistance Specify the resistance to travel in the direction
that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
1982 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Link Reverse Resistance Specify the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line (.LENGTH)
is used.
Node Resistance Specify the resistance to cross the node, for example,
resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
Specify a minimum and maximum resistance for the trace.
TIP The best route cannot be be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal zero (or use expressions
that evaluate to zero). If all resistance values equal zero, every route is as good
as another, and there is no "best route."
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box (page
1980).
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings.
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the type of network analysis to perform.
To perform a shortest path trace (page 1326)
To perform a best route analysis (page 1330)
To perform a flood trace (page 1334)
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box | 1983
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Network Analysis.
Shortest Path
Calculates the optimal route between two nodes. For example, you could
find the shortest distance between an accident site and a hospital. A path
trace between the start and end points must have a total resistance of more
than the minimum and less than the maximum.
Best Route
Finds the optimal route from a start point, to one or more intermediate
points, and back to the start point. The distance between nodes takes into
consideration the direction and resistance of intermediate links and nodes.
Flood Trace
Shows all possible routes from a chosen node, summing the resistance value
of each link and node it travels through. The path stops when the sum
reaches the maximum resistance set for the trace. For example, you could
create a flood trace of a fifteen-minute travel time from a start point by
referencing street length and speed limit.
1984 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog
box (page 1978).
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start point
and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in the topology when you
create a topology.
To create a topology (page 825)
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) | 1985
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Create Node Objects
Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current object selection
should be created to complete the topology. (Nodes are optional.)
Create on Layer box
If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which layer they should
be placed.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
1986 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Using box
If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create
them.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in the topology when you
create a topology.
To create a topology (page 825)
Click Create tab Topology panel New.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
Select all objects that meet the object type and filter criteria
automatically.
Select objects for the topology by hand. Click Select to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) | 1987
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Rename Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to rename a topology.
To change the name, description, or both of a topology (page 925)
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Rename.
Before you rename a topology, check the following:
Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
Make sure the topology is loaded. The topology needs to be completely
represented, either in source files or in the current drawing.
You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box (page 1908).
You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
1988 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
New Name
Enter a new name for the topology. Names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore and hyphen characters. Names cannot contain spaces.
New Description
Enter a description for the topology.
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To perform an overlay
analysis for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page
1309).
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
The selected fields and columns are incorporated into a new object data table
that is attached to the result topology.
Source Data Area
Select fields and columns. You can combine data from different tables.
To select a field from an object data table, select the Object Data option,
and then select the table from the list. In the Available Fields/Columns list,
select the fields to use. Click >>.
To select a column from an external database, select the SQL Data option,
and then select the link template from the list. In the Available
Fields/Columns list, select the columns to use. Click >>.
The Link Template list includes only link templates for the drawing where
the topology is loaded. That is, if you loaded the topology from source
drawings, the list displays link templates defined in the source drawing; if
you loaded the topology from the current drawing, the list displays link
templates in the current drawing. In addition, be sure the appropriate data
source is attached and connected in the current drawing.
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay | 1989
Destination Data Area
Specify a table name and description for the new object data table that will
be created for the result topology.
A table name cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character. The table name must be unique.
Available Fields/Columns List
Lists the fields in the selected object data table or the selected external
database.
To add fields or columns to the new object data table, select them from the
list. Click >>.
Selected Fields/Columns List
Lists the fields that will be created in the new object data table. This table
can include values from more than one object data table and external
database.
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do a buffer analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306).
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting buffer topology.
To buffer a topology (page 1347)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Buffer.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select
the file to use.
To create centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
1990 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select
the file you want to use.
To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do a buffer analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306).
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting buffer topology
onscreen.
To buffer a topology (page 1347)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Buffer.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
at the Command prompt, enter redrawall.
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box | 1991
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
NOTE Do not specify a locked layer. If you do, AutoCAD Map 3D can complete
only part of the buffer process (it can create the buffer geometry but not the
buffer topology). To use a locked layer, unlock it first.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating a buffer.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box (page 1990).
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you specify the buffer distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do a buffer analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Buffering Features in Your Map (page 1306).
Use this dialog box to specify the distance from the object to the buffer. The
buffer will extend the specified distance from the objects. You can enter a
number, an expression, a field in an object data table, or an external database.
To buffer a topology (page 1347)
1992 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Buffer.
A buffer is a zone that is drawn around a topology. Using a buffer, you can
easily identify objects within a specified offset of elements in node, network,
and polygon topologies.
Buffer Distance
Enter distance from the object to the buffer. The buffer will extend the
specified distance from the objects. To create a buffer inside an existing
polygon, enter a negative value for the buffer offset. The buffer offset can
be any of the following:
Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a negative
value.
An expression that evaluates to a numeric value. For information on
valid expressions, see Expression Evaluator Functions and Variables.
A value in an object data table. Click Expression Builder to select the
table and field.
A value in an external database. Click Expression Builder to select the
link template and column.
NOTE If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a value
in an object data table or an external database, the data must be attached
to the centroid of the polygon.
Expression Builder
Click to select a field in an object data table or an external database from
a list of available data.
Next
Click to display the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box (page 1991).
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box | 1993
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting dissolve topology.
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Dissolve.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use.
To create centroids a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use.
To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
1994 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting dissolve topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Dissolve.
Create New Nodes For Topology
Select this check box to create new nodes as needed at the endpoints of
links in the resulting topology. This is optional, but can be useful if you are
going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box | 1995
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting dissolve
topology onscreen.
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Dissolve.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
at the Command prompt, enter redrawall.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
1996 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box (page 1997).
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to createor specify the result table (the object data table
that will store the dissolve result field data).
You can reference an existing object data table or define a new one. The
dissolve field can be an object data variable or any expression.
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Dissolve.
The dissolve operation starts with a single item and "joins" all adjacent objects
that share the same value for this item. The resulting topology data includes
only the field used to perform the dissolve.
For example, you could perform a dissolve operation on a map of zip code
boundaries that reference a county name as a data field. Dissolving the zip
codes by county results in the county boundaries as a geometry. The result
data holds the county name. In that case, the result table stores the result field
consisting of the county name.
Object Data Table
Select an object data table from the list of tables in the current drawing.
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box | 1997
Object Data Field
Select a field from the list of fields in the selected table. To add a new field,
click Define.
Define
Click to add a new object data field.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings after you specify the
dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the data on which to base the dissolve.
To dissolve a composite topology (page 1343)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Dissolve.
When you perform a dissolve, you create a new topology by combining
polygons that share the same data value in a specified field. This field is called
the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data field or a column
in a linked external database.
Dissolve By
Select the data on which to base the dissolve. This is often referred to as the
dissolve field.
To use object data or data in an external data base, click Expression
Builder. Select the data to use.
Note that the Dissolve command uses only data that is attached or linked
to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data attached to a polygon
border.
You can also enter any valid expression. See Expression Evaluator (page
1541).
1998 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value for
this field are combined into a single polygon or line.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box (page
1996).
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to select the type of overlay analysis to perform: Intersect,
Union, Identity, Erase, Clip, or Paste.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing. Click
Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Load Topology.
Overlay Analysis Operations
Select an overlay operation:
Intersect Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box | 1999
Source Overlay Result
Union Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay topologies
are in the result topology.
Source Overlay Result
Identity The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within the source
topology boundary.
Source Overlay Result
Erase The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The area
covered by the overlay topology is erased from the source topology area.
Source Overlay Result
2000 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Clip The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay
topology. The source topology is clipped to the outer boundary of the
overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
Paste The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology. The
result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas of the source
topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay analysis.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology
dialog box (page 2007).
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box | 2001
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting overlay topology.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
To create centroids using using a block defined in the drawing set, click
the down arrow and select a block from the list.
To create centroids using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse.
Select the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
To create centroids as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
2002 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting overlay topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
Create New Nodes For Topology
Select this check box to create new nodes as needed at the endpoints of
links in the resulting topology. This is optional, but can be useful if you are
going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box | 2003
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting overlay topology
onscreen.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
2004 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
at the Command prompt, enter redrawall.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog
box (page 2006)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box | 2005
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
The selected fields and columns are incorporated into a new object data table
that is attached to the result topology.
Source Attributes for New Topology
To copy data from the source topology to the result topology, click
Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser dialog box, select the object
data fields or external database columns to copy.
Overlay Attributes for New Topology
To copy data from the overlay topology to the result topology, click
Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser dialog box, select the object
data fields or external database columns to copy.
Expression Builder s
Click to display the Expression Chooser dialog box, where you can select
the data to include in the resulting topology.
New Object Data Table Name
Enter a name for the object data table that will store the data in the new
topology. The Table Name should be a new name.
2006 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
New Table Description
Enter a description for the new object data table in the resulting topology.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the next dialog box. Next is disabled if your source topology
is a node topology.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. To do an overlay analysis
for geospatial feature data, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Use this dialog box to select the polygon topology to use as the overlay
topology.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies (page 843)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Object Overlay.
Polygon Topology to Overlay
Select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box | 2007
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog
box (page 2004).
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to execute topology relationship queries using the following
tools.
To query a topology (page 1353)
Click Create tab Topology panel Define Query.
Query Topology area
Select the topology to query.
If the topology is not loaded, click Load and select the topology you want.
Result Topology area
Select a result topology type.
2008 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
None
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is
loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Rename. Specify a name
without an asterisk.
Permanent
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and
hyphen characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with
an asterisk (*).
Define Query
Display the Define Query dialog box (page 1838), where you can create a query
by defining conditions.
The dialog box you use for a topology query is the same as for a standard
query using the ADEQUERY command, except for the Property option in
the Query Type area.
Load Query
Display the Load Internal Query dialog box (page 1848), where you can select
an existing query to load.
When you choose Define Topology Query, you use the same dialog boxes as
you do for a standard query. The dialog box options are the same for topology
queries and standard queries using the ADEQUERY command, except for
choices in the Property option in the Query Type area.
Topology and standard queries differ in the following ways:
Topology queries work with only one topology, while standard queries
work with all objects in the attached drawings. Use a topology query when
working only with topologies, or when to select one topology or query.
Topology Query dialog box | 2009
You can base topology property queries on polygon values of Area, Length,
Perimeter, and Direction. Linear objects also have predefined object data
for Direct Resistance and Direction.
Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
For Report mode, additional dot variables, .TOPONAME, and .TOPOTYPE,
are available for topology queries. The dot variables .DRAWING, AREA,
and .PERIMETER yield different results in topology queries.
Topology Query Result dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the type of topology to create with the queried
objects. If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
To query a topology (page 1353)
Click Create tab Topology panel Define Query.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen
characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with an asterisk
(*).
None
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is
loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
2010 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Rename. Specify a name
without an asterisk.
Permanent
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created.
Topology Selection dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select a topology.
To load a topology (page 907)
To unload a topology (page 908)
To audit, recreate, or complete a topology (page 920)
To delete a topology (page 926)
Click Analyze tab Drawing Object panel Load Topology.
Click a topology and click OK.
If the topology you want is not listed, check the following:
If you are selecting a topology to rename, unload, view statistics, audit,
etc., it may not be listed because it has not been loaded yet.
If you are selecting a topology to load, it may not be listed because it's
already loaded.
Topology Statistics dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to view information about the selected topology.
To view topology statistics (page 916)
Topology Selection dialog box | 2011
Click Map Setup tab Topology panel Statistics.
Selected Topology area
Name
Displays the name of the current topology.
Description
Displays the description of the topology.
Type
Displays the type of topology. Topologies can be Node, Network, or Polygon.
Extents area
This area displays the coordinates of the lower-left corner and upper-right
corner of the bounding rectangle for the selected topology.
Object Counts area
This area displays the total number of nodes, links, and polygons in the
selected topology.
Details area
This area displays area and perimeter information for polygon topologies,
and length information for network topologies. It does not apply to node
topologies.
Perimeter is the sum of all of the edges in a polygon topology (not just the
outer edge of the topology).
Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or length
minus the square of the average.
Deviation is the square root of variance.
2012 | Chapter 38 Topology Dialog Boxes
Viewing Dialog Boxes
Quick View Drawings dialog box
Use this dialog box to select drawings to include in the Quick View.
To view objects in source drawings (page 746)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Quick View Drawings.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To bring geospatial feature data
into your map, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features (page 305).
Quick View displays all objects in the selected active source drawings. You can
zoom and pan, but you cannot edit the objects. When you regenerate or redraw,
the objects are cleared from the current drawing.
Select Active Drawings to Quick View
Lists all active drawings attached to the current drawing. Click the drawing to
view. Use Select All and Clear All to quickly highlight or remove highlighting
from all drawings in the list.
Filters
Turns the current drawing filter on or off. When the filter is on, only drawings
that match the filter are displayed. If the parent drawing of a nested drawing
is filtered, the nested drawing is not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
39
2013
Filters
Displays the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box, where you can create or
change the filters for file names and descriptions.
Zoom to the Extents of Selected Drawings
Zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected source drawings.
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box
Use this dialog box to zoom to the extents of a set of drawings.
To zoom to the extents of selected drawings (page 745)
Click Map Setup tab Map panel Zoom Drawing Extents.
NOTE You can also zoom to the extents of the current drawing from the View
tab on the ribbon, or to the extents of a specific Display Manager layer by
right-clicking the layer and clicking Zoom To Extents.
Select the drawings you want. Click OK. The display zooms to the extents of
the selected drawings. Drawing extents are the bounds of the area occupied
by objects.
Select Active Drawings to Zoom list
Lists all active drawings attached to the current drawing.
Select the drawings to use to define the extents.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn the current drawing filter on or off.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
2014 | Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1922), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Define Document View dialog box
Use this dialog box to define a document view to view external documents
attached to an object.
At the Command prompt, enter adedefdocview.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only. To see database information
linked to geospatial features, see Overview of Joins (page 507).
To create a new document view, enter a new name in the Name field. Specify
the location of the document name, the document type, and the application
to use to display the document, and click Add.
To modify an existing document view, select it in the list. Enter new
information in the Document View Definition section, and click Update.
Document view definitions are stored in the current drawing and not in the
source drawings.
Document View Definitions
Displays the document views defined in this drawing.
To modify a view, select it and edit the information that appears in the
Document View Definition section.
Delete
Delete the selected document view definition.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use this view, be sure to define
a new view for those documents.
Delete All
Delete all document views in the list.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use these views, be sure to define
new views for those documents.
Define Document View dialog box | 2015
Name
Enter a name for a new document view.
Names cannot contain spaces.
Description
Enter a description for the document view.
Expression
Enter information on where to find the name of the document associated
with an object:
If the name of the associated document is stored in an object data table,
click Expression and select the table and field that contains the document
name.
When you attach a record from this object data table to an object, the
document listed in the specified field will be associated with the object.
If the name of the associated document is stored in an external database,
click Expression and select the link template and column.
When you attach a record from this database to an object, the document
listed in the specified column will be associated with the object.
If the name of the associated document is stored elsewhere, for example,
by giving the document the same name as the layer the object is on,
enter an expression that specifies the location of the document name.
For information on valid expressions, see Expression Evaluator (page
1541).
You can type the name of a specific file. This file is then associated with
every object.
Directory
Enter the directory where documents for this view are stored.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to locate the directory.
Ext
Enter the three-letter file extension for documents using this view.
For example, if you are creating a view for Word documents, enter doc. If
the data attached to an object specifies a file name and extension, the
extension in this field is ignored. If the data attached to the object does not
specify the extension, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the extension in the field
when searching for the document.
Command Line
Enter the command to run the associated application.
2016 | Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes
For example, if you are creating a view for a Word document, enter the path
and file name for the Word program file.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to search your directories and
locate the application file.
Launch Method
Select a launch method.
Select Default if the application specified for Command Line is a
Windows application.
Select User if the application specified for Command Line is an ARX
application. Enter the name of the viewing function. The function must
be defined in the ARX application and made available through the use
of acedDefun( ). AutoCAD Map 3D uses acedInvoke( ) to access the
user-defined function. For more information about acedDefun( ),
acedInvoke( ), or on how to create ARX applications, refer to the
AutoCAD Object ARX online help.
If you are unsure, select Default.
Define Key View dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which layers are displayed at different key view
zoom levels. For example, you can display fewer layers when zoomed out, but
display complete details when zoomed in.
At the Command prompt, enter adedefkeyview.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing layers only. To specify styling options at
dofferent zoom levels for geospatial feature layers, see Defining Scale Ranges (page
643).
To add a new condition, enter a drawing window width and specify the layers
to display at that width. Click Layers to select from a list of the layers in the
active drawings. When you finish, click Add.
To modify an existing condition, select the condition to modify and click
Edit. Add or delete layers. When you finish, click Update.
Key views are saved with the current drawing and apply to layers in the current
drawing and all active drawings.
Define Key View dialog box | 2017
Current Key View Definition List
Display the drawing window width conditions defined in this drawing.
Edit
Copy the selected condition to the bottom of the screen, where you can
change the width and add or remove layers.
Delete
Delete the selected condition.
Clear List
Delete all conditions.
Width > box
Enter the width to define.
The width is the distance across the drawing window as measured in drawing
units. The more you zoom in, the smaller this number is.
TIP Before you use the ADEDEFKEYVIEW command, use the DISTANCE
command to measure the width of the window at the zoom magnifications you
want to define.
Show Only These Layers box
Specify the layers to display when the drawing window displays a greater
width than specified in the Width box. Separate layer names with a comma.
Click Layers to select from a list of layers in the active drawings. You can
use wild-card characters to specify a set of layers.
Layers
Display a list of layers in the active drawings. Select the layers to display at
the specified window width.
Whenever the number of drawing units displayed in the drawing window
becomes greater than a defined key view condition, AutoCAD Map 3D displays
the layers specified for that condition.
When you use key views, AutoCAD Map 3D previews the specified layers from
source drawings. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected by
key views.
2018 | Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Document View dialog box
More than one document is associated with the object you selected. Select
the document type you want from the list. Click View.
At the Command prompt, enter adedocview.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing objects only.
Select Document View list
Lists the document types for this object. Select a document type. Click View
to start the associated application and view the associated document.
Select Object
Select a new object and view its associated documents.
View
View the document associated with the selected document type.
Key View dialog box
Select a zoom level or pan the current zoom. AutoCAD Map 3D previews
objects from source drawings for only the key view layers specified for the
selected magnification. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected
by key views.
At the Command prompt, enter adekeyview.
NOTE This functionality is for drawing layers only. To specify styling options at
different zoom levels for geospatial feature layers, see Defining Scale Ranges (page
643).
Zoom Window
Zoom to a window that you specify onscreen, showing only the key layers
for that magnification.
Zoom Previous
Zoom to the previous view, showing only the key layers for that
magnification.
Document View dialog box | 2019
Zoom Extents
Zoom to the extents of all active drawings, showing only the key layers for
that magnification.
Zoom Out
Zoom out .8x, showing only the key layers for that magnification.
Pan
Pan the current view using one of these methods:
Displacement
At the first prompt, specify the displacement. At the second prompt, press
Enter. The drawing moves by the amount you specified.
Points
At the first prompt, specify a point. At the second prompt, specify a new
point. The drawing moves so the first point is moved to the location of the
second point.
Redisplay
View the selected layers for the current magnification.
2020 | Chapter 39 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Workflow Designer
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN
Opens the specified saved workflow for the current map. Open workflows appear
in the list in the Workflow panel on the Tools tab. Workflows in this list are
available to run or edit.
To create a workflow (page 287)
MAPWORKFLOWRUN
Runs the specified workflow. You must save the current workflow to run it. If
the workflow has already been saved, you must open it to run it. To open a
workflow, click its name in the list in the Workflow panel on the Tools tab.
Click Open Workflow From File in this list to open a workflow that does not
already appear in the list.
To run a workflow (page 278)
NOTE Use the MapWorkflowBatchRun command to open and run a workflow file
from within a script file. This is useful for executing automated workflows.
40
2021
Workflow Designer
Use the Workflow Designer to create or edit a workflow. The name of the
current workflow appears in the title bar.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
Workspace Controls
The tools at the top of the Workflow Designer control the appearance of the
design space. They provide clipboard functions for activities, and let you open,
save, and print workflows.
New
Create a workflow definition.
Open
Open an existing workflow. The Open dialog box displays the location of
the most recently opened workflow.
Save
Save the current workflow. Workflows are saved with a .xoml extension.
You must save a workflow before you can run it.
Save As
Save the current workflow with a new name. You can alter some activity
parameters to save different versions of a workflow, for example, to overlay
different features.
Print
Print the diagram for the current workflow as it appears in the design space.
Expand any activities that are closed if you want them to appear in the
printout.
Undo/Redo
Reverse or reinstate changes you have made to workflow activities. You can
undo back to the first change you made during the current workflow editing
2022 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
session. However, you cannot undo changes to parameter settings in input
editors.
Cut/Copy/Paste
Use a workflow clipboard to cut, copy, and paste activities. You can copy
an activity from one workflow and paste it into another workflow.
Run
Run the current workflow. If you have unsaved changes, you are prompted
to save them. Running a workflow from within Workflow Designer validates
each step. A green check mark appears if the activity is successful. An
exclamation mark appears if a parameter is missing or invalid. A red X
appears if the activity fails.
Pan/Magnify/Show The Entire Workflow
Change the display of the workflow within the Workflow Designer design
space.
You can also click to fit the workflow in the design space.
Show/Hide Activities Panel
Display or hide the panel that lists the activities you can add to a workflow.
Show/Hide Properties Panel
Display or hide the panel that shows the parameter values for the selected
activity.
Refresh Design Surface
Redisplay the workflow.
Help
Display this Help topic.
Activities Panel
The panel at the right side of the Workflow Designer window contains all
activities that you can add to a workflow. For a list of these activities, see
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025).
Workflow Design Space
The area containing the activities for the current workflow is the design space.
Place activities below this icon. It is the starting point for the workflow.
Workflow Designer | 2023
Workflow Activities
Double-click an activity box to see its parameters. Each activity box displays
the following:
An icon indicating whether it is a command, a layer, a description, or
a link to another workflow.
The activity title (by default, the name of the activity in the Activities
Panel). All activities have an optional Display Name property. If you
change that property, the new name appears.
Parameters. To change the parameters, double-click the activity box or
click . See Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes (page 2025).
Command panel. Hover over an activity box to see its command panel.
You can delete, disable, or enable any activity. You can edit parameters
and toggle the prompt that allows you to replace parameters at run time.
NOTE Drag and drop activities to rearrange them. To move multiple activities
at a time, hold down the Shift key and drag a selection box around the activities.
Then hold down the Shift key and drag to the new location.
Place activities above this icon. It is the end point for the workflow.
Settings Panel
In the Settings panel, you can view and edit values for the parameters of the
current activity. To show or hide the Settings panel for the selected activity,
click
Status Area
The area at the bottom of the Workflow Designer window is the status area.
Workflow Status
While a workflow is running, the Workflow Status displays the command
that is executing and any errors that occur. When the workflow is finished
executing, click the Workflow Status link to open the log window.
2024 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes
Use the workflow activity input dialog boxes to specify or change the
parameters for a workflow activity.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The Workflow Designer includes activity dialog boxes for the following
activities. For detailed information about utility activities, see the Windows
Workflow Foundation documentation.
Utility Activities
Insert activities that are not AutoCAD Map 3D-specific. These activities include:
Describe Directory
Loops through all the files in a specified folder, allowing you to execute an
operation on each one. You can include a filter definition to select a subset
of files.
For Each
(Beta) Loops through a set of retrieved objects to perform an operation on
each of them. For example, save each retrieved feature layer to an SDF file.
In the Windows Workflow Foundation, this activity is called Replicator. Do
not use this option unless you have experience in C# programming or
Microsoft workflow technology. To set parameters for this activity, click
in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette that displays,
click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button that appears
to select parameters from a list, if available.
If Else
(Beta) Selects a statement for execution based on the value of a Boolean
expression. Do not use this option unless you have experience in C#
programming or Microsoft workflow technology. To set parameters for this
activity, click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette
that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set. Click the browse button
that appears to select parameters from a list, if available.
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes | 2025
Parallel
Activities that enclose sets of serial activities. Each set can run independently
of the other. For example, when adding connection activities, add them
inside a parallel activity. That way, if one connection fails, others can still
execute.
Prompt User
Specifies a Yes/No dialog box to display at this point in the run-time
workflow. For example, you can create a prompt whose title bar reads
Warning, and contains the text: The workflow will now convert your
SHP files to SDF format. Continue?
Sequence
Activities that enclose sets of activities. Each set is performed in sequence,
and if one activity in the sequence fails, the others cannot execute. For
example, if a connection fails, a subsequent layer-creation activity that
requires that connection cannot execute.
While
(Beta) Executes a statement or a block of statements until a specified
expression evaluates to false. Do not use this option unless you have
experience in C# programming or Microsoft workflow technology. To set
parameters for this activity, click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In
the Properties palette that displays, click the cell for the parameter to set.
Click the browse button that appears to select parameters from a list, if
available.
AutoCAD Map 3D Activities
Insert AutoCAD Map 3D-specific activities. Click the activity name listed here
to see a full description of its parameters.
Add Feature Layer (page 2028): Creates a Display Manager layer using the
specified data store connection. For an overlay that specifies feature layers,
you must include this activity.
Add Group (page 2029): Creates a group with the specified name.
Add Map (page 2030): Adds the specified display map to the current map
file. You can change the display to show the new map.
Change Feature Layer Properties (page 2030): Changes certain properties for
the specified layer.
2026 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Change Feature Layer Symbol (page 2031): Sets the styling parameters for
the specified feature layer.
Change Group Properties (page 2033): Changes the visibility, name, and
parent group of a specified group in the Display Manager.
Connect To Data Store (page 2034): Connects to the specified data store but
does not add data to the map. For an overlay that specifies feature classes,
rather than layers, this activity is sufficient (you do not have to create a
layer).
Create Buffer Layer (page 2036): Analyzes features by proximity. Specify a
geospatial feature in your map and the distance for the buffer. AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a polygon around the feature or features you have selected
at the distance you specify. It saves the buffer polygon to a new layer.
Display Feature Attributes (page 2037): Displays the Data Table for the
specified feature and selection set.
Highlight Features/Remove Highlighting (page 2038): Highlights specified
features in the map (or removes highlighting from any features that are
already highlighted).
List Current Connections (page 2039): Lists the names of connections in the
current map. You cannot specify parameters for this activity, other than
a Display Name.
List Feature Classes (page 2039): Lists the feature classes for the specified data
store connection in the current map.
List Feature Layer Properties (page 2040): Lists the name of the specified layer
in Display Manager, as well as any group it belongs to.
Load Layer File (page 2040): Adds a saved .layer file to the map. When you
load a .layer file, AutoCAD Map 3D adds the source file to Map Explorer,
creates the connection, adds the feature layer to the Display Manager, and
styles the layer correctly.
Perform Overlay (page 2041): Compares the spatial relationship of two layers
or feature classes.
Remove Connection (page 2043): Removes the specified connection to a data
source.
Remove Feature Layer (page 2044): Removes the specified feature layer.
Remove Group (page 2044): Removes the specified group.
Workflow Activity Input dialog boxes | 2027
Remove Map: Deletes the specified display map from the current map file.
Rename Map: Specifies a different name for the specified display map.
Run AutoCAD Command (page 2046): Executes any AutoCAD command-line
instruction supported by AutoCAD Map 3D. If the command requires a
selection set or displays a dialog box, the workflow pauses (during run
time) to allow for selection or input.
Run Workflow (page 2047): Invokes another workflow at this point in the
current workflow.
Save Layer File (page 2048): Saves a Display Manager layer to a .layer file. You
can save layers from all display maps in your map file.
Select Features (page 2049): Selects individual features in the current display
map. You can select the features by layer, by location, or by prompting for
a manual selection at workflow run time.
Switch Map (page 2050): Changes the current display to the specified display
map.
Zoom To Extents (page 2050): Zooms to the extents of the specified target.
Add Feature Layer
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) creates a Display Manager layer
using the specified data store connection. For an overlay that specifies feature
layers, you must include this activity.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Display Manager layer name.
Connection ID
Enter a connection ID for the data store that this layer represents, or click
to use the ID property of a preceding activity.
2028 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Feature Class: Click and select a feature class or layer from a preceding
activity.
NOTE For WMS feature sources, feature classes are displayed as
WMS_Schema:0 0, WMS_Schema:0 1, and so on, rather than with descriptive
names. For descriptions of the feature classes, examine the connection
information in the Data Connect window
Group: Specify a group for this layer to use in Display Manager.
Layer Name: Specify the name of the Display Manager layer for this
feature class.
Zoom To Extents: Select this option to zoom to the layer extents after
the feature is added.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Add Group
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) creates a group with the specified
name. For information about groups, see Organizing Layers in Your Map (page
300).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Display Manager group name.
Name
Enter a name for this group.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Add Group | 2029
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Add Map
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) adds the specified display map to
the current map file. You can change the display to show the new map.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Display Manager map name.
Name
Enter a name for this map.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Switch To New Map: Change the display to the new map.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Change Feature Layer Properties
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes certain properties for the
specified layer.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
2030 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, it can change a layer or group name, which can affect
subsequent activities.
Name
Enter the name of the layer to change.
Visible
Specify whether to make the layer visible or not, or to leave its visibility
unchanged.
Name
Specify the name of the layer.
Group
Move the layer into a different parent group, or select No Change to leave
it in the current one. The parent group must exist, or must be created by a
previous activity in the workflow. To place the group at the root level,
specify the Root Group (Map) parameter.
Selectable
Specify whether to make the layer selectable or not, or to leave its
selectability unchanged.
Draw Order Position
Change the position of this layer, relative to other layers in Display Manager.
To leave the layer in its current position, specify -1.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Change Feature Layer Symbol
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) sets the styling parameters for the
specified feature layer.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Change Feature Layer Symbol | 2031
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities.
Layer Name
Enter the name of the layer to change. To see the current values for this
layer (if it is already in the map), click Current Values.
Style Point
If the geometry of this layer is a point, specify and style the point symbol
that represents it in Display Manager. You can specify a particular parameter
or specify that the point maintain its original parameter for any setting
except the symbol itself. For information about these settings, see Style
Point dialog box (page 1637).
Style Line
If the geometry of this layer is a line, style the line that represents it in
Display Manager. You can specify a particular parameter or specify that the
line maintain its original parameter for any setting. For information about
these settings, see Style Line dialog box (page 1636).
Style Polygon
If the geometry of this layer is a polygon, style the polygon that represents
it in Display Manager. You can specify a particular parameter or specify that
the polygon maintain its original parameter for any setting. For information
about these settings, see Style Polygon dialog box (page 1639).
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
2032 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Change Group Properties
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes the visibility, name, and
parent group of a specified group in the Display Manager. For information
about groups, see Organizing Layers in Your Map (page 300).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, it can change the group name, which can affect subsequent
activities.
Group
Enter the name of the group to change.
Visible
Specify whether to make the group visible or not, or to leave its visibility
unchanged.
Name
Specify a new name for the group, or select No Change to leave it as
currently named.
Group
Move the group into a different parent group. The parent group must exist,
or must be created by a previous activity in the workflow. To place the group
at the root level, specify the Root Group (Map) parameter.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Change Group Properties | 2033
Connect To Data Store
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) connects to the specified data store
but does not add data to the map. For an overlay that specifies feature classes,
rather than layers, this activity is sufficient (you do not have to create a layer).
NOTE The parameters vary according to the type of data store you connect to.
For example, a database requires login information, while a file requires a file
name. All users must provide login credentials when running the workflow, even
if you enter your own credentials when you create it.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Connection ID.
Provider
Select the provider type for this connection.
File-based Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from SHP
(page 335), Bringing In Features from SDF (page 337), and Bringing In Features
From SQLite (page 330).
File Name
Enter or navigate to the data store file.
ArcSDE Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from
ArcSDE (page 316).
Server Name
Enter the name of the server where this data store is located.
Instance Name
Enter the name of the instance to connect to.
2034 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Data Store
Enter the data store name for this service. For Oracle and MySQL data stores,
you can display all data stores if desired.
Version
Enter the version of the data store to connect to.
Other Database Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from
Oracle (page 312), Bringing In Features from SQL Server (page 323), Bringing In
Features from SQL Server Spatial (page 326), and Bringing In Features from
MySQL (page 332).
Service Name
Enter or navigate to the data store file or folder.
Data Store
Enter the data store name for this service. For Oracle and MySQL data stores,
you can display all data stores if desired.
Version
Enter the version of the data store to connect to. (Oracle only)
ODBC Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Accessing Data from ODBC
(page 342).
Service Name
Enter or navigate to the data store file or folder.
Source Type
Specify whether this data store is a Data Source Name (DSN) or a connection
string.
Source
Enter or navigate to the ODBC source.
Raster Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Adding Raster-Based Surfaces
to Your Map (page 441).
Source File or Folder
Enter or navigate to the data store file or folder.
Connect To Data Store | 2035
WMS Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Adding an Image from a WMS
(Web Map Service) (page 445).
Server Name Or URL
Enter or navigate to the server where this data store is located, or enter its
URL.
Version
Choose a supported version from the list.
WFS Data Stores
For more information about these options, see Bringing In Features from WFS
(page 346).
Server Name
Enter or navigate to the server where this data store is located.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Create Buffer Layer
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) analyzes features by proximity.
Specify a geospatial feature in your map and the distance for the buffer.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a polygon around the feature or features you have
selected at the distance you specify. It saves the buffer polygon to a new layer.
For more information about buffers, see Buffering Features in Your Map (page
1306).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Display Manager layer that represents a buffer.
You can also create an SDF file containing this layer.
2036 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Selection Set
Specify the feature to base the buffer analysis on.
Distance
Specify the buffer distance or prompt for a distance when the workflow is
run.
Unit
Specify the measurement unit for the distance.
Save To SDF
To save the resulting buffer layer as an SDF file, specify a name and location
for the file.
Merge Results
Select from the following:
No Merging: Overlapping buffers are not merged. The number of
resulting buffers is equal to the number of features being buffered.
Merge All Buffers: All overlapping buffers are merged into a single buffer
and then combined into a single polygon.
Merge Overlapping Buffers: Only the overlapping buffers are merged.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Display Feature Attributes
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) displays the Data Table for the
specified feature and selection set.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
Display Feature Attributes | 2037
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities.
Source Type
Specify how to select the features whose attributes you will display. You
can display an entire feature source or a selection set.
If you choose to select by feature source, specify the connection ID and a
feature class name for that feature source. If you choose to select by selection
set, indicate which features to select.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Highlight Features/Remove Highlighting
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) highlights specified features in the
map (or removes highlighting from any features that are already highlighted).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities.
Selected Features
Specify the features affected by the highlighting change. For example, you
can specify all features added or produced by a previous activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Highlight: Select this option to highlight the features; clear this option
to remove highlighting from the features.
2038 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
List Current Connections
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) lists the names of connections in
the current map. You cannot specify parameters for this activity, other than
a Display Name.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is the Connection IDs for all current connections.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
List Feature Classes
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) lists the feature classes for the
specified data store connection in the current map.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is the feature class names and connection IDs for
the specified data store.
Connection ID
Enter a connection ID for the data store whose feature classes you want to
list, or click to use the ID property of a preceding activity.
List Current Connections | 2039
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
List Feature Layer Properties
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) lists the name of the specified layer
in Display Manager, as well as any group it belongs to.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is the layer and group names for the specified
Display Manager layer.
Layer Name
Enter the name of the layer.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Load Layer File
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) adds a saved .layer file to the map.
When you load a .layer file, AutoCAD Map 3D adds the source file to Map
Explorer, creates the connection, adds the feature layer to the Display Manager,
2040 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
and styles the layer correctly. For information about layer files, see Saving and
Loading Styled Feature Layers (page 651).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a Display Manager layer that displays the specified
.layer file.
File Name
Enter the name of the .layeror browse to it.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Perform Overlay
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) compares the spatial relationship
of two layers or feature classes. For information about the overlay operation,
see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a new Display Manager layer that is the result of
the Overlay operation.
Perform Overlay | 2041
Data Type
Specify whether the overlay compares feature classes or Display Manager
layers. Both the source and overlay must be the same type (you cannot
compare a feature class to a layer).
Source/Overlay
If you select Layers as the Data Type, select the Source Layer and Overlay
Layer. These layers are the output of preceding Add Feature Layer activities.
If you select Feature Classes as the Data Type select a Source Feature Class
ID (the output of a preceding activity). Then select the Source Feature Source
for that feature class (if it is not selected automatically). Do the same for
the Overlay Feature Class.
Output File
Enter a location and file name for the output (overlay) SDF file. Click to
navigate to a location.
Overlay Type
Select the type of comparison to do. For a complete description of these
options, see Overlaying Two Feature Sources (page 1309).
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Sliver Tolerance: Specify when small polygons resulting from the overlay
operation become separate features and when they are added to larger
polygons.
Units: Select the units used in determining the sliver Minimum and
Maximum settings. The coordinate system determines the available
choices for the source layer. If the sliver roundness is higher than
the Maximum value, it becomes a separate polygon in the output.
If the sliver roundness is lower than the Minimum value, it merges
with its neighbor polygon in the output. To see reasonable values
for the selected data set, click Suggest. To ignore slivers, click Dont
Remove Slivers.
Ordinate Tolerance: Specify when two nodes or vertices of a line or
polygon are treated as separate points.
Units: Select the units used in determining the Length setting. The
coordinate system determiens the available choices for the source
layer.
2042 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Length : Set the minimum distance at which two nodes or vertices
of a line or polygon are treated as separate points. The default value
is determined from the spatial context for the sources.
Output Properties: Specify which properties from the source and (if
applicable) overlay inputs are included in the output. Identifiers Only
writes the primary identifiers to the output. Non-Identifiers writes
only the non-key attributes (creating auto-generated primary identifiers
for the output features). The default value is All.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Remove Connection
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified connection
to a data source.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, the removal of a connection can affect subsequent
activities.
Connection ID
Select an existing connection or the outcome of a previous activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Remove Connection | 2043
Remove Feature Layer
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified feature layer.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, the removal of a layer can affect subsequent activities.
Layer Name
Enter the name of an existing layer, or select a layer created by a previous
activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Remove Group
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified group.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, the removal of a layer can affect subsequent activities.
Group Name
Enter the name of an existing group, or select a group created by a previous
activity.
2044 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Remove Map
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) removes the specified display map.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, the removal of a map can affect subsequent activities.
Map
Enter the name of an existing display map, or select a map created by a
previous activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Rename Map
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes the name of the specified
display map.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Remove Map | 2045
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities. However, the removal of a map can affect subsequent activities.
Map
Enter the name of an existing display map, or select a map created by a
previous activity.
New Name
Enter a new name for the specified map, or select a map created by a previous
activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Run AutoCAD Command
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) executes any AutoCAD command
supported by AutoCAD Map 3D that can be run from the command line. If
the command requires a selection set or input from a dialog box, the workflow
pauses (during run time). The person running the workflow must specify a
selection set (or dialog box input) during run time.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not necessarily produce any outputs that can be bound to
subsequent activities.
Command
Type the command-line entry for the AutoCAD command to execute.
2046 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Parameters: Enter any parameters for the command, or prompt for them
at run time.
NOTE If the command displays dialog boxes or requires a selection set, you
must provide this input manually at run-time. You cannot automate these
responses.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Run Workflow
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) invokes another workflow at this
point in the current workflow.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not necessarily produce any outputs that can be bound to
subsequent activities. However, the workflow you run may contain activities
that produce outputs.
File Name
Enter or navigate to the file containing the workflow to run. By default, the
Workflow Designer looks for the workflow in the same folder as the current
workflow.
NOTE To preview the workflow, specify its file name in the activity and then
click in the Workflow Designer toolbar. In the Properties palette that displays,
click the Preview cell containing the name of the workflow, then click the browse
button that appears. The referenced workflow appears in a separate window.
Run Workflow | 2047
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Save Layer File
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) saves a Display Manager layer to a
.layer file. You can save layers from all display maps in your map file. For
information about layer files, see Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers
(page 651).
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a .layer file.
Map
Select the display map that contains the layer to save. Select an existing
display map or a display map that results from a previous activity.
Layer Name
Select an existing layer or a layer that results from a previous activity to
save.
Output Folder
Enter or navigate to the folder for the new layer file.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Map: Select the display map in which this layer is located.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
2048 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Select Features
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) selects individual features in the
current display map. You can select the features by layer, by location, or by
prompting for a manual selection at workflow run time.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a selection set.
Selection Method
Choose one of the following:
Prompt: The workflow will pause at run time to allow manual selection
of features.
Select By Layer: Selects all features on the specified layer.
Select By Location: Selects features that either cross or are contained by
the intersection of the two layers you specify.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
SetPickFirst: Select this option to store the data in the selection (no
matter it was selected) into the AutoCAD PICKFIRST cache for further
use.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Select Features | 2049
Switch Map
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) changes the current display to the
specified display map.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
The output of this activity is a new current map.
Map Name
Enter the name of an existing display map, or a map created by a previous
activity.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Zoom To Extents
This Workflow Designer activity (page 2025) zooms to the extents of the specified
target.
To edit a workflow (page 284)
To create a workflow (page 287)
Click Tools tab Workflow panel Edit.
This activity does not produce any outputs that can be bound to subsequent
activities.
2050 | Chapter 40 Workflow Designer
Target
Specify what to zoom to: a map, a layer, a selection set, or an extent. Then
specify which map, layer, selection set, or extent to zoom to.
Optional Parameters
Display Name: Enter a title for this activity.
Prompt For Parameters At Run Time
Select this option to pause for input at run time.
Zoom To Extents | 2051
2052
Programming Interfaces
Learn how to use the AutoCAD Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including:
ActiveX
AutoLISP
Feature Data Objects (FDO)
Geospatial Platform
.NET
ObjectARX
For more information, click Help > Additional Resources > Developer Help.
41
2053
2054
Glossary
.layer file Layer definition file. In AutoCAD Map 3D, a file that saves all of the
information required to recreate a layer, that is, the references to the source
data and the styles that have been applied to it.
adjacent sheet block An annotation (page 2055) block used to indicate adjacent
tiles.
anchor point The location on a drawing object that determines the position
of any annotation attached to that object.
annotation A way to display related values on a drawing object. To annotate
geospatial features, use a label (page 2066).
annotation definitions Specially created blocks (page 2056) containing attributes
with Map expression (page 2062) assigned to the attribute properties. Used with
drawing data.
annotation template The information to display in an annotation and the
layout of that information. Annotation templates are stored as specially named
blocks within your drawing. They can include text and graphics.
as-built Data that depicts the final installed configuration (physical or
functional). As-built data incorporates any field markups on the original
construction drawings.
as-designed Data that depicts the original plan for construction or installation,
for example, the design for a new electric service or a new pipe installation.
aspect Direction of ground slope.
attributes or attribute data Tabular data that describes the characteristics of
feature (page 2063) or drawing objects (page 2061), for example, the number of
lanes and pavement-type belonging to a road. For features, attributes can be
stored with the geometry, or stored in a database and joined to feature data.
For drawing objects, attributes are stored in a database and linked to selected
drawing objects. See also property (page 2071), external data (page 2062) and object
data (page 2070).
Glossary | 2055
auto-generated field (metadata) A type of field in the Metadata feature, the
value of which is derived from the data source, and populated automatically
by AutoCAD Map 3D. Metadata auto-generation is triggered by selecting the
resource in the Metadata Viewer. See also: forced-update field (page 2064)
AutoCAD layer A layer in AutoCAD. An AutoCAD layer differs from a map
layer you create in Display Manager (page 2060). See also layer (page 2066), drawing
layer (page 2060), feature layer (page 2063), or surface layer (page 2076).
Autodesk Design Review The free viewer and editor for the DWF file format
(formerly DWF Viewer).
azimuth A clockwise angle measured from a reference meridian. Also known
as north azimuth. It can range from 0 to 360 degrees. A negative azimuth is
converted to a clockwise value.
bearing An angle measured from North or South, whichever is nearest, with
the added designation of East or West. The angle is always less than 90 degrees
(PI/2 radians or 100 grads) and is usually referenced by a quadrant number.
best route analysis Calculates the shortest path or optimal route from a start
point in a drawing, one or more intermediate points, and back to the start
point. For example, the best route to follow on a street map when visiting
multiple customer sites.
blocks In AutoCAD or AutoCAD Map 3D, compound objects that have been
saved for reuse in the drawing or in multiple drawings, for example, a North
arrow. In MapGuide Studio, blocks are converted into symbols when they are
loaded. See also symbol (page 2076).
buffer A zone of a specific radius created around a selected feature. Used to
select features within a specific distance of another feature. In AutoCAD Map
3D, you can define buffers for drawing topologies and for features, but you
define them differently.
buffer fence A fence, or line, at a specified distance from a center line. Used
to define a selection boundary.
bulge For contours that contain curves, the bulge value is a maximum
mid-ordinate distance along a polyline curve. If the mid-ordinate distance is
longer than specified, then points are added to better define the shape of the
curve.
The bulge factor can add more vertices to a polyline curve, making it appear
more curve-like. The smaller the value, the more vertices are added.
2056 | Glossary
Cartesian coordinate system A global coordinate system (page 2065) defined
using three perpendicular axes (X, Y, and Z) to specify locations in
three-dimensional space. Compare with spherical coordinate system (page 2075).
cartographic coordinate system A global coordinate system (page 2065) that is
referenced directly to an ellipsoid (page 2062). Compare with geodetic coordinate
system (page 2064).
centroids Points or blocks (page 2056) that are part of a polygon in a drawing
topology. The centroid holds information about the area and perimeter of the
polygon.
chained join An advanced type of join, where two or more secondary tables
are joined to a primary table in a chain-like fashion, that is primary linked to
secondary linked to another secondary, and so on.
checkout The action of locking features in a data store before editing them.
See also explicit checkout (page 2062), implicit checkout (page 2065).
class See feature class (page 2063) and object class (page 2069).
classified DWG An AutoCAD Map 3D DWG (drawing) file that contains object
classes, and uses them to represent real-world objects in the drawing. A DWG
file that contains object class definitions, but does not have any objects to
which these definitions are applied, is not considered a classified DWG.
clustered nodes Nodes within a specified tolerance of one another.
COGO Short for Coordinate Geometry. COGO inquiry commands extract
geometric information from drawing objects such as lines, curves, closed
polylines, and polygons. This information is useful if you want to verify the
accuracy of your data, or send the data to the field. Inquiry commands are
specific to drawing objects. They do not work on features.
column A specific category of information in a table, such as Address or
Diameter, also called a FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063). See also table (page
2076).
compound element (metadata) A group of data elements in the FGDC CSDGM
Standard (page 2063). A compound element can consist of individual data
elements, other compound elements, or both.
conformal projection, conformality Conformal projections maintain local
angles. A map projection is conformal when the scale is the same in every
direction at any point. Meridians and parallels intersect at right angles; the
shape of small areas and angles with very short sides are preserved. Most larger
area sizes are distorted.
Glossary | 2057
conic projection A map projection in which the surface of the Earth is drawn
as it would appear if projected on a cone wrapped around the earth. The
Lambert Conformal Conic is often used for maps of the continental United
States, France, and other countries.
constraint In a database, a restriction specified for a certain feature class (page
2063), which is validated when a new feature is added to that class. For example,
a "minor road" feature class may have a constraint that specifies that the speed
attribute must always be 25, 30, or 50 miles per hour.
continuous data Data that can fall anywhere in a broad range. When creating
a theme, continuous data is usually organized into smaller ranges that show
data trends. For example, property value is continuous data that can be placed
into the ranges 0 to $50,000, $50,000 to $100,000, and over $100,000, with
each range displayed in a different color. Compare with discrete data (page
2060).
contour lines A line that connects points of the same elevation or value
relative to a specified reference datum. The lines can help you determine the
elevation at a specific location on a surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D
surface terrain, and help with things like navigation.
control points Locations with established latitude and longitude, and often
elevation, used for accuracy and precise location of maps. A system of geodetic
control points covers the entire United States. Similar systems exist for all
countries, such as Bench Marks and Trigonometry Points in the United
Kingdom. See also monuments (page 2069), geodetic coordinate system (page 2064).
coordinate geometry commands See COGO (page 2057).
coordinate system See global coordinate system (page 2065).
Create Surface Manager The main user interface for creating grid surfaces
from point cloud data.
credentials The user ID and password required to connect to a database.
cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the surface of the Earth
is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around the
earth in a north-south direction. Compare with transverse cylindrical projection
(page 2078). See also Mercator projection (page 2068) and conic projection (page
2058).
dangle A link or line, one end of which lacks a connection to another link or
node.
2058 | Glossary
Data Connect The window you use to connect a geospatial data store (page
2059) to your map. You specify each feature class (page 2063) from that data store
to add to your map.
data element (metadata) A single piece of data that can be entered directly,
as a value in a field. In the Metadata feature, single data elements are expressed
as fields to be completed with values defined in the FGDC CSDGM Standard
(page 2063). See also: compound element (metadata) (page 2057).
data provider A recognized FDO (page 2062) feature source provider, used to
connect to geospatial data.
data source A UDL (universal data link) file that points to a collection of data
and provides information on how to access the data.
data store In FDO (page 2062), a collection of feature classes contained in a
single storage location. The data store consists of an integrated set of objects,
which are modeled by classes or feature classes defined within one or more
schemas. Data stores can be either file-based, such as SDF, or a database, such
as Oracle Spatial. See also FDO provider (page 2063) and feature class (page 2063).
Data Table In AutoCAD Map 3D, a grid based on FDO (page 2062) data, in which
you can view and edit attributes of selected map features, perform searches,
and work with selection sets.
Data View In AutoCAD Map 3D, the grid in which you can view and edit
external database tables that are linked to drawing objects.
database query A set of conditions for specifying the selection of records from
a database. External database queries, also called views, are created using your
database software and can be run from the Map Explorer (page 2068) tab of the
Task Pane (page 2076). See also map query (page 2068).
datum A mathematical model that provides a smooth approximation of the
earths surface. Each datum includes both an ellipsoid, which specifies the size
and shape of the earth, and a base point for latitude and longitude. If two
maps use different datums, points on the map may not line up. Also called a
geodetic coordinate system (page 2064).
DEM Digital Elevation Model. A file that contains a representation of surface
terrain. The surface is stored as a grid in which each cell can have any one of
several different meanings, such as elevation, color, density, and so on.
digitize To convert existing data from paper maps, aerial photos, or raster
images into digital form by tracing the maps on a digitizer. Object locations
are recorded as X,Y coordinates.
Glossary | 2059
discrete data Data that falls into explicit categories. For a feature layer (page
2063) that uses a theme (page 2077), each value is displayed differently. For
example, an agricultural thematic map might show each crop in a different
color. Compare with continuous data (page 2058).
display information A description of the appearance of a drawing object:
includes items such as layer, color, hatch pattern, and line type.
Display Manager A view of the Task Pane (page 2076) that shows each Display
Manager layer (page 2060) in your current display map, and has commands for
styling and managing those layers. To view Display Manager, select its tab in
the Task Pane.
Display Manager layer A set of objects in Display Manager (page 2060). The set
could be all the objects on a layer or in a feature class (page 2063), or objects that
share a certain property. Each layer can be styled or themed individually.
display map A set of map presentations, consisting of Display Manager layers,
that can be stored in a DWG file. See Display Manager layer (page 2060).
display properties Same as display information (page 2060).
dissolve To remove the boundaries that exist between polygons sharing a
specific attribute.
dither To use a pattern of solid dots to simulate more colors than are available
when displaying images.
domain (metadata) In the Metadata feature, the domain refers to element
values that are defined as valid within the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063).
A domain can be a list of pre-defined values in a menu, a range of numbers,
free-form text, or any other type of value that can be assigned to a given field.
dot variable Variable that refers to an object property. It consists of a period
(.) followed by the variable name for that property. Dot variables can be entered
in expressions used for building a template file for Report mode queries and
for property alteration. See also query (page 2072) and expression (page 2062).
draping The process of overlaying feature (page 2063) or a raster (page 2072) image
on a surface so that the features or the image reflect the underlying terrain.
draping The process of overlaying a set of feature (page 2063) or a raster (page
2072) image on a surface so that the features or the image reflect the underlying
terrain.
drawing layer A layer in Display Manager (page 2060) that contains drawing
objects (page 2061) from a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer (page 2056), feature
layer (page 2063), layer (page 2066), surface layer (page 2076).
2060 | Glossary
drawing layer A layer in Display Manager (page 2060) that contains drawing
objects from a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer (page 2056), drawing layer (page
2060), feature layer (page 2063), and surface layer (page 2076). drawing object Objects
that exist in a drawing (DWG) file or come from an attached drawing. Compare
to features.drawing source In AutoCAD Map 3D, a drawing source is a drawing
(DWG) file and also its associated information, such as attached drawing files,
drawing-based feature classes, linked template data, and topologies.
drawing objects Objects that exist in a drawing file (DWG) or come from an
attached drawing. Compare to feature (page 2063).
drawing set The set of source drawings attached to a drawing. See source
drawing (page 2074).
drawing source In AutoCAD Map 3D, a drawing source is a drawing (DWG)
file and also its associated information, such as attached drawing files,
drawing-based feature classes, linked template data, and topologies. Compare
with feature source (page 2063).
drive alias The mechanism that points to the folder where attached DWG
files are stored.
drive alias In AutoCAD Map 3D, the mechanism that points to the folder
where attached DWG files are stored.
DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data.
duplicate objects Objects that share the same start and end points. Object
types that can be considered duplicate include linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
DWF An Autodesk file format for sharing 2D, 3D, and spatially enabled design
data. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the web. See also georeferenced
DWF (page 2064), Autodesk Design Review (page 2056).
DWG Drawing file. The Autodesk file format for storing 2D, 3D, and spatially
enabled design data.
edge matching A DWG cleanup function available in AutoCAD Map 3D that
allows for distortion between adjacent maps, and produces a true match of
drawing objects at the edges of maps.
EditSet When users decide to lock objects in Oracle Spatial, those objects are
immediately locked. Edits of locked objects are put into an EditSet. You can
then update the database, which updates the locked records with the contents
of the EditSet.
Glossary | 2061
element (Oracle Spatial database) The basic building block of an Oracle
Spatial geometry (Oracle Spatial database) (page 2064). The supported spatial
element types are points, line strings, and polygons. For example, elements
might model water wells (point clusters), roads (line strings), and county
boundaries (polygons).
elevation The vertical distance from a datum to a point or object on the
surface of the Earth. The datum is generally considered to be at sea level.
Equivalent to the Z coordinate in an XYZ coordinate system.
ellipsoid An approximation of the shape of the Earth that does not account
for variations caused by the nonuniform density of the earth. Synonymous
with spheroid (page 2075). See also geoid (page 2064).
equal area A map projection in which every part, as well as the whole, has
the same area as the corresponding part on the earth, at the same reduced
scale. No flat map can be equal area and represent true shape.
equidistant projections Projections showing true distances only from the
center of the projection or along a special set of lines. No flat map can be both
equidistant and equal area.
exaggeration See vertical exaggeration (page 2078).
explicit checkout The action of checking out features using the Check Out
Features command. See also checkout (page 2057), implicit checkout (page 2065).
export profile A file with a .epf extension that stores settings for an export
operation.
expression An automatic calculation used to specify values for URL, tooltip,
and feature labels. For example, you might create a text expression that
specifies a state name and population for a label. To express the population
in millions, you might apply a number expression that divides the population
value by 1,000,000.
expression evaluator The mechanism that analyzes the statement you enter
in the Expression box in the Output Report Options dialog box or the Property
Alteration dialog box.
external data Attribute data linked to a drawing object but contained in a
database apart from the drawing file. See also attributes or attribute data (page
2055) and object data (page 2070).
FDO Feature Data Objects (FDO) data access technology. An Autodesk software
standard and general purpose API for accessing features and geospatial data
regardless of the underlying data store. See also feature (page 2063), feature class
(page 2063).
2062 | Glossary
FDO provider An implementation of the FDO (page 2062) API that provides
access to data in a particular data store, such as an Oracle or ArcSDE database,
or to a file-based data store, such as SDF or SHP.
feature An abstraction of a natural or man-made real world object. A spatial
feature has one or more geometric properties. For example, a road feature
might be represented by a line, and a hydrant might be represented by a point.
A non-spatial feature does not have geometry, but can be related to a spatial
feature that does. For example, a road feature may contain a sidewalk feature
that is defined as not containing any geometry. In AutoCAD Map 3D, features
are accessed and added to maps using Data Connect (FDO (page 2062)). See also
attributes or attribute data (page 2055). Compare to drawing objects (page 2061).
feature class For feature data, a schema element that describes a type of
real-world object. It includes a class name and property definitions. Commonly
used to refer to a set of features of a particular class, for example, the feature
class "roads" or the feature class "hydrants." See also FDO (page 2062), property
(page 2071), schema (page 2073).
Feature Data Objects See FDO (page 2062).
feature layer A layer in Display Manager (page 2060) containing feature (page
2063) from a feature source such as SDF, ESRI SHP, or ArcSDE. Feature layers are
brought in using Data Connect. See also AutoCAD layer (page 2056), layer (page
2066), drawing layer (page 2060), or surface layer (page 2076).
feature source In AutoCAD Map 3D, any source of feature data that has been
connected by means of FDO (page 2062). In MapGuide Studio, one of the two
types of resources created either by loading file-based data or by connecting
to a spatial database. Feature sources are stored in the repository either in SDF
3 format or as database connections and contain raw geometry only. Compare
with drawing source (page 2061).
FGDC CSDGM Standard Content Standard for Digital Geospatial Metadata.
A standard XML schema for publishing and sharing GIS metadata (page 2069),
released by the United States Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) in
1998. The schema is comprised of seven major sections, each of which contains
several individual data elements and compound elements. Depending upon
the nature of the GIS data, each section, element, and compound element is
mandatory, optional, or conditional (mandatory if applicable).
field A specific category of information in a data file, such as Address or
Diameter. Also called a column (page 2057). See also table (page 2076).
filtered record A record that matches the conditions of an SQL filter or spatial
filter and is therefore available for selection.
Glossary | 2063
flood trace For a network topology (page 2069), a trace that begins at a specified
point and traces out in all directions for a specified distance or resistance.
forced-update field A type of auto-generated field (metadata) (page 2056) in the
Metadata feature, the value of which is required to be derived from the data
source within a GIS resource (metadata) (page 2072), according to the rules of
the FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063). Forced-update fields are updated each
time metadata is updated.
generalization A method of reducing the number of vertices in the source
data by a specific percentage.
geodetic coordinate system A coordinate system that is referenced directly
to a datum. Compare with cartographic coordinate system (page 2057).
geographic analysis Analytical techniques that identify existing conditions
of a geographic location, a spatial area, or a linear network, and predict the
effects of certain future events on these features.
geographic data Information about geographic features. See feature (page
2063).
geoid An ellipsoid with a highly irregular surface used to describe the shape
of the earth. See also ellipsoid (page 2062).
geometry (Oracle Spatial database) The representation of a spatial feature
(page 2063), modeled as an ordered set of primitive elements. See element (Oracle
Spatial database) (page 2062).
geometry mapping The process of transforming the geometry elements of
AutoCAD Map 3D objects to Oracle Spatial geometry, and transforming the
geometry elements of the records back to AutoCAD Map 3D objects.
georeferenced DWF A DWF file published by AutoCAD Map 3D or AutoCAD
Civil 3D 2008 that contains a global coordinate system and defined latitude
and longitude coordinates based on the WGS84 datum. See also DWF (page
2061), Autodesk Design Review (page 2056).
georeferenced image An image that references real-world coordinates in its
correlation source. Example: Georeferenced images include GeoSPOT, GeoTIFF,
and images that use world files as their correlation source.
GeoTIFF A type of tagged image file format (TIFF) that supports georeferencing
information.
GIS (Geographic Information System) A computerized decision support
system that integrates geographic data, attribute data, and other spatially
2064 | Glossary
referenced data. A GIS is used to capture, store, retrieve, analyze, and display
spatial data.
global coordinate system A method that converts the spherical coordinates
of the Earth representing latitude and longitude into an AutoCAD Map 3D
drawings Cartesian coordinate system, and accounts for the curvature of the
surface of the Earth with a projection. A coordinate system is usually defined
by a projection, an ellipsoid definition, a datum definition, one or more
standard parallels, and a central meridian.
graticule A network of geographic lines, such as latitude and longitude lines.
See also grid reference system (page 2065).
grid reference system A grid-based Cartesian coordinate system. The Universal
Transverse Mercator (UTM) (page 2078) coordinate system is a grid reference
system.
grid surface See surface (page 2076).
Grid Zone Designator (GZD) The first part of a grid reference system (page
2065)coordinate. The grid zone designator specifies the 6 by 8 degree UTM zone
number and latitude letter.
hatch A regular pattern used to fill an area with a series of cross-angled lines.
hillshading The addition of shading to a surface to suggest
three-dimensionality, shadow, or degrees of light and dark. Hillshading adds
shading by casting the light of the sun across a surface from the direction and
angle you specify.
implicit checkout The action of checking out features by selecting them,
without using the Check Out Features command. See also checkout (page 2057),
explicit checkout (page 2062).
index file A point cloud data store file created by the Point Cloud Manager
(page 2071). Index files allow AutoCAD Map 3D to access point cloud data more
quickly and efficiently.
inner join A type of join where records in the primary table are displayed
only if there is a matching record in the joined secondary table. See also join,
left outer join.
intersection (expression) Two or more conditions joined with the logical
operator And. An item is selected only if the item meets all specified conditions.
Compare with union (page 2078).
intersection (geometry) The location where one line, surface, or solid crosses
another so as to have one or more points in common.
Glossary | 2065
join A relationship that is established between attribute data and feature
sources for the purposes of creating a new view of the data or for ad-hoc
analysis.
JPG2000 An advanced raster image format from Joint Photographics Expert
Group, featuring options for lossless compression, wavelet compression,
incremental decompression, and support for up to 48-bit color.
key column One or more columns in a table whose values are used to uniquely
identify a record. To provide useful links, a key column should contain a
unique value for each record. Also called a key field.
key value A value stored on an object that specifies that value to match in
the key field of a table.
key view In a map book, an overview of the entire map with the current tile
boundaries displayed.
label Text placed on or near map feature (page 2063) to describe or identify
them.
LAS LiDAR Aerial Survey. LAS is an industry standared file format defined by
the American Society of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing. The LAS
standard includes LiDAR point classification.
latitude The first part of a spherical coordinate system used to record positions
on the earths surface. Latitude indicates the angular distance north or south
of the equator. See also longitude (page 2067).
layer A resource that references a feature source or a drawing source. The layer
contains styling and theming information, and optionally a collection of scale
ranges. You add a layer to your map using Display Manager (page 2060). Specific
types of layers are drawing layer (page 2060), feature layer (page 2063), and surface
layer (page 2076).
layout template In a map book, a named composition of viewports and
annotation (page 2055) in paperspace. It includes the intended paper size and
output scale for plotting and publishing. See also map book template (page
2067).
left outer join A type of join where all records in the primary table are
displayed, whether they have a matching record in the joined secondary table
or not.
LiDAR Light Detection And Ranging. A remote-sensing method that can be
used to generate an image of a surface.
2066 | Glossary
link (external databases) The connection between a drawing object and its
related database data. The link data is stored on the linked drawing object and
contains the name of the link template and the key value used to identify the
associated record in the linked table. An object may have more than one link.
link (geometry) An element of geometry that connects nodes. In a polygon
topology, a link defines a polygon edge. Links can contain vertices and true
arcs, and can be represented as a line, polyline, or arc. See also node (page 2069).
link template A data structure that contains the path information to a database
table and specifies one or more key fields in that table.
lock To make all or part of a disk file read-only so that it cannot be modified
by other users on a network. Object locking applies to objects that are being
edited by another user. File locking applies to entire files, for example when
an AutoCAD user wants to open a file while the file is being edited in AutoCAD
Map 3D.
logical operator A symbol such as And, Or, Not, =, >, >=, <, and <= used to
define logical relationships.
long transaction Transactions that extend over hours, days, or months, unlike
the more typical database transactions that last for only seconds. Long
transactions support atomicity, consistency, and durability, and can be
committed or rolled back.
longitude The second part of a spherical coordinate system used to record
positions on the earths surface. Longitude measures angular distance east or
west of the prime meridian, which runs through Greenwich, England. See
also latitude (page 2066).
main viewport The viewport that represents a map tile in a sheet. See also
viewport (paper space) (page 2078).
map A collection of layers displayed within a consistent coordinate system
and extents. See also layer (page 2066).
Map Book Manages your map book (page 2067) and contains commands for
creating, editing, and publishing them. To view Map Book, click its tab in the
Task Pane (page 2076).
map book A publishing option that divides a map into tiles and formats them
into pages with a legend and an index/key. Create and edit map books from
the Map Book tab in the Task Pane (page 2076).
map book template A special type of sheet set template used by a map book
to generate sheets. The map tiles are generated based on the layout and
viewport placeholder properties.
Glossary | 2067
Map Explorer Manages your mapping resources. To view Map Explorer, click
its tab in the Task Pane (page 2076).
map projection A systematic representation of a spherical body, such as the
earth, in a flat (planar) surface. Each map projection has specific properties
that make it suitable for specific mapping needs.
map query A set of conditions that specify the selection of drawing objects
from source drawings. Conditions in a Map query can be based on the location
or properties of an object or on data stored in the drawing or in a linked
database table. See also topology query (page 2077) and database query (page
2059).
map tile A specific region of a map (model space view) for use on an individual
sheet.
MapGuide Enterprise A software platform for distributing spatial data over
the Internet or on an intranet. MapGuide Enterprise is supported by Autodesk.
MapGuide Open Source A software platform for distributing spatial data over
the Internet or on an intranet. MapGuide Open Source is supported by the
community (www.mapguide.osgeo.org)
MapGuide Server The component of MapGuide Open Source or MapGuide
Enterprise that hosts services and responds to requests from client applications
through TCP/IP protocol.
MapGuide Viewer (AJAX viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that does not need a download (also known as zero-client
viewer). It works with Microsoft Internet Explorer, running on Windows, or
with browsers such as Firefox on other operating systems, such as MacOS or
Linux.
MapGuide Viewer (DWF Viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that is based on a Microsoft ActiveX Control and has full support
for the DWF format. It works with the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser
only.
MapGuide Web Server Extensions The MapGuide component that exposes
the services offered by the MapGuide Server to client applications over the
Internet or on an intranet using HTTP protocol.
Mercator projection A map projection, designed by Gerhardus Mercator, in
which the surface of the Earth is drawn as it would appear if projected on a
cylinder wrapped around the earth. See also cylindrical projection (page 2058).
meridian A great circle passing through both poles, corresponding to a line
of longitude.
2068 | Glossary
metadata Data about data. In the GIS context, metadata consists of
information that describes the essential characteristics of geospatial data sets.
See also FGDC CSDGM Standard (page 2063).
Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) A Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM) projection (page 2078)- and Universal Polar Stereographic (UPS)-based
grid reference system (page 2065) used by the United States military and NATO.
monuments Features with known coordinates, used to establish accurate and
precise location on a map. See also control points (page 2058).
Mpolygon A polygon object. A polygon differs from a closed polyline in that
it stores information about its inner and outer boundaries.
naming scheme The method of determining an individual map tile name.
Examples include column/row, sequential, and data driven.
network analysis, network flood trace See flood trace (page 2064).
network topology A description of the spatial relationship between linear
drawing objects (links and, sometimes, nodes). For example, a network
topology can represent pipelines, streets, electrical transmission lines, and
rivers.
node A single point or a link end point or intersection in a topology. A node
can be represented as a block or point object.
node topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
point objects in a drawing. Examples of node topologies include point sources
of pollution and road signs.
normalizing In a theme, the scaling of data values relative to another data
value. A common example is adjusting the thematic value based on the area,
length, or perimeter of the entity.
object class All the drawing objects that have been created using a specific
object class definition. Use object classification to organize objects in your
drawing based on the real-world features they represent, such as roads. Object
classes allow you to create new objects that automatically have the appropriate
properties and values for objects in your drawing. See also feature class (page
2063).
object class definition A definition of how to create a classified drawing
object in a drawing. An object class definition can include information about
the object type, default properties of the object, or default data that should
be attached to the object.
Glossary | 2069
object data Attribute data attached to an object and stored in the drawing
file. Compare with external data (page 2062).
OGC Open Geospatial Consortium. A non-profit, international, voluntary
consensus standards organization that leads the development of standards for
geospatial and location based services. (www.opengeospatial.org)
one-to-many join A join in which one record in the primary table corresponds
to more than one record in the secondary table.
one-to-one join A join in which one record in the primary table corresponds
to one record in the secondary table.
OpenGIS Agent The component of the MapGuide Server Web Extensions
that implements several OpenGIS Web-mapping protocols to expose the
services offered by the MapGuide Server to standards-based OpenGIS clients.
Oracle schema See schema (page 2073).
Oracle Spatial (OSE) feature An earlier version of the Feature Data Objects
(FDO (page 2062)) feature, used to store maps in Oracle Spatial.
OSGeo Open Source Geospatial Foundation. A foundation created to support
and build the highest-quality open source geospatial software. The goalof the
foundation is to encourage the use and collaborative development of
community-led projects. (www.osgeo.org)
overlay To create a new topology by combining elements of two distinct
topologies. At least one of the original topologies must be a polygon topology.
overlay analysis In AutoCAD Map 3D, a tool that provides spatial and data
analysis capabilities for two sets of geospatial features.
package In MapGuide, a compressed file that can speed up the process of
loading data onto the server. Large source-data files can be zipped up in this
file format and saved to a network location or copied to a CD.
parallel A degree of latitude that circles the earth parallel to the Equator.
path trace For a network topology, a trace begins at a specified point, finds
the shortest distance to another point and is based on resistance (the length
by default).
persistent locking The ability to edit checked-out objects while you are offline,
and then save your changes back to the data source when you return online.
placeholder Specifies location and size of elements (viewports, scale bar, north
arrow, legend) in a map sheet.
2070 | Glossary
plot template block An AutoCAD block that contains plotting information
such as title page text, plot layouts, legend, and other map annotation (page
2055).
point cloud A collection of points represented as an AutoCAD object.
Point Cloud Manager The main user interface for converting LiDAR data to
a point cloud database file format.
polygon A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner
and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested within it or grouped
with it. In a polygon topology, the polygon can be enclosed by any lines or
arcs in the drawing. In addition, AutoCAD Map 3D supports a polygon object,
sometimes called an Mpolygon (page 2069) or mapping polygon.
polygon topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
area features. Polygon topologies contain geometric links, nodes, and centroids.
Examples of polygon topologies are land use and land cover maps, political
boundaries, parcels, and soil types.
primary key The property whose value uniquely identifies each feature within
a feature class. Many feature classes use a single property for this purpose, for
example, FeatureId. However, a feature class could have a list of properties
such as street number, street name, and street type to uniquely identify a
house address. You cannot edit primary key values for joined data.
prime meridian The line of longitude drawn through Greenwich, England,
used as the origin for longitude measurements.
profile User-defined settings specific to a given drawing.
property For feature (page 2063) data, a single attribute of a class. A class is
described by one or more property definitions. For example, a Road feature
class (page 2063) may have properties called Name, NumberLanes, or Location.
See also attributes or attribute data (page 2055).
property alteration definition The definition of properties you want to
change during a query.
property data Values associated with a geographic object, such as river depth,
road width, or pipe diameter. In AutoCAD Map 3D, these items are represented
as block attributes, values in object data tables, or values in a linked external
database.
pseudo node An unnecessary node in a geometric link. A pseudo node can
be used to store information about geographic point location or to represent
change from one link to another.
Glossary | 2071
publish To generate output from a map book.
purge To remove all unused object definitions from an open drawing.
query A set of executable statements that retrieve specific objects. For example,
a layer-based query that displays only the objects on the layers that contain
state and district boundaries. See map query (page 2068), topology query (page
2077), and database query (page 2059).
Query Library The set of queries saved in a drawing. You can add, delete, and
modify queries in the Query Library.
ramp A sequence of display properties used to render a theme; for example,
a sequence of colors, line styles, or hatch patterns.
range of values In a theme, a segment of data along a continuum, such as
property value, temperature, or population.
raster Images containing individual dots (called pixels or cells) with color
values, arranged in a rectangular, evenly spaced array. Aerial photographs and
satellite images are examples of raster images used in mapping. Compare with
vector (page 2078).
raster-based surface layer See surface layer (page 2076).
reference point For a symbol, the point that controls the position of a symbol
over a feature in a map. The default reference point is the center of the symbol.
registration The preparation of a map for digitizing by calibrating a digitizing
table to convert an analog source to a digital file. See digitize (page 2059).
resistance Resistance is a measure of how hard it is to travel a link. The default
measure of resistance is the length of the link. You can set the resistance to
be related to what the link represents, such as pipe diameter or traffic speed.
resolution In a raster image, the density of pixels-per-inch (PPI) or
dots-per-inch.
resource In MapGuide, a feature source, drawing source, or application
component that is stored in the resource repository and can be reused and
shared.
resource (metadata) In the Metadata feature, a resource is a generic term
meaning any type of data set for which AutoCAD Map 3D can generate
metadata (page 2069). A resource could be a feature class, an object class, a
schema, or a file.
resource repository In MapGuide, an XML database that stores the resources
created either by loading file-based data or by connecting to databases.
2072 | Glossary
rubber sheeting An editing method, used only when necessary, that attempts
to correct errors by stretching a map to fit known control points or
monuments.
rule (for feature themes) A feature theme consists of a collection of rules.
Each rule specifies a style and feature label for the features that meet the
specified condition. You can add a legend label to provide a description of
the condition of a rule. As a layer is drawn, each feature (page 2063) is compared
to the rules in the order that they are listed. The first rule for which the feature
meets the condition is used to specify the style and feature label for that
feature.
save set Objects that have been created or modified in the current drawing
and are marked to be saved back to source drawings.
scale The ratio of the distance on a paper map to the distance on the ground.
If a paper map has a scale of 1:100,000 (also represented as 1/100000), then
a distance of 1 unit on the paper map corresponds to 100,000 units on the
ground. On a digital map, scale represents the scale of the map from which
the digital map was derived.
scale threshold You can define different stylizations at different scale
thresholds. For example, turn on the display of road names only when the
drawing scale factor is below 1:5000.
schema The definition of multiple feature classes and the relationships between
them. A schema is the logical description of the data types used to model
real-world objects, and does not reference the actual data instances (a particular
road or land parcel). Rather, it is metadata. See also feature class (page 2063).
SDF Spatial Data File. An open source file-based geodatabase that can contain
multiple feature classes or types of data stored in tables with attributes and
geometry. See SDF 2 (page 2073), SDF 3 (page 2073).
SDF 2 The previous version of the SDF file format. It was the native file format
for Autodesk MapGuide (the last release was Autodesk MapGuide 6.5). Each
SDF 2 file generally contained one feature class (page 2063) or type of data, for
example points, lines, polygons, or text.
SDF 3 The current version of the SDF format. It is the native format for
MapGuide Enterprise and MapGuide Open Source. Each SDF 3 file can contain
multiple feature classes or types of data stored in tables with attributes and
geometry. See feature class (page 2063).
service An Oracle database.
shading See hillshading (page 2065).
Glossary | 2073
sheet An individual named object in a sheet set that can be published.
References a layout. In a DWF file, a plot layout containing a specific view of
the original data.
sheet set A named collection of sheets and subsets for publishing.
sheet subset A named collection of sheets within a sheet set. An individual
sheet can only be a member of a single subset.
sheet template A drawing file that defines a title block and a layout for use
in sheets. Can be specified for sheet sets and sheet subsets.
shortest path trace See path trace (page 2070).
site The collection of servers that process MapGuide requests.
Site Administrator A web-based application, installed with MapGuide Server,
for managing a site and its servers.
Site Explorer The tree view in MapGuide Studio that displays the resources
stored in the resource repository.
site server In a site, the server that contains the resource repository.
slope A method of reporting surface inclination as a ratio that expresses the
horizontal distance in which the elevation changes by one linear unit. For
example, if the ground rises 3 units over a horizontal distance of 15 linear
units (meters or feet), the slope is 5:1 (5 to 1).
source drawing A drawing file attached to another drawing. The set of all
source drawings attached to a drawing is called the drawing set. Use a query
to retrieve selected objects from multiple source drawings.
spatial A generic term used to reference the mathematical concept of
n-dimensional data.
spatial analysis The process of understanding, extracting, or creating
information about a set of objects. Spatial analysis includes techniques used
to determine the distribution of objects over a network or area, and the
relationships between those objects. The location of, proximity to, and
orientation of objects can be analyzed with spatial analysis. It is useful for
evaluating suitability and capability, for estimating and predicting, and for
interpreting.
spatial context The general metadata or parameters within which the
geometry for a collection of features resides. In particular, the spatial context
includes the definition of the coordinate system, spheroid parameters, units,
spatial extents, and so on, for a collection of geometries owned by features.
2074 | Glossary
spatial data Information about the location and shape of geographic features,
and the relationships between those features. See also feature (page 2063).
Spatial Data File See SDF (page 2073).
spatial database A database containing information indexed by location.
spatial filter A selection of objects that specify which records to display in
the active table or query. When a spatial filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records linked to selected objects. Compare with SQL filter (page
2075).
spatial index An index created in an Oracle Spatial database by dividing the
extents of the drawings in the database into rectangular tiles. AutoCAD Map
3D uses the index to locate the geometry to be imported.
spherical coordinate system A coordinate system measured on the surface
of a sphere and expressed as angular distances. Compare with Cartesian
coordinate system (page 2057).
spheroid See ellipsoid (page 2062).
SQL filter A series of SQL expressions that specify which records to select in
the active table or query. When an SQL filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records that match the filter criteria. Compare with spatial filter
(page 2075).
style Settings that specify how to display the feature (page 2063) or drawing
objects in a Display Manager layer. For example, a polygon style that makes
parcel polygons 50% transparent and which appears at a scale of 1:50000.
One or more styles can be applied to a single element.
style library Use the style library to store the styles you use frequently. You
can drag and drop these styles onto any element in any other display map.
styling The process of assigning display characteristics (such as line color, line
pattern, fill color, fill pattern, and so on) to feature (page 2063) (points, polylines,
polygons). See also theming (page 2077).
stylization Visually or textually changing the display of drawing objects
according to the assigned styles, rather than displaying them with their native
object properties. See also style (page 2075).
superuser A user who controls user IDs, passwords, and access to sensitive
procedures.
supplementing distance The maximum distance between 3D polyline vertices.
If the distance between vertices is greater than specified, then points are added
Glossary | 2075
along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less than or equal to the
supplementing distance.
supplementing factors Add vertices along 3D polylines that are long and
contain few vertices. The supplementing distance is the maximum distance
between vertices. If the distance between vertices is greater than specified,
then points are added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less
than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the
greater the number of supplemented points.
surface A network of elevation data. AutoCAD Map 3D supports raster-based
grid surfaces, such as DEM, DTED, and ESRI Grid. In these types of surfaces,
the points of a surface are connected into a grid, which are then used to
interpolate contours, and to generate profiles and cross-sections. A surface
represents the ground condition at a particular time or event.
surface layer A layer in Display Manager (page 2060) containing a raster-based
surface such as a Digital Elevation Model (DEM), an ESRI Grid file, or Digital
Terrain Elevation Data (DTED). A surface layer is brought in using Data
Connect. See also feature layer (page 2063), drawing layer (page 2060), AutoCAD
layer (page 2056).
swing tie A type of measurement taken by a surveyor using a known distance
plus an angular offset. A tie is a direct measurement, made with a tape or
chain. Swing refers to the angle offset of the tie.
symbol A bitmap or vector image that is used to represent a point.
symbol library In MapGuide Studio, a collection of related symbols. Image
files are converted into symbols when they are brought into the symbol library.
The symbol library is stored in the resource repository.
symbol table A term referring to the storage of named objects, including
linetypes, layers, text styles, and blocks.
table A set of data arranged in records (rows) and fields (columns). When a
table is displayed in a grid, records display in horizontal rows and fields display
in vertical columns. Each field value in the table displays in a cell.
Task Pane A AutoCAD Map 3D window that provides the tools you require
to accomplish your main mapping tasks: creating, displaying, styling,
analyzing, and publishing maps. The Task Pane contains tabbed views: Map
Explorer (page 2068), Display Manager (page 2060), Survey, and Map Book (page
2067). Map Explorer enables you to manage the resources you use to create your
maps. Display Manager provides tools to create maps, and create styles and
themes. With Map Book, you can print, publish and share maps. You can
resize and move the Task Pane palette.
2076 | Glossary
task workflow An overview of the steps to perform common GIS tasks.
template file A file that formats another file, such as a text file for saving
information from queried objects. See also dot variable (page 2060), query (page
2072), and link template (page 2067).
text layer Static text stored as a separate SDF data store, independent from
the current map. You can precisely position text on the layer, and style and
rotate the text.
thematic map See theme (page 2077).
theme A theme is a special style used to vary the stylization based on some
property of the objects. For example, instead of just coloring the lakes blue,
you could vary the shade of blue based on the depth of the lake. Instead of
just altering the line width of the roads, you could vary the line width based
on traffic flow.
theming The process of styling feature (page 2063) according to an attribute
value. See also styling (page 2075).
tiling scheme The method of breaking a large map into multiple smaller tiles.
Options include by area, by number, and custom.
tolerance A radius around a node or linear object used to search for drawing
errors.
tolerance (drawing cleanup) The minimum distance allowed between linear
objects or nodes during drawing cleanup. If two linear objects or nodes are
separated by a distance less than the tolerance, AutoCAD Map 3D corrects the
error.
Topobase An Autodesk data management solution for utility companies,
municipalities, and engineering firms. Autodesk Topobase consists of a set of
industry-specific modules built on AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide, all of
which use Oracle as the central data store.
topology A set of geometric relationships between drawing objects, including
links, nodes, and centroids. Topology describes how lines, nodes, and polygons
connect and relate to each other, and forms the basis for advanced GIS
functions such as network tracing, spatial analysis, buffer analysis, overlay
analysis, and dissolving a polygon topology.
topology query An extension to a Map query that applies to a loaded topology.
See also map query (page 2068).
transparent command A command started while another is in progress.
Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe.
Glossary | 2077
transverse cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the surface of
the Earth is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around
the earth in an east-west direction. Compare with cylindrical projection (page
2058).
UDL (Universal Data Link) File with.udl extension that includes the name
and location of the database table and the software used to create the file.
Windows uses a UDL file to identify a data source. Using the information in
this file, programs such as AutoCAD Map 3D can view and update data from
external databases.
undershoot Two or more lines within a specified tolerance of each other that
do not meet.
union Two or more conditions joined with the logical operator Or. An item
is selected only if the item meets at least one of the specified criteria. Compare
with intersection (expression) (page 2065).
United States National Grid (USNG) A Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
projection (page 2078)-based grid reference system (page 2065)for the United States.
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection A specific implementation
of the Mercator projection, designed for use around the world. See also Mercator
projection (page 2068).
vector A mathematical calculation of an object with precise direction and
length. Vector data is stored as X,Y coordinates that form points, lines, and
areas. Compare with raster (page 2072).
versioning A database function that allows multiple copies of a spatial dataset
to be stored and tracked by date of creation, data of change, and so on.
vertical exaggeration An increase of vertical scale relative to horizontal scale,
used to make elevation changes easier to differentiate.
viewport (paper space) A view of modelspace from a layout.
wavelet A multiple resolution image file compressed using a lossy compression
that enables large graphics to load much faster due to the reduction in file
size. Wavelet compression is based on a mathematical algorithm in which
graphic images can be reduced to a small fraction of their original size.
weeding The removal of points along a selected 3D polyline, which may
represent a contour. The weeding factors determine the number of points
removed. You can use weeding to reduce the amount of point information
taken from the contours that may not be necessary to generate an accurate
surface.
2078 | Glossary
weeding factors You can use the weeding factor settings to reduce redundant
points along 3D polylines by ignoring vertices that are close together or along
a straight line. A larger distance and deflection angle will weed a greater
number of points. Distance is an absolute measure and the angle is measured
in degrees. The larger the distance value, the greater the number of weeded
points. The weeding factors must be less than the supplementing factors.
A point is weeded by calculating its location in relation to the vertices before
and after it. If the length between these three points is less than the weeding
length value, and the deflection angle is less than the weeding angle value,
then the middle point is not added to the contour data file.
WFS Web Feature Service. A web service based on the specification defined
by the OGC. Acts as a source of feature (page 2063) data.
WMS Web Map Service. A web service based on the specification defined by
the OGC. Produces an image (for example, a PNG or JPG image) of geospatial
data.
workflow An automated set of tasks that can be arranged to run in series or
parallel. The output of one task can be used as the input of another task. The
user can configure the sequence and parameters for execution graphically.
workflow activity A single step in a workflow that executes a command or
set of commands.
workflow binding A relationship between activities such that the output of
one activity is used as the input of another.
workspace Contains the commands and tools for specific tasks. The Tool-based
Ribbon workspace is tailored to those familiar with the AutoCAD ribbon, while
the Task-based Ribbon workspace is optimized for working with AutoCAD
Map 3D.
To change your workspace, click the name of the current workspace in the
status bar and select a different workspace from the list.
zero-client viewer See MapGuide Viewer (AJAX viewer) (page 2068).
zoom To change the display magnification so that it focuses on progressively
smaller areas (when you zoom in) or larger areas (when you zoom out) of an
image.
zoom extents To magnify a drawing based on its extents so that the view
shows the largest possible view of all spatial objects.
Glossary | 2079
2080
Index
.bmp files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.ddf files (SDTS format) 413
importing 414
.dgn files 405, 408, 1435
exporting to 1435
importing 405, 408
.dib files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.dpf files 781
.dwg files
exporting maps to 1460
.dwk files 227, 730, 735
.dxf files 391
exporting 1459
importing 391
.eoo files
exporting 396
importing 396
.gml files 412
exporting to 1429
importing 412
.ini files 249
and drive aliases 161
customizing 264
for import and export 269
.jpg files
adding with Data Connect 443444
.mif files 400
exporting to 1431
importing 400
.mil files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.pct files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.pcx images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.png files
adding with Data Connect 443444
.rst files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.sdf files 338, 387, 1413
exporting 1413, 1417
importing 387
saving Display Manager layers
as 1470
using as a data source 338
.shp files 335336, 399
adding feature data to maps 336
converting to drawing objects 335
importing 399
.sif files 1417
.sqlite files 331
exporting 1447
using as a data source 331
.sys files 249
.tab files 402, 404, 1433
exporting to 1433
importing 402, 404
.tga files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
.tif files
adding with Data Connect 443444
.vml files 1449
exporting to 1449
.vpf files 416417
importing 416417
2D
adding rasters to maps 444
draping over 3D surfaces 1193
viewing 1193
3D
orbit options 1196
surfaces 1192
viewing 1193, 1196
3D surfaces
draping 2D data on 1193
video 1194
walkthroughs 1196
Index | 2081
A
abstract classes
in Schema Editor 1739
acadmap.ini file 161, 249
acadmap.sys file 249
ACADOPTIONS command 89
ACADPUBLISH command 1371, 1373
ACADSAVE command 742
ACADSAVEAS command 1459
accessing 314, 319, 324, 331, 333, 336,
338, 341, 344, 378
ArcSDE data in maps 319
Autodesk SDF data in maps 338
Microsoft Access data in maps 344
MySQL data in maps 333
ODBC data in maps 344
Oracle data in maps 314
PostGIS data in maps 341
SHP files in maps 336
SQL Server data in maps 324
SQLite data in maps 331
vs importing data for maps 378
WFS data in maps 348
activating source drawings 160
activities
for workflows 281
Add Class Property dialog box
(Export) 1726
Add Feature Layer activity
for workflows 2028
Add Group activity
for workflows 2029
Add Map activity
for workflows 2030
Add To Map With Query 310
adding 314, 319, 324, 331, 333, 336,
338, 341, 444, 751, 764, 878,
880, 884, 937, 1056
2D rasters to maps 444
annotation to maps 1103
ArcSDE data to maps 319
Autodesk SDF data to maps 338
database records in Data View 1056
digital elevation models to
maps 442
digital terrain elevation data to
maps 442
distances 1157
drawings to save sets for maps 751
drawings to the current map 158
ESRI grid files to maps 442
ESRI SHP data to maps 336
linear objects to topology 880
MySQL data to maps 333
nodes to topology 878
objects to save set 764
Oracle data to maps 314
polygons to topology 884
PostGIS data to maps 341
raster images to maps 442
raster-based surfaces to maps 442
SHP data to maps 336
SQL Server data to maps 324
SQLite data to maps 331
surfaces to maps 442
text to drawing objects 1278
text to objects 937
WFS (Web Feature Service) data to
maps 348
WMS (Web Map Service) data to
maps 447
ADEATTACHDATA command 1062,
1065, 1794
ADEDEFCRDSYS command 91
ADEDEFDATA command 200201,
1456, 1805
ADEDRAWINGS command 156, 159,
1918
ADEDWGCLEAN command
(discontinued) 1533
ADEDWGMAINT command 736, 1295,
1920
ADEDWGSTAT command 166, 173,
1926
ADEEDITDATA command 1070, 1795
ADEFILLPOLYG command 940, 1647
ADEGENLINK command 533, 1063,
1068, 1457, 1807
ADEQUERY command 1238, 1262,
1289, 1478, 1480, 1838
2082 | Index
ADEQUERYLIB command 181, 183,
1858
ADEQVIEWDWGS command 747, 2013
ADEREMOBJS command 742, 760, 1885
ADERSHEET command 935, 1648
ADERUNQUERY command 180, 1861
ADERUNXQUERY command 180
ADESAVEOBJS command 742, 749, 754,
756, 1887
ADESELOBJS command 742, 752, 1886
ADESETCRDSYS command 147148,
1296, 1598
ADESHOWOBJS command 753, 1887
ADETEXTLOC command 937, 1799
ADETRANSFORM command 932, 1649
ADEWHOHASIT command 735
ADEZEXTENTS command 745, 2014
adjacent arrows
for map books 1385
aerial imagery
purchasing 72
samples 63
affine transformation
and digitizing 133
aliases for drives 161
aligning 154, 931
attached drawings 154
drawing objects in maps 931
drawings 169
maps 154
Alter Block Insertion dialog box 1622
Alter Line Format dialog box 1622
Alter Linetype dialog box 1623
Alter Lineweight dialog box 1624
Alter Plotstyle dialog box 1624
Alternate Font dialog box (drawing
queries) 1835
analyzing data
overview 1121
anchoring 770
objects for Drawing Cleanup 770
angle information 1160
displaying 1160
ANGLE variable 1546
annotating
maps (video) 1089
annotation 186, 1100, 1103, 11051108
adding for drawing layers 660, 1176
applying for drawing layer
themes 1176
attaching to drawing objects in
maps 1103
changing templates 196
defining templates 192
deleting in maps 1108
deleting references to templates 197
deleting templates 197
editing on an annotation layer 1116
for drawing layer themes 1186
inserting in maps 1103
legends (video) 1117
refreshing in maps 1105
templates 186
templates from xrefs 186
text layers (video) 1109, 1111,
1113, 1115
updating in maps 1107
Annotation Delete dialog box 1569
annotation layers
adding text to 1114
creating 1110
styling 1112
Annotation Refresh dialog box 1569
Annotation Text dialog box 1570
Annotation Update dialog box 1571
apostrophe 1027
and coordinate geometry
commands 1027
apparent intersection 773, 779, 803
and Drawing Cleanup 803
marking for cleanup 779
selecting 773
tolerance for extending 773
appending 1413, 1424
when exporting to SDF 1413
when exporting to SHP 1424
Arc/INFO Coverages 381, 394, 1419
export defaults 269
exporting 1405
exporting to 1419
importing 381, 394
Index | 2083
arcs 776, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1038, 1040,
1042, 1044
converting to polylines during
Drawing Cleanup 776
displaying COGO information
for 1161
specifying with angle and
distance 1032
specifying with azimuth and
distance 1042
specifying with bearing and
distance 1034
specifying with deflection and
distance 1038
specifying with distance and
offset 1044
specifying with two bearings 1036
specifying with two distances 1040
ArcSDE 316
adding feature data to maps 319
exporting drawing data to 1423
importing data from 392
moving DWG data to 629
provider capabilities in maps 316
schemas 579
setting up for 318
working with data 581
ArcView ShapeFile 381
exporting as folder 269
exporting to 1424
importing 381
importing as folder 269
area
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
finding drawing objects by 1244
specifying save back extents 170
style options for 650
AREA variable 1546
arithmetic functions 1541
aspect
and theming 1202
theming surfaces for 1203
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog
box 1598
Associate Database Versions dialog
box 1675
associating 507, 512
data with map features 512
association properties
in Schema Editor 1739
associations
data and map features 507
associative hatch 247
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog
box 1781
Attach Object Data dialog box 1793
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog
box 1794
ATTACHDEF command 996, 1781
attached drawings
querying (video) 24, 1235, 1238,
1242, 1245, 1249
attaching 158, 523
data sources for drawings 209
data to drawing objects in maps 523
drawings to the current map 158
external data to maps 209, 523
queries to the current drawing 180
text to drawing objects 1278
attribute data 291, 364, 426, 434435,
507, 509, 512, 532
adding drawing objects to maps
by 364
adding to features 509
adding using joins 507, 512
altering drawing objects based
on 1267
and maps 291
and queries 1300
displaying as text 435
exporting 1405, 1473
exporting text enclosed in a
polyline 1455
finding drawing objects by 1248
importing 426, 434
including when publishing to
DWF 1367
joining to features (video) 37
linking records to drawing
objects 532
2084 | Index
linking to drawing objects in
maps 1067
overview 27
reports 1473
viewing (video) 27
viewing for features 1125
Attribute Data dialog box 1699
Attribute Domain Values Editor 1773
Attribute Editor (metadata) 1756
auditing
metadata 1509
topology 920
Australian coordinate systems 109
changes 110
grid data files 109
AutoCAD Civil 3D 545
bringing data into AutoCAD Map
3D 545
AutoCAD Color Index 1552
AutoCAD commands 701
editing features with 701, 715716
AutoCAD layers 356, 419, 421
adding drawing objects to maps 356
adding to Display Manager
(video) 352, 634
assigning object classes during
import 421
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 419
AutoCAD Map 3D 77, 84, 142
checking version 1905
coordinate system files 113
customizing 84, 216217
logging in as Superuser 142
opening display maps in previous
versions 1460
sample data 62
setting options 216217
setting up 77
templates 62
tutorials 58
user interface tour 2
user privileges 142
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box
(drawing topology) 19501951
AutoCAD Map Messages dialog box 1799
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box 1908
AutoCAD Raster Design images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
AutoCommitting changes in the Data
View 1056
Autodesk Design Review 1365, 1369,
1372
Autodesk digital animation
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Autodesk DWF Viewer 1365
Autodesk MapGuide 389
exporting to version 6.5 and
earlier 14171418
exporting to version 6.5 or earlier
(video) 1376
importing from 389
publishing to current Enterprise
version 1378
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog
box 1580
Autodesk mapGuide Import dialog
box 1582
Autodesk SDF 337338, 388
about file format 387
adding feature data to maps 338
and Bulk Copy 617
provider capabilities for maps 337
AutoLISP variables 1551
automatic checkout
video 713
automatic drawing cleanup 783
automatic save file 757
automatic update 698
changing default setting 88
for feature data 698
automating tasks 278, 281
autox.sv$ file 757
azimuth base 234
setting to South 234
B
backup files 764
balancing polygon boundaries 955
base feature classes
in Schema Editor 1739
Index | 2085
base object classes 123
base or abstract classes (inheritance)
setting in schemas 612
BB 1036
best route analysis 845, 849, 1328, 1330
and direct resistance 849
and direction 845
BIL images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
bitonal images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
block attributes 532
and queries 1300
finding drawing objects by 1248
linking data to drawing objects in
maps 532
linking to drawing objects in
maps 1067
variables 1549
Block Mapping dialog box 1701
block names
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
finding drawing objects by 1244
block queries 1296
and property queries 1296
in preview mode 1296
BLOCKNAME variable 1546
blocks 225, 428, 532, 761, 764, 1067,
1296
adjusting for map distortion 225
altering name with queries 1261
and property alteration 1296
exploding when saving back from
maps 761
for drawing layers 660
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 428
linking to data for maps 532
linking to records
automatically 1067
options 225
querying 1300
redefining on save back 764
saving to source drawings from
maps 761
scaling for drawing layer
themes 1176
specifying color 1285
specifying for digitized nodes 138
theming for drawing layers 1176
units 225
BMP files
inserting with Raster Extension 455
boundaries 756, 941, 945, 955, 963, 978
breaking drawing objects at 941
changing for polygons in maps 963
displaying for polygons 978
inner and outer for polygons 955
query location 1241
trimming objects at 945
using to save drawing objects 756
Boundary Break command 941
boxes
Responsible Party Editor (ISO
Metadata) dialog box 1776
Break Objects at Boundary dialog
box 1666
breaking 941
drawing objects at boundaries 941
brightness
for drawing layers 660
Browse/Search dialog box 1800
Buffer Warning dialog box 1560
bufferfence boundary for query
location 1241
buffers
and topology 1347
creating (video) 1302
for drawing objects 1347
for features 1308
for geospatial features 1306
overlapping (video) 1302
using to select features (video) 1302
using with location queries
(video) 1302, 1306
warnings 1306
buffers (video) 37
BULGE variable 1546
Bulk Copy
alternatives to 617
and Autodesk SDF 617
2086 | Index
and coordinate systems 617
and geometry issues 625626
and SHP files 617
and SQL Server Spatial 617
copying data from one feature source
to another 621
copying foreign schemas 621
data types 623
ignoring errors 1744
log files 626
overview 617
video 616617
widening conversion 623
Bulk Copy (video) 43
Bulk Copy dialog box 1744
Bursa/Wolfe conversion method 94
buying data 62
C
caching 722
calculated fields
video 1125, 1132
calculated properties
and joined data 519
creating 1133
calibration
and digitizing maps 136
options when digitizing 133
CALS images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Canadian National Transformation 112
cancelling check out for features 698
Cartesian coordinate system 143
adjusting for distortion in maps 225
and digitizing 133
categories 97, 101
for coordinate systems 97, 101
for queries 182
cells (in database) 1056
editing in Data View 1056
CENTER variable 1546
central meridian 143
Centroid Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1952
CENTROID variable 1546
centroids 430, 836, 839, 937
creating for closed polylines 950
creating for polygon topology 836
creating for polygons 433, 887,
950, 977
creating if missing 839
importing to in AutoCAD Map
3D 430
moving data to 430, 887
moving label point 937
removing duplicates 839
CG4 images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Change Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1835
Change Feature Layer Properties activity
for workflows 2030
Change Feature Layer Symbol activity
for workflows 2031
Change Group Properties activity
for workflows 2033
check out features
automatically 696
checking in
features (video) 693
checking in features 694
checking out
features (video) 695, 701
checking out features 696, 698
and automatic update 698
and locking 696
and working offline 696
cancelling 698
circles 776
boundary for query location 1241
converting to 2D polylines during
Drawing Cleanup 776
converting to arcs during Drawing
Cleanup 776
Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) dialog
box 1777
Citation Information Editor 1759
Civil 3D 543, 545
bringing data into AutoCAD Map
3D 545
Index | 2087
bringing data into AutoCAD Map 3D
(video) 9, 43
exporting data to SHP 545
objects supported by AutoCAD Map
3D 543
video 543
classified DWG 988989
Classified Property List dialog box (object
classification) 1782
CLASSIFY command 990
Classify dialog box (object
classification) 1782
Classify Objects dialog box 1783
classifying objects 988989, 993
cleanup 767, 770, 773, 776, 779, 781
783, 785, 788, 791, 794, 796,
799, 801, 803, 806, 808, 810,
814815, 819, 838
actions 788
anchoring objects 770
apparent intersection 803
breaking crossing objects 799, 838
correcting errors automatically 783
correcting errors interactively 785
correction methods 782
dangling objects 810
deleting duplicates 794
displaying markers 785
elevation for new objects 776
erasing short linear objects 796
extending undershoots 801
for topology 788
layers for new objects 776
line width for new objects 776
markers 779
order of actions 773
order of operations 788
overview 766
profiles 781
pseudo nodes 808
reviewing errors before
correcting 785
selecting actions 773, 791
selecting objects 770
simplifying objects 814
snapping clustered nodes 806
tolerance for 773
weeding 819
zero-length objects 815
Cleanup Methods dialog box page 1585
clip overlay 1309
closed polylines 433, 898
creating centroids for 433, 950, 977
creating from polygon topology 898
creating from polygons during
export 1458
clustered nodes 773, 779, 806
marking for cleanup 779
snapping 806
tolerance for deleting 773
COGO 10271028, 1032, 1034, 1036
1037, 1040, 1042, 10441045
angle and distance 1032
azimuth and distance 1042
bearing and distance 1034
bearing/bearing 1036
deflection and distance 1037
distance/distance 1040
entering commands 1028
input commands 1027
inverse report 1045
orthogonal/offset 1044
transparent commands 1027
Color Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1783
COLOR variable 1546
colors
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering using queries 1261
and styles 650
changing for blocks 1285
digitizing 138
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing layers 660
for lines 649
for surface themes 1205
in expressions 1552
list of 1552
setting feature default 1552
theming for drawing layers 1176
2088 | Index
using to modify thematic
objects 1261
Column dialog box 1676
Column Values dialog box 1678
columns (in database tables) 526, 1058
1059
for link templates in maps 526
formatting in Data View 1058
hiding or freezing in Data
View 1059
combining maps 158
comma-separated files
and user locale 1474
exporting from Data Table 1142,
1474
command line 87
inserting images 471
showing by default in geospatial and
drawing workspaces 87
commands 1519, 1533
blocked during refedit 1537
changed from previous
releases 1519
committing changes in the Data
View 1056
complete topology 920
complex linear objects 779, 814, 819
marking for cleanup 779
simplifying 814, 819
composite line styles 649
for drawing layers 662
Computer Aided Acquisition images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
conditional functions 1543
conditions 369
using to add drawing objects to
maps 369
conditions for queries (drawing
objects) 1237
block attribute conditions 1248
combining 1256
data conditions 1248
editing 1258
link data conditions 1248
location conditions 1241
object data conditions 1248
overview 1238
precedence 1256
property conditions 1244
SQL conditions 1253
Configure Data Source dialog box 1679
configuring
data sources 213
digitizers 132
conformal projections 143
Connect Data Source dialog box 1679
Connect To Data Store activity
for workflows 2034
connecting 314, 319, 324, 331, 333,
336, 338, 341, 344
compared to importing 15
data sources for drawings 215
to ArcSDE data sources for maps 319
to Autodesk SDF data sources for
maps 338
to Microsoft Access data for
maps 344
to MySQL data in maps 333
to ODBC data for maps 344
to Oracle data sources for maps 314
to PostGIS data sources for
maps 341
to SHP files for maps 336
to SQL Server data for maps 324
to SQLite data sources for maps 331
to WFS data 348
using Data Connect (video) 3, 9, 13
connection pooling 88
constraints
in schemas (video) 43
setting in schemas 601, 612
setting in schemas (video) 599
Contact Information Editor 1763
continuous distances 1159
base option 1159
contour layers
video 1187
contour lines 799, 814, 1073, 1189
and Drawing Cleanup 799
deleting 1191
digitizing 1073
editing 1191
Index | 2089
overview 1189
simplifying with Drawing
Cleanup 814
video 1189
control points for digitizing 1073
conversion functions 1544
convert
DWG data 1405
to other format 1405
Convert DWG To... 1405
Convert Object Data to Database Links
dialog box 1680
converting 381, 534, 776, 898, 971
current map to DWG (video) 628
data from one format to
another 617
drawing objects during Drawing
Cleanup 776
drawings from other formats 381
elevation during Drawing
Cleanup 776
files from other programs 381
geospatial features to DWG
format 381
layers during Drawing Cleanup 776
line width during Drawing
Cleanup 776
maps to DGN 1438
maps to GML 1430
maps to MapInfo 1432
maps to MapInfo TAB 1434
maps to MicroStation Design 1438
maps to other formats 1408, 1421
maps to SDF 1416
maps to Shape Multiclass 1445
maps to SHP 1428
maps to SQLite 1448
maps to Vector Markup
Language 1450
maps to VML 1450
object data to database tables 534
overview 1405
polygons to polylines during
export 1458
polygons to polylines in AutoCAD
Map 3D 898
polylines from 3D to 2D during
Drawing Cleanup 776
polylines to polygons 971
coordinate conversion 424
during export 1405
during import 424
coordinate geometry 1006, 10271028,
1032, 1034, 10361037, 1040,
1042, 10441045
angle and distance 1032
azimuth and distance 1042
bearing and distance 1034
bearing/bearing 1036
commands 1148
creating survey points using
coordinate geometry 1006
deflection and distance 1037
displaying information for lines and
arcs 1161
distance/distance 1040
inverse report 1045
measuring 1154
options 234, 1154
orthogonal/offset 1044
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog
box 1917
Coordinate System Translation dialog
box 1703
coordinate systems 92, 9495, 9798,
101, 103104, 109110, 112113,
143, 146, 231, 308, 953
and Bulk Copy 617
and feature sources in maps 308
assigning to current drawing 147
assigning to source drawings 146
Australia and New Zealand 109
basing on datum 92
basing on ellipsoid 92
categories 97, 101
changes to Australian 110
converting when adding data 311
correcting when adding data 311
datum shift issues for North American
users 112
defining 92
defining a datum 94
2090 | Index
defining an ellipsoid 95
deleting 98
digitizing points 953
files 113
for current drawing (video) 143
for source drawings 143
GDC files 104
geodetic 149
grid data catalog (GDC) files 103
104
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1744
latitude and longitude 92
measuring geodetic distance 1153
modifying 98
options 225, 231
overriding with Bulk Copy 621
overview 143
removing from drawings 150, 1296
selecting 590
specifying for export 1405
tracking coordinates 1150
transformation options 231
transforming for a drawing 152
video 11
viewing for source drawing 151
coordinate tracker
specifying options 232
coordinate transformation 146
options 231
coordinate transformation (video) 143
coordinates 451, 953, 1148
changing format for 1150
digitizing 953
measuring 1148
specifying for raster images 451
tracking 1148, 1150
Copy Scale dialog box 1624
copying
data from one feature source to
another 621
display layers 639
correcting topology 920
Coverages 381, 394, 1419
export defaults 269
exporting to 1419
importing 381, 394
Create A Calculation 1133
Create a Join dialog box 1603
Create Buffer dialog box 1559
Create Buffer Layer activity
for workflows 2036
Create Centroids dialog box 1801
Create Closed Polylines dialog box
(drawing topology) 1953
Create Data Store dialog box 1605, 1747
Create Map Book dialog box 1827
Create Metadata Template dialog
box 1758
Create Network Topology Create New
Nodes dialog box 1955
Create Network Topology Select Links
dialog box 1956
Create Network Topology Select Nodes
dialog box 1957
Create Node Topology Select Nodes dialog
box 1959
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Centroids dialog box 1960
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Nodes dialog box 1961
Create Polygon Topology Select Centoids
dialog box 1963
Create Polygon Topology Select Links
dialog box 1964
Create Polygon Topology Select Nodes
dialog box 1966
Create Polygon Topology Set Error Markers
dialog box 1967
Create Polygons From Topology dialog
box 1823
Create Surface dialog box 1895
Create Topology Select Topology dialog
box 1969
Create Topology Warning dialog
box 1971
creating 9495, 97, 687689, 691, 825,
827, 831, 836, 960, 988
classified drawing objects 988
coordinate system categories 97
datums 94
ellipsoids 95
feature classes in schemas 598
Index | 2091
features (video) 684, 686, 691
geospatial features 687
linestring features 691
map books 1390
maps 298
metadata 1486
multilinestring features 691
multipoint features 688
multipolygon features 689
network topology 831, 836
node topology 827
point features 688
polygon features 689
polygons in maps 960
properties in schemas 598
query indexes 1294
schemas 598
themes for feature layers 1168
topology 825
workflows 281
crossing linear objects 779, 799, 838
breaking 799, 838
marking for cleanup 779
customizing 8485, 225, 229, 269, 764
.ini files 264
AutoCAD Map 3D 84, 216217, 249
automatically highlighting linked
objects 1227
coordinate system 231
coordinate transformation 225
data sources 225, 236, 243
Data View 238
digitizing 138
drawing origin 169
drawing settings 225
export 269
import 269
log files 229
map books 1394
mapexport.ini 269
mapimport.ini 269
multi-user settings 227
overview 216217
queries 245
save back settings 764
saving options 249
system settings 229
Task Pane 221
workspaces for AutoCAD Map
3D 85
D
dangling objects 773, 779, 810
and Drawing Cleanup 810
marking for cleanup 779
tolerance for deleting 773
data 209, 426, 434435, 507, 523, 827,
831, 836, 914, 1048, 1056, 1064,
10661067, 1069, 1083, 1085
altering drawing objects based
on 1267
analyzing 1121
and maps 291
attaching data sources 209
attaching multiple records to drawing
objects 1066
attaching object data to drawing
objects 1064
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 1067
attaching to objects 209
attaching while digitizing 138,
1083, 1085
configuring data sources 213
converting 1405
copying from one feature source to
another 621
displaying as text 435
editing external data in Data
View 1056
editing object data 1069
exporting 1405
external data 209
external data for drawing
objects 1048
finding drawing objects by 1248
finding for features 1212
finding patterns 1121
for network topology 831
for node topology 827
for polygon topology 836
2092 | Index
highlighting in Data Table 1139
importing 426, 434
joining to features 507
linking to drawing objects in
maps 523
migrating 617
modifying object data tables 202
round-trip from DWG and
back 1467
samples included with AutoCAD Map
3D 62
saving changes in Data View 1056
viewing for topology 914
viewing with Data View 1048
data access 540541
extending capabilities 540541
data attributes
for properties in Schema
Editor 1739
Data Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1836
data conditions for queries 1248
editing 1258
Data Connect
accessing feature sources with 308
adding images 440
creating feature sources 588, 592
data formats
converting between 617
data properties
in Schema Editor 1739
Data Source Name (DSN) 209, 213, 344
creating in Windows XP 344
data sources 209, 215, 243, 312, 316,
330, 332, 335, 337, 340, 342,
346, 392, 410
ArcSDE 316
attaching 209
Autodesk SDF 337
combining in maps 13
configuring automatically 213
configuring coordinate
geometry 234
configuring manually 213
connecting 215
creating 588, 592
customizing 243
default database versions 243
detaching 209
disconnecting 215
for maps 291
importing ArcSDE data 392
importing Oracle data 410
Microsoft Access 342
MySQL 332
ODBC 342
options 225, 236, 243
Oracle 312
PostGIS 340
PostgreSQL 340
SDF 337
SHP 335
SQLite 330
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 209
WFS 346
data stores
copying data between (video) 616
617
creating 588, 592
creating for database providers 586
creating for file-based providers 586
creating for SQLite 565
creating with SQL Server Spatial 561
definition 551
deleting 593
overview 551
Data Table 701, 712, 1127
auto-hiding 1127
calculated properties 1133
dialog box 1613
displaying 1127
editing features with 701, 712
exporting data from 1473
exporting from 1142, 1474
filtering 1212
finding data 1212
highlighting areas in map 1137
highlighting rows of data 1139
making transparent 1127
overview 1125
removing highlighting in map 1138
Index | 2093
searching feature data 1207, 1210
selecting data 1212
selecting data with 1131
selecting features 1207, 1210
video 1130, 1136, 1138, 11401141
videos 1125
viewing data for all feature
classes 1135
viewing feature class data 1135
viewing joined data 1135
viewing non-spatial data 1136
zooming to a view 1141
Data to Attach dialog box 1616
data types
supported by OSGeo FDO Provider for
SQL Server Spatial 562
when converting with Bulk
Copy 623
Data View 526527, 529, 539, 1048,
1053, 1056, 1222
adding records 1056
and database queries 1053
Auto Commit 1056
changing alignment 1058
changing colors 1058
changing columns 1058
changing fonts 1058
checking records linked to drawing
objects 1222
copying data to Windows
Clipboard 1056
customizing 10581059
deleting records 1056
editing records 1056, 1225
filtering 1231
filtering by location 1234
filtering records 1222
finding records 1222, 1225
hiding and showing columns 1059
highlighting objects in
drawings 1222, 1227
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1229
link template paths 539
link templates 526
linked tables 527
linking records to drawing
objects 529
navigating 1048
opening tables 1053
options 238
overview 1048
printing 1222
printing data from 1473
printing tables 1475
saving changes to data 1056
spatial filter 1234
SQL queries 1230
SQL queries for drawing data 1231
viewing external data for drawing
objects 1147
database link index 1294
database queries 1053
database tables 213, 215, 434435, 523,
526527, 529, 532, 539, 1048,
1053, 1056, 1071
adding records 1056
altering drawing objects based
on 1270
and Data View 1048
attaching 213
attaching to drawing 209
connecting 215
converting object data to 1071
default version 243
deleting records 1056
disconnecting 215
displaying as text 435
editing in Data View 1056
filtering 1231
filtering by location 1234
finding records 1222
highlighting linked drawing
objects 1227
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1229
importing links 434
key columns for link templates 526
link template paths 539
link templates for maps 526
linked 527
2094 | Index
linking records to drawing
objects 529
linking to drawing objects in
maps 523, 532
navigating in Data View 1048
opening in Data View 1053
opening linked 527
printing from Data View 1475
querying 1053
saving changes 1056
searching 1225
SQL conditions 1253
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 209, 213
viewing external data 1048
database views
accessing from native schemas 603
exposing in AutoCAD Map 3D 603
mapping to feature classes 603, 605
databases 209, 215, 291, 523, 529, 532
534, 1048, 1056, 1085
adding records 1056
altering drawing objects based
on 1270
and Data View 1048
and maps 291
and object data 533
attaching 209
attaching to maps 206
configuring 213
connecting 215
converting from object data 534
default version 243
deleting records 1056
detaching 209
disconnecting 215
editing in Data View 1056
filtering 1231
filtering by location 1234
finding records 1222
highlighting linked drawing
objects 1227
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1229
linking records to drawing
objects 529
linking to drawing objects in
maps 523, 532
linking to while digitizing 1085
navigating in Data View 1048
opening queries for 206
saving changes 1056
searching 1225
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 584585
SQL conditions 1253
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 209, 213
viewing for drawing objects 1048
viewing in Data View 1147
viewing properties 206
DATAVIEWHEADERANDFOOTER
command 1476
DATAVIEWPAGESSETUP
command 1476
DATAVIEWPRINT command 1477
datum (for coordinate system) 94, 99,
110
changes to Australian 110
defining 94
deleting 99
geodetic coordinate systems 149
modifying 99
shift issues 112
DB files
attaching to drawing 209
setting default version 243
dBASE
attaching database to drawing 209
setting default version 243
DBF files
attaching to drawing 209
setting default version 243
DDIST 1040
defaults
database versions 209
for object classes 125
for object data fields 201
Define Annotation Template dialog
box 1572
Define Hatch dialog box 1625
Index | 2095
Define Link Template dialog box 1682
1683
Define New Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1838
Define New Object Data Field dialog
box 1578
Define New Object Data Table dialog
box 1803
Define Object Classification dialog
box 1785
Define Object Data dialog box 1805
Define Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1838
Define Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1843
Define Text dialog box 1626
Define Text dialog box (drawing
queries) 1846
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog
box 1918
defining 92, 9495
coordinate systems 92
datums 94
ellipsoids 95
object classes 119120
definition file 995
for object classes 995
Delete Topology dialog box 1971
deleting 889, 899, 1056
annotation from maps 1108
coordinate system assignment 150
coordinate system categories 101
coordinate systems 98
data stores 593
database links 537
database records 1056
datums 99
ellipsoids 100
feature classes in schemas 614
feature sources 593
joins 515
links (linear objects) from
topology 889
map book tiles 1403
map books 1403
nodes from topology 889
object data tables 202
points (nodes) from topology 889
polygons from topology 889
properties from schemas (video) 610
properties in schemas 614
schemas in feature sources 614
topology 899, 926
DEM (Digital Elevation Model) 437,
440441
adding to maps 437
adding with Data Connect 440, 442
density 451
specifying for raster images 451
Describe Directory activity
for workflows 2025
descriptions
for object data fields 201
for source drawings 166
Design File Input Settings dialog box
(Import) 1734
Design File Output Settings dialog box
(Export) 1736
Design Web Format
publishing map books to 1401
publishing maps to 1365, 1369,
1372
Detach Data Source dialog box 1684
detaching 751
data sources 209
drawings from maps 751
deviation
and calibration 133
DGN files 381, 405, 408, 1435
changing export default to imperial
units 269
changing the default seed file 269
exporting 1405
exporting to 1435
importing 381, 405, 408
seed file for 1435
units of measurement 269
dialog boxes 1559
Add Class Property (Export) 1726
Alter Block Insertion 1622
Alter Line Format 1622
Alter Linetype 1623
2096 | Index
Alter Lineweight 1624
Alter Plotstyle 1624
Alternate Font (drawing
queries) 1835
Annotation Delete 1569
Annotation Refresh 1569
Annotation Text 1570
Annotation Update 1571
Assign Global Coordinate
System 1598
Associate Database Versions 1675
Attach Object Class Definition
File 1781
Attach Object Data 1793
Attach/Detach Object Data 1794
Attribute Data 1699
Attribute Domain Values
Editor 1773
Attribute Editor (metadata) 1756
AutoCAD Map Confirmation (drawing
topology) 19501951
AutoCAD Map Messages 1799
AutoCAD Map Options 1908
Autodesk MapGuide Export 1580
Autodesk MapGuide Import 1582
Block Mapping 1701
Break Objects at Boundary 1666
Browse/Search 1800
Buffer Warning 1560
Bulk Copy 1744
Centroid Objects (drawing
topology) 1952
Change Category (drawing
queries) 1835
Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) 1777
Citation Information Editor 1759
Classified Property List (object
classification) 1782
Classify (object classification) 1782
Classify Objects 1783
Cleanup Methods page 1585
Color Range Editor (object
classification) 1783
Column 1676
Column Values 1678
Configure Data Source 1679
Connect Data Source 1679
Contact Information Editor 1763
Convert Object Data to Database
Links 1680
Coordinate Geometry Setup 1917
Coordinate System Translation 1703
Copy Scale 1624
Create a Join 1603
Create Buffer 1559
Create Centroids 1801
Create Closed Polylines (drawing
topology) 1953
Create Data Store 1605, 1747
Create Map Book 1827
Create Metadata Template 1758
Create Network Topology Create New
Nodes 1955
Create Network Topology Select
Links 1956
Create Network Topology Select
Nodes 1957
Create Node Topology Select
Nodes 1959
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Centroids 1960
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Nodes 1961
Create Polygon Topology Select
Centoids 1963
Create Polygon Topology Select
Links 1964
Create Polygon Topology Select
Nodes 1966
Create Polygon Topology Set Error
Markers 1967
Create Polygons From
Topology 1823
Create Topology Select
Topology 1969
Create Topology Warning 1971
Data Condition (drawing
queries) 1836
Data Expression 1802
Data to Attach 1616
Define Annotation Template 1572
Define Hatch 1625
Index | 2097
Define Link Template 16821683
Define New Category (drawing
queries) 1838
Define New Object Data Field 1578
Define New Object Data Table 1803
Define Object Classification 1785
Define Object Data 1805
Define Query (drawing
queries) 1838
Define Range Table (drawing
queries) 1843
Define Text 1626
Define Text (drawing queries) 1846
Define/Modify Drawing Set 1918
Delete Topology 1971
Design File Input Settings
(Import) 1734
Design File Output Settings
(Export) 1736
Detach Data Source 1684
Digitize Setup 1617
Disconnect Data Source 1684
Drawing Cleanup 1585, 15871588,
1591, 1595
Drawing Cleanup Errors 1593
Drawing Maintenance 1920
Drawing Set Display Filter 1922
Drawing Settings 1923
Drawing Statistics 1926
Drive Alias Administration 1928
Edit a Join 1603
Edit Direct Resistance (drawing
topology) 1972
Edit Direction (drawing
topology) 1973
Edit Expression 1574
Edit Object Data 1795
Edit Reverse Resistance (drawing
topology) 1973
EditText (text layers) 1628
Error Markers page 1587
Export 1704
Export Metadata 1757
Expression 1541, 1807
External Database Mapping 1732
Feature Class Mapping
(Export) 1727
Feature Editing Options 1929
Feature Information 1606
Feature Source Administration 1606
Feature Source Connection 1607
Feature Source Scope 1606
Generate Contour 1561
Generate Data Links 1807
Generate Object Data Index 1931
Hatch Options (drawing
queries) 1847
Header/Footer 1685
Hillshade Settings 1562
Horizontal Coordinate System
Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata) 1768
Identify Map Book Layout
Placeholders 1829
Image Correlation (Insert Image
command) 1873
Image Information 1875
Image Management (Insert Image
command) 1875
Image Management Layout (Insert
Image command) 1877
Image Select (Insert Image
command) 1877
Import 1711
Import Data Mapping 1732
Import Metadata Options 1757
Import Old Theme 1628
Index Maintenance 1931
Insert Annotation 1574
Insert Image 1878
Layer Mapping (Import FDO) 1719
Layer Range Editor (object
classification) 1789
Linetype Range Editor (object
classification) 1789
Lineweight Range Editor (obejct
classification) 1790
Link Objects (drawing
topology) 1975
Link Template Data Entry 1619
2098 | Index
Link Template Key Column
Entry 1620
Link Template Properties 1686
Load Internal Query (drawing
queries) 1848
Load Topology 1976
Load Topology Conflict 1976
Load Topology From Source
Drawing 1978
Location Condition (drawing
queries) 1849
Manage Joins 1607
Map Book Properties 1830, 1832
Metadata Editor 1754
Metadata Options 1756
Metadata Viewer 1751
Network Topology Analysis Choose
Locations 1978
Network Topology Analysis
Output 1980
Network Topology Analysis Resistance
and Direction 1982
Network Topology Analysis Select
Method 1983
New Annotation Template
Name 1576
New Layer 1579, 1810
New Object Class Definition
File 1790
New Property (object
classification) 1791
New Range Table (drawing
queries) 1852
New Scale 1629
Node Objects (drawing
topology) 1985, 1987
Object Class Attribute
Mapping 1710
Object Data Mapping 1732
Output Report Options (drawing
queries) 1852
Overlay Analysis, Set Output And
Settings 1565
Overlay Analysis, Source and Overlay
Type 1563
Page Setup 1686
Plotstyle Range Editor (object
classification) 1792
Point Mapping 1733
Polygon Fill Properties 1824
Property Condition (drawing
queries) 1855
Property Value Mapping
(Export) 1728
Publish to Autodesk
MapGuide 1577
Publish to MapGuide Results 1379
Publish To MapGuide results 1578
Query Library Administration
(drawing queries) 1858
Quick View Drawings 2013
Range of Values 1629
Raster Extension Options (Insert
Image command) 1879
Remove Object Data Index 1933
Rename Category (drawing
queries) 1860
Rename Range Table (drawing
queries) 1860
Rename Table 1797
Rename Topology 1988
Responsible Party Editor (ISO
Metadata) 1776
Run Library Query (drawing
queries) 1861
Save Current Query (drawing
queries) 1862
Save Features 1608
Save Objects to Source
Drawings 1887
Save Version 1750
Schema Editor 1739
Select Actions page 1588
Select Alias 1933
Select Block 1810
Select Coordinate System 1609
Select Data 1811
Select Data (drawing topology) 1989
Select Database Version 1688
Select Display Element 1631
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate
System 1599
Index | 2099
Select Drawings to Attach 1811
Select Existing Link Template 1689
Select Feature Classes (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Images (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Layers (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Link Template 1690
Select Link Template Key 1797
Select Link Templates 1690
Select Objects page 1595
Select Plot Set to Convert 1831
Select Query 1691
Select Table 1691
Select Topologies (Display
Manager) 1631
Set Property Alterations (drawing
queries) 1863
Sort (records) 1692
Source Drawing Scope 1633
Spatial Data Organization
Editor 1764
Split and Merge Rules 1669
SQL Condition History (drawing
queries) 1866
SQL Expression (link
templates) 1814
SQL Link Condition (drawing
queries) 1866
Standard Order Process Editor 1774
Style Band 1633
Style Label 1634
Style Line 1636
Style Point 1637
Style Polygon 1639
Style Text Layer 1640
Table Filter 1693
Table Filter History 1696
Table Properties 1696
Thematic Mapping 1642
Thematic Values 1644
Theme (features) 1645
Tile Properties 1831
Time Period Information
Editor 1761
Topology Buffer Create New Centroids
and Nodes 1990
Topology Buffer New
Topology 1991
Topology Buffer Set Buffer
Distance 1992
Topology Dissolve Create New
Centroids and Nodes 1994
Topology Dissolve Create
Nodes 1995
Topology Dissolve New
Topology 1996
Topology Dissolve Object Data 1997
Topology Dissolve Set
Parameter 1998
Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis
Type 1999
Topology Overlay Analysis Create
New Centroids and
Nodes 2002
Topology Overlay Analysis Create
Nodes 2003
Topology Overlay Analysis Output
Attributes 2006
Topology Overlay Analysis
OutputTopology 2004
Topology Overlay Analysis Select
Overlay Topology 2007
Topology Query 2008
Topology Query Result 2010
Topology Selection 2011
Topology Statistics 2011
Transparency Color (Insert Image
command) 1883
Trim Objects at Boundary 1672
Type SQL Condition (drawing
queries) 1870
Undefined Alias Referenced 1934
User Administration 1934
User Credentials 1610
User Information 1936
User Login 1937
using wild-card characters 1537
View Query Statement 1610
Who Has It Information 1889
Workflow Designer 2022
2100 | Index
Workflow Designer activity
input 2025
Workflow Designer parameters 2025
Zoom Drawing Extents 2014
Zoom Scale 1697
DIB images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Digital Elevation Model 437, 440441
adding to maps 437
sample images 63
digital elevation models 1188
adding contour lines 1190
analyzing 1188
applying hillshading 1200
applying vertical exaggeration 1200
changing theme colors 1205
draping vector data on 1193
Digital Terrain Elevation Data 437, 440
441
adding to maps 437
digital terrain modeling 1009
DigitalGlobe 62
Digitize Setup dialog box 1617
digitizing 131132, 767, 841, 1073,
10801081, 1083, 1085
and alignment 1073
and external data 1085
and LABELPOINT 1081
and object data 1080, 1083
and registering maps 136
and rotation 1081
and sliver polygons 841
calibration options 133
configuration 132
correcting errors 767
drawings 1073
layers 138
maps 131, 1073
options 138
overview 1073
setting up 130
tablet 130131
transformation types 133
using coordinates 953
width 138
with MAPDIGITIZE 10801081
dimensions 761
saving to source drawings from
maps 761
direct resistance 849
for links in network topology 849
direction 845, 863
changing for links in topology 873
editing for topology 863
for links in network topology 845
directories
drive aliases for 161
for external queries 229
Disconnect Data Source dialog box 1684
Display Feature Attributes activity
for workflows 2037
Display Manager 350, 352, 440
adding drawing objects to maps 352
adding images to maps 440
and drawing layers 350
and Properties palette 1124
combining styles 662
controlling display order 637
creating styles for drawing
layers 660
creating themes 1168
displaying 221, 635
draw order 300
exporting layers 1470
groups 300
layers 300
legend 1117
Map Base layer 352
modifying styles for drawing
layers 663
multiple display maps 639
overview 634
refreshing 635
repairing broken connections 350
saving layers 1470
scale threshold 668
sharing maps 1460
Style Library 665666
styles for drawing objects 652
themes for drawing layers 1181
theumbnails for drawing
layers 1181
Index | 2101
thumbnails for layers 300
updating 635
using 641, 654
using layers in MapGuide
2007 1470
video 634, 636
display maps
and map files 7
display order 300
controlling in the Display
Manager 637
for layers in maps 300
display styles
combining 662
controlling display order 637
for drawing layers 660
legend 1117
modifying 663
modifying for scale thresholds 668
referencing 666
saving 665
viewing at all scales 670
displaying 474
angle information 1160
COGO information for lines and
arcs 1161
map draw order 637
raster image information 474
save back extents 170
source drawing information 172
dissolving 808
pseudo nodes 808
topology 1343
distances
adding 1157
and buffers 1308
best route 1330
buffering a topology by 1347
continuous 1159
finding shortest 1326
flood trace 1334
horizontal between points 1162
measuring geodetic distance 1153
distortion in maps 934
distribution methods 1165
equal 1165
individual values 1165
Jenks (natural breaks) 1165
quantile 1165
standard deviation 1165
dot variables 937, 1264, 1546
LABELPT 937
Draw mode queries 12871288, 1291
draw order 302
and Display Manager 300
changing for map layers 302
in Display Manager 637
video 634, 636
Drawing Cleanup 766767, 770, 773,
776, 779, 781783, 785, 788,
791, 794, 796, 799, 801, 803,
806, 808, 810, 814815, 819, 838
839
actions 788
anchoring objects 770
and sliver polygons 839
apparent intersection 803
Automatic mode 783
breaking crossing objects 799, 838
correcting errors automatically 783
correcting errors interactively 785
correction methods 782
dangling objects 810
deleting duplicates 794
displaying markers 785
elevation for new objects 776
erasing short linear objects 796
extending undershoots 801
for topology 788
Interactive mode 785
layers for new objects 776
line width for new objects 776
markers 779
order of actions 773
order of operations 788
overview 766
profiles 781
pseudo nodes 808
reviewing errors before
correcting 785
selecting actions 773, 791
selecting objects 770
2102 | Index
simplifying objects 814
snapping clustered nodes 806
tolerance for 773
using 767
video 727, 766
weeding 819
zero-length objects 815
Drawing Cleanup dialog box 1585,
15871588, 1591, 1595
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box 1593
drawing data 681
combining with feature data for
maps 291
overview of editing in AutoCAD Map
3D 681
drawing layers 350, 419
creating themes for 1178, 1181
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 419
styles for 657
styling with annotation 1186
styling with hatch patterns 1184
styling with ramps 1183
styling with text height 1185
themes for 1176
vs. AutoCAD layers 350
Drawing Maintenance dialog box 1920
drawing objects 291, 352, 356357, 359,
362, 364, 367, 369, 381, 523,
529, 531532, 534, 537, 692,
717, 727, 730, 733, 735736,
738, 746, 748, 751752, 754, 756
759, 764, 770, 776, 794, 796,
799, 801, 803, 806, 808, 810,
814815, 819, 836, 838, 852,
892, 911, 931, 937, 939, 941,
945, 947, 988989, 991, 993,
1064, 10661067, 1069, 1073,
1083, 1085
adding distances 1157
adding hatch during a query 1283
adding text with queries 1278
adding to a map (video) 9
adding to Display Manager
layers 356
adding to maps by attribute
data 364
adding to maps by location 359
adding to maps by object class 357
adding to maps by property 362
adding to maps by topology 367
adding to maps with multiple
conditions 369
adding to save sets 751
aligning 931
altering based on queries 1267,
1270
altering with queries 1261, 1263,
1265
anchoring for cleanup 770
and labels 937
and maps 291, 350
apparent intersection 803
associative hatch 247
attaching external data while
digitizing 1085
attaching multiple records to 1066
attaching object data
automatically 1067
attaching object data
manually 1064
attaching object data while
digitizing 1083
attributes in Properties palette 1146
breaking at a boundary edge 941,
943
breaking crossing objects 799, 838
centroids and topology 836
classified properties 991
classifying 120, 988989
combining query conditions 1256
combining with geospatial
features 9
converting during Drawing
Cleanup 776
converting to features in AutoCAD
Map 3D 692
counting 172
creating using object classes 988
dangling objects 810
database links 1222
Index | 2103
defining expressions for 1275
defining label point 1280
deleting duplicates 794
digitizing 1073
Display Manager styles for 654
displaying thematically 1261
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
editing for topology 852
editing in map source drawings 748
editing in maps 947
editing in source drawings 163
editing links to external data 537
editing object class data 991
editing object data 1069
editing query conditions 1258
entering geometry when
creating 1027
erasing on save back 764
erasing short linear objects 796
executing queries 1287
exporting 1405
exporting Oracle 14621463
exporting styled (video) 1453
exporting to ArcSDE 1423
exporting to DGN 1438
exporting to GML (Geography Markup
Language) 1430
exporting to MapInfo 1432
exporting to MapInfo TAB 1434
exporting to MicroStation
Design 1438
exporting to other file
formats 1408, 1421
exporting to SDF 1416
exporting to SDF (video) 1405
exporting to SDF or Oracle and back
again 1467
exporting to Shape Multiclass 1445
exporting to SHP 1428
exporting to SQLite 1448
exporting to Vector Markup
Language 1450
exporting to VML 1450
extending undershoots 801
filling 939
filtering records by location 1234
filtering with SQL queries 1231
finding 1219
finding by location 1241
finding by property 1244
finding with queries 1237
grips in maps 947
highlighting in Data View 1227
highlighting linked records in Data
View 1229
highlighting locked objects 752
highlighting topology associated
with 911
importing 381
including in maps 352
linking to data using object
data 531
linking to external data for
maps 534
linking to external data in maps 532
linking to external database
records 523, 529
listing for queries 1477
locking 751
locking in AutoCAD Map 3D 730,
733
merging with existing features 717
moving 931
multi-user editing (video) 727, 730,
734, 738
object properties and layer
properties 1242
overview for AutoCAD Map 3D 727
overview of editing in AutoCAD Map
3D 681
previewing in map source
drawings 746
querying 1237
querying (video) 1235, 1238, 1242,
1245, 1249
Quick Select 12191220
releasing locks in AutoCAD Map
3D 736
removing from save set 759
retrieving by groups 1296
retrieving during queries 1288
retrieving hatched areas 1296
2104 | Index
rotating 931
saving as DXF 1459
saving in AutoCAD Map 3D 738
saving to new drawings 758
saving to source drawings 754, 756
saving to the current map 757
scaling 931
selecting 1219
selecting by properties 1219
selecting for cleanup 770
selecting with object
classification 993
sharing 730
simplifying complex objects 814
snapping clustered nodes 806
SQL conditions 1249
SQL queries 1230
styles for 652
styling on import 385
text insertion point 937
transforming 931
trimming at a boundary edge 945
updating for topology 892
using topologies (video) 1319
viewing information for 1144
viewing locked objects 752
viewing locks in AutoCAD Map
3D 735
weeding 819
zero-length objects 815
drawing origin
modifying for source drawings 169
drawing set 83, 154
activating drawings 160
adding drawings 158
creating 156
modifying settings 164
options 225
overview 154
privileges 83
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog
box 1922
Drawing Statistics dialog box 1926
drawing workspace 84
showing command line by
default 87
drawings 83, 154, 157158, 169, 209,
215, 381, 730, 735, 738, 745
746, 748, 751, 754, 756758,
761, 767, 822, 934, 1073
activating 160
activating automatically 225
adding queries 180
aligning 154, 169
and xrefs 157
assigning coordinate system 146
147
attaching databases to 206
attaching to maps 158
attributes in Properties Palette 1146
backup files 764
cleaning 767
connecting data sources 215
coordinate systems 152
correcting errors 767
creating from existing drawings 738
creating with saved drawing
objects 758
descriptions 166
detaching 751
detaching data sources 209
digitizing 1073
disconnecting data sources 215
distorting 934
distortion 225
dragging onto the Task Pane 158
drawing set 154
drive aliases for 161
editing in AutoCAD Map 3D 748
global coordinate systems 146147,
152
importing 381
indexing 1294
nested 157, 160
offset for source drawings 169
opening source drawings 163
options 225, 249
previewing 746
problems saving 761
querying 1237
Quick View 746
Index | 2105
removing coordinate system
assignment 150, 1296
retrieving objects from 1237
rotating source drawings 169
rubber sheeting 934
save back extents 170, 756
saving 738, 751, 1460
saving objects to 757
saving queried objects to 754, 756
scaling source drawings 169
settings 164
sharing 161, 730, 751
stretching 934
tiled 756
tiles 154
topology 822
transforming 169
transforming coordinate system 152
updating 754, 756
user privileges for 83
viewing coordinate systems 151
viewing information 172
viewing locks 735
zooming to extents in AutoCAD Map
3D 745
Drive Alias Administration dialog
box 1928
drive aliases 161, 1928
creating 161
driver options 397, 1424, 1443
DGN version 7 and 8 405, 1435
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 394, 1419
MapInfo MIF/MID files 1431
setting default 236
SHP files 397, 1424
SHP Multiclass 1443
when importing 381
DSN (Data Source Name) 209, 213, 344
creating in Windows XP 344
DTED (Digital Terrain Elevation Data
) 437, 440441
adding to maps 437
DTM (digital terrain modeling) 1009
DTM layer 1009
duplicate objects 773, 779, 794
deleting 794
marking for cleanup 779
tolerance for deleting 773
DWF
publish map book as (video) 46
publishing map books to
(video) 1360, 1366, 1381,
1389
publishing map books to
(video)) 1400
DWF (Design Web Format)
and attribute data 1367
publishing map books to 1401
publishing maps to 1365, 1369,
1372
setting publishing options 1367
DWG
exporting current map to
(video) 1405
exporting maps to (video) 1459
exporting styled objects (video) 628
exporting to GIS (video) 628
DWG files
querying (video) 352, 358
DWG format
converting data to 377378, 381
exporting maps to 1460
moving data to geospatial
formats 629
DWGNAME variable 1546
DWK files 227, 730, 735
DXF files 391
exporting drawing data to 1459
importing 391
E
EANGLE variable 1546
ECW images
adding with Data Connect 443444
edges 941, 945, 951, 978
breaking drawing objects at 941
displaying for polygons 978
matching for maps 951
trimming objects at 945
Edit a Join dialog box 1603
2106 | Index
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box (drawing
topology) 1972
Edit Direction dialog box (drawing
topology) 1973
Edit Expression dialog box 1574
Edit Object Data dialog box 1795
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
(drawing topology) 1973
Edit Text Layer dialog box (text
layers) 1628
editing 83, 712, 748, 852, 860, 863, 867,
894, 947, 963, 991, 1056, 1069
attached drawings 748
coordinate system categories 101
coordinate systems 98
data in Data View 1056
datums 99
drawing descriptions 166
drawing objects in map source
drawings 748
drawing objects in maps using
grips 947
ellipsoids 100
external data in Data View 1056
feature classes in schemas 612
features (video) 684, 701
features with Data Table 712
linear objects in topology 863
map books 1397
metadata 1499
nodes in topology 860, 863
object class data 991
object data 1069
object data tables 202
partial topology 894
polygons in maps 963
polygons in topology 867
privileges 83
properties in schemas 612
property alteration definition 1286
queried objects 1261
queries 184
query conditions 1258
schemas in feature sources 612
source drawings 748
topology 852, 894
EED expressions 1551
EED index 1294
EHANDLE variable 1546
electric symbols
samples 69
elements (Display Manager) 352, 356,
359, 362, 364, 367, 369
adding drawing objects to maps by
attribute data 364
adding drawing objects to maps by
property 362
adding drawing objects to maps by
topology 367
bringing in drawing objects 352
combining styles 662
controlling display order 637
creating styles 660
drawing objects by location 359
grouping drawing objects by
layer 356
modifying styles 663
scale thresholds 668
using multiple conditions to add
drawing objects to
maps 369
viewing styles at all scales 670
elevation 776
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
coloring surfaces by (video) 37
displaying with contour lines 1189
1190
finding drawing objects by 1244
for objects created during Drawing
Cleanup 776
purchasing data 72
ELEVATION variable 1546
ellipsoid 95, 100
defining 95
deleting 100
modifying 100
emergency response symbols
samples 69
Enhanced Compressed Wavelet images
adding with Data Connect 443444
Index | 2107
enlarged map sections 943
EOO files
exporting 396
importing 396
EPSG numbers
and SRID numbers 590
EPSG values
for Web Map Service (WMS) 447
equal distribution 1165
equality functions 1543
ER Mapper images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
erase overlay 1309
erasing
saved back drawing objects 758
Error Markers dialog box page 1587
errors 767, 782783, 785
cleaning up 767
correcting automatically 783
correcting in maps 927
correcting interactively 785
correction methods in Drawing
Cleanup 782
displaying cleanup markers 785
resolving for Publish to
MapGuide 1379
reviewing during Drawing
Cleanup 785
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 381, 394, 1419
export defaults 269
exporting 1405
exporting to 1419
importing 381, 394
ESRI ArcSDE
exporting to 1422
importing from 392
schemas 579
working with data 581
ESRI data 540
ESRI grid files 440441, 1188
adding contour lines 1190
adding to maps 437
adding with Data Connect 440, 442
analyzing 1188
ESRI Personal Database 540
accessing 541
ESRI ShapeFiles 336, 14431444
adding feature data to maps 336
converting to drawing objects 335
exporting 1405
exporting multiclass 1444
exporting to 1424
importing 397, 399
multiclass 1443
provider capabilities for maps 335
EWIDTH variable 1546
exaggeration 1199
applying to surfaces 1200
Excel
attaching spreadsheet to
drawing 209
setting default version 243
setting up database ranges 578
explicit nodes 1339
Export dialog box 1704
Export Metadata dialog box 1757
export settings 269
exporting 269, 396, 401, 1429
.gml files 1429
.ini file for 269
and profiles 263
Arc/INFO Coverages 396
Arc/INFO Coverages and line
segments 269
ArcView ShapeFiles as folder 269
attribute data 1405, 1473
coordinate conversion 1405
Coverages 396
current map to DWG (video) 1459
drawing objects in maps 1408,
1416, 1421, 1430, 1432,
1434, 1438, 1448, 1450
drawing objectsto Shape
Multiclass 1445
drawing objectsto SHP 1428
DWG to GIS (video) 628
DWG to SDF or Oracle and
back 1467
DXF files 1459
EOO files 396
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 396
external data 1405
2108 | Index
feature data from Data Table
(video) 1141
from Data Table 1142, 1474
Geography Markup Language 1429
GML 1429
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 1405
layers (video) 1469
layers as SDF (video) 1469
layers from Display Manager 1470
layers to SDF (video) 1376, 1405
line segmentation 269
MapGuide SDF 2 files 1417
MapInfo MIF/MID 401, 1405
MapInfo TAB 1405
maps to DWG format 1460
metadata 1513
MicroStation DGN 1405
MicroStation DGN (in imperial
units) 269
multiple layers to a single feature
class 1442
mutliple feature classes 1440
object data 1405
object properties 269
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain
GML v2 1429
overview 1405
polygons 1458
procedure overview 1408, 1421
queries 180
saving settings for 1405
schemas 608
SDF 2 files 1417
SQLite 1405
styled drawing objects (video) 1453
styled DWG objects (video) 628
supported formats 1412
supported object types 1411
text as points 1405
text enclosed in a polyline 1455
to ArcSDE 1423
to DGN 1438
to GML (Geography Markup
Language) 1430
to image files 1465
to MapInfo 1432
to MapInfo TAB 1434
to MicroStation Design 1438
to Oracle 14621463
to SDF 1416
to SQLite 1448
to Vector Markup Language 1450
to VML 1450
toSQLite 1447
VML 1449
VML (Vector Markup
Language) 1405
vs. saving as SDF 1469
Expression dialog box 1807
expression evaluator 1541
expressions
arithmetic 1541
AutoLISP 1551
block attributes 1549
conditional functions 1543
conversion 1544
defining for drawing objects 1275
dot variables 1546
EED 1551
entity 1545
equality 1543
object classification 1551
object data variables 1549
pi 1545
range 1545
reusing in queries 1541
SQL 1549
string-handling 1543
style 1545
symbol-handling 1544
tips on using 1553
using as labels 1093
using colors in 1552
using to select features 1130
variables 1546
extending 779, 801, 803
to apparent intersection 803
undershoots 779, 801
extents 745, 756
setting save back extents 170
using to save drawing objects 756
Index | 2109
zooming to for drawings 745
external data 209, 215, 364, 434, 523,
529, 532, 534, 537, 1048, 1056,
1071, 1085
adding drawing objects to maps
by 364
adding text to queried objects 1278
altering drawing objects based
on 1270
attaching 209
attaching while digitizing 138, 1085
committing changes in Data
View 1056
configuring 213
connecting 215
converting from object data 534
converting object data to 1071
database links 1222
detaching 209
disconnecting 215
editing in Data View 1056
exporting 1405
for drawing objects 1048
importing 434
lediting links 537
linking to drawing objects 532
linking to drawing objects in
maps 523, 534
linking to objects manually 529
options 236, 238, 243
printing using report queries 1477
saving changes 1056
SQL conditions 1253
using to dissolve topology 1343
viewing for drawing objects 1144
viewing in Data View 1147
External Database Mapping dialog
box 1732
external queries
adding to library 180
default directory 229
extracting feature geometry 716
F
fade
for drawing layers 660
false origins 91
FDO
overview of schemas 554
FDO and non-FDO-enabled schemas 561
FDO developer help 59
FDO features 308, 507, 512, 686687,
698
and automatic update 698
and joins 507
and maps 303
bringing into maps 308
creating and editing 686
creating joins 512
creating new 687
defining scale for layers 644
labeling 1093
loading styles 652
managing 551
overview 551
overview of editing 681
provider capabilities 305
saving styles 652
styles for 641
FDO providers 312, 316, 330, 332, 335,
337, 340, 342, 346, 540541
adding 541
ArcSDE 316
Autodesk SDF 337
creating data stores 588
deleting data stores 593
Microsoft Access 342
MySQL 332
ODBC 342
Oracle 312
overview 547
PostGIS 340
PostgreSQL 340
Schema Editor 596
SDF 337
SHP 335
SQLite 330
WFS 346
2110 | Index
FDO-enabled data stores
and Bulk Copy 617
FDOATTACH command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOCONFIGURE command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1533
FDODETACH command
(discontinued) 1533
FDODISASSOCIATE command
(discontinued) 1533
FDODISCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOEDITSETADD command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOEDITSETREMOVE command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOEDITSETSAVE command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOEDITSETSHOW command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOLOCKS command 1606
FDOLOCKS command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOSCHEMA command
(discontinued) 1533
FDOSHOWOWNER command 1606
FdoUserManager utility 584585
Feature Class Mapping dialog box
(Export) 1727
feature classes
appending features to (video) 43
appending to schemas (video) 594,
610
creating in schemas 598
definition 551
deleting in schemas 614
editing in schemas 612
exporting multiple 1440
exporting multiple layers to 1442
mapping to database views 603, 605
metadata for 1486
overview 551
querying (video) 24
setting physical configuration 612
settings in Schema Editor 1739
undoing schema changes 615
feature data 686, 725
and maps 291
combining with drawing data for
maps 291
creating and editing 686
exporting to DWG format 1460
understanding 681
versioning 725
feature editing options
setting 240
Feature Editing Options dialog box 1929
Feature Information dialog box 1606
feature layers
repairing broken connections 350
Feature Overlay 1316
Feature Source Administration dialog
box 1606
Feature Source Connection dialog
box 1607
feature source layers
overview 551
Feature Source Scope dialog box 1606
feature sources 291, 305, 308, 312, 316,
330, 332, 335, 337, 340, 342,
346, 392, 410, 700, 725
accessing in maps 308
and coordinate systems in maps 308
and locking 305
and maps 291
and persistent locking 305
and schema editing 305
and versioning 305
ArcSDE 316
Autodesk SDF 337
connecting to (video) 305
copying from one to another 621
copying from one to another
(video) 616617
creating 588, 592
deleting 593
importing ArcSDE data 392
importing Oracle data 410
Microsoft Access 342
MySQL 332
Index | 2111
ODBC 342
Oracle 312
overview 19, 305
PostGIS 340
PostgreSQL 340
removing highlighting in map 1138
Schema Editor 596
SDF 337
setting up 583
SHP 335
SQLite 330
updating automatically 700
versioning 723, 725
viewing data for all 1135
WFS 346
FEATUREDEF command 122, 124, 126,
1785
features 308, 314, 319, 324, 331, 333,
336, 338, 341, 344, 507, 512,
681, 684, 686689, 691692, 694,
696, 698, 700701, 705, 712, 716
717, 722, 725, 1008
accessing WFS data 348
adding (video) 9
adding ArcSDE data to maps 319
adding Autodesk SDF data to
maps 338
adding Microsoft Access data to
maps 344
adding MySQL data to maps 333
adding ODBC data to maps 344
adding Oracle data to maps 314
adding PostGIS data to maps 341
adding properties 512
adding SHP data to maps 336
adding SQL Server data to maps 324
adding SQLite data to maps 331
and automatic update 698
and generated IDs 686
and joined properties 507
and joins 507
and locking 684
and maps 303
and multiuser environment 684
and persistent locking 698
and revision numbers 698
appending features (video) 31
appending to feature classes
(video) 43
bringing into maps 308
buffering 1308
cancelling check out 698
checking in 694
checking in (video) 693, 721
checking out 696
checking out (video) 721
checking out automatically 696
checking out(video) 695, 701
copying from one feature source to
another 621
create from DWG objects (video) 19
creating (video) 684, 686, 691
creating and editing 686
creating from geometry 692
creating geospatial features from
survey points 1008
creating joins 512
creating linestring 691
creating multilinestring 691
creating multipoint 688
creating multipolygont 689
creating new 687
creating point 688
creating polygon 689
creating themes for 1168
creation methods 686
defining scale for layers 644
editing (video) 19, 684, 701, 721
editing commands 705
editing offline 722
editing with AutoCAD
commands 715716
editing with Data Table 712
editing with Properties palette 718
filtering 1210
filtering by conditions 1217
finding 1207, 1210
finding and selecting 1209
finding in Data Table 1212
highlighting in map 1137
joining attributes to (video) 37
labeling 651, 1093
2112 | Index
labeling (video) 185186, 190, 194,
640, 645, 648, 1091, 1096,
1098
loading styles 652
merging 710
overview 551
overview of editing 681
provider capabilities in maps 305
saving styles 652
searching for 1214
selecting 1207
selecting (video) 1130
selecting checked out 694
selecting in Data Table 1131, 1212
selecting with queries 1130
splitting 708
splitting (video) 706
styles for 641
styling (video) 34
theming (video) 37
updating automatically 700
updating geometry 717
versioning 723, 725
viewing attribute data 1125
viewing attributes (video) 27
viewing data for 1135
features classes
appending features to (video) 31
Federal Geospatial Data Committee
standard for metadata 1481
fence boundary for query location 1241
FGDC CSDGM Standard
downloading 1481
for metadata 1481
fields (in records) 426, 434435, 1071
adding to tables 202
creating for object data 201
displaying as text 435
exporting with objects 1405
finding drawing objects by 1248
importing 426, 434
modifying for object data 202
SQL conditions 1253
when converting object data to
database tables 1071
file formats
for exporting 1405
for exporting from AutoCAD Map
3D 1412
for importing data to maps 378
for raster files outside Data
Connect 455
SDF 2 files 1417
SIF files 1417
file sharing 730
file-based data sources 291
and maps 291
files 381
for query results 1477
grid data catalog (GDC) 103104
importing 381
fill 939, 960, 963, 978
adding to closed polylines 939
adding to queried drawing
objects 1283
changing default for polygons in
maps 963
changing for polygons in maps 963
default for polygons in maps 978
for areas 650
gradients for polygons in maps 960,
978
specifying for polygons in maps 960
filtering
features using conditions 1217
geospatial features when adding to
maps 310
filters
conditions for features in
maps 1217
spatial (Data View) 1234
finding
drawing objects 1219
features 1207
fixed screen area
for digitizing 132
FLC images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
FLI images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Index | 2113
floating screen area
for digitizing 132
flood trace analysis 1334
and direct resistance 849
and direction 845
fly through for surfaces 1196
folders
drive aliases for 161
fonts
setting for export and import 269
For Each activity
for workflows 2025
formats
for importing data to maps 378
supported for map export 1412
FoxPro
attaching database to drawing 209
setting default version 243
frame color 451
specifying for raster images 451
FSD files 1513
functions 1541
arithmetic 1541
conditional 1543
conversion 1544
entity 1545
equality 1543
pi 1545
range 1545
string-handling functions 1543
style 1545
symbol-handling 1544
G
GDAL provider 540
GDC files 104
Generate Contour dialog box 1561
Generate Data Links dialog box 1807
Generate Object Data Index dialog
box 1931
geodata 62
geodata portal 72
geodatabase 540541
accessing ESRI data 541
geodetic coordinate systems 590
determining 149
geodetic distance
measuring 1153
geographic analysis
video 1319
geography data types 562
Geography Markup Language
(GML) 381, 412413, 608, 1429
exporting 1405, 1429
exporting as schema 608
exporting to 1429
importing 381, 412413
importing as schema 608
geometry 692, 705, 716717, 1027
and Bulk Copy 625626
creating features from 692
editing for features 705, 716
entering when creating objects 1027
properties in Schema Editor 1739
updating for features 717
geometry data types 562
geometry types
supported by OSGeo FDO Provider for
SQL Server Spatial 562
georeferencing 455
and publishing to DWF 1365, 1369,
13711372
and raster images 455
with rubber sheeting (video) 932
geospatial data
understanding hierarchy 551
geospatial feature layers
repairing broken connections 350
geospatial features 687, 698, 1137
buffering 1308
combining with maps 9
converting to DWG format 377
378, 381
creating new 687
creating themes for 1168
defining scale for layers 644
definition 551
exporting data for 1474
filtering 1210
filtering using conditions 1217
2114 | Index
filtering when adding to maps 310
finding 1207, 1210
finding and selecting 1209
finding in Data Table 1212
labeling 1093
loading styles 652
managing 551
overview 551
overview of providers 547
overview of schemas 554
saving styles 652
searching for 1214
selecting 1207
selecting in Data Table 1212
selecting with queries 1130
styles for 641
viewing attribute data 1125
viewing data for 1135
geospatial workspace 84
showing command line by
default 87
GeoSpot images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
GeoTIFF images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
GIS features 308, 507, 512, 681, 686
687, 698
and automatic update 698
and joins 507
and maps 303
bringing into maps 308
creating and editing 686
creating joins 512
creating new 687
overview of editing 681
provider capabilities 305
global coordinate systems 91
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 381, 412, 608, 1429
exporting 1429
exporting as schema 608
exporting maps 1405
exporting to 1429
importing 381, 412413
importing as schema 608
GP4 images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
GPS data 342
and ODBC 342
grade 1162
displaying 1162
graticule 1362
reference system 1362
grid
Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) 1362
reference grid 1362
reference system 1362
grid data catalog (GDC) files 103105,
108109
Australia 109
New Zealand 109
setting up for US 108
United States 105
grips in maps 947
grouping layers in maps 301
groups 301, 764
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
and Display Manager 300
changing for layers 301
finding drawing objects by 1244
querying 1300
removing on save back 764
unused 764
Groups button 301
H
hatch 761, 939, 978
adding to closed polylines 939
adding to queried drawing
objects 1283
and queries 247
associative 247
boundaries when saving 761
default for polygons 978
displaying for polygons 978
for drawing layers 660
querying 1300
Index | 2115
saving to source drawings from
maps 761
scaling for drawing layer
themes 1176
theming for drawing layers 1176,
1184
Hatch Options dialog box (drawing
queries) 1847
Header/Footer dialog box 1685
height
altering with queries 1261
and theming 1202
theming surfaces for 1203
HEIGHT variable 1546
help 61
printing 61
hiding
Data Table 1127
Data View columns 1059
map books 1398
map status bar 87
Task Pane 221
Highlight Features activity
for workflows 2038
highlighting 752, 911
drawing objects linked to external
data 1227
features in maps 1137
locked objects 752
records linked to drawing
objects 1229
removing from features in
maps 1138
rows in Data Table 1139
topology associated with
objects 911
highlighting features
video 1136, 1138
Hillshade Settings dialog box 1562
hillshading
applying to surfaces 1200
video 1199
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition
Editor (FGDC Metadata) dialog
box 1768
horizontal distance 1162
displaying 1162
hyperlinks 389
exporting to SDF 2 files 1417
importing from SDF 1 or 2 files 389
I
Identify Map Book Layout Placeholders
dialog box 1829
identity overlay 1309
If Else activities
for workflows 2025
IG4 images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
IGS images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
IKONOS images
adding to maps 437
Image Correlation dialog box (Insert Image
command) 1873
image formats
exporting drawing data to 1465
Image Information dialog box 1875
Image Insertion dialog box 451
Image Management dialog box (Insert
Image command) 1875
Image Management Layout dialog box
(Insert Image command) 1877
Image Select dialog box (Insert Image
command) 1877
Image Systems Gray Scale images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Image Systems Group 4 images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
ImageConnect 62
images
adding to a layer (video) 437
adding with Data Connect 440
inserting (video) 437, 459
inserting at command line 471
inserting with Raster Extension 455
imperial units
for exported MicroStation DGN
files 269
implicit nodes 1339
2116 | Index
Import Data Mapping dialog box 1732
Import dialog box 1711
Import Metadata Options dialog
box 1757
Import Old Theme dialog box 1628
importing 269, 377378, 381, 388389,
391392, 396, 399, 401, 404,
408, 410, 413415, 417419, 421,
424, 426, 428, 434435
.ddf files (SDTS format) 414
.gml files 413
.ini file for 269
.shp files 399
.tab files 404
.vpf files 417
and assigning object classes 421
and coordinate conversion 424
and profiles 263
and styling drawing objects 385
Arc/INFO Coverages 381, 396
ArcSDE data 392
ArcView ShapeFiles 381
ArcView ShapeFiles as folder 269
areas 418
attribute data 426, 428, 434435
AutoCAD layers into AutoCAD Map
3D 419
Autodesk MapGuide files 389
blocks 428
compared to connecting 15
data 377, 435
data types for AutoCAD Map
3D 426, 434
databases 209
DGN files 408
driver options 381
DXF files 391
EOO files 396
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 396
ESRI ShapeFiles 399
external data 381, 426, 434435
file-based 269
folder-based 269
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 381, 413
layers into AutoCAD Map 3D 419
limiting area 418
MapGuide files 389
MapInfo MIF/MID as folder 269
MapInfo MIF/MID files 381, 401
MapInfo TAB 381, 404
metadata 1511
MicroStation DGN 381, 408
MIF/MID files as folder 269
object data 426, 434435
object properties 269
Oracle data 410
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain
GML v2 381, 413
overview 381
plot map sets for map books 1392
point data as text 428
preparation for maps 378
queries 180
schemas 608
schemas (video) 43, 606
SDF 1 or 2 files 389
SDF 1, 2, or 3 388
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer
Standard) 381, 414
ShapeFiles 399
SHP files 399
SHP files as folder 269
Spatial Data Transfer Standard 414
spatial filters for 418
SQLite 381, 415
SQLite files 414
supported formats for maps 378
TAB files 404
TAB files as folder 269
Vector Product Format as folder 269
Vector Product Format files 417
VPF (Vector Product Format) 381,
417
VPF as folder 269
vs. accessing data for maps 378
incomplete topology 920
Index Maintenance dialog box 1931
indexes
creating for drawings 1294
individual values distribution 1165
Index | 2117
information 474, 916
for raster images 474
printing using report queries 1477,
1479
specifying type for tables 201
viewing for raster images 474
viewing for source drawings 172
viewing for topology 916
inheritance (base or abstract classes)
setting in schemas 612
Insert Annotation dialog box 1574
insert errors
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1744
Insert Image dialog box 1878
insertion point 451, 937
for labels 937
for text in maps 937
specifying for raster images (Data
Connect) 451
insets for maps 943
installing
sample data 63
integers 426, 434
importing 426, 434
Intermap 62
internal queries
executing 178, 1288
international coordinate systems 143
intersect overlay 1309
intersecting lines 1160
displaying acute angles 1160
displaying obtuse angles 1160
invalid geometry
and SQL Server Spatial 326
islands 836, 920, 955, 963, 971, 974
adding to polygons in maps 963
converting to polygons 974
creating from grouped polylines 971
creating in polygons 955
for topology 836, 898, 920
rebalancing in maps 963
when exporting polygons 1458
within boundaries 836
ISO 19139 metadata 1483
J
Jenks distribution 1165
Jet provider for Microsoft Access 209
JFIF images
adding to maps 437
inserting with Raster Extension 455
join keys 509
joins 507
about 507, 509
advanced techniques 509
and calculated properties 519
and non-matching data 509
creating 512
deleting 515
editing joined data 517
exporting data 520
managing 515
modifying 515
publishing data 520
removing 515
saving 520
sharing data 520
video 37, 507, 509, 514
viewing in Data Table 1135
Joint Photographic Experts Group
images 437
adding with Data Connect 440
JPEG images 437
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
JPEG2 images 437
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
justification
setting for export and import 269
K
key columns for link templates 526
keyview viewport
for map books 1385
KIF files
exporting 1417
2118 | Index
L
L74 images
adding to maps 437
label point 937, 1280
changing 937
defining 937
defining for drawing objects 1280
specifying while digitizing 138
labeling
features 651
features (video) 640, 645, 648
LABELPT variable 937, 1546
labels 937
adding to features (video) 1089,
1091
allowing to obscure points 1097
for contour lines 1191
for features (video) 185186, 190,
194, 1096, 1098
insertion point 937
on features 1093
on points 1099
Lambert Conformal Conic
projection 143
land cover map 840
land use map 840
LANDSAT FAST images
adding to maps 437
latitude
when digitizing 133
layer CS code
for Web Map Service (WMS) 447
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import
FDO) 1719
Layer Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1789
LAYER variable 1546
layers 300301, 350, 357, 359, 362, 419,
421, 764
adding drawing objects to by
property 362
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
and map styles 300
and scale ranges (video) 648
assigning object classes during
import 421
changing draw order 302
changing groups for 301
changing thumbnail 302
changing thumbnail styles in Display
Manager 301
copying 639
creating for drawing objects in
maps 356
defining scale for 644
display order in maps 300
draw order 637
drawing vs. AutoCAD layers 350
exporting 1405
exporting to a feature class 1442
exporting to SDF (video) 1376,
1405, 1469
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing objects in maps by
location 359
for drawing objects in maps by object
class 357
for styled drawing objects 652
grouping in maps 301
importing 381
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 419
managing (video) 634, 636
redefining on save back 764
saving to .layer files (video) 1405,
1469
specifying for digitized objects 138
updating in Display Manager 635
using wild-card characters 1537
viewing data for 1135
layout
for map books 1388
LDF files
loading 652
saving 652
legends
adding to maps (video) 1089
creating 11171118, 1181
samples 62, 71
Index | 2119
viewport for map books 1385
legends (video) 185186, 190, 194
legends(video) 1117
length
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
finding drawing objects by 1244
LENGTH variable 1546
levels
importing 381
library for queries 174, 178
LiDAR
ASCII format 1012
data
bringing in 374
filtering 1016
importing 374
managing 1015
overview 1012
supported versions 374
file types 1012
LAS file format 1012
LIDAR data 342
and ODBC 342
line features
theming 1174
line width 776
assigning for drawing layer
themes 1176
for objects created during Drawing
Cleanup 776
linear objects 767, 773, 779, 794, 796,
799, 801, 803, 806, 808, 814
815, 819, 831, 838, 847, 850,
863, 873, 875, 880, 889, 892,
1073
adding to topology 880
breaking crossing 799, 838
changing direction in topology 873
changing resistance in topology 875
cleaning up 767
dangling objects 810
deleting duplicates 794
digitizing 1073
dissolving 1343
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
editing 863
erasing short 796
extending to apparent
intersection 803
extending undershoots 801
marking for cleanup 779
removing from topology 889
segmentation during export 269
simplifying 814
snapping clustered nodes 806
specifying direction 847, 850
tolerance for deleting duplicates 773
topology 831
updating for topology 892
weeding 819
zero-length objects 815
lines 808, 815, 1032, 1034, 1036, 1038,
1040, 1042, 1044
digitizing 138
displaying COGO information
for 1161
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
scale ranges for 649
segmentation during export 269
specifying with angle and
distance 1032
specifying with azimuth and
distance 1042
specifying with bearing and
distance 1034
specifying with deflection and
distance 1038
specifying with distance and
offset 1044
specifying with two bearings 1036
specifying with two distances 1040
styles for 649, 662
zero-length 815
linestring features 691
creating 691
linestyles 1176
theming for drawing layers 1176
Linetype Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1789
LINETYPE variable 1546
2120 | Index
linetypes
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing layers 660
setting for export and import 269
specifying for digitized objects 138
theming for drawing layers 1176
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box (obejct
classification) 1790
lineweights 381
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing layers 660
for imported lines 381
setting for export and import 269
theming for drawing layers 1176
link data 434
altering drawing objects based
on 1267
importing 434
link index 1294
Link Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1975
Link Template Data Entry dialog
box 1619
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog
box 1620
Link Template Properties dialog
box 1686
link templates 526527, 539
about 525
creating for maps 526
deleting 539
editing paths 539
opening linked database tables 527
linking 507, 512, 523, 529, 531532,
534, 537, 1064, 1085
data sources to drawings 209
data to drawing objects 1064
drawing objects to object data 531
records to drawing objects 529
records to drawing objects in
maps 523, 532, 534, 537
records to drawing objects while
digitizing 1085
using joins 507, 512
links (database) 435, 1085
altering drawing objects based
on 1270
creating while digitizing 1085
Data View 1222
deleting 537
displaying as text 435
editing 537
filtering by location 1234
importing 434
overview 1222
to external data 523, 529, 532, 534
links (linear objects) 796, 799, 801, 803,
806, 808, 814815, 838, 847,
850, 863, 873, 875, 880, 889, 892
adding to topology 880
breaking crossing 799, 838
changing direction in topology 873
changing resistance in topology 875
cleaning up 767
dangling objects 810
deleting 794
digitizing 1073
dissolving 1343
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
editing 863
erasing short 796
extending to apparent
intersection 803
extending undershoots 801
marking for cleanup 779
removing from topology 889
simplifying 814
snapping clustered nodes 806
specifying direction 847, 850
topology 831
updating for topology 892
weeding 819
zero-length objects 815
List Current Connections activity
for workflows 2039
List Feature Classes activity
for workflows 2039
List Feature Layer Properties activity
for workflows 2040
Index | 2121
lists
for schema property values 599
LizardTech images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Load Internal Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1848
Load Layer File activity
for workflows 2041
Load Topology Conflict dialog box 1976
Load Topology dialog box 1976
Load Topology From Source Drawing
dialog box 1978
loading 899
feature styles 652
queries 184
schemas 608
topology 899, 907
location 359, 539
adding drawing objects to maps
by 359
for source drawings 169
link templates 539
Location Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1849
location conditions for queries 1241
editing 1258
location index 1294
location queries
using with buffers (video) 1302,
1306
locking 305, 684, 696, 730, 733, 735
736, 751, 759, 764
and working offline 696
drawing objects 730, 733, 751
drawings 730
enabling in schema 612
features 684
for feature sources in maps 305
in Schema Editor 1739
removing locks from drawing
objects 759
removing locks on save back 764
viewing lock owners 735
viewing locked drawing objects 752
LOCKSTAT variable 1546
log files
for Bulk Copy 626
for MapGuide publishing 1379
options 229
logging in 142
forcing 227
long transactions 323
and SQL Server 323
in Schema Editor 1739
versioning 612
longitude
when digitizing 133
M
M dimensions 562, 610
Manage Joins dialog box 1607
managing
FDO data 551
joins 515
versions 723
versions of data 725
Map Base (Display Manager) 352
Map Book Properties dialog box 1830,
1832
map books
adjacent arrows 1385
and sheet sets 1381
creating 1390
creating (video) 1360
creating from saved settings 1395
deleting 1403
editing 1397
editing settings 1396
hiding 1398
importing plot map sets 1392
keyview viewport 1385
layout placeholders 1388
legend viewport 1385
MBS files 1394
overview 1381, 1383
printing 1402
publishing (video) 1381, 1389
publishing to DWF 1401
publishing to DWF (video) 46,
1360, 1366
2122 | Index
publishing to DWF with
attributes 1400
publishing to plotter 1402
rebuilding 1391
renaming 1402
saving settings 1394
setting up templates 13851386
sheet templates 1386
video 46, 1381
viewing 13971398
viewing layouts 1400
viewing properties 1399
viewing tiles 1399
Map Books
sample templates 63, 66
map files
and data stores 3
and display maps 7
map status bar
hiding 87
MAP2SDF command 1419
MAPABOUT command 1905
MAPAL command 881
MAPAN command 879
MAPANBUFFER command 1348
MAPANDISSOLVE command 1345
MAPANNINSERT command 1570, 1574
MAPANNTEMPLATE command 1572
MAPANOVERLAY command 1341
MAPANTOPONET command 1322,
1328, 1332, 1336
MAPATTACHDB command 210
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT command 1905
MAPBL command 864
MAPBOOKCREATE command 1383,
1391
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
command 1384, 13941395
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
command 1384, 1394, 1396
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
command 1384, 1392
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
command 1384, 1389
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
command 1385, 1393, 1395
MAPBREAK command 942, 1666
MAPBROWSELINK command 1054
MAPBROWSETBL command 1054, 1691
MAPBUFFER command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPCLEAN command 769
MAPCLPLINE command 1953
MAPCOGO command 1651
MAPCONFIGDB command 214, 1679
MAPCONNECTDB command 215, 1679
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING
command 89
MAPCREATE command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
command 887, 977
MAPDATAGRID command 712, 1613
MAPDEFINELT command 527, 1682
1683, 1690
MAPDELETELINKS command 538, 1690
MAPDELETELT command 540
MAPDETACHDB command 210, 1684
MAPDIGISETUP command 131, 139,
1617
MAPDIGITIZE command 138, 1080
1082, 1615
setting options 138
MAPDISCONNECTDB command 215,
1684
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY command 1621
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER command 1621
MAPDISSOLVE command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPDIST command 1153, 1597
MAPDL command 890
MAPDN command 890
MAPDOCKWSPACE command 1906
MAPDP command 890
MAPDVP command 868
MAPDWFOPTIONS command 1368
MAPEDITDIR command 848, 874, 1939,
1973
MAPEDITRES1 command 1940, 1972
MAPEDITRES2 command 1940, 1973
MAPEDITSETAUTO command 1906
Index | 2123
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
command 89
MAPEXPORT command 261, 264, 1410,
1457, 1704
mapexport.ini 269
customizing 264
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE
command 1302, 1306, 1309
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS
command 1906
MAPFEATUREMERGE command 1651
MAPFEATURESPLIT command 1652
MAPFIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
command 1653
MAPFLOOD command
(discontinued) 1533
mapforeignfileproperties.ini
customizing 264
mapgisoverlay 1309
MapGuide 389
exporting to version 6.5 and
earlier 14171418
importing from 389
publishing to (video) 3, 1376
publishing to current Enterprise
version 1378
publishing to Open Source
version 1378
resolving publishing errors 1379
video 46, 1360
viewing log file after
publishing 1379
MAPIFRAME command 492, 495, 1873
MAPIINFO command 475, 1875
MAPIINSERT command 459, 1873, 1878
MAPIL command 881
MAPIMANAGE command 475, 478,
481, 1875, 1877
MAPIMPORT command 262, 264, 384,
387, 389, 394, 397, 400, 402,
404, 409, 412414, 416417, 1711
mapimport.ini 269
customizing 264
MAPIN command 879
MapInfo MIF/MID 381, 400, 1431
exporting 1405
exporting to 1431
importing 381, 400
importing as folder 269
MapInfo TAB 381, 402, 404
exporting 1405
exporting to 1433
importing 381, 402, 404
importing as folder 269
MAPIOPTIONS command 253, 1879
MAPJL command 865
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
command 1654
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT 705
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command 1655
MAPLINKADD command
(discontinued) 1533, 1941
MAPLINKDEL command
(discontinued) 1533, 1942
MAPLINKEDIT command 1943
MAPLINKMANAGER command 538
MAPLINKREV command
(discontinued) 1533, 1943
MAPLINKUPD command 892, 1944
MAPLOGIN command 142, 1937
MAPML command 865
MAPMN command 861
MAPMP command 868
MAPMPEDIT command 1818
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
command 1656
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
command 1658
MAPMULTILINESTRNGEDIT 705
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
command 1659
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT 705
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT command 1659
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
command 1660
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT 705
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
command 1662
MAPNODADD command
(discontinued) 1533, 1945
MAPNODDEL command
(discontinued) 1533, 1946
2124 | Index
MAPNODEDIT 1946
MAPNODINS command
(discontinued) 1533, 1947
MAPNODUPD command 892, 1948
MAPOD2ASE command 533534, 536,
1680, 1689
MAPOPTIONS command 88, 216218,
222, 226, 228, 230, 232, 237,
239, 244, 246, 249, 743, 765,
1908
MAPOVERLAY command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPPLOT command 1364
MAPPOINTCREATE command 1663
MAPPOLYADD command
(discontinued) 1533, 1948
MAPPOLYDEL command
(discontinued) 1533, 1949
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command 1663
MAPPOLYGONEDIT 705
MAPPOLYGONEDIT command 1665
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
command 972, 1817
MAPPOLYUPD command 892, 1950
MAPPROPSLT command 540, 1686
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
command 1379, 1381
MAPRL command 865, 874
MAPRUNDBQUERY command 1054,
1691
maps 147, 298, 300, 302, 308, 381, 746,
758, 767, 822, 852, 927, 932,
934, 941, 943, 951, 1073
adding GIS features 308
aligning 169
and data 291
and GIS features 303
and Quick View 746
annotating (video) 1089
assigning coordinate system 146
147
attaching drawings 154, 158
breaking drawing objects at
boundaries 941, 943
changing draw order for layers 302
changing thumbnail for layers 302
cleaning 767
contents of 3
converting to DWG (video) 628
coordinate system 143
creating 298
creating and editing overview 19
creating map books 1390
creating multiple display maps 639
creating with saved drawing
objects 758
digitizing 1073, 10801081
discontinuous edges 951
distorting 934, 951
distortion 225
draw order for layers 637
editing tools 927
editing topology 852
enlargements 943
exporting to DWG (video) 1459
exporting to DWG format 1460
importing data for 381
insets 943
irregular 951
joining at seams 951
layer display order 300
legends 1117
matching 934
matching edges 951
on web sites 46
options 216217
output formats 1360
overview 3
overview of map creation 296
overview of printing 1357
previewing 746
publishing 1360
publishing as web pages 1374
publishing in HTML format 1374
publishing overview 1357
publishing to Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 1378
publishing to MapGuide Open
Source 1378
publishing to plotter 1364
publshing to DWF format 1372
rebuilding map books 1391
Index | 2125
registering for digitizing 136
rubber sheeting 932, 934
sample data for AutoCAD Map
3D 62, 71
scale 169, 638
sections 169
sharing 46, 1357, 1460
styles 631
tiling 951
topology 822
transforming 169
transforming coordinate system 152
trimming drawing objects at
boundaries 945
MAPSDFIN command 390
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED command 994,
1779
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
command 994, 1780
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
command 995, 1780
MAPSHOWGEOM command 903, 912
MAPSHOWTOPO command 903, 912
MAPSTATUSBAR command 89
MAPTOPOADMIN command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPTOPOADMIN Delete
command 1950
MAPTOPOADMIN Rename
command 1951
MAPTOPOAUDIT command 904, 921
MAPTOPOCOMP command 904, 921
MAPTOPODEL command 906, 926
MAPTOPOEDIT command 1951
MAPTOPOEDIT command
(discontinued) 1533, 1974
MAPTOPOLOAD command 902, 908
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
command 975, 1823
MAPTOPOQUERY command 1354, 2008
MAPTOPORECR command 904, 921
MAPTOPOREN command 906, 925
MAPTOPOSTATS command 903, 916
MAPTRACE command
(discontinued) 1533
MAPTRACKCS command 1152
MAPTRIM command 946, 1672
MAPUSEMPOLYGON command 980,
1818
MAPUSERADMIN command 84, 1934
MAPVIEWLINK command 1054, 1797
MAPVIEWTBL command 1055
MAPWORKFLOWBATCHRUN
command 2021
MAPWORKFLOWOPEN command 2021
MAPWORKFLOWRUN command 2021
MAPWSACTION command 1536
MAPWSFOCUS command 1907
MAPWSPACE command 1908
MAPWSREFRESH command 1908
markers 785
for Drawing Cleanup 779, 785
matching 951
map edges 951
maximum speed for links and nodes 850
measuring 1148
continuous distances 1159
coordinate geometry 1154
coordinates 1148
distances 1157
geodetic distance 1153
Mentor coordinate systems 590
Mercator projection 143
merge rules
ignoring 708
merging
features 710
metadata
about 1481
adding records 1505, 1507
applying templates 1492
Attribute Domain Values
Editor 1773
auditing 1509
boxes
Responsible Party Editor
(ISO) 1776
Citation Editor (ISO) 1777
Citation Information Editor 1759
Contact Information Editor 1763
copying and pasting 1504
creating 1486
2126 | Index
creating templates 1492
deactivating templates 1495
default template 1494
deleting records 1505
editing 1499
exporting 1513
exporting templates 1496
free-form fields 15011502
Horizontal Coordinate System
Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata) 1768
importing 1511
importing templates 1492
ISO 19139 1483
previewing templates 1494
printing 1515
publishing 1515
record navigator 1507
removing templates 1497
renaming templates 1493
samples 63
setting options 14841485
setting options for 241
sharing 1510
Spatial Data Organization
Editor 1764
Standard Order Process Editor 1774
standards for 1481
stylesheets for 1489
templates 1490
Time Period Information
Editor 1761
updating automatically 1484
video 1481, 1486, 1498
viewing 1486
viewing a summary 1753
metadata (video) 30
Metadata Editor 1754
Metadata Options dialog box 1756
Metadata Viewer 1751
exporting data from 1473
importing stylesheets 1489
Summary tab 1753
MGRS 1362
Microsoft Access 342, 344
adding feature data to maps 344
provider capabilities for maps 342
Microsoft Excel
attaching spreadsheet to
drawing 209
setting default version 243
setting up database ranges 578
Microsoft Jet 4.0 provider 209
Microsoft Visual FoxPro
attaching database to drawing 209
setting default version 243
MicroStation DGN 381, 405, 408, 1435
changing export default to imperial
units 269
changing the default seed file 269
exporting 1405
exporting to 1435
importing 381, 405, 408
seed file for 1435
units of measurement 269
MIF/MID files 269, 381, 400, 1431
exporting 1405
exporting to 1431
importing 381, 400
importing as folder 269
migrating data
overview 617
MIL images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) 1362
model space
queries in 1235
modifying
coordinate system categories 101
coordinate systems 98
datums 99
ellipsoids 100
object data tables 202
monuments for digitizing 1073
motion path animation 1196
MPEDIT command (See
MAPMPEDIT) 1818
MPFILL command 968, 980
MPOLYGON command 962
MPSPLIT command 969, 1821
Index | 2127
MrSID images 437
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
MTD files 1513
multi-page DWF 1365
multi-polygon
and SHP files 572
multi-polygons
and SHP files 335, 397
creating 689
Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database
images 437
adding with Data Connect 440
multi-user editing
for drawing files (video) 727, 730,
734, 738
video 19
multilinestring features 691
creating 691
multiple features 1444
exporting from AutoCAD Map
3D 1444
multiple user options 216
multipoint features 688
creating 688
multipolygon features 689
creating 689
multiuser environment 684
and editing 684
locking drawings 730
options 227, 249
MySQL 332333
adding feature data to maps 333
provider capabilities for maps 332
schemas 567
working with data 569
N
naming
object data tables 201
naming restrictions 610
natural breaks distribution 1165
NAVTEQ 62
nested drawings 157
activating 160
network topologiy
video 829
network topology 829, 831, 847, 849
850, 873, 875, 1073
and object data 829
best route 1330, 1334
changing link direction 873
changing resistance 875
creating 831
creating (video) 727
digitizing objects for 1073
direct resistance 849
editing 852
overview 829
path trace analysis 845
shortest path 1326
specifying link direction 847, 850
testing integrity 1334
travel time 1326
video 822
Network Topology Analysis Choose
Locations dialog box 1978
Network Topology Analysis Output dialog
box 1980
Network Topology Analysis Resistance and
Direction dialog box 1982
Network Topology Analysis Select Method
dialog box 1983
New Annotation Template Name dialog
box 1576
New Layer dialog box 1579
New Object Class Definition File dialog
box 1790
New Property dialog box (object
classification) 1791
New Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1852
New Scale dialog box 1629
New Zealand grid data files 109
NEWDEF command 130, 1790
NITF images
adding to maps 437
Node Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1985, 1987
node topology 826827, 1073
and object data 826
2128 | Index
creating 827
digitizing objects for 1073
overview 826
nodes (Map Explorer)
displaying 221
nodes (topology) 138, 773, 779, 806,
808, 810, 814815, 827, 860,
863, 870, 875, 878, 889, 892,
953, 1073
adding 878
changing appearance 870
changing resistance in topology 875
clustered 806
creating 827
dangling objects 810
digitizing 138, 1073
digitizing by coordinates 953
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
dissolving psuedo nodes 779
editing 860
explicit 1339
implicit 1339
importing 428
marking for cleanup 779
pseudo 808
query location 1241
removing from topology 889
repositioning 863
simplifying lines 814
snapping clusters 779, 806
styling 870
tolerance for deleting clusters 773
updating for topology 892
weeding 814
zero-length objects 815
non-feature classes
in Schema Editor 1739
non-planar polygons 689, 704
non-spatial data
viewing in Data Table 1136
North American datum shift issues 112
north arrows
samples 62, 71
not-null
for schema property values 599
notes
adding to maps 1089
numbers
specifying type for tables 201
numeric ranges
for property queries 1244
for queries 1242
O
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog
box 1710
object classes 357, 421, 991, 995
adding drawing objects to maps
by 357
adding text to queried objects 1278
assigning during import 421
defining 119120, 123
defining range of values 125
definition file 995
editing data 991
files 129
finding drawing objects by 1244
hierarchies 122123
metadata for 1486
modifying definitions 127
range of allowable values 124
renaming 120
setting property ranges 125
using to modify thematic
objects 1261
viewing information about 1144
object classification 83, 117, 981, 983,
988989, 991, 993, 995
and export 1440
assigning to existing drawing
objects 989
base classes 123
creating files 129
creating objects using 988
defining objects 120, 123, 125
definition file 995
editing data 991
files 128
general procedure 983
modifying definitions 127
Index | 2129
overview 117, 981
privileges 83
removing from drawing objects 989
selecting objects using 993
setting up 118
variables 1551
object data 364, 426, 430, 434435, 531,
533534, 826, 829, 833, 887, 913
914, 1061, 1064, 10661067,
1069, 1071, 1080, 1083
adding drawing objects to maps
by 364
adding text to queried objects 1278
altering drawing objects based
on 1267
and database links 533
and digitizing 1080
and network topology 829
and node topology 826
and polygon topology 833
attaching multiple records 1066
attaching to drawing objects 1064
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 1067
attaching while digitizing 138, 1083
converting to a linked database
table 1071
converting to external data 534,
1071
creating tables 201
displaying as text 435
editing 1069
exporting 1405
exporting text enclosed in a
polyline 1455
finding drawing objects by 1248
for polygon topology 1064
for topology 913
importing 426, 434
indexing 1294
linking automatically to records 531
linking to enclosed blocks and
text 1067
listing tables in source drawings 172
modifying tables 202
moving to polygon centroids 430,
887
overview 1061
printing using report queries 1477
using to dissolve topology 1343
variables 1549
viewing for drawing objects 1144
viewing for topology 914
viewing in Properties palette 1146
Object Data Mapping dialog box 1732
object locking 730, 733, 735736
enabling 227
overview 730
releasing locks 736
turning on 733
viewing lock owners 735
object type
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
finding drawing objects by 1244
ODBC 342, 344
adding feature data to maps 344
compliant databases 209
provider capabilities for maps 342
schemas 576
setting up 577
video 305, 342
viewing data in Data Table 1136
working with data 577
offline
editing features 722
offset
for source drawings 169
OGC Basic Web Map Service 447
using with maps 447
OGR provider 540
one-to-many joins 509
one-to-one joins 509
online
returning 722
open source providers 540541
adding 541
opening 527, 1053
attached drawings 163
database tables in Data View 1053
linked database tables 527
2130 | Index
source drawings 163
options 169, 225, 229, 249, 764, 781,
922
acadmap.ini file 249
acadmap.sys file 249
AutoCAD Map 3D 216217, 249
coordinate system 231
coordinate transformation 225
data sources 225, 236, 243
Data View 238
digitizing 138
drawing origin 169
drawing scale 169
feature editing 240
for coordinate geometry 234
for drawings 225
log files 229
map books 1394
metadata 241
multi-user 227
overview 216217
queries 245
Raster Extension 249
rotation 169
save back 764
save back extents 170
saving 249
saving for Drawing Cleanup 781
saving for topology 922
setting while attaching
drawings 158
split prompts 709
system 229
Task Pane 221
transformation 169
Oracle 312, 410
adding feature data to maps 314
exporting drawing data to 1462
1463
exporting from DWG and
back 1467
importing data from 410
moving DWG data to 629
provider capabilities for maps 312
schemas 554
version-enabling 554, 557
working with data 558
ORACONNECT command
(discontinued) 1533
ORADISCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1533
ORAERUPDATE command
(discontinued) 1533
ORAEXPORT command
(discontinued) 1533
ORAIMPORT command
(discontinued) 1533
ORAINDEX command
(discontinued) 1533
orbiting 1196
surfaces in 3D 1196
Order button 301
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain
exporting GML v2 1429
exporting to 1429
importing 412
importing GML v2 381, 413
origin
modifying for source drawings 169
orthogonal transformation
and digitizing 133
osgeo 540541
downloading providers from 541
OSGeo FDO Provider for SQL Server
Spatial
and Schema Editor 610
supported data types 562
supported geometry types 562
OSNAP
and AutoCAD Map 3D 688, 713
Output Report Options dialog box
(drawing queries) 1852
output reports for queries 1477, 1479
overlay analysis
for DWG topology (video) 822,
829, 841, 1319
for feature classes(video) 1309
using drawing topologies
(video) 1336
Overlay Analysis dialog box, Set Output
And Settings 1565
Index | 2131
Overlay Analysis dialog box, Source and
Overlay Type 1563
overlay topology 843
to find sliver polygons 843
overlays
creating 1316
overview 1309
types 1309
overposting 1097
overshoots 773, 810
and dangling objects 810
tolerance for deleting 773
P
Page Setup dialog box 1686
PAGESETUP command 1388
panning
surfaces in 3D 1196
paper space
and map topology 822
queries in 1235
Paradox
attaching database to drawing 209
setting default version 243
Parallel activities
for workflows 2025
parameters
for Workflow activities 2022, 2025
parcel data
samples 63
parcels 836, 969
creating polygon topology for 836
splitting polygons for 969
passwords 83, 142
default 142
for AutoCAD Map 3D users 83
paste overlay 1309
path trace analysis 1326
and direct resistance 849
and direction 845
paths 539
for link templates 539
patterns
filling areas with 650
finding in data 1121
PCT images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
PCX images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Perform Overlay activity
for workflows 2041
performance 1538
improving 1538
improving by working offline 722
improving for queries 150, 1292,
1294, 1296
PERIMETER variable 1546
persistent locking 305, 684, 698
and automatic update 698
for feature sources in maps 305
personal geodatabase 540
accessing ESRI data 541
photographs 440
adding with Data Connect 440
physical configuration
setting for feature classes 612
setting for properties 612
PICT images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
pipes 831, 847, 873, 875
changing direction in topology 873
changing resistance in topology 875
creating network topology 831
specifying direction 847
tracing in topology 1334
plot map sets
importing for map books 1392
plot styles
finding drawing objects by 1244
theming for drawing layers 1176
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1792
plotters
publishing map books to 1402
publishing maps to 1364
PNG images 437
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
point boundary for query location 1241
point cloud
adjusting display density 375
2132 | Index
bringing in point cloud data 375
creating a Display Manager layer from
a point cloud object 375
creating a new data store from filtered
point cloud data 1024
creating a point cloud data
store 1019
creating a point cloud group in
Display Manager 1019
creating surfaces from point cloud
data 1021
exporting point cloud data
to ASCII format 1451
to LAS format 1451
to SDF format 1451
filtering point cloud data 1024
importing point cloud data 375
index file 1013, 1019
overview 10121013
point cloud data store 375, 1013,
1019
point cloud drawing object 375,
1013
point cloud groups 1019
styling point cloud data
by classification 675
by elevation 675
by LiDAR intensity value 675
by RGB value 675
working with AutoCAD Civil 3D point
cloud objects 375
working with point cloud data 1013
point cloud manager 374, 1015
adding a file 374
creating a merge group 1015
filtering data 1016
merging files 1017
removing a merge group 1016
specifying coordinate systems 1015
point data 342
and ODBC 342
point features 688
creating 688
theming 1175
point groups
deleting 1005
renaming 1004
Point Mapping dialog box 1733
points 10061008, 1032, 1034, 1036,
1038, 1040, 1042, 1044, 1046
and fixed labels 1099
and symbols (video) 645
assigning survey points to point
groups 1006
creating geospatial features from
survey points 1008
creating raster surfaces from 1009
creating survey points 1006
creating survey points using
coordinate geometry 1006
deleting survey points 1007
determining relationships
between 1046
displaying angles between 1160
displaying grade between 1162
displaying horizontal distance
between 1162
displaying slope between 1162
obscuring with labels 1097
removing survey points from a point
group survey points 1007
scale ranges for 646
specifying with angle and
distance 1032
specifying with azimuth and
distance 1042
specifying with bearing and
distance 1034
specifying with deflection and
distance 1038
specifying with distance and
offset 1044
specifying with two bearings 1036
specifying with two distances 1040
styles for 646
styling 1637
styling with symbols (video) 640
symbols for 646
viewing survey point data in the
points table 1008
viewing survey points 1008
Index | 2133
points (geometric) 428, 953
boundary for query location 1241
digitizing by coordinates 953
importing as text 428
query location 1241
points (nodes) 767, 773, 779, 806, 808,
810, 814815, 827, 850, 860,
870, 875, 878, 889, 892, 953,
1073
adding to topology 878
and topology 827
changing appearance in
topology 870
changing resistance in topology 875
cleaning up 767
clustered 806
dangling objects 810
digitizing 1073
digitizing by coordinates 953
editing in topology 860
explicit 1339
implicit 1339
importing as text 428
marking for cleanup 779
pseudo 808
removing from topology 889
simplifying lines 814
specifying resistance 850
tolerance for deleting clusters 773
updating for topology 892
weeding 814
zero-length objects 815
points of interest symbols 70
POLYDISPLAY command 980
polygon boundary for query
location 1241
polygon features 689
creating 689
splitting 708
theming 1172
theming (video) 1171
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box 1824
polygon topology 833, 836, 840, 843,
1073
and Drawing Cleanup 838
and missing centroids 839
and object data 833
and sliver polygons 839, 843
creating 836
digitizing objects for 1073
exporting 1458
for land cover map 840
for land use map 840
overlaying 1339
overview 833
polygons 430, 836, 841, 867, 884, 887,
889, 892, 898, 920, 955, 960,
963, 969, 971, 974, 978, 1064
adding boundaries 963
adding fill 650
adding holes 963
adding islands 963
adding to topology 884
and gradient fill 960, 978
and islands 955
attaching object data 1064
boundaries for 955
changing fill 963
converting polylines to 971
converting to polylines during
export 1458
converting to polylines from
topology 898
converting topology to 974
creating centroids 433
creating centroids for 836, 887,
950, 977
creating in maps 960
default fill 978
disabling for maps 978
displaying boundaries 978
displaying edges 978
dissolving 1343
dividing 867, 969
editing 963
editing in topology 867
exporting 1458
exporting polylines as 1405
filling 960
finding drawing objects by 1244
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 430
2134 | Index
incomplete in topology 920
inner and outer boundaries 955
merging in topology 867
nested 971, 974
overview of using in maps 955
query location 1241
rebalancing 963
removing from topology 889
slivers 841
splitting 969
splitting in topology 867
topology 836
updating for topology 892
polyline segments 814815, 819
simplifying 814
weeding 819
zero-length 815
polylines 776, 808, 814815, 819, 863,
898, 920, 939, 971
and Drawing Cleanup 776
converting 3D to 2D 776
converting drawing objects to 776
converting to polygons 971
creating from polygon topology 898
creating from polygons during
export 1458
digitizing 138
dissolving pseudo nodes 808
editing in topology 863
exporting as polygons 1405
exporting text enclosed in 1455
filling 939
incomplete in topology 920
simplifying 814
supplementing 819
weeding 819
zero-length 815
Portable Network Graphic images 437
adding with Data Connect 440
PostGIS 340341
adding feature data to maps 341
provider capabilities for maps 340
using as a data source 341
PostgreSQL/PostGIS
provider capabilities for maps 340
Preview mode queries 12871288, 1290
previewing 746
drawing objects in attached
drawings 746
queries 178, 1288, 1290
source drawings for maps 746
previous releases of AutoCAD 754
updating source drawings 754
primary key (identifier properties)
setting in schemas 612
printing
Data View tables 1475
map books 1402
metadata 1515
overview 1357
query reports 1477
privacy 56
privileges for users 83
problem-solving 761
saving drawings 761
profiles 781, 922
compatibility across product
versions 263
for Drawing Cleanup 781
for import/export 263
for topology 922
projections 143
projective transformation
and digitizing 133
Prompt User activities
for workflows 2025
prompts
for splitting features 709
properties 362, 507, 512
adding drawing objects to maps
by 362
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
and joins 507, 512
constraining 601
constraining (video) 599
creating in schemas 598
deleting in schemas 614
editing for features 718
editing in schemas 612
finding drawing objects by 1244
for attached databases 206
Index | 2135
map books 1399
setting identifier (primary key) in
schemas 612
setting physical configuration 612
undoing schema changes 615
using as labels 1093
viewing for drawing objects 1146
viewing for features 1127
PROPERTIES command 992
Properties palette
and Display Manager 1124
drawing attributes 1146
editing feature data 718
property alteration 1296
adding hatch to objects 1283
adding text to objects 1278
based on external data 1270
based on object data 1267
based on object properties 1265
modifying 1286
overview 1261
text insertion point 937
topology queries 1353
with queries 1263
Property Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1855
property conditions for queries 1244
editing 1258
property index 1294
property settings
in Schema Editor 1739
Property Value Mapping dialog box
(Export) 1728
providers
capabilities in maps 305
pseudo nodes 808
dissolving 808
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide dialog
box 1577
Publish to MapGuide Results dialog
box 1379
Publish To MapGuide Results dialog
box 1578
publishing
attribute data 1367
map books to DWF format 1401
map books to plotters 1402
maps 1360
maps as web pages 1374
maps to plotters 1364
metadata 1515
options for DWF 1367
overview for maps 1357
to MapGuide 1378
purchasing data 62
Q
QSELECT command 1220
quantile distribution 1165
queries 83, 369, 756, 894, 1053
adding drawing objects to maps
with 369
adding hatch to retrieved drawing
objects 1283
adding text to retrieved
objects 1278
altering properties of retrieved
objects 1261, 1263, 1265,
1267, 1270
and numeric ranges 1242
and raster images 1296
and topology 894
block attribute conditions 1248
boundary for 1241
categories 182
combining conditions 1256
database 1053
default directory 229
defining for drawing data 1237
Draw mode 12871288, 1291
drawings with xrefs 1296
editing after saving 184
editing conditions 1258
executing 1287
external 177, 180
for attached databases 206
for features 1207
improving performance 150, 1292,
1294, 1296
indexes for 1294
issues with groups 1300
2136 | Index
issues with hatch 1300
joining conditions 1258
library 174, 178
link data conditions 1248
loading 184
location and buffer (video) 1302,
1306
location conditions 1241
model space 1235
modes 1288
modifying property alterations 1286
object data conditions 1248
operators 1256
options 245
overview 1235
paper space 1235
precedence of conditions 1256
Preview mode 12871288, 1290
previewing 1290
privileges for 83
problem solving 1300
property conditions 1244
Report mode 12871288, 1477,
1479
rerunning 178
running 1477
saving 177
saving objects back to source
drawings 754, 756
selecting feature data with 1130
SQL conditions 1249, 1253
storing 174
topology 1353
using expressions 1541
using wild-card characters 1537
video 1235, 1238, 1245, 1249
with blocks of same name 1296
writing results to file 1477
xrefs 1300
query library
adding external queries 180
categories 182
overview 174
running stored queries 178
saving queries 177
Query Library Administration dialog box
(drawing queries) 1858
querying
drawings (video) 24
features (video) 24
querying features
video 305
Quick Select 1219
for drawing objects 12191220
Quick View 746
redrawing the screen 746
Quick View Drawings dialog box 2013
Quickbird images
adding to maps 437
R
RADIUS variable 1546
ramps
for drawing layer themes 1183
Range of Values dialog box (for
theming) 1629
range table 1272
creating 1272
ranges
finding drawing objects using 1244
for object classes 125
for schema property values 599
for themes (video) 1163
Raster Design 451
and image location 451
inserting images with Raster
Extension 455
Raster Extension 454
correlation defaults 257
correlation source 251
detaching images 255
display quality 254
frame options 253
inserting images with 455
memory use 259
options 249
resource file directory 251
selection methods 256
Raster Extension Options dialog box
(Insert Image command) 1879
Index | 2137
raster images 291, 437, 440442, 449
451, 453455, 465, 468, 471, 473
475, 478479, 481482, 485490,
493494, 496, 498499, 501, 503
504
2D 444
adding contour lines 1190
adding to maps 437
adding with Data Connect 440, 442
adjusting brightness 673
adjusting contrast 673
analyzing 1188
and maps 291
and REGEN 459
and transparency 449
changing transparency 450
displaying extents 674
displaying in color or greyscale 674
exporting drawing objects to 1465
formats not supported by Data
Connect 453455, 459,
462, 465, 467468, 471, 473,
475, 478479, 481482, 485
490, 493494, 496, 498499,
501, 503504
formats supported by Data
Connect 443, 445
information for 474
inserting from the command
line 471
inserting manually 451
metadata for 1486
resampling 674
setting insertion point 451
setting single-color
transparency 673
styles for 672
viewing information 474
web-based 445
Raster Object Enabler 453
raster surface 1009
raster-based surfaces 437, 440442
adding to maps 437
adding with Data Connect 440, 442
Rebuild Sheet Set 1381
records
viewing for drawing objects 1144
records (database records) 426, 434435,
523, 529, 532, 534, 537, 1056,
1064, 1067, 1069, 1083, 1085
adding in Data View 1056
altering drawing objects based
on 1270
attaching multiple to drawing
objects 1066
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 1067
attaching while digitizing 138,
1083, 1085
copying 1056
deleting in Data View 1056
displaying as text 435
editing in Data View 1056
editing in object data 1069
editing links 537
exporting with objects 1405
filtering 1231
filtering by location 1234
finding drawing objects by 1248
finding in Data View 1222, 1225
importing 426, 434
linking automatically to drawing
objects 532
linking to drawing objects 523,
529, 1064
linking to drawing objects in
maps 534
object data 201
printing 1475
SQL conditions 1253
records (metadata) 1507
redrawing the screen 746
after Quick View 746
REFEDIT command 1537
commands blocked during 1537
reference systems
adding 1362
Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) 1362
registering maps 136
2138 | Index
relational database tables 342
and feature classes 342
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 584
relational databases
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 585
releasing locks for drawing objects 736
Remove Connection activity
for workflows 2043
Remove Feature Layer activity
for workflows 2044
Remove Group activity
for workflows 20442045
Remove Highlighting activity
for workflows 2038
Remove Object Data Index dialog
box 1933
removing
coordinate system assignment 150
Rename Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1860
Rename Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1860
Rename Table dialog box 1797
Rename Topology dialog box 1988
renaming 899, 925
map books 1402
object data fields 202
object data tables 202
topology 899, 925
Report mode queries 12871288, 1477,
1479
reports
creating during a query 1477, 1479
for attribute data 1473
template for 1479
topology 1353
residual calibration 133
resistance 850, 860, 863, 875
and network topology 850
editing for topology 860, 863
for links and nodes in topology 875
using in best route analysis 1330
using in flood trace analysis 1334
using in path trace analysis 1326
resource file directory
Raster Extension 251
resources
copying metadata 1504
reusing
expressions in queries 1541
layers from Display Manager 1470
revision numbers 698
and automatic update 698
RGB color system
importing objects using 269
rights 83
RLC 1 and 2 images
adding to maps 437
RLC images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
RLE images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
RMS error 133
roads 831, 847, 873, 875
changing direction in topology 873
changing resistance in topology 875
creating network topology 831
specifying direction 847
tracing in topology 1334
rotating 931
drawing objects in maps 931
drawings 169
rotation
altering with queries 1261
using to specify image location 451
ROTATION variable 1546
routes
finding best 1330
finding shortest 1326
flood trace 1334
RST images
inserting with Raster Extensions 455
rubber sheeting 932, 934
maps 934
video 927, 932
Run AutoCAD Command activity
for workflows 2046
Run Library Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1861
Index | 2139
Run Workflow activity
for workflows 2047
running
workflows 278
S
sample data
downloading 63
for AutoCAD Map 3D 62
on product CDs 63
symbol libraries 70
SANGLE variable 1546
satellite imagery
purchasing 72
samples 63
save back 761, 764
improving performance 1296
options 764
problem-solving 761
save back extents 170, 756
resetting 170
using to save drawing objects 756
viewing 170
Save Current Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1862
Save Features dialog box 1608
Save Layer File activity
for workflows 2048
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog
box 1887
save sets 730, 750752, 754, 756, 759,
761, 764
adding drawing objects
automatically 764
adding objects to 751
for maps 750
object locking 730
options 764
problem-solving 761
removing drawing objects from 759
saving queried objects to source
drawings 754, 756
turning off prompt 764
viewing objects in 752
Save Version dialog box 1750
saving 738, 751, 754, 756758, 761, 917
drawing objects 738
drawing objects as raster
images 1465
drawing objects to new drawing 758
drawing objects to source
drawings 754, 756
drawings 738
drawings and exploding blocks 761
feature styles 652
layers as SDF (video) 1469
layers from Display Manager 1470
new drawing objects to
drawings 751
objects to the current map 757
options for drawings 764
problem-solving 761
queries 177
schemas 608
topology 917, 1354
vs. exporting as SDF 1469
scale 451
setting for map 638
specifying for raster images 451
scale bars
samples 62, 71
scale factors
altering with queries 1261
for drawing objects 931
for source drawings 169
for text 225
scale ranges
defining for layers in Display
Manager 644
understanding 643
video 640, 643
scale reduction factor 91
scale thresholds (Display Manager)
creating 668
modifying 668
viewing all styles 670
scaling 931
drawing objects in maps 931
drawings 169
Schema Editor 608
abstract classes (inheritance) 612
2140 | Index
and OSGeo FDO Provider for SQL
Server Spatial 610
backing up schemas 608
base classes 612
constraints 612
creating schemas 598
deleting schemas 614
editing schemas 612
enabling long transactions 612
exporting schemas 608
identifier properties (primary
key) 612
importing schemas 608
overview 596
physical configuration 612
undoing schema changes 615
versioning 612
viewing schemas 609
Schema Editor dialog box 1739
schemas 608
and Bulk Copy 1744
appending feature classes
(video) 610
appending feature classes to
(video) 594
ArcSDE 579
backing up 608
constrained properties (video) 594
constraints 601
constraints (video) 599
copying foreign 621
creating 598
defintiion 551
deleting 614
deleting properties (video) 594, 610
editing 612
exporting with Schema Editor 608
importing 381
importing (video) 582, 586, 594,
606
importing with Schema Editor 608
MySQL 567
ODBC 576
Oracle 554
overview 551, 554
overview of procedures 595
Schema Editor 596
SDF 569
SHP 572
SQL Server 559
SQL Server Spatial 561
SQLite 565
undoing changes to 615
using native views 603
viewing 609
WFS (Web Feature Service) 581
screen pointing area
for digitizing 132
SDF 44, 388
creating files (video) 43
exporting layers to (video) 1376
viewing contents (video) 1453
SDF 1 or 2 files
importing 389
SDF 2 files
exporting 14171418
SDF data stores 586
SDF files
creating 588
creating (video) 582, 586, 594
exporting from DWG and
back 1467
exporting to 1413
exporting vs. saving 1469
importing 387
moving DWG data to 629
provider capabilities for maps 337
saving Display Manager layers
as 1470
schemas 569
working with data 571
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer
Standard) 381, 413414
importing 381, 414
overview 413
Search To Select 1131
searching
DataTable 1131
for features 1214
seed file
default for exporting DGN files 269
for DGN files 1435
Index | 2141
Select Actions dialog box page 1588
Select Alias dialog box 1933
Select Coordinate System dialog
box 1609
Select Data dialog box 1811
Select Data dialog box (drawing
topology) 1989
Select Database Version dialog box 1688
Select Display Element dialog box 1631
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate
System dialog box 1599
Select Drawings to Attach dialog
box 1811
Select Existing Link Template dialog
box 1689
Select Feature Classes dialog box (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Features activity
for workflows 2049
Select Images dialog box (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Layers dialog box (Display
Manager) 1631
Select Link Template dialog box 1690
Select Link Template Key dialog
box 1797
Select Link Templates dialog box 1690
Select Objects dialog box page 1595
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog
box 1831
Select Query dialog box 1691
Select Table dialog box 1691
Select Topologies dialog box (Display
Manager) 1631
selecting 694, 770, 993
checked out features 694
classified objects 993
drawing objects 12191220
features 1207
objects for Drawing Cleanup 770
records in databases 1225
selecting features
using buffers (video) 1302
Sequence activities
for workflows 2025
server CS code
for Web Map Service (WMS) 447
Set Property Alterations dialog box
(drawing queries) 1863
SETELEMENTS command 1829
setup 77
overview 77
Seven Parameter Transformation
conversion method 94
Shape Multiclass 14431444
exporting 1405, 1444
exporting to 1443
ShapeFile 335336, 381, 1424
adding feature data to maps 336
converting to drawing objects 335
exporting as folder 269
exporting multiclass 1444
exporting to 1424
folder option 1424
importing 381, 397
importing as folder 269
importing vs. adding.to maps 335
provider capabilities for maps 335
SHAPENAME variable 1546
sheet sets
and map books 1381
short linear objects 773, 779, 796
erasing 796
marking for cleanup 779
tolerance for deleting 773
shortest path analysis
video 1319, 1324
shortest path trace 1326
Show Foreign Data Stores 314, 324, 333
SHP data stores 586
SHP files 335336, 397, 1424
adding feature data to maps 336
and Bulk Copy 617
creating 588
exporting data from Civil 3D 545
exporting multiclass 1444
exporting to 1424
importing 381, 397, 399
importing vs. adding 335
multiclass 1443
provider capabilities for maps 335
2142 | Index
schemas 572
working with data 574
SID images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
SIF files
exporting 1417
SIZE variable 1546
SL King Provider 540
sliver polygons 839, 841, 843
finding when creating topology 843
finding when overlaying
topologies 843
removing 839
slope 1162
and theming 1202
displaying 1162
theming surfaces for 1203
snapping nodes 806
soil drawings
samples 63
solid fill 939
adding to closed polylines 939
Sort dialog box (records) 1692
Source Data dialog box 1897
Source Drawing Scope dialog box 1633
source drawings 730, 738, 745746,
748, 754, 756, 764, 852, 917, 951
activating 160
aligning 169
assigning coordinate system 146
attaching to the current
drawing 158
backup files 764
descriptions 166
drive aliases for 161
editing in AutoCAD Map 3D 748
editing topology 852
global coordinate systems 146
indexing 1294
locking 730
matching edges 951
offset for 169
opening 163
previewing objects in 746
querying 1237
Quick View 746
retrieving objects from 1237
rotating 169
save back extents 170, 756
saving objects to 738
saving queried objects to 754, 756
saving topology to 917
scaling 169
settings 164
symbol table information 172
tiled 154, 756
transforming 169
viewing coordinate systems 151
viewing information 172
zooming to extents 745
source files
for maps 3
spatial analysis
video 1319
spatial contexts
editing 311
selecting coordinate systems for 590
spatial data
metadata for 1486
Spatial Data File 44, 388
Spatial Data Organization Editor 1764
Spatial Data Transfer Standard files 381
importing 381, 414
overview 413
spatial databases
overview 551
spatial filters 418
during import 418
spatial filters (Data View) 1234
spatial indexes
and Bulk Copy 625626
speed 875
for links and nodes in
topology 850, 875
Split and Merge Rules dialog box 1669
split prompts
setting options 709
split rultes
ignoring 708
splitting
features (video) 706
polygon features 708
Index | 2143
SPOT images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
SQL Condition History dialog box
(drawing queries) 1866
SQL conditions 364
dates 1253
editing 1258
for drawing queries 1249
maximum number in history
list 225
operators 1253
quotation marks 1253
selecting drawing objects for maps
by 364
strings 1253
troubleshooting 1253
SQL Expression dialog box (link
templates) 1814
SQL Link Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1866
SQL links index 1294
SQL queries
for drawing data in Data View 1231
for drawing objects 1230
SQL Server 323324
adding feature data to maps 324
and long transactions 323
provider capabilities for maps 323
schemas 559
working with data 561, 564, 566
SQL Server Spatial 326
and Bulk Copy 617
authentication options 326
creating data stores 561, 592
geography type for geodetic
coordinate system 326
invalid geometry 326
provider capabilities for maps 326
schemas 561
SQL variables 1549
SQLite 330
adding feature data to maps 331
creating data stores 565
exporting to 1405
importing 381, 415
provider capabilities for maps 330
schemas 565
SQLite data stores 586
SQLite files
creating 588
exporting to 1447
importing 414
SRID numbers
and EPSG numbers 590
standard deviation 1165
and digitizing 133
Standard Order Process Editor 1774
state plane coordinate systems 143
statistics 474, 916
for raster images 474
for source drawings 172
for topology 916
printing using report queries 1477,
1479
viewing for raster images 474
street centerline data
samples 63
stretching drawings 934
STRING variable 1546
string-handling functions 1543
Style Band dialog box 1633
Style Label dialog box 1634
Style Library 665666
Style Line dialog box 1636
Style Point dialog box 1637
Style Polygon dialog box 1639
Style Text Layer dialog box 1640
STYLE variable 1546
styles 300
and map layers 300
and symbols 660
combining 662
composite styles for drawing
layers 662
composite styles for lines 649
for areas 650
for contour lines 1191
for display elements 665
for drawing layers 657, 660, 662
for drawing objects 652, 654
for features 641
for lines 649
2144 | Index
for maps 631
for points 646
modifying for drawing layers 663
referencing 666
saving in library 665
stylesheets
for metadata 1489
styling
and scale ranges (video) 643, 648
drawing objects on import 385
features (video) 3, 7, 34
using themes (video) 1163
Superuser 83, 142, 202, 227, 730, 733,
736
default password 142
forcing user login 227
logging in as 142
modifying object data tables 202
options 227
releasing locks 736
setting up privileges 83
turning on object locking 730, 733
surface
connecting to raster surfaces through
Data Connect 1021
create surface from data
connection 1010
create surface from file 1009
create surface from point
data 1009, 1011
creating surfaces from point cloud
data 1021
ESRI ASC 1021
GeoTIFF 1021
raster surface 1009
viewing surfaces 1021
surfaces 437, 440442
3D (video) 1187, 1192, 1194
adding contour lines 1190
adding to maps 437
adding with Data Connect 440, 442
analyzing 1188
and contour lines 1189
applying hillshading 1200
applying vertical exaggeration 1200
changing theme colors 1205
coloring by elevation (video) 37,
1187, 1199, 1204
coloring surfaces based on elevation
(video) 1204
draping 2D data on 1193
draping layers on (video) 1192
draping layers on (video) slope
analysis
video 1187
fly through 1196
hillshading (video) 1199
motion path animation 1196
orbiting 1196
panning 1196
slope analysis (video) 1202
swiveling 1196
theming to display height, slope, or
aspect 1203
vertical exaggeration (video) 1199
video 1187
viewing in 3D 1196
walk through 1196
zooming in 3D 1196
survey 371, 373, 998, 10001008, 1471
adding a point group 1003
point groups 10031005
project 10011003
adding a point group 1001
removing a project from a survey
data store 1002
removing a survey 1003
renaming 1002
removing a survey from a
project 1003
renaming 1003
survey data store 1000
connecting to 1000
creating 1000
editing 612
viewing active data store
only 1000
working with survey data 998
survey data store
importing ASCII point data 373
importing LandXML data 371
Index | 2145
survey points 342, 10031008
and ODBC 342
assigning survey points to point
groups 1006
creating geospatial features from
survey points 1008
creating survey points 1006
creating survey points using
coordinate geometry 1006
deleting survey points 1007
exporting to a LandXML file 1471
importing ASCII point data 373
importing LandXML data 371
point groups 10031005
removing survey points from a point
group 1007
viewing survey point data in the
points table 1008
viewing survey points 1008
SWIDTH variable 1546
Switch Map activity
for workflows 2050
swiveling surfaces in 3D 1196
symbol libraries
samples 69
symbol tables
viewing for source drawings 172
symbol-handling functions 1544
symbols 62
adding to point layers 646
combining styles 662
for drawing layers 660
for point features (video) 640, 645
general use 70
samples 69
symmetric difference overlay 1309
system-generated properties
in Schema Editor 1739
T
TAB files 381, 402, 404
exporting 1405
exporting to 1433
importing 381, 402, 404
importing as folder 269
Table Filter dialog box 1693
Table Filter History dialog box 1696
Table Properties dialog box 1696
tables (database tables) 209, 215, 523,
526527, 529, 532, 534, 537,
539, 1048, 1053, 1056, 1085
adding records in Data View 1056
and Data View 1048
attaching to drawings 209
connecting 215
converting from object data 534
deleting link templates 539
deleting links 537
deleting records in Data View 1056
detaching from drawings 209
disconnecting 215
editing database path 539
editing in Data View 1056
editing links 537
filtering records 1231
filtering records by location 1234
finding records 1222
key columns 526
link templates 526
linked 527
linking records to drawing
objects 529
linking to drawing objects in
maps 523, 532
linking to while digitizing 1085
navigating in Data View 1048
opening 527
opening in Data View 1053
options 238
printing 1475
querying 1053
saving changes in Data View 1056
searching 1225
SQL conditions 1253
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 209, 213
viewing for drawing objects 1048
tables (object data) 202, 435, 534, 827,
831, 836, 914, 1064, 10661067,
1069, 1083
adding fields 202
2146 | Index
attaching multiple records to drawing
objects 1066
attaching records to drawing
objects 1064
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 1067
converting to database tables 534
creating 201
creating while digitizing 1083
deleting 202
displaying as text 435
editing 202, 1069
exporting 1405
for network topology 831
for node topology 827
for polygon topology 836
importing 426, 434
modifying fields 202
renaming 202
viewing for topology 914
tablet for digitizing 130, 132
TABLET mode 1080
and digitizing 1080
TAG variable 1546
Tagged Image File Format images 444
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
TARGA images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Task Pane
data source options 236
Display Manager tab 634635, 654
hiding 221, 1908
making transparent 221
options 221
refreshing 221
showing 1908
templates 62
and annotation 1105, 11071108
applying for metadata 1492
creating for metadata 1492
deactivating for metadata 1495
exporting from metadata 1496
for map books 66, 1386
for metadata 14841485, 1490
for query reports 1479
for styling drawing objects 385
importing for metadata 1492
installed location for 66
previewing for metadata 1494
removing from metadata 1497
renaming for metadata 1493
samples 66
setting default for metadata 1494
text 428, 435, 532, 937
adding for drawing layers 1176
adding to annotation layers 1114
adding to queried objects 1278
adjusting for map distortion 225
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
attaching to objects in maps 937
displaying data as 435
exporting as points 1405
exporting when enclosed in a
polyline 1455
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing layers 660
height for drawing layer
themes 1176
importing points as 428
insertion point 937
label point 937
linking to external data for
maps 532
options 225
specifying type for tables 201
units 225
text layers
creating 1110
text layers (video) 1109, 1111, 1113,
1115
text styles 764
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
finding drawing objects by 1244
for drawing layer themes 1185
redefining on save back 764
when importing points into
maps 428
Index | 2147
texture maps 1192
TGA images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
Thematic Mapping dialog box 1642
thematic maps
legend 1117
Thematic Values dialog box 1644
Theme dialog box (features) 1645
themes
based on height, slope, or
aspect 1202
by layer type 1163
changing colors for 1205
creating for drawing layers 1176,
1181
creating for feature layers 1168
distribution methods 1165
for drawing data 1178
methods to use 1165
ranges for (video) 1165
transparency 1172, 11741175
using for analysis 1163
video 1163, 1165, 1171
theming
features (video) 7, 37
thickness
altering drawing objects based
on 1265
altering with queries 1261
finding drawing objects by 1244
THICKNESS variable 1546
third party providers 540541
adding 541
thumbnail 302
changing for map layers 302
TIFF images
adding with Data Connect 440,
443444
Tile Properties dialog box 1831
tiled drawings 756, 951
matching edges 951
saving back to 756
tiles
deleting from map books 1403
renaming for map books 1402
viewing and editing in map
books 1397
viewing in map books 1399
Time Period Information Editor 1761
tolerance for Drawing Cleanup 773
topographic map 1189
topology 367, 430, 788, 806, 808, 810,
814815, 822, 825827, 829, 831,
833, 836, 838, 840841, 847,
850, 852, 860, 863, 867, 870,
873, 875, 878, 880, 884, 887,
889, 892, 894, 899, 907, 911,
913914, 916917, 920, 922, 925
926, 974, 1073
adding drawing objects to maps
by 367
adding linear objects 880
adding links 852
adding nodes 852, 878
adding polygons 852, 884
analysis settings 922
analyzing (video) 1319
and clip operations 1336
and Drawing Cleanup 788, 838
and erase operations 1336
and identity 1336
and paste operations 1336
and union operations 1336
auditing 920
best route 1330
buffering 1347
changing appearance of nodes 870
changing link direction 873
changing resistance 875
clustered nodes 806
combining 1339
completing 920
converting to polygons 974
correcting 920
creating 825, 827, 831, 836
creating centroids for
polygons 430, 836, 887
dangling objects 810
deleting 899, 926
deleting objects 852
digitizing objects for 1073
2148 | Index
dissolving 1343
dividing polygons 867
editing 852, 860, 873
editing partial 894
editing polygons 867
errors 920
exporting 1458
flood trace 1334
highlighting objects 911
islands 920
land cover map 840
land use map 840
left-right relationships 836
links 831
loading 899, 907
managing 899
merging polygons 867
network topology 829, 831
node topology 827
object data for 913
object data stored for best
route 1328
overlay analysis (video) 1336
overlaying 1339
overview 822
polygon topology 836
profiles for 922
pseudo nodes 808
querying 894, 1353
removing objects 889
renaming 899, 925
repositioning nodes 863
result 1354
saving 1354
saving to source drawings 917
shortest path trace 1326
simplifying lines 814
sliver polygons 841
specifying link direction 847, 850
splitting polygons 867
temporary 1354
testing integrity 920
unloading 907
updating manually 892
video 822, 899, 906
viewing object data 914
viewing statistics for 916
weeding nodes 814
zero-length objects 815
Topology Buffer Create New Centroids and
Nodes dialog box 1990
Topology Buffer New Topology dialog
box 1991
Topology Buffer Set Buffer Distance dialog
box 1992
Topology Dissolve Create New Centroids
and Nodes dialog box 1994
Topology Dissolve Create Nodes dialog
box 1995
Topology Dissolve New Topology dialog
box 1996
Topology Dissolve Object Data dialog
box 1997
Topology Dissolve Set Parameter dialog
box 1998
Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis Type
dialog box 1999
Topology Overlay Analysis Create New
Centroids and Nodes dialog
box 2002
Topology Overlay Analysis Create Nodes
dialog box 2003
Topology Overlay Analysis Output
Attributes dialog box 2006
Topology Overlay Analysis
OutputTopology dialog
box 2004
Topology Overlay Analysis Select Overlay
Topology dialog box 2007
Topology Query dialog box 2008
Topology Query Result dialog box 2010
Topology Selection dialog box 2011
Topology Statistics dialog box 2011
TOPONAME variable 1546
TOPOTYPE variable 1546
trace analysis
best route 1330
flood trace 1334
shortest path 1326
tracking coordinates 11481150
setting coordinate tracker
options 232
Index | 2149
using coordinate system for attached
drawing 1150
transactions
long (versioning) 612
transforming 931
coordinates 225, 231
drawing objects in maps 931
entire source drawing 169
transparency
and styles 650
and themes 1172, 11741175
for polygon features (video) 1171
for raster images 449
for Task Pane 221
in themes 1171
video 640
Transparency Color dialog box (Insert
Image command) 1883
transparent commands 10271028
using 1028
Transverse Mercator projection 143
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog
box 1672
trimming objects 945
troubleshooting
broken connections in Display
Manager 350
buffers 1308
Bulk Copy 625626
data stores from previous versions of
AutoCAD Map 3D 325
drawing queries 1296, 1300
error messages when editing
schemas 610
invalid data for SQL Server
Spatial 326
SQL conditions 1249, 1253
True Colors
importing objects using 269
TrueVision images
inserting with Raster Extension 455
tutorials
AutoCAD Map 3D 58
Type SQL Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1870
TYPE variable 1546
U
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
editing 213
overview 209
UNCLASSIFY command 990
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog
box 1934
undershoots 773, 779, 801
extending 801
marking for cleanup 779
tolerance for extending 773
undoing
feature class changes in
schemas 615
property changes in schemas 615
schema changes in feature
sources 615
union overlay 1309
uniquness
for schema property values 599
United States grid data files 105
units
default 225
units of measurement
converting for text 225
default for exporting DGN files 269
Universal Transverse Mercator
System 143
unloading topology 907
unlocking drawing objects 736, 759
unmatched data or geometric type
errors
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1744
Update Edits Automatically 722
changing default setting 88
enabling 700
turning off 722
updating topology 892
URL variable 1546
URLs 389
exporting to SDF 2 files 1417
importing from SDF 1 or 2 files 389
Use FDO Enabled Schema 561
User Administration dialog box 1934
User Coordinate System (UCS) 1154
2150 | Index
User Credentials dialog box 1610
User Information dialog box 1936
user interface in AutoCAD Map 3D 85
User Login dialog box 1937
users 83
database and AutoCAD Map 3D 585
rights 83
valid usernames 83
V
validation
and SQL Server Spatial 326
variables 937, 1541, 1546
AutoLISP 1551
block attributes 1549
dot variables 1546
LABELPT 937
object class properties 1551
object data 1549
SQL 1549
vector data 1193
draping on 3D surfaces 1193
purchasing 72
Vector Markup Language (VML) files
exporting 1405
exporting to 1449
Vector Product Format (VPF)
importing as folder 269
Vector Product Format (VPF) files
importing 381, 416417
version-enabling
Oracle 557
versioning 305, 723, 725
and Bulk Copy 1744
for feature data 725
for feature sources in maps 305
long transactions 612
versions 725
activating for feature data 725
creating for feature data 725
discarding for feature data 725
vertical exaggeration
video 1187, 1199
videos
adding AutoCAD layers to Display
Manager 352, 634
adding multiple images to a single
layer 437
analyzing topologies 1319
appending feature classes to a
schema 594
appending feature classes to
schemas 610
appending features to a feature
class 31
appending features to feature
classes 43
automatic checkout 713
bringing in a subset of data 305
bringing in data from Civil 3D 9,
43, 543
bringing in data from ODBC 305,
342
bringing in data from web
servers 305, 346, 437, 445
bringing in drawing objects 9
bringing in features 9
buffers 37, 1302
Bulk Copy 43, 616617
calculated fields 1125, 1132
checking in features 693, 721
checking out features 695, 701, 721
coloring surfaces by elevation 37,
1187, 1199, 1204
complete list of 51
connecting to data 13
connecting to data sources 3, 9
connecting to feature sources 305
constrained properties 599
constraining fields in a schema 43
constrants 594
contour layers 1187
contour lines 1189
converting a map to DWG
format 628
coordinate system 143
coordinate systems 11
coordinate transformation 143
Index | 2151
copying data between data
stores 616617
creating data stores 582, 586, 594
creating features 684, 686, 691
creating features from AutoCAD
objects 19
creating SDF files 43
Data Table 1125, 1130, 1136, 1138,
11401141
deleting properties from
schemas 594, 610
Display Manager 634, 636
draping layers on surfaces 1187,
1192
draw order 634, 636
drawing cleanup 727, 766
editing features 684, 701, 721
editing features in a database 19
exporting current map to
DWG 1405
exporting DWG data to GIS 628
exporting DWG to SDF 1405
exporting feature data 1141
exporting layers to SDF 1376, 1405,
1469
exporting styled DWG data 628
exporting styled DWG objects 1453
exporting the current map to
DWG 1459
georeferencing 932
highlighting features 1136, 1138
how exported maps look in
DWG 1459
importing schemas 43, 582, 586,
594, 606
inserting images 437, 459
joining attributes to features 37
joins 507, 509, 514
labeling features 185186, 190, 194,
640, 645, 648, 1089, 1091,
1096, 1098
layers and scale ranges 640
legends 185186, 190, 194, 1089,
1117
making features transparent 640
managing layers 634, 636
map books 46, 1360, 1381
MapGuide 46, 1360, 1376
metadata 30, 1481, 1486, 1498
multi-user editing for drawing
files 727, 730, 734, 738
multi-user editing of drawings 19
network topology 727, 822, 829
overlay analysis using drawing
topologies 1336
overlay analysis using feature
classes 1309
overlay analysis using
topologies 1319
overlaying two topologies 822, 829,
841
publishing map books 1389
publishing map books to DWF 46,
1360, 1366
publishing map books with attributes
to DWF 1381, 1389, 1400
publishing to MapGuide 3
queries 1235, 1238, 1242, 1245,
1249
querying attached drawings 24
querying attached DWG files 352,
358
querying feature classes 24
raster-based surfaces 1187
replacing points with symbols 640,
645
rubber sheeting 927, 932
saving layers to .layer files 1405,
1469
scale ranges 643, 648
scale ranges for styles 640
selecting features 1130
shortest path analysis 822, 829,
1324
slope analysis 1187, 1202
splitting polygonal features 706
styling and scale ranges 643, 648
styling features 3, 7, 34
surfaces 1187
text layers 1109, 1111, 1113, 1115
themes 1165, 1171
theming data 1163
2152 | Index
theming features 7, 37
theming polygons 1171
topologies 1319
topology 822, 899, 906
using 3D view 1187, 1192, 1194
vertical exaggeration 1187, 1199
viewing attribute data for
features 27
viewing the contents of SDF
files 1453
zooming to features 1140
View Query Statement dialog box 1610
viewing 474, 746, 914, 916, 1048
coordinate system assignment 151
database tables 1048
drawing objects in attached drawings
for maps 746
external data for drawing
objects 1048
in 3D 1196
map book properties 1399
map book tiles 1399
map books 13971398
metadata 1486
raster image information 474
save back extents 170
schemas 609
source drawing information 172
source drawings for maps 746
statistics for source drawings 172
topology data 914
topology statistics 916
using Quick View 746
views
database 603
viewscale expressions 1545
viewtwist expressions 1545
Visual FoxPro
attaching database to drawing 209
setting default version 243
VML (Vector Markup Language)
files 1449
exporting 1405
exporting to 1449
VPF (Vector Product Format)
importing as folder 269
VPF (Vector Product Format) files
importing 381, 416417
W
walk through for surfaces 1196
water data
samples 63
water symbols
samples 69
watersheds 836
creating polygon topology for 836
weather data
purchasing 72
Web Feature Service (WFS) 346
adding feature data to maps 348
metadata for 1486
provider capabilities for maps 346
Web Map Service (WMS)
adding images to maps 447
specifying version 447
making background transparent 447
metadata for 1486
provider capabilities 445
specifying format 447
web pages
exporting to 1449
publishing maps as 1374
web-based raster images 445
weeding 814, 819
and bulge 816
and supplementing factors 816
defined 816
lines with Drawing Cleanup 814,
819
polylines 819
wells
creating topology for 827
WFS
video 346
WFS (Web Feature Service) 346
adding feature data to maps 348
metadata for 1486
provider capabilities for maps 346
schemas 581
working with data 582
Index | 2153
While activities
for workflows 2025
Who Has It Information dialog box 1889
widening conversion
and Bulk Copy 623
width
altering with queries 1261
digitizing 138
wild-card characters 1537
using in dialog boxes 1537
using in expressions 1553
windows
finding all objects in 1241
Windows authentication
and SQL Server Spatial 326
WKT
and coordinate systems 590
WMS
video 305, 437, 445
WMS (Web Map Service)
adding images to maps 437, 447
adding surfaces to maps 441
adding with Data Connect 440
metadata for 1486
provider capabilities 445
Workflow Designer
changing the display 289
Workflow Designer parameter dialog
box 2022, 2025
Workflow Designer window 2022
workflows
activity dialog boxes 2025
activity parameters 281
Add Feature Layer activity 2028
Add Group activity 2029
Add Map activity 2030
binding parameters 281
Change Feature Layer Properties
activity 2030
Change Feature Layer Symbol
activity 2031
Change Group Properties
activity 2033
Connect To Data Store activity 2034
Create Buffer Layer activity 2036
creating 281, 284, 287
Display Feature Attributes
activity 2037
editing 284
for automating activities 275
Highlight Features activity 2038
List Current Connections
activity 2039
List Feature Classes activity 2039
List Feature Layer Properties
activity 2040
Load Layer File activity 2041
overview 275
parallel and sequenced
activities 281
Perform Overlay activity 2041
Remove Connection activity 2043
Remove Feature Layer activity 2044
Remove Group activity 20442045
Remove Highlighting activity 2038
Run AutoCAD Command
activity 2046
Run Workflow activity 2047
running 278
Save Layer File activity 2048
Select Features activity 2049
settings 289
Switch Map activity 2050
utility activities 2025
Workflow Designer 2022
Zoom To Extents activity 2050
working offline 696, 722
and checking out features 696
workspaces 8485
creating for AutoCAD Map 3D 85
in AutoCAD Map 3D 84
World Coordinate System (WCS) 1154
X
XLS files
attaching to drawing 209
setting default version 243
XMI files
importing as schemas 608
XML files 608
exporting schemas as 608
2154 | Index
for object class definitions 129
importing as schemas 608
xrefs 157
and drawings 157
querying 1300
XSCALE variable 1546
Y
YSCALE variable 1546
Z
Z dimensions 562, 610
zero-length objects 815
identifying and removing 815
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box 2014
Zoom Scale dialog box 1697
Zoom To Extents activity
for workflows 2050
zooming 745
Display Manager 670
surfaces in 3D 1196
to drawing extents 745
to raster image extents 674
using Data Table 1141
zooming to features
video 1140
ZSCALE variable 1546
Index | 2155
2156